Orcaflex Tutorial

w
1

OrcaFlex Manual

Version 9.1a

Orcina Ltd.
Daltongate
Ulverston
Cumbria
LA12 7AJ
UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 1229 584742
Fax: +44 (0) 1229 587191
Email: orcina@orcina.com
Web Site: www.orcina.com
w
Contents
3
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION 11
1.1 Installing OrcaFlex 11
1.2 Running OrcaFlex 13
1.3 Parallel Processing 14
1.4 Distributed OrcaFlex 15
1.5 Orcina Licence Monitor 15
1.6 Demonstration Version 15
1.7 Validation and QA 16
1.8 Orcina 16
1.9 References and Links 16
2 TUTORIAL 21
2.1 Getting Started 21
2.2 Building a Simple System 21
2.3 Adding a Line 21
2.4 Adjusting the View 22
2.5 Static Analysis 23
2.6 Dynamic Analysis 23
2.7 Multiple Views 24
2.8 Looking at Results 24
2.9 Getting Output 24
2.10 Input Data 24
3 EXAMPLES 27
3.1 Introduction 27
4 USER INTERFACE 29
4.1 Introduction 29
4.1.1 Program Windows 29
4.1.2 The Model 29
4.1.3 Model Browser 30
4.1.4 Model Browser Views 32
4.1.5 Move Selected Objects Wizard 32
4.1.6 Libraries 33
4.1.7 Model States 38
4.1.8 Using Model States 40
Contents
w

4
4.1.9 Toolbar 40
4.1.10 Status Bar 41
4.1.11 Mouse and Keyboard Actions 42
4.2 Menus 45
4.2.1 File Menu 45
4.2.2 Edit Menu 47
4.2.3 Model Menu 47
4.2.4 Calculation Menu 49
4.2.5 View Menu 50
4.2.6 Replay Menu 51
4.2.7 Graph Menu 52
4.2.8 Results Menu 52
4.2.9 Tools Menu 52
4.2.10 Workspace Menu 53
4.2.11 Window Menu 53
4.2.12 Help Menu 54
4.3 3D Views 54
4.3.1 View Parameters 56
4.3.2 View Control 56
4.3.3 Navigating in 3D Views 57
4.3.4 Shaded Graphics 58
4.3.5 How Objects are Drawn 59
4.3.6 Selecting Objects 61
4.3.7 Creating and Destroying Objects 61
4.3.8 Dragging Objects 62
4.3.9 Connecting Objects 62
4.3.10 Printing, Copying and Exporting Views 62
4.4 Replays 62
4.4.1 Replay Parameters 63
4.4.2 Replay Control 64
4.4.3 Custom Replays 65
4.4.4 Custom Replay Wizard 65
4.4.5 Superimpose Times 66
4.5 Data Forms 67
4.5.1 Data Fields 68
4.5.2 Data Form Editing 68
4.6 Results 70
4.6.1 Producing Results 70
4.6.2 Selecting Variables 71
4.6.3 Summary and Full Results 72
4.6.4 Statistics 72
4.6.5 Linked Statistics 72
4.6.6 Offset Tables 73
4.6.7 Line Clashing Report 73
4.6.8 Time History and XY Graphs 74
w
Contents
5
4.6.9 Range Graphs 75
4.6.10 Offset Graphs 76
4.6.11 Spectral Response Graphs 76
4.6.12 Presenting OrcaFlex Results 77
4.7 Graphs 77
4.7.1 Modifying Graphs 78
4.8 Spreadsheets 79
4.9 Text Windows 79
4.10 Workspaces 80
4.11 Comparing Data 80
4.12 Preferences 81
4.13 Printing and Exporting 83
5 AUTOMATION 85
5.1 Introduction 85
5.2 Postprocessing 85
5.2.1 Introduction 85
5.2.2 OrcaFlex Spreadsheet 85
5.2.3 Instruction Format 87
5.2.4 Predefined commands 89
5.2.5 Basic commands 89
5.2.6 Time History and related commands 90
5.2.7 Range Graph commands 91
5.2.8 Data commands 91
5.2.9 Instructions Wizard 92
5.2.10 Duplicate Instructions 96
5.2.11 Tips and Tricks 98
5.2.12 Error Handling 99
5.3 Batch Processing 99
5.3.1 Introduction 99
5.3.2 Script Files 100
5.3.3 Script Syntax 101
5.3.4 Script Commands 101
5.3.5 Examples of setting data 104
5.3.6 Handling Script Errors 108
5.3.7 Obtaining Variable Names 109
5.3.8 Automating Script Generation 109
6 THEORY 113
6.1 Coordinate Systems 113
6.2 Direction Conventions 114
6.3 Object Connections 115
Contents
w

6
6.4 Interpolation Methods 115
6.5 Static Analysis 117
6.5.1 Line Statics 118
6.5.2 Buoy and Vessel Statics 122
6.5.3 Vessel Multiple Statics 122
6.6 Dynamic Analysis 123
6.6.1 Calculation Method 124
6.6.2 Ramping 126
6.7 Friction Theory 127
6.8 Spectral Response Analysis 130
6.9 Environment Theory 131
6.9.1 Buoyancy Variation with Depth 131
6.9.2 Current Theory 131
6.9.3 Seabed Theory 132
6.9.4 Morison's Equation 133
6.9.5 Waves 134
6.10 Vessel Theory 140
6.10.1 Vessel Rotations 140
6.10.2 RAOs and Phases 141
6.10.3 RAO Quality Checks 142
6.10.4 Drag Loads 144
6.10.5 Stiffness, Added Mass and Damping 146
6.10.6 Impulse Response and Convolution 148
6.10.7 Wave Drift Loads 148
6.11 Line Theory 150
6.11.1 Overview 150
6.11.2 Structural Model Details 152
6.11.3 Calculation Stages 153
6.11.4 Calculation Stage 1 Tension Forces 154
6.11.5 Calculation Stage 2 Bend Moments 155
6.11.6 Calculation Stage 3 Shear Forces 157
6.11.7 Calculation Stage 4 Torsion Moments 157
6.11.8 Calculation Stage 5 Total Load 158
6.11.9 Line End Orientation 159
6.11.10 Line Local Orientation 160
6.11.11 Treatment of Compression 160
6.11.12 Contents Flow Effects 160
6.11.13 Line Pressure Effects 162
6.11.14 Pipe Stress Calculation 163
6.11.15 Pipe Stress Matrix 164
6.11.16 Hydrodynamic and Aerodynamic Loads 166
6.11.17 Drag Chains 168
6.11.18 Line End Conditions 170
6.11.19 Interaction with the Sea Surface 170
w
Contents
7
6.11.20 Interaction with Seabed and Shapes 171
6.11.21 Clashing 171
6.11.22 Modal Analysis 174
6.12 6D Buoy Theory 175
6.12.1 Overview 175
6.12.2 Lumped Buoy Added Mass, Damping and Drag 177
6.12.3 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Added Mass and Damping 178
6.12.4 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Drag 180
6.12.5 Contact Forces 182
6.13 3D Buoy Theory 183
6.14 Winch Theory 184
6.15 Shape Theory 186
7 SYSTEM MODELLING - DATA AND RESULTS 189
7.1 Modelling Introduction 189
7.2 Data in Time History Files 190
7.3 Variable Data 191
7.3.1 External Functions 192
7.4 General Data 194
7.4.1 Statics 194
7.4.2 Dynamics 196
7.4.3 Integration & Time Steps 197
7.4.4 Explicit Integration 198
7.4.5 Implicit Integration 199
7.4.6 Numerical Damping 200
7.4.7 Response Calculation 200
7.4.8 Properties Report 201
7.4.9 Drawing 201
7.4.10 Results 201
7.5 Environment 202
7.5.1 Sea Data 202
7.5.2 Sea Density Data 203
7.5.3 Seabed Data 204
7.5.4 Wave Data 206
7.5.5 Data for Regular Waves 207
7.5.6 Data for Random Waves 208
7.5.7 Data for JONSWAP and ISSC Spectra 208
7.5.8 Data for OchiHubble Spectrum 209
7.5.9 Data for Torsethaugen Spectrum 210
7.5.10 Data for User Defined Spectrum 210
7.5.11 Data for Time History Waves 210
7.5.12 Data for User Specified Components 211
7.5.13 Data for Response Calculation 212
7.5.14 Waves Preview 212
Contents
w

8
7.5.15 Setting up a Random Sea 213
7.5.16 Current Data 216
7.5.17 Wind Data 217
7.5.18 Drawing Data 219
7.5.20 Results 220
7.5.21 Wave Scatter Conversion 221
7.6 Solid Friction Coefficients Data 224
7.7 Vessels 225
7.7.1 Vessel Data 226
7.7.2 Vessel Types 235
7.7.3 Modelling Vessel Slow Drift 255
7.7.4 Vessel Response Reports 257
7.7.5 Vessel Results 259
7.8 Lines 261
7.8.1 Line Data 263
7.8.2 Rayleigh Damping Coefficients 275
7.8.3 Attachments 276
7.8.4 Line Types 280
7.8.5 Line Results 287
7.8.6 Drag Chain Results 298
7.8.7 Modal Analysis 298
7.8.8 Line Setup Wizard 300
7.8.9 Line Type Wizard 302
7.8.10 Chain 303
7.8.11 Rope/Wire 308
7.8.12 Line with Floats 311
7.8.13 Homogeneous Pipe 316
7.8.14 Hoses and Umbilicals 318
7.8.15 Line Ends 320
7.8.16 Modelling Compression in Flexibles 323
7.9 6D Buoys 324
7.9.1 Wings 325
7.9.2 Common Data 326
7.9.3 Applied Loads 328
7.9.4 Wing Data 328
7.9.5 Wing Type Data 329
7.9.6 Lumped Buoy Properties 331
7.9.7 Lumped Buoy Drawing Data 332
7.9.8 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Properties 333
7.9.9 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Added Mass and Damping 335
7.9.10 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Drag 336
7.9.11 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Drawing 337
7.9.12 Shaded Drawing 338
7.9.13 Other uses 338
w
Contents
9
7.9.16 Results 339
7.9.17 Buoy Hydrodynamics 341
7.9.18 Hydrodynamic Properties of a Rectangular Box 342
7.9.19 Modelling a SurfacePiercing Buoy 344
7.10 3D Buoys 347
7.10.1 Data 348
7.10.3 Results 349
7.11 Winches 350
7.11.1 Data 351
7.11.2 Wire Properties 352
7.11.3 Control 352
7.11.4 Control by Stage 352
7.11.5 Control by Whole Simulation 353
7.11.6 Drive Unit 354
7.11.8 Results 354
7.12 Links 355
7.12.1 Data 356
7.12.2 Results 357
7.13 Shapes 358
7.13.1 Data 359
7.13.2 Blocks 360
7.13.3 Cylinders 361
7.13.4 Curved Plates 362
7.13.5 Planes 363
7.13.6 Drawing 363
7.13.7 Results 364
7.14 All Objects Data Form 365
8 FATIGUE ANALYSIS 367
8.1 Commands 368
8.2 Data 368
8.3 Common Load Cases Data 369
8.4 Load Cases Data for Regular Analysis 370
8.5 Load Cases Data for Rainflow Analysis 370
8.6 Load Cases Data for Spectral Analysis 370
8.7 Stress Components Data 372
8.8 Analysis Data 373
8.9 SN Curves 373
Contents
w

10
8.10 Integration Parameters 374
8.11 Results 374
8.12 Fatigue Points 375
8.13 How Damage is Calculated 376
9 VIV TOOLBOX 379
9.1 Frequency Domain Models 380
9.1.1 VIVA 380
9.1.2 SHEAR7 384
9.2 Time Domain Models 389
9.2.1 Wake Oscillator Models 392
9.2.2 Vortex Tracking Models 395
9.2.3 VIV Drawing 401

w
Introduction, Installing OrcaFlex
11
1 INTRODUCTION
Welcome to OrcaFlex (version 9.1a), a marine dynamics program developed by Orcina for static and dynamic analysis of
a wide range of offshore systems, including all types of marine risers (rigid and flexible), global analysis, moorings,
installation and towed systems.
OrcaFlex provides fast and accurate analysis of catenary systems such as flexible risers and umbilical cables under wave
and current loads and externally imposed motions. OrcaFlex makes extensive use of graphics to assist understanding.
The program can be operated in batch mode for routine analysis work and there are also special facilities for post
processing your results including fully integrated fatigue analysis capabilities.
OrcaFlex is a fully 3D nonlinear time domain finite element program capable of dealing with arbitrarily large
deflections of the flexible from the initial configuration. A lumped mass element is used which greatly simplifies the
mathematical formulation and allows quick and efficient development of the program to include additional force terms
and constraints on the system in response to new engineering requirements.
In addition to the time domain features, modal analysis can be performed for individual lines and RAOs can be
calculated for any results variable using the Spectral Response Analysis feature.
OrcaFlex is also used for applications in the Defence, Oceanography and Renewable energy sectors. OrcaFlex is fully 3D
and can handle multiline systems, floating lines, line dynamics after release, etc. Inputs include ship motions, regular
and random waves. Results output includes animated replay plus full graphical and numerical presentation.
If you are new to OrcaFlex then please see the tutorial and examples.
For further details of OrcaFlex and our other software, please contact Orcina or your Orcina agent.
Copyright notice
Copyright Orcina Ltd. 19872007. All rights reserved.
1.1 INSTALLING ORCAFLEX
Hardware Requirements
OrcaFlex can be installed and run on any computer that has:
Windows 98, ME, NT 4, 2000, XP, Vista. Note that the shaded graphics facility is not available on NT 4 because
DirectX 9 is not available on that platform.
At least 32MB of memory.
At least 40MB of free disk space.
If you are using small fonts (96dpi) the screen resolution must be at least 1024 x 768. If you are using large fonts
(120dpi)the screen resolution must be at least 1280 x 1024.
However, OrcaFlex is a very powerful package and to get the best results we would recommend:
A powerful processor with fast floating point and memory performance. This is the most important factor since
OrcaFlex is a computationintensive program and simulation run times can be long for complex models.
At least 512MB of memory. This is less important than processor performance but some aspects of OrcaFlex do
perform better when more memory is available. In addition, having plenty of memory allows you to use other
applications efficiently at the same time as running OrcaFlex simulations.
As much disk space as you require to store simulation files. Simulation files vary in size, but can be 10's of
megabytes each for complex models.
A screen resolution of 1280 X 1024 or greater and a 16bit or greater colour palette.
A DirectX 9 compatible graphics card with at least 256MB memory for the most effective use with the shaded
graphics facility.
Microsoft Excel in order to use the OrcaFlex automation facilities.
Introduction, Installing OrcaFlex
w

12
Windows XP or Vista.
For up to date information on hardware choice for OrcaFlex please refer to our website at www.orcina.com/Support.
Installation
To install OrcaFlex:
Log on with Administrator privileges (this is not required if you are using Windows 95, 98 or ME).
If installing from CD, insert the OrcaFlex CD and run the Autorun.exe program on the CD (on many machines this
program will run automatically when you insert the CD). Then select 'Install'.
If you have received OrcaFlex by email or from the web you should have the OrcaFlex installation program
OrcaFlex.msi. You will also need licence files (*.lic) for each dongle that you want to use (if you have not received
them you might be able to use the licence files from your previous OrcaFlex CD). Place the licence files and the file
OrcaFlex.msi together in a directory on your machine and then run OrcaFlex.msi.
You will also need to install the OrcaFlex dongle supplied by Orcina when you purchased or leased OrcaFlex. See
below for details.
For further details, including information on network and silent installation, see the ReadMe file on the OrcaFlex CD. If
you have any difficulty installing OrcaFlex please contact Orcina or your Orcina agent.
Orcina Shell Extension
When you install OrcaFlex you are asked whether you also want to install the Orcina Shell Extension. Installing this tells
Windows about the OrcaFlex data and simulation file types (.dat and .sim) and associates them with OrcaFlex. You can
then start OrcaFlex and open an OrcaFlex file by simply doubleclicking the file. The shell extension also provides file
properties information in Explorer, such as which version of OrcaFlex wrote the file and the Comments text for the
model in the file. For details see the file CD:\OrcShlEx\ReadMe.htm on the OrcaFlex CD.
Installing the Dongle
OrcaFlex is supplied with a dongle, a small hardware device that must be attached to the machine, or else to the network
to which the machine is attached.
Note: The dongle is effectively your licence to run one copy (or more, if the dongle is enabled for more copies)
of OrcaFlex. It is, in essence, what you have purchased or leased, and it should be treated with
appropriate care and security. If you lose your dongle you cannot run OrcaFlex.
Warning: Orcina can normally resupply disks or manuals (a charge being made to cover costs) if they are lost or
damaged. But we can only supply a new dongle in the case where the dongle has failed and the old
dongle is first returned to us.
Dongles labelled 'Hxxx' (where xxx is the dongle number) must be plugged into the machine on which OrcaFlex is run.
Dongles labelled 'Nxxx' can be used in the same way as 'Hxxx' dongles, but they can also be used over a computer
network, allowing several users to share the program. In the latter case the dongle should be installed by your network
administrator; instructions can be found in the Dongle directory of the OrcaFlex CD.
Types of Dongle
Dongles are available for two types of connector for connection to a parallel port or to a USB port. The two types have
exactly the same facilities (the difference is simply whether they are connected to a parallel port or a USB port) but
there are pros and cons of the two types:
The new USB port dongles may not suit if you are using older machines or operating systems. This is because some
older machines may not have a USB port. Also, Windows NT4 and early versions of Windows 95 (prior to OSR 2.1)
do not support USB devices without modification. Windows 98, ME and 2000, XP all support USB devices (as will
future versions of Windows).
On the other hand USB ports are a more modern and better technology and are taking over from the old parallel
port. All recent machines we have seen have USB ports and indeed some portable/laptop computers now have a
USB port and no parallel port.
w
Introduction, Running OrcaFlex
13
USB ports are designed to be capable of having multiple devices attached to one port, so you can plug in the USB
dongle and other devices (printers, plotters, etc.) and they won't interfere with each other. The parallel port, on the
other hand, wasn't originally designed with multiple devices in mind, so dongle suppliers had to use nonstandard
interfacing methods to try to make the dongle transparent to other devices. This is not always successful and we
have seen a few cases where a printer could not be used on the same parallel port as the dongle. This problem will
not arise with USB dongles.
Parallel Port Dongles
Parallel port dongles have 25pin connectors. The computer side of the dongle has a 25pin male connector that plugs
into the standard PC parallel port, which has a female connector. Please take care not to insert the dongle into a serial
port, which is sometimes a 25pin male connector on the back of the computer; no harm should occur, but the program
will not be able to run. If the parallel port is also needed for another device such as a printer, then the dongle should be
plugged into the computer and the printer then plugged into the back of the dongle. The dongle is transparent and
should not interfere with signals passing through it to other devices.
If you have any difficulties fitting the dongle, please double check that it is fitted to the right port and that it is the
correct way round.
Dongle Troubleshooting
We supply, with OrcaFlex, a dongle utility and troubleshooting program called OrcaDongle. If OrcaFlex cannot find the
dongle then you can use this program to check various things and hopefully find the cause of the problem. For details
see the OrcaDongle help file.
The OrcaDongle program is included on the OrcaFlex CD and is also available for download from our website at
www.orcina.com/Support/Dongle. If you need further help then please contact Orcina.
1.2 RUNNING ORCAFLEX
A shortcut to run OrcaFlex is set up on the Start menu when you install OrcaFlex (see Start\Programs\Orcina
Software\OrcaFlex).
This shortcut passes no parameters to OrcaFlex so it gives the default startup behaviour; see below. If this is not
suitable you can configure the startup behaviour using commandline parameters, for example by setting up your own
shortcuts with particular parameter settings.
Default Start-up
OrcaFlex has two basic modules: full OrcaFlex and staticsonly OrcaFlex. A full OrcaFlex licence is needed for dynamic
analysis.
When you run OrcaFlex it looks for an Orcina dongle from which it can claim an OrcaFlex licence (either a full licence or
a staticsonly licence). By default, it first looks for a licence on a local dongle (i.e. one in local mode and connected to the
local machine) and if none is found then it looks for a licence on a network dongle (i.e. one in network mode and
accessed via a licence manager over the network). This default behaviour can be changed by commandline parameters.
If OrcaFlex finds a network dongle and there is a choice of which licences to claim from it, then OrcaFlex displays a
Choose Modules dialog to ask you which modules you want to claim. This helps you share the licences with other users
of that network dongle. For example if the network dongle contains both a full licence and a staticsonly licence then you
can choose to use the staticsonly licence, if that is all you need, so that the full licence is left free for others to use when
you do not need it yourself. The Choose Modules dialog can be suppressed using commandline parameters.
Command Line Parameters
OrcaFlex can accept various parameters on the command line to modify the way it starts up. The syntax is:
OrcaFlex.exe Filename Option1 Option2 ... etc.
Filename is optional. If present it should be the name of an OrcaFlex data file (.dat) or simulation file (.sim) and after
starting up OrcaFlex will automatically open that file.
Introduction, Parallel Processing
w

14
Option1, Option2 etc. are optional parameters that allow you configure the startup behaviour. They can be any of the
following switches. For the first character of an option switch, the hyphen character '' can be used as an alternative to
the '/' character.
Dongle Search switches
By default the program searches first for a licence on a local dongle and then for a licence on a network dongle. The
following switches allow you to modify this default behaviour.
/LocalDongle Only search for licences on a local dongle. No search will be made for network dongles.
/NetworkDongle Only search for licences on a network dongle. Any local dongle will be ignored. This can be useful if
you have a local dongle but want to use a network dongle that has licences for more modules.
Module Choice switch
This switch is only relevant if the dongle found is a network dongle and there is a choice of licences to claim from that
dongle. You can specify your choice using the following command line switch:
/DisableDynamics Choose the staticsonly basic licence. This is sometimes useful when using a network dongle
since it allows you to leave full licences free for other users when you only need a staticsonly licence.
If you do not specify all the choices then the program displays the Choose Modules dialog to ask for your remaining
choices. You can suppress this dialog using the following switch.
/DisableInteractiveStartup Do not display the Choose Modules dialog. The program behaves the same as if the user
clicks OK on that dialog without changing any module choices.
Batch Calculation switches
These switches allow you to instruct OrcaFlex to start a batch calculation as soon as the program has loaded. The
following switches are available:
/Batch Start a batch calculation as soon as the program has loaded. The batch calculation will contain all the files
specified on the command line (you can have more than one) in the order in which they are specified. You can use
relative paths which will be relative to the working directory.
/CloseAfterBatch Instructs the program to close once the batch is complete.
Process Priority switches
These switches determine the processing priority of OrcaFlex. Using one of these switches is equivalent to setting the
priority in the task manager or from the Set Process Priority form. The available switches are /RealtimePriority,
/HighPriority, /AboveNormalPriority, /NormalPriority, /BelowNormalPriority, /LowPriority.
ThickLines switch
The /ThickLines switch allows you to specify a minimum thickness for lines drawn on OrcaFlex 3D View windows. For
example using the switch /ThickLines=5 forces OrcaFlex to draw all lines at a thickness of at least 5. If no value is
specified (i.e. the switch is /ThickLines) then the minimum thickness is taken to be 2.
This switch has been added to make OrcaFlex 3D Views clearer when projected onto a large screen.
ThreadCount switch
The /ThreadCount switch allows you to set the number of execution threads used by OrcaFlex for parallel processing.
For example /ThreadCount=1 forces OrcaFlex to use a single execution thread which has the effect of disabling parallel
processing.
1.3 PARALLEL PROCESSING
Machines with multiple processors or processors with multiple cores are becoming increasingly common. OrcaFlex can
make full use of the additional processing capacity afforded by such machines.
w
Introduction, Distributed OrcaFlex
15
OrcaFlex performs the calculations of the model's Line objects in parallel. This means that performance is only
improved for models with more than one Line object we intend to remove this restriction in a future release of the
software. However, for models with more than one Line performance is significantly improved.
For up to date information on hardware choice for OrcaFlex please refer to our website at www.orcina.com/Support
Thread count
OrcaFlex manages a number of execution threads to perform the parallel calculations. The number of these threads (the
thread count) defaults to the number of physical processor cores available on your machine as reported by the
operating system. This default will work well for most cases. Should you wish to change it you can use the Tools | Set
Thread Count menu item. The thread count can also be controlled by a command line switch.
Hyperthreading
Some Intel processors offer a technology called hyperthreading. Such processors can process multiple execution threads
in parallel by making use of underused resources on the processor. Hyperthreaded processors appear to the operating
system as 2 distinct, logical processors.
Sadly, the real world performance of such chips does not live up to the marketing hype. At best this technology can give
improvements of around 1020%. However, the performance of hyperthreading under OrcaFlex varies considerably
with the OrcaFlex model being analysed. In the worst cases using hyperthreading results in performance twice as slow
as without!
For this reason we recommend that you don't attempt to use hyperthreading when running OrcaFlex. By default
OrcaFlex will use as many threads as there are true physical cores available to your system.
To help understand this consider a dual processor, dual core machine with hyperthreading support. The operating
system will recognise 8 processors. Of these processors, 4 are true physical processor cores and the other 4 are virtual
hyperthreaded processors. Accordingly OrcaFlex will default to using 4 calculation threads.
1.4 DISTRIBUTED ORCAFLEX
Distributed OrcaFlex is a suite of programs that enables a collection of networked, OrcaFlex licensed computers to run
OrcaFlex jobs, transparently, using spare processor time. For more information about Distributed OrcaFlex please refer
to our website at www.orcina.com/Support/DistributedOrcaFlex. Distributed OrcaFlex can be downloaded from this
address.
OrcaFlex can also make use of machines with multiple processors using parallel processing technology.
1.5 ORCINA LICENCE MONITOR
The Orcina Licence Monitor (OLM) is a service that monitors the current number of OrcaFlex licences claimed on a
network in real time. Other programs that use the OrcaFlex programming interface (OrcFxAPI) such as Distributed
OrcaFlex and the OrcaFlex spreadsheet are also monitored. You can obtain information on each licence claimed that
includes:
Network information: the computer name, network address and the user name.
Licence information: the dongle name, the dongle type (network or local) and the time the licence was claimed.
Program information: which modules are being used, the version, and the location of the program which has
claimed the licence (usually this is OrcaFlex.exe but it can be Excel.exe for the OrcaFlex spreadsheet for example).
OLM can be downloaded from our website at www.orcina.com/Support/OrcinaLicenceMonitor.
1.6 DEMONSTRATION VERSION
For an overview of OrcaFlex, see the Introduction topic and the tutorial.
The demonstration version of OrcaFlex has some facilities disabled you cannot calculate statics or run simulation, and
you cannot save files, print, export or copy to the clipboard. Otherwise the demonstration version is just like the full
version, so it allows you to see exactly how the program works.
Introduction, Validation and QA
w

16
In particular the demonstration version allows you to open any prepared OrcaFlex data or simulation file. If you open a
simulation file then you can then examine the results, see replays of the motion etc. There are numerous example files
provided on the demonstration CD.
If you have the full version of OrcaFlex then you can use the demonstration version to show your customers your
OrcaFlex models and results for their system. To do this, give them the demonstration version and copies of your
OrcaFlex simulation files. The demonstration version can be found on your OrcaFlex CD see CD:\Demo_CD\ReadMe.
1.7 VALIDATION AND QA
The OrcaFlex validation documents are available from our website at
www.orcina.com/SoftwareProducts/OrcaFlex/Validation.
1.8 ORCINA
Orcina is a creative engineering software and consultancy company staffed by mechanical engineers, naval architects,
mathematicians and software engineers with long experience in such demanding environments as the offshore, marine
and nuclear industries. As well as developing engineering software, we offer a wide range of analysis and design
services with particular strength in dynamics, hydrodynamics, fluid mechanics and mathematical modelling.
Contact Details
Orcina Ltd.
Daltongate
Ulverston
Cumbria
LA12 7AJ
UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 1229 584742
Fax: +44 (0) 1229 587191
Email: orcina@orcina.com
Web Site: www.orcina.com
Orcina Agents
We have agents in many parts of the world. For details please refer to our website: www.orcina.com/ContactOrcina.
1.9 REFERENCES AND LINKS
References
API, 1993. API Recommended Practice 2AWSD (RP 2AWSD). American Petroleum Institute.
API. Comparison of Analyses of Marine Drilling Risers. API Bulletin. 2J.
Barltrop N D P, and Adams A J, 1991. Dynamics of fixed marine structures. Butterworth Heinemann for MTD. 3rd Edition.
Batchelor G K, 1967. An introduction to fluid dynamics. Cambridge University Press.
Carter D J T, 1982. Prediction of Wave height and Period for a Constant Wind Velocity Using the JONSWAP Results,
Ocean Engineering, 9, no. 1, 1733.
Casarella M J and Parsons M, 1970. Cable Systems Under Hydrodynamic Loading. Marine Technology Society Journal 4,
No. 4, 2744.
Chapman D A, 1984. Towed Cable Behaviour During Ship Turning Manoeuvres. Ocean Engineering. 11, No. 4.
Chung J and Hulbert G M, 1993. A time integration algorithm for structural dynamics with improved numerical
dissipation: The generalized method. ASME Journal of Applied Mechanics. 60, 371375.
CMPT, 1998. Floating structures: A guide for design and analysis. Edited by Barltrop N D P. Centre for Marine and
Petroleum Technology publication 101/98, Oilfield Publications Limited.
w
Introduction, References and Links
17
Cummins W E, 1962. The impulse response function and ship motions. Schiffstechnik, 9, 101109.
Dean R G, 1965. Stream function representation of nonlinear ocean waves. J. Geophys. Res.70, 45614572.
Dirlik T, 1985. Application of computers in Fatigue Analysis. PhD Thesis University of Warwick.
DNV, 1991. Environmental Conditions and Environmental Loads Classification Notes 30.5. March.
ESDU 71016. Fluid forces, pressures and moments on rectangular blocks. ESDU 71016 ESDU International, London.
ESDU 80025. Mean forces, pressures and flow field velocities for circular cylindrical structures: Single cylinder with
twodimensional flow. ESDU 80025 ESDU International, London.
Falco M, Fossati F and Resta F, 1999. On the vortex induced vibration of submarine cables: Design optimization of
wrapped cables for controlling vibrations. 3
rd
International Symposium on Cable Dynamics, Trondheim, Norway.
Faltinsen O M, 1990. Sea loads on ships and offshore structures. Cambridge University Press.
Fenton J D, 1979. A highorder cnoidal wave theory. J. Fluid Mech. 94, 129161.
Fenton J D, 1985. A fifthorder Stokes theory for steady waves. J. Waterway, Port, Coastal & Ocean Eng. ASCE. 111, 216
234.
Fenton J D, 1990. Nonlinear wave theories. Chapter in "The Sea Volume 9: Ocean Engineering Science", edited by B. Le
MeHaute and D. M. Hanes. Wiley: New York. 325.
Fenton J D, 1995. Personal communication preprint of chapter in forthcoming book on cnoidal wave theory.
Gregory R W and Paidoussis M P, 1996. Unstable oscillation of tubular cantilevers conveying fluid: Part 1:Theory. Proc.
R. Soc. 293 Series A, 512527.
Hartnup G C, Airey R G and Fraser J M, 1987. Model Basin Testing of Flexible Marine Risers. OMAE Houston.
Hoerner S F 1965. Fluid Dynamic Drag, Published by the author at Hoerner Fluid Dynamics, NJ 08723, USA.
Isherwood R M, 1987. A Revised Parameterisation of the JONSWAP Spectrum. Applied Ocean Research, 9, No. 1
(January), 4750.
Iwan W D, 1981. The vortexinduced oscillation of nonuniform structural systems. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 79,
291301.
Iwan W D and Blevins R D, 1974. A Model for Vortex Induced Oscillation of Structures. Journal of Applied Mechanics,
September 1974, 581586.
Kotik J and Mangulis V, 1962. On the KramersKronig relations for ship motions. Int. Shipbuilding Progress, 9, No. 97,
361368.
Larsen C M, 1991. Flexible Riser Analysis Comparison of Results from Computer Programs. Marine Structures, Elsevier
Applied Science.
LonguetHiggins M S, 1983. On the joint distribution of wave periods and amplitudes in a random wave field.
Proceedings Royal Society London, Series A, Mathematical and Physical Sciences.389, 241258.
Maddox S J, 1998. Fatigue strength of welded structures. Woodhead Publishing Ltd, ISBN 1 85573 013 8.
Morison J R, O'Brien M D, Johnson J W, and Schaaf S A, 1950. The force exerted by surface waves on piles. Petrol Trans
AIME. 189.
Mueller H F, 1968. Hydrodynamic forces and moments of streamlined bodies of revolution at large incidence.
Schiffstechnik. 15, 99104.
Newman J N. 1974. Secondorder, slowlyvarying forces on vessels in irregular waves. Proc Int Symp Dynamics of Marine
Vehicles and Structures in Waves, Ed. Bishop RED and Price WG, Mech Eng Publications Ltd, London.
Newman J N, 1977. Marine Hydrodynamics, MIT Press.
NDP, 1995. Regulations relating to loadbearing structures in the petroleum activities. Norwegian Petroleum Directorate.
Ochi M K and Hubble E N, 1976. Sixparameter wave spectra; Proc 15th Coastal Engineering Conference, 301328.
w

18
Oil Companies International Marine Forum, 1994. Prediction of Wind and Current Loads on VLCCs, 2nd edition,
Witherby & Co., London.
Paidoussis M P, 1970. Dynamics of tubular cantilevers conveying fluid. J. Mechanical Engineering Science, 12, No 2, 85
103.
Paidoussis M P and Deksnis E B, 1970. Articulated models of cantilevers conveying fluid: The study of a paradox. J.
Mechanical Engineering Science, 12, No 4, 288300.
Paidoussis M P and Lathier B E, 1976. Dynamics of Timoshenko beams conveying fluid. J. Mechanical Engineering
Science, 18, No 4, 210220.
Palmer A C and Baldry J A S, 1974. Lateral buckling of axially constrained pipes. J. Petroleum Technology, Nov 1974,
12831284.
Pode L, 1951. Tables for Computing the Equilibrium Configuration of a Flexible Cable in a Uniform Stream. DTMB Report.
687.
Principles of Naval Architecture. Revised edition, edited by J P Comstock, 1967. Society of Naval Architects and Marine
Engineers, New York.
Puech A, 1984. The Use of Anchors in Offshore Petroleum Operations. Editions Technique
Rawson and Tupper, 1984. Basic Ship Theory 3rd ed, 2: Ship Dynamics and Design, 482. Longman Scientific & Technical
(Harlow).
Rienecker M M and Fenton J D, 1981. A Fourier approximation method for steady water waves. J. Fluid Mech. 104, 119
137.
Roark R J, 1965. Formulas for Stress and Strain. 4th edition McGraw-Hill.
Sarpkaya T, Shoaff R L, 1979. Inviscid Model of TwoDimensional Vortex Shedding by a Circular Cylinder. Article No. 79-
0281R, AIAA Journal,17, no. 11, 11931200.
Sarpkaya T, Shoaff R L, 1979. A discretevortex analysis of flow about stationary and transversely oscillating circular
cylinders. Report no. NPS-69SL79011, Naval Postgraduate School, Monterey, California.
Rychlik I, 1987. A new definition of the rainflow cycle counting method. Int. J. Fatigue 9, No 2, 119121.
Skjelbreia L, Hendrickson J, 1961. Fifth order gravity wave theory. Proc. 7th Conf. Coastal Eng. 184196.
Sobey R J, Goodwin P, Thieke R J and Westberg R J, 1987. Wave theories. J. Waterway, Port, Coastal & Ocean Eng. ASCE
113, 565587.
Sparks C, 1980. Le comportement mecanique des risers influence des principaux parametres. Revue de l'Institut Francais
du Petrol, 35, no. 5, 811.
Sparks C, 1983. Comportement mecanique des tuyaux influence de la traction, de la pression et du poids lineique :
Application aux risers. Revue de l'Institut Francais du Petrol 38, no. 4, 481.
Standing RG, Brendling WJ, Wilson D, 1987. Recent Developments in the Analysis of Wave Drift Forces, LowFrequency
Damping and Response. OTC paper 5456, 1987.
Taylor R and Valent P, 1984. Design Guide for Drag Embedment Anchors, Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory (USA), TN
No N1688.
Torsethaugen K and Haver S, 2004. Simplified double peak spectral model for ocean waves, Paper No. 2004JSC193,
ISOPE 2004 Touson, France.
Thwaites, 1960. Incompressible Aerodynamics, Oxford, 399401.
Timoshenko S,1955. Vibration Problems in Engineering, van Nostrand.
Triantafyllou M S, Yue D K P and Tein D Y S, 1994. Damping of moored floating structures. OTC 7489, Houston, 215224.
Tucker et al, 1984. Applied Ocean Research, 6, No 2.
Tucker M J, 1991. Waves in Ocean Engineering. Ellis Horwood Ltd. (Chichester).
w
19
Wichers J E W, 1979. Slowly oscillating mooring forces in single point mooring systems. BOSS79 (Second International
Conference on Behaviour of Offshore Structures).
Wichers J E W, 1988. A Simulation Model for a Single Point Moored Tanker. Delft University Thesis.
Young A D, 1989. Boundary Layers. BSP Professional Books, 8791.
Suppliers of frequency domain VIV software
SHEAR7
Atlantia Offshore Limited
1177 West Loop South, Suite 1200
Houston, TX 77027, USA
Attention: Dr. S. Leverette
Email: stevel@atlantia.com
Tel: 713 850 8885
Fax: 713 850 1178
VIVA
David Tein Consulting Engineers, Ltd.
11777 Katy Freeway, Suite 434 South
Houston, TX 77079
Phone: (281) 5310888
Fax: (281) 5315888
Email: dtcel@dtcel.com
w
Tutorial, Getting Started
21
2 TUTORIAL
2.1 GETTING STARTED
This short tutorial gives you a very quick run through the model building and results presentation features of OrcaFlex.
On completion of the tutorial we suggest that you also look through the prerun examples see Example Files.
On starting up OrcaFlex, you are presented with a 3D view showing just a blue line representing the sea surface and a
brown line representing the seabed. At the top of the screen are menus, a tool bar and a status bar arranged in the
manner common to most Windows software. As usual in Windows software, nearly all actions can be done in several
ways: here, to avoid confusion, we will usually only refer to one way of doing the action we want, generally using the
mouse.

Figure: The OrcaFlex main window
2.2 BUILDING A SIMPLE SYSTEM
To start with, we will build a simple system consisting of one line and one vessel only.
Using the mouse, click on the new vessel button on the toolbar. The cursor changes from the usual pointer to a
crosshair cursor to show that you have now selected a new object and OrcaFlex is waiting for you to decide where to
place it. Place the cursor anywhere on the screen and click the mouse button. A "ship" shape appears on screen,
positioned at the sea surface, and the cursor reverts to the pointer shape. To select the vessel, move the cursor close to
the vessel and click the mouse button the message box (near the top of the 3D view) will confirm when the vessel has
been selected. Now press and hold down the mouse button and move the mouse around. The vessel follows the mouse
horizontally, but remains at the sea surface. (To alter vessel vertical position, or other details, select the vessel with the
mouse, then double click to open the Vessel data window.)
2.3 ADDING A LINE
Now add a line. Using the mouse, click on the new line button . The crosshair cursor reappears move the mouse to
a point just to the right of the vessel and click. The line appears as a catenary loop at the mouse position. Move the
mouse to a point close to the left hand end of the line, press and hold down the mouse button and move the mouse
around. The end of the line moves around following the mouse, and the line is redrawn at each position. Release the
mouse button, move to the right hand end, click and drag. This time the right hand end of the line is dragged around. In
this way, you can put the ends of the lines roughly where you want them. (Final positioning to exact locations has to be
Tutorial, Adjusting the View
w

22
done by typing in the appropriate numbers select the line with the mouse and double click to bring up the line data
form.)
Move the line ends until the left hand end of the line is close to the bow of the ship, the right hand end lies above the
water and the line hangs down into the water.
At this point, the line has a default set of properties and both ends are at fixed positions relative to the Global origin. For
the moment we will leave the line properties (length, mass, etc.) at their default values, but we will connect the left hand
end to the ship. Do this as follows:
1. Click on the line near the left hand end, to select that end of the line; make sure you have selected the line, not the
vessel or the sea. The message box at the left hand end of the status bar tells you what is currently selected. If you
have selected the wrong thing, try again. (Note that you don't have to click at the end of the line in order to select it
anywhere in the left hand half of the line will select the left hand end. As a rule, it is better to choose a point well
away from any other object when selecting something with the mouse.)
2. Release the mouse and move it to the vessel, hold down the CTRL key and click. The message box will confirm the
connection and, to indicate the connection, the triangle at the end of the line will now be the same colour as the
vessel.
Now select the vessel again and drag it around with the mouse. The left hand end of the line now moves with the vessel.
Leave the vessel positioned roughly as before with the line in a slack catenary.
2.4 ADJUSTING THE VIEW
The default view of the system is an elevation of the global XZ plane you are looking horizontally along the positive Y
axis. The view direction (the direction you are looking) is shown in the Window Title bar in azimuth/elevation form
(azimuth=270; elevation=0). You can move your view point up, down, right or left, and you can zoom in or out, using the
view control buttons near the top left corner of the window. Click on each of the top 3 buttons in turn:
then click again with the SHIFT key held down. The SHIFT key reverses the action of the button. If you want to move the
view centre without rotating, use the scroll bars at the bottom and right edges of the window. By judicious use of the
buttons and scroll bars you should be able to find any view you like.
Alternatively, you can alter the view with the mouse. Hold down the ALT key and left mouse button and drag. A rectangle
on screen shows the area which will be zoomed to fill the window when the mouse button is released. SHIFT+ALT+left
mouse button zooms out the existing view shrinks to fit in the rectangle.
Warning: OrcaFlex will allow you to look up at the model from underneath, effectively from under the seabed!
Because the view is isometric and all lines are visible, it is not always apparent that this has occurred.
When this has happened, the elevation angle is shown as negative in the title bar.
There are three shortcut keys which are particularly useful for controlling the view. For example CTRL+P gives a plan
view from above; CTRL+E gives an elevation; CTRL+Q rotates the view through 90 about the vertical axis. (CTRL+P and
CTRL+E leave the view azimuth unchanged.)
Now click the button on the 3D View to bring up the Edit View Parameters form. This gives a more precise way of
controlling the view and is particularly useful if you want to arrange exactly the same view of 2 different models say 2
alternative configurations for a particular riser system. Edit the view parameters if you wish by positioning the cursor in
the appropriate box and editing as required.
If you should accidentally lose the model completely from view (perhaps by zooming in too close, or moving the view
centre too far) there are a number of ways of retrieving it:
Press CTRL+T or right click in the view window and select Reset to Default View.
Press the Reset button on the Edit View Parameters form. This also resets back to the default view.
Zoom out repeatedly until the model reappears.
Close the 3D View and add a new one (use the Window|Add 3D View menu item). The new window will have the
default view centre and view size.
w
Tutorial, Static Analysis
23
2.5 STATIC ANALYSIS
Note: If you are running the demonstration version of OrcaFlex then this facility is not available.
To run a static analysis of the system, click on the Static Analysis button . The message box reports which line is
being analysed and how many iterations have occurred. When the analysis is finished (almost instantly for this simple
system) the Program State message in the centre of the Status Bar changes to read "Statics Complete", and the Static
Analysis button changes to light grey to indicate that this command is no longer available. The appearance of the line
will have changed a little. When editing the model, OrcaFlex uses a quick approximation to a catenary shape for general
guidance only, and this shape is replaced with the true catenary shape when static analysis has been carried out. (See
Static Analysis for more details).
We can now examine the results of the static analysis by clicking on the Results button . This opens a Results
Selection window.
You are offered the following choices:
Results in numerical and graphical form, with various further choices which determine what the table or graph will
contain.
Results for all objects or one selected object.
Ignore the graph options for the moment, select Summary Results and All Objects, then click Table. A summary of the
static analysis results is then displayed in spreadsheet form. Results for different objects are presented in different
sheets. To view more static analysis results repeat this process: click on the Results button and select as before.
2.6 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
We are now ready to run the simulation. If you are running the demonstration version of OrcaFlex then you cannot do
this, but instead you can load up the results of a prerun simulation see Examples.
Click the Run Simulation button . As the simulation progresses, the status bar reports current simulation time and
expected (real) time to finish the analysis, and the 3D view shows the motions of the system as the wave passes through.
Click the Start Replay button . An animated replay of the simulation is shown in the 3D view window. Use the view
control keys and mouse as before to change the view. The default Replay Period is Whole Simulation. This means that
you see the simulation start from still water, the wave building and with it the motions of the system. Simulation time is
shown in the Status bar, top left. Negative time means the wave is still building up from still water to full amplitude. At
the end of the simulation the replay begins again.
The replay consists of a series of "frames" at equal intervals of time. Just as you can "zoom" in and out in space for a
closer view, so OrcaFlex lets you "zoom" in and out in time. Click on the Replay Parameters button , edit Interval
to 0.5s and click OK. The animated replay is now much jerkier than before because fewer frames are being shown.
Now click again on Replay Parameters, set Replay Period to Latest Wave and click on the Continuous box to deselect.
The replay period shown is at the end of the simulation and has duration of a single wave period. At the end of the wave
period the replay pauses, then begins again.
Now click on the Replay Step button to pause the replay. Clicking repeatedly on this button steps through the
replay one frame at a time a very useful facility for examining a particular part of the motion in detail. Click with the
SHIFT key held down to step backwards.
You can then restart the animation by clicking on 'Start Replay' as before. To slow down or speed up the replay, click on
Replay Parameters and adjust the speed. Alternatively use the shortcuts CTRL+F and SHIFT+CTRL+F to make the replay
faster or slower respectively.
Tutorial, Multiple Views
w

24
To exit from replay mode click on the Stop Replay button .
2.7 MULTIPLE VIEWS
You can add another view of the system if you wish by clicking on the View button . Click again to add a third view,
etc. Each view can be manipulated independently to give, say, simultaneous plan and elevation views. To make all views
replay together, click on Replay Control and check the All Views box. To remove an unwanted view simply close its view
window. To rearrange the screen and make best use of the space, click Window and choose Tile Vertical (F4) or Tile
Horizontal (SHIFT+F4). Alternatively, you can minimise windows so that they appear as small icons on the background,
or you can resize them or move them around manually with the mouse. These are standard Windows operations which
may be useful if you want to tidy up the screen without having to close a window down completely.
2.8 LOOKING AT RESULTS
Now click on the Results button . This opens a Results Selection window.
You are offered the following choices:
Results as Tables or Graphs, with various further choices which determine what the table or graph will contain.
Results for all objects or one selected object.
Select Time History for any line, then select Effective Tension at End A and click the Graph button. The graph appears in
a new window. You can call up time histories of a wide range of parameters for most objects. For lines, you can also call
up Range Graphs of effective tension, curvature, bend moment and many other variables. These show maximum, mean
and minimum values of the variable plotted against position along the line. Detailed numerical results are available by
selecting Summary Results, Full Results, Statistics and Linked Statistics.
Time history and range graph results are also available in numerical form select the variable you want and press the
Values button. The results can be exported as Excel compatible spreadsheets for further processing as required. Further
numerical results are available in tabular form by selecting Summary Results, Full Results, Statistics and Linked
Statistics.
Windows displaying system views or graphs can be automatically arranged on screen as they appear by selecting
Window | Auto Arrange (this is the default setting on start up). Windows displaying tabular results are not
automatically arranged on opening, but are included in any subsequent rearrangement of the screen.
Results Post-Processing
Extra postprocessing facilities are available through Excel spreadsheets.
2.9 GETTING OUTPUT
You can get printed copies of data, results tables, system views and results graphs by means of the File | Print menu, or
by clicking Print on the popup menu. Output can also be transferred into a word processor or other application, either
using copy+paste via the clipboard or else export/import via a file.
Note: Printing and export facilities are not available in the demonstration version of OrcaFlex.
2.10 INPUT DATA
Take a look through the input data forms. Start by resetting the program: click on the Reset button and answer
'Yes' to the warning prompt. This returns OrcaFlex to the reset state, in which you can edit the data freely. (While a
simulation is active you can only edit certain noncritical items, such as the colours used for drawing.)
Now click on the Model Browser button . This displays the data structure in tree form in the Model Browser.
w
Tutorial, Input Data
25
Select an item and double click with the mouse to bring up the data form. Many of the data items are self explanatory.
For details of a data item, select the item with the mouse and press the F1 key. Alternatively use the question mark Help
icon in the top right corner of the form. Have a look around all the object data forms available to get an idea of the
capabilities of OrcaFlex.
End of Tutorial
We hope you have found this tutorial useful. To familiarise yourself with OrcaFlex, try building and running models of a
number of different systems. The manual also includes a range of examples and technical notes which expand on
particular points of interest or difficulty.
Finally, please remember that we at Orcina are on call to handle your questions if you are stuck.
w
Examples, Introduction
27
3 EXAMPLES
3.1 INTRODUCTION
OrcaFlex comes with a tutorial and a comprehensive collection of example files. The full set of example files are on the
OrcaFlex CD (see CD:\Demo_CD\OrcaFlex\Examples), and when OrcaFlex is installed some or all of the examples
(depending on your installation options) are copied into the OrcaFlex installation directory. The examples can also be
found on our website at www.orcina.com/SoftwareProducts/OrcaFlex/Examples.
The OrcaFlex help file describes each example case in detail. The OrcaFlex Help file can be downloaded from our website
at www.orcina.com/SoftwareProducts/OrcaFlex/Documentation.
w
User Interface, Introduction
29
4 USER INTERFACE
4.1 INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 Program Windows
OrcaFlex is based upon a main window that contains the Menus, a Status Bar, a Tool Bar and usually at least one 3D view
of the model. The window caption shows the program version and the file name currently in use for either data (.dat) or
simulation files (.sim).

Figure: The OrcaFlex main window
Within this main window, you can place any number of subordinate (or child) windows which may be:
3D View Windows showing 3D pictorial views of the model
Graph Windows showing results in graphical form
Spreadsheet Windows showing results in numerical form
Text Windows reporting status
You can arrange windows as desired they can be laid on top of each other (cascaded), or sidebyside (tiled), but are
restrained within the bounds of the main window.
Additional temporary windows are popped up, such as Data Forms for each object in the model (allowing data to be
viewed and modified) and Dialogue Boxes (used to specify details for program actions such as loading and saving files).
While one of these temporary windows is present you can only work inside that window you must dismiss the
temporary window before you can use other windows, the menus or toolbar.
The actions that you can perform at any time depend on the current Model State.
Arranging Windows
3D Views, Graphs and Text Windows may be tiled so that they sit sidebyside, but they are restrained within the
bounds of the main window. If AutoArrange is selected then the program rearranges the windows using the current
scheme every time a new window is created.
4.1.2 The Model
OrcaFlex works by building a mathematical computer model of your system. This model consists of a number of objects
that represent the parts of the system e.g. vessels, buoys, lines etc.
w

30
Each object has a name, which can be any length. Object names are not casesensitive, so Riser, riser and RISER would
all refer to the same object. This behaviour is the same as for Windows file names.
The model always has two standard objects:
General contains general data, such as title, units etc.
Environment represents the sea, seabed, waves, current etc.
You can then use the Model Browser or the toolbar to add other objects to represent the parts of your system. There is
no limit, other than the capacity of your computer, to the number of objects you can add to the model.
At any time, you can save your model to a data file you can then reopen it at a later date to continue work.
4.1.3 Model Browser
At any time you can use the Model Browser to see what objects you have in your model. To display the model browser,
use the model browser button or the Model | Model Browser menu item or use the keyboard shortcuts (F6 to open
the model browser).

Figure: Model Browser
The Model Browser consists of a list of all the objects in the model, arranged into categories according to object type.
Several symbols are used in the list of objects:

Categories can be opened, to show their contents, or closed, to simplify viewing a complex model.

Objects. Use double click to view or edit the object's data.
w
31

Locked. These objects cannot be dragged by the mouse in the 3D View.
You can navigate the list and select the object required by clicking with the mouse, or using the arrow keys and return. If
the list is longer than the window then you can either enlarge the window or use the scroll bar.
Note: More than one object can be selected in the model browser. This allows you to perform the same action
(e.g. delete, copy, hide, show, locate) on many objects at once. To select more than one object you use
the standard Windows key presses CTRL+CLICK to add to a selection and SHIFT+CLICK to extend a
selection.
Hint: If you have all objects in the model browser selected then it can be difficult to de-select them. The
simplest way is to use CTRL+CLICK to de-select one item and then to CLICK that item again to select it
alone.
Model Browser Facilities
The model browser menus, and its popup menu, provide the following model management facilities. For details of
keyboard shortcuts see Keys on Model Browser.
Add
Add a new object to the model.
Delete
Delete the selected object from the model.
Cut/Copy
Cut or Copy the selected object to the clipboard.
Paste
Paste an object from the clipboard into the model. If the object is the Variable Data then all the variable data tables are
pasted in, with tables being renamed if necessary to avoid clashing with existing variable data names.
Note: You can use Cut/Copy and Paste to transfer objects between two copies of OrcaFlex running on the
same machine. You can also use it to transfer objects between two OrcaFlex data files (open the source
file and copy the object to the clipboard, then open the destination file and paste the object back from
the clipboard), but the Library facility (see below) provides an easier way of achieving the same thing.
Move Selected Objects
Opens the Move Selected Objects Wizard.
Locate
Finds and highlights the object in any open 3D view windows. This is useful in complex models where many objects are
on the 3D view. The highlighting method is determined by the Locate Object Method preference.
Edit
Open the object's data form. This action can also be invoked by doubleclicking an item, or by selecting it and pressing
RETURN.
Rename
Rename the selected object. You can also rename by singleclicking the selected object.
Lock/Unlock
Lock or unlock the selected object.
Hide/Hide All/Show/Show All
Control whether the objects are drawn on 3D views.
w

32
Reorder
You can use drag+drop with the mouse to reorder objects in the model. This is useful if you are working on the static
position of one particular line you can drag it up to the top of the list of lines, so that it will be tackled first when
OrcaFlex does the static analysis.
Library
The Library menu facilities allow you to open a second data file. You can then Import objects from that second file into
the current model. You can also import using drag+drop with the mouse. For details see Libraries.
Notes: The second data file is referred to as the library model, but in fact it can be any OrcaFlex data file. The
library facilities therefore provide an easy way to move objects between different OrcaFlex data files.
If the object being imported is the variable data then all the variable data tables are transferred, with
tables being renamed if necessary to avoid clashing with existing variable data names.
Switch to Main Window
The browser's Window menu enables you to switch focus to the main form without closing the browser window. A
corresponding command on the main form's Window menu switches focus back.
4.1.4 Model Browser Views
There are 2 ways of viewing objects in the model browser: by Types or by Groups. You can switch between views by
clicking on the model browser View | View by Groups/Types menu items, or though the popup menu.
Types View
This is the traditional model browser view. The browser has a number of folders containing objects of the same type.
For example all the lines are contained in a folder called "Lines". Objects can be reordered within a folder but they
cannot be moved to a different folder.
To select this view you should click the View | View by Types menu item.
Groups View
This view allows you to customise how the objects are arranged in the model browser. You can add any number of
browser groups to the browser. These groups are simply folders in the browser tree. Groups can contain any number of
objects or other groups. In this way a hierarchical structure for the model can be created.
To select this view you should click the View | View by Groups menu item.
To add groups you select the Edit | Add Group menu item or use the popup menu. Groups can be renamed in the same
way as other objects. Objects can be added to a group by dragging the objects onto the group. Any number of objects can
be added to a group in one operation by first selecting the objects and then dragging them. This multiple selection is
performed using the standard Windows key presses CTRL+CLICK to add to a selection and SHIFT+CLICK to extend a
selection. Groups can be dragged into other groups and so a hierarchical structure for the model can be created.
As well as allowing you the freedom to structure your model however you like, the Groups View allows you to perform
the same action (e.g. delete, copy, hide, show, locate) on all objects in a group. The grouping structure is also used when
cycling through data forms clicking the Next button takes you to the next object in the groups view.
4.1.5 Move Selected Objects Wizard
This wizard allows you to move and rotate a number of objects en masse. The wizard is most useful when you select
multiple objects, a group or a number of groups or even the entire model.
To use the wizard you must first open the Model Browser and select the objects which you wish to move. Then click
Move Selected Objects on the browser's edit menu (also available from the popup menu).
Selecting objects
Before using the wizard you must select (in the model browser) the objects which you wish to move. There are a variety
of ways in which you can do this. We list a few of the more useful methods below:
w
33
Select a single object.
Select multiple objects. You can do this in the model browser using CTRL+CLICK to add to a selection and
SHIFT+CLICK to extend a selection.
Select an object type folder. This works when the model browser is in Types View mode. For example select the
Lines folder if you wish to move all the lines in a model.
Select a group. This works when the model browser is in Groups View mode. This allows you to move all objects in
that group.
Select the entire model. This is easiest to do when the model browser is in Groups View mode. The first item in the
model browser is titled "Model". Select this item if you wish to move all objects in the model.
There is no limitation to the type of selections you can make. If you wish to move 2 groups then select both of them
(using CTRL+CLICK) and open the wizard.
Note: If your selection includes an item which contains other objects (e.g. a group or an object type folder)
then all objects contained by that item will be moved by the wizard.
Points
The wizard shows a list of the points associated with each selected object. For objects like buoys, vessels and shapes a
single point is shown. For objects like lines, links and winches with multiple connection points the list shows each
connection point for that object. The list also shows the global coordinates of each point.
For each point you have the option of including or excluding it in the move operation. This might be useful if you wanted
to move only the End A line connection points and leave the End B connection points unchanged, for example.
Move specified by
There are 4 methods of specifying how the objects are moved.
Displacement
For this method you specify a position change (i.e. a displacement) which will be applied to all the points included in the
move operation.
Polar Displacement
This method is similar to the Displacement method. Here you specify a direction and distance which determine a
position change. This is applied to all the points included in the move operation.
New Position
Here you give a reference point and its new position. The same displacement is applied to all other points included in
the move.
Rotation
This method rotates the included points in the horizontal plane. You specify an angle of rotation and a central point
about which the rotation is performed. Note that the environment data (e.g. wave and current directions, seabed
direction etc.) is not included in the rotation.
Moving the objects
Once you have decided which objects to include in the move and how the move is specified you are ready to actually
move the objects. This is done by clicking the Move button. If you change your mind and decide not to move the objects
then simply click the Close button.
4.1.6 Libraries
An OrcaFlex Library is a collection of OrcaFlex objects (line types, lines, buoys etc.) stored in an ordinary OrcaFlex data
file. For example, a library may contain all the standard Line Types that you use regularly. Once such a library file has
been built you can quickly build new models using the library this gives faster model building and can make QA
procedures safer.
w

34
To open a library file, use the File | Libraries menu or the Library menu on the Model Browser. Note that any OrcaFlex
data file can be opened as a library file, and this makes it easy to use the model browser to copy objects from one model
to another.
Using Libraries
Libraries allow you to easily import objects from one OrcaFlex model to another. To do this run OrcaFlex and open the
model browser by clicking the model browser button or the Model | Model Browser menu item, or pressing F2. The
model browser should look like:

Now you open your file as a library. To do this click the open button on the model browser and select your data
file. Now the model browser will look like:
w
35

We are now going to copy some objects from the right hand pane to the left hand pane. To do so select the required line
types and click the import button . As an alternative to the import button the objects can be dragged from the
right hand pane to the left hand pane or the Library | Import menu item can be used.
Note that you can select a number of objects and import them all in one go. You do this by using the standard Windows
key presses CTRL+CLICK to add to a selection and SHIFT+CLICK to extend a selection. If you do this the library will look
like:
w

36

Once you have imported the required objects you can close the library by selecting the Library | Close menu item on
the model browser. Now the model browser looks like:
w
37

Here are some other points about using library files:
Because library files are simply ordinary OrcaFlex data files, you can temporarily treat any OrcaFlex data file as a
library. This allows you to import objects from one OrcaFlex data file to another.
You can resize the model browser by dragging its border. You can also control the relative sizes of its two panes, by
dragging the right border of the left pane.
You can view, but not edit, the data for a library model object, by double clicking it in the Model Browser or by
selecting it and using the popup menu.
When an object is imported from a library, the destination model may already have an object of that name. In this
case OrcaFlex automatically gives the object a new name based on the old name; you may wish to alter this name.
Name clashes when importing
If the object being imported uses a type e.g. a line type or vessel type then OrcaFlex automatically imports all the
types that the object uses. If the names of any of those types match names already in the destination model, then
OrcaFlex needs to know which ones to use the ones already in the destination model or the ones in the source model. If
this situation arises then OrcaFlex warns you and gives you the following options:
Use Existing: The type is not transferred. Instead, the transferred object will use the type, of that name, that already
exists in the destination model.
Rename: This option transfers the used type, giving it a new name, and the transferred object uses the transferred
type.
Use All Existing: This option applies the Use Existing option to all remaining types used by the object. So for all
remaining types used by the object, the types already in the destination model are used, whenever their names
match the types used.
w

38
Rename All: This option applies the Rename option to all remaining types used by the object. So all the remaining
types used by the object are transferred, using new names where needed, and the transferred object uses the
transferred types.
Building a Library
A library file is simply an OrcaFlex data file you can use any OrcaFlex data file as a library. In practice it is most
convenient to put your commonly used OrcaFlex objects into files designated as OrcaFlex library files.
You build a library file in the same way as you build a standard OrcaFlex data file. Starting with a blank model you can
add objects in the usual way and set their data. Typically, however, you would want to reuse objects that had previously
been created and used for a project.
To do this you would open the model browser and load your project data file as a library using the open button on
the model browser. Then you import the required objects as described in Using Libraries. This procedure can be
repeated with a number of different data files until you have all the objects you wish to keep in the library. Then you
should close the model browser and save the data file by clicking the button on the main OrcaFlex form. This data
file can now be used as a library.
Notes: Because they are OrcaFlex models, libraries contain General and Environment data, but these would
not usually be used, except perhaps for the General data Comment field, which can act as a title for the
library.
Because the library file is just an ordinary OrcaFlex data file, it can also be opened using File | Open.
This allows you to edit the data of the objects in the library.
You can set up as many library files as you wish. For example you might have separate libraries for Line Types,
Attachment Types, Vessel Types, Variable Data Sources etc., or you may choose to use just one library for everything.
The model browser's Library menu contains a list of the most recently used libraries.
4.1.7 Model States
OrcaFlex builds and analyses a mathematical model of the system being analysed, the model being built up from a series
of interconnected objects, such as Lines, Vessels and Buoys. For more details see Modelling and Analysis.
OrcaFlex works on the model by moving through a sequence of states, the current state being shown on the status bar.
The following diagram shows the sequence of states used and the actions, results etc. available in each state.
w
39
RESET
Calculating
Statics
Simulating
STATICS COMPLETE
SIMULATION
COMPLETE
Calculate
Static
Position
Reset
Reset
Edit or
Reset
Run
Pause
Run
SIMULATION
PAUSED
Reset
Extend
Simulation
SIMULATION
UNSTABLE
Reset

Figure: Model States
The states used are as follows:
Reset
The state in which OrcaFlex starts. In Reset state you can freely change the model and edit the data. No results are
available.
Calculating Statics
OrcaFlex is calculating the statics position of the model. You can abort the calculation by CLICKING the Reset button.
Statics Complete
The statics calculation is complete and the static position results are available. You are allowed to make changes to the
model when in this state but if you make any changes (except for very minor changes like colours used) then the model
will be automatically reset and the statics results will be lost.
Simulating
The dynamic simulation is running. The results of the simulation so far are available and you can examine the model
data, but only make minor changes (e.g. colours used). You cannot store the simulation to a file while simulating you
must pause the simulation first.
Simulation Paused
There is a simulation active, but it is paused. The results so far are available and you can examine the model data. You
can also store the partrun simulation to a file.
w

40
Simulation Complete
The simulation is complete. The simulation results are available and you can store the results to a simulation file for
later examination. You must reset the model, by CLICKING on the Reset button, before significant changes to the model
can be made.
You can use the Extend Simulation facility if you wish to simulate for a further period of time.
Simulation Unstable
The simulation has become unstable. The simulation results are available and you can store the results to a simulation
file for later examination. This allows you to try and understand why the simulation has become unstable. You may also
want to examine the results up until the point at which the simulation became unstable. However, please treat these
results with caution because the simulation eventually went unstable this indicates that the dynamic simulation may
not have converged at earlier simulation times.
You must reset the model, by CLICKING on the Reset button, before significant changes to the model can be made.
4.1.8 Using Model States
To illustrate how model states work, here is an example of a typical working pattern:
1. In Reset state, open a new model from a data file or use the current model as the starting point for a new model.
2. In Reset state, add or remove objects and edit the model data as required for the new model. It is generally best to
use a very simple model in the early stages of design and only add more features when the simple model is
satisfactory.
3. Run a static analysis (to get to Statics Complete state) and examine the static position results. Make any
corrections to the model that are needed this will automatically reset the model. Steps (2) and (3) are repeated as
required.
4. Run a simulation and monitor the results during the simulation (in Simulating state).
5. If further changes to the model are needed then Reset the model and edit the model accordingly. Steps (2) to (5) are
repeated as required.
6. Finalise the model, perhaps improving the discretisation (for example by reducing the time step sizes or increasing
the number of segments used for Lines). Run a final complete simulation (to reach Simulation Complete state) and
generate reports using the results.
4.1.9 Toolbar
The toolbar holds a variety of buttons that provide quick access to the most frequently used menu items. The selection
of buttons available varies with the current Program State.
Button Action Equivalent Menu Item

Open File | Open

Save File | Save

Model Browser Model | Model Browser

New Vessel Model | New Vessel

New Line Model | New Line

New 6D Buoy Model | New 6D Buoy

New 3D Buoy Model | New 3D Buoy
w
41
Button Action Equivalent Menu Item

New Winch Model | New Winch

New Link Model | New Link

New Shape Model | New Shape

Calculate Statics Calculation | Single Statics

Run Simulation Calculation | Run Simulation

Pause Simulation Calculation | Pause Simulation

Reset Calculation | Reset

Start Replay Replay | Start Replay

Stop Replay Replay | Stop Replay

Step Replay Forwards Replay | Step Replay Forwards

Edit Replay Parameters Replay | Edit Replay Parameters

Add New 3D View Window | Add 3D View

Examine Results Results | Select Results

Help Contents and Index Help | OrcaFlex Help
4.1.10 Status Bar
The Status Bar is divided into three fields:
The Message Box
This is at the left hand end. It shows information about the progress of the current action, such as the name of the
currently selected object, or the current iteration number or simulation time. Error messages are also shown here.
When a statics calculation is done messages showing the progress of the calculation are shown in the message box. To
see all the messages from the statics calculation CLICK on the message box the Statics Progress Window will then be
opened.
CLICKING here outside a statics calculation displays the Session Log.
The Program State Indicator
In the centre and shows which state the program is in (see Model States).
The Information Box
This is on the right. It shows additional information, including:
The global coordinates of the position of the cursor, in the current view plane.
Distances when using the measuring tape tool.
w

42
4.1.11 Mouse and Keyboard Actions
As well as the standard Windows mouse operations such as selection and dragging OrcaFlex uses some specialised
actions. Clicking the right mouse button over a 3D View, Graph or Text Window displays a popup menu of frequently
used actions, such as Copy, Paste, Export etc. For wire frame 3D Views and Graph Windows the mouse can be used for
zooming. Simply hold the ALT key down and using the left mouse button, drag a box over the region you want to view.
All of the menu items can be selected from the keyboard by pressing ALT followed by the underlined letters this is
described in your Microsoft Windows Manual.
Example: To exit from the program (menu: File | Exit) press ALT+F then X, or ALT then F then X
A number of frequently used menu items may also be accessed by shortcut keys, such as CTRL+R to start a replay. See
the tables below. The shortcut keys are also displayed on the OrcaFlex menus. We suggest that as you become more
familiar with the operation of OrcaFlex that you memorise some of the shortcut keys for actions that you use frequently.
Keys on Main Window
New model
CTRL+N
Open file
CTRL+O
Save file
CTRL+S
Open data
SHIFT+CTRL+O
Save data
SHIFT+CTRL+S
Help
F1
Print
F7
Show / hide Model Browser
F6
Switch between Model Browser and Main Window
SHIFT+F6
Calculate static position
F9
Run simulation
F10
Pause simulation
F11
Reset simulation
F12
Open results selection form
F5
Go to next window
CTRL+F6
Go to previous window
SHIFT+CTRL+F6
Tile windows vertically
F4
Tile windows horizontally
SHIFT+F4
Close selected window
CTRL+F4
Close program
ALT+F4
Keys on Model Browser
Edit data
Enter
Rename object
F2
Switch to Main Window
SHIFT+F6
Locate
F3
Move selected objects
CTRL+M
Hide
CTRL+H
Show
CTRL+S
Hide all objects
SHIFT+CTRL+H
w
43
Show all objects
SHIFT+CTRL+S
View by Groups
SHIFT+CTRL+G
View by Types
SHIFT+CTRL+T
Lock / Unlock objects
CTRL+L
Cut
CTRL+X
Copy
CTRL+C
Paste
CTRL+V
Delete
DELETE
Close browser
ESC
Keys on Data Forms
Help
F1
Go to next data form
F6
Go to previous data form
SHIFT+F6
Display batch script names for currently selected
data item or table.
F7
Display Properties Report
ALT+ENTER
Show connections report
F8
Copy form
F9
Export form
F10
Print form
CTRL+P
Open calculator
F12
Close form
ALT+F4
Data Selection Keys
Go to next data item or table
TAB
Go to previous data item or table
SHIFT+TAB
Go to data item or table labelled with underlined letter
ALT+LETTER
Move around within a table
Select multiple cells in table SHIFT +
SHIFT+HOME
SHIFT+END
Go to first or last column in table
HOME, END
Go up or down table several rows at a time
PGUP, PGDN
Data Editing Keys
Enter new value for selected cell Type new value
Edit current value of selected cell
F2
Move around within new data value being entered , , HOME, END
Accept edit
RETURN
Accept edit and go to adjacent cell in table ,
Cancel edit
ESC
Cut selected cell(s) to clipboard
CTRL+X
w

44
Copy selected cell(s) to clipboard
CTRL+C
Paste from clipboard
CTRL+V
Fill selection from top (copy top cell down)
CTRL+D
Fill selection from left (copy leftmost cell to right)
CTRL+R
Fill selection from bottom (copy bottom cell up)
CTRL+U
SHIFT+CTRL+D
Fill selection from right (copy rightmost cell to left)
CTRL+L
SHIFT+CTRL+R
Insert new row in table
INSERT
Delete selected row of table
DELETE
3D View Control Keys
Elevation view
CTRL+E
Plan view
CTRL+P
Rotate viewpoint up (increment view elevation angle) CTRL+ALT+
Rotate viewpoint down (decrement view elevation
angle)
CTRL+ALT+
Rotate viewpoint right (increment view azimuth angle) CTRL+ALT+
Rotate viewpoint left (decrement view azimuth angle) CTRL+ALT+
Rotate viewpoint +90
CTRL+Q
Rotate viewpoint 90
SHIFT+CTRL+Q
Zoom In
CTRL+I
Zoom Out
SHIFT+CTRL+I
Move view centre fine adjustment
Move view centre coarse adjustment CTRL +
Edit view parameters for current 3D view
CTRL+W
Reset to default view
CTRL+T
Set to default view
SHIFT +CTRL+T
3D View Control Keys (for wire frame graphics only)
Show / Hide local axes
CTRL+Y
Show / Hide node axes
CTRL+ALT+Y
Show / Hide out of balance forces
SHIFT+CTRL+Y
Undo most recent drag
CTRL+Z
Lock/Unlock selected object
CTRL+L
Place new object SPACE or RETURN
Edit selected object
CTRL+F2
Cut selected object to clipboard
CTRL+X
Copy selected object, or view if none selected,
to clipboard
CTRL+C
Paste object from clipboard (followed by mouse click
or RETURN to position the new object)
CTRL+V
Delete selected object
DELETE
w
User Interface, Menus
45
Measuring tape tool SHIFT+CTRL+drag
Replay Control Keys
Start / Stop replay
CTRL+R
Replay faster
CTRL+F
Replay slower
SHIFT+CTRL+F
Step forwards one frame in the replay and pause
CTRL+A
Step backwards one frame in the replay and pause
CTRL+B
Edit replay parameters
CTRL+D
4.2 MENUS
OrcaFlex has the following menus:
The File menu has the file opening and saving commands, plus commands for printing or exporting data or results
and managing libraries.
The Edit menu has data and object editing facilities.
The Model menu gives access to the model building facilities.
The Calculation menu provides commands for starting and stopping analyses, including batch processing.
The View menu provides view control.
The Replay menu provides replay control.
The Graph menu gives you access to facilities related to the currently active graph window.
The Results menu leads to the results facilities.
The Tools menu allows you adjust preferences and to lock or unlock objects.
The Workspace menu allows you to save and restore collections of view, graph and spreadsheet windows.
The Window menu gives access to the various windows that are available, and allows you to adjust the layout of
your windows.
The Help menu leads to the various help documentation that is available.
4.2.1 File Menu
New
Deletes all objects from the model and resets data to default values.
Open
Open a data or simulation file.
You can also open an OrcaFlex file by dragging and dropping it onto the OrcaFlex window. For example if you have
Windows Explorer running in one window and OrcaFlex running in another then you can ask OrcaFlex to open a file by
simply dragging it from Explorer and dropping it over the OrcaFlex window.
If you open a data file then OrcaFlex reads in the data, whereas if you select a simulation file then OrcaFlex reads in both
the data and the simulation results. To read just the data from a simulation file, you can use the Open Data menu item.
If you load a partiallyrun simulation then it can be completed by using Calculation | Run Simulation.
OrcaFlex can read files that were written by previous versions of the program. It can even read files written by more
recent versions of the program. If the file requires a facility that is not available in the version reading it then a warning
is given.
w

46
Save
Save the data, plus the simulation results if a simulation is active, to the currently selected file name, using extension
.DAT (if there are no simulation results) or .SIM (if there are simulation results). If a file of that name already exists then
it is overwritten.
Note: You cannot save the simulation while it is running - you must pause the simulation first.
Save As
This is the same as Save but allows you to specify the file name to save to. If a file of that name already exists then you
are asked whether to overwrite the file.
Open Data
Read the data from an existing data file (.DAT) or simulation file (.SIM), replacing the existing model. If a simulation file
is specified then OrcaFlex reads just the data from it, ignoring the simulation results in the file.
Note: To select a simulation file you first need to set "File of Type" to be "Simulation Files (*.sim)".
Save Data
Save the data into the currently selected file name, using extension .DAT. If a file of that name already exists then it is
overwritten.
Save Data As
This is the same as Save Data but allows you to specify the file name to save to. If a file of that name already exists then
you are asked whether to overwrite the file.
Compare Data
Compares the data of 2 OrcaFlex models. See Comparing Data for details.
Libraries
You can create new libraries of OrcaFlex objects, or open existing libraries. You can then import objects from the library
into your existing model, or export objects from your existing model to the library.
Export
Display the Export Dialogue box, allowing you to export Data, 3D Views, Graphs, Spreadsheets or Text Windows. See
also Copy.
Selected Printer
Allows you to change the selected printer.
Printer Setup
Calls up the Printer Setup dialogue. This standard Windows dialogue is used to select which printer to use, and allows
you to control the way that it is used the details vary from printer to printer, and depend on the printer manufacturer's
device driver currently installed. Please refer to the manuals for your printer as well as the Microsoft documentation.
Print
Display the Print Dialogue box, allowing you to print Data, 3D Views, Graphs, Spreadsheets or Text Windows. See
Printing.
Most Recent Files
List of the most recently used files. Selecting an item on the list causes the file to be loaded.
Exit
Close OrcaFlex.
w
47
4.2.2 Edit Menu
Undo Drag
Undo the most recent drag. This is useful if you accidentally drag an object.
Cut
Copies the current selection to the clipboard and then deletes it.
Copy
If there is a currently selected object (see Selecting Objects), then that object is copied to the clipboard. You can then use
Edit | Paste to create duplicate copies of the object. The data for the object is copied to the clipboard in text form, from
where it can be pasted into a word processor document.
Note: After pasting into a word processor, you will probably need to put the text into a fixed space font since
much of the data is in tables.
If there is no currently selected object then the currently selected 3D view, text window, graph or spreadsheet is copied
to the clipboard.
Paste
Insert object from clipboard. This can be used to duplicate an object several times within the model. After selecting
Paste, the object is inserted at the next mouse CLICK position in a 3D view.
If the current window is a Spreadsheet then the contents of the clipboard are pasted into the spreadsheet.
Delete
If the active window is a 3D View then the currently selected object is deleted. Before the object is deleted, any
connected objects are disconnected, and any graphs associated with the object are closed.
If the active window is a Spreadsheet then the selected cells are cleared.
Select All
Selects all the cells in a Spreadsheet.
Copy All Data
Copy the whole model to the clipboard. The model data is copied to the clipboard in text form, from where it can be
pasted into a word processor document.
4.2.3 Model Menu
Model Browser
Toggles the visibility of the Model Browser.
w

48
New Vessel
New Line
New 6D Buoy
New 3D Buoy
New Winch
New Link
New Shape
Create new objects. The mouse cursor changes to the New Object symbol . The object is placed at the position of the
next mouse CLICK within a 3D view. A three dimensional position is generated by finding the point where the mouse
CLICK position falls on a plane normal to the view direction and passing through the Default View Centre. Vessels are
always placed initially at the sea surface, that is with their origin at Z = Sea surface Z (see Vessel Data).
Show Connections Report
Displays a spreadsheet containing information about all object connections in the model.
Truncate Object Names
Old versions of OrcaFlex (before 7.4b) cannot read files that contain long object names, i.e. longer than 10 characters.
This menu item truncates any long object names in the model. You should do this if you wish to send a file to another
user whose version of OrcaFlex is older than 7.4b.
Delete Unused Types
Deletes any types (e.g. Line Types, Clump Types etc.) that are not in use. This is sometimes useful to simplify a data file,
or to find out which types are in use.
Delete Unused Variable Data Sources
Deletes any variable data sources that are not in use. This is sometimes useful to simplify a data file, or to find out which
variable data sources are in use.
Use Calculated Positions
This menu item is available after a successful static iteration or when the simulation is finished or paused.
If the model is in the statics complete state then clicking the menu item sets the initial positions of buoys, vessels and
free line ends to be the calculated static positions. This can be desirable when setting up a model, since the positions
found are likely to be good estimates for the next statics calculation.
If the model is in the simulation paused or stopped state, then clicking the menu item sets the initial positions of buoys
and free line ends to be the latest positions in the simulation. This is useful when OrcaFlex statics fails to find an
equilibrium configuration. In such cases you can use dynamics with no wave motion to find the static equilibrium
position and then click Use Calculated Positions.
If a replay is active then clicking the menu item sets the initial positions of buoys and free line ends to be the positions at
the latest replay time.
w
49
Use Specified Starting Shape for Lines
This menu item is an extension of Use Calculated Positions. As well as setting the initial positions of buoys, vessels and
free line ends it modifies data for all Lines in the following way:
1. The Step 1 Statics Method is set to User Specified.
2. The User Specified Starting Shape data are set to the calculated node positions. As described above these positions
are either the results of a static calculation or the results of a dynamic simulation.
Use Static Line End Orientations
This menu item is only available after a successful static analysis. Clicking the menu item sets the line end orientation
data, for all line ends in the model that have zero connection stiffness, to the orientations found in the static analysis.
This is done as follows.
For any line end with zero bend connection stiffness, the end azimuth and end declination will be set to the azimuth
and declination of the end node, as found by the static analysis.
If the line includes torsion and the line end connection twist stiffness is zero, then the end gamma will be set to the
gamma of the end node, as found by the static analysis.
This action can be useful if you want to set the line end orientation to that which gives zero end moments when the line
is in its static position. To do this first set the end connection stiffness values to zero, then run the static analysis and
then click the Use Static Line End Orientations menu item. You can then set the end connection stiffness to their actual
values.
4.2.4 Calculation Menu
Single Statics
Start the single statics calculation (see Static Analysis). Progress and any error messages that occur are reported in the
Statics Progress Window, which is shown as a minimised window icon. The statics calculation can be interrupted by
CLICKING the Reset button.
Multiple Statics
Starts the multiple offset statics calculation (see Multiple Statics). Progress and any error messages that occur are
reported in the Statics Progress Window, which is shown as a minimised window icon. The statics calculation can be
interrupted by CLICKING the Reset button.
Run Simulation
Start a full dynamic simulation (see Dynamic Analysis). If necessary, OrcaFlex will automatically do a statics calculation
first.
During the simulation, the Status Bar shows the current simulation time and an estimate of the time that the simulation
will take, and all 3D View windows and Graphs are updated at regular intervals. The update interval is set in the
Tools | Preferences dialogue box. The simulation can be interrupted by CLICKING the Pause button.
Pause Simulation
Pause the simulation. To save the results of a partrun simulation you need to pause it first. The simulation can be
restarted by CLICKING the Run button.
Reset
Reset the model, discarding any existing results. The model can then be edited or a new model loaded.
w

50
Extend Simulation
This facility is only available when the current simulation is either paused or completed. It adds another stage to the
current simulation, without having to reset. You are asked to specify the length of the new stage. You can then continue
the simulation, without having to restart it from scratch. This is particularly useful if you have a simulation that has not
been run for long enough.
Note that data for the new stage, e.g. for winch control and vessel prescribed motion, are set to the same as for the
previous last stage. You cannot edit the data for the new stage.
Notes: A winch will therefore do the same in the new stage as in the previous last stage. So if the winch mode
at the end of the simulation was Specified Tension, Specified Tension Rate or Specified Payout Rate,
then it will continue in that mode and with the same target tension, tension rate or payout rate,
respectively. If the winch mode at the end of the simulation was Specified Payout then the winch will
payout the same amount in the new stage, so if the new stage is of a different duration then the
resulting payout rate will differ.
Similarly, a vessel will continue to turn if it was turning at the end of the simulation. If the prescribed
motion mode at the end of the simulation was Constant Velocity then it will continue with that same
constant velocity in the new stage. Whereas if the prescribed motion mode at the end of the simulation
was Velocity Change, then it will make the same velocity change again over the new stage, so if the new
stage is of a different duration then the resulting acceleration will differ.
View Warnings
Displays a window allowing you to review all warnings displayed by OrcaFlex during a calculation (statics or dynamics).
This feature is particularly useful for simulations run in batch mode or by Distributed OrcaFlex. In these circumstances
warnings are not displayed since to do so would require user intervention.
Line Setup Wizard
Opens the Line Setup Wizard. The wizard is only available when the current simulation is in Reset state.
Wave Scatter Conversion
Opens the Wave Scatter Conversion form. This facility converts a scatter table of sea states to a scatter table of regular
(i.e. individual) waves.
Batch Processing
Run a batch of simulations automatically while the program is unattended. See Batch Processing for details. A
Batch Mode dialogue box is presented, allowing you to select the data files to be included in the batch run and then start
the batch run. The results are automatically written to simulation files with the same names as the data files, for later
inspection. While running in batch mode the program does not require user input and does not request confirmation
before overwriting simulation files.
4.2.5 View Menu
Change Graphics Mode
Toggles the graphics mode between wire frame and shaded.
Edit View Parameters
Adjust the View Parameters for the highlighted 3D View. You can adjust the view centre position, view size and
direction. See View Parameters.
w
51
Rotate Up / Down / Left / Right
Change the view direction, for the highlighted 3D View, by the view rotation increment (see Preferences).
Plan
Set the highlighted 3D View to a plan view (Elevation = +90).
Elevation
Set the highlighted 3D view to an elevation view (Elevation = 0).
Rotate 90 / Rotate -90
Increase (or decrease) the view azimuth by 90, for the highlighted 3D view.
Zoom In / Zoom Out
Click the zoom button to zoom in (decrease view size) or SHIFT+CLICK it to zoom out (increase view size). Applies only to
the currently highlighted 3D View.
Reset to Default View
Reset the currently highlighted 3D view back to the default view for this model.
Set as Default View
Set the default view for this model to be the currently highlighted 3D view.
Axes
This submenu gives you control of the 3D View Axes Preferences.
Superimpose Times
Allows model configurations for different times of the simulation to be superimposed in 3D Views. See Superimpose
Times.
Current Position
Draws the model at the latest time this action is used to cancel the Superimpose Times view.
4.2.6 Replay Menu
Edit Replay Parameters
Adjust the Replay Parameters, such as the period of simulation to replay, the time interval between frames, the replay
speed etc. For more information see Replays.
Start / Stop Replay
Starts or stops the replay.
Step Replay Forwards, Step Replay Backwards
Step the replay forwards or backwards one frame at a time. Click the button to step forwards; CLICK with SHIFT held
down to step backwards.
Replay Faster / Slower
Increase or decrease the replay frame rate (replay speed).
w

52
Export Video
Exports the replay as a video clip in AVI file format. See Replays for more details.
4.2.7 Graph Menu
Use Default Ranges
Sets the graph axes to their original ranges
Values
Displays a spreadsheet containing the numerical values on which the graph is based.
Spectral Density (only available for time history graphs)
Opens a new spectral density graph.
Empirical Cumulative Distribution (only available for time history graphs)
Opens a new empirical cumulative distribution graph.
Rainflow half-cycle Empirical Cumulative Distribution (only available for time history graphs)
Opens a new rainflow halfcycle empirical cumulative distribution graph.
Properties
Opens the graph properties form (which can also be opened by double clicking the graph).
4.2.8 Results Menu
Select Results
Display Results Selection dialogue box (see Results). This allows you to choose from the currently available selection of
graphs and results tables. Graphs such as Time Histories, XY Graphs and Range Graphs may be created before a
simulation has been run, thus allowing you to watch the variables during a simulation.
Fatigue Analysis
Opens the Fatigue Analysis form.
Modal Analysis
Opens the Modal Analysis form.
Report Vessel Response
Opens the Vessel Response form.
4.2.9 Tools Menu
Lock / Unlock Selected Object
Locking an object prevents it from being accidentally dragged or connected using the mouse on 3D views, for example if
you nudge the mouse slightly while trying to DOUBLE CLICK. Lock / Unlock Selected Object toggles the lock on the
currently selected object. If the lock is on, it will be switched off. If the lock is off, then it will be switched on. Locked
Objects may still have their positions edited in the data Edit Forms. The status of the object locks is shown by symbols in
the Model Browser.
Lock / Unlock All Objects
Locks or unlocks all objects in the model.
Set Thread Count
Allows you to change the number of execution threads used by OrcaFlex for parallel processing.
w
53
Set Process Priority
Allows you to change the processing priority of OrcaFlex. This could be useful if you wished OrcaFlex to run as a
background process, for example. The setting only applies to the current OrcaFlex session.
Setting the process priority here is equivalent to setting the priority in the task manager or from the command line.
Preferences
Allows you to control various program settings so that you can customise the program to the way you prefer to work.
See Preferences.
4.2.10 Workspace Menu
Open Workspace
Opens a previously saved workspace file and restores the window layout described in that file.
Save Workspace
Save the current window layout to a workspace file.
Make default for this directory
Makes the current window layout the default workspace for the current directory. This default workspace will be
restored whenever you open a simulation file in this directory.
Use directory default
Applies the default workspace to the current simulation. This is useful if you have changed the window layout and wish
to restore the default workspace layout without reloading the simulation file.
Remove directory default
Deletes the default workspace. This command should be used if you no longer want the default workspace to be applied
when simulation files in this directory are opened.
Most Recent Files
List of the most recently saved workspaces in the current directory. Selecting an item on the list causes the workspace
to be loaded.
4.2.11 Window Menu
Add 3D View
Add another 3D View Window. Having multiple views on screen allows you to watch different parts of the system
simultaneously, or to see different views at the same time (for example a plan and an elevation).
Tile Vertical, Tile Horizontal
Arranges all the windows (3D View, graph or spreadsheet) so that they fill the main window area and fit side by side
without overlapping.
Auto Arrange
If this is checked then the program automatically tiles windows every time a new window is created or deleted.
Switch to Model Browser
This command, and the corresponding command on the model browser's Window menu, enable you to switch focus
between the main form and the model browser window.
Session Log
Displays the Session Log.
User Interface, 3D Views
w

54
Statics Progress
Displays the Statics Progress Window.
Window List
This is a list of all currently open windows. If a window is hidden under others it can be selected easily from this list.
4.2.12 Help Menu
OrcaFlex Help
Opens the OrcaFlex online help system.
What's New
Gives a list of recent improvements and alterations to OrcaFlex.
Tutorial
Opens the help file at the start of the OrcaFlex tutorial.
Examples
Opens the help file at the introduction to the OrcaFlex Examples topics.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Lists the keyboard shortcuts used by OrcaFlex.
Orcina Home Page
Opens the Orcina homepage (www.orcina.com).
About
Displays a window giving the program version, details about Orcina Ltd and various other miscellaneous information.
4.3 3D VIEWS
3D Views are windows showing a spatial representation of the model. Two distinct types of 3D View are available: wire
frame, isometric shows an isometric projection of the model; shaded, perspective draws the model as solid objects
with lighting, shading, perspective and hidden line removal.
w
55

Figure: A wire frame 3D View (left) alongside a shaded 3D View (right)
3D View windows may be rotated, zoomed and panned to allow any aspect of the system to be viewed. The view is
controlled by a number of View parameters see View Parameters and the caption of a 3D View window shows the
current View Azimuth and View Elevation values, while a scale bar in the view indicates the current View Size.
Multiple view windows may be placed sidebyside so that you can view different parts of the system simultaneously or
view from different angles (for example a plan and elevation view). This allows you to build noninplane models on
screen with the mouse. Further 3D View windows are added by using the Window | Add 3D View menu item or by
CLICKING on the Add 3D View button on the tool bar. Windows may be arranged by dragging their borders or using the
Window | Tile and Window | Cascade menu items. 3D Views may be closed by CLICKING the cross at the top righthand
corner.
The objects in a 3D view are "live" in the sense that you can use the mouse pointer to select objects, drag them around in
the view and make connections between objects. See Selecting Objects, Creating and Destroying Objects, Dragging
Objects, Object Connections, for details. If you DOUBLE CLICK on an object then the data form for that object appears, so
that you can examine or edit its data.
Note: When using the shaded view objects cannot be selected, dragged etc. For this reason, the wire frame
view is most useful when building your model.
After running a simulation, or loading a simulation file, a dynamic replay (animation) can be shown in one or more 3D
View windows. A replay shows a sequence of snapshots of the model taken at specified intervals throughout part or all
of the simulation. Replays may be played in just one 3D View window, or in all of them simultaneously see Preferences.
Finally, 3D Views may be printed by selecting the view desired and using the print menu. Also, the picture may be
exported to a file or the windows clipboard.
w

56
Measuring Tape Tool (only available in wire frame mode)
You can measure distance on a 3D view using the measuring tape tool. Hold down the SHIFT and CTRL keys and then
drag a line between any two points the distance between them is displayed on the status bar. Note that this is the
distance in the plane of the 3D view.
4.3.1 View Parameters
The view shown in a 3D view window is determined by the following parameters, which can be adjusted using the view
control buttons or the Edit View Parameters item on the View menu.
View Centre
Defines the 3D global coordinates of the point that is shown at the centre of the window.
View Size
The diameter of the view area. It equals the distance represented by the smaller of the 2 sides of the view window. This
parameter must be greater than zero.
Example: If the window on screen is wider than it is high, and View Size = 100.0 then an object 100 units high
would just fill the height of the window.
View Azimuth and View Elevation
These determine the direction (from the view centre) from which the model is being viewed. The azimuth angle is
measured from the global X direction towards the global Y direction. The elevation angle is then measured upwards
(downwards for negative elevation angles) from there. The view shown is that seen when looking from this direction
i.e. by a viewer who is in that direction from the view centre.
Example: View Elevation +90 means looking in plan view from above, and View Elevation = 0, View Azimuth
= 270 (or 90) means a standard elevation view, looking along the Y axis.
Window Size
You can adjust the size of a 3D view window either by dragging the window border, or by setting its window size on the
view parameters form. The latter is sometimes useful when exporting a view or exporting a replay video, since it makes
it easier to export two different cases and get matching sizes.
Graphics Mode
Can be either Wire frame, isometric or Shaded, perspective.
Wire frame, isometric shows an isometric projection of the model; shaded, perspective draws the model as solid objects
with lighting, shading, perspective and hidden line removal.
Default View
Each model has its own Default View Parameters that are saved with the model data. Whenever a new 3D view is
created, it starts with this default view. You can set an existing 3D view to the default view by using the Reset to Default
View command (on the view menu or popup menu).
To set the default view parameters, first set up a 3D View to the default view that you want and then use the Set as
Default View command (on the view menu or popup menu).
See also the Reset to default view automatically preference.
4.3.2 View Control
You can adjust the view in a 3D view window using the view control buttons:
Button Menu Item Shortcut Action

View | Rotate Up CTRL+ Increase view elevation
w
57
+ SHIFT
View | Rotate Down CTRL+ Decrease view elevation

View | Rotate Right CTRL+ Increase view azimuth
+ SHIFT
View | Rotate Left CTRL+ Decrease view azimuth

View | Zoom In
CTRL+I
Zoom in
+ SHIFT
View | Zoom Out
SHIFT+CTRL+I
Zoom out

View | Change Graphics Mode
CTRL+G
Changes graphics mode

View | Edit View Parameters
CTRL+W
Edit View Parameters
Note: "+SHIFT" in the table above indicates that the SHIFT key is to be held down while pressing the button.
You can also use the mouse wheel button to change view. Turn the wheel to scroll the 3D view up and down. Turn it
with the CTRL key held down to zoom in or out on the location at which the mouse is currently pointing.
For more precise control you can set the view parameters explicitly using the View Parameters form.
Finally, 3D views can also be controlled using the View menu and various shortcut keys see Mouse and Keyboard
Actions and Navigating in 3D Views.
4.3.3 Navigating in 3D Views
Moving
Moving in 3D Views can be achieved by a variety of means:
Drag the 3D View with the SHIFT key held down. We call this direct manipulation of the view centre panning.
Use the scroll bars on the 3D View.
Use the cursor keys . Use these cursor keys with the CTRL key held down to effect larger shifts.
Move up and down with the PGUP and PGDN keys.
Edit the View Centre in the View Parameters form.
Rotating
Rotating in 3D Views can be achieved by a variety of means:
Drag the 3D View with the CTRL key held down. For shaded views only you can rotate about the viewer position (as
opposed to rotating about the view centre) by holding down the ALT key (as well as the CTRL key) whilst dragging.
Use the rotate buttons . Pressing these with the SHIFT key held reverses the rotation.
Use the Rotate Up, Rotate Down, Rotate Left or Rotate Right menu items or their shortcut keys CTRL+ALT+ .
For shaded views only you can rotate about the viewer position by holding the ALT key down whilst selecting these
menu items or shortcuts.
Use the Plan, Elevation, Rotate 90 or Rotate 90 menu items or their shortcut keys CTRL+P, CTRL+E, CTRL+Q and
SHIFT+CTRL+Q.
Edit the View Azimuth and View Elevation in the view parameters form.
w

58
Zooming
You can zoom into and out of 3D Views by using the zoom button , the zoom menu items and the shortcut keys
CTRL+I and SHIFT+CTRL+I. In addition, you can zoom in or out using the mouse wheel button with the CTRL key held
down.
The following methods of zooming are only available in wire frame 3D Views.
Also you can zoom in on a particular region of interest in a 3D view by defining a rectangle around it on screen using the
mouse. To do this, hold the ALT key down, place the mouse in one corner of the desired rectangle and press down the
left mouse button while dragging the mouse to the opposite corner. When you release, the region selected will be
expanded to fill the window.
To zoom out, repeat the operation holding down the SHIFT and ALT keys the region shown in the window will shrink to
fit into the rectangle drawn.
You can also zoom in and out by a fixed amount, keeping the same view centre, by using ALT+CLICK and
ALT+SHIFT+CLICK.
4.3.4 Shaded Graphics
The shaded graphics mode renders the model as solid objects with lighting, shading, perspective and hidden line
removal.

Figure: Shaded graphics
Using the Shaded Graphics mode
To a large extent there is no extra work required to build a model for the shaded graphics mode. You are able to build a
model or take an existing model designed using the wire frame mode and simply change to the shaded graphics mode to
w
59
see a high quality shaded rendering of your model. There are a number of things you can do to improve your experience
with the shaded graphics mode as described below.
Translucency
The Sea Surface and Seabed are drawn as textured surfaces. If there are objects on the other side of these surfaces then
they can be obscured. These surfaces are drawn with a userspecified amount of translucency which allows you to
compensate for this.
Importing 3D models
Objects like Lines are straightforward to draw. OrcaFlex uses the Line Type contact diameter to determine the thickness
of each segment of the Line.
Objects like Vessels present more difficulties. OrcaFlex by default will draw a solid, filledin shape based on the wire
frame data you have specified. While this can be sufficient you may prefer something less simplistic. Alternatively you
may import a more detailed 3D model, e.g. the turret moored FPSO above. You can import 3D models for 6D Buoys,
Wings and Shapes as well as for Vessels.
We have provided a very basic selection of generic models which you are free to use. There are models of a turret
moored FPSO, an installation vessel, a semisub and a subsea template. For information on generating and importing 3D
models specific to your project please refer to our website at www.orcina.com/Support/ShadedGraphics.
Viewer Position
Because the shaded graphics mode uses perspective it requires the concept of the viewer position as well as the viewer
centre. The isometric wire frame view has no such requirement. OrcaFlex defines the viewer position to be in a line in
the view direction (defined by the view azimuth and view elevation) at a distance of view size * 1.5 from the view
centre. It is possible to rotate the view around both the view centre and around the viewer position.
Video export
Just as for wire frame views OrcaFlex can export video files of a replays in shaded views. When producing videos it is
very important to use compression, otherwise the video file size becomes unreasonably large. The software that
performs this compression is called a codec.
For wire frame replays OrcaFlex uses a builtin codec called runlength encoding. This codec is not suitable for shaded
replays and in fact there is no suitable builtin codec in Windows. We would recommend using an MPEG4 codec of
which many are available. In our experience the freely available XVID codec performs very well. The XVID codec can be
downloaded from our website at: www.orcina.com/Support/ShadedGraphics.
Should you wish to use a different codec you can select this from the Preferences form.
Hardware Requirements
The shaded graphics mode does require the presence of a DirectX 9 compatible graphics card. In our experience the
most important factor to consider when choosing a card to work with shaded graphics is the amount of memory. We
would recommend using a card with 256MB or more.
It is also important to make sure that your computer's graphics settings specify a colour mode of 16 bits (65536
colours) or better.
Notes: If your machine's graphics capabilities are insufficient then the shaded graphics mode may fail to
function properly or indeed fail to function at all. For example, low quality, blocky images usually
indicate a graphics card with insufficient memory. This problem can also manifest itself by failure to
draw the sky which appears plain white.
For best results you should centre your model close to the global origin. The Move Selected Objects
facility can help you do this.
4.3.5 How Objects are Drawn
Each object in the model is drawn as a series of lines using the Pen Colour, Line Width and Style (solid, dashed etc.)
defined in the drawing data for that object. You can change the pen colours etc. used at any time by editing the drawing
w

60
data for that object. To change the pen colour, select and CLICK the colour button on the data form and then CLICK on the
new colour wanted.
You can also exclude (or include) individual objects from the 3D view, by opening the model browser, selecting the
object and then using the Hide (or Show) command on the browser's Edit or popup menu.
Notes: In Windows, a line width of zero does not mean "don't draw" - it means draw with the minimum line
width. To suppress drawing either set the line style to null (the blank style at the bottom of the drop
down list) or else hide the object.
On some machines the display driver cannot draw the dashed or dotted pen styles and instead draws
nothing. So on such machines only the solid and blank pen styles work.
Wire Frame Drawing
For wire frame views the various objects are drawn as follows:
The various coordinate systems can be drawn as small triplets of lines showing their origin and the orientation of
their axes. The wave, current and wind directions can be drawn as arrows in the top right hand corner of 3D views.
You can control both what is drawn (see 3D View Drawing Preferences) and the drawing data used.
The Seabed is drawn as a grid using the seabed pen.
The Sea Surface is drawn as a grid or as a single line. This is controlled by the user's choice of Surface Type as
specified on the drawing page on the Environment data form. If the Surface Type is set to Single Line then one line is
drawn, aligned in the wave direction. If the Surface Type is set to Grid then a grid of lines is drawn. This line or grid
is drawn using the sea surface pen.
Shapes are drawn either as wire frames (Blocks, Cylinders and Curved Plates) or as a grid (Planes). As well as
controlling the pen colour, width and style, for shapes you can also control the number of lines used to draw the
shape.
Vessels are drawn as a wire frame of edges and vertices defined by the user on the Vessel and Vessel Types data
forms.
3D Buoys are drawn as a single vertical line of length equal to the height of the buoy.
6D Buoys are drawn as a wire frame of edges and vertices. For Lumped Buoys, the vertices and edges are defined by
the user on the buoy data form. For Spar Buoys and Towed Fish the vertices and edges are automatically generated
by OrcaFlex to represent the stack of cylinders that make up the buoy. As an option Spar Buoys and Towed Fish can
be drawn as a stack of circular cylinders this is the default setting.
Wings are drawn as rectangles in either the 6D Buoy pen or the Wing Type pen as determined in the Wing Type
data.
Lines are drawn as a series of straight lines, one for each segment, joining points drawn at each node. Separate pens
are used for the segments and nodes, so you can, for example, increase the pen width used for the nodes to make
them more visible. There is also, on the Line Data form, a choice of which pen to use to draw the segments.
Clumps are drawn as a thin vertical bar.
Drag Chains are drawn using the colour and line style specified on the attachment types form. The hanging part of
the chain is drawn as a line, of length equal to the hanging length and at the angle calculated using the above theory.
The supported part of the chain (if any is supported) is separately drawn as a blob at the seabed, directly beneath
the node. The drag chain drawing therefore directly reflects the way in which the chain is modelled.
Flex Joints are drawn as a circular blob using the colour and line style specified on the attachment types form.
Links and Winches are drawn as a straight line segments joining the connection points.
Lines, Links and Winches and Shapes are special slave objects that can be connected to other master objects see
Connecting Objects. To allow these connections to be made, each slave object has a joint at each end that you can
connect to a master object or else leave Free. When the program is in Reset or Statics Complete state these joints are
drawn as follows:
w
61
The joint at End A of a line or end 1 of a Link or Winch is drawn as a small triangle. The other joints are drawn as small
squares. This distinguishes which end of a Line, Link or Winch is which.
If the joint is connected to a master object, then it is drawn in the colour of the master object to which it is connected. If
the joint is Free, then it is drawn in the colour of the Line, Link or Winch to which it belongs.
Shaded Drawing
For shaded views the various objects are drawn as follows:
View axes and global axes are drawn as small triplets of lines showing their origin and the orientation of their axes.
The wave, current and wind directions can be drawn as arrows in the top right hand corner of 3D views. You can
control both what is drawn (see 3D View Drawing Preferences) and the drawing data used.
The Sea Surface and Seabed are drawn as textured surfaces using their respective pen colours. Both surfaces can be
drawn with userspecified levels of translucency.
Shapes are drawn as solid objects and Planes allow for userspecified levels of translucency. Alternatively Shapes
can be represented by an imported 3D model.
Vessels are drawn as a solid, filledin shape based on the wire frame data. Alternatively Vessels can be represented
by an imported 3D model.
3D Buoys and Clumps are drawn as an ellipsoid with the specified volume and height.
Lumped 6D Buoys are drawn as a solid, filledin shape based on the wire frame data. Spar Buoys and Towed Fish
are drawn as solid objects using the specified cylinder geometry. Alternatively 6D Buoys can be represented by an
imported 3D model.
Wings are drawn as plates using their specified span and chord. Alternatively they can be represented by an
imported 3D model.
Lines are drawn as a series of cylinders, one for each segment using the contact diameter as specified on the Line
Type form. There is also, on the Line Data form, a choice of which pen to use to draw the segments.
Drag Chains are drawn as a chain with bar diameter derived from the drag chain's effective diameter.
Flex Joints are drawn as cylinders with radius 2R and length 4R where R is the radius of the node to which the flex
joint is attached.
Links and Winches are drawn as a series of cylinders joining the connection points. The diameter of the cylinders
can be specified on the object's data form.
4.3.6 Selecting Objects
A single CLICK on or near an object in a 3D View selects it ready for further operations. The currently selected object is
indicated in the Status bar. All objects have a hot zone around them. If several objects have overlapping hot zones at the
mouse position, they will be selected in turn at subsequent CLICKS.
To deselect the object (without selecting another object) CLICK on the 3D view away from all objects. CLICK on an object
to open its data form.
4.3.7 Creating and Destroying Objects
When the model is in Reset or Statics Complete state then you can create and destroy objects using the mouse.
To create a new object, CLICK on the appropriate new object button on the tool bar or select the Model | New Object
menu item. The mouse cursor changes to show this. A new object of that type is created at the position of the next CLICK
on a 3D View.
You can also create a new object by copying an existing one. To do this select the object and press CTRL+C to take a copy
of it. You can now press CTRL+V (more than once if you want more than one copy) again the mouse cursor changes and
the copy object is pasted at the position of the next mouse CLICK in a 3D view. This method of creating a new object is
particularly useful if you want an almost identical object you can create a copy of it and then just change the data that
you want to differ.
User Interface, Replays
w

62
To destroy an object, simply select it and then press the DELETE key. You will be asked to confirm the action.
4.3.8 Dragging Objects
An unlocked object may be dragged to relocate it by pressing the mouse button down and holding it down while moving
the mouse. When the mouse button is released, then the object will be positioned at the new location. The current
coordinates of the object are shown in the Status Bar during the drag operation.
Note: Objects must be dragged a certain minimum distance (set in the Preferences dialogue box - see
Preferences) before the drag operation is started. This prevents accidental movement of objects when
DOUBLE CLICKING etc.
Objects may be locked to prevent unintended drag operations moving them (see Locking an object). Their coordinates
may still be edited on their data form.
Note: Slave objects that are connected are moved relative to their master's local origin. Other objects are
moved in the global coordinate frame.
Dragging is only available in Reset or Statics Complete states, and when the object is not locked.
4.3.9 Connecting Objects
Unlocked slave objects (e.g. Lines, Links, etc.) can be connected to master objects using the mouse in a 3D View (see
Object Connections). First select the end of the slave that you want to connect by CLICKING on or near its end joint. Then
hold down the CTRL key while CLICKING on the master object the two will then be connected together. This operation is
only permitted for masterslave object pairs, for example connecting a line to a vessel. The connection is indicated in the
Status Bar and the joint connected is drawn in the colour of the master object to show the connection.
To Free a joint i.e. to disconnect it select it and then CTRL+CLICK on the sea surface.
To connect a joint to a Fixed Point, select it and then CTRL+CLICK on the global axes.
To connect an object to an Anchor (a fixed point with a coordinate relative to the seabed), select it and then CTRL+CLICK
on the seabed grid. If the object is close to the seabed then the program snaps it onto the seabed. This allows an object to
be placed exactly on the seabed. If you require an anchor coordinate close to, but not on the seabed, connect it to the
seabed at a distance and then drag it nearer or edit the coordinate in the Data Form.
4.3.10 Printing, Copying and Exporting Views
3D Views may be printed, copied to the windows clipboard, or exported to a windows graphics metafile, so that the
pictures may be used in other applications such as word processors and graphics packages.
First select the view and adjust the viewpoint as desired. Then to copy to the clipboard press CTRL+C, or select Copy
from the popup menu. The popup menu also has commands to print or export the 3D view. If needed, you can first
adjust the printer setup using the Printer Setup command on the popup menu or on the File menu.
If you are printing the view on a black and white printer (or are transferring the view into a document which you intend
to print on a black and white printer) then it is often best to first set OrcaFlex to output in monochrome (use the
Tools|Preferences|Output menu item). This avoids light colours appearing as faint shades of grey.
After a 3D view has been transferred to another application you should be careful not to change its aspect ratio, since
this will produce unequal scaling in the vertical and horizontal directions and invalidate the scale bar. In Word you can
maintain aspect ratio by dragging the corners of the picture, whereas if you drag the centres of the sides then the aspect
ratio is changed.
4.4 REPLAYS
A Replay is a sequence of 3D views shown one after another to give an animation. A replay is therefore like a short
length of film, with each frame of the film being a snapshot of a model as it was at a given time.
There are various controls and parameters that allow you to control a replay. You can also view a series of snapshots all
superimposed onto a single view see Superimpose Times.
There are two types of replay:
w
63
Active Simulation Replays show the model as it was at regularly spaced times during the currently active
simulation. This type of replay is therefore only available when a simulation is active and can only cover the period
that has already been simulated. If you have a time history graph window open when the replay is run, then the
replay time is indicated on the graph.
Custom Replays are replays where you have complete control over frames which make up the replay. This means
that, for example, you are not restricted to regularly spaced times; you can have frames from different simulation
files in the same replay; you can include frames showing the static configuration of a model; you are able to vary the
view size, view angles and view centre to achieve panning, rotating and zooming effects. Custom replays were
originally introduced to help visualise series of static snapshots, for example during a lowering operation. However,
the facility is very powerful and you are certainly not restricted to this application. See Custom Replays for details.
Export Video
Replays can be exported as a video clip in AVI file format, using the Export Video button on the replay parameters form.
An AVI file is generated containing the replay using the most recently selected 3D view window and using the same
period, frame interval and speed as the replay.
When you export a video clip you will be asked to select a file name for the video using the standard Save File window.
At the bottom of this window is a checkbox titled Include frame details in video. If this is selected then each frame in
the video has details of that frame (e.g. simulation time) written in the top left hand corner of the frame. There is also a
button which provides a link to the Video preferences.
AVI is a standard video format, so the file can then be imported into other applications, for example to be shown in a
presentation. The compression method (the codec) used for the generating the video file can be set on the Preferences
form.
Note: AVI files can be very large if the window size is large or there are a lot of frames in the replay. Also,
resizing video clips (after pasting into your presentation) will introduce aliasing (digitisation errors),
so it is often best to set the 3D View window size to the required size before you export the video.
4.4.1 Replay Parameters
The replay can be controlled by the following parameters that can be set in the Replay Parameters dialogue
window, accessed using the Replay Parameters button.
Replay Period
The part of the simulation that the replay covers. You can select to replay the whole simulation, just one simulation
stage (an asterisk * denotes an incomplete stage), the latest wave period or else a user specified period. If you select
User Specified then you can enter your own Start and End Times for the replay period. These can be set to '~' which is
interpreted as simulation start time and simulation finish time respectively.
Interval
The simulation time step size between frames of the replay. The value '~' is interpreted as the actual sample interval, i.e.
the smallest possible interval.
Using shorter intervals means that you see a smoother animation (though the extra drawing required may slow the
animation).
Example: For a simulation with stages of 8 seconds each, selecting stage 2 and a replay time step of 0.5 seconds causes
the replay to show 16 frames, corresponding to t=8.0, 8.5, 9.0 ... 15.5.
Target Speed
Determines how fast the replay is played. It is specified as a percentage of real time, so 100% means at real time, 200%
means twice as fast etc. As a special case, the fastest allowable target speed (10000% at the moment) is taken to mean
"as fast as possible".
w

64
Note: The specified target speed is not always achievable because the computer may not be able to draw
each frame quickly enough. When this happens, the replay will be played as fast as possible. Replays
may be slow if you specify thick lines (line width>1) for objects in the model, since this can increase the
drawing time.
Continuous
Continuous means replaying like an endless film loop, automatically cycling back to the first frame after the last frame
has been shown; this is suitable for replays of whole cycles of regular cyclic motion. Noncontinuous means that there
will be a pause at the end of the replay, before it starts again at the beginning; this is more suitable for noncyclic
motion.
All Views
If this is selected, then the replay is shown in all 3D Views simultaneously, allowing motion to be viewed from several
different viewpoints. Otherwise the replay is played in the currently selected view window only.
Note: Replaying in several 3D views simultaneously may be slow on some machines.
Show Trails
If this is selected, then when each frame of the replay is drawn the previous frame is first overdrawn in grey this
results in grey 'trails' showing the path of each object.
4.4.2 Replay Control
The replay can be controlled from the Replay menu, by using toolbar buttons or with shortcut keys. In addition, some
replay settings can only be modified on the Replay Parameters form.
The toolbar has a section dedicated to replay control:

Figure: Replay toolbar controls
The replay control buttons, menu items are listed in the table below:

Replay | Start Replay
CTRL+R
Start replay

Replay | Stop Replay
CTRL+R
Stop replay

Replay | Step Replay Forwards
CTRL+A
Step to next frame and pause
+ SHIFT
Replay | Step Replay Backwards
CTRL+B
Step to previous frame and pause
Replay | Replay Faster
CTRL+F
Speed up replay
Replay | Replay Slower
SHIFT+CTRL+F
Slow down replay

Replay | Replay Parameters
CTRL+D
Edit replay parameters
Replay Slider Control
The final part of the replay toolbar is the replay slider. This allows direct control of the replay time. Drag
the slider to the left to move to an earlier part of the replay and to the right to move to a later part. For fine grained
adjustment of replay time you can use the Replay | Step Replay Forwards and Replay | Step Replay Backwards actions or
alternatively their shortcuts, CTRL+A and CTRL+B. The replay time is displayed on and can be controlled from Time
History graphs.
w
65
4.4.3 Custom Replays
Custom replays allow you to piece together arbitrary frames from different OrcaFlex files. Each frame of the replay can
be either the static configuration for a specified data file, or a snapshot of a specified time in a dynamic simulation file.
Using frames of static configurations you can string together a series of static snapshots giving, for example, an
animation of an installation procedure. Using frames from simulation files allows you to create replays where the
frames are from one or more simulations, and, if you wish, vary the time intervals between frames. Frames of both static
and dynamic configurations can be included in the same custom replay. In addition you are able to vary the view size,
view angles and view centre to achieve panning, rotating and zooming effects.
To use the custom replay feature you must first set the Replay Type data item on the Replay Parameters form to Custom
Replay. Next you must build the custom replay which is most easily done using the Custom Replay Wizard, which can be
opened by clicking the Custom Replay Wizard button.
Replay Specification
This is the file containing the custom replay specification that is the file that is saved by the Custom Replay Wizard.
Custom Replay Parameters
Custom replays also make use of some of the parameters needed for standard simulation replays. These parameters are
Target Speed, Continuous, All Views and Show Trails.
4.4.4 Custom Replay Wizard
The Custom Replay Wizard allows you to define a series of replay sections. Each replay section can show either:
1. A series of regularly spaced snapshots from an OrcaFlex simulation file.
2. The static configuration of a model specified by an OrcaFlex data file.
Different replay sections may use different simulation or data files.
Custom Replay Files
When you have built your custom replay you must save it using the File menu or save button on the toolbar. Custom
replay files can be opened in a similar way.
We recommend that you save your custom replay file before you start setting up the replay sections. This is because
once you have saved the custom replay file you will be able to use relative paths for the OrcaFlex file names.
Custom Replay Data
Custom replay specifies view parameters (size, position, angles and graphics mode)
If this data item is not checked then the replay will use the view parameters of whichever 3D View window it appears
in. In this mode of operation you will be able manually to pan, rotate and zoom the 3D View using the normal buttons
and shortcuts.
If this data item is checked then you will be required to specify the view parameters (view size, view centre, view
azimuth, view elevation and graphics mode) for each replay section. This allows you to include panning, rotating and
zooming effects in your replay.
While learning how custom replays work we recommend that you do not check this data item.
Use smoothed panning, rotating and zooming effects
This item is only available if the "Custom replay specifies view parameters" option is enabled. If you are panning,
rotating and zooming during replay sections then the transition from one section to another sometimes appears to be
disjointed. If this option is checked then the transition between sections is smoothed.
Frame interval in real time
OrcaFlex needs to know how fast to play the replay. This data item specifies the interval, in real time, between each
replay frame, assuming a target replay speed of 100%. If the target replay speed is, say 200%, then the interval between
frames will be half this value, and so on.
w

66
Replay Sections
You can specify any number of replay sections. For each replay section you must also specify the following:
Replay Section Name
This is a descriptive name for the replay section. When the replay is running OrcaFlex displays a description of the
current frame in the message box on the status bar this includes the replay section name. This description can also be
included in exported videos.
OrcaFlex File Name
If the replay section is to show snapshots from an OrcaFlex simulation then this should be the name of the simulation
file. If the replay section is to show a static configuration this should be the name of an OrcaFlex data file.
Note: The custom replay displays static configurations by loading the OrcaFlex data file and then performing
the static calculation for that model. This can be quite time consuming for certain models. If so, you can
speed the static calculation up by using the Use Calculated Positions feature when preparing the
OrcaFlex data files.
Simulation Time From, Simulation Time To
This specifies the period of the simulation covered by the replay section. These are OrcaFlex simulation times for the
specified simulation file of this replay section.
If the replay section is a static snapshot then these data items are not editable.
Number of Frames
This is the total number of frames in the replay section. If your custom replay is a series of static snapshots then you
would usually set this value to 1.
Included in Replay
This allows you to exclude certain sections from the replay. This may be useful while developing the custom replay
because it allows you to concentrate on particular replay sections.
PowerPoint slide number
Custom replays can be used to control PowerPoint slideshows. To make use of this you need to be showing a
PowerPoint slideshow while the custom replay is running. At the start of each replay section OrcaFlex will change the
PowerPoint slide to the slide number specified here.
If you do not wish to use this feature you should leave this data item at its default value of '~'.
View Parameter data
The following data items are only available when the specifies view parameters option is checked.
From View Parameters, To View Parameters
The view size, view centre, view azimuth and view elevation for the first and last frames of the replay section. These
view parameters are varied between these values for the other frames in the replay section.
Hint: These values can be copied from OrcaFlex's View Parameters form using the clipboard.
Graphics Mode
Specifies either the Wire frame or Shaded graphics mode for the replay section.
4.4.5 Superimpose Times
Allows model configurations for different times of the simulation to be superimposed in 3D Views. Use
View | Current Position to return to the normal view.
The data items are:
w
User Interface, Data Forms
67
List of Times
The simulation times which will be superimposed.
All Views
If this box is checked then the superimposed view is drawn in all 3D View windows. If not then it is drawn in the
selected 3D View.
4.5 DATA FORMS
Each object in the model has data items that define its properties. The data are examined and edited in the object's
Data Form, which can be accessed by various methods:
use the Model Browser
DOUBLE CLICK the object in a 3D view
RIGHT CLICK the object in a 3D view and use the popup menu.
If a simulation is active then most data items cannot be changed since they affect the calculation, but you can change
things like the object's colour.
Control Buttons
Ok
Accepts the data changes made and then closes the form.
Cancel
Cancels the data changes made and then closes the form.
Next
Accepts the data changes made and then displays the next form in sequence. Holding the SHIFT key down while CLICKING
the Next button accepts the changes and then displays the previous data form in sequence. You can also use the
keyboard shortcuts F6 for next and SHIFT+F6 for previous.
Pop-up Menu
The popup menu on a data form provides various facilities, including:
The data form can be printed, copied to the clipboard or exported to a file. The data for the whole model may be
printed using the File | Print menu item.
Access to the next and previous data form and to the Variable Data form.
The batch script names for the currentlyselected block of data items.
Data forms for 3D Buoys, 6D Buoys, Vessels and Lines provide a Connections Report. This is a spreadsheet listing
information about other objects connected to it. Note that the same information, but for all objects in the model, can
be displayed using the Model | Show Connections Report menu item.
On data forms of some model objects, a report of the properties of that object. The report displays properties like
weight in air, displacement, weight in water etc. These reports are currently available for General Data, 3D Buoys,
6D Buoys, Vessels, Lines, Line Types and Clump Types.
Calculator
A simple calculator is available from any OrcaFlex data form. It can be opened from the popup menu or alternatively by
pressing F12. Numbers can be transferred to and from it with standard Windows copy (CTRL+C) and paste (CTRL+V). The
calculator can also be closed by pressing F12 if you do this then the value in the calculator is transferred to the active
edit cell.
w

68
4.5.1 Data Fields
Data items on each Data Form are displayed in Fields, generally with related fields organised into Groups or Tables. You
can select a field with the mouse, or use the keyboard to navigate around the form. TAB moves from group to group, and
the arrow keys move across the fields in a group.
Where data are complex the form has pages of a tab index that choose between a number of distinct sections of the data.
Where tabular data are shown on the data form, there is usually a separate field that specifies the number of entries in
the table, and if necessary scroll bars are shown use these to navigate through the whole table. Please note that if scroll
bars are present, then only part of the data is currently being displayed.
The following types of fields are used:
Text
A general string of text, used for example for titles and comments.
Name
Each object is given a name, which you can edit. Object names must be unique you can not have two objects with the
same name. Certain names are reserved for special purposes: Fixed, Anchored and Free (see Connecting Objects).
Numeric
Numbers can be entered in a number of formats such as 3, 3.0, 0.3, .3 or 3.0e6 or 3.0E6. It is possible to enter more digits
than those shown in the field, but beware that it will not be possible to see them again without editing again and using
the arrow keys to examine the rest of field.
For some numeric data items the value '~' is permitted. For example this is sometimes used to mean 'default value'.
Details are given in the descriptions of the relevant data items.
Spin Buttons
These are small buttons with up and down arrows, used for incrementing and decrementing the associated field (such
as the number of entries in a table). Using the mouse, CLICK on the upper or lower parts of the button to increment or
decrement the associated counter.
Multi-choice Buttons
These are used when a number of options are available. Activate the button to step on to the next available option.
Check Boxes
These show a tick, meaning selected, or are blank, meaning not selected. CLICK or press RETURN to change.
Colour Selection
These show as a block of colour. DOUBLE CLICK or press RETURN to open the Colour Selection dialogue box. The desired
colour may now be selected.
List Boxes
These show the current selection, such as the name of another object that this object is connected to. DOUBLE CLICK or
press RETURN to show a List Box, and then select another item and RETURN to accept the new choice.
4.5.2 Data Form Editing
The TAB, SHIFT+TAB, HOME, END and ARROW keys and the mouse can be used to navigate around the Edit Form.
Editing mode is entered by DOUBLE CLICKING a cell with the mouse, or by starting to type alphanumeric characters,
which are entered into the field as they are typed. The characters that have been typed can be edited by using the arrow
keys to move around (now within the field) and the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.
Editing mode is ended, and the new value takes effect, when you press RETURN or select another field or button on the
form. To end editing mode but reject the edit (and so keep the old value) press ESC.
w
69
Many numeric fields have limits on the range of values that can be entered, for example an object's mass must always be
greater than zero. Warnings are given if invalid values are typed.
Input can also be from the Windows clipboard. CTRL+C copies the selected field or block of fields to the clipboard whilst
CTRL+V pastes from the clipboard into the selected field. In this way data can be easily transferred to and from
Spreadsheets, Word Processors, etc.
Mouse Actions
CLICK
Select Field
CLICK+DRAG,
SHIFT+CLICK
Select a block of fields
DOUBLE CLICK
Start Edit Mode in this field (please also see Data Fields)
SECONDARY
BUTTON CLICK
Context sensitive popup menu for copying, exporting and printing the form and, for some model
objects, viewing additional properties
Group Movement
TAB
Next Group
SHIFT+TAB
Previous Group
ALT+...
Move to the group with this letter underlined in its heading
Field Movement
Go to adjacent row or column
HOME
Go to leftmost column
END
Go to rightmost column
PAGE UP
Go to top row
PAGE DOWN
Go to bottom row
Table Editing
INS, DEL Insert or delete a row of a table
Start Editing
0..9, A..Z
Edit (replace)
During Editing
, HOME, END Move within field
End Editing
ESC
Cancel edit
Accept edit and move to previous/next row
RETURN
Accept edit
Copy / Paste
CTRL+C
Copy selected field/block to clipboard
CTRL+V
Paste from clipboard into selected field
CTRL+D
Fill selection from top (copy top cell down)
CTRL+R
Fill selection from left (copy leftmost cell to right)
CTRL+U
SHIFT+CTRL+D
Fill selection from bottom (copy bottom cell up)
CTRL+L
SHIFT+CTRL+R
Fill selection from right (copy rightmost cell to left)
User Interface, Results
w

70
4.6 RESULTS
4.6.1 Producing Results
You can access results by either CLICKING on the Results button on the toolbar or by using the Select Results menu
item; the Select Results form then appears.
There is a Keep Open switch on the form's context menu, which allows you to choose whether the form automatically
closes when you select a result, or alternatively stays open (and on top) until you explicitly close it.
Graphs and Tables can be sent straight to the printer by CLICKING the Print button. If the values of a graph are required
in text form then CLICK the Values button this give the values in a Spreadsheet window, which can handle multiple
variables if desired.
The Select Results form allows you to select the results you want by specifying:
Result Type
This option allows you to select which of the various types of results output you require. Results are available as text
tables (summary results, full results, offset tables, statistics, linked statistics or line clashing reports) or as graphs (time
histories, range graphs, XY graphs, offset graphs or spectral response graphs). The types of results available depend on
the current program state.
Object
The object for which you want results (selected in the same way as in the Model Browser) and for some objects which
point in the object.
For the Environment you must specify the global X,Y,Z coordinates of the point for which you want results.
For 6D Buoys that have wings attached, results for the buoy and for each wing are available separately.
For 6D Buoys and Vessels the position, velocity and acceleration results are reported at a user specified point on the
object. This point is specified in object local coordinates.
For lines you must specify the arc length along the line see Line Results.
Period
For time histories, XY graphs and range graphs you must specify the period of the simulation to be included. This can be
one of the stages of the simulation, the Whole Simulation, Specified Period or Latest Wave (only available if the wave
is regular). The Specified Period values can be set to '~' which is interpreted as simulation start time and simulation
finish time respectively.
For Range Graphs the period can also be Static State or Instantaneous Value. The Static State period is only available
after a statics calculation and the graph shows a curve of the values in the static configuration. The Instantaneous
Value period is available when a simulation has been run. It shows a curve of the values at the instantaneous simulation
time. This is normally the latest simulated time. However, if a replay is active then the graph shows a curve of values at
the active replay time. This allows you to see, for an entire line, how a results variable evolves over a simulation.
Variable
The desired variable(s).
Logging for results
The summary and full results are taken directly from the current state of the model. All the other results are derived
from the simulation log file which OrcaFlex creates automatically when a simulation is run. As the simulation
progresses, OrcaFlex samples the variables for each object at regular intervals and stores the sampled values in the log
file. All time histories, statistics and range graphs are derived from the simulation log file.
You can control the time resolution of the results by setting the Target Sample Interval data item on the general data
form. This must be done before the simulation is started. Decreasing the sample interval will improve the time
w
71
resolution of the results (and increase the number of samples taken). However, because more samples are taken this
will also increase the size of the simulation file that is created.
Spike Logging
A special algorithm is used for logging results that tend to vary rapidly to ensure that any spikes that may occur
between samples are recorded. We refer to this algorithm as spike logging.
Line Results
OrcaFlex spike logs Effective Tension, Torque, Clash Force, Solid Contact Force, End Force results and Vortex Force
results. In addition other results which are derived from these quantities are effectively spike logged by association.
Such variables include Wall Tension, Normalised Tension, Mean Axial Strain, Max Axial Strain, Direct Tensile Stress, von
Mises Stress, ZZ Stress
Link and Winch Results
OrcaFlex spike logs Tension and Velocity results for both Links and Winches.
Inadequate segmentation warning
If any lines have, during the simulation, gone into greater compression than their segment Euler load then a warning
note is added to the Results form. Such lines are marked with the symbol in the Model Browser. Usually this means
that finer segmentation is needed in some sections of these lines in order to model compression adequately.
Offset warning
If any of the multiple statics calculations have failed then a warning note is added to the Results form.
4.6.2 Selecting Variables
Each object has associated with it:
A currently selected variable that will be used for graphs.
A set of statistics variables that will be included in statistics reports.
For the currently selected object, the currently selected variables are shown in a list on the results selection form.
If Statistics results are selected, then the list shows the set of variables that will be included in the statistics report and
you can add or remove variables by CLICKING on them in the list.
If a Time History is selected, the list shows the (single) currently selected variable and you can select a different
variable by CLICKING on it in the list.
You can also multiselect variables, using:
CLICK
select one variable
DRAG
select a range of variables
SHIFT+CLICK
select a range of variables
CTRL+CLICK
add / remove one variable
CTRL+DRAG
add / remove range of variables
If more than one variable is selected, then the Values button will give a single Spreadsheet Window with a time history
column for each selected variable, and the Graph button will give a separate Graph Window for each variable.
New columns can be appended to existing time history spreadsheet windows, as follows:
Select the spreadsheet window to which you want to append, by clicking on it.
Then open the Select Results form and select the variables that you want to append.
Then hold the CTRL button down and click the Values button.
w

72
Provided that the selected spreadsheet window is a time history values table and that the time periods for both sets
of histories match, then the new time histories will be appended to the active window. This allows you to have a
single window containing results from different objects.
4.6.3 Summary and Full Results
These spreadsheet windows give the current state of an object or of the whole model. For example, in Statics Complete
state the full results tables show the positions of objects in their static position. If a simulation is active, then they show
the positions of objects at the latest time calculated.
To obtain one of these results tables:
Select Summary Results or Full Results on the Results form.
Select the object required.
Click the Table button.
The summary results are simply an abbreviated form of the full results, in which the results for lines only include the
end nodes, not all of the intermediate nodes.
When the model is in Statics Complete state the summary and full results include estimates of the shortest natural
periods of objects or of the whole model. These can be used to determine suitable simulation time steps. The simulation
inner time step should normally be no more than 1/10th of the shortest natural period of the model this is given at the
top of the summary results or full results report for All Objects. In addition the full results table for a line contains
detailed reports of the shortest natural periods.
4.6.4 Statistics
The Statistics report provides, for each statistics variable:
The minimum and maximum values and the simulation times when they occurred.
The mean and standard deviation (i.e. the root mean square about the mean).
These statistics are reported for each of a number of periods of the simulation. If Statistics by Wave Period is selected
then these periods are successive wave periods; otherwise they are the stages of the simulation.
To obtain a Statistics report:
Select Statistics.
Select the object and the variables of interest (see Selecting Variables).
CLICK the Table button.
The report is presented in a spreadsheet.
Warning: The samples in a time history are not independent. They have what is called 'serial correlation', which
often affects the accuracy of statistical results based on them.
Note: Be careful when interpreting statistics of Line Clearance and Seabed Clearance, since these results are
already minima - the shortest distance to any other line and to any point on the seabed. For example,
the maximum of Line Contact Clearance will be the maximum value that the smallest clearance took
during the period.
4.6.5 Linked Statistics
The Linked Statistics table relates a group of variables for a given object. For a specified group of variables and a
specified period of simulation, OrcaFlex finds the minimum and maximum of each variable and reports these extreme
values, the times they occurred and the values that all the other variables took at those times.
To obtain a Linked Statistics report:
Select Linked Statistics.
Select the required object and period.
w
73
Select the variables of interest (see Selecting Variables).
CLICK the OK button.
Also, see the notes about statistics.
4.6.6 Offset Tables
These Text Windows are available only after multiple statics calculations and only for vessels. For a given offset
direction they report the total load on the vessel and show how it varies with offset distance. The worst tension in any
segment of any line connected to the vessel is also reported for each offset.
To obtain an Offset Table:
Select Offset Table on the Results form.
Select the offset vessel.
Select the offset direction required.
4.6.7 Line Clashing Report
The Line Clashing Report produces a detailed tabular report about the line clashing events during a simulation.
To obtain a Line Clashing Report:
Select Line Clashing Report on the Results form.
Select a line.
Select the period required.
Contents of the Line Clashing Report
The report lists a summary table followed by a detailed table as described below.
Summary table
The summary table lists all clash events for segments on the selected line. A clash event is deemed to start when a
segment from the selected line first comes into contact with another line segment. We shall refer to the selected line as
L1 and to the particular segment on this line as S1. The clash event ends when S1 is no longer in contact with any other
line segments.
Note: During the course of a clash event the segment S1 may be in contact with a number of different line
segments from other lines, e.g. if the clash is a sliding contact. This is counted as a single clash event
from the perspective of S1.
For each clash event the following results are reported:
Event number
A number of clash events may occur during the simulation. Each event is given a number to identify it. This is useful
when relating the summary results of a clash event to the detailed results.
Segment number and segment arclength
This identifies the segment S1 on the selected line.
w

74
Start Time, End Time and Duration
The simulation time of the start and end of the clash event together with its duration.
Total Impulse
The total impulse of the clash event.
Peak Clash Force
A scalar value reporting the greatest value of clash force achieved during the clash event. The clash force vector is
monitored during each clash event and the greatest magnitude of this vector is reported.
Peak Clash Energy
A scalar value reporting the greatest value of clash energy achieved during the clash event.
Max Penetration
At each time step we calculate the depth of penetration between the outer surfaces of segment S1 and all other
segments. Let S2 be a segment on another line.
Let the radii of the two segments be r1 and r2 (as defined by the line type contact diameter). OrcaFlex calculates the
shortest separation distance, d, between the centrelines of the two segments. The penetration of these two segments is
defined to be (r1 + r2) d. The value reported as Max Penetration is the maximum value of penetration between segment
S1 and any other segment over the duration of the clash event.
Detailed table
The detailed table reports information about each individual contact between segment S1 and another segment. If
during the course of a clash event segment S1 is in contact with a number of segments on other lines then the start time,
end time and duration of each of those individual contacts is reported.
4.6.8 Time History and XY Graphs
Time History graphs are of a single variable against time. XY graphs are of one time dependent variable against another.
The period of simulation covered by the graph is chosen from a list.
To obtain a Time History or XY Graph:
1. Select Time History or XY Graph on the Results form.
2. Select the object required.
3. Select the variable required (see Selecting Variables). More than one variable can be selected for time histories.
For XY graphs the steps 2 and 3 need to be done for both axes. Do this by CLICKING on one of the options labelled X-axis
or Y-axis, which are located at the bottom of the results form, and then repeating steps 2 and 3.
CLICK the Graph button.
Time history and XY graphs are displayed in Graph Windows and they are "live" i.e. they are regularly updated during
the simulation. You can therefore set up one or more graph windows at the start of a simulation and watch the graphs
develop as the simulation progresses. If you reset the simulation then the curves will be removed but the graphs will
remain, so you can adjust the model and rerun the simulation and the graphs will then be redrawn. Graphs are
automatically deleted if the object that they refer to is removed, for example by loading a new model.
Range Jump Suppression
For time histories of angles OrcaFlex chooses the angle's range so that the time history is continuous.
For example consider vessel heading, which is normally reported in the range 180 to +180. If the vessel's heading
passes through 180 then without range jump suppression the time history would be:
.., 179, 180, 179, ..
w
75
i.e. with a 360 jump. To avoid this jump OrcaFlex adds or subtracts multiples of 360 to give the best continuation of the
previous value. So in this example it adds 360 to the 179 value and hence reports:
.., 179, 180, 181, ..
This addition is valid since 181 and 179 are of course identical headings.
Note that this means that angle time history results can go outside the range 360 to +360.
Spectral Density
From any time history graph you can use the popup menu to obtain the spectral density graph for that time history. The
curve shown on the graph is the onesided power spectral density (PSD) per unit time of the sampled time history,
obtained using the Fourier Transform.
Notes: Using the Fourier Transform to estimate the PSD inevitably introduces 'noise' or 'leakage' to the
spectrum. To reduce the leakage the time history is partitioned into a number of overlapping periods.
The PSDs are calculated for each period and then averaged to give the reported PSD which has the
effect of smoothing the resulting PSD.
This smoothing technique is only applied if there is more than 200s of data in the time history.
Empirical Cumulative Distribution
From any time history graph you can use the popup menu to obtain the empirical cumulative distribution graph for
that time history. This graph shows what proportion of the samples in the time history are less than or equal to a given
value.
These graphs are sometimes referred to as Exceedence Plots since they can sometimes be used to estimate the
probability that the variable will exceed a given value.
Warning: The samples in a time history are not independent. They have what is called 'serial correlation', which
often affects the accuracy of statistical results based on them.
Rainflow half-cycle Empirical Cumulative Distribution
From any time history graph you can use the popup menu to obtain the rainflow halfcycle empirical cumulative
distribution graph for that time history. The curve on this graph is produced in the following way:
1. The time history is analysed using the rainflow cyclecounting algorithm. For details of this algorithm see the paper
by Rychlik.
2. The rainflow algorithm produces a list of halfcycles associated with the time history. The empirical cumulative
distribution of these halfcycles is then plotted.
4.6.9 Range Graphs
Range graphs are only available for a selection of variables and they are only available for Lines. They show the values
the variable took, during a specified part of the simulation, as a function of arc length along the Line. In particular:
Range graphs show the minimum, mean and maximum values that the variable took during the specified part of the
simulation with the exception that the Line Clearance range graphs only show the minimum value.
Effective tension range graphs have extra curves showing the segment Euler load and the Maximum Tension value
(as specified on the Line Types data form).
Bend Moment range graphs have an extra curve showing the maximum permitted bend moment
(EI / Minimum Bend Radius specified on the Line Types data form).
Curvature range graphs have an extra curve showing the maximum permitted curvature (the reciprocal of the
Minimum Bend Radius specified on the Line Types data form).
Stress range graphs show the Allowable Stress (as specified on the Line Types data form).
A Standard Deviation curve can also be added to a range graph to do this edit the graph's properties (by double
clicking on the graph) and set the Standard Deviation curve's visible property (by default the curves are not visible).
w

76
Two curves are then drawn, at Mean x, where x is a user chosen value and is the standard deviation. The
standard deviation is calculated from all the samples that lie in the simulation period chosen for the graph.
Warning: Be careful not to assume that 95% of the data lie in the interval Mean 2. This common guideline is
based on the assumption that the data are sampled from a Normal (i.e. Gaussian) distribution.
To obtain a Range Graph:
Select Range Graph on the Results form.
Select the arc lengths required. This can be the entire line, a selected arc length range, or a selected line section.
Select the variable required (see Selecting Variables).
Range graphs are displayed in Graph Windows and they are "live" i.e. they are regularly updated during the simulation.
You can therefore set up one or more graph windows at the start of a simulation and watch the graphs develop as the
simulation progresses. If you reset the simulation then the curves will be removed but the graphs will remain, so you
can adjust the model and rerun the simulation and the graphs will then be redrawn. Graphs are automatically deleted if
the object that they refer to is removed, for example by loading a new model.
Range Jump Suppression
Just as it does for Time History and XY Graphs, OrcaFlex applies range jump suppression for range graphs of angles.
4.6.10 Offset Graphs
These graphs are available only after a multiple statics calculation has been done and only for the offset vessel. The
following variables are plotted against offset distance:
Restoring Force
The magnitude of the horizontal component of the total force applied to the vessel by the attached Lines or other
objects. Note that this force is not necessarily in the offset direction.
Vertical Force
The vertically downwards component of the total force applied to the vessel by the attached Lines or other objects.
Yaw Moment
The moment, about the vertical, applied to the vessel by the attached Lines or other objects.
Worst Tension
The largest tension in any segment of any Line connected to the vessel.
To obtain an Offset Graph:
Select Offset Graph on the Results form.
Select the offset vessel.
Select the offset direction required.
Select the variable required.
4.6.11 Spectral Response Graphs
These graphs are available only if you have run a response calculation wave. The graph is only available once the
simulation has been completed.
The graph plots the calculated RAO for the selected variable on the Y axis and wave frequency on the X axis.
w
User Interface, Graphs
77
To obtain a Spectral Response Graph:
Select Spectral Response Graph on the Results form.
Select the variable required (see Selecting Variables). More than one variable can be selected.
4.6.12 Presenting OrcaFlex Results
OrcaFlex users often wish to show their OrcaFlex results in a slide presentation prepared using a presentation program
such as Microsoft PowerPoint. Here are some tips on how this can be done.
Graphs
Graphs can be transferred from OrcaFlex to presentation programs by simple copy + paste.
Note: In PowerPoint, instead of using Paste, it is better to use Paste Special (from the Edit menu) and then
select the Enhanced Metafile. This gives better resolution.
Replays
Replays can be transferred by exporting to an AVI file and then importing that video clip file into the presentation
program.
Note: Resizing video clips (after pasting into your presentation) will introduce aliasing (re-digitisation
errors) so it is best to set the OrcaFlex 3D View window to the required size before you export the
video.
Video Clips of OrcaFlex in Use
Your presentation can even show video clips of OrcaFlex in use, illustrating how the program is used. However, it is
rather harder to generate the required video files. We recommend using software called Camtasia
(www.techsmith.com) to record video clips showing OrcaFlex in use.
4.7 GRAPHS
When you request results in graphical form, they are presented in Graph Windows. You can open several simultaneous
graph windows, showing different results, and tile them on the screen together with 3D views and text results windows.
To adjust a graph's properties (range of axes, colours, etc.) see Modifying Graphs.
Graphs have a popup menu that provides the following facilities.
Use Default Ranges.
Copy copies the graph to the clipboard, from where you can paste it into other applications.
Values.
Spectral Density.
Empirical Cumulative Distribution.
Rainflow half-cycle Empirical Cumulative Distribution.
Export enables you to export the graph to a metafile or bitmap file.
Print facilities and the Monochrome Output preference.
Properties.
Graphs of simulation results are "live" i.e. they are updated automatically as the simulation progresses. Also, they are
kept even if you reset the simulation, so once you have set up a set of interesting graphs you can edit the model and re
run the simulation to see the effect of changing the model.
User Interface, Graphs
w

78
You can also set up results graphs when in reset state, prior to running a simulation the graph will be empty initially
and will grow as the simulation progresses. Note that we do not recommend this for graphs of line clearance, however,
since updating them can significantly slow down the simulation.
The workspace feature provides a very powerful way of managing collections of related graphs.
When a replay is in progress the replay time is indicated on both Time History and XY graphs.

Figure: Replay time indicator on a Time History Graph (vertical line at Time=3.5s) and on an XY Graph
(grey cross in bottom right of the graph).
The replay time indicator on a Time History graph can be directly manipulated using the mouse. With the CTRL key
pressed you simply click on a Time History graph and the indicator moves to where you have clicked. Any open 3D
Views are updated to show the new replay time. Similarly, with the CTRL key pressed you can click and then drag the
indicator. This direct manipulation of the replay time indicator is designed to help understand and visualise how your
model is behaving at key moments of the simulation.
Printing Graphs
To print a graph, use the File | Print menu item. When printing to a monochrome printer you will get the best results by
setting the Monochrome Output preference this is set by default when the program is first installed.
Copy and Paste with graphs
You can also copy a graph to the clipboard simply select the graph window by CLICKING on it and then using the
Edit | Copy menu item. From the clipboard you can then paste it into another application, for instance into a word
processor document. Graphs can also be exported as Windows metafiles, use the File | Export menu item. Metafiles can
be imported into many Windows programs, such as word processors, spreadsheets, graphics packages etc.
Note: When copying a graph to the clipboard, the size of the graph window you copy from has an effect on
how the text label fonts appear when the graph is pasted into another application. For example, if you
are copying a graph to a Word Processor and want the graph to be full page size, then the graph
window should be made large on screen (e.g. maximised). If you want a number of graphs on one page
of a document then the graph should be smaller on screen - try tiling or cascading the windows (see the
Window menu). By experimenting with various differently sized graphs it should be possible to arrange
for the fonts to appear as you wish.
4.7.1 Modifying Graphs
You can zoom into a graph by holding down the ALT key and dragging a box around the area that you want the graph to
display. When you release the mouse button the region selected will be expanded to fill the graph. If you want to reverse
this process then right click the mouse and choose Use Default Ranges from the popup menu.
w
User Interface, Spreadsheets
79
You can also change the appearance of a graph by double clicking on the graph or by selecting Properties from the
graph's popup menu. A dialogue box then appears, allowing you to change various aspects of the graph, as follows:
Axes
You can set the range, the tick spacing and the number of small ticks. The Use Default Tick Spacing button sets the tick
spacing and the number of small ticks to sensible default values based on the range. This is useful if you want to set the
range to a specific value and want the tick spacing to be set automatically.
Labels
You can alter the text and fonts of the axis and tick labels.
Curves
You can control the line properties and visibility for each curve on the graph.
Legend
The legend is a key showing which curve is which. It only appears on graphs that have multiple curves, e.g. range graphs.
You can control whether the legend is shown and if so where and using what font. Note that the legend includes all the
curves, even if some of them may not be visible at the time.
Intercepts
Intercepts are lines, like the axes, that go right across the graph. In fact the X and Y axes themselves are considered to be
intercepts. You can add more intercepts, for example to mark things like stage start times, and you can control their
position and style.
Save As Default
Changes to a graph's properties normally only apply to that graph. But for general settings (fonts etc.) you can also click
the Save As Default button. OrcaFlex then remembers the current settings for use with future graphs.
4.8 SPREADSHEETS
Some numerical results (e.g. obtained with the Values button on the Results form) appear in an Excel compatible
spreadsheet. The spreadsheet is readonly if you wish to modify or extend it you must first save to file as described
below.
Printing, Copying and Exporting Spreadsheets
To print the spreadsheet right click and select Print, but remember that OrcaFlex time histories are normally quite long
and will therefore produce many pages. If necessary, you can first adjust the printer setup using File | Printer Setup.
You can also easily transfer the results to other applications by either:
Copy and paste via the Windows clipboard. Select the block to be transferred and press CTRL+C.
Saving to file. Choose Export from the popup menu to save as either Excel .xls format or as tab delimitted text..
4.9 TEXT WINDOWS
Simple text windows are used for some reports see below. To print a text window, use the File | Print menu. You can
also copy text to the clipboard simply select a region of text and then use the Edit | Copy menu item (or press CTRL+C).
From the clipboard you can then paste it into another application, for instance into a word processor document.
Alternatively, you can export the text to a file by using the File | Export menu item. The resulting text file can then be
imported into your word processor.
Statics Progress Window
During a Statics Calculation, the progress of the calculation is shown in the message box on the status bar. However the
messages are also sent to a text window that is normally minimised. This window may be viewed by clicking on the
message box during statics, or by selecting the Window | Statics Progress menu item if you wish to watch the process
more closely. Like other text windows it may be printed, copied or exported, as described above.
User Interface, Workspaces
w

80
Session Log
This is a text window giving details of file actions, calculations etc. It can be viewed from the Window | Session Log
menu or by clicking the message box. It is particularly useful for batch calculations. If one of the simulations of a batch
run fails then information about the failure is written to the Session Log and can be displayed when the batch run is
complete.
4.10 WORKSPACES
It is common to have many windows (3D View, graph or spreadsheet) open within OrcaFlex. The workspace facility is
designed to help manage these windows.
Workspace files
A collection of view, graph or spreadsheet windows can be saved using the Workspace | Save Workspace menu item.
This creates a text file with the .wrk file extension containing a specification of the current window layout. The
workspace can be restored at any time with the Workspace | Open Workspace menu item. This can give significant time
savings if you wish to look at a number of different results windows for a large number of OrcaFlex models.
Note that the contents of the windows are not saved to the workspace file, just a logical description of the window. For
example, suppose you saved a workspace containing a graph of Effective Tension of a Line called Riser. If you then
loaded a different simulation file and open that workspace then you would see the Effective Tension of the Line called
Riser in the new simulation file and not the simulation filed open when the workspace was saved. This means that you
can look at the same collection of results for any number of simulation files.
Workspace files are not limited to simulation files static results and multiple statics results can also be saved.
Default workspaces
As an alternative to loading a workspace by using the Workspace menu items you can associate a default workspace
with a directory. When you do this the window layout described by the default workspace will be restored whenever
you open any simulation file in that directory.
Getting the most out of workspaces
We recommend that you save your workspace files in the same directory as the OrcaFlex files. If you do so then the
workspace file will appear in the Most Recent Files list on the Workspace menu.
Workspace files can be very useful if you are sending simulation files to another person. By including a workspace file
with the results of interest you can be sure that they will view the correct information. This can be particularly valuable
when sending files to someone who is not an experienced OrcaFlex user. This can even be useful when sending files to
Orcina for software support because they contain a precise specification of the results you are interested in.
4.11 COMPARING DATA
The Compare Data menu item opens the Compare Data form, which allows you to find differences between the data in
two OrcaFlex files.
The comparison is done using a userprovided compare program, so when you first use this facility you need to
configure OrcaFlex to tell it which compare program that you want to use; see Configuration below.
You can then compare files as follows:
On the Files page, specify the two files that you wish to compare. These can be data or simulation files.
Click the Compare button.
OrcaFlex then saves the data from the two files to temporary text files and then runs the userspecified compare
program to compare those text files.
As an alternative to comparing two data files on disk you can optionally choose to compare the currently loaded model
with a single file on disk.
w
User Interface, Preferences
81
Configuration
On the Configuration page you need to tell OrcaFlex the text file compare program that you want to use, and how to use
it. The compare program must be a program that can compare text files passed to it through the command line. Various
such programs are available on the web; examples are WinDiff, Compare It! and Araxis Merge.
Compare Program
This is the compare program's executable file name. You can specify either the full path, or just the file name if the
executable file resides in a directory which is on your system path.
A basic compare program called WinDiff is freely available (you can find it by searching the Internet) and is quite
sufficient for this purpose.
Command Line Parameters
This defines the command line parameters that are passed to the compare program. OrcaFlex replaces the special
strings %1 and %2 with the file names of the temporary text files. For most compare programs the default setting of
"%1 %2" will be sufficient. Otherwise you will need to consult the documentation of your compare program.
4.12 PREFERENCES
OrcaFlex has a number of settings that can be customised to suit the way that you work. The majority of settings can be
adjusted in the Preferences dialogue box, which is accessed by using the Tools | Preferences menu item.
3D View Preferences
Minimum Drag Distance
Object positions are not updated until the mouse has been dragged at least this distance (in pixels). This prevents
accidental changes to object positions. To make a small movement, drag away and then back again, or edit the
coordinate directly in the object's Edit Form.
View Rotation Increment
Each CLICK on a Rotate View button increments or decrements View Azimuth or Elevation by this amount.
Refresh Rate
During a simulation calculation all 3D View and Graph windows are updated at this rate. Selecting a faster rate allows
you to see the behaviour of the simulation more clearly at the expense of performance. Set a slow Refresh Rate to give
the numerical calculation more processor time.
Background Colour
This sets the background colour of all 3D View windows.
Locate Object Method
Can be either Flash object or Hide other objects. It determines what method the Locate action in the model browser
uses.
When the Flash object preference is set then the Locate action repeatedly draws and hides the object on the 3D
View, like a blinking cursor.
When the Hide other objects preference is set then the Locate action temporarily hides all other objects.
Normally the default setting of Flash object is sufficient to locate objects. However, if the model you are searching for is
obscured by other objects then this method may not help you to locate the object. In this case you should use the Hide
other objects preference.
Reset to default view automatically
When this is checked then OrcaFlex will automatically change the 3D View parameters to the Default View whenever a
new model is opened.
User Interface, Preferences
w

82
3D View Axes Preferences
View Axes
The view axes show the same directions as the global axes, but are drawn in the top right hand corner of 3D views,
rather than at the global origin. Can also be set from the View menu.
Scale Bar
Determines whether a scale bar is drawn in 3D views. Can also be set from the View menu.
Note: The Scale Bar is not drawn for shaded graphics views because it would be meaningless due to
perspective.
Global Axes
Determines whether the global axes are drawn, at the model's global origin (0,0,0). Can also be set from the View menu.
Environment Axes
Determines whether the wave, current and wind directions are drawn in the 3D view. When multiple wave trains are
present the first wave train is taken to be the dominant one and is drawn using sea surface pen, whereas the other wave
trains' directions are drawn in the secondary wave direction pen. Can also be set from the View menu.
Local Axes
Determines whether the local axes for vessels, buoys and line ends are shown. Drawing the local axes on the 3D view
helps you check the orientations of these objects. Can also be set from the View menu or by pressing CTRL+Y.
Note: Local Axes are not drawn for shaded graphics views.
Node Axes
Determines whether axes for line nodes are shown. Can also be set from the View menu or by pressing CTRL+ALT+Y.
Out of Balance Forces
If selected, then in the static analysis (not during the simulation) there are extra lines drawn on the 3D view,
representing the out of balance force acting on each vessel and buoy. This preference is sometimes useful for static
analysis, since it enables you to see how far a buoy or vessel is from being in equilibrium. Can also be set from the View
menu or by pressing SHIFT+CTRL+Y.
The force is drawn as a line, starting at the force's effective point of application, and whose length represents the size of
the force. The scaling is piecewise linear and based on the View Size of the 3D view. Lines up to ViewSize/2 long mean
forces up to 10 force units and lines from ViewSize/2 to ViewSize mean forces from 10 to 1000 force units.
Note: Out of Balance Forces are not drawn for shaded graphics views.
Video Preferences
The video preferences allow you to control the compression algorithm used for exported video. The software which
performs this compression is called a codec. Because the different graphics modes produce very different images they
require different types of codec.
Wire Frame Graphics Codec
Run-length encoding is the default setting and is usually the best choice. This codec offers good compression rates for
OrcaFlex wire frame video. The AVI files produced using this codec can be played on most Windows PCs.
If you choose Uncompressed then each frame of the video is stored as an uncompressed bitmap. This means that the
AVI file produced can be extremely large.
Shaded Graphics Codec
The runlength encoding which works well for wire frame graphics is not suitable for shaded replays and in fact there is
no suitable builtin codec in Windows. We would recommend using an MPEG4 codec of which many are available. In
w
User Interface, Printing and Exporting
83
our experience the freely available (licensed under the GPL) XVID codec performs very well. The Shaded Graphics topic
has more information about the XVID codec.
You can choose to use other codecs that are installed on your machine. Should you do so then you must also specify the
following information:
Codec 4 character code: Codecs are identified by unique codes, 4 characters long. Good alternatives to XVID
include DIVX, the 3ivx codec (character code 3IV2) and a variety of offerings from Microsoft which are
unfortunately rather difficult to obtain.
Padding: MPEG4 codecs commonly require round number frame sizes (width and height in pixels). For example
XVID requires frame sizes to be multiples of 8. When OrcaFlex exports the video it ensures that the frame sizes are a
multiple of this number. If you are unsure of what number to use for your codec then we recommend trying 8 which
usually works.
Colour depth: Some MPEG4 codecs require a specific colour depth. Again, if you are unsure of what value to use
then we recommend trying 32 bit or 16 bit colour depth.
Output Preferences
Printer Margins
These set the Left and Top margins used on printouts.
Monochrome Output
If this is checked then external output (copying to the clipboard, exporting metafiles and printing) is in black and white.
This is useful with black and white printers, since otherwise pale colours may be drawn in very light grey and may be
hard to see.
Miscellaneous Preferences
Show Hints
Determines whether OrcaFlex shows popup hints.
Show Splash Screen
Determines whether OrcaFlex displays its splash screen when the program starts.
Batch Auto Save
If this is enabled then simulations run in batch mode are automatically stored to simulation files at the specified regular
Auto Save Interval. This is useful if your computer is prone to failure (for example because of overnight power failures)
since the partrun simulation file can be loaded and continued, rather than having to rerun the whole simulation from
scratch. The Auto Save Interval should be neither too short, since then the program will then waste a lot of time
repeatedly storing away the results, nor too long, since then a lot of simulation work will be lost if a failure occurs.
4.13 PRINTING AND EXPORTING
The Print / Export dialogue is accessed using either the File | Print or the File | Export menu item and allows you to
choose one or more of the following items to be printed or saved to file:
The model data. Vessel Types often have very large amounts of data, much of which may not apply to the current
model, so OrcaFlex offers you the option of printing all the vessel type data or only the data that is in use.
Any 3D Views, Graphs, Spreadsheets and Text Windows currently on display.
Note: Graphs are printed as large as possible whilst maintaining aspect ratio.
w
Automation, Introduction
85
5 AUTOMATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
OrcaFlex provides several important facilities for automating and postprocessing work:
OrcaFlex is supplied with a special Excel spreadsheet which enables you to automate the extraction of simulation
results into your own spreadsheet. You can then use the normal Excel calculation facilities to do your own
customised postprocessing and graphing.
The Batch Processing facility enables you to run a set of simulations in unattended mode, for example as an
overnight job. The simulations can either be of preprepared data files, or else can be specified by a batch script file
that specifies the simulation as variations on a base data file. The OrcaFlex Spreadsheet mentioned above also has
facilities for automating the production of batch script files.
OrcaFlex includes a well documented programming interface. This is a Windows dynamic link library (DLL) called
OrcFxAPI (short for OrcaFlex Application Program Interface) and it is installed when you install OrcaFlex. The
interface includes facilities for setting data, calculating static positions and extracting results from those
calculations or from prerun simulation files. For example you can write programs to automate postprocessing or
that use OrcaFlex as a 'statics calculation engine'. One important example application of this is for realtime
monitoring of pipes, moorings etc. For further information or to discuss possible applications of OrcFxAPI, please
contact Orcina.
5.2 POST-PROCESSING
5.2.1 Introduction
OrcaFlex users often use spreadsheets to postprocess their OrcaFlex results. This can be done manually by transferring
the results from OrcaFlex into the spreadsheet using copy + paste. However, this is laborious and error prone if a lot of
results need transferring, so we have developed special facilities to automate the process.
This automation is done using an Excel spreadsheet that has facilities for automatic extraction of specified results from
one or more OrcaFlex files into nominated cells in the spreadsheet. You can then use the normal spreadsheet facilities to
calculate other postprocessed results from those OrcaFlex results.
Note: The OrcaFlex spreadsheet works with Excel 97 or later and requires OrcaFlex to be installed on the
machine.
Creating OrcaFlex Spreadsheets
You can create OrcaFlex spreadsheets from Excel templates that are supplied with OrcaFlex. You should base your own
OrcaFlex spreadsheets on this template, which is installed in the OrcaFlex installation directory when you install
OrcaFlex on your machine. To create your own OrcaFlex spreadsheet, open the Windows Start menu, select Programs |
Orcina Software and then select New OrcaFlex Spreadsheet. This shortcut creates a new spreadsheet based on the
template.
Note: Different versions of Excel require different versions of the OrcaFlex Spreadsheet. When installing
OrcaFlex you are asked which version of Excel you are using. Both spreadsheet templates are installed
and a single Start Menu shortcut to the appropriate one is created.
Before you try to use the new spreadsheet you need to save it to a file; it can be given any valid file name. It is usually
most convenient to save it to the directory containing the OrcaFlex files from which you want to extract results. You can
then specify the names of those files in the spreadsheet using relative paths. Using relative paths makes it easier to
rename the directory or move the spreadsheet and OrcaFlex files to some other directory.
For example OrcaFlex spreadsheets, see J02 Results and J03 Stress Analysis.
5.2.2 OrcaFlex Spreadsheet
The OrcaFlex Spreadsheet enables you to automate the extraction of results and data from OrcaFlex files into Excel. For
an example see J02 Results. To create your own see Creating OrcaFlex Spreadsheets.
Automation, Postprocessing
w

86
OrcaFlex spreadsheets also provide facilities to generate script files automatically.
For results postprocessing, an OrcaFlex Spreadsheet contains an Instructions worksheet, plus other worksheets to
receive the OrcaFlex results and for any derived results.
The spreadsheet also provides tools to help build the list of instructions. These tools are the Instructions Wizard and the
Duplicate Instructions form.
The Instructions worksheet consists of an instructions table and menudriven Excel macros that read and obey those
instructions.
Warning: Do not change the name of the Instructions worksheet, since the macros use that name to find that
worksheet.
Instructions Table
Each row in the instructions table is a separate instruction. The instruction can be thought of as 3 separate sections:
1. The entry in column A (titled Sheet Name) specifies the name of the Excel worksheet on which any output is
produced.
2. The entries in columns B and C (titled Label Cell and Label respectively) specify a label. This label is output on the
worksheet specified in column A and in the cell specified in column B. The text of the label is specified in column C.
3. The other columns (D to I) specify some results or data which are output on the sheet specified in column A and in
the cell specified in column D. These columns can specify output of time histories, range graphs, data values etc.
Either of sections 2 and 3 are optional. That is you can have an instruction that has a blank command cell and so only
writes a label, or one that has a blank label cell and so only writes results.
The end of the table is indicated by the first row that has both its label and command columns blank, so you cannot
have an instruction row that has no label and no command. In particular, you cannot have a blank row in the middle of
the instruction table. Also, the macros assume that the first instruction is row 5 of the worksheet, so do not insert or
delete rows above this.
The macros ignore the formatting of the spreadsheet, so you can use things like bold, italic, background colours etc. to
make the worksheets easy to read, and you can also resize columns or rows to suit. This applies to all the worksheets,
including the Instructions worksheet.
Processing the Instructions
When you are working with the OrcaFlex Spreadsheet an item titled Orcina is added to the Excel menu. This menu item
contains various commands to process the results instructions.

Figure: The Orcina menu within Excel for the OrcaFlex Spreadsheet.
w
87
The Process All Instructions menu item runs a macro that obeys all the instructions in the table, starting at the top of
the table and working down. The Process Selected Instructions menu item tells the spreadsheet to process only the
instructions in the currently selected cell or block of cells, again in top to bottom order. If the currently selected cell(s)
are not in the table then this menu item does nothing.
The example instruction table illustrates how the instructions work:
Click the Process All Instructions menu item. You should see the Example1 worksheet being filled in and then a
new worksheet called Example2 being created and filled in. If you look at the instructions table on the Instructions
sheet then you will see how this was specified.
Note: If you have not installed the OrcaFlex examples, or if you have installed them to a different directory,
then this operation will fail because it assumes the existence of the file C:\Program
Files\Orcina\OrcaFlex\Examples\J - Pre and Post processing\J03 Stress\Example1.sim.
The first block of instructions in the table specifies that the simulation file Example1.sim should be loaded and then
various results extracted from it and written to various cells in a worksheet called Example1.
The Example1 worksheet already existed, and it was already set up with suitable column widths and cell properties
(e.g. a larger font size, right alignment for some cells). So the instructions simply "filled in" various cells in that
sheet.
The second block of instructions in the table specifies that the simulation file Example2.sim should be loaded and
then various results extracted from it and written to a worksheet called Example2. No such sheet existed, so one
was created.
Because the worksheet Example2 was newly created it has default properties and so it not yet properly formatted.
You can now format it (resize the columns, change cell font sizes etc.) as you wish. Next time you click the Process
All Instructions menu item the worksheet will retain the formatting you set up.
Now go back to the Example1 worksheet and try setting a new cell to calculate a "derived" result. For instance you
could calculate the tension range by setting cell H4 to "=G4F4".
Now delete the contents of cells G4 and F4 on the Example1 worksheet cell H4 will become zero. Now go back to
the Instructions worksheet and in the top half of the instruction table select the block of 6 cells in the column
headed 'Command' that contain Min or Max. Now click the Process Selected Instructions menu item this menu
item obeys just the instructions in the currently selected block, so cells G4 and F4 on the Example1 worksheet will
be rewritten and your derived cell H4 will be automatically updated (assuming you have recalculation switched on
in Excel).
You should now have a good idea of how the spreadsheet works and you can now modify the spreadsheet to suit your
own purpose. To do this, delete the example instructions from the table and set up your own instructions the easiest
way to do this is by using the Instructions Wizard.
5.2.3 Instruction Format
The easiest way to learn about the instruction format is by using the Instructions Wizard which allows you to create
instructions in an interactive manner.
In the OrcaFlex Spreadsheet, each instruction consists of the following cells. See also Tips and Tricks.
Sheet Name
Specifies the name of the worksheet in which cells are to be written. If a worksheet with this name already exists then
the specified label and output cells will be overwritten, but other cells will be left unchanged. If no sheet of that name
exists then one will be created.
Label Cell
Specifies the cell, in the specified worksheet, to which the label (if not null) will be written.
w

88
Label
Specifies the label string to be written to the label cell. This cell can be left empty, in which case the label cell is
ignored.
Output Cell
Specifies the cell, in the specified worksheet, to which results or data should be written. Some commands specify
multiplevalue output for example a time history consists of a column of results. In this case the output cell specifies
the top left cell of the block of cells to be written.
Note: The output cell (or label cell) can be specified directly, e.g. B7, but can also be specified indirectly - see
Tips and Tricks.
Command
This should be one of the predefined commands or else empty. If the command cell is empty then the output cell is
ignored and just the label is output.
Object Name
The name of the OrcaFlex object whose results or data are output.
Note: This name is case sensitive. Different objects in OrcaFlex can have identical names except for case. For
example "LINE" and "line" and "LiNe" are all regarded as different objects in OrcaFlex.
Additional Data
This column is used when outputting results for certain types of OrcaFlex object.
For the Environment object you need to specify the global X,Y,Z coordinates of the point for which you want results
the coordinates must be separated by the ';' character.
For 6D Buoy objects you must specify the Wing Name if you are requesting a wing results variable.
For Winch objects you must specify the winch connection number if you are requesting a position results variable, i.e. X,
Y or Z.
For Line objects you must specify the position on the line for which results are wanted. There are a variety of ways in
which this can be specified:
The position can be specified by arclength, e.g. "Arclength 25.0".
The node number can be specified, e.g. "Node 4".
One of the line ends can be specified, e.g. "End A", "End B" or more concisely "A" or "B".
The touchdown position can be specified, e.g. "Touchdown".
For stress results you must also specify the position of the point within the cross section through the specified
arclength. You do this by specifying R,Theta values, e.g. "Inner", "Outer", "Theta 270.0".
Note: You must specify an arclength together with both R and Theta separated by the ';' character, e.g.
"Arclength 20.0; Inner; Theta 270.0", "End A; Outer; Theta -45.0"; "Node 7; Outer; Theta 17.8" etc.
Clearance results can be reported either as clearances from this line to all other lines or from this line to a specified
other line. You can specify this other line by adding its name after the position, e.g. "Arclength 35; Line2", "Node 4;
Riser"; "End B; Hose" etc. If you do not specify another line (e.g. "Arclength 35") then clearances will be reported
from this line to all other lines.
The results are given for the nearest appropriate result point; see Line Results for details.
For the Range Graph and Range Graph Summary commands you can specify a range of arclengths, e.g. "20 to 50". You
can also use ranges such as "<35" or ">60" to specify all arclengths less than a point or all arclengths greater than a
point.
For the Duplicate Sheet instruction, the source worksheet is specified in this column.
w
89
Simulation Period
The period of simulation for which results are wanted. This can be Whole Simulation, Latest Wave, Static State or a
stage number (0 for the buildup, 1 for stage 1 etc.).
It can also be a specified period of simulation, given in the form "t1 to t2" where t1 and t2 are numeric time values that are
in the simulation and Simulation Start Time <= t1 <= t2 <= Simulation End Time. For example "20 to 30" or "12.5 to
+35.7".
Note: If you use the Static State period then a single value will be reported - the value of the variable at the
very beginning of the simulation.
This cell should be left empty for the data output commands Select and Get Data and when outputting static results
using the Static Result, Range Graph and Range Graph Summary commands.
Note: This specified period format can be used to extract results at a single time point; for example the period
"27.4 to 27.4" will give the results at the nearest log sample to time 27.4.
Variable
The name of the output variable.
If the command is a results command (e.g. Time History, Range Graph, Linked Statistics, Min etc.) this should be set to
the same name as is used for the results variable in OrcaFlex. For example Effective Tension, Curvature, Surge, etc.
If the command is Get Data then this is the batch script name of the data item.
If the command is Select then this is the wave train, draught, RAO direction or QTF direction to be selected.
5.2.4 Pre-defined commands
In the OrcaFlex Spreadsheet, the Command Cell can contain one of the following commands:
Load.
OrcFxAPI version.
Working Directory.
Warnings.
Clear Sheet, Duplicate Sheet.
Sample Times.
Time History.
Min, Max, Mean, Standard Deviation.
Linked Statistics.
Spectral Density, Empirical Distribution, Rainflow Half Cycles, RainFlow Half Cycle Count.
Static Result.
Spectral Response Graph.
Range Graph, Range Graph Summary, Range Graph Min, Range Graph Max.
Get Data, Select.
5.2.5 Basic commands
Load <file name>
This command tells the spreadsheet to open the specified file. Subsequent results extraction commands then apply to
that file.
You can either specify the full path of the file, for example:
Load c:\Project100\Case1.sim
w

90
or else use a relative path (relative to the directory containing the spreadsheet). The latter is often more convenient. For
example if the file Case1.sim is in the same directory as the spreadsheet then you can use the command:
Load Case1.sim
and this has the advantage that there is no need to alter the spreadsheet if the directory is renamed or the files are
moved to a different directory.
If you specify a data file then the file is loaded and the OrcaFlex statics calculation is performed. Subsequent results
extraction gives results for the static configuration.
Note: The statics calculation may take a significant length of time. Progress is reported in the Excel status
bar. If the calculation time is excessively long then we recommend that you use the Use Calculated
Positions command when building your model.
OrcFxAPI version
This outputs the version of the OrcFxAPI DLL which is being used by the spreadsheet. This is not necessarily the version
of the program which performed the calculations (for example if you load a simulation file which was generated by a
different version of OrcaFlex).
Working Directory
This outputs the directory where the spreadsheet is stored. If you are using relative paths then it can be useful to keep
track of the base path for QA purposes.
Warnings
This outputs the text from any warnings reported during the OrcaFlex calculations (static or dynamic). Simulations run
in batch mode or by Distributed OrcaFlex do not display such warnings since to do so would require user intervention.
This command allows you to check whether any such warnings were generated.
This command is the equivalent of the Calculation | View Warnings menu item.
Clear Sheet
This command clears the contents of all cells in the specified output sheet. All cell formatting is preserved.
This should be the first command following a Load command. Results extraction spreadsheets are typically run
repeatedly. The purpose of this command is to ensure that previously extracted results are removed and so cannot get
mixed up with the latest results.
Note: This command must not be used if you have manually added to the output worksheet since it will
remove your manual additions.
Duplicate Sheet
This command copies the entire contents of the worksheet named in the Additional Data column to the specified output
sheet. All charts, formulae, formatting etc. that exist in the source worksheet are copied.
5.2.6 Time History and related commands
Sample Times
Returns the time values that apply to the time history results. This command returns a column of N numbers, where N is
the number of OrcaFlex log samples that are in the specified simulation period. So if the output cell is set to G5 and there
are 500 log samples in the simulation period, then the time values for those log samples will be written to cells G5..G504.
Time History
Returns the time history values of the specified variable. This command returns a column of N numbers, as with the
Sample Times command.
w
91
Min, Max, Mean, Standard Deviation
Min return a single number, equalling the minimum value of the specified time history variable during the specified
simulation period. Similarly for Max, Mean and Standard Deviation (which can be abbreviated to Std Dev).
Linked Statistics
The Linked Statistics command outputs the same information as the Linked Statistics command on the OrcaFlex results
form. In the variable column of the instruction you should specify a number of results variable names, separated by
commas. The command outputs a table of statistics for those variables, occupying 2N+3 rows by N+2 columns, where N
is the number of variables specified.
Spectral Density, Empirical Distribution, Rainflow Half Cycles, Rainflow Half Cycle Count
These commands extract spectral density, empirical distribution and rainflow half cycles results of the specified
variable.
Static Result
Returns the value of the specified variable. This command reports the value in the static configuration.
Spectral Response Graph
Returns the spectral response graph for the specified variable. The command returns two columns of numbers. The first
column is frequency and the second is the RAO.
5.2.7 Range Graph commands
Range Graph, Range Graph Summary, Range Graph Min, Range Graph Max
These commands output, for the specified variable of a line, tables containing range graph results. They are available for
any line variable for which a range graph is available in OrcaFlex.
The Range Graph command gives a table having 7 columns, containing arclength, minimum, maximum, mean, standard
deviation, upper limit, and lower limit. For each point on the line a row is generated in the table containing the statistics
of the values that occurred at that point during the specified simulation period.
The Range Graph Summary command gives a table having two rows, one for the overall minimum and one for the
overall maximum. Each row has 4 cells; two are label cells and the other two contain the overall minimum (or
maximum) value that occurred at any point on the line during the specified simulation period, and the arclength at
which it occurred.
The Range Graph Min and Range Graph Max commands output just the overall minimum or maximum value
respectively.
If you have loaded a simulation file then you must specify, in the Simulation Period column of the instruction, the period
of simulation for which you want results. Otherwise, if you have loaded a data file, you should leave this column blank
and the results for the static configuration are reported.
If the Additional Data column in the instruction is left blank then the results will apply to the whole line.
You can restrict these commands to only cover part of the line, by specifying a range of arclengths, e.g. "20 to 50", in the
Additional Data column. The table will then only include results for points whose arclength is within the specified range.
You can also use ranges such as "<35" or ">60" to specify all arclengths less than a point or all arclengths greater than a
point. The length units used must be the same as those used in the OrcaFlex simulation file.
Finally, you can specify a section number in the Additional Data column to restrict results to that section.
5.2.8 Data commands
Get Data, Select
This command outputs the value of a data item. The object is specified in the Object Name column of the instruction
sheet and the data item is specified in the variable column.
The data item is specified using the batch script name of the data item. If the data item appears in a table in OrcaFlex,
then its row number must be given. The row number follows the data item name and is given as an index enclosed by
w

92
either square or round brackets (don't mix them on the same line). The index is always 1based i.e. [1] is the first row
of the table. For example if you wanted to output the number of segments in the 3rd section of a line then the variable
cell would be "NumberOfSegments[3]". For more details see batch script assignment.
Certain objects require special select commands to output certain data items. For example if you want to output wave
train data for the Environment and there is more than one wave train then you need to specify the particular wave train.
Likewise certain vessel type data requires you to specify a draught and/or an RAO type and direction. Example
commands to do this are given below:
Command Object Name Additional
Data
Simulation
Period
Variable
Select WaveTrain Environment Wave2
Get Data Environment WaveTrainType
Select WaveTrain Environment Wave3
Get Data Environment WaveTrainType
Select Draught VType1 Draught3
Get Data VType1 CurrentCoeffSurgeArea
Select RAOs VType1 Displacement
Select Direction VType1 30
Get Data VType1 RAOSwayAmplitude[3]
Get Data VType1 RAOSwayAmplitude[2]
Select RAOs VType1 QTF
Get Data VType1 RAOSurgeAmplitude[6]
Notes: The Select commands must be issued before the Get Data commands.
The Select commands are only needed for certain data items. For example the sea density data item
does not depend on wave train so it would not need a Select WaveTrain command.
5.2.9 Instructions Wizard
The Instructions Wizard allows you to create OrcaFlex spreadsheet instructions interactively. In many ways it is the
equivalent of the Select Results form in OrcaFlex. The Instructions Wizard is found on the Orcina menu in the
spreadsheet.
Instructions Wizard Tutorial
For a quick introduction to the Instructions Wizard we recommend the following tutorial.
Prepare a simple OrcaFlex simulation file and an empty OrcaFlex spreadsheet
For the purpose of this example you need a simulation file containing at least a vessel and a line. You could use one of
the standard OrcaFlex examples see www.orcina.com/SoftwareProducts/OrcaFlex/Examples.
Now create an OrcaFlex spreadsheet and save it in the same directory as the simulation file. Then delete all the sample
instructions on the Instructions worksheet so that the spreadsheet looks like this:
w
93

Figure: Empty instructions table
Add a Load instruction using the Wizard
The instructions wizard creates and inserts instructions on the currently selected row. So the next step is to select the
first instruction row by clicking on a cell in row 5. Then open the Instruction Wizard by clicking on the Orcina menu and
selecting "Instructions Wizard".
In the Instructions Wizard click the drop down button and change the command to "Load". A file name field and a
browse button will now appear. Click the browse button and select the simulation file you saved in the first part of this
tutorial. The Instructions Wizard should now look as follows:

Figure: Load instruction in the Instructions Wizard
To add the instruction to the spreadsheet click the "Accept and Close" button and the spreadsheet should now look as
follows:
w

94

Figure: Load instruction on the Instructions Sheet
The Load instruction tells the spreadsheet to open the specified file.
Add results instructions using the Wizard
Now we need to add some more instructions which specify which results to extract from this simulation file. Open the
Instructions Wizard again and change the command to "Time History". In the Object list select an OrcaFlex Line (if you
are using the "A01 Catenary Riser.sim" example then select 10" Cat Constant EA) and then select Effective Tension from
the Variable list.
This time, to add the instruction click the "Accept and go to Next Row" button. You will see the instruction being added
to the worksheet but the Instructions Wizard will remain open allowing you to add yet more instructions.
More than one instruction can be added at once. Suppose that you want time histories of X, Y and Z for the line. Select
these from the Variable list using CTRL+CLICK or SHIFT+CLICK. The Variable list now looks as follows:

Figure: Multiple selection of results variables
Now click the "Accept and go to Next Row" button and you will see 3 instructions being added, one for each variable.
Now close the Wizard (by clicking the "Close" button) and process all the instructions. You should see 4 time histories
output on a new worksheet called "Results".
w
95
Setting Period and Additional Data for the instructions
The instructions added so far all specify the default simulation period of "Whole Simulation" and the default line
position of "Arclength 0".
In the Wizard you can specify a different simulation period by changing the Period drop down list. The available options
are: "Whole Simulation", "Latest Wave", "Specified Period", "Static State" and each stage of the simulation, e.g. "Stage 0",
"Stage 1". Try selecting different simulation periods and adding instructions. Notice how the values in the Simulation
Period column reflect your selections in the Wizard.
For OrcaFlex Lines you also need to specify a point on the line, e.g. End A, End B, arclength 50, node 12 etc. All these
options are available in the Wizard when you are specifying results for a line.
In addition, certain results require extra information.
If you are extracting clearance results for Lines then you need to specify the clearance line.
If you are extracting stress component results for Lines then you need to specify the crosssectional position.
If you are extracting Wing results for 6D Buoys then you need to specify the wing.
If you are extracting position results for Winches then you need to specify the winch connection point.
If you are extracting results for the Environment then you need to specify the position at which you want results
reported.
Other commands
So far we have just looked at time history results but the Wizard allows you to build other instructions. For example,
open the Wizard again and change the command to Range Graph. Notice how slightly different options are available
reflecting the fact that range graphs are specified in a slightly different way from time histories.
Try also experimenting with other commands like Linked Statistics, Sample Times, Spectral Density, Max, Standard
Deviation and so on.
There are even commands for reporting model data: Select and Get Data.
Labels, sheet name, output cell
The one part of the Instructions Wizard which we have not discussed is the section titled "Labels" as shown below:

Figure: Labels section of the Instruction Wizard
This section determines what gets written into the first 4 columns of the instructions table, namely Sheet Name, Label
Cell, Label and Output Cell.
If the Overwrite option is not checked then these columns are not altered when instructions are written by the Wizard.
If this option is checked then the Wizard will output values in each of these 4 columns as specified in the relevant field.
You can choose to use a default label, in which case the label will be assembled based on the particular instruction it is
associated with. Alternatively you can choose to specify the label yourself.
w

96
When instructions are added the Label Cell and Output Cell values on the Instructions Wizard will be incremented
automatically. This automatic procedure will not always produce the values you require. However, it generally gives a
good first effort which you can modify later.
5.2.10 Duplicate Instructions
The Duplicate Instructions form allows you to duplicate sets of OrcaFlex spreadsheet instructions for multiple load
cases.
Suppose you are analysing a number of different load cases for a variety of environmental conditions. Once you have
built the spreadsheet instructions for a single load case you typically want to generate the same instructions for each
other load case. The Duplicate Instructions form automates this procedure.
The Duplicate Instructions form can be found on the Orcina menu in the spreadsheet. Before using it you should create a
set of instructions for the first load case an example is shown below:

Figure: Instructions table with instructions for a single load case
You are now ready to use the Duplicate Instructions form. When it first opens it looks as follows:
w
97

Figure: The Duplicate Instructions form
Simulation file selection
If your load case files (either OrcaFlex simulation files or OrcaFlex data files) are generated by an OrcaFlex batch script
then you should set this option to From Script File and select the script file using the Browse button or by typing the
file name into the "Script File Name" field. A duplicate set of instructions is generated for each file which is written by
the script file. We strongly recommend that you use this option since script files make QA much more manageable.
Alternatively, if your load case files are generated by some other means then you can choose the Specified option and
you will then be able to specify each load case file directly.
Duplication Method
Usually you will want results for each load case to appear on separate sheets. To do this you set this option to Different
Sheets. The results sheets will be assigned names based on the load case file name. If you want you can also specify a
prefix for the sheet name by filling in the Sheet Base Name field.
Sometimes, however, it is desirable for all the results to appear on a single sheet this is achieved with the Single Sheet
option. The duplication process will generate new instructions with the same Sheet Name.
When you select the Single Sheet option you must also specify row and column offsets. These offsets allow you to avoid
the results from each load case overwriting other load case results. Suppose that the results from the first load case took
up 20 rows worth of space. In this case you would probably specify a row offset of 22 (to allow 2 rows of whitespace
between load case results) and a column offset of 0.
w

98
Duplicating the instructions
Once you have decided exactly how the instructions are to be duplicated you click the Duplicate button and the
instructions table will be modified to look something like this:

Figure: Instructions table with duplicated instructions for multiple load cases
Adding / removing instructions
Quite often you will find yourself wanting to add more instructions to the each load case. The easiest way to do this is to
delete all the instructions apart from those of the first load case. In the screenshot above this would mean deleting all
cells from row 9 and below. You can then add more instructions to the first load case. Finally you simply repeat the
duplication process outlined above and you will have the extra instructions for each load case.
5.2.11 Tips and Tricks
Here are some useful tips for setting up the instructions table of an OrcaFlex Spreadsheet.
Use Excel's "=" facility
If you have several instruction table cells that are equal to some other cell, A9 say, then set them to "=A9". That way
when you alter A9 then the other cells will automatically alter to match. For example if you have a block of 10
instructions that all output their result to sheet "Load Case 3" then set the first instruction's Worksheet cell, cell A9 say,
to "Load Case 3" and then set the other Worksheet cells to "=A9". You can now change the destination sheet for all the
instructions by simply altering cell A9.
w
Automation, Batch Processing
99
Use OffsetCell to specify output cells indirectly
You can do a similar thing with the Output Cell (and Label Cell) by using the special spreadsheet function
OffsetCell(PointerCell, ColOffset, RowOffset).
Suppose that, on your instruction sheet, the output cell D9 contains the address "C12"; i.e. D9 points to C12 (on the
output sheet). Then you can now use C12 as an Origin and set up some other output address relative to it. To do this set
the other output cell to "=OffsetCell(D9, 3, 4)", which means "the cell 3 columns right and 4 rows down from the cell
referenced in D9". The output will therefore be placed in cell F16 on the output sheet.
The advantage of this is that you can now easily redirect the output of a whole set of instructions by simply changing the
first one's output cell. The other instructions' output destinations stay fixed relative to the first's.
Here's the formal definition of OffsetCell. It takes 3 parameters:
PointerCell is the address of a cell that contains the address of an OriginCell.
ColOffset and RowOffset are integers specifying an offset from that OriginCell.
The function returns the address of the cell that is ColOffset columns right and RowOffset rows down from the cell that
PointerCell points at.
5.2.12 Error Handling
In the OrcaFlex Spreadsheet, errors in instructions are handled by either displaying an error message window or by
writing an error message to the specified output cell. So when setting up new instructions:
Check carefully that you have set all the instruction cells correctly.
Then test the instructions by selecting them and using the Process Selected Instructions menu item.
Then check that the specified Label Cells and Output Cells have been set correctly.
5.3 BATCH PROCESSING
5.3.1 Introduction
Simulations, script files and fatigue analyses can all be run in unattended mode, by using the Calculation | Batch
Processing menu item. This command opens a form that allows you to set up a list of files that are to be run. Then, when
you run the job, OrcaFlex opens and runs each file in turn.
The list of files can include any number and mixture of the following types of file:
1. Preprepared OrcaFlex data files (*.dat). OrcaFlex opens the data file, runs the static analysis followed by the
simulation, and then saves the results in a file with the same name as the data file, but with a .sim extension.
2. Partrun OrcaFlex simulation files (*.sim). OrcaFlex opens the partrun simulation file, finishes the simulation and
then saves the completed simulation results back to the same file.
3. A batch script file (*.txt). This is a text file which contains OrcaFlex script commands that specify what OrcaFlex
should do. OrcaFlex opens the script file and obeys the commands in turn. A common use of script files is to run a
number of variations on a base data file.
4. A fatigue analysis file (*.ftg). OrcaFlex performs the fatigue analysis and saves the results to an Excel compatible
spreadsheet of the same name but extension *.xls.
5. An OrcaFlex Spreadsheet (*.xls). OrcaFlex loads the spreadsheet in Excel and processes all the instructions on the
Instructions sheet.
You can also ask OrcaFlex to store the partial results to file at regular intervals during the batch job. This is useful if your
computer is prone to failure (for example because of overnight power failures) since the partrun simulation file can be
loaded and continued, rather than having to rerun the whole simulation from scratch. See Preferences.
w

100
Batch Form User Interface
Close
Dismisses the Batch form.
Add File
Files are added to the file list by CLICKING on the Add button. The Open File dialogue box is displayed, where you select
one or more files to be entered in the Files To Run list. To select a group of files, use SHIFT+CLICK and CTRL+CLICK. You
can add data files, batch script files, or partrun simulation files.
Files can also be added by drag and drop. That is if you are browsing your file system then you can highlight files and
drag them onto the Files To Run list on the batch form.
Remove File
This button removes any files highlighted in the file list.
Check Files
OrcaFlex opens each file in the batch list in turn, checks that they contain valid OrcaFlex data or script commands, and
reports any errors. The files are not changed, and no calculations are performed. The Check Files command does not
take long, so we recommend you use it before starting your batch job.
Run Batch
Start running the listed files. Each file is opened and run in turn, and the file that is currently being run is highlighted in
the file list. If any file fails due to errors then that file is abandoned and the batch job continues with the next file. Errors
are recorded in the Session Log (which can be viewed from the Session Log item on the Window menu) and are also
reported at the end of the batch job.
Pause Batch
Pauses the currently running batch job.
This can be useful if you temporarily want another process on your machine to have the processor resource that
OrcaFlex is using. For example suppose that you have OrcaFlex and another program both performing processor
intensive calculations. The operating system will typically assign 50% of the available processor resource to each
process. If you want the other program to finish its calculations quicker then the Pause facility allows you to give 100%
of the resource to that other program.
Stop Batch
Terminate the batch job.
Note: Calculations run faster if there are fewer 3D View windows and Graphs open, and if the Refresh Rate in
the Preferences dialogue box is set to a slower value. So to optimise performance consider closing all
windows.
Close program when Batch completes
If this is checked then OrcaFlex will be closed once the batch of runs is complete. This feature is intended principally for
users with networked licences. It allows you to release your claim on an OrcaFlex licence as soon as the batch of runs is
complete.
5.3.2 Script Files
OrcaFlex provides special facilities for running a series of variations on a base data file, using a script file. This contains a
sequence of commands to read a data file, make modifications to it, and run the modified file, storing the results for later
processing. The file can also include comments. The syntax for the instructions is described in the next topic. For
examples see the Batch Script Examples.
Script files can be written using any text editor. Alternatively, there are facilities in the OrcaFlex spreadsheet for
automatically generating script files for regular sets of cases.
w
101
To run a batch script file, specify the script file name in an OrcaFlex batch files list. To add a script file to the list, click the
"Add File" button on the OrcaFlex batch form and then click on "Files of Type" and select *.txt, and then select your
script file.
When OrcaFlex processes the files included in the batch list, it checks the type of each file in turn: OrcaFlex data and
simulation files are loaded and the simulation run and stored, text files are read in and expected to contain batch script
commands. You can therefore run a single batch job containing several script files, or you can even mix 'ordinary'
simulations and scripts in the same batch job.
5.3.3 Script Syntax
An OrcaFlex batch script is made up of commands, which are obeyed sequentially, and comments, which are ignored. A
comment is a line that is either blank or on which the first nonblank characters are "//". A command can be:
1. A directive followed by one or more arguments, optionally separated by white space (one or more spaces or tabs).
For example: load c:\temp\test.dat where load is the directive and c:\temp\test.dat is the argument.
2. An assignment of the form VariableName=value, again with optional white space separators. For example:
Length = 55.0.
Note that:
Directives, variable names, and model object names are all case independent.
If your script includes a relative file name then it is taken to be relative to the directory from which the script was
loaded.
File names, arguments, variables or values containing spaces or nonalphanumeric characters must be enclosed in
single or double quotes and they must not contain the same quote character as is used to enclose them. For example
'6" pipe' and "200' riser" are valid, but the following are not valid:
6 inch pipe contains spaces, so needs to be enclosed in quotes;
6"pipe contains a double quote, so needs to be enclosed in single quotes;
'6' pipe' contains a single quote, so needs to be enclosed in double quotes instead of single.
5.3.4 Script Commands
The following batch script commands are currently available. You need to put quotes round file names or other
parameters that include spaces or nonalphanumeric characters.
Load <FileName>
Opens the OrcaFlex file named <FileName>. The file can be either a data file or a simulation file.
LoadData <FileName>
Opens the data from the OrcaFlex file named <FileName>.
Run <FileName>
Run the current model and save the resulting simulation to <FileName>.
Save <FileName>
Save the current model to <FileName>. If the current model is a simulation then a simulation file is saved, otherwise a
data file is saved.
SaveData <FileName>
Save the data from the current model to <FileName>.
Note: In the Load, LoadData, Run, Save and SaveData commands, if <FileName> is a relative path then it is
taken to be in the directory from which the script file was loaded.
w

102
ExtendSimulation <StageDuration>
Adds a new stage of length <StageDuration>. This command is equivalent to the Calculation | Extend Simulation menu
item. You would normally follow this command with a Run command.
Reset
Resets the current model. This command is equivalent to the Calculation | Reset menu item.
NewModel
Deletes all objects from the current model and resets data to default values. This command is equivalent to the File |
New menu item.
Create <ObjectType>
Creates and selects a new object of type <ObjectType>.
The <ObjectType> parameter can be "Line Type", "Vessel Type", "Line", "Winch" etc. Select Edit | Add from the Model
Browser menu to see a list of possible values for this parameter.
Alternatively variable data sources can be created by setting the <ObjectType> parameter to "Bending Stiffness", "Drag
Coefficient" etc. This list of possible variable data source object types can be found in the Data Source Type tree on the
variable data form.
Delete <ObjectName>
Deletes the object called <ObjectName>.
Select [<Object Type>] <ObjectName>
Specify the model object to which subsequent assignment commands will apply. It will only remain selected until the
next nonassignment command is encountered.
The <ObjectType> argument is optional, and by default is 'object', meaning select the named model object.
<ObjectName> must then be either the name of an object that exists in the current model or one of the reserved names
'General' (for the General data form) or 'Environment' (for the Environment data form).
Some examples of the select and assignment commands are given in Examples of setting data.
Other <ObjectType> values only need to be specified in the following special cases.
Wave trains
If the Environment has been selected and there is more than one wave train, then before you can specify any wave train
data you must give another select command to select the wave train. This second select command has the form:
Select WaveTrain <WaveTrainName>
So for example:
Select Environment
Select WaveTrain Primary
WaveDirection = 30.0
Current data sets
Similarly, if the Environment has been selected and there is more than one current, then you must select one of them
before specifying any current data. For example:
Select Environment
Select Current Current2
RefCurrentDirection = 270.0
Note that this is not the same as setting the Active Current. In fact, you should avoid setting up multiple current data in
batch scripts if possible: this is best done interactively on the Environment form.
w
103
Vessel Type draughts
If a vessel type has been selected and it has more than one draught, then before specifying any draughtdependent data
you must give another select command that selects the draught. This second select command has the form:
Select Draught <DraughtName>
Before specifying data for RAOs you need to specify the type of RAOs this can be either Displacement, WaveLoad or
QTF. This is done with a command of the form:
Select RAOs <RAO type>
Similarly, before specifying vessel type data for a given wave direction you must give another select command to select
that direction. This takes the form:
Select Direction <Direction>
So for example:
Select "Vessel Type1"
Select Draught Transit
Select RAOs Displacement
RAOOriginX = 10
RAOOriginY = 0
RAOOriginZ = 2
Select Direction 45
RAOSurgeAmplitude[2] = 0.1
Select Direction 90
RAOSurgeAmplitude[2] = 0.16
Note: Indentation with spaces or tabs is optional, but makes scripts more readable.
Assignment
Assignment commands take the form
VariableName = Value
The VariableName on the left hand side must be one of the recognised variable names and the named variable must
exist in the currently selected model object. The Value on the right hand side must be in the appropriate form for that
variable (i.e. numeric or text) and it must be given in the same units as used in the current model.
For example:
Select Vessel1
Length = 110
Draught = "Operating draught"
If VariableName is the name of a variable that appears in a check box in OrcaFlex then the Value should be True or False.
For example:
Select Environment
CurrentRamp = True
If VariableName is the name of a variable that appears in a table in OrcaFlex, then its row number must be given. The
row number is given as an index enclosed by either square or round brackets (don't mix them on the same line), and is
always 1based i.e. [1] is the first row of the table. Note that this sometimes requires care, since in OrcaFlex the table
might not be 1based. For example, when setting the prescribed motion for a vessel, the command
PrescribedMotionVelocity[2] = 4.8
sets the velocity in the 2nd row of the table, but in this case the first row of the table is stage 0 (the buildup stage) so
this command (slightly confusingly) sets the velocity for stage 1.
More examples of the select and assignment commands are given in Examples of setting data.
w

104
InvokeWizard
Sets the data for the selected object using the Line Type Wizard. The selected object must be a line type. The input data
for the Wizard should first be set using data assignment calls.
An example of how to use this command is given in Examples of setting data.
SHEAR7DataFile <LineName> <FileName>
Exports to <FileName> a SHEAR7 data file for the line named <LineName>.
SHEAR7MdsFile <LineName> <FileName> [<FirstMode> <LastMode>]
Exports to <FileName> a SHEAR7 Mds file for the line named <LineName>.
The <FirstMode> and <LastMode> parameters are optional. If they are specified then mode numbers in the range
<FirstMode> to <LastMode> inclusive are exported. If these parameters are omitted then all modes are exported.
Only the Transverse and Mostly Transverse modes are included in the exported file. If you have specified first and last
modes to export then these mode numbers refer to the transverse and mostly transverse modes. The program takes the
following steps:
1. Calculate all modes.
2. Sort the modes into order of decreasing period / increasing frequency.
3. Remove all modes which are not Transverse or Mostly Transverse.
4. Export the modes in the range <FirstMode> to <LastMode> inclusive.
5.3.5 Examples of setting data
The Select command is probably the most difficult script command to use. To help understand how it works we present
some examples of its use below:
Simple examples
For many objects the script commands for setting data take the form:
1. Select the object using the command Select <ObjectName>.
2. Set the data using one or more commands of the form VariableName = Value.
The object name is most easily found on the Model Browser. The variable name is found by opening the relevant data
form, selecting the required data item and pressing F7.
Some examples of this procedure follow:
Select Link1
UnstretchedLength = 50

Select "3D Buoy1"
Mass = 4
Volume = 8
Height = 7.5

Select Line1
IncludeTorsion = Yes
Note: The name "3D Buoy" needs to be enclosed in quotes because it contains a space. If the name contains a
double quote and spaces then it should be enclosed with single quotes.
Data in tables and indices
Some data in OrcaFlex appears in tables. For example consider the Structure page of the Line Data form which specifies
how a Line is made up of a number of sections. Each section is specified by its Line Type, length etc. The following
example sets the number of sections of the line to be 2 and then sets data for both sections in turn.
w
105
Select Line1
NumberOfSections = 2

LineType[1] = Riser
Length[1] = 75
TargetSegmentLength[1] = 4

LineType[2] = Rope
Length[2] = 200
TargetSegmentLength[2] = 20
Note that we use blank lines to lay out the script. This is not essential but makes reading the script easier.
Data which appears in tables is always set using the indexed notation used above. Having stated this rule, we
immediately break it in the section below!
Line Type, Clump Type and Flex Joint Type data
These data are set by first selecting the type by name and then assigning the data as illustrated below:
Select "Line Type1"
OuterDiameter = 0.28
InnerDiameter = 0.21
On the Line Types Data form there is an option to view the data for all Line Types at once or to view it by individual Line
Type. When the data is being viewed for all Line Types at once the data appears in tables with one row per Line Type.
However, the data must be set by first selecting the type by name and then assigning the data. You cannot set Line Type
using index notation.
Similar rules apply to Clump Type data and to Flex Joint Type data.
Drag Chain Type and Wing Type data
These data are also set by first selecting the type by name and then assigning the data. For example:
Select "Drag Chain Type1"
Length = 12

Select "Wing Type1"
NumberOfAngles = 12
Angle[2] = -80
Lift[2] = 0.2
Drag[2] = 0.15
Moment[2] = 0.5
Data found on the General Data form
Data found on the General Data form can be set as follows:
Select General
InnerTimeStep = 0.01
OuterTimeStep = 0.1
Data found on the Environment Data form
Data found on the Environment Data form can be set as follows:
Select Environment
SeaBedStiffness = 3000
SeaBedDamping = 80
For data specific to a particular wave train you must first select the Environment and then select the particular wave
train. This makes use of the alternative syntax for Select which is Select <Object Type> <ObjectName>. For a wave
w

106
train you replace <ObjectType> with WaveTrain and replace <ObjectName> with the name of the wave train as
defined on the Environment Data form. For example:
Select Environment
Select WaveTrain "Swell from SW"
WaveTrainDirection = 135
WaveTrainType = "Dean Stream"
WaveTrainHeight = 2.5
WaveTrainPeriod = 18
Select WaveTrain "Local Wind Sea""
WaveTrainDirection = 40
WaveTrainType = JONSWAP
WaveTrainHs = 5.7
WaveTrainPeriod = 9
Data for Current data sets
Multiple Current data sets can be defined. Again this requires the alternative syntax for Select as shown below:
Select Environment
MultipleCurrentDataCanBeDefined = Yes
NumberOfCurrentDataSets = 2
CurrentName[1] = "120deg"
CurrentName[2] = "150deg"
Select Current "120deg"
RefCurrentDirection = 120
Select Current "150deg"
RefCurrentDirection = 150
ActiveCurrent = "150deg"
Vessel Type Data
Some Vessel Type data is set in a straightforward manner as follows:
Length = 120
PenWidth = 3
Symmetry = "XZ plane"
Note: Because the symmetry value (XZ plane) contains a space it must be enclosed in quotes.
However, the majority of Vessel Type data requires that you also specify which draught the data applies to. For example:
Select Draught "Transit Draught"
CurrentCoeffSurgeArea = 1200
CurrentCoeffSwayArea = 1100
CurrentCoeffYawAreaMoment = 120E3
To set data for displacement RAOs, wave load RAOs and wave drift QTFs you must also specify which type of RAO the
data applies to. For example:
Select Draught "Survival Draught"

RAOOriginX = 10
RAOOriginY = 0
RAOOriginZ = 2

w
107
Select RAOs WaveLoad
RAOOriginX = 0
RAOOriginY = 0
RAOOriginZ = 0

Select RAOs QTF
RAOOriginX = -3
RAOOriginY = 0
RAOOriginZ = 4
Note that the variable names are the same but different data is set depending on which type of RAOs has been selected.
In addition, when setting RAO table data (for displacement RAOs, wave load RAOs and wave drift QTFs) you must
specify which direction the data applies to. For example:
Select Draught "Survival Draught"
Select Direction 22.5
RAOYawAmplitude[2] = 0.13
Select Direction 45
RAOYawAmplitude[2] = 0.18
However, it is worth pointing out that situations where you would wish to specify RAO table data in a batch script are
rare. It is much more likely that you would import this data into OrcaFlex from some external source and then save it as
part of the base case data file.
Variable Data sources
Data for Variable Data sources can be set from the batch script, although once again we feel it is unlikely that you would
need to do this often. The procedure for setting variable data sources is illustrated below:
Select Stiffness1
NumberOfRows = 3

IndependentValue[1] = 0
DependentValue[1] = 0

IndependentValue[2] = 0.2

IndependentValue[2] = 0.4
Note that IndependentValue and DependentValue are the variable names for the X and Y columns of the variable data
source. That is if you are setting data for a bending stiffness data source then IndependentValue denotes curvature and
DependentValue denotes bend moment.
Line Type Wizard
The Line Type Wizard can be used from batch script. First of all you must select the Line Type and set its Wizard data.
Once this is complete the Wizard is invoked using the InvokeWizard command as illustrated below:
Select "Line Type1"
WizardCalculation = "Homogeneous Pipe"
PipeMaterial = Steel
PipeOuterDiameter = 0.082
PipeWallThickness = 0.005
InvokeWizard

w

108
Select "Line Type2"
WizardCalculation = "Line with Floats"
FloatBaseLineType = "Line Type3"
FloatDiameter = 0.80
FloatLength = 1.2
FloatPitch = 5.5
InvokeWizard
Colour data
Drawing colour data items can be set through batch script in a variety of ways. The simplest is to use the predefined
colours as follows:
Select "Line Type1"
PenColour = Red
Select "Line Type2"
PenColour = Green
The full list of predefined colours is: Black, Maroon, Green, Olive, Navy, Purple, Teal, Gray, Silver, Red, Lime, Yellow,
Blue, Fuchsia, Aqua, MoneyGreen, SkyBlue, Cream, MedGray and White.
If you want more control over the colour then you can specify an RGB value as an integer. The following example has the
same effect as the previous one:
Select "Line Type1"
PenColour = 255
Select "Line Type2"
PenColour = 65280
Using decimal values for RGB value is impractical. Instead a neat trick is to specify the colour as a hexadecimal value by
prefixing it with a $ sign as follows:
Select "Line Type1"
PenColour = $0000FF
Select "Line Type2"
PenColour = $00FF00
Select "Line Type3"
PenColour = $FF0000
This sets the colours to red, green and blue respectively. Each pair of hex digits controls the amount of red, green and
blue. So white is $FFFFFF and black is $000000. A value of $C0C0C0 gives a light grey and $808080 produces a darker
grey.
Further examples
More examples of batch scripts can be found in the OrcaFlex examples J01 Batch Script.
5.3.6 Handling Script Errors
As with other computer programs, OrcaFlex batch script files can easily contain errors. It is therefore wise to check your
script file for errors before running it as a batch job. To check for errors in your scripts, use the "Check Files" button on
the OrcaFlex batch form. This will read and obey all the commands in the script files except those that perform
calculations or write files. It will then report any errors it finds, including the line number on which the error occurs.
You can then correct the problem before running the script. Example3.txt is an example containing various errors, so to
see how errors are reported use the "Check Files" button with this example.
Warning: If you misspell a variable name in an assignment statement then "Check Files" will report an error. But
if you incorrectly specify a variable name which is nevertheless valid then OrcaFlex cannot detect the
error. So you need to be very careful that you use the correct variable names for the data items that
you want to change.
w
109
5.3.7 Obtaining Variable Names
Each OrcaFlex data item has its own name that is used to specify it in a script file. The names of the data items are based
on the corresponding labels used on the data form. To find out the name of a data item, open the appropriate data form,
select the data item, and then open (e.g. by right click) the popup menu and select the Batch Script Names command (or
press F7). This displays the variable name of the selected data item and you can select and copy+paste the name directly
into your batch script.
If the data item is in a table (or group) of data items then the Batch Script Names form displays the names of all the data
items in the table. The different columns in the table each have their own names; you then need to add an index to
specify which row you want. The exceptions to this are the 'Connections' data controls for Lines and Links, which
consist of two rows, one for End A and one for End B. For these, the Batch Script Names form lists the names for End A
only: those for End B may be obtained by simply replacing 'EndA' with 'EndB' in the name.
Finally, note that Batch Script Names are not available for an empty table e.g. if you want the names for the
attachments table on the line data form, but there are currently no attachments. In this case you must add a row to the
table before you can use the Batch Script Names form.
5.3.8 Automating Script Generation
The OrcaFlex Spreadsheet has facilities for automating the generation of a script file for a regular set of cases. To use
this facility select the Script Table worksheet. On this sheet is a table of information which is used to create the script
file. Documentation of how to set up this table is also included on the worksheet.
An example is shown below:

Figure: Example table for automatic batch script generation.
The script generated by this table loads a base case from a file called "Base Case.dat". Because no path is specified then
this file is located in the same directory as the spreadsheet. Four cases are produced based on this data file with current
values of 0.5 and 0.8 and line lengths of 100 and 120.
Note: The cell containing the base case data file name has the file name surrounded by quotes. This is
because the file name contains a space. However, the quotes are not needed for the file names in the
last column because they do not contain spaces.
The script is generated as follows. First select the top left cell containing the text "Script Table". Then drop down the
Orcina menu contained in the main Excel menu and click "Create Batch Scripts". When you do this you are presented
with the following window:
w

110

Figure: Automatically generated batch script
The script file has not been saved yet. You should check that the automatically generated script is as intended. Should
you wish to, you can modify the script file name at this point.
If there is a problem with the script you can click the Close button and correct the script table.
Save button
Saves the script file.
Save and Run button
Saves the script file and then processes it.
If the script has any Run commands then OrcaFlex is loaded and the script is processed by the standard OrcaFlex batch
form. Otherwise the script is processed from within Excel progress is reported on the Excel status bar.
Save, Run and Submit button
Saves the script file and then processes it within Excel. Each data file saved by the script is then submitted to Distributed
OrcaFlex which runs and saves the simulation file.
Note: The Save, Run and Submit button is only available if Distributed OrcaFlex is installed on your
machine. In addition, it cannot be used if the script contains any Run commands.
Multiple script tables
You can have multiple copies of the script table within a workbook. To create all the batch scripts in one operation select
all the script tables and then click "Create Batch Scripts" in the Orcina menu.
w
111
How the script is generated
The Script Table worksheet contains documentation of how the script is generated.
w
Theory, Coordinate Systems
113
6 THEORY
6.1 COORDINATE SYSTEMS
OrcaFlex uses one global coordinate system GXYZ, where G is the global origin and GX, GY and GZ are the global axes
directions. In addition, there are a number of local coordinate systems, generally one for each object in the model. In
general we use Lxyz to denote a local coordinate system. Another coordinate system that we make widespread use of is
the Line End orientation which we denote Exyz.
All the coordinate systems are right handed, as shown in the following figure, which shows the global axes and a vessel
with its own local vessel axes Vxyz. Positive rotations are clockwise when looking in the direction of the axis of rotation.
z
Sea Surface
Z
Y
X
G
V
y
x
Vessel Axes
Global Axes

Figure: Coordinate Systems
The global frame of reference must be a righthanded system and its Zaxis GZ must be positive upwards, but otherwise
it is chosen by the user. You can therefore choose the position of the global origin G and the horizontal direction GX
according to what suits the problem being analysed.
The local coordinate systems for each type of object are described in the section about that object, but typically the
origin is at a selected fixed point on the object and the axes are in special fixed directions, such as the surge, sway and
heave directions for a vessel. The seabed also has its own seabed origin and local axes, with respect to which the seabed
shape is defined.
The local axes are distinguished from the global axes by using lower case; for example the local object directions are
referred to as x, y and z . The global directions are referred to as the X, Y and Z. Whenever data or results are coordinate
system dependent, they are referred to as being either globalrelative (and are labelled in upper case) or objectrelative
(and are labelled in lower case).
You can ask OrcaFlex to draw the local axes on the 3D view. This enables you to see the local axes and check that they
are as wanted.
Most of the data and results are given relative to the global axes, including:
Data defining the sea, such as the mean sea surface Z level and the current and wave direction.
The positions of objects; for example the position of the vessel is defined by giving the global coordinates of the
vessel origin V.
Theory, Direction Conventions
w

114
The most common objectrelative items are:
The coordinates of points that move with the object, such as the vertices of a vessel or the connection point when
something is connected to a buoy.
The directiondependent properties of objects, such as drag and added mass coefficients, moments of inertia, etc.
6.2 DIRECTION CONVENTIONS
Directions and Headings
Directions and headings are specified in OrcaFlex by giving the azimuth angle of the direction, in degrees, measured
positive from the xaxis towards the yaxis, as shown in the following figure.
y
x 0
30 150
330
180
270
90
210
Directions relative
to axes

Figure: Directions and Headings
Directions for waves, current and wind are specified by giving the direction in which the wave (or current or wind) is
progressing, relative to global axes. In other words for these directions the x and yaxes in the above figure are the
global GX and GY axes.
Vessel headings are specified as the direction in which the vessel Vxaxis is pointing, relative to global axes. So again, for
vessel headings the x and yaxes in the above figure are the global GX and GY axes.
Vessel responses to waves, and similarly for current and wind, depend on the wave direction relative to the vessel. For
example, vessel type RAOs and QTFs are given for a specified wave direction relative to vessel axes
(= Wave Direction relative to global axes Vessel Heading). In other words for these vesselrelative directions the x axis
in the above figure is in the vessel heading direction. Hence a relative wave direction of 0 means a wave coming from
astern and a relative direction of 90 means one coming from starboard.
The slope direction for the seabed is specified as the direction that points up the steepest slope, relative to global axes.
The slope direction of a plane shape that is Fixed or Anchored is specified relative to global axes.
The slope direction of a plane shape that is connected to another object is specified relative to that object's axes.
Azimuth and Declination
Directions are defined in OrcaFlex by giving two angles, azimuth and declination, that are broadly similar to those used
in navigation, gunnery, etc. As with positions, directions are sometimes defined relative to the global axes and
sometimes relative to the local object axes.
For directions defined relative to the object axes Oxyz, the azimuth and declination angles are defined as follows:
Azimuth is the angle from the x axis to the projection of the direction onto the xy plane. The positive x axis direction
therefore has Azimuth = 0, and the positive y axis direction has Azimuth = 90.
w
Theory, Object Connections
115
Declination is the angle the direction makes with the z axis. Therefore Declination is 0 for the positive zdirection,
90 for any direction in the xy plane, and 180 for the negative zdirection. When Declination is 0 or 180, Azimuth
is undefined (OrcaFlex reports Azimuth = 0 in these cases).
Directions relative to the global axes are defined in just the same way, simply replacing the local xyz directions above
with the global XYZ directions. A global declination of 0 therefore means vertically upwards, 90 means horizontal and
180 means vertically downwards.
When a direction is being defined, the "sign" of the direction must also be defined. For example "vertical" does not fully
define a direction it must be either "vertically up" or "vertically down" before the azimuth and declination angles can
be derived. The "sign" conventions used in OrcaFlex for directions are:
For Lines, axial directions are always defined in the A to B sense, in other words from End A towards End B. Thus a
vertical line with End A at the top has declination 180.
For Winches and Links, axial directions are defined in the sense 'from first end towards second end'. Thus a link
with end 1 directly above end 2 has declination 180.
6.3 OBJECT CONNECTIONS
Lines, links, winches and shapes are special objects that can be connected to other objects. First consider connecting a
line to another object. To enable connections to be made each line has two joints, one at each end, which are drawn as
small blobs on the ends of the line, when the model is in Reset state. To distinguish the two ends, the joint at End A is
drawn as a triangle and the joint at End B as a square.
Each of these line end joints can either be Free or else be connected to a Vessel, 3D Buoy, 6D Buoy, the Global Axes or
the seabed. Lines cannot be connected to themselves, to other lines, nor to a Link or Winch. When a line's joint is Free,
that end of the line is free to move and this is indicated by the joint being drawn in the same colour as the line. When the
joint is connected to another object, that end of the line becomes a slave and the object to which it is connected becomes
its master. The connection is then indicated by the joint being drawn in the colour of its master.
Links and Winches also have joints at each end (winches can also have extra intermediate joints) and these are
connected to other objects in the same way as with lines, but with the following exceptions.
Link and winch joints cannot be Free they must always be connected to some master.
Link and winch joints can be connected to nodes on a line, as well as to Vessels, 3D Buoys, 6D Buoys, the Global Axes
or the seabed. This allows, for example, a winch to be attached to the end node of a line so that winching in or out
can be modelled.
Shapes have a single joint which can be connected to Vessels, 3D Buoys, 6D Buoys, the Global Axes or the seabed.
When a joint is connected to a master, the connection is made at a specified masterrelative position and the master
object then determines the position of its slave the slave is dragged around by its master as the master moves. In
response the slave applies forces and moments to its master for a line these are simply the end force and moment
applied by the line.
Because neither the Global Axes nor the seabed move, a joint connected to either of them is simply fixed in one position.
The difference between them lies in how the connection point is specified. For a connection to the Global Axes, the X, Y
and Z coordinates of the connection point are specified relative to those axes and the joint is called Fixed. For a
connection to the seabed the X and Y coordinates are specified relative to the global axes, but the Z coordinate is
specified relative to the seabed Z level at that X,Y position; the joint is then referred to as being Anchored. So for an
Anchored joint, Z=0 means that the connection is exactly on the seabed and Z=1 means it is 1 unit above the seabed. By
using anchored joints you can therefore avoid the need to calculate the seabed Z level at the given X,Y position (not
simple with sloping seabeds).
6.4 INTERPOLATION METHODS
OrcaFlex uses a number of different methods for interpolating data. These methods are described below:
Theory, Interpolation Methods
w

116
Linear. The data is assumed to follow a straight line between each (X,Y) pair. Linear interpolation is said to be
piecewise linear. Curves that are linearly interpolated are continuous but their first derivative is discontinuous at
each X data point.
Cubic spline. Cubic spline interpolation fits a cubic polynomial over each interval in the data that is the fitted
curve is piecewise cubic. These cubics are chosen so that both first and second derivatives are continuous at each X
data point.
Cubic Bessel (also known as Parabolic Blending). Cubic Bessel interpolation is similar to cubic spline in that it is
also piecewise cubic. For this method, however, the cubics are chosen so that the first derivative at each data point
is equal to that of the unique parabola passing through that data point and the two adjacent ones. The fitted curve
has continuous first derivative but discontinuous second derivative.
Choosing interpolation method
Sometimes OrcaFlex provides a choice of interpolation method. In general we would recommend that you use the
default interpolation method, but in some cases it may be appropriate to use a different method. To decide you need to
take into account what the interpolated data is used for and the different properties of the interpolation methods.
If continuity of first derivative is not required then linear interpolation is often appropriate. It has the advantage that it
is very simple.
The other 2 methods are piecewise cubic and they produce smooth curves, but they can sometimes produce curves that
have overshoots. For example the following graphs show how each method interpolates a particular set of data. Although
the greatest Y value in the data is 8, the interpolated curves for cubic spline and cubic Bessel both exceed this value
(although the effect is much smaller for cubic Bessel). How serious this overshoot is depends on the data it can be
much more serious than illustrated here or sometimes there can be no problem at all.

w
Theory, Static Analysis
117

If you are using either of the piecewise cubic interpolation methods then you should always check whether the
interpolated curve gives an appropriate fit to the data. If it does not then you usually need to supply more data points.
The main difference between the two is that cubic spline interpolation has a continuous second derivative whereas
cubic Bessel does not. However, in many cases this is not important, and one attractive feature of cubic Bessel
interpolation is that it is less prone to overshoot than cubic spline.
6.5 STATIC ANALYSIS
There are two objectives for a static analysis:
To determine the equilibrium configuration of the system under weight, buoyancy, hydrodynamic drag, etc.
To provide a starting configuration for dynamic simulation.
In most cases, the static equilibrium configuration is the best starting point for dynamic simulation and these two
objectives become one. However there are occasions where this is not so and OrcaFlex provides facilities for handling
these special cases. These facilities are discussed later.
Static equilibrium is determined in a series of iterative stages:
1. At the start of the calculation, the initial positions of the vessels and buoys are defined by the data: these in turn
define the initial positions of the ends of any lines connected to them.
2. The equilibrium configuration for each line is then calculated, assume the line ends are fixed.
w

118
3. The out of balance load acting on each free body (node, buoy, etc.) is then calculated and a new position for the body
is estimated. The process is repeated until the out of balance load on each free body is zero (up to the specified
tolerance). For details see Statics of Buoys and Vessels.
For the majority of systems, the static analysis process is very quick and reliable. Occasionally, usually for very complex
systems with multiple free bodies and many interconnections, convergence may be difficult to achieve. To help
overcome this problem, OrcaFlex provides facilities for the user to suppress some of the degrees of freedom of the
system and approach the true equilibrium by a series of easy stages. See Statics of Buoys and Vessels.
Finally, the static analysis can also be turned into a steady state analysis by specifying nonzero starting velocity on the
General Data form. This is useful when modelling towed systems or other systems that have a steady velocity.
6.5.1 Line Statics
When you do a static analysis OrcaFlex does static analyses for each line in the model.
Note: The lines are analysed in the order they appear in the by types view of the model browser. So if you are
having a problem with the static analysis of a particular line, and there are a lot of lines in the model,
then you can make investigation of the problem easier by dragging the line up to the top of the list in
the model browser.
The static analysis of a given line has two steps:
Line Statics Step 1
The first step calculates a configuration of the line (i.e. positions for all the nodes on the line), using the method specified
on the line data form (either Catenary, Spline, Quick, Prescribed, or User Specified).
Line Statics Step 2
The second step, which is optional, is called Full Statics. If Full Statics is included, then it calculates the true equilibrium
position of the line. The calculation is iterative and hence it needs a starting configuration for this it uses the
configuration found by step 1. If Full Statics is not included, then the line is simply left in the configuration found by step
1, which (depending on the method chosen) may not be an equilibrium position.
Unstable equilibria
Sometimes Line Statics Step 2 finds an equilibrium configuration that is unstable. Everyday examples of unstable
equilibria include balancing a coin on its edge or balancing a pencil on its tip.
Very occasionally OrcaFlex statics converges on an unstable equilibrium. An unstable equilibrium can usually be
detected by the presence of large curvature spikes on a range graph. Typically a dynamic run will excite the line enough
to kick it out of the unstable equilibrium. However, statics and dynamics results from such unstable equilibria are
invalid.
OrcaFlex now attempts to detect unstable equilibrium positions at the completion of Line Statics Step 2. The detection is
performed using a modal analysis and looking for negative eigenvalues in that calculation. A warning message will be
displayed if an unstable equilibrium is detected.
Note: This check is only carried out for lines which include full statics, which exclude torsion and which have
fewer than 1000 nodes. It is intended that these restrictions will be relaxed in the future.
Catenary
The Catenary method calculates the equilibrium position of the line, but it ignores the effects of bending and torsional
stiffness of the line or its end terminations.
The Catenary method also ignores contact forces between the line and any solid shapes in the model, but it does include
all other effects, including weight, buoyancy, axial elasticity, current drag and seabed touchdown (see below) and
friction.
Because bend stiffness (and other) effects are not included in the Catenary method, the position found is not, in general,
an equilibrium position. Therefore Full Statics should normally be included unless it is known that the omitted effects
w
119
are unimportant. Nevertheless, the Catenary position is often quite close to the true equilibrium position, especially
when bend stiffness is not a major influence.
The Catenary algorithm is robust and efficient for most realistic cases but it cannot handle cases where the line is in
compression. This is because, when bending stiffness is ignored, compression means the line is slack and there is no
unique solution.
The algorithm is an iterative process that converges on the solution. If necessary, you can control the maximum number
of iterations that are attempted, as well as other aspects of the convergence process see Catenary Convergence.
The Catenary solution has facilities for including seabed touchdown, with the following limitations:
Seabed touchdown can only be included at End B of the line, not at End A. Therefore, if you want touchdown then
you should arrange it to be at End B.
Touchdown is only included if End B is anchored exactly on, or else below, the seabed. If End B is above the seabed,
even if only by a small amount, then no touchdown will be modelled and the line may hang below the seabed. This
will be corrected when the simulation starts, since the nodes below the seabed will be pushed back up by the
seabed reaction forces. Alternatively, you should use the Full statics option, which can handle this case.
If End B is below the seabed, then the Catenary algorithm models touchdown by assuming that the line 'levels out'
at the level of End B. This will result in part of the line being below the seabed, but again this will be corrected when
the simulation starts, since the nodes below the seabed will be pushed back up by the seabed reaction forces.
Spline
The Spline method gives the line an initial shape that is based on a userdefined smooth Bezier spline curve. It is
therefore not, in general, an equilibrium position, and so when it is used Full Statics should be included if you want the
equilibrium position to be found.
The Bezier curve is specified by the user giving a series of control points it is a curve that tries to follow those control
points and the Bezier curve and its control points (marked by +) can be seen on the 3D view when in Reset state. The
smoothness of the spline can be controlled using the spline order.
The Spline method puts the line into a position that, as far as possible, follows the Bezier curve. However the Bezier
curve may have the wrong length (depending on how accurately you have set up the control points), so the Spline
method scales the Bezier spline curve up or down until the resulting line shape has the correct As Laid Tension, as
specified on the line data form.
Quick
The Quick method simply leaves the line in the position that it was drawn when in Reset state. This is a crude catenary
shape that (for speed reasons) ignores most effects, including buoyancy, drag, bending and torsional stiffness, and
interaction with seabed and solids. In fact the position set by the Quick method only allows for the line's average weight
per unit length and axial elasticity, so it is not usually an equilibrium position (though for simple cases it may be quite
close). The Quick method should usually be used only as a preliminary to Full Statics.
Prescribed
The Prescribed method is intended primarily for pullin analyses. It provides a convenient way of setting the line up in
the as laid (i.e. pre pullin) starting position, ready for a time simulation of the pullin. The starting shape of the line is
specified by defining a track on the seabed (see Prescribed Starting Shape). The track is defined as a sequence of track
sections each of which is a circular arc of userspecified length and angle of turn and the line is laid along this track. See
Laying out the Line.
w

120
Y
X
Start
of track
End A
Azimuth = 10
Track Section 1
Length = 150
Turn = 0 Track section 2
Length = 100
Turn = -90
Track section 3
Length = 100
Turn = 90
Track Section 4
Length = 150
Turn = 0
Continuation of
last track section
10

Figure: Plan View of Example Track
User Specified
The User Specified Statics method involves no calculation. Instead you specify a position for each node and the node is
placed there.
This statics method is intended to speed up static analysis for complex models. Suppose you are working on a model
containing a large number of lines and suppose that the static calculation for these lines is time consuming. If you are
repeatedly modifying the data of a single line and recalculating statics then OrcaFlex will unnecessarily spend time
calculating statics for the unchanged lines.
This unnecessary calculation time can be avoided by using the User Specified Statics method for each of the lines which
are not changing. The easiest way to set up the data is to click the Model | Use Specified Starting Shape for Lines menu
item after a successful statics calculation. This allows you to set the Step 1 Statics Method to User Specified and to set
the User Specified Starting Shape data to be the static equilibrium node positions. Once this procedure has been
performed subsequent static calculations will be instantaneous provided that no data affecting the equilibrium position
of the lines is altered.
Note: If you do alter data that affects the equilibrium position of a line (e.g. end positions, segmentation etc.)
then user specified statics may not be a good initial position for Full Statics. If you find that the Full
Statics calculation is struggling then you should change the Step 1 Statics Method to a more suitable
method.
Full Statics
The Full Statics calculation is a line statics calculation that includes all forces modelled in OrcaFlex. In particular it
includes the effects of bend stiffness and interaction with shapes. These effects are omitted from the Catenary
calculation, and this sometimes results in significant shock loads at the start of the simulation, when the effects of bend
stiffness and shapes are introduced. Because the Full Statics calculation includes these effects, no such shock loads
should occur when it is used. We therefore recommend using Full Statics for most cases.
To use Full Statics set the Step 2 Statics Method to Full on the Line data form. Full statics needs a starting shape for the
line, and it uses the specified Step 1 Statics Method to obtain this; it then finds the equilibrium position from there. You
should therefore set the Step 1 Statics Method to give a reasonable starting shape, choosing either Catenary, Prescribed,
Quick or Spline.
w
121
Which Step 1 Statics Method you should choose depends on the model in question. In general you should choose the
method that gives the best initial estimate of the line's static position. For lines with no buoyant sections and no
interaction with shapes or the seabed, the Quick method may well suffice. If there is seabed interaction or a buoyant
section then Catenary might be better. For lines that interact with a shape, the Spline method is perhaps best since it
enables you to ensure that the line starts on the correct side of the shape.
Which method to use
The settings to use for the line data items Step 1 Statics Method and Step 2 Statics Method depend on the type of system
being modelled and the type of static position wanted.
The default settings (for a new line) are the Catenary method followed by Full Statics. This is often a good choice, since
the Catenary method is fast and in many case gives a good initial estimate of the equilibrium position. It therefore often
provides a good starting point for the Full Statics calculation, which then refines the position to take into account the
effects that the Catenary omits, such as bending and torsional stiffness and interaction with solids.
There are situations where you may need to use other settings. Some specific cases are described below, but first here
are some general points to bear in mind.
Full Statics should be included if you want the true equilibrium position to be found.
When Full Statics is included, the first stage Statics Method is only used to give the initial starting shape for Full Statics.
The choice of Statics Method is then, in principle, not important, since the final position found will be the equilibrium
position, irrespective of the initial starting position. However it is normally best to choose the Statics Method that gives
the best initial estimate of the desired equilibrium position, since this will give the best starting position for Full Statics
to work from.
There are some cases where the choice of Statics Method is important. Firstly, in cases where there may be more than
one equilibrium position, the Full Statics calculation will tend to find the one that is closest to the initial starting position
found by the Statics Method. Secondly, the Full Statics calculation is iterative and may have difficulty converging if the
initial Statics Method position from which it starts is a long way from the true equilibrium position. In both these
situations, it is generally best to choose the Statics Method that gives the best initial estimate of the desired equilibrium
position.
Catenary convergence failure
The Catenary method is iterative and may fail to converge. It may be possible to solve this by adjusting the Catenary
Convergence Parameters on the line data form. If this proves difficult, then an alternative is to use one of the other
statics methods. The Quick method may suffice, or alternatively the Spline method may be needed. Providing Full Statics
is included then the final static position found will be the same.
Full Statics Convergence Failure
Full Statics is also an iterative calculation and may sometimes fail to converge. The convergence process is controlled by
the Full Statics Convergence Parameters on the line data form so it may be possible to obtain convergence by adjusting
some of those parameters.
However, the problem may be due to the initial starting position obtained by the specified statics method being a long
way from the equilibrium position. In this case it may be necessary for the user to specify the Spline statics method and
specify control points that give a good starting shape for the Full Statics.
Note: When setting up the spline control points, it is often useful to first set Full Statics to "No". This allows
you to examine and refine the spline shape, by running the static analysis and adjusting the control
points until the spline shape is close to the desired shape. You can then set Full Statics back to "Yes" in
order to find the true equilibrium position.
Contact With Solids
The Catenary and Quick methods both ignore contact with solids and so they may well give a poor initial position for the
Full Statics to work on. As a result the Full Statics calculation may fail to converge, or else converge to the wrong
equilibrium position (e.g. one in which the line is on the wrong side of the solid). In both these cases it may be better for
w

122
the user to select the Spline method and then specify control points that give an initial shape that is close to the desired
equilibrium position.
Pipeline Pull-In
For a pipe lying on the seabed there are usually many equilibrium positions, since seabed friction will often be able to
hold the pipe in the shape it was originally laid. For pullin analysis this originallylaid shape is generally known, and the
Prescribed method can be used to define this shape.
It is then optional whether Full Statics is included or not. Normally, it would not be included. If it is included then it will
have no effect if the Prescribed position is already in equilibrium i.e. if friction is sufficient to hold the pipe in that
position. But if friction is not sufficient then Full Statics will tend to find a nearby position that is in equilibrium.
6.5.2 Buoy and Vessel Statics
Each buoy and vessel can be either included or excluded from the static analysis. This is controlled by the data item
Included in Static Analysis on the object's data form.
Notes: You can also use the Buoy Degrees of Freedom Included In Static Analysis data item, on the General
data form, to include or exclude all buoys with a single setting.
Also, for 6D Buoys, you can include just the translational degrees of freedom (X,Y,Z) and exclude the
rotational degrees of freedom. This is sometimes useful as an aid to convergence.
If a buoy is excluded from the static analysis, then when the static analysis is done OrcaFlex will simply place the buoy in
the Initial Position specified on the buoy data form. This will not, in general, be the equilibrium position. The same
applies to vessels.
If any buoys or vessels are included in the static analysis, then the static analysis finds the equilibrium position of those
buoys and vessels, using an iterative procedure.
This iterative procedure usually converges successfully, but in some cases there can be difficulties. To give the best
chance of convergence you should specify buoy and vessel initial positions that are good estimates of the true
equilibrium position. Often you can obtain good estimates by running static analyses of a simplified model and then
using the buoy positions found as the initial positions for the more complex model. There is a button on the general data
form for this purpose see Use Calculated Positions.
Note: As an aid to static analysis, the out-of-balance forces on buoys and vessels can be drawn on the 3D
view.
If necessary, you can also control the buoy convergence process using the statics convergence parameters on the
general data form.
6.5.3 Vessel Multiple Statics
You can use the Multiple Statics command on the Calculation menu to perform a series of static analyses for a grid of
different positions of a vessel. This feature is mainly intended for use in mooring analyses.
The user specifies a series of regularly spaced positions for one vessel in the model and OrcaFlex then carries out
separate static analyses for each of these vessel positions. Key results, for example loadoffset curves, are then made
available in the form of tables and graphs as a function of the offset distance.
The vessel positions are specified by a series of offsets about the vessel's initial position (see Vessel Multiple Statics
Data).
Note: If the offset vessel has "Included in Static Analysis" set to "Yes" then in Multiple Statics this setting will
be ignored (for the offset vessel only) and the vessel will be placed as specified by the offsets. See Vessel
Data.
If the static calculation fails to converge for a particular offset then this is noted in the Statics Progress Window and the
program continues to the next offset. No results are given for offsets with failed statics.
w
Theory, Dynamic Analysis
123
When the calculation is completed the program enters Multiple Statics Complete state. Results can only be viewed in
this state and are lost upon Reset. Results cannot be saved. A dynamic simulation cannot be carried out after multiple
statics you must Reset first.
6.6 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
The dynamic analysis is a time simulation of the motions of the model over a specified period of time, starting from the
position derived by the static analysis.
The period of simulation is defined as a number of consecutive stages, whose durations are specified in the data. Various
controlling aspects of the model can be set on a stage by stage basis, for example the way winches are controlled, the
velocities and rates of turn of vessels and the releasing of lines, links and winches. This allows quite complex operational
sequences to be modelled.
Before the main simulation stage(s) there is a build-up stage, during which the wave and vessel motions are smoothly
ramped up from zero to their full size. Ramping of current is optional (see Current Data). This gives a gentle start to the
simulation and helps reduce the transients that are generated by the change from the static position to full dynamic
motion. This buildup stage is numbered 0 and its length should normally be set to at least one wave period. The
remaining stages, simply numbered 1, 2, 3..., are intended as the main stages of analysis.
Time is measured in OrcaFlex in seconds. To allow you to timeshift one aspect of the model relative to the others,
different parts of the OrcaFlex model have their own userspecified time origins. See the diagram below.
For example, simulation time is measured relative to the simulation time origin, which is specified on the Wave page on
the environment data form. The simulation time origin is at the end of the buildup stage, so negative simulation time is
the buildup stage and the remaining stages are in positive simulation time. The figure below shows a simulation using a
buildup of 10 seconds, followed by two stages of 15 seconds each.
Each wave train also has its own time origin, and similarly for timevarying wind and any time history files that you use.
All of these time origins are defined relative to the global time origin (which is not userspecified), so if necessary you
can use the time origins to timeshift one aspect of the model relative to the others.
By default all of the time origins are zero, so all of the time frames coincide with global time. For most cases this simple
situation is all you need, but here is an example where you might want to adjust a time origin.
You might want to arrange that a wave crest, or a particularly large wave in a random sea, arrives at your vessel at a
particular point in the simulation. If you use the View Profile facility and find that the wave arrives at the vessel at
global time 2590s, then you can arrange that this occurs at simulation time 10s (i.e. 10 seconds into stage 1) by
either setting the simulation time origin to 2580 or else setting the wave train time origin to 2580. The former
shifts the simulation forwards to when the wave occurs, whereas the latter shifts the wave back to the period the
simulation covers.
w

124
Simulation
Time
Origin
End of
Simulation
Stage 2 Stage 1
Static Starting
Position
30
-10 0 15
Simulation
Time t
Build-up
Global Time T
T=0
Global
Time
Origin
Time-history
Time
Origin
Time-history Time
0
Wave Train Time
0
Wave Train
Time
Origin

Figure: Time and Simulation Stages
6.6.1 Calculation Method
OrcaFlex implements two complementary dynamic integration schemes, Explicit and Implicit, as described below.
Equation of motion
The equation of motion which OrcaFlex solves is as follows:
M(p,a) + C(p,v) + K(p) = F(p,v,t)
where
M(p,a) is the system inertia load.
C(p,v) is the system damping load.
K(p) is the system stiffness load.
F(p,v,t) is the external load.
p, v and a are the position, velocity and acceleration vectors respectively.
t is the simulation time.
Both schemes recompute the system geometry at every time step and so the simulation takes full account of all
geometric nonlinearities, including the spatial variation of both wave loads and contact loads.
Explicit integration scheme
The explicit scheme is forward Euler with a constant time step. At the start of the time simulation, the initial positions
and orientations of all objects in the model, including all nodes in all lines, are known from the static analysis. The forces
and moments acting on each free body and node are then calculated. Forces and moments considered include:
weight
buoyancy
w
125
hydrodynamic and aerodynamic drag
hydrodynamic added mass effects, calculated using the usual extended form of Morison's Equation with user
defined coefficients
tension and shear
bending and torque
seabed reaction and friction
contact forces with other objects
forces applied by links and winches
The equation of motion (Newton's law) is then formed for each free body and each line node:
M(p)a = F(p,v,t) C(p,v) K(p)
This is not the systemwide equation of motion described above, but a local equation of motion for each free body and
each line node. This means that solving these equations of motion merely requires the inversion of 3 by 3 or 6 by 6 mass
matrices.
This equation is solved for the acceleration vector at the beginning of the time step, for each free body and each line
node, and then integrated using forward Euler integration. Let us denote the position, velocity and acceleration at time
step t by pt, vt and at respectively. Then the values at the end of the time step, at time t+1, are given by:
vt+1 = vt + dt.at
pt+1 = pt + dt.vt+1
where dt is the time step.
At the end of each time step, the positions and orientations of all nodes and free bodies are again known and the process
is repeated.
The time step required for stable integration is typically very short and OrcaFlex gives guidance on an appropriate time
step. Hydrodynamic and aerodynamic forces typically change little over such a short time interval, and are time
consuming to compute. To save computing time, these loads are updated only over a longer outer time step. Both time
steps are userdefined and may be set equal for critical cases.
Of the various objects available in OrcaFlex, Lines are the most computationally demanding. For most models that
include lines, the length of time required for dynamic analysis is approximately proportional to the total number of
nodes used multiplied by the total number of inner time steps in the whole simulation. If the time step is maintained at
the recommended value and nodes are distributed uniformly along the lines, then the run time is approximately
proportional to the square of the number of nodes.
Finite element models may contain spurious high frequency response, a feature inherent in the finite element method.
The Line Target Damping data can be used to damp out this high frequency noise.
Implicit integration scheme
For implicit integration OrcaFlex uses the Generalised- integration scheme as described by Chung and Hulbert. The
forces, moments, damping, mass etc. are calculated in the same way as for the explicit scheme. Then the system equation
of motion is solved at the end of the time step.
Because p, v and a are unknown at the end of the time step an iterative solution method is required. Consequently each
implicit time step consumes significantly more computation time than an explicit time step. However, the implicit
scheme is typically stable for much longer time steps than the explicit scheme and often this means that the implicit
scheme is faster.
Numerical damping of the integration scheme
The Generalised integration scheme has controllable numerical damping which is desirable since it remove this
spurious, nonphysical high frequency response. This numerical damping also leads to much more stable convergence
and hence allows for longer time steps and much faster simulations.
w

126
Any integration scheme which includes numerical damping of high frequency response must be careful to avoid
damping response at lower frequencies. The Generalised integration scheme is designed to minimise the low
frequency damping.
The numerical damping is determined by specifying the level of high frequency dissipation, , which must take a value
between 0 and 1. Perhaps counterintuitively, larger values correspond to lower levels of dissipation. A value of 1 gives
no dissipation and a value of 0 gives asymptotic annihilation, whereby high frequency response is annihilated after one
time step.
6.6.2 Ramping
Simulation time is reduced by the use of a build up time at the beginning of the simulation. During the buildup time the
wave dynamics, vessel motions and optionally the current are built up smoothly from zero to their full level. This gives a
gentle start to the simulation which reduces transient responses and avoids the need for long simulation runs. The
buildup stage should normally be set to at least one wave period. Negative time is shown during the simulation to
indicate the buildup time; so time before time zero is build up time, time after time zero is normal simulation with the
full specified excitation.
When using a time domain VIV model, ramping is also used to smooth the handover from the standard Morison drag
force applied in statics to the force given by the VIV model.
The ramping factor is calculated as follows:
Ramping Factor = r
3
(6r
2
15r + 10)
where r is the proportion of the buildup stage completed, given by:
r = (Time + Length of Stage 0) / (Length of Stage 0)
Note: Time is negative throughout the build-up stage.
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
r
R
a
m
p
i
n
g

F
a
c
t
o
r

Figure: The OrcaFlex ramping function
This particular ramping function has been chosen so that its first and second derivatives are zero at the beginning and
end of the buildup stage.
w
Theory, Friction Theory
127
6.7 FRICTION THEORY
OrcaFlex provides a simple friction model that can give an approximate representation of contact friction. This is
commonly used to model seabed friction, friction on midwater arches, guide tube friction etc.
Seabed friction
In reality seabed interaction is much more complicated than simple friction it involves effects such as the soil being
displaced by the line as it moves, accumulation of soil in front of the line, etc. To model seabed interaction accurately
would require much more information about the soil structure and would involve modelling the soil itself which is
beyond the scope of OrcaFlex.
Overview of the OrcaFlex friction model
OrcaFlex models friction for contact with the seabed or elastic solids. Hereafter we use the term solid to refer to either
the seabed or elastic solids. The objects which can contact with solids are Lines, 3D Buoys and 6D Buoys.
Friction is modelled as Coulomb friction in the solid plane. Every object which is in contact with a solid keeps track of a
friction target position (discussed below) and a friction force is applied at which acts towards this target position.
The standard Coulomb friction model states that a friction force of R is applied, where is the friction coefficient and R
is the contact reaction force. However, this model results in a discontinuous Force / Deflection relationship which would
be impossible for a program like OrcaFlex to solve. Instead we use a modified Coulomb model as illustrated below:

Deflection
Force
R
R
-D
crit
+R
Deflection
Force
R
+D
crit

Figure: Standard Coulomb and modified Coulomb friction models
In the modified Coulomb friction model the transition from a friction force of R to +R takes place as a linear variation
over the deflection range Dcrit to +Dcrit. Here Dcrit is given by:
Dcrit = R / (Ks.A)
where
Ks is the shear stiffness data item.
A is the contact area.
The friction force can be thought of as being ramped from 0 to a maximum value of R as the deflection increases.
Higher values of Ks lead to the ramping taking place over a shorter distance, and vice versa.
w

128
Calculation of friction coefficient
The friction coefficient is defined as follows:
For contact between Lines and the seabed the friction coefficient is defined on the Line Type data.
For contact between 3D Buoys and the seabed the friction coefficient is defined on the 3D Buoy data.
For contact between 6D Buoys and the seabed the friction coefficient is defined on the 6D Buoy data.
For contact between Lines, 3D Buoys and 6D Buoys and elastic solids the friction coefficient is defined on the Solid
Friction Coefficients data form.
For line friction, both normal and axial coefficients can be defined. If these values are different, OrcaFlex uses a single
value of defined as:
= magnitude of the vector n.Dn + a.Da
where
D = unit vector in the plane of the solid, from the node towards the target position.
Dn, Da = the vector components of D in the node's normal and axial directions.
Target positions in statics
Friction is only applied in statics for contact between lines and the seabed.
If the Step 1 Statics Method is Prescribed then the target positions are laid out along the prescribed shape.
For all other Step 1 Statics Methods the target positions are laid along the seabed in the direction specified by the Lay
Azimuth direction.
The distance between each target position is determined by the unstretched segment length and the As Laid Tension. If
each node was to sit at its target position then the effective tension throughout the line would be the As Laid Tension.
Target positions in dynamics
During dynamics, at the end of each time step, each friction target position is updated using the following rules:
At the start of the dynamic simulation, for lines in contact with the seabed, the target position from statics is used.
Other wise the target position it set equal to the contact position.
If an object is not in contact then the target position is not defined since no friction is applied.
If an object has just come into contact then the target position is set equal to the contact position.
If the target position is a distance greater than Dcrit from the contact position then the target position is placed at a
distance exactly Dcrit from the contact position on the vector D, as shown in the following figure. This can be thought
of as 'dragging' the target position towards the contact position.
Otherwise the target position is not modified.
w
129

Contact position
Vector D

Old Target position
Circle of
radius D
crit
New Target position

Figure: Updating friction target positions during dynamics
Moments induced by friction (Lines)
The friction force is applied at the point of contact with the solid.
For lines this is at the line outer edge as defined by the contact diameter. Moments in OrcaFlex are reported at the
centreline and so the moment arm effect of applying the friction force at the outer edge results in a moment being
applied to the node. The applied moment is given by the vector crossproduct p F, where p is the point of contact
relative to the node origin and F is the applied friction force.
This frictional moment effect can most easily be visualised by considering a pipe being dragged laterally across a surface
with friction. It is intuitively obvious that the friction will try to twist the pipe.
Note: This effect is only modelled if torsion is included in the model.
Moments induced by friction (3D and 6D Buoys)
Since 3D Buoys do not have rotational degrees of freedom, no such moments are applied.
For 6D Buoys the friction force is applied at each vertex in contact with the solid. If the vertex if offset from the buoy
origin then the appropriate moment, about the buoy origin, will be generated.
Shear damping
Objects moving in the solid plane may also experience a damping force. Let d be the distance between the contact
position and the target position. If 0 <= d <= Dcrit then a damping force in the solid plane is applied to the object with
magnitude given by:
D = S . min (.2(M.K.A).Vs, R)
where
S is a scaling factor given by 1 (d/Dcrit),
is percentage of critical contact damping / 100,
M is the mass of the object,
K is the solid normal stiffness,
A is the contact area,
Vs is the component of velocity in the solid plane.
Theory, Spectral Response Analysis
w

130
6.8 SPECTRAL RESPONSE ANALYSIS
The Spectral Response Analysis capability of OrcaFlex provides a facility for determining the response characteristics
for any OrcaFlex results variable. This feature produces output similar to a frequency domain package but the
calculation is based on a random wave time domain simulation. The results of this simulation are transformed into the
frequency domain using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and the spectral response is then derived. The final output of
the analysis is an RAO for the results variable of interest.
Time domain random wave for spectral response analysis
In order to calculate spectral response you must first perform a random wave time domain simulation of the system of
interest. To do this you must specify a single wave train with wave type of Response Calculation. The random wave
used has a truncated white noise spectrum. A truncated white noise spectrum has energy spread evenly over a user
specified range of frequencies.
Spectral response calculation details
The spectral response analysis starts from the time history of some results variable of interest. The time history covers
the response calculation simulation period as specified on the General Data form. The duration of this period together
with the logging interval, t, determine the total number of samples available for the FFT.
OrcaFlex does not necessarily use all the available samples. This is because the FFT calculation is slow when presented
with a time history whose size is a large prime, or is a product of large primes.
Suppose that N is the total number of available samples. OrcaFlex will choose M with the properties that that M N and
the FFT can be calculated quickly and efficiently for M samples. Having chosen M, OrcaFlex then selects the M samples
from the original time history that are closest to the end of the simulation.
OrcaFlex then calculates the power spectral density (PSD) of these M time history samples using the FFT. The PSD is
denoted as the sequence (fi, Pi) for i = 1, 2, ..., M/2 where Pi is understood to be the PSD for frequency fi. The values of fi
are integer multiples of the FFT's fundamental frequency, f = 1/tM, given by fi = if. The maximum frequency equals
M/2.f = 1/2t. This frequency is known as the Nyquist critical frequency.
The RAO is calculated by taking the square root of the PSD and then dividing the result by the wave spectrum. This is
expressed in formula as
Ri = (Pi / Si), for i = 1, 2, ..., M/2
where Ri is the RAO at frequency fi and S is the spectral density at frequency fi for the response calculation random
wave.
Notes: Provided that a Response Calculation wave type has been selected the Waves page of the Environment
data form reports the value of M. This takes the form of a text label which says "The response
calculation will use M data points".
Only the frequencies which lie in the target frequency range are used for wave components. Because of
this there may be fewer than M/2 wave components.
Spectral response random wave components
It is important that the random wave components have frequencies which match those produced by the FFT. This is
because of a phenomenon of the FFT known as frequency leakage which would occur if the random wave component
frequencies did not match the FFT frequencies. The effect of leakage is to make the output of the FFT noisy.
The response calculation wave components are selected with frequencies that are also integer multiples of f. In this
way the frequency leakage effect is avoided.
Not all these frequencies are used in the response calculation random wave. This is because there could potentially be
so many frequencies (i.e. for large values of M/2) that the realtime required to simulate a wave with that many
components would be prohibitive. The user controls the range of frequencies to be used with the Target Frequency
Range data on the Environment data form.
w
Theory, Environment Theory
131
Comparison with traditional frequency domain methods
For frequency domain approaches to calculating system responses each nonlinearity in the system has to be handled in
special ways. However, by calculating the RAOs using a fully nonlinear time domain simulation and then transforming
to the frequency domain using Fourier transform methods, the nonlinearities are included in the calculation
automatically.
The advantage of the method used by OrcaFlex is that nonlinearities can be handled implicitly without the need for
special, bespoke linearisation techniques.
6.9 ENVIRONMENT THEORY
6.9.1 Buoyancy Variation with Depth
The buoyancy of an object is normally assumed to be constant and not vary significantly with position. The buoyancy is
equal to .V.g, where is the water density, V is the volume and g is the acceleration due to gravity. In reality the
buoyancy does vary due to the following effects:
If the object is compressible then its volume V will reduce with depth due to the increasing pressure.
The water density can vary with position, either because of the compressibility of the water, or else because of
temperature or salinity variations. Normally the density increases with depth, since otherwise the water column
would be unstable (the lower density water below would rise up through the higher density water above).
For buoys and lines these effects can be modelled in OrcaFlex.
Compressibility of Buoys and Lines
All things are compressible to some extent. The effect is usually not significant, but in some cases it can have a
significant effect on the object's buoyancy. To allow these effects to be modelled, you can specify the compressibility of a
3D Buoy, 6D Buoy or Line Type by giving the following data on the object's data form.
Bulk Modulus
The bulk modulus, B, specifies how the object's volume changes with pressure. If we denote by V the compressed
volume of the object then V is given by:
V = V0(1P/B)
where V0 is the uncompressed volume at atmospheric pressure, and P is the pressure excess over atmospheric pressure.
The bulk modulus has the same units as pressure F/L
2
and the above formula can be thought of as saying that the
volume reduces linearly with pressure, and at a rate that would see the object shrink to zero volume if the pressure ever
reached B. For an incompressible object the bulk modulus is infinity, and this is the default value in OrcaFlex.
The above formula breaks down when P>B. In this case OrcaFlex uses a compressed volume V of zero. However, the
relationship between pressure and volume would become inaccurate well before the pressure exceeded the bulk
modulus. In practise B is normally very large, so the object normally only experiences pressures that are small
compared to B.
6.9.2 Current Theory
Extrapolation
In the presence of waves, the current must be extrapolated above the still water level; in OrcaFlex we adopt the
convention that the surface current applies to all levels above the still water level.
If a sloping seabed is specified, the boundary is inconsistent with a horizontal current. This effect is not usually
important and is uncorrected in OrcaFlex. The current at the greatest depth specified is applied to all greater depths.
Interpolated Method
Horizontal current is specified as a full 3D profile, variable in magnitude and direction with depth. The profile should be
specified from the still water surface to the seabed. Linear interpolation is used for intermediate depths. If the specified
profile does not cover the full depth then it is extrapolated (see Extrapolation above).
w

132
Power Law Method
Current direction is specified and does not vary with depth. Speed (S) varies with position (X,Y,Z) according to the
formula:
S = Sseabed + (Ssurface Sseabed) x ((ZZseabed) / (ZsurfaceZseabed)) ^ (1/Exponent)
where
Ssurface and Sseabed are the current speeds at the surface and seabed,
Exponent is the power law exponent,
Zsurface is the water surface Z level,
Zseabed is the Z level of the seabed directly below (X,Y).
Note: If Z is below the seabed (e.g. has penetrated the seabed) then the current speed is set to Sseabed and if
Z is above the surface (e.g. in a wave crest) then current speed is set to Ssurface.
6.9.3 Seabed Theory
The seabed is modelled as a sprung surface whose properties are specified in the seabed data.
Objects Affected
Only 3D buoys and 6D buoys, lines and drag chains interact with the seabed; other objects are not affected by it.
A line interacts when one of its nodes penetrates the seabed. The node then experiences the seabed stiffness force and
damping force, applied at the node centre. The node may also experience a friction force see Friction Theory.
A 3D buoy interacts when the buoy origin penetrates the seabed. The seabed stiffness and damping forces are then
applied at the buoy origin. No seabed friction force is applied.
A 6D buoy interacts when its vertices penetrates the seabed. Each penetrating vertex experiences the seabed stiffness
and damping forces, applied at the vertex. No seabed friction force is applied.
Drag chain interaction with the seabed is slightly different; see drag chain seabed interaction.
Seabed Stiffness Force
The seabed reaction force is in the outwards normal direction and has magnitude R = K.A.d where
K is the seabed stiffness
A is the area of contact
d is the depth of penetration into the seabed.
For details on how the area of contact values are calculated see 3D Buoy Theory, 6D Buoy Theory and Line Interaction
with Seabed and Solids.
Seabed Damping Force
The normal seabed damping force is only applied when the object is travelling into the seabed, not when it is coming out
of the seabed. It is in the outwards normal direction and has magnitude D given by:
D = .2(M.K.A).Vn if Vn > 0
D = 0 if Vn <= 0
where
is percentage of critical seabed damping / 100
M is the mass of the object
K is the seabed stiffness
A is the contact area
w
133
Vn is the component of velocity normal to the seabed, positive when travelling into the seabed and negative
when coming out.
6.9.4 Morison's Equation
OrcaFlex calculates hydrodynamic loads on lines, 3D buoys and 6D buoys using an extended form of Morison's Equation.
See Morison, O'Brien, Johnson and Schaaf.
Morison's equation was originally formulated for calculating the wave loads on fixed vertical cylinders. There are two
force components, one related to water particle acceleration (the 'inertia' force) and one related to water particle
velocity (the 'drag' force). For moving objects, the same principle is applied, but the force equation is modified to take
account of the movement of the body.
The extended form of Morison's equation used in OrcaFlex is:
Fw = (.aw + Ca..ar) + ..Vr|Vr|.CD.A
where
Fw is the wave force
is the mass of fluid displaced by the body
aw is the fluid acceleration relative to earth
Ca is the added mass coefficient for the body
ar is the fluid acceleration relative to the body
is the density of water
Vr is the fluid velocity relative to the body
CD is the drag coefficient for the body
A is the drag area
The term in parentheses is the inertia force, the other is the drag force. The drag force is familiar to most engineers, but
the inertia force can cause confusion.
The inertia force consists of two parts, one proportional to fluid acceleration relative to earth (the Froude-Krylov
component), and one proportional to fluid acceleration relative to the body (the added mass component).
To understand the Froude-Krylov component, imagine the body being removed and replaced with an equivalent volume
of water. This water would have mass and be undergoing an acceleration aw. It must therefore be experiencing a force
.aw.
Now remove the water and put the body back: the same force must now act on the body. This is equivalent to saying
that the FroudeKrylov force is the integral over the surface of the body of the pressure in the incident wave,
undisturbed by the presence of the body. (Note the parallel with Archimedes' Principle: in still water, the integral of the
fluid pressure over the wetted surface must exactly balance the weight of the water displaced by the body.)
The added mass component is due to the distortion of the fluid flow by the presence of the body. A simple way to
understand it is to consider a body accelerating through a stationary fluid. The force required to sustain the acceleration
may be shown to be proportional to the body acceleration and can be written:
F = (m + Ca.).a
where
F is the total force on the body
m is the mass of the body
(Ca.) is a constant related to the shape of the body and its displacement
a is the acceleration of the body.
w

134
Another way of looking at the problem is in terms of energy. The total energy required to accelerate a body in a
stationary fluid is the sum of the kinetic energy of the body itself, and the kinetic energy of the flow field about the body.
These energies correspond to the terms (m.a) and Ca..a respectively.
Trapped Water
The term (Ca.) has the dimensions of mass and has become known as the added mass. This is an unfortunate name
which has caused much confusion over the years. It should not be viewed as a body of fluid trapped by and moving with
the body. Some bodies are so shaped that this does occur, but this trapped water is a completely different matter.
Trapped water occurs when the body contains a closed flooded space, or where a space is sufficiently closely
surrounded to prevent free flow in and out. Trapped water should be treated as part of the body: the mass of the
trapped water should be included in the body mass, and its volume should be included in the body volume.
For a more complete description of Morison's equation and a detailed derivation of the added mass component see
Barltrop and Adams, 1991 and Faltinsen, 1990.
6.9.5 Waves
Wave Theory
Each wave train can be a regular wave, a random wave or specified by a time history file.
Regular Waves
OrcaFlex offers a choice of a longcrested, regular, linear Airy wave (including seabed influence on wave length) or non
linear waves using Dean, Stokes' 5th or Cnoidal wave theories (see Nonlinear Wave Theories). Waves are specified in
terms of height and period, and direction of propagation.
Random Waves
OrcaFlex offers four standard spectra: JONSWAP, ISSC (also known as Bretschneider or modified PiersonMoskowitz),
OchiHubble and Torsethaugen.
The program synthesises a wave time history from a userdetermined number of wave components. The wave
components are chosen using an equal energy approach. The phases associated with each wave component are pseudo
random: a random number generator is used to assign phases, but the sequence is repeatable, so the same user data will
always give the same train of waves. Different waves from the same spectrum can be obtained by shifting the simulation
time origin relative to the wave time origin.
OrcaFlex provides special facilities to assist in selecting an appropriate section of random sea. These are available on the
Waves Preview page of the Environment data form. The facilities include:
A profile graph plotting the wave elevation for a selected period and
A table listing all the waves in a selected time interval whose height or steepness is large by comparison with the
reference wave Hs, Tz.
Kinematic Stretching
Kinematic stretching is the process of extending linear Airy wave theory to provide predictions of fluid velocity and
acceleration (kinematics) at points above the mean water level. It only applies to Airy waves and to random waves
(which are made up of a number of Airy waves).
Linear wave theory in principle only applies to very small waves, so it does not predict kinematics for points above the
mean water level since they are not in the fluid. The theory therefore needs to be 'stretched' to cover such points, and
OrcaFlex offers a choice of three published methods: Vertical Stretching, Wheeler Stretching and Extrapolation
Stretching (see below).
Consider, for example, the horizontal particle velocity u. In Airy wave theory the formula for u at position (x,z) at time t
is:
u = E(z) a cos(t + kx) ........................ (1)
w
135
where a, , and k are the wave amplitude, angular frequency, phase lag and wave number, respectively, and z is
measured positive upwards from the mean water level.
The term E(z) is a scaling factor given by E(z) = cosh(k(d+z))/sinh(kd), where d = mean water depth. It is an
exponential decay term that models the fact that the fluid velocity reduces as the point goes deeper. However for z>0
(i.e. above the mean water level) E(z) is greater than 1 so it amplifies the velocity. This can give particle velocity
predictions that are unrealistically large (the problem being worst for high frequency waves). The various stretching
methods deal with this problem by replacing E(z) with a more realistic term.
Note that all the stretching methods apply not only to the scaling factor E(z) in the horizontal velocity formula (1), but
also to the scaling factors in the corresponding Airy wave theory formulae for the vertical velocity and the horizontal
and vertical acceleration.
Vertical Stretching
This is the simplest of the 3 methods. E(z) is left unchanged for z<=0, but for z > 0 (i.e. above the mean water level) E(z)
is replaced by E(0). This has the effect of setting the kinematics above the mean water levels to equal those at the mean
water level.
Wheeler Stretching
This method stretches (or compresses) the water column linearly into a height equivalent to the mean water depth. This
is done by replacing E(z) by E(z') where
z' = d.(d+z)/(d+) d
and is the zvalue at the instantaneous water surface. This formula for z' essentially shifts z linearly to be in the range
d to 0.
Extrapolation Stretching
This method extends E(z) to points above the mean water level by using linear extrapolation of the tangent to E(z) at the
mean water level. In other words, for z<=0 equation (1) is left unchanged, but for z>0, E(z) is replaced by E(0) + z.E'(0),
where E' is the rate of change of E with z.
Wave Spectra
ISSC spectrum
The ISSC spectrum (also known as Bretschneider or modified PiersonMoskowitz) is defined as:
S(f) = 5/16 Hs
2
fm
4
f
5
exp(5/4 [f/fm]
4
)
where f is frequency. The other two parameters, the peak frequency fm and the significant wave height Hs are data items.
For more details see Tucker 1991, page 107.
JONSWAP spectrum
The JONSWAP spectrum is defined as:
S(f) = (g
2
/16
4
) f
5
exp(5/4 [f/fm]
4
)
b

where g is the gravitational constant, b = exp(1/2
2
[f/fm 1]
2
), = 1 for f fm, = 2 for f > fm and the other
parameters , , 1 and 2 are data items.
For more details see:
Barltrop and Adams, page 277.
Tucker 1991, page 108.
Isherwood 1987.
Ochi-Hubble spectrum
See the OchiHubble paper for details of the spectral formula.
w

136
The OchiHubble Spectrum allows two peaked spectra to be set up, enabling you to represent sea states that include
both a remotely generated swell and a local wind generated sea.
Example of Ochi-Hubble Spectrum
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 1 2 3 4
Relative Frequency r
S
(
r
)

[
m
^
2
]

The OchiHubble wave spectrum is the sum of two separate component spectra the example graph shows the two
components and their sum. The component spectrum with the lower frequency peak corresponds to the remotely
generated swell and the one with the higher frequency peak corresponds to the local wind generated sea. This is why
the OchiHubble spectrum is often called a twopeaked spectrum; however in practice, the resulting total spectrum
typically has only one peak (from the remotely generated swell) plus a shoulder of energy from the local wind generated
sea.
The two component spectra are each specified by a set of three parameters Hs1, fm1, 1 for the lower frequency
component and Hs2, fm2, 2 for the higher frequency component. See Data for OchiHubble Spectrum.
In OrcaFlex you can either specify all these 6 parameters explicitly, or you can simply specify the overall significant
wave height Hs and tell OrcaFlex to automatically select the most probable 6 parameters for that value of Hs. In the
latter case, OrcaFlex uses 'most probable' parameters based on formulae given in the OchiHubble paper (table 2b).
Torsethaugen spectrum
See the Torsethaugen paper for details of the spectral formula.
The Torsethaugen spectrum is another twopeaked spectrum, more suited to North Sea application than OchiHubble.
Non-linear Wave Theories
OrcaFlex models two types of waves, periodic regular waves and random waves. A regular wave is a periodic wave with
a single period. A random wave in OrcaFlex is a superposition of a number of regular linear waves of differing heights
and periods. We shall not discuss random waves here.
For very small waves in deep water, Airy wave theory (also know as linear wave theory) is valid. Many waves in
practical engineering use do not fall into this category, hence the need for nonlinear wave theories. These include
Stokes' 5th order theory, Dean's stream function theory and Fenton's cnoidal theory which are all available in OrcaFlex.
We shall give an outline of these theories here in the form of concise abbreviations of the relevant papers. For an
overview of all the theories considered here see Sobey R J, Goodwin P, Thieke R J and Westberg R J, 1987.
To fix notation we use the following conventions throughout. These conventions are different from those used in
OrcaFlex but we use them here in order to agree with the literature. We assume that the wave is longcrested and
travels in the x direction and we shall work only in the (x,z) plane. The seabed has z = 0 and the mean water level is
given by z = d, where d is the water depth (at the seabed origin). The wave is specified by wave height (H) and wave
period (T) and the wavelength (L) will be derived. The horizontal and vertical particle velocities are denoted by u and v
respectively. We assume a moving frame of reference with respect to which the motion is steady and x = 0 under a crest.
w
137
See Stokes' 5th, Dean's stream function theory and Fenton's cnoidal theory for a brief overview of each of the nonlinear
wave theories available in OrcaFlex and for guidance on how to decide on which wave theory to use in practice.
Dean Stream Function theory
A typical approach to wave theory makes use of the idea of a velocity potential. This is a vector field (x,z) whose partial
derivatives are the particle velocities of the fluid. That is:
/x = u and /z = v.
Chappelear devised a wave theory based on finding the best fit velocity potential to the defining wave equations. This
was quite complicated and Dean's idea was to apply the same idea to a stream function. A stream function is a vector
field (x,z) which satisfies
/x = v and /z = u.
Dean's original paper Dean (1965) was intended to be used to fit stream functions to waves whose profile was already
known, for example a wave recorded in a wave tank. For the purpose of OrcaFlex the user provides information on the
wave train in the form of water depth, wave height and wave period and we wish to find a wave theory which fits this
data. Thus Dean's theory in its original form does not apply and we choose to follow the stream function theory of
Rienecker and Fenton (1981). This method is also known as Fourier approximation wave theory.
The problem is to find a stream function which:
1. satisfies Laplace's equation
2
/x
2
+
2
/z
2
= 0, which means that the flow is irrotational,
2. is zero at the seabed, that is (x,0) = 0,
3. is constant at the free surface z = (x), say (x,) = Q and
4. satisfies Bernoulli's equation [ (/x)
2
+ (/z)
2
] + = R, where R is a constant.
In these equations all variables have been nondimensionalised with respect to water depth d and gravity g.
By standard methods, equations (1) and (2) are satisfied by a stream function of the form
(x,z) = B0 z + Bj [sinh (jkz) / cosh (jk)] cos (jkx)
where k is the wave number which is as yet undetermined, and the summation is from j = 1 to N. The constant N is said
to be the order of the stream function. The problem now is to find coefficients Bj and k which satisfy equations (3) and
(4).
Implementing stream function theory requires numerical solution of complex nonlinear equations. The number of
these equations increases as N increases and there is a short pause in the program while these equations are solved. The
default value is 10 and for most purposes it is not necessary to alter this. However, for nearly breaking waves the
solution method sometimes has problems converging. If this is the case then it might be worth experimenting with
different values.
Accuracy of method
Because the method is a numerical best fit method it does not suffer from the truncation problems of the Stokes' 5th and
cnoidal theories. For these methods, power series expansions are obtained and then truncated at an arbitrary point. If
the terms which are being ignored are not small then these methods will give inaccurate answers. In theory, Dean's
method should cope well in similar circumstances as it is finding a best fit to the governing equations. This means that
stream function wave theory is very robust. In very shallow water Fenton believes that his high order cnoidal wave
theory is best, although we would recommend stream function theory here. It is possible that, by their very nature,
Stokes' 5th and the cnoidal theories may give inaccurate results if applied to the wrong waves. In all circumstances the
stream function method, if it converges, will give sensible results. Hence it can be used as a coarse check on the
applicability of other theories. That is if your preferred wave theory gives significantly different results from Dean's,
applied to the same wave, then it is probably wrong!
Stokes' 5th
The engineering industry's standard reference on 5th order Stokes' wave theory is Skjelbreia and Hendrickson (1961).
This paper presents a 5th order Stokes' theory with expansion term ak where a is the amplitude of the fundamental
w

138
harmonic and k = 2 / L is the wave number. The length a has no physical meaning and by choosing ak as expansion
parameter, convergence for very steep waves cannot be achieved. Fenton (1985) gives a 5th order Stokes' theory based
around an expansion term kH/2 and demonstrates that it is more accurate than Skjelbreia and Hendrickson's theory.
Thus it is Fenton's theory which we recommend, although both theories have been implemented in OrcaFlex. It is worth
noting that the linear theory of Airy is a 1st order Stokes' theory.
Assuming that the user supplies wave train information comprising water depth, wave height and wave period then the
wave number k must be computed before the theory can be applied. In order to do this a nonlinear implicit equation in
terms of k is solved using Newton's method. This equation is known as the dispersion relationship. Once k is known, a
number of coefficients are calculated and these are used for power series expansions in order to find the surface profile
and wave kinematics.
Accuracy of method
Inherent in the method is a truncation of all terms of order greater than 5. Thus if the terms which are discarded are
significant then this theory will give poor results. See Ranges of applicability for the waves for which Stokes' 5th theory
is valid, but essentially this is a deep water, steep wave theory.
Cnoidal theory
This is a steady periodic water wave theory designed to be used for long waves in shallow water. The Stokes' 5th order
theory is invalid in such water as the expansion term is large and the abandoned terms due to truncation are significant.
The highorder cnoidal theory of Fenton (1979) has been regarded as the standard reference for many years but it gives
unsatisfactory predictions of water particle velocities. This work has been superseded by Fenton (1990 and 1995).
Fenton's original paper gave formulae for fluid velocities based on a Fourier series expansion about the term = H / d.
In his later works Fenton discovered that much better results could be obtained by expanding about a "shallowness"
parameter . We follow this approach.
A 5th order stream function representation is used but instead of terms involving cos the Jacobian elliptic function cn is
used, hence the term cnoidal. The function takes two parameters, x as usual, and also m which determines how cusped
the function is. In fact when m = 0, cn is just cos and the Jacobian elliptic functions can be regarded as the standard
trigonometric functions. The solitary wave which has infinite length corresponds to m = 1 and long waves in shallow
water have values of m close to 1. Fenton shows that the cnoidal theory should only be applied for long waves in shallow
water and for such waves m is close to 1.
The initial step of the solution is to determine m and an implicit equation with m buried deep within must be solved. As
in the Stokes' theory this equation is the dispersion relationship. The solution is performed using the bisection method
since the equation shows singular behaviour for m 1 and derivative methods fail.
After m has been determined Fenton gives formulae to calculate surface elevation and other wave kinematics. In
practice m is close to 1 and Fenton takes advantage of this to simplify the formulae. He simply sets m = 1 in all formulae
except where m is the argument of an elliptic or Jacobian function. This technique is known as Iwagaki approximation
and proves to be very accurate.
Ranges of Applicability
Regular wave trains are specified in OrcaFlex by water depth, wave height and wave period. Which wave theory should
one use for any given wave train? For an infinitesimal wave in deep water then Airy wave theory is accurate. For finite
waves a nonlinear theory should be used. In order to decide which wave theory to use one must calculate the Ursell
number given by
U = HL
2
/ d
3

See Nonlinear Wave Theories for notation conventions used.
If U < 40 then the waves are said to be short and Stokes' 5th may be used. For U > 40 we have long waves and the
cnoidal wave theory can be used. The stream function theory is applicable for any wave. The boundary number 40
should not be considered a hard and fast rule. In fact for Ursell number close to 40 both the Stokes' 5th theory and the
cnoidal theory have inaccuracies and the stream function method is recommended. In regions well away from Ursell
number 40 then the relevant analytic theories (Stokes' 5th or cnoidal) perform very well.
w
139
Our recommendations are:
Ursell number Recommended wave theory
<< 40 Dean or Stokes' 5th
~ 40 Dean
>> 40 Dean or Cnoidal
In general then, we would recommend the stream function wave theory in most cases. If another theory is being used
then it should be compared against the stream function theory to check its validity. This is a very important point.
OrcaFlex has no way of telling if a theory has been misapplied, other than giving warnings for obvious abuses it is up to
the user to make sure they are using an applicable theory. By comparing with the stream function theory a reliable
check can be made and if two theories give the same answers then one should be filled with confidence!
Breaking waves
All the regular wave theories are suspect for breaking or near breaking waves. In shallow water the height of a breaking
wave, HB= 0.14L, where L is the wave length. An expression which covers all depths, due to Miche, is
HB = 0.88k
1
tanh(0.89kd)
where k=2/L is the local wave number as calculated by Airy wave theory. OrcaFlex reports a warning if the wave
height exceeds this breaking wave height HB.
Particle kinematics
An important consideration for computing the wave kinematics is whether to use apparent or real quantities. That is, do
we compute velocities and accelerations relative to a fixed point in the fluid (Eulerian) or relative to an individual water
particle (Lagrangian). For velocities there is no confusion as the two concepts coincide but there is an issue for
accelerations.
The accelerations are used by OrcaFlex in relation to Morison's Equation in order to compute pressure gradients which
in turn result in forces being applied to objects. Tucker (1991) gives an example of a Venturi tube with zero apparent
acceleration throughout the tube but a non zero pressure gradient! For the linear theory of Airy, which is based on the
assumption that the wave is very small, then apparent and real accelerations are effectively equal and OrcaFlex
computes apparent accelerations for Airy wave theory. For the nonlinear theories, real accelerations are used in all
cases.
Handling of current
Each of the theories implemented allows for a uniform Eulerian current but none is designed to deal with current
profiles. Because we are dealing with nonlinear waves it is not possible to analyse the wave assuming zero current and
then add in the current afterwards, as we do for Airy waves. So we have to reach some compromise. The convention
chosen is as follows:
The current profile is defined as usual and the current used to analyse the wave is taken to be the component of current
in the wave direction at the mean water level. Call this current component CW. To calculate the fluid velocity V at any
given point in time we must take into account the fluid velocity VW containing uniform current CW together with the
current C at the point in question, as specified by the current profile. The formula is:
V = VW CW + C.
A similar formula is used during the build up. If the wave factor is then
V = (VW CW ) + C.
Seabed Slope
In the case of a sloping seabed in OrcaFlex, we adopt the following convention for wave theories. We assume that the
water depth is that at the seabed origin for the purpose of deriving the wave information (wave number, stream
function etc.) We define the fluid motion for a point (x,y,z) where z < 0 to be the fluid motion for the point (x,y,0).
Theory, Vessel Theory
w

140
Physically implausible solutions
The nonlinear wave theories implemented in OrcaFlex each have their own ranges and limitations as previously
discussed. However, it is sometimes possible to obtain a solution for a particular wave train which is physically
implausible. For example if the stream function or Stokes' 5th theories are misapplied then they may predict wave
profiles with multiple crests. Whilst these are valid solutions to the mathematical problem, they are not realistic. Also it
is sometimes predicted by each theory that the horizontal fluid velocities under a crest increase with depth. This also is
physically implausible. OrcaFlex warns if such unrealistic solutions occur. It is then up to the engineer to judge the
validity of the results.
It has not been possible to guard against all such anomalies, in particular the Stokes' 5th theory can predict wave
profiles with points of inflection other than at crest and trough.
6.10 VESSEL THEORY
6.10.1 Vessel Rotations
The orientation of a vessel is specified by 3 rotation angles that are called Euler angles. There are various different ways
of defining Euler angles and the conventions used by OrcaFlex are documented below. In all cases positive rotation
angle means rotating clockwise about the relevant axis direction.
To provide flexibility, a vessel in OrcaFlex can be given two types of motion, primary and superimposed. In many cases
only one of the two types is needed. The total motion of the vessel is the combination of the two. To distinguish between
the primary, superimposed and total motion, different names are used for the 3 rotation angles, as follows:
For primary motion the rotation angles are called Primary Rotation 1, Primary Rotation 2 and Primary Rotation 3.
The initial orientation of the vessel specifies the initial values of the primary rotation angles, and these are called
the initial Heel, Trim and Heading.
For displacement RAOs and harmonic motion they are called Roll, Pitch and Yaw.
The total motion results report the combination of the primary and superimposed motion. For this the angles are
called Rotation 1, Rotation 2 and Rotation 3.
Order of application of rotations
For each of these sets of vessel rotation angles, the rotations are applied in the 'reverse' order. That is, the rotation
about the zaxis is done first, followed by the rotation about the new yaxis, and then finally the rotation about the new
xaxis.
Here is more detail of how the vessel rotations are applied.
The rotations start with the vessel axes Vx, Vy, Vz aligned with the global axes directions GX, GY, GZ.
The primary motion rotation angles are applied first, in reverse order. That is, Primary Rotation 3 is applied about the
initial Vzdirection (= global GZ direction), then Primary Rotation 2 is applied about the resulting new Vy direction, and
finally Primary Rotation 1 is applied about the resulting new Vx direction.
Note: The first of these 3 primary rotations is about the vertical, so it sets the heading of the vessel. The vessel
axes directions after this first rotation are called the Primary Heading Axes, and these directions are
used later (see below) for displacement RAO and harmonic motion rotations.
The superimposed motion is then applied. The superimposed motion rotations are called roll, pitch and yaw. These
rotations are applied starting from the vessel orientation resulting from the primary motion.
For superimposed displacement RAOs and harmonic motion the rotations are applied about the primary heading
directions (see above) and the 'reverse' order is used. So, first the yaw rotation is applied as a rotation about the
primary heading z direction (= vertically upwards direction = global GZ direction), then the pitch rotation is applied as a
rotation about the new primary heading y axis direction, and finally the roll is applied as a rotation about the new
primary heading x axis direction.
For superimposed time history motion the rotations are applied about the vessel axes. Once again, the 'reverse' order of
application is used.
w
141
Notes: The order of application of rotations is not significant when all the angles are small. However for
vessels the heading angle rotation about z can be large, in which case the order of application of the
rotations is more significant.
The 'reverse' order of application of rotations described above is the most commonly used convention
for vessel motions. It has the advantage that the z rotation, which is most likely to be large, is always
applied about a vertical axis.
OrcaFlex 8.5 (and earlier versions) applied the roll, pitch and yaw for superimposed motion in the
'forward' order, i.e. roll about x direction, then pitch about new y direction, then yaw about final z
direction. But this order had the disadvantage that when vessel yaw is large it was applied about an
axis that could have already been rolled or pitched and so would no longer be horizontal. The change
in order of application of rotations changes results for cases with non-zero roll or pitch. See What's
New in 8.6 for details.
6.10.2 RAOs and Phases
Displacement RAOs
Vessel motions in waves are defined by displacement Response Amplitude Operators (RAOs). Each displacement RAO,
or just RAO for short, consists of a pair of numbers that define the vessel response, for one particular degree of freedom,
to one particular wave direction and period. The two numbers are an amplitude, which relates the amplitude of the
vessel motion to the amplitude of the wave, and a phase, which defines the timing of the vessel motion relative to the
wave.
Example: A surge RAO of 0.5 in a wave of height 4m (and hence wave amplitude 2m) means that the vessel
surges to and fro 1m to +1m from its static position; a pitch RAO of 0.5 per metre in the same wave
means that the vessel pitches from 1 to + 1.
The vessel has 6 degrees of freedom: 3 translations (surge, sway, heave) and 3 rotations (roll, pitch, yaw), so the RAO
data consists of 6 amplitude and phase pairs for each wave period and direction. The RAO amplitude and phase vary for
different types of vessel, and for a given vessel type they vary with draught, wave direction, forward speed and wave
period (or frequency). It is important to obtain accurate values for the RAO amplitude and phase if the dynamics of the
system are to be correctly modelled.
RAOs can be obtained either from model tests or from specialist computer programs. The data may be presented in
tabular or graphical form: tables of numbers are better for our purposes since they can be imported directly into
OrcaFlex (see Import RAOs from Text Files).
There are many different conventions for defining RAOs. There have been attempts at standardisation but these have
not been successful so there remain differences between the main computer programs and model basins: some
establishments even use different conventions for reporting model and computed data. The only safe course is to obtain
a complete description of the system used for the data in each case.
The Orcina convention is to use the amplitude of response (in length units for surge, sway, heave, in degrees for roll,
pitch, yaw) per unit wave amplitude, and to use the phase lag from the time the wave crest passes the RAO origin until
the maximum positive excursion is reached (in other words, the phase origin being at the RAO origin). Mathematically,
this is given by:
x = R.a.cos (t )
where
x is the vessel displacement (in length units for surge, sway, heave, in degrees for roll, pitch, yaw)
a, are wave amplitude (in length units) and frequency (in radians/second)
t is time (in seconds)
R, are the RAO amplitude and phase.
However, OrcaFlex can accept RAO data using a wide range of different conventions so you can input your RAO data in
its original form and simply tell OrcaFlex what conventions apply to that data.
w

142
In addition to the actual RAO data you therefore also need to know:
The coordinates of the RAO origin and of the phase origin.
The system used to define wave direction. In OrcaFlex 0 means waves approaching the vessel from astern and 90
means waves coming from the starboard side, but if a different convention applies to your data then you must allow
for this when entering the data.
The coordinate system used to define vessel motions and, in particular, which direction is positive. That is whether
surge is positive forward or aft, whether heave is positive up or down and whether pitch is positive bow up or bow
down.
Whether the rotational RAO data are in degrees (or radians) of rotation per metre (or foot) of wave height, or in
degrees (radians) per degree (radian) of wave slope or wave steepness.
The reference time for phase angles, and the reporting convention used (e.g. whether phases are reported as lags or
leads). Again, OrcaFlex allows a range of options.
Although OrcaFlex allows the RAO input data to use a wide range of systems, all OrcaFlex results use a righthanded
system in which the positive movements are as follows:
Surge positive Forward
Sway positive to Port
Heave positive Up
Roll positive Starboard Down
Pitch positive Bow Down
Yaw positive Bow to Port
Wave Load RAOs
RAOs, as described above, can also be used to represent the load (force and moment) on a vessel due to waves, rather
than to directly specify its motion. In this case, the amplitude represents the magnitude of the force (in the surge, sway
or heave direction) or moment (in the roll, pitch or yaw direction); the meaning of the phase remains unchanged.
Example: A surge force RAO of 300 kN/m in a wave of height 6m (and hence wave amplitude 3m) means that
a vessel experiences a surge force varying harmonically between 900kN and +900kN over each
wave cycle; a pitch moment RAO of 1E6 kN.m/m in the same wave means that the vessel
experiences a moment about the y axis varying from 3E6 kN.m to +3E6 kN.m.
Wave load RAOs do not completely define the vessel motion as do displacement RAOs: they merely define the force and
moment which a wave exerts on the vessel. OrcaFlex uses these forces and moments, together with any other loads on
the vessel and data on the vessel's mass and inertia, to determine the vessel motion from its equation of motion.
The description of RAO conventions above, for displacement RAOs, carries over to wave load RAOs with just one minor
difference: rotational wave load RAOs must be expressed per unit of wave height, and they will have dimensions of
moment per unit length.
6.10.3 RAO Quality Checks
RAOs (particularly the phases) are difficult, abstract concepts which makes them difficult to check. It is extremely
important to check them, since the same difficulty applies to the people who derived the data in the first place. RAOs and
phases, even from the most respected sources, are notoriously errorprone!
Fortunately, there are a few natural points of reference where we know what must be going on. The most obvious and
useful ones are responses at very short and very long wave periods.
Displacement RAOs
In very short period waves, the vessel inertia suppresses response, so for all degrees of freedom the expected
displacement RAO amplitude is zero (and phase is then irrelevant).
w
143
In very long waves (typically wave periods over 20 seconds for ships or 30 seconds for semisubmersibles) the vessel
will move like a raft on the wave surface. The tables below give the expected displacement RAO amplitudes and phases
for a freefloating vessel in very long waves.
Expected RAOs for a vessel in very long waves
From ahead
(180)
From astern
(0)
From port
(270)
From starboard
(270)
Amp. Phase Amp. Phase Amp. Phase Amp. Phase
Surge 1 90 1 +90 0 ~ 0 ~
Sway 0 ~ 0 ~ 1 90 1 +90
Heave 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Roll 0 ~ 0 ~ 1 90 1 +90
Pitch 1 +90 1 90 0 ~ 0 ~
Yaw 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~

Towards direction
Amplitude Phase
Surge | cos() | +90 if cos()>0
90 if cos()<0
Sway | sin() | +90 if sin()>0
90 if sin()<0
Heave 1 0
Roll | sin() | +90 if sin()>0
90 if sin()<0
Pitch | cos() | 90 if cos()>0
+90 if cos()<0
Yaw | sin(2) | 180 if sin(2)>0
0 if sin(2)<0
Warning: The expected yaw RAOs given in the above table only apply to slender ships.
Notes: In these tables, the translational amplitudes are non-dimensionalised against wave amplitude and the
rotational amplitudes are non-dimensionalised against maximum wave slope.
The phases given are lags relative to the wave crest so that +90 means that the maximum positive
motion occurs 90 after the wave crest passes the vessel. In these tables we use the conventions of
positive surge is forward, positive sway is to port, positive heave is up, positive roll is starboard down,
positive pitch is bow down and positive yaw is bow to port.
When the amplitude is zero the phase value is irrelevant; this is indicated in the tables by '~' .
You can check RAOs in two ways. First, OrcaFlex provides RAO graphs that help spot errors, see Checking RAOs. Second,
you can run quick simulations with only the vessel in the model and then check that the motions you see are sensible.
Consider a ship in waves coming from ahead. Set up a simple OrcaFlex model with the vessel only nothing else set the
vessel's primary motion to None, secondary motion to RAOs + Harmonic, and run a short simulation (say 10 seconds
build up plus 2 wave periods). Use a large wave height (20m) and long time step say 0.05 seconds for both inner and
outer time steps. When the run is finished (a few seconds only for such a trivial case) replay the last wave period and
watch to see whether the motion of the ship is realistic. The best view direction is horizontal, normal to the direction of
travel of the waves. With the waves coming from the right on screen, then in the wave crest the ship should be at
w

144
maximum heave up and moving to the left, and vice versa in the trough. At the point of maximum wave slope as the crest
approaches, the ship should be at maximum surge forwards into the wave and maximum pitch angle with the bow up. If
the phase convention has been misunderstood (e.g. leads have been read as lags) then the motion is obviously wrong
and you should go back and reexamine the data, or confirm your interpretation with the data source.
This is an excellent check for phases, which are usually the most troublesome to get right. It is not quite so good for
amplitudes, but it is nevertheless worth pursuing. If the wave is very long compared to the ship, then the ship should
move like a small particle in the water surface. Heave amplitude should be equal to wave amplitude and pitch motion
should keep the deck of the ship parallel to the water surface. Surge amplitude should also be equal to wave amplitude
in deep water, but will be greater in shallow water in which the wave particle orbits are elliptical.
The check can be extended to other wave directions. Broadly speaking, we may expect the motion to be predominantly
in the wave direction, with the phasing of surge and sway such that the components in the wave direction reinforce each
other. Similarly, roll and pitch phasing should be such that the components of rotation about an axis normal to the wave
direction reinforce each other. Yaw phasing for a ship in seas off the bow should be such that the ship yaws towards the
broadside on position as the wave crest passes: this is easiest to see in a nearplan view. Generally speaking, if it looks
right in long waves, it probably is right. If not, then think again!
Wave Load RAOs
Since we can relate wave load RAOs to displacement RAOs, we can similarly determine the longwave limit for wave
load RAOs. OrcaFlex does this for the RAO graphs to facilitate checking wave load RAOs.
The simple modelbuilding exercise described above also works well for wave load RAOS: just set primary motion to
Calculated (6 DOF), superimposed motion to None.
Notes: You may need to run a longer simulation, with smaller time steps, for calculated vessel motion.
Since the added mass and damping matrices in OrcaFlex are not frequency-dependent, you should set
the wave period in the model to correspond to that for which these data apply. If they are for a
relatively short period wave, then the above arguments for long wavelength behaviour will not
necessarily apply.
6.10.4 Drag Loads
Drag loads on a vessel are an important source of damping when modelling vessel slow drift. For a discussion of the
various damping sources see Damping Effects on Vessel Slow Drift.
The hydrodynamic and aerodynamic drag loads on a vessel are calculated using the data specified on the Hydrodynamic
and Wind Drag pages on the vessel type data form. The drag loads are split into those due to translational relative
velocity and those due to yaw rate.
Drag Loads due to Translational Relative Velocity
The drag loads due to translational velocity of the sea and air past the vessel are calculated using the standard OCIMF
method, which is outlined below. For further details see Oil Companies International Marine Forum, 1994.
The OCIMF method is for calculating the surge, sway and yaw drag loads on a stationary vessel. OrcaFlex extends the
method to cover a moving vessel by replacing the current (or wind) velocity used in the OCIMF method by the relative
translational velocity of the current (or wind) past the vessel.
More precisely, the relative velocity used is the current (or wind) velocity, relative to the primary motion of the vessel,
at the specified current (or wind) load origin. In other words the relative velocity includes the current but not the
waves, and it includes the primary motion of the vessel, but not the superimposed motion.
Note that the OCIMF method does not include any drag due to yaw angular velocity of the vessel, since there is none for
a stationary vessel. OrcaFlex's extension of OCIMF does not add these yaw rate drag terms, since the OCIMF method has
no framework for them. They are therefore calculated separately in OrcaFlex see Drag Loads due to Yaw Rate below.
Notes: The OCIMF method is intended for tankers, but could be applied to other vessel types providing suitable
data is obtained.
w
145
The wind load is only included if the Include wind loads on Vessels option is enabled in the Environment
data.
Warning: The current and wind loads are based on theory for surface vessels and are not suitable for submerged
vessels.
The drag loads due to surge and sway relative velocity are calculated as given by the following OCIMF formulae.
Surge Force = .Csurge..V
2
.Asurge
Sway Force = .Csway..V
2
.Asway
Yaw Moment = .Cyaw..V
2
.Ayaw
where
Asurge, Asway and Ayaw are the surge and sway areas and the yaw area moment. For current these correspond to the
exposed areas below the waterline, and for wind to the exposed areas above the waterline.
Csurge, Csway and Cyaw are the surge, sway and yaw coefficients for the actual current or wind direction relative to
the vessel.
is the water density (for hydrodynamic drag) or air density (for wind drag).
V is the magnitude of the relative velocity of the sea or air past the vessel. For wind loads, V is based on the wind
velocity specified in the data (i.e. the wind velocity at 10m above mean water level). For hydrodynamic drag, V is
based on the current velocity relative to the vessel at the instantaneous position of the load origin (if this is
above the water surface, then the current velocity at the surface is used). In both cases V includes allowance for
the translational velocity of the load origin due to any primary motion of the vessel, but does not include any
superimposed motion.
The surge force, sway force and yaw moment act at the current or wind load origin. The surge and sway forces act in the
vessel Vx and Vydirections, respectively, and the yaw moment acts about the vessel Vzdirection.
Note: The OCIMF standard method uses L
2
.D for the yaw area moment for current loads, and L.Asway for the
yaw area moment for wind loads, where L is the length between perpendiculars and D is the draught.
For current loads (not wind loads) the OCIMF standard method uses L.D for both the surge and sway
areas.
Drag Loads due to Yaw Rate
A vessel rotating in yaw will generate a drag moment resisting the yaw rate, but the OCIMF method described above
does not include this drag load (since the OCIMF method is designed for stationary vessels).
For wind drag these yaw rate terms are insignificant and so are omitted by OrcaFlex. But for hydrodynamic drag they
are important, so OrcaFlex models them using the following formulae.
Surge Force = (..||.).SurgeFactor
Sway Force = (..||.).SwayFactor
Yaw Moment = (..||.).YawFactor .................. (1)
where
SurgeFactor, SwayFactor, YawFactor are the yaw rate drag factors (specified on the Hydrodynamic Drag page on
the vessel type data form).
is the vessel yaw rate, in radians per second, due to any primary motion of the vessel
is the water density.
These yaw rate drag loads are then applied at the hydrodynamic load origin.
Estimating the Yaw Rate Drag Factors
The above formulae (1) are based on a simple strip theory estimate of the drag loads on a yawing vessel, as given by
Wichers (1979). Consider the simplest situation where the vessel centre is stationary but the vessel is yawing at rate
w

146
about that centre. Let us also assume that the area exposed to sway drag is a simple rectangle of height D (the draught)
and length L (the length between perpendiculars), and that for simplicity we choose to put the load origin at the centre
of that area.
We now divide the drag area into vertical strips of width dx and consider the sway drag load on the strip at distance x
forward of the centre. The strip's area is D.dx and its sway velocity due to the yaw rate is .x, so we can estimate the
sway drag load on it by ..Cd.D.dx.(.x).|.x| where Cd is the drag coefficient, which we assume to be the same for all
the strips.
These sway drag loads from each strip, and their moments about the centre, are then integrated to give the total sway
force and a contribution to yaw moment. When we do this integral the sway forces from corresponding strips forward
and aft of centre have the same magnitude but opposite direction, so they cancel and the total sway drag force is
therefore zero. However the yaw moment terms from forward and aft of centre have the same magnitude and same
direction, so they reinforce, giving a significant yaw drag moment. In fact the integral gives the following yaw moment.
Yaw Moment = (..
2
).(Cd.D.L
4
/32) ................. (2)
The same argument can be applied to the drag forces in the surge direction, with length L being replaced by width W.
But for a slender vessel W is much less than L, so the surge force contribution to yaw moment is generally negligible.
Comparing equations (1) and (2) we see that the YawFactor corresponds to the bracketed term (Cd.D.L
4
/32) in equation
(2). This is in fact a combination of a drag coefficient and the 3rd moment of drag area about the centre.
This strip theory argument therefore concludes that for a slender ship, with the hydrodynamic drag load origin at the
centre, then we can estimate the yaw rate drag factors by:
SurgeFactor = SwayFactor = 0
YawFactor = (Cd.D.L
4
/32)
where Cd is some appropriate drag coefficient. However, there are a lot of questionable assumptions in the strip theory
argument. Indeed Wichers (1979) found that the strip theory results significantly underestimated the actual yaw drag
measured in model tests, unless the Cd value was increased to about 5, which is rather high for a drag coefficient. So if
more specific data is available, e.g. from model test, then we recommend setting the yaw rate drag factors to values that
best fit your data.
Interaction with sway rate
Further complications arise if the vessel is swaying as well as yawing. In this case the integral in the above strip theory
argument turns out to give an extra term involving v.. This is an interaction between sway velocity and yaw rate and
its effect is to significantly increase the yaw moment.
OrcaFlex does not yet include this interaction effect. The reason for this is that it is difficult to model. Wichers (1979)
included them in his strip theory model, but as described above the model's results did not match experimental results
particularly well. He returned to the problem in his PhD thesis (Wichers, 1988) and developed a more accurate
empirical approach based on model test data. However the method has some theoretical difficulties, since the formulae
break down when is zero.
Orcina is studying this, with a view to implementing a more accurate yaw rate drag model in a future release of
OrcaFlex. In the meantime we recommend that you specify yaw rate drag factors that are appropriate to the conditions
prevailing in the case being modelled. See the papers by Wichers for further information.
6.10.5 Stiffness, Added Mass and Damping
The stiffness load, and constantfrequency added mass and damping loads, are calculated using the formulae given
below. The calculation of the frequencydependent added mass and damping loads is rather more complicated: the
theory is given in Vessel Theory: Impulse Response and Convolution, but the units given below apply in both cases.
All these loads are applied at the reference origin.
Stiffness Load
The heave, roll and pitch components of the hydrostatic stiffness matrix, K, are specified on the Vessel Types form. (The
hydrostatic stiffness components for the surge, sway and yaw directions are all zero.)
w
147
The vessel equilibrium position, E, is specified by giving its Z, heel and trim, relative to global axes.
The stiffness load is calculated from the vessel primary position, P, using the following matrix equation:
[Fheave,Mroll,Mpitch]
T
= K.[Oheave,Oroll,Opitch]
T

where
Fheave, Mroll and Mpitch are the heave force, roll moment and pitch moment, respectively.
O = P E is the offset of the primary position from the equilibrium position, at the specified reference origin.
Here the angular offsets Oroll and Opitch are in radians, so the units of the stiffness matrix are:
heave roll/pitch
heave F/L F/radian
roll/pitch (F.L)/L (F.L)/radian
where F and L denote the units of force and length, respectively.
Damping Load
The damping load is equal to D.V, where D is the specified damping matrix and V is the (6 degree of freedom) vector of
vessel velocity and angular velocity relative to the earth at the specified reference origin.
The damping load is calculated using the following matrix equation:
[Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz]
T
= D.[vx,vy,vz,x,y,z]
T

where
Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My and Mz are the components of the resulting damping force and moment.
vx, vy, and vz are the components of the vessel velocity at the specified reference origin.
x, y and z are the components of the vessel angular velocity.
Note: All components referred to here are in the directions specified by the conventions data. For details see
added mass, damping and stiffness data.
The angular velocities here are in radians per unit time, so the units of the damping matrix elements are:
surge/sway/heave roll/pitch/yaw
surge/sway/heave F / (L/T) F / (rad/T)
roll/pitch/yaw (F.L) / (L/T) (F.L) / (rad/T)
where F, L and T denote the units of force, length and time, respectively. To see this, consider the surgesurge element as
surge force per unit surge velocity, surgesway as surge force per unit sway velocity, etc; surgeroll as surge force per
unit roll rate; rollsurge as roll moment per unit surge velocity; and rollroll as roll moment per unit roll rate. 'Unit roll
rate' means a roll rate of 1 radian/sec.
Added Mass Load
The added mass load is calculated as described above for the damping load, but using the specified added mass matrix
instead of the damping matrix, and using the vessel acceleration at the reference origin, instead of the vessel velocity.
The angular accelerations are expressed in radians/T
2
, so the units of the added mass matrix elements are:
surge/sway/heave roll/pitch/yaw
surge/sway/heave M M.L
roll/pitch/yaw M.L M.L
2

where M, L and T denote the units of mass, length and time, respectively.
w

148
Note: If the vessel's Primary Motion is set to Calculated (3 DOF) then reduced added mass and damping
matrices are used, having only surge, sway and yaw components, and the damping and added mass
loads are not calculated in the heave, roll and pitch directions. The stiffness matrix, having only heave,
roll and pitch components, is not used at all in this case.
6.10.6 Impulse Response and Convolution
To implement frequencydependent added mass and damping in the time domain, OrcaFlex uses a method proposed by
Cummins (1962), and implemented by Wichers (1979). This method involves calculating the Impulse Response
Function (IRF) for the vessel and then applying the IRF at each time step using a convolution integral to account for the
past motion of the vessel.
At the start of a simulation, OrcaFlex calculates the IRF (a 6x6 matrix) from the given frequencydependent damping
data {B(fi), i=1,2,3,...,m}, as
IRF(t) = 4 Integral(0 to infinity) B(f) cos(2ft) df.
To calculate this integral, we make the following assumptions about the form of the damping:
It is assumed to vary linearly between the given frequencies {fi}, i=1,2,3,...,m.
It is assumed to decay to zero at zero frequency.
It is assumed to decay as f
3
beyond the highest frequency given in the data.
At the start of a simulation, OrcaFlex estimates the socalled infinitefrequency (or frequencyindependent) added mass
matrix A. This is done by calculating an estimate Ai for each frequency fi, from the added mass data {A(fi), i=1,2,3,...,m}
and IRF, as
Ai = A(fi) + 1/(2fi) Integral(0 to Tc) IRF(t) sin(2fit) dt
and then taking A to be the mean value of all the Ai over i=1,2,3,...,m.
Then, during the simulation, at each outer time step t the damping load on the vessel, in six degrees of freedom, is
calculated as
F(t) = A x''(t) + Integral(0 to Tc) IRF(s) x'(ts) ds
where
x'' and x' are the vessel acceleration and velocity respectively, relative to the global origin and with respect to the
vessel primary heading
Tc is the cutoff time specified by the user
s is a time lag integration variable.
This load is applied at the reference origin.
Consistent Added Mass and Damping
The added mass and damping data are not independent. In fact, added mass and damping are mathematically related
through the KramersKronig relations (see Kotik and Mangulis).
OrcaFlex uses the damping data to determine the IRF, and then uses the IRF in conjunction with the added mass data to
estimate the infinitefrequency limit of the added mass.
If the data are consistent, i.e. obey the KramersKronig relations, then the graphs of added mass against frequency
should appear to be converging, with increasing frequency, to the estimated infinite frequency added mass A. If they
appear to be converging to a limit which differs significantly from the estimated value A, then this may indicate that the
data are not consistent. In these circumstances, the results of the calculation may not be reliable.
6.10.7 Wave Drift Loads
For a detailed description of the theory see Faltinsen's book. Here we give a summary and the formulae used in
OrcaFlex.
w
149
The wave loads on a vessel can be expressed as a sum of first order, second order and even higher order terms. The
linear first order terms are the largest. The second order terms are nonlinear effects that are much smaller, but they
can be significant in some cases. The higher order terms are even smaller and are neglected.
The first order terms generate the vessel's first order motion and this may be modelled in OrcaFlex by the vessel's
displacement RAOs or load RAOs. The second order terms are quadratic and they are made up of three components:
Difference frequency terms, which have frequencies given by the differences between combinations of different
wave component frequencies.
A constant term, called the mean wave drift force. This term is really the limiting case of the difference frequency
term when the two frequencies are equal.
Sum frequency terms, which have frequencies given by the sums of combinations of wave component frequencies.
The constant and difference terms are collectively known as the wave drift loads; these are both included in OrcaFlex.
The constant term is called the mean wave drift load and this is applied in OrcaFlex in both the static and dynamic
analyses; it can cause significant mean offset. The difference frequency terms are only included in the dynamic analysis;
they can cause significant slow drift motion if their frequencies are near to a vessel surge, sway or yaw natural
frequency. The sum frequency terms are not included in the OrcaFlex calculation, since they are high frequency terms
whose effect on a massive moored vessel is normally negligible.
Wave Drift Load Theory
Wave drift loads are calculated based on the nondimensional Quadratic Transfer Functions (QTFs) specified in the
user's wave drift data.
QTFs are similar to RAOs in so far as they are scaling factors that are applied to wave components. But whereas an RAO
is applied to a single component, a QTF is applied to a pair of wave components and, like wave load RAOs, it gives a
wave drift force or moment.
The full QTF is a complexvalued function Q(1, 2) of a pair of wave angular frequencies 1 and 2. There are
separate QTFs for each of the 6 vessel degrees of freedom, so we use the following notation:
Q1(1, 2) = Surge QTF
Q2(1, 2) = Sway QTF
Q6(1, 2) = Yaw QTF
where the digits 1, 2 and 6 refer to the surge sway and yaw degrees of freedom. Wave drift loads are not calculated for
heave (3), roll (4) and pitch (5), since those degrees of freedom are constrained by buoyancy effects.
Consider a vessel exposed to a pair of wave components, of angular frequencies 1 and 2, and let the wave elevation
at the vessel's QTF origin due to those components be:
Z1 = A1.cos(1.t 1) = Real part of A1.Exp[1.t 1]
Z2 = A2.cos(2.t 2) = Real part of A2.Exp[2.t 2]
Then the wave drift load due to the difference term from those 2 components is given by:
Surge force = Real part of (.g.L).Q1(1, 2).A1.A2.Exp[(12).t (12)]
Sway force = Real part of (.g.L).Q2(1, 2).A1.A2.Exp[(12).t (12)]
Yaw moment = Real part of (.g.L
2
).Q6(1, 2).A1.A2.Exp[(12).t (12)]
The first bracketed term on the right hand side of each equation is a dimensionalising factor that gives a non
dimensional definition of Q. The factors involve the water density , the acceleration due to gravity g, and the vessel type
length L.
The total wave drift load is then the sum of these loads, over all pairs of frequencies (1, 2) present in all the wave
trains specified. The terms involved in this sum can be viewed as being made up of two types:
The 'diagonal' terms (i.e. those where 1 and 2 are equal) each give a constant load. The sum of these terms is the
mean wave drift load, and this is applied in both the static and dynamic analysis in OrcaFlex.
Theory, Line Theory
w

150
The offdiagonal terms (i.e. those where 1 and 2 differ) each give a harmonically timevarying load. The sum of
these terms is the dynamic wave drift load and this is only calculated and applied in the OrcaFlex dynamic analysis.
These terms are not included in the static analysis since their timeaverage value is zero.
OrcaFlex uses Newman's Approximation to Calculate the Wave Drift Loads
The above theory uses the full QTF matrix, but it is not normally practical for the user to specify the QTF values for all
possible pairs of frequencies (1, 2). Because of this, in OrcaFlex (as in most programs) the user specifies in the QTF
data only the 'diagonal' values of the function, Q(, ), and only for a set of discrete frequencies .
OrcaFlex then uses linear interpolation to obtain the diagonal QTF values for intermediate frequencies, and a form of
Newman's approximation to obtain the offdiagonal values.
Newman's approximation (Newman 1974) is to take the offdiagonal QTF value Q(1, 2) to be an average of the
corresponding diagonal values Q(1, 1) and Q(2, 2). There are different forms of Newman approximation,
depending on the type of average used. OrcaFlex uses what is called the geomean approximation, which is documented
in the paper by Standing, Brendling and Wilson, and is given by:
Q(1, 2) = Sign(Q(1)).Abs(Q(1).Q(2)) if Sign(Q(1))=Sign(Q(2))
Q(1, 2) = 0 if Sign(Q(1))<>Sign(Q(2))
Here Abs is the absolute value function (i.e. Abs(x) = x if x>=0, x if x<0), and Sign is the sign function (i.e. Sign(Q) = +1 if
Q>0, 1 if Q<0, and 0 if Q=0).
The diagonal QTF values must be real. They are the terms that give the constant mean wave drift load. However we also
need to calculate the oscillatory part of the wave drift load, which arises from the offdiagonal terms, and the Newman
approximation is a way of estimating those offdiagonal terms from the diagonal terms.
The justifications for the various forms of Newman approximation are twofold. Firstly, the important difference terms
are those with low frequency, which arise from the neardiagonal terms in Q. The farfromdiagonal values give much
higher frequency difference terms which have little effect on a vessel of sufficiently large inertia. Secondly, on
theoretical grounds, the function Q should be continuous in both 1 and 2, so the neardiagonal term Q(1, 2)
should be wellapproximated by the mean of Q(1, 1) and Q(2, 2).
Notes: OrcaFlex includes the wave drift load contributions due to the interaction of two different wave
components, even if they come from two different wave trains that have different directions.
It is not clear how Newman's approximation should be applied to wave components in this situation. In
OrcaFlex it is done as follows. Let the vessel heading be H and consider two wave components, of
frequencies 1 and 2, from two different wave trains whose directions are D1 and D2, respectively.
Then OrcaFlex will derive (from the specified QTF data, using interpolation if necessary) the diagonal
QTF coefficients Q(1,1) and Q(2,2), for (relative) directions (D1-H) and (D2-H), respectively.
OrcaFlex will then calculate the geometric mean of Q(1,1) and Q(2,2) and use it as the estimate
of the off-diagonal QTF coefficient Q(1,2), which is then used to calculate the wave drift load due to
the interaction of the two components.
6.11 LINE THEORY
6.11.1 Overview
OrcaFlex uses a finite element model for a line as shown in the figure below.
w
Theory, Line Theory
151
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 3
Node 3
Actual Pipe Discretised Model
End A
End B
Node 2
Segment 2
Segment 3
Node 1
Segment 1

Figure: OrcaFlex Line model
The line is divided into a series of line segments which are then modelled by straight massless model segments with a
node at each end.
The model segments only model the axial and torsional properties of the line. The other properties (mass, weight,
buoyancy etc.) are all lumped to the nodes, as indicated by the arrows in the figure above.
Nodes and segments are numbered 1,2,3,... sequentially from End A of the line to End B. So segment n joins nodes n and
(n+1).
Nodes
Each node is effectively a short straight rod that represents the two halfsegments either side of the node. The exception
to this is end nodes, which have only one halfsegment next to them, and so represent just one halfsegment.
Each line segment is divided into two halves and the properties (mass, weight, buoyancy, drag etc.) of each halfsegment
are lumped and assigned to the node at that end of the segment.
Theory, Line Theory
w

152
Forces and moments are applied at the nodes with the exception that weight can be applied at an offset. Where a
segment pierces the sea surface, all the fluid related forces (e.g. buoyancy, added mass, drag) are calculated allowing for
the varying wetted length up to the instantaneous water surface level.
Segments
Each model segment is a straight massless element that models just the axial and torsional properties of the line. A
segment can be thought of as being made up of two coaxial telescoping rods that are connected by axial and torsional
spring+dampers.
The bending properties of the line are represented by rotational spring+dampers at each end of the segment, between
the segment and the node. The line does not have to have axial symmetry, since different bend stiffness values can be
specified for two orthogonal planes of bending.
This section has given only an overview of the line model. See structural model for full details.
6.11.2 Structural Model Details
The following figure gives greater detail of the line model, showing a single midline node and the segments either side
of it. The figure includes the various spring+dampers that model the structural properties of the line, and also shows the
xyzframes of reference and the angles that are used in the theory below.
w
Theory, Line Theory
153
Node
Torsion spring
+ damper
Bending springs
+ dampers
Axial spring
+ damper
Ny
Nx
Nz (axial direction)
End B
Sy
1
Sx
2
Sz
Sx
1
Sz
Sx
1
1
Sy
2

Figure: Detailed representation of OrcaFlex Line model
As shown in the diagram, there are 3 types of spring+dampers in the model:
The axial stiffness and damping of the line are modelled by the axial spring+damper at the centre of each segment,
which applies an equal and opposite effective tension force to the nodes at each end of the segment.
The bending properties are represented by rotational spring+dampers either side of the node, spanning between
the node's axial direction Nz and the segment's axial direction Sz.
If torsion is included (this is optional) then the line's torsional stiffness and damping are modelled by the torsional
spring+damper at the centre of each segment, which applies equal and opposite torque moments to the nodes at
each end of the segment. If torsion is not included then this torsional spring+damper is missing and the two halves
of the segment are then free to twist relative to each other.
6.11.3 Calculation Stages
OrcaFlex calculates the forces and moments on a midnode in 5 stages:
1. Tension Forces.
2. Bend Moments.
Theory, Line Theory
w

154
3. Shear Forces.
4. Torsion Moments.
5. Total Load.
6.11.4 Calculation Stage 1 Tension Forces
Firstly the tensions in the segments are calculated. To do this, OrcaFlex calculates the distance (and its rate of change)
between the nodes at the ends of the segment, and also calculates the segment axial direction Sz, which is the unit vector
in the direction joining the two nodes.
Linear axial stiffness
In the case of linear axial stiffness the tension in the axial spring+damper at the centre of each segment is calculated as
follows. It is the vector in direction Sz whose magnitude is given by:
Te = EA. + (1 2)(PoAo PiAi) + EA.e(dL/dt)/L0
where
Te = effective tension
EA = axial stiffness of line, as specified on the line types form (= effective Young's modulus x crosssection area)
= mean axial strain = (L L0) / (L0)
L = instantaneous length of segment
= expansion factor of segment
L0 = unstretched length of segment
= Poisson ratio
Pi, Po = internal pressure and external pressure respectively (see Line Pressure Effects)
Ai, Ao = internal and external cross section areas respectively (see Line Pressure Effects)
e = damping coefficient of the line, in seconds (this is defined below)
dL/dt = rate of increase of length.
Note: The effective tension Te can be negative, indicating effective compression. For the relationship between
effective tension and pipe wall tension see Line Pressure Effects.
This effective tension force vector is then applied (with opposite signs) to the nodes at each end of the segment. Each
midnode therefore receives two tension forces, one each from the segments on each side of it.
Non-linear axial stiffness
When the axial stiffness is nonlinear then the tension calculation is as follows. It is the vector in direction Sz whose
magnitude is given by:
Te = Var Tw() + (1 2)(PoAo PiAi) + EAnom.e(dL/dt)/L0
where
Var Tw is the function relating strain to wall tension, as specified by the variable data source defining axial
stiffness.
EAnom is the nominal axial stiffness which is defined to be the axial stiffness at zero strain.
As in the linear case the effective tension force vector is then applied (with opposite signs) to the nodes at each end of
the segment. Each midnode therefore receives two effective tension forces, one each from the segments on each side of
it.
Damping coefficient e
The damping coefficient e represents the structural damping in the line. It is calculated automatically based on the Axial
Target Damping value specified on the general data form.
w
Theory, Line Theory
155
e = e(critical) . (Target Axial Damping) / 100
where
e(critical) = (2.SegmentMass.L0 / EA) is the critical damping value for a segment
and SegmentMass includes the mass of any contents but not the mass of any attachments.
Note: If the axial stiffness is non-linear then we use the nominal axial stiffness EAnom in the formula for e.
6.11.5 Calculation Stage 2 Bend Moments
The bend moments are then calculated. There are bending spring+dampers at each side of the node, spanning between
the node's axial direction Nz and the segment's axial direction Sz. Each of these spring+dampers applies to the node a
bend moment that depends on the angle between the segment axial direction Sz and the node's axial direction Nz.
These axial directions are associated with the frames of reference of the node and segment. The node's frame of
reference Nxyz is a Cartesian set of axes that is fixed to (and so rotates with) the node. Nz is in the axial direction and Nx
and Ny are normal to the line axis and correspond to the end x and ydirections that are specified by the Gamma angle
on the line data form (see End Orientation).
The segment has two frames of reference: Sx1, y1, z at the end nearest End A, and Sx2, y2, z at the other end. These two
frames have the same Sz direction, which was calculated in step 1 above, so the bend angle 2 between Nz and Sz can
now be calculated. The effective curvature vector C is then calculated: it is the vector whose direction is the binormal
direction, which is the direction that is orthogonal to Sz and Nz, and whose magnitude is 2 / (L0), where L0 is the
unstretched length of segment.
Linear, isotropic bending stiffness
In the case of linear, isotropic bending stiffness the bend moment, M2, generated by the bending spring+damper is
calculated. Isotropic bend stiffness means that the bend stiffnesses for the x and ydirections are equal. The bend
moment M2 is the vector in the binormal direction whose magnitude is given by:
M2 = EI.|C| + D.d|C|/dt
where
EI = bending stiffness, as specified on the line types form
D = (/100).Dc
Dc = the bending critical damping value for a segment = L0.(SegmentMass.EI.L0)
= target bending damping, as specified on the general data form.
The bend angle (1) and bend moment vector (M1) on the other side of the node are calculated similarly, so the node
experiences two bend moments, one each from the segments on each side of it.
Linear, non-isotropic bending stiffness
If the bend stiffnesses for bending about the x and ydirections are different, then the above equation is separated into
its components in the Sx2 and Sy2 directions, giving:
component of M2 in the Sx2 direction = EIx.Cx + Dx.dCx/dt
component of M2 in the Sy2 direction = EIy.Cy + Dy.dCy/dt
where
EIx, EIy = bending stiffnesses of segment, as specified on the line types form
Cx, Cy = components of the curvature vector C in the Sx2 and Sy2 directions
Dx = (/100).L0.(SegmentMass.EIx.L0)
Dy = (/100).L0.(SegmentMass.EIy.L0).
Theory, Line Theory
w

156
The curvature used in the calculation of bending moments is the value in the true plane of bending, taking full account of
the 3D motions of the adjacent nodes. The bending damping term D represents the effect on bending of the structural
damping in the line; its level is set by the Target Bending Damping data item on the general data form.
The bend angle (1) and bend moment vector (M1) on the other side of the node are calculated similarly.
Non-linear, isotropic bending stiffness (Elastic or Hysteretic)
In this case the bend moment M2 is given by:
M2 = Var BM(2 / [ L0]) + D'.d|C|/dt
where
Var BM is the function relating curvature to bend moment as specified by the tabular variable data source that
defines the bending stiffness. The variable data source can be specified as either hysteretic or elastic see below.
D' = (/100).D'c
D'c = the bending critical damping value for a segment = L0.(SegmentMass.EInom.L0)
EInom is the nominal bending stiffness which is defined to be the bending stiffness at zero curvature.
The bend angle (1) and bend moment vector (M1) on the other side of the node are calculated similarly.
Elastic or Hysteretic Bending Model
For nonlinear bend stiffness you can choose whether the curvaturemoment data is interpreted hysteretically or not.
Non-hysteretic
Nonhysteretic means that the data is applied using a simple elastic model. In this case the bend moment function Var
BM in the above equation is simply the specified function of the current curvature magnitude, without any allowance for
the history of curvature. So if the curvature increases and then decreases again then the bend moment goes up and
down the same nonlinear momentcurvature curve. This is illustrated in the following diagram which shows the bend
moment M that results when the nonhysteretic model is used and a simple sinusoidally varying curvature C is applied.
C
M

Figure: Elastic Non-linear Bend Stiffness
Hysteretic
The hysteretic model includes hysteresis effects, i.e. effects of the history of curvature applied. The data is taken to
specify the bend moment that results when the line is bent with slowly increasing curvature. But that if the curvature
w
Theory, Line Theory
157
reduces again then the bend moment does not come back down the same curve. Instead when the curvature reduces
again the bend moment comes down the curve that is obtained by first undoing and reversing the first bit of curvature
(i.e. the first increment of curvature that was applied), then the second bit of curvature, etc. In other words the
hysteretic model treats curvature as being made up of a series of curvature increments and corresponding moment
increments, and it undoes them on a first in first out basis, as opposed to the last in first out basis that nonhysteretic
bend stiffness uses.
The effect of this hysteretic model is that the bend moment follows a hysteresis curve, as shown in the following
diagrams. The left hand diagram shows the bend moment that results from a sinusoidal curvature history; the arrows
on the curve show the direction of change of the curvature and moment. The right hand diagram shows what happens if
a small curvature cycle is followed by another curvature cycle of greater amplitude.
C
M

C
M

Figure: Hysteretic Non-linear Bend Stiffness
Warning: You must check that the hysteretic model is suitable for the line type being modelled. It is not suitable
for modelling rate-dependent effects. It is intended for modelling hysteresis due to persisting effects
such as yield of material or slippage of one part of a composite line structure relative to another part.
6.11.6 Calculation Stage 3 Shear Forces
Having calculated the bend moments at each end of the segment, the shear force in the segment can be calculated.
Each model segment is a straight stiff rod in which the bend moment vector varies from M1 at one end (the end nearest
End A of the line) to M2 at the other end, where these bend moments are calculated as described above.
Because the model segment is stiff in bending, the bend moment varies linearly along the segment and the shear force in
the segment is the constant vector equal to the rate of change of bend moment along the length. The shear force is
therefore given by:
Shear Force Vector = (M2 M1) / L
where L is the instantaneous length of the segment. Note that M1 and M2 are vectors, so this is a vector formula that
defines both the magnitude and direction of the shear force.
This shear force vector is applied (with opposite signs) to the nodes at each end of the segment.
6.11.7 Calculation Stage 4 Torsion Moments
The torsion is then calculated (providing torsion has been included). To do this, the directions Sx1, Sy1, Sx2 and Sy2 must
first be calculated, since so far only the segment axial direction Sz has been found.
Theory, Line Theory
w

158
The directions Sx2 and Sy2 at the end of the segment are determined from the orientation Nxyz of the adjacent node, by
rotating Nxyz until its zdirection is aligned with Sz. This rotation is therefore through angle 2 and it is a rotation about
the binormal direction (i.e. the direction that is orthogonal to both Nz and Sz). (Note that rotations about the binormal
direction are bending rotations only i.e. they involve no twisting.) The directions Sx1 and Sy1 at the other end of the
segment are derived in the same way, but starting from the orientation of the node at that other end of the segment.
The twist angle in the segment can then be calculated it is the angle between the directions Sx1 and Sx2. Note that this
twist angle is also the angle between Sy1 and Sy2. In other words the orientations Sx1, y1, z and Sx2, y2, z, at the two ends
of the segment, differ by just a twist through angle .
Linear torsional stiffness
In the case of linear torsional stiffness the torque generated by the torsion spring+damper can then be calculated it is a
moment vector whose direction is the segment axial direction Sz and whose magnitude is given by:
Torque = K. / L0 + C.(d/dt)
where
K = torsional stiffness, as specified on the line types form
= segment twist angle (in radians), between directions Sx1 and Sx2
L0 = unstretched length of segment
d/dt = rate of twist (in radians per second)
C = torsional damping coefficient of the line (this is defined below)
Te = effective tension in the segment
This torque moment vector is then applied (with opposite signs) to the nodes at each end of the segment.
Non-linear torsional stiffness
If the torsional stiffness is nonlinear then the calculation of torque is as follows. It is a moment vector whose direction
is the segment axial direction Sz and whose magnitude is given by:
Torque = Var Torque(/L0) + C.(d/dt)
where
Var Torque is the function relating twist per unit length to torque as specified by the variable data source
defining torsional stiffness.
Damping coefficient C
The damping coefficient C represents the torsional effect of structural damping in the line. It is calculated automatically
based on the Target Torsional Damping value specified on the general data form using the formula
C = C(critical).(Target Torsional Damping) / 100
where C(critical) is the critical damping value for a segment, given by
C(critical) = (2.Iz.K/L0).
Here, Iz is the rotational moment of inertia of the segment about its axis, allowing only for the structural mass of the
line, not the mass of any contents (since the contents are assumed to not twist with the pipe).
Note: If the torsional stiffness is non-linear then we use the nominal torsional stiffness Knom in the formula for
C. In this case we define Knom to be the torsional stiffness at zero twist per unit length.
6.11.8 Calculation Stage 5 Total Load
As described above, each midnode experiences two tension forces, two bend moments, two shear forces and two
torque moments (one each from the segments either side of the node). These loads are then combined with the other
nonstructural loads (weight, drag, added mass etc.) to give the total force and moment on the node. OrcaFlex then
calculates the resulting translational and rotational acceleration of the node, and then integrates to obtain the node's
velocity and position at the next time step. See Calculation Method.
w
Theory, Line Theory
159
6.11.9 Line End Orientation
At line ends, we usually need to define not only the axial direction of the end fitting but also the twist orientation about
that axial direction. This is done by first specifying the azimuth and declination of the axial direction and then specifying
the twist orientation by giving a third angle called gamma. See End Orientation.
Together, the 3 angles azimuth, declination and gamma fully define the rotational orientation of the end fitting. To
define how this is done we need to define a frame of reference Exyz for the end fitting, where:
E is at the connection point.
Ez is the axial direction of the fitting, using the "A to B" convention i.e. Ez is into the line at End A, but out of the line
at End B.
Ex and Ey are perpendicular to Ez.
The 3 angles, Azimuth, Declination and Gamma, specify the orientation of Exyz relative to the local axes Lxyz of the
object to which the end is connected, as follows. (If the line end is not connected to another object, then it is either Fixed,
Anchored or Free. In these cases the angles define Exyz relative to the global axes GXYZ.)
Start with Exyz aligned with Lxyz.
Then rotate Exyz by Azimuth degrees about Ez (= Lz at this point).
Now rotate by Declination degrees about the resulting Ey direction.
Finally rotate by Gamma degrees about the resulting (and final) Ez direction.
In all these rotations, a positive angle means rotation clockwise about the positive direction along the axis of rotation,
and a negative angle means anticlockwise.
Threedimensional rotations are notoriously difficult to describe and visualise. When setting the azimuth, declination
and gamma, it is best to check that the resulting Exyz directions are correct by drawing the local axes on the 3D view.
Here are some examples of the effect of various values of (Azimuth, Declination, Gamma) for a Fixed end. For ends
connected to other objects, replace GXYZ by Lxyz in these examples.
(0,0,0) sets Exyz to be aligned with GXYZ.
(0,30,0) sets Ex at 30 below GX (in the GXZ plane), Ey along GY, Ez at 30 to GZ, towards GX.
(0,180,0) sets Ex along GX, Ey along GY, Ez along GZ.
(90,90,0) sets Ex along GZ, Ey along GX, Ez along GY.
(90,90,90) sets Ex along GX, Ey along GZ, Ez along GY.
End Direction Results
If the end orientation Exyz is defined, then OrcaFlex offers various results relative to those axes. For a given vector V
(such as the end force) these include the components of V relative to Exyz and the angles that V makes with the various
axes of Exyz (see Line Results: Angles). The angles offered are as follows:
The "EzAngle" is the angle between V and the Ezdirection (i.e. axial direction). This measures how far V is away
from the end fitting axial direction.
The "EzxAngle" is the angle from Ez to the projection of V onto the Ezx plane (measured positive from Ez towards
Ex). This is the angle V makes with Ez when viewing the zxplane.
The "EzyAngle" is the angle from Ez to the projection of V onto the Ezy plane (measured positive from Ez towards
Ey). This is the angle V makes with Ez when viewing the zyplane.
The "ExyAngle" is the angle between the Exdirection and the projection of V onto the Exy plane (measured
positive from Ex towards Ey). This is the angle V makes with Ex when viewing the xyplane.
Theory, Line Theory
w

160
6.11.10 Line Local Orientation
At any point P, the line orientation is defined by its local axes Pxyz. Pz is in the axial direction, towards End B, and is
reported by the azimuth and declination angles. Px and Py are normal to the line axis.
At the ends of the line, these local axes are referred to as the end axes Exyz, and their directions are specified by the end
orientation angles on the line data form.
At other points on the line the calculation of the local orientation depends on whether torsion is included:
If torsion is included then the local Pxyz directions are calculated using the specified torsional properties of the line.
If torsion is not included then the local directions at P are calculated by assuming that no twisting occurs anywhere
along the line between End A and P. In more detail, OrcaFlex calculates the local orientation at P by starting with the
orientation at End A (as specified by its end orientation angles) and then stepping along the line from node to node,
using the notwist assumption at each step to calculate the next node's local orientation.
Note: If End A is free or if it is released then the local orientations are calculated as if End A was connected to
an object aligned with the global axes. Accordingly you should exercise caution when interpreting
results which depend on the local orientations of the line.
6.11.11 Treatment of Compression
A segment is said to experience compression if the effective tension is negative. OrcaFlex has two modes for handling
this, depending on the setting of the Limit Compression data item on the line types form.
Limit Compression: No
The segment is treated as a strut which can support unlimited elastic compression. This is the preferred model except
where the bend stiffness is insignificant.
Limit Compression: Yes
The segment is treated as an elastic Euler strut; the compression is limited to the segment Euler load value for the
segment
2
EI/L0
2
, where EI is the bending stiffness of the pipe and L0 is segment unstretched length. This correctly
models a chain or very flexible rope, which can support little or no compression. In the case of a chain, the bending
stiffness is set to zero, and the segment Euler load limit is also zero.
The segment Euler load provides a check on the ability of the model to represent compressive loads and the
deformations which result. Compression causes the line to deform laterally, the deformation being controlled by
bending. Given adequate segmentation, OrcaFlex will correctly represent this deformation. If compression exceeds the
segment Euler load of an individual segment, this indicates that the wavelength of deformation is shorter than can be
represented by the chosen segmentation and the results may be unreliable. The model should be rerun with shorter
segments in the affected area. The segment Euler load is shown on effective tension range graphs and infringement
warnings are given on the results form and in the statistics tables.
For more details see Modelling Compression in Flexibles and "Limit Compression" Switch.
6.11.12 Contents Flow Effects
Introduction
Contents flow effects are normally neglected when modelling pipes in OrcaFlex. However for pipes carrying high
contents density at rapid flow rates the flow effects can be significant. The published literature show that there are three
extra forces introduced by contents flow a centrifugal force, a Coriolis force and a flow friction force.
OrcaFlex includes the facility to specify the contents mass flow rate on the line data form. If this is nonzero then the
resulting centrifugal and Coriolis effects are included. Note that the flow friction effects are not included in OrcaFlex.
Note that these flow effects apply only to the dynamic simulation, not to any of the static calculations performed by the
program. The mass flow rate is increased smoothly through the buildup period of the simulation, using the same
algorithm employed for 'ramping' wave height. Since the duration of the buildup period is under the user's control, this
feature can be used to determine the transient effect of different startup rates.
w
Theory, Line Theory
161
Theory
This section documents the theory behind the modelling of the centrifugal and Coriolis forces in OrcaFlex. This theory is
technical and specific to the way pipes are modelled in OrcaFlex.
Notation
contents density
r mass flow rate
a internal crosssectional area
l segment length
p position of node relative to fixed axes
v velocity of node relative to fixed axes
u unit vector in downstream direction of line
angular velocity of moving frame relative to fixed frame
dx/dt rate of change of any variable x relative to fixed axes
x' rate of change of any variable x relative to moving axes
The contents mass per unit length is a so the flow velocity is r/(a).
Centrifugal force on a node due to flow through a node
First consider a node with flow arriving from one direction, uin say, and leaving in another direction, uout. For a midnode
uin and uout are simply the unit vectors in the directions of the segments before and after the node. For the first node uin
is the end direction this is taken to be the same as uout if the end is free and otherwise is taken to be the nomoment
direction. Similar treatment is applied to uout at the last node.
Similarly let ain and aout denote the internal cross sectional areas on the input side and output side, respectively. ain for
the first node, and aout for the last node, are taken to be the same as the internal cross section area of the end segment
i.e. we assume no change in internal cross sectional area at the line ends.
Then contents flow into the node at mass flow rate r and velocity r/(ain)uin so the rate of input of momentum is
r
2
/(ain)uin. The output mass flow rate is also r but the output velocity is r/(aout)uout so the rate of output of momentum
is r
2
/(aout)uout. The force on the contents that is required to achieve this change in flow direction must therefore be the
rate of output of momentum minus the rate of input of momentum, i.e.
r
2
/(aout)uout r
2
/(ain)uin
The resulting centrifugal force on the node must be equal and opposite to this, so
Centrifugal Force on Node = (r
2
/)( uin / ain uout / aout ).
We can check this result in two ways. Firstly, it has the correct units:
Units = [(M/T)
2
] / [(M/L
3
).(L
2
)] = ML/T
2
= F.
Secondly, it matches the centrifugal term included in equation 10 see Gregory & Paidoussis, 1996.
Coriolis force due to movement of a segment
Now consider a segment between two nodes n1 and n2 and consider two frames of reference a fixed global frame and a
moving local frame whose origin moves with node n1 and whose zaxis always points in direction u = unit vector from n1
towards n2.
Consider the contents of a segment. Its velocity relative to the moving axes is
p' = (r/a)u
So its velocity relative to the fixed axes is
v1 + dp/dt
Theory, Line Theory
w

162
= v1 + p' + p
Therefore its acceleration relative to fixed axes is
d( v1 + p' + p) )/dt
= (v1 + p' + p)' + (v1 + p' + p)
= 0 + 0 + 'p + p' + v1 + p' + (p)
= 'p + 2p' + v1 + (p)
and of these terms the only new one, i.e. that is dependent on the rate of flow p' rather than p, is the term 2p' =
2(r/a)u. When multiplied by the mass of contents in the segment, la, this gives the Coriolis force on the segment,
i.e. 2lr (u).
But is given by
= u(v2 v1) / l
so the Coriolis force is given by
2r (u (v2 v1)) u
= 2r ( (u.u)(v2 v1) (u.(v2 v1))u )
= 2r ( (v2 v1) (udirection component of (v2 v1)) )
= 2r . (component of (v2 v1)) normal to u).
We then apportion this total Coriolis force on the segment into two equal parts i.e. a force of
r . (component of (v2 v1)) normal to u)
on each of the two nodes at the ends of the segment.
Note: A mid node therefore receives two Coriolis force contributions - one each from the segments either side
- but an end node only receives one such contribution.
The above result has the correct units:
Units = (M/T) . (L/T) = ML/T
2
= F.
and it agrees with the Coriolis term included in equation 10 see Gregory & Paidoussis, 1996.
Other references:
Paidoussis M P, 1970
Paidoussis M P & Deksnis E B, 1970.
Paidoussis M P & Lathier B E, 1976.
6.11.13 Line Pressure Effects
OrcaFlex reports two different types of tension the effective tension (Te) and the wall tension (Tw). These two
tensions are related by the formula
Tw = C1.(Te + PiAi PoAo)
where
Pi = internal pressure. Pi is calculated from the contents pressure, allowing for the static pressure head due to the
instantaneous height difference between the point and the specified reference Z level.
Po = external (i.e. surrounding fluid) pressure. Po is assumed to be zero at and above the mean water level. Below
there it is calculated allowing for the static pressure head due to the instantaneous height difference between the
point and the mean water level.
Ai, Ao = internal and external cross section areas of the stress annulus, respectively, given by Ai = .ID
2
/4 and Ao =
.OD
2
/4, where ID and OD are the stress diameters of the line type.
w
Theory, Line Theory
163
C1 = tensile stress loading factor. By default this equals 1.
Note: Where the stress ID or OD differ from the corresponding line type diameter, OrcaFlex (except release
8.6a - see What's New) uses the stress diameters, not the line type diameters, to calculate Ai and Ao.
This is equivalent to assuming that the annulus between the stress OD and line type OD carries an axial
load which matches the ambient external pressure, and the annulus between the stress ID and the line
type ID carries an axial load which matches the ambient internal pressure.
Warning: Before using the wall tension and stress results you should confirm that this model is suitable for the
case you are modelling. We believe it is suitable for many cases of attached buoyancy and for non-
structural linings, but it may not be suitable for bonded buoyancy or structural linings. If it is not
suitable you should do your own separate calculation of wall tension and stresses.
Explanation of Wall Tension Formula
To understand this formula and the difference between effective tension and wall tension, consider the forces acting
axially at the midpoint of a segment. The nodes either side represent a length of pipe plus its contents. More
importantly, the forces on them are calculated as if the length of pipe represented had end caps which hold in the
contents and which are exposed to the internal and external pressure. The diagram below illustrates this and shows the
tension and pressure forces present; the equation above is simply the force balance equation for this diagram.
P
i
A
i

P
o
A
o

T
e

T
w
P
i
A
i

P
o
A
o

T
e

T
w

segment mid-point
node n
node n+1

Figure: Tension and Pressure forces
Notes: Both effective tension and wall tension are relevant to the question of pipe buckling. For buckling of the
pipe as an Euler strut, effective tension is the governing parameter - when it is negative the strut is in
effective compression. On the other hand, local buckling of the pipe wall is determined by wall tension.
(Note that OrcaFlex does not model local buckling, which depends critically on details of the pipe
construction and is therefore beyond the scope of the program.)
For cables, umbilicals and ropes, the internal pressure term PiAi does not apply. However, the external
pressure term PoAo is still applicable, and the actual tension in the cable is the wall tension as defined
above.
For chains, which are inherently discontinuous, the pressure terms do not apply and the effective
tension is the true tension in the chain.
6.11.14 Pipe Stress Calculation
OrcaFlex provides stress results that apply only to simple pipes. More precisely, the stress calculation assumes that the
loads on the line are taken by a simple cylinder whose inside and outside diameters are given by the stress diameters
specified on the linetypes form. It also assumes that the cylinder is made of a uniform material. The pipe stress results
are therefore only valid for things like steel or titanium pipes they do not apply to composite structure flexible pipes.
Note that the fatigue analysis uses the pipe stresses, so these restrictions also apply to the fatigue analysis.
Consider a crosssection through a midsegment point, as shown in the following diagram. The diagram shows the frame
of reference used for the crosssection, which has origin O is at the pipe centreline, Oz along the pipe axis (positive
towards End B) and Ox and Oy normal to the pipe axis (and so in the plane of the crosssection).
Theory, Line Theory
w

164
x (Theta=0)
y (Theta=90)
Stress ID
Stress OD
r
z
P
y
Theta
Cross-Section Side View
End A O
C
R
O

Figure: Frame of Reference for Stress Calculation
The OrcaFlex simulation calculates the following loads that are acting at the crosssection:
Internal and external pressures, Pi and Po respectively.
Effective tension and resulting wall tension. These are both vectors in the zdirection, with magnitudes Te and Tw
respectively.
Bend Moment, which is a vector in the xyplane, with magnitude M and components Mx and My in the Ox and Oy
directions, respectively.
Shear force, which is also a vector in the xyplane, with magnitude S and components Sx and Sy in the Ox and Oy
directions, respectively.
Torque, which is a vector in the zdirection with magnitude .
In addition we define the following terminology:
StressOD and StressID = stress diameters, as specified on the line types form.
A = crosssectional stress area = (/4).(StressOD
2
StressID
2
)
Ixy = 2
nd
moment of stress area about Ox (or Oy) = (/64).(StressOD
4
StressID
4
)
Iz = 2
nd
moment of stress area about Oz = 2.Ixy
C1, C2, C3, C4 = stress loading factors (C1 = tensile, C2 = bending, C3 = shear, C4 = torsional), as specified on the line
types form.
The stress generated by the above loads varies across the crosssection. Consider the point P in the crosssection shown
as a black dot in the diagram, which can be identified by its polar coordinates (r, ). At P, we define a local set of axes
(R,C,Z) where R is radially outwards, C is in the circumferential direction (positive in the direction of Theta increasing)
and Z is parallel to Oz.
With respect to these axes, the stress at P is a symmetric 3x3 matrix of stress components (see Pipe Stress Matrix).
OrcaFlex calculates this matrix and then derives stress results from it.
6.11.15 Pipe Stress Matrix
The pipe matrix at point P (see Pipe Stress Calculation) can be written as:
RRStress RCStress RZStress
RCStress CCStress CZStress
w
Theory, Line Theory
165
RZStress CZStress ZZStress
These stress components are calculated as follows. For terminology see Pipe Stress Calculation.
Diagonal Terms
The 3 diagonal entries of the stress matrix, RRStress, CCStress and ZZStress, are the radial, circumferential (or hoop)
and axial (or longitudinal) stresses, respectively.
Radial and Hoop Stresses
RRStress and CCStress are due to the internal and external pressure. They are calculated using Lame's equation for a
thickwalled cylinder whose internal and external diameters are StressID and StressOD, as specified on the line types
form. This gives:
RRStress = Radial Stress = a b/r
2

CCStress = Hoop Stress = a + b/r
2

where a and b are the values that satisfy
a b / (StressID/2)
2
= Pi and
a + b / (StressOD/2)
2
= Po.
Notes: StressID and StressOD are by default equal to the ID and OD specified on the line type form. However,
they can be set to be different to ID and OD. In this case the above calculation is equivalent to assuming
that the material in between ID and StressID, and between StressOD and OD, is transparent to
pressure. The internal pressure therefore applies right through to the StressID and the external
pressure applies right through to StressOD.
If StressID is zero, then OrcaFlex assumes that external pressure applies throughout the structure - i.e.
that RRStress = CCStress = -Po.
Axial Stress
ZZStress is the axial stress and is given by:
ZZStress = Direct Tensile Stress + Bending Stress
where the Direct Tensile Stress is the contribution due to wall tension and Bending Stress is the contribution due to
bend moment. The wall tension is assumed to be uniformly distributed across the stress area, so its contribution is given
by:
Direct Tensile Stress = Tw / A
The bend moment contribution varies across the crosssection and is given by:
Bending Stress = (C2.Mx.r.sin C2.My.r.cos) / Ixy
Off-Diagonal Terms
The 6 offdiagonal terms are the shear stresses, but there are in fact only 3 independent terms, since the matrix is
symmetric. They are given by:
RCStress = 0
RZStress = (C2.Sx.cos + C2.Sy.sin) / A
CZStress = C3..r / Iz + (C2.Sy.cos C2.Sx.sin) / A
The contribution C3..r / Iz in the above equation is the shear stress contribution due to torque. If torsion is not included
in the model, then it is zero. The other contributions are both due to the shear force, which is assumed to be uniformly
distributed across the stress area.
Finally, for two useful references on this subject, see Sparks (1980) and Sparks (1983).
Theory, Line Theory
w

166
6.11.16 Hydrodynamic and Aerodynamic Loads
Drag
Both hydrodynamic and aerodynamic drag forces, using Morison's Equation are applied to the line. The same drag
formulation is used for hydrodynamic and aerodynamic drag forces.
Note: Aerodynamic drag is only included if the Include wind loads on Lines option is enabled in the
Environment data.
The drag forces applied to a line are calculated using the cross flow principle. That is, the fluid velocity relative to the
line is split into its components Vn normal to the line axis, and Vz parallel to the line axis. The components of drag force
normal to the line axis are then based on Vn, and its x and ycomponents Vx, Vy. The component of drag force parallel to
the line axis is based on Vz.
The drag force formulae use drag coefficients, Cdx, Cdy and Cdz (specified on the line type data form) and the drag areas
appropriate to each direction.
For the directions normal to the line axis (x and y) the drag area is taken to be the projected area Dn.L where Dn is the
normal Drag / Lift diameter and L is the length of line represented by the node. For the axial direction the drag area is
taken to be the skin surface area .Da.L where Da is the axial Drag / Lift diameter.
There is a choice of the following three possible drag formulations for the drag force components (Fx, Fy, Fz) in the local
line directions. The formulations differ in how the drag force components vary with the incidence angle between the
flow and the line axial direction. The formulations are reviewed in Casarella and Parsons.
In the formulae below
= fluid density
P = proportion wet or proportion dry, as appropriate.
Standard Formulation
Fx = P.( ..(Dn.L).Cdx.Vx.|Vn| )
Fy = P.( ..(Dn.L).Cdy.Vy.|Vn| )
Fz = P.( ..(Da.L).Cdz.Vz.|Vz| )
This formulation is the most commonlyused and was the formulation used by versions of OrcaFlex before a choice of
formulation was introduced. It has been proposed or used by various authors, including Richtmyer, Reber and Wilson. It
is appropriate for general flow conditions.
Pode Formulation
Fx = same as standard formula for Fx, above
Fy = same as standard formula for Fy, above
Fz = +/ P.( ..(Da.L).Cdz.|V|
2
)
where the sign of Fz, i.e. whether it is towards End A of the line or towards End B, is the same as the axial component of
the relative flow vector.
This formulation is preferred by some analysts for systems with neartangential flow.
Warning: The Pode formula for Fz is discontinuous at = 90, since then the axial component of the flow vector is
zero and so the direction of Fz is undefined. In this case OrcaFlex sets Fz to zero.
Eames Formulation for bare cables
Fx = P.( ..(Dn.L).Cdx.Vx.|Vn| + ..(Da.L).Cdz.Vx.(|V| |Vn|) )
Fy = P.( ..(Dn.L).Cdy.Vy.|Vn| + ..(Da.L).Cdz.Vy.(|V| |Vn|) )
Fz = P.( ..(Da.L).Cdz.Vz.|V| )
w
Theory, Line Theory
167
Drag Force Variation with Incidence Angle
The above formulae for the drag force components can be rewritten in a form that highlights how the drag force varies
with incidence angle.
Consider the case where the line is axially symmetric, i.e. Cdx = Cdy = Cdn say, and let be the incidence angle between
the flow vector V and the line axis. Then Vz = Vcos and Vn = Vsin . Also, let:
R = P.( ..(D.L).Cdn.|V|
2
)
= .Cdz/Cdn = (drag force in axial flow) / (drag force in normal flow of same velocity)
Fn = the normal component of the drag force.
Then the formulations can be expressed as follows.
Standard: |Fn| = Rsin
2
|Fz| = R.cos
2

Pode: |Fn| = Rsin
2
|Fz| = R
Eames: |Fn| = R{(1-)sin
2
+ sin } |Fz| = Rcos
Drag coefficient variation with Reynolds number and Height above seabed
The normal drag coefficients Cdx and Cdy can be specified to vary with Reynolds number. The variable data table
specifies the drag coefficient as a function of Reynolds number, Cd(Re).
Reynolds number can be calculated in a number of different ways, as specified by the Reynolds number calculation data.
You should set the Reynolds number calculation data to match the data source used for your variable drag coefficient
data.
Alternatively the normal drag coefficients can be specified to vary with Height above Seabed, h. We define h to be the
vertical height above the seabed of the underside of the node, allowing for contact diameter. The actual drag coefficient
used by the OrcaFlex calculation is given by:
Cd = .Cd2 + (1).Cd1
where
Cd1 is the Drag Coefficient on the Seabed,
Cd2 is the Drag Coefficient away from the Seabed,
is the Drag Variation Factor.
These data are all defined on the variable data form.
The drag variation factor is a function of the normalised height above the seabed, h/Dn. For nodes lying on the seabed
Cd should equal Cd1. In this case h/d=0 and so (0) should equal 0. Similarly, for nodes well away from the seabed we
expect Cd to be equal to Cd2 and so should equal 1 for large values of h/Dn.
The drag coefficients Cd1 and Cd2 can be specified as varying with Reynolds number which allows specification of a drag
force which varies with both Reynolds number and Height above seabed.
Lift
The hydrodynamic lift force is defined to be:
FLIFT = P.( ..(Dn.L).Cl.|Vn|
2
)
where
Cl is the lift coefficient.
The lift force acts upwards and is normal to the line and normal to the relative flow direction.
Lift coefficient variation with Reynolds number and Height above seabed
The lift coefficient can be specified to vary with Reynolds number in an identical manner to drag coefficients.
Theory, Line Theory
w

168
Reynolds number can be calculated in a number of different ways, as specified by the Reynolds number calculation data.
You should set the Reynolds number calculation data to match the data source used for your variable lift coefficient
data.
Alternatively the lift coefficient can be specified to vary with Height above Seabed. In this case the actual lift coefficient
used by the OrcaFlex calculation is given by:
Cl = .Cl1
where
Cl1 is the Seabed Lift Coefficient,
is the Lift Coefficient Decay Factor.
These data are all defined on the variable data form.
The lift coefficient decay factor is a function of the normalised height above the seabed, h/Dn. For nodes lying on the
seabed Cl should equal Cl1. In this case h/d=0 and so (0) should equal 1. For nodes well away from the seabed the lift
effect dies away and we expect Cl to be equal to 0. So should equal 0 for large values of h/D.
The lift coefficient Cl1 can be specified as varying with Reynolds number which allows specification of a lift force which
varies with both Reynolds number and Height above seabed.
Added Mass
The added mass effects on a line are calculated separately for the local x, y and zdirections. For each of these directions,
the line is subject to two added mass effects:
Its effective mass is increased by
Ca.(Displaced Mass)
where Displaced Mass is the mass of the fluid displaced (taking into account the proportion wet) and Ca is the added
mass coefficient specified for that direction. As a result, if the line accelerates then it experiences an extra inertial force
(due to added mass) given by
Ca.(Displaced Mass).AL
where AL is the component (in that direction) of the acceleration of the line (relative to the earth).
If the fluid is accelerating then the line experiences a fluid acceleration force given by
(1+Ca).(Displaced Mass).AF
where AF is the component (in that direction) of the acceleration of the fluid (relative to the earth).
The fluid acceleration force is sometimes written as:
Cm.(Displaced Mass).AF
where Cm = 1 + Ca. It can also be split into two terms:
(Displaced Mass).AF + Ca.(Displaced Mass).AF
where the first term is called the Froude Krylov force and the second term is called the added mass force.
Fluid Flow
If the mass flow rate of the Line is nonzero then the centrifugal and Coriolis effects due to this flow are included.
6.11.17 Drag Chains
A drag chain is an attachment to a line that applies a force to the node to which it is attached. The force consists of the
tension in the drag chain and so is in the direction in which the chain is hanging. This direction is determined by the
relative velocity of the water past the chain the faster the flow then the greater the angle of the drag chain to the
vertical. This is now described in more detail.
w
Theory, Line Theory
169
V
n
V
a
V
W
W
n
W
a
180-
Drag Chain
=-90
Connection
to Line
A

Figure: Drag Chain
Consider the drag chain shown in the above diagram.
Let
D = drag chain effective diameter
L = drag chain length
= drag chain declination from vertical
V = horizontal relative velocity = (horizontal fluid velocity at A) (horizontal node velocity at A).
Then the incidence angle between the horizontal relative velocity vector V and the drag chain is = 90 and the
normal and axial drag forces are given by:
Fn = normal drag force = 0.5..L.D.Cdn().Vn.|Vn|
Fa = axial drag force = 0.5...L.D.Cda().Va.|Va|
where
Vn = normal component of relative velocity = |V|sin
Va = axial component of relative velocity = |V|cos
= water density
Cdn(), Cda() = normal and axial drag coefficients for this incidence angle.
The inertia of the drag chain is assumed to be small enough to be neglected, so we assume that the drag chain is always
in equilibrium under the action of 3 forces:
The chain's wet weight, W.
The fluid drag on the chain.
The tension being applied by the line at the top of the chain.
Because the tensile force being applied by the line is axial to the chain, the components of wet weight and drag normal
to the chain must balance. In other words, the direction in which the drag chain hangs is that in which the chain is in
force balance in the direction normal to the chain. The remaining net force on the chain in the axial direction, Fa, is then
applied to the line.
Theory, Line Theory
w

170
OrcaFlex therefore hangs the chain in the same vertical plane as the relative velocity vector V and at angle to the
vertical. OrcaFlex calculates the angle by iterating until the sum of the normal components of drag force and wet
weight is zero.
Drag Chain Seabed Interaction
Drag chains, in OrcaFlex, interact with the seabed in a fairly simplistic way that is designed to achieve the following two
primary effects of seabed interaction:
Firstly, that as the chain is lowered down onto the seabed, the wet weight of the chain is steadily reduced as the
chain becomes supported by the seabed.
Secondly, that if the chain is dragged across the seabed then an opposing friction force R is generated, where is
the friction coefficient and R is the seabed reaction.
The seabed interaction model used is as follows:
At any given time, OrcaFlex first calculates how much of the drag chain would be supported by the seabed. It
assumes that the chain hangs vertically straight down from the line. The drag chain is then considered as being
made up of two parts the supported part and the remaining hanging part.
The hanging part of the chain is then analysed as described above.
The supported part of the chain is modelled as if it is lying on the seabed directly beneath the node to which the
chain is attached. As the node moves laterally, the supported chain also moves laterally (but below the node) and so
generates a friction force that is then applied to the node.
Note that the division of the drag chain into a hanging length and a supported length is done before the hanging length is
analysed, and so is done with the chain vertical. This means that if current drag causes the chain to hang at an angle to
the vertical then the supported length will generally have been overestimated and the hanging length correspondingly
underestimated. This is an inaccuracy that cannot easily be avoided at the moment.
6.11.18 Line End Conditions
Except for Free Ends, the connection at the line end is modelled as an isotropic 'balljoint' with a rotational stiffness and
a preferred 'nomoment' direction. A rotational stiffness of zero simulates a freely rotating end, and a value of Infinity
simulates a clamped end.
The inclusion of end stiffness allows the program to calculate the curvature and bending moment at the termination. If
the curvature is large, the calculated value is accurate only if sufficiently short segments have been used to model the
line near its end.
OrcaFlex reports a value for End Force and End EzAngle. These are the magnitude of the end force, and the magnitude
of the angle between the end force vector and the nomoment direction. Vessel motion is automatically accounted for.
The end force and angle values provide the basis for the design of end fittings such as bend stiffeners. See Modelling
Line Ends.
6.11.19 Interaction with the Sea Surface
OrcaFlex Lines are subdivided into segments, and the various forces are attributed to nodes at each end. For a partially
submerged segment, the hydrostatic and hydrodynamic forces are proportioned depending on how much of the
segment is submerged the Proportion Wet (PW). Proportion Wet is available as a line result variable. We also define
Proportion Dry (PD) as PD = 1 PW.
For a segment whose axis is normal to the surface, the Proportion Wet could be calculated from the intersection of the
segment centreline axis with the free surface. However, this simple approach breaks down when the segment is tangent
to the surface.
For this reason, OrcaFlex uses a simple but effective modification of this concept. Instead of using the centreline axis, we
use the diagonal line joining the highest point on the segment circumference, at the 'dry' end, with the lowest point at
the 'wet' end; see the diagonal line in the figure below. As the segment passes through the tangent position, the diagonal
line switches corners but the proportion wet varies continuously. The intersection of the diagonal line with the surface
continues to give the appropriate Proportion Wet result, and the hydrostatic and dynamic forces are attributed to the
appropriate node.
w
Theory, Line Theory
171
B
A
Proportion Wet = B / (A+B)

Figure: Proportion Wet for a surface-piercing segment
This surfacepiercing model enables OrcaFlex to model systems such as floating hoses, containment booms and wave
suppression systems. However please note the following points when modelling such systems:
A consequence of this model is that a hose floats in still water as a wallsided body; in other words OrcaFlex does
not take account of the variation in water plane area with draft that arises from the circular crosssection. For cases
of practical dynamics, this simplification is of minor importance, but it does mean that if you check the immersion
depth of a hose in still water you may find the answer slightly wrong if the hose is very buoyant, or just awash.
When modelling floating hoses, it is important to have enough segments to model the local curvature. If your hose is
flexible, and the waves are short, then you will need at least ten and preferably twenty segments per wave to model
the curvature properly. However a stiff hose tends to bridge the wave troughs, and fewer segments are required.
The program uses constant drag and added mass coefficients for the floating hose, and the user has to select
appropriate values based on the average immersion depth. Unfortunately the literature is of limited help if you
know of any good data source, we would be very pleased to hear of it.
6.11.20 Interaction with Seabed and Shapes
Nodes are also subjected to reaction forces from the seabed and any Shapes with which they come into contact. The
contact occurs at the outer edge of the line, as specified by the contact diameter. The reaction force is given by:
Reaction = KAd
where
K is the Stiffness of the seabed or shape,
d is the depth of penetration, allowing for the contact diameter,
A is the contact area, which is taken to be contact diameter multiplied by the length of line represented by the
node.
In addition, nodes experience a damping force. For details see Seabed Theory and Shapes Theory.
Finally, friction forces can also be included.
6.11.21 Clashing
OrcaFlex includes the capability to model clashing between lines. To include clash modelling between two lines, you
must set Clash Check to "Yes" and set the Contact Stiffness to a nonzero value, for both lines. You can also specify the
Contact Damping value.
The facility to suppress clash modelling (by setting Clash Check to "No") has been included because the clashing
algorithm is time consuming. It is therefore best to suppress clash modelling on all sections that will never clash with
other lines, or if you are not interested in the effects of clashing.
OrcaFlex assumes constant spring stiffness and damping values, and neglects friction. The force algorithm is described
below. It pushes lines apart again if they try to pass through another, and it permits lines to separate again after contact.
Theory, Line Theory
w

172
Multiple contact points along the line length are allowed for, but clashes of one part of a line with another part of the
same line are not modelled at present.
Clashing behaviour can be difficult to understand and it is not always obvious what the results mean and how they
should be used in practice. This is a developing area and we would appreciate feedback from users. The following notes
expand on the way the calculations are carried out by the software and give our suggestions on interpretation.
Calculating the Clash Force
OrcaFlex checks for clashing between each line segment and every segment in every other line in the OrcaFlex model
(providing check checking is enabled and the contact stiffness is nonzero, for both segments involved). Note that
OrcaFlex does not check for clashing between two segments of the same line, so it does not model clash contact of a line
with itself.
The clash check between segment S1 (on line L1) and segment S2 (on a different line L2) is done as follows. Let the radii
of the two segments be r1 and r2 (as defined by the line type contact diameter). First OrcaFlex calculates the shortest
separation distance, d, between the centrelines of the two segments. If d >= (r1 + r2) then the lines are not in contact and
no contact force is applied.
If d < (r1 + r2) then the lines are in contact. In this case OrcaFlex applies equal and opposite clash contact forces to the 2
segments to push them apart, as follows. Let p1 and p2 be the two points of closest proximity i.e. p1 is on the centreline
of segment S1 and p2 is on the centreline of segment S2, and these are the two points that are minimum distance d apart.
Also, let u be the unit vector in the direction from p1 towards p2. Then the magnitude of the clash contact force applied is
given by:
F = (Stiffness Term) + (Damping Term)
where the two terms on the right are documented below. A force of this magnitude F is applied to segment S1, at p1, in
direction u. And the equal and opposite force is applied to segment S2, at p2, in direction +u.
The stiffness term is given by:
Stiffness Term = k.(d [r1 + r2])
where k = 1 / (1/k1 + 1/k2) is the combined contact stiffness of the segments. Here k1 and k2 are the contact stiffnesses
of the two segments, as specified in the Line Types data.
The damping term is based on the rate of penetration, v, which is the udirection component of p1's velocity relative to
p2. If v <= 0 then the two segments are moving apart and then no damping force is applied. If v>0 then the penetration is
increasing and the damping term is then given by:
Damping Term = cv
where c is the combined contact damping value of the two segments, which is given by:
c = 0 if c1=0 or c2=0
c = 1 / (1/c1 + 1/c2) otherwise.
Here c1 and c2 are the contact damping values of the two segments, as specified in the Line Types data.
How the Clash Force is Applied and Reported
In general, clashing will take place between one segment of one line and one segment of another (the probability of a
clash occurring exactly at a node is very small unless you take special measures to make it happen). OrcaFlex
determines the force as just described, and reports the force as a segment variable i.e. when you ask for the clash force
at a particular arc length along the line, the force reported is the clash force for the segment which contains the specified
point.
If multiple clashes occur simultaneously on the same segment then the Line Clash Force reported is the magnitude of
the vector sum of the clash forces involved.
In the OrcaFlex model, all forces act at the nodes, so the clash force has to be divided between the two nodes at the ends
of the segment in which the force acts. The force is divided in such a way that the moments of the two forces about the
contact point are equal and opposite.
w
Theory, Line Theory
173
Interpreting the Results
Contact between lines can be a violent impact at high relative velocity, or a gentle drift of one line against another, or
anything in between. We need to view the results in different ways for different sorts of contact. The following notes
give some general guidance based on our experience, but in difficult cases it is essential that users develop their own
understanding of the underlying physics, and confirm it by sensitivity analysis.
OrcaFlex provides three measures of the severity of a clash event:
Clash force.
Clash impulse (integral of contact force times time a measure of momentum transfer).
Clash energy (calculated by integrating the magnitude of clash force with respect to depth of penetration).
There are 3 types of OrcaFlex results which can be used for analysing clashing:
1. Time Histories of Clash force and Clash impulse.
2. Range Graphs of Clash force.
3. The Line Clashing Report contains Clash force, Clash impulse and Clash energy, together with a host of other details
about clash events.
Low Speed Contact
Where one line drifts quite slowly against another as a result of weight or drag forces, then the contact is essentially
quasistatic. The clash force at the point of contact is the best measure of what is happening, and will be insensitive to
segmentation and contact stiffness.
High Speed Impact
The case of violent impact at high speed is much more complicated. Contact forces arrest the relative movement of the
lines over a very short time interval. Momentum is transferred from the faster moving to the slower moving line. Kinetic
energy at the moment of impact is converted partly to local strain energy at the point of contact, and partly to axial and
bending strain energy elsewhere in the lines.
If the discretisation of the lines is sufficiently fine, the contact stiffness value is correct, and contact damping is small,
then OrcaFlex models the impact correctly, and all the reported results (force, impulse, energy) are correct. In practice,
however, contact stiffness is rarely known with any precision, and it may not be practicable to discretise the line
sufficiently to represent the deformation of the line axially, or particularly in bending, following a violent impact.
(Deformation of the colliding cross sections is represented by the contact stiffness.) Under these circumstances, we need
a measure of clash severity which is both meaningful for engineering purposes, and insensitive to discretisation and
contact stiffness. Of the three measures available:
Maximum clash force reduces with reducing contact stiffness and is usually the least reliable measure.
Impulse is generally insensitive to changes in contact stiffness, though this may be masked where the change in
stiffness causes a change in the character of the impact. (For example, a high contact stiffness may give rise to a
single impact followed by a large rebound. Reducing stiffness can reduce the rebound to such an extent that the
single impact is replaced by a double impact.) Impulse is also fairly insensitive to changes in segmentation.
Unfortunately, however, impulse is not a convenient measure for engineering purposes.
Energy is the most convenient practical measure of potential damage. This may be sensitive to contact stiffness,
where there is a fairly equal distribution of strain energy between contact and other elastic deformations of the
system, but if contact strain energy is the dominant component, then sensitivity is reduced. Contact strain energy is
also sensitive to discretisation: longer segments give higher values of contact strain energy. This means that the
reported strain energy for a coarsely segmented model is generally conservative. In practical cases, it may be
possible to reduce segment length sufficiently to show that contact strain energy is below damaging levels, without
needing to go to the very fine discretisation which might be required for an accurate value.
Damping
Linear damping is included in the OrcaFlex contact model, and contributes to the reported clash force, impulse and
energy results.
Theory, Line Theory
w

174
6.11.22 Modal Analysis
The model analysis calculates the undamped natural modes of a single line. Each free node in the line (i.e. nodes that
are midnodes or free end nodes) has 3 degrees of freedom (for a line with torsion not included). A line with N free
nodes therefore has 3N degrees of freedom, and as a result the discretised model of the line has 3N natural modes.
These modes are given in decreasing order of period and are numbered starting from 1.
Note that the analysis calculates the natural modes of the discretised model, not those of the real continuous line.
However the discretised modes are close to the continuous ones and for any given mode number the accuracy improves
as more and more elements are used to model the line. For any given level of discretisation the accuracy is better for the
lower modes and progressively worsens as you go to higher and higher modes. The highest numbered modes are
unlikely to be realistic since they are oscillations whose wavelengths are of the same order as the segment length.
Typically there are 3 types of natural mode lateral in plane, lateral out of plane, and axial. The first two modes are often
the simple outofplane and inplane 'fundamentals' i.e. the modes where the whole line swings to and fro together and
the graph of displacement against arc length consists of just 1 half cycle. Then follow the higher harmonics, both in
plane and outofplane, with progressively more and more half cycles of displacement along the line length. The axial
modes usually have much higher frequencies and so they are usually found among the high number modes.
If the line hangs in one of the global axis planes then you can often distinguish whether a mode is inplane or outof
plane by looking at the pattern of zeros in the table of displacements. For example if the line hangs in the XZ plane then
the outofplane modes have nonzero Ydisplacements but zero (or very small) X and Zdisplacements, and the in
plane modes have the opposite pattern of zeros.
Non-Symmetric Effects
Seabed friction is a nonconservative force that introduces nonsymmetric terms into the line stiffness matrix. The
OrcaFlex modal analysis can only handle a symmetric stiffness matrix. To deal with this problem OrcaFlex does the
modal analysis using the symmetric part of the matrix, given by (K + K
T
) / 2. This is an approximation that neglects the
nonsymmetric effects of friction, so OrcaFlex warns you if this approximation is being done.
Outline Theory
Modal analysis is a standard technique that is welldocumented in the literature, but here is a brief outline. First
consider a single degree of freedom system consisting of a mass attached to a linear spring. The equation of motion is:
Mx''(t) = Kx(t)
where x(t) is the offset (at time t) from mean position, x''(t) is the acceleration, M is its mass and K is the stiffness of the
spring. Note that this analysis neglects damping and so the results are referred to as the undamped modes. The effect of
damping is usually small.
The solution of the equation is known to be simple harmonic, i.e. of the form x(t) = a.sin(t), where a and are
unknowns to be found by solving the equation. Differentiating x(t) gives:
x''(t) =
2
.a.sin(t)
so when we substitute into the equation of motion we obtain:
M.
2
.a.sin(t) = K.a.sin(t) (1)
which can be rearranged to give:
= (K/M).
This is the angular frequency of the oscillation and so the natural period T is given by:
T = 2..(M/K)
For this simple harmonic oscillator there is just a single undamped natural mode, corresponding to the single degree of
freedom. For a continuous riser there are an infinite number of degrees of freedom, and hence an infinite number of
undamped natural modes, but computer models inevitably have to use discretised models with a finite number of
degrees of freedom. In OrcaFlex a line has 3N degrees of freedom, where N is the number of nodes that are free to move,
so the discretised model has 3N undamped natural modes.
w
Theory, 6D Buoy Theory
175
In this situation the above equations still apply, but they now have to be interpreted as matrix/vector equations. and
T remain scalars, but a, x and x'' become vectors with 3N elements, and M and K become matrices with 3N rows and 3N
columns.
Equation (1) then turns out to have 3N solutions, the i
th
solution being i and ai, say, where i is a scalar and ai is a
vector with 3N components. This i
th
solution is called the i
th
natural mode. It is an oscillation of the line in which all the
degrees of freedom oscillate at the same angular frequency i. But different degrees of freedom have different
amplitudes, given by the components of ai, and this amplitude variation is called the mode's shape.
6.12 6D BUOY THEORY
6.12.1 Overview
This and subsequent topics give the formulae used for the forces and moments applied to a 6D buoy. Note that for a spar
buoy there is also more detailed documentation available ask Orcina for the article 'Spar Buoy Equation of Motion'.
The buoy is treated as a rigid body with 6 degrees of freedom, 3 translational and 3 rotational. The equation of motion
has the following contributions.
Weight
The weight force of Mass . g is applied at the centre of mass.
Buoyancy
Lumped buoys
The buoyancy force on a lumped buoy is given by:
Buoyancy Force = . g . WettedVolume
where:
is the sea density.
WettedVolume is given by PW.Volume where Volume is as specified on the buoy data form.
PW is the 'proportion wet' for the lumped buoy. This is taken to be 1 when the centre of volume is Height / 2 or
more below the water surface, 0 when the centre of volume is Height / 2 or more above the water surface, and
varies linearly with immersion between these two limits.
This buoyancy force is applied vertically upwards at the centre of wetted volume, which is taken to be
Height.(1PW) / 2
below the specified centre of volume.
Warning: For Lumped Buoys there is no contribution to roll and pitch stiffness from free surface effects when the
buoy pierces the surface, since OrcaFlex has no information regarding the actual body geometry,. Static
stability of a floating Lumped Buoy is therefore not correctly represented.
Spar buoys and Towed Fish
For spar buoys and towed fish, separate buoyancy forces are calculated and applied to each cylinder. The buoyancy
force on an individual cylinder is given by:
Buoyancy Force = . g . WettedVolume
where WettedVolume is the volume of that part of the cylinder that is below the water surface. This force is applied
vertically upwards at the centroid of that wetted volume.
Note: If added mass and damping of a stacked buoy is specified by Values for Each Cylinder then the
instantaneous water surface is used for this buoyancy calculation. But if the added mass and damping
is specified by RAOs and Matrices for Buoy then the (horizontal) mean water surface is used; this
excludes wave buoyancy effects, which are assumed to be included in the RAOs.
w

176
Hydrodynamic Loads
In general, the hydrodynamic loads are calculated using Morison's equation with additional components as discussed
below. The exception to this is if the added mass and damping effects on a spar buoy are specified by giving wave load
RAOs and added mass and damping matrices.
For a lumped buoy the hydrodynamic loads on the buoy are calculated and applied at the buoy centre of volume. These
loads are scaled by the buoy Proportion Wet and applied at the buoy centre of volume. For details see Lumped Buoy
Theory: Added Mass, Damping and Drag.
For a spar buoy or towed fish the calculation of hydrodynamic loads depends on the form of added mass and damping
chosen.
If the added mass and damping are specified by Values for each cylinder, then all the hydrodynamic loads are
calculated and applied separately on each cylinder. The hydrodynamic load on a cylinder is applied at the centroid
of wetted volume of the cylinder and is scaled by the Proportion Wet of the cylinder. The water surface is assumed
to be the tangent plane to the instantaneous wave surface directly above the centre of the cylinder; this therefore
allows for the buoyancy variation due to the wave.
If the added mass and damping are specified by RAOs and matrices, then the wave loads, added mass and damping
are calculated for the whole buoy, using the specified RAOs and matrices, and they are applied at the specified RAO,
Added Mass and Damping Origin. The buoyancy and drag loads are calculated and applied for each cylinder, as
described above, except that in this case the buoyancy load is calculated using the (horizontal) mean water surface
instead of the instantaneous wave surface. The effect of this is to exclude the wave contribution to buoyancy load,
which is assumed to be included in the specified wave load RAOs.
For details see Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Theory: Added Mass and Damping and Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Theory:
Drag.
Hydrodynamic Damping (linear)
You can apply additional damping forces and moments that are directly proportional to the fluid velocity and angular
velocity relative to the buoy. See Lumped Buoy Damping and Spar Buoy and Towed Fish: Added Mass and Damping.
The main use of these terms is to represent wave radiation damping for surface buoys. Values may be obtained
theoretically from a 3D diffraction model of the body or, more commonly, from empirical results such as a roll decay
test.
Hydrodynamic Moments
Rotation of the body relative to the fluid generates hydrodynamic moments which are analogous to the hydrodynamic
forces given by Morison's equation. OrcaFlex includes facilities for calculating these moments.
For Lumped Buoys, rotational hydrodynamic properties are included for damping, drag and added inertia components.
For Spar Buoys, drag moment data only are included.
In all cases, the fluid moments are calculated by reference to the local angular velocity and acceleration of the fluid,
defined as the angular velocity and acceleration of the local water isobar. The resulting moments are correct for
rotational motions of the body itself, and give a good representation of moments due to waves where the moments
derive from verticalfacing areas, e.g. discus buoys. However, the formulation gives a poor representation of wave
induced moments which derive from horizontallyfacing areas. The difficulty arises because there is no unique
definition of fluid angular velocity and angular acceleration at a point.
If you are in any doubt as to the correctness of the model, then we recommend setting the moment terms to zero.
Hydrodynamic moments will then be omitted completely for a Lumped Buoy. For a Spar Buoy represented by several
cylindrical sections, moments will be generated automatically as a result of the distribution of hydrodynamic forces
along the buoy axis.
Estimation of Hydrodynamic Properties
See technical note Buoy Hydrodynamics.
w
177
6.12.2 Lumped Buoy Added Mass, Damping and Drag
Added Mass and Inertia
Specified by diagonal values
The buoy inertia for translational motion is increased, for each local axis direction, by:
Added Mass = PW . Ca . HydroMass
where HydroMass and Ca are the reference hydrodynamic mass and added mass coefficient for translations in that
direction.
The buoy inertia for rotational motion is increased, for each local axis direction, by:
Added Inertia = PW . Ca . HydroInertia
where HydroInertia and Ca are the reference hydrodynamic inertia and added mass coefficient for rotations about that
direction.
Specified by full matrices
The buoy inertia, considered with respect to local axes, is increased by:
Added Mass = PW . AM
where AM is the full 6x6 added mass matrix.
Fluid Inertia Loads
Specified by diagonal values
The fluid inertia force applied in each local axis direction is given by:
Force = PW . Cm . HydroMass . A
where HydroMass and Cm are the reference hydrodynamic mass and Cm coefficient for that direction, and A is the
component, in that direction, of the local water particle acceleration relative to the earth.
The fluid inertia moment applied about each local axis direction is given by:
Moment = PW . Cm . HydroInertia . B
where HydroInertia and Cm are the reference inertia and Cm coefficient for rotation about that direction, and B is the
component, in that direction, of the rotational acceleration of the local water isobar relative to the earth.
Specified by full matrices
The fluid inertia load applied, considered with respect to local axes, is given by the matrix equation:
Load = PW . IM . af
where
Load is the vector [fx, fy, fz, mx, my, mz]
T
where fx, fy, fz, mx, my and mz are the components of force and
moment with respect to local axes,
IM is the full 6x6 fluid inertia matrix,
af is the vector of fluid acceleration components [Ax, Ay, Az, Bx, By, Bz]
T
,
Ax, Ay and Az are the components of the local water particle acceleration relative to the earth with respect to
local axes,
Bx, By and Bz are the components of the rotational acceleration of the local water isobar relative to the earth
with respect to local axes.
Damping
The damping force applied in each local axis direction is given by:
w

178
Force = PW . UnitDampingForce . Vr
where UnitDampingForce is the Unit Force for that direction and Vr is the component, in that direction, of the water
velocity relative to the buoy.
Similarly, the damping moment applied about each local axis direction is given by:
Moment = PW . UnitDampingMoment . Wr
where UnitDampingMoment is the Unit Moment for rotation about that direction and Wr is the component in that
direction, of the angular velocity of the local water isobar relative to the buoy.
Drag
The drag force applied in each local axis direction is given by:
Force = PW...Cd.A.Vr.|Vr|
where A and Cd are the Drag Area and Drag Coefficient for that direction and Vr is the component, in that direction, of
the water velocity relative to the buoy.
The drag moment applied about each local axis direction is given by:
Moment = PW...Cd.AM.Wr.|Wr|
where AM and Cd are the Moment of Area and drag coefficient for rotation about that axis and Wr is the component, in
that direction, of the angular velocity of the local water isobar relative to the buoy.
6.12.3 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Added Mass and Damping
The first order hydrodynamic loads can be modelled in a choice of two ways: either by values for each cylinder or by
wave force RAOs and matrices for the whole buoy.
Loads specified by Values for Each Cylinder
Added Mass
The components, relative to buoy axes, of the added mass force and moment applied to a cylinder are given by:
x Force = PW . (DM . Ax + Can . DM . Arx)
y Force = PW . (DM . Ay + Can . DM . Ary)
z Force = PW . (DM . Az + Caa . DM . Arz)
x Moment = PW . (DIn . Wx + AIn . Wrx)
y Moment = PW . (DIn . Wy + AIn . Wry)
z Moment = PW . (DIa . Wz + AIa . Wrz)
where
PW is the proportion wet for this cylinder
DM is the displaced mass of the cylinder when it is fully submerged
DIn and DIa are the normal and axial moments of inertia of the displaced mass of the cylinder, when fully
submerged
Can and Caa are the normal and axial added mass coefficients
AIn and AIa are the normal and axial added moments of inertia
Ax, Ay, Az are the components, in buoy axes directions, of the local water particle acceleration relative to global
axes
Arx, Ary, Arz are the components, in buoy axes directions, of the local water particle acceleration relative to the
buoy
Wx, Wy, Wz are the components (in buoy axes directions) of the angular acceleration of the local water isobar
relative to global axes
w
179
Wrx, Wry, Wrz are the components (in buoy axes directions) of the angular acceleration of the local water isobar
relative to the buoy.
Notes: In the above equations, the first term is known as the Froude Krylov force (or moment) and the second
term is the added mass force (or moment).
If the added inertia (AIn or AIa) is zero, then the Froude Krylov moment term is omitted for that
direction, so no moment is applied about that direction. This does not apply to the Froude Krylov force
terms - they are still applied even if the added mass coefficient for that direction is zero.
Damping Forces and Moments
The components, relative to buoy axes, of the damping force and moment applied to a cylinder are given by:
x Damping Force = PW . UDFn . Vrx
y Damping Force = PW . UDFn . Vry
z Damping Force = PW . UDFa . Vrz
x Damping Moment = PW . UDMn . Wrx
y Damping Moment = PW . UDMn . Wry
z Damping Moment = PW . UDMa . Wrz
where
PW is the proportion wet for this cylinder
UDFn and UDFa are the Unit Damping Forces for the normal and axial directions, respectively
UDMn and UDMa are the Unit Damping Moments for the normal and axial directions, respectively
Vrx, Vry and Vrz are the components (in local buoy axes directions) of the water velocity relative to the buoy
Wrx, Wry and Wrz are the components (in local buoy axes directions) of the angular velocity of the local water
isobar, relative to the buoy.
Loads specified by RAOs and Matrices
Note: This option is only available for Spar Buoys.
With this option the added mass and damping effects are calculated from the specified wave force and moment RAOs
and added mass and damping matrices. In addition, the buoyancy force is calculated using the mean water level, rather
than the instantaneous water surface. This excludes the waverelated buoyancy effects, since these are assumed to be
accounted for in the loads specified by the RAOs.
Warning: The drag force is also calculated using the mean water level, although (non-linear) drag can't be
completely accounted for in (linear) RAOs.
The RAOs are used to calculate force and moment vectors that are proportional to the amplitude of the wave
component. They are applied at the instantaneous position of the RAO, Added Mass and Damping Origin, but are
specified relative to a frame of reference that has x horizontal in the wave direction, y horizontal and normal to the wave
direction, and z vertically upwards. The surge RAO therefore specifies a force that acts at the RAO, Added Mass and
Damping Origin in the wave direction, the heave RAO specifies a vertical force, and the pitch RAO specifies a moment
acting about the horizontal line normal to the wave direction.
The added mass and damping matrices are also applied at the RAO, Added Mass and Damping Origin. And they are
applied in the buoy axes directions i.e. the surge added mass is applied in the buoy local xdirection, etc.
The added mass matrix is simply added into the buoy's inertia (also known as the virtual mass matrix).
The damping load is calculated using the following matrix equation:
[Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz]
T
= D [vx,vy,vz,x,y,z]
T

where
w

180
Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My and Mz are the components, with respect to local axes, of the resulting damping force and
moment.
D is the damping matrix.
vx, vy, and vz are the components, with respect to local axes, of the buoy velocity at the RAO, Added Mass and
Damping Origin, relative to the current.
x, y and z are the components, with respect to local axes, of the buoy angular velocity, relative to the
current. Since the current has no angular velocity this is the same as the buoy angular velocity relative to the
earth.
Note: The fluid velocity due to waves is excluded here since the damping effects due to waves are assumed to
be included in the RAOs.
6.12.4 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Drag
The second order hydrodynamic loads on Spar Buoys and Towed Fish are calculated and applied separately for each
cylinder. The loads on each cylinder are calculated as follows. The proportion wet PW, referred to below, is calculated
for each cylinder according to its level of immersion.
Drag Forces
The drag forces are calculated using the "crossflow" assumption. In the local x and y directions, i.e. normal to the
cylinder axis, the drag forces are given by:
x Drag Force = PW . . . Cdn . An . Vrx . |Vrxy|
y Drag Force = PW . . . Cdn . An . Vry . |Vrxy|
where
An is the drag area for the normal direction
Cdn is the drag coefficient for the normal direction
Vrx and Vry are the x and ydirection components of the water velocity relative to the buoy
|Vrxy| is the absolute magnitude of the relative velocity in the xy plane.
And in the z direction, i.e. parallel to the cylinder axis, the drag force is given by:
z Drag Force = PW . . . Cda . Aa . Vrz . |Vrz|
where
Aa is the drag area for the axial direction
Cda is the drag coefficient for the axial direction
Vrz is the z direction component of the water velocity relative to the buoy
|Vrz| is its absolute magnitude.
Drag Moments
Drag moments are also calculated using the crossflow assumption.
About the local x and y directions the drag moments are given by:
x Moment = PW . . . Cdn . An . Wrx . |Wrxy|
y Moment = PW . . . Cdn . An . Wry . |Wrxy|
where
An is the drag area moment for the normal direction.
Cdn is the drag moment coefficient for the normal direction
Wrx and Wry are the x and y components of the angular velocity of the local water isobar relative to the buoy
w
181
|Wrxy| is the absolute magnitude of the component in the xy plane of the angular velocity of the local water
isobar relative to the buoy.
And about the local z direction the drag moment is given by:
z Moment = PW . . . Cda . Aa . Wrz . |Wrz|
where
Aa is the drag area moment for the axial direction.
Cda is the drag moment coefficient specified for the axial direction
Wrz is the z component of the angular velocity of the local water isobar relative to the buoy
|Wrz| is its absolute magnitude.
Drag Area Moments
The drag area moments in the above equations are the rectified 3rd moments of drag area about the axis of rotation. So
drag area moment = Sum(A.|r|
3
) where A is an element of drag area at an (absolute) distance |r| from the axis of
rotation. The modulus |r| arises from the drag term in Morison's equation. The area moment should have dimensions L
5
.
Note that the axial Area Moment is about the cylinder axis, and the normal Area Moment is about the normal to that axis
through the cylinder centre.
We have derived the following results for simple bodies:
For a rectangle of length L and width W, the 3rd moment of area about the line in the plane of the rectangle and
through its centre in the length direction is (L.W
4
) / 32. And the 3rd moment of area about the line in the plane of
the rectangle and through its centre in the width direction is (W.L
4
) / 32.
For a circular disc of diameter D, the 3rd moment of area about a line in the plane of the disc and through its centre
= (D
5
) / 60.
We can use the two results above to calculate reasonable Drag Area Moment values to use for a cylinder in a spar
buoy. Let L be the length of the cylinder and D be the diameter, and first consider the Area Moment for the Normal
direction, i.e. about a line through the cylinder centre and normal to the cylinder axis. If the curved surface of the
cylinder is exposed to drag then we can account for its contribution to the Area Moment by using its projection onto
the plane made by the line and the cylinder axis. This projected area is a rectangle of length L and width D and the
line crosses it in the width direction, so the contribution to the Area Moment is (D.L
4
) / 32. If either of the end discs
of the cylinder are also exposed to drag then we also need to account for their contribution to the Area Moment.
Calculation of Sea Angular Velocity
In order to calculate the relative angular velocity, OrcaFlex has to determine a local angular velocity for the water. This
is not defined by standard wave theory, so OrcaFlex uses the angular velocity of the local isobar (at the surface this is
the angular velocity of the water surface). The resulting drag moments due to waves are approximately correct for a
buoy with large horizontal extension e.g. a discus shape.
For a long vertical SPAR buoy, the calculated pitch/roll drag area moment is actually in the wrong direction. Instead the
buoy should be divided into several cylinders and the required moments are generated by distributing the
hydrodynamic loading between them. The drag area moments for the individual cylinders should be set to zero.
For an object which has significant dimensions both vertically and horizontally, the drag area moments are a mix of
roughly correct and incorrect parts. The problem relates only to drag moments due to waves moments resulting from
body angular velocity in still water are correctly calculated.
Munk Moment
Slender bodies in nearaxial flow experience a destabilising moment called the Munk moment. This emerges from
potential flow and is distinct from (and additional to) any moments associated with viscous drag. It is only well defined
for a fully submerged body.
Newman (1977, page 341) derives the term and points out that it "acts on a nonlifting body in steady translation".
Thwaites (1960, pages 399401) gives an alternative derivation and provides numerical values for spheroids.
w

182
Note that for bluff bodies the flow tends to separate over the afterbody. This has the effect of reducing the Munk
moment to a value less than the potential flow theory would suggest. See Mueller (1968).
The Munk moment effect can be modelled in OrcaFlex by specifying a nonzero Munk moment coefficient for a Spar
Buoy or Towed Fish. OrcaFlex then applies a Munk moment given by:
Munk Moment = Cmm . M . . sin(2) . V
2

where
Cmm is the Munk moment coefficient
M is the mass of water currently displaced. If the buoy is surfacepiercing then this allows for the proportion of
the buoy that is in the fluid. However, note that the value of Cmm is ill defined for a partially submerged body.
Moreover, the true effects of breaking surface, for instance planing and slamming, are much more complex than
this and are not modelled.
V is the flow velocity relative to the buoy, at the point on the stack axis that is half way between the ends of the
stack.
is the angle between the relative flow velocity V and the buoy axis.
The moment is applied about the line that is normal to the plane of the buoy axis and the relative flow vector, in the
direction that tries to increase the angle .
6.12.5 Contact Forces
Contact Forces from Interaction with Shapes
Interactions with shapes and the seabed are calculated as if the buoy consists of a series of lumps, one at each vertex.
Notes: For a lumped buoy you can specify the number and location of the vertices. If you specify no vertices
then the 6D Buoy will not react to contact with the seabed or with any solids.
For a spar buoy or towed fish, the vertices used are the vertices which are automatically created for the
Draw square cylinders drawing option. These vertices are used even if the Draw circular cylinders
option is selected.
Whenever a vertex penetrates a shape, it then experiences a reaction force from the shape given by
Reaction = KAvd
where K is the Stiffness of the Solid, Av is the contact area (see below) associated with each vertex and d is the depth of
penetration of the vertex into the solid.
Because the vertices are (in general) offset from the buoy origin, this reaction force gives a reaction moment about the
buoy origin.
A damping force is also included see Shapes Theory for details.
Contact area
The total contact area, At, is specified on the buoy data form. The contact area for each vertex, Av, is calculated by
dividing At equally amongst all vertices. If At is set to zero then the buoy experiences no contact forces. If At is set to '~'
then OrcaFlex calculates At using default values based on the buoy geometry as described below.
Lumped Buoy default total contact area
For a Lumped Buoy the default total contact area is given by:
At = Volume / Height
where Volume and Height are as specified on the buoy data form.
Spar Buoy and Towed Fish default total contact area
For Spar Buoys and Towed Fish the default total contact area is given by:
w
183
At = max(Aaxial, Alateral)
where
Aaxial is the maximum cylinder crosssectional area.
Alateral is the sum, over all cylinders, of the projected lateral area = cylinder diameter cylinder length.
Contact Forces from Interaction with Seabed
Interaction with the seabed is treated in exactly the same way as with shapes. The seabed reacts to penetration by the
vertices of the buoy and applies a reaction force at the vertex, giving a moment about the buoy origin. See Seabed
Theory for details.
6.13 3D BUOY THEORY
The effects included for a 3D Buoy are weight, buoyancy, drag, added mass and reactions from shapes. All of the fluid
related effects are calculated allowing for what proportion of the buoy is currently immersed in the sea. This is done by
calculating a proportion wet, PW, and then scaling all of the fluid related forces by this proportion. In the following
equations, the water density is denoted by .
The forces applied are as follows.
Weight and Buoyancy
Weight = Mass . g vertically downwards
Buoyancy = . g . PW . Volume vertically upwards.
Drag
Drag forces are calculated separately for each of the global X, Y and Z directions. For the X direction (and similarly for
the Y and Z directions) the drag force applied is
Drag Force = PW . . . CdX . AX . VrX . |Vr|
where
CdX and AX are the Drag Coefficient and Drag Area, respectively, for the X direction
Vr is the velocity vector of the fluid relative to the buoy and |Vr| is its absolute magnitude
VrX is the component of Vr in the X direction.
Fluid Inertia Effects
Fluid acceleration force = (1+Ca) . . PW . Volume . A
in each of the global axes directions, where
Ca is the Added Mass Coefficient for that direction
A is the acceleration of the fluid in that direction.
This force is often considered as being made up of two parts:
1. The FroudeKrylov force = . PW . Volume . A
2. The added inertia force = Ca . . PW . Volume . A.
In addition, the inertia of the buoy in each of the global axes directions is increased by:
Added mass = . Ca . PW . Volume
where
Ca is the Added Mass Coefficient for that direction.
Theory, Winch Theory
w

184
Contact Forces
Finally, 3D Buoys are also subjected to a reaction force from the seabed and any elastic solid with which they come into
contact, given by:
Reaction = KAd
where
K is the Stiffness of the seabed or elastic solid
A is the contact area
d is the depth of penetration of the buoy origin B.
In addition to this reaction force, 3D Buoys receive a contact damping force. For details see Seabed Theory and Solids
Theory.
6.14 WINCH THEORY
Static Analysis
If the Statics winch control mode is set to Specified Length then for the static analysis the unstretched length of wire
paid out, L0, is set to the Value specified, the wire tension t is then set to:
t = (LL0) . (Wire Stiffness)/L0 ................ (1)
where
L is the total length of the winch wire path,
Wire Stiffness is specified in the data,
the winch drive force f is set to equal t.
Alternatively, if the Statics winch control mode is set to Specified Tension then for the static analysis the winch drive
force f and the wire tension t are both set to the given Value, and the unstretched length paid out, L0, is then set to match
this wire tension according to equation (1) above.
Dynamic Analysis
If Specified Payout is specified (length control mode) for a stage of the simulation, then the unstretched length of winch
wire paid out, L0, is steadily increased or decreased during that stage so that the total change during the stage is the
Value specified. Positive Value means pay out, negative Value means haul in.
The winch wire tension t (which is applied to each point on the wire) is then given by
t = [(LL0) + (Wire Damping).(dL/dt dL0/dt)]. (Wire Stiffness) / L0 ................ (2)
where
L is the total length of the winch wire path
Wire Damping and Wire Stiffness are as specified in the data.
Note: The winch wire is not allowed to go into compression, so if the value for t given by equation (2) is
negative then the winch wire is considered to have gone slack and t is set to zero.
If Specified Tension mode is specified for a stage of the simulation, the Value specified in the data is used as a target
nominal constant tension that the winch drive attempts to achieve.
For Simple winches the winch drive is always assumed to achieve the target tension, so the Value specified is used for
the actual winch wire tension.
For Detailed winches the winch drive tries to achieve the target tension by applying a drive force to one side of the
winch Inertia, opposing the wire tension being applied to the other side. The drive force f applied is then given by:
if dL0/dt < 0: f(V) = f(0) Deadband + A.V C.V
2

w
Theory, Winch Theory
185
if dL0/dt = 0: f(V) = f(0)
if dL0/dt > 0: f(V) = f(0) + Deadband + B.V + D.V
2
................ (3)
where
V = rate of payout = dL0/dt
Deadband = the winch drive deadband data item
A, B = the winch drive damping term data items
C, D = the winch drive drag term data items.
f(0) = Value + Stiffness.(L0 L00)
Value = the nominal constant tension Value given
Stiffness = the winch drive stiffness data item
L00 = original value of L0 at the start of the simulation (set by the static analysis)
Drive Force f
Payout Speed V
(-ve = hauling in)
Deadband
Deadband
0
f(V) = f(0) - Deadband
+ A.V - C.V
2
f(V) = f(0) + Deadband
+ B.V + D.V
2
f(0) = Nominal Tension
+ Stiffness

(Payout since
simulation started)

Figure: Force Control Mode for Detailed Winches
If the winch Inertia M is nonzero, then the winch wire tension is set as in equation (2) above and the winch inertia
reacts by paying out or hauling in wire according to Newton's law:
M.d
2
(L0)/dt
2
= t f
so the wire tension therefore tends towards the winch drive force and is hence controlled by the given Value.
If the winch inertia is set to zero, then the winch is assumed to be instantly responsive so that
f = t at all times ................ (4)
Given the current value of L0, the common value of f and t is then found by solving the simultaneous equations (2), (3)
and (4) for the payout rate dL0/dt. The unstretched length of winch wire out, L0, is then altered at the calculated rate
dL0/dt as the stage progresses.
Note: If the winch inertia is set to zero then at least one of the damping and drag terms A, B, C, D should be
non-zero, since otherwise the simultaneous equations (2), (3) and (4) may have no solution. A warning
is given if this is attempted.
Theory, Shape Theory
w

186
6.15 SHAPE THEORY
Elastic Solids
The reaction force on an object penetrating an elastic solid is in the direction of the outward normal of the nearest
surface of the shape with magnitude equal to K.A.d where
K = stiffness of the material,
A = contact area,
d = depth of penetration.
Also there is a damping force D, in the same direction, given by:
D = 2(M.K.A).Vin
where
is percentage of critical damping / 100,
M is the mass of the object,
Vin is the normal component of object velocity.
The damping force is only applied when the object is travelling into the shape (i.e. when Vin is positive).
For details of the way the contact area is calculated, see: Line Interaction with Seabed and Solids, 3D Buoy Theory and
6D Buoy Theory.
Care is needed when using elastic solids some of the issues involved are listed below:
Elastic solids are only taken into account in the static analysis for those lines with the Full Statics calculation.
Elastic solids are intended only for modelling the overall limitation on movement that a physical barrier presents;
they are not intended to model an object's interaction with the barrier in detail. For example no friction forces are
included and the calculation of the contact area and penetration depth are very simplistic and do not allow for the
detailed geometric shape of the object. The value given for Stiffness is therefore not normally important, providing
it is high enough to keep penetration small. On the other hand, although the actual stiffness of real barriers is
usually very high, the Stiffness should not be set too high since this can introduce very short natural periods which
in turn require very short simulation time steps.
Friction is not calculated for elastic solids in the current version, so you must check that a physically realisable
configuration is modelled.
Lines only interact with elastic solids by their nodes coming into contact, so elastic solids that are smaller than the
segment length can "slip" between adjacent nodes. The segment length in a line should be therefore be small
compared with the dimensions of any elastic solid with which the line may make contact.
Where elastic solids intersect with each other, it is sometimes necessary to "overlap" them. If the overlap is zero or
small, a line may slip along the interface.
Trapped Water
Inside a trapped water shape the fluid motion is modified as follows:
The fluid translational velocity and acceleration are calculated on the assumption that the trapped water moves and
rotates with the shape. So if the trapped water shape is Fixed or Anchored then no fluid motion occurs inside the
shape. But if the shape is connected to a moving vessel, for example, then the trapped water is assumed to move and
rotate with the vessel.
The fluid angular velocity and acceleration of the local water isobar are both taken to be zero. (These angular
motions are only used for calculating moments on 6D buoys.)
w
Theory, Shape Theory
187
Notes: If the shape intersects the water surface then the surface is assumed to pass through the shape
unaltered. Thus a wave in the open sea also appears inside the shape. We make this assumption
because of the difficulty in predicting, for realistic cases, how the surface will behave inside the trapped
water volume.
For example, a moonpool with an open connection at the bottom will suppress most of the wave and
current action. However there will be some flow in and out of the moonpool, depending on the size of
the opening to the sea, pressure difference effects and the local geometry. The surface elevation in the
moonpool therefore does respond to the wave outside, but it is attenuated to some extent and lags
behind the surface outside.
w
System Modelling Data and Results, Modelling Introduction
189
7 SYSTEM MODELLING - DATA AND RESULTS
7.1 MODELLING INTRODUCTION
To analyse a marine system using OrcaFlex, you must first build a mathematical model of the realworld system, using
the various modelling facilities provided by OrcaFlex. The model consists of the marine environment to which the
system is subjected, plus a variable number of objects chosen by the user, placed in the environment and connected
together as required. The objects represent the structures being analysed and the environment determines the current,
wave excitation, etc. to which the objects are subjected.
The following types of objects are available in OrcaFlex. (Detailed descriptions of each type of object are given later.)
Vessels
are used to model ships, floating platforms, barges etc. They are rigid bodies whose motions are prescribed by
the user. The motion can be specified in a number of ways: directly by a time history motion data file or
specifying Response Amplitude Operators (RAOs) for each of 6 degrees of freedom (surge, sway, heave, roll,
pitch and yaw), or indirectly by giving first order wave load RAOs or second order wave drift QTFs; or a
combination of the two. They can also be driven around the sea surface, at user specified velocities and headings,
during the course of the simulation.
3D Buoys
are simple point bodies with just 3 degrees of freedom the translational degrees of freedom (X,Y and Z). Unlike
a vessel, whose response to waves is defined by the data, the motion of a buoy is calculated by OrcaFlex. 3D
buoys are not allowed to rotate and are intended only for modelling objects that are small enough for rotations
to be unimportant.
6D Buoys
are much more sophisticated than 3D buoys they are rigid bodies with the full 6 degrees of freedom. That is,
OrcaFlex calculates both their translational and rotational motion. Several different types of 6D Buoy are
available, for modelling different sorts of marine object.
Note: Although called buoys, 3D and 6D buoys do not need to be buoyant and so can readily be used to model
any rigid body whose motion you want OrcaFlex to calculate.
Lines
are catenary elements used to represent pipes, flexible hoses, cables, mooring lines, etc. Line properties may
vary along the length, for example to allow a buoyant section to be represented. Line ends may be fixed or free,
or attached to other objects such as Vessels or Buoys, and ends can be disconnected in the course of a simulation.
Each line can also have a number of attachments. These are elements attached to lines at userspecified
locations, and provide a convenient way of modelling items such as floats, clump weights, or drag chains.
Links
are massless connections linking two other objects in the model. Two types are available: Tethers are simple
elastic ties, Spring / Dampers are combined (linear or nonlinear) spring + damper units.
Winches
are also massless connections linking two (or more) objects in the model. The connection is by a winch wire,
which is fed from and controlled by a winch drive mounted on the first object. The winch drive can be operated
in either constant speed mode, in which it pays out or hauls in the winch wire at a userspecified rate, or else in
constant tension mode, in which it applies a userspecified tension to the winch wire.
Shapes
are geometric shapes and two types are available Solids or Trapped Water. Trapped Water Shapes can be used
to model parts of the sea, such as moonpools, that are shielded from the waves. Solids can be used to act as
physical barriers to restrict the movement of the other objects in the system; they are made of an elastic material
System Modelling Data and Results, Data in Time History Files
w

190
and so apply a reaction force to any object that penetrates them. However, by specifying zero stiffness, you can
also use a solid purely for drawing purposes, for example to see on the 3D view the position of a piece of
equipment.
Several different elementary shapes (cuboids, planes and cylinders) are available and a number of shapes may
be placed together to build up more complex compound shapes. They may be fixed or attached to other objects
such as Vessels or Buoys.
Of these various object types, the lines, links and winches have the special property that they can be used to connect
together other objects. Assembling the model therefore consists of creating objects and then using the lines, links and
winches to connect the other objects together, as required. See Object Connections for details.
The number of objects in the model is only limited by the memory and other resources available on the computer being
used. Similarly, there are no builtin limits to the number of lines, links or winches that are attached to an object. As a
result very complex systems can be modelled, though of course the more complex the model the longer the analysis
takes. Example files are provided with OrcaFlex.
Computer programs cannot exactly represent every aspect of a realworld system the data and computation required
would be too great. So when building the model you must decide which are the important features of the system being
analysed, and then set up a model that includes those features. The first model of a system might be quite simple, only
including the most important aspects, so that early results and understanding can be gained quickly. Later, the model
can be extended to include more features of the system, thereby giving more accurate predictions of its behaviour,
though at the cost of increased analysis time.
Once the model has been built, OrcaFlex offers three types of analysis:
Modal Analysis
is only available for lines. It calculates and reports the undamped natural modes of a line.
Static analysis
in which OrcaFlex calculates the static equilibrium position of the model; current drag loads can be included but
not waves.
Dynamic analysis
in which OrcaFlex carries out a time simulation of the response of the system to waves, current and a range of
userdefined inputs.
7.2 DATA IN TIME HISTORY FILES
For certain data you can use time history files to specify timevarying values. This is available for wave elevation, wind
speed and vessel motion, and it allows you full control over how the variable changes with time.
If you want to specify timevarying data for more than one object (e.g. for both the wave and wind, or for the wave and a
vessel) then you can either put all the data in one file (using multiple columns in a single table) or you can use separate
time history files for the different objects.
To use a time history file you must specify the following information.
Input File
This is the name of the Time History input file that contains the data. The file name can either be typed in or else set by
using the Browse button. If you type it in you can either specify the full path or a relative path.
Columns
You must tell OrcaFlex which columns in the time history file contain the relevant data. To allow you to do this OrcaFlex
provides an Import Wizard that displays the time history data in a spreadsheet window that has list boxes at the top of
each column. The list boxes allow you to specify what data is in each column, or alternatively that a column is not used
(i.e. contains data that is not relevant). The import wizard is automatically opened when you select a new time history
file; or you can open it yourself by clicking the button provided.
w
System Modelling Data and Results, Variable Data
191
Time Origin
The time origin data item gives you control of how the times given in the time history file relate to the times in OrcaFlex.
The time origin is specified relative to the OrcaFlex global time origin, so it specifies the global time that corresponds to
zero time in the time history file. The simulation time origin is also specified relative to global time, so you can simulate
different periods of the time history by adjusting either the time history origin or the simulation time origin.
So, for example, if the time history file's time origin is set to 100s and the simulation time origin is set to 400s, then a
simulation consisting of 40s of buildup (i.e. simulation time 40 to 0) followed by 200s of simulation (simulation time 0
to 200) will cover time history time from 260s to 500s. Note that the time history file must contain data to cover the
whole of the simulation.
Note: If you are using more than one time history file (e.g. one for a wave train and one for motion of a
vessel) then they each have their own time origins, which you can use to time shift each time history
independently of the others.
Time History File Format
Time History files must conform to the following formatting rules:
The file must be a tabdelimited text file; in other words it must be a text file in which the time history data columns
are separated by single tab characters. Files of this format can easily be produced with commercial spreadsheet
programs by using "Save As" and selecting tabdelimited text format.
The data values must be in standard decimal or scientific form.
One column must contain the time values and these must be given in ascending order.
The data must be given in the same units as used in the OrcaFlex model.
For a wave time history the time values must be equally spaced (since a fast Fourier transform is used). But for
wind velocity or vessel motion time history files variable time intervals can be used (since cubic spline interpolation
is used).
The data is assumed to start at the first numeric entry in the time column and blank rows are not allowed once the data
has started. This means that textual information about the file (titles etc.) can precede the data but once the data begins
it cannot be interrupted with any more text.
Note: If you generate your time history text file from a spreadsheet program such as Excel, please note that
the number of significant figures in the text file will depend on the number format of the cells in the
spreadsheet. Before saving the text file, it is therefore important to set the number format to one that
displays all the significant figures, since otherwise the time history text file will lose some significant
figures. In Excel you can get all significant figures by selecting all the cells and then using the Format
Cells command (on the Format menu) to set the number format to scientific with 15 decimal places.
7.3 VARIABLE DATA
Most OrcaFlex data is constant i.e. its value, y say, is a fixed specified value. But for some numerical data items you can
choose to instead specify variable data. Typically the data item's value y is then specified as being a function of some
other value x, and the actual value y(x) used by OrcaFlex then depends on the value of x at the time. If x varies during the
simulation then y varies accordingly.
As an example consider the drag coefficient of a line. In the real world this isn't a fixed constant value it depends on the
Reynolds number. For many applications this variation is not significant so a fixed constant drag coefficient is sufficient.
But sometimes the Reynolds number variation is important, so you can then specify the drag coefficient to be a function
of Reynolds number. Then, each time the drag coefficient is needed OrcaFlex will first calculate the Reynolds number
(the x in the above description) and then derive and use the corresponding drag coefficient y(x).
Note that some data items use variable data in a slightly different way. For example the axial stiffness of a line type is the
slope of the tensionstrain curve, so in this case constant data specifies dy/dx, rather than y, where y is tension and x is
axial strain. In this context constant means constant slope, i.e. linear, and the constant value you specify is dy/dx,
w

192
whereas variable means nonlinear and you specify y as a function of x. Cases like this are documented in the
description of each data item.
Using Variable Data
Variable data can only be used for certain data items. These are the numerical data items that have a small downarrow
button to the right of the data item value. For these you can either specify a fixed constant numerical value in the usual
way. Or you can specify the name of a variable data source, either by typing the name in or by selecting it using the
downarrow button. The named data source must already have been defined see the next section.
Different data items can use the same variable data source much in the same way that different sections of a Line can
use the same Line Type.
Setting up Variable Data Sources
All the variable data sources are specified on the Variable Data form. This form can be opened using the model browser
or using the popup menu on any data form.
Each table on the Variable Data form is given a name and the tables are grouped according to the type of data they
contain. For example data for drag coefficients is kept separate from data for axial stiffness.
This structure is indicated by the layout of the form, which is designed to be used from left to right. So first select the
type of data you want, using the tree view in the left hand section of the form.
The centre section of the form then shows how many data sources have already been defined for that selected type of
data, and their names. To add a new table, increment the Number of Data Sources. To edit the name of a data source
double click the name or select the name and then press F2. To delete a data source select it and press the DELETE key.
The right hand section of the form is where the data for the data source is entered. What form these data take varies.
The different possibilities are described below.
Tabular Data Sources
These data sources are specified by giving a table of corresponding values (x1,y1), (x2,y2), .., (xn,yn), where the table's left
hand column is the independent variable x and its right hand column is the dependent variable y. The data will be
automatically sorted into order of increasing x when the data is used or when you use the Profile button.
This table defines a function y(x). For intermediate values of x OrcaFlex interpolates. For values of x outside the range
specified OrcaFlex either extrapolates or else truncates. Truncation means that OrcaFlex uses y1 for all x <= x1 and yn for
all x >= xn (the table already having been sorted so that x1 is the lowest xvalue specified and xn is the highest). The
variable data form reports the method of interpolation and whether extrapolation or truncation is used.
The Profile button displays a graph of the currently selected data. This is useful for data checking purposes. Where
appropriate, log scales are used.
Horizontal Variation Factor Data Sources
These data sources specify a variation along a userprescribed axis. This axis is defined by the X,Y coordinates of an
origin and an azimuth direction. Together with the axis you also specify a table of values defining the horizontal
variation factor as a function of distance along the axis. This table is specified in the same way as for tabular data
sources.
7.3.1 External Functions
External Function Data Sources are yet another variety of variable data source. These data sources allow data to be
specified by a userdefined function provided in an external DLL. This function is called repeatedly during the OrcaFlex
simulation and is passed the current value of the variable data item. The function must then recalculate and update the
value of the variable data item.
The following data items are required to specify an external function data source:
w
193
DLL Name
The file name of the DLL containing the external function. If the full path to the DLL is not specified then the standard
Windows conventions are used when searching for the file. Full details of these conventions are given in the
documentation of the LoadLibrary Windows API function.
Note: When LoadLibrary is called the current directory is set to be the directory containing the latest file
(.dat or .sim) that you have opened or saved. If there is no such file (because it is a new model which
has not yet been saved) then the current directory is set to be the current directory when the program
started.
Function Name
The name of the external function exported by the external DLL. For details on how to implement external functions
please refer to the OrcaFlex programming interface documentation.
Initial Value
When OrcaFlex calls the external function for the first time it passes this value to the function. The function can use this
value as its starting value if it so chooses. Alternatively it can ignore this value and substitute a different value.
Note: This value is used by OrcaFlex when drawing the model in Reset state.
Time Step
This specifies how frequently the external function is called to update the value of the variable data item. You can use
either the inner time step, the outer time step or a userspecified time step. If you choose a userspecified time step then
you input a target time step and the program uses the nearest whole multiple of the inner time step.
External Function Parameters
The external function facility provides a general purpose method of passing parameters to external functions.
For an example of why this is desirable consider an external function which implements a PID controller used to model
the active control system for a heave compensating winch. A PID controller has a number of parameters and these could
be hard coded into the external function.
However, in OrcaFlex you may want to experiment by varying these parameters to see how they affect a simulation. If
the parameters are hard coded then the external function DLL will have to be recompiled each time you experiment by
changing the parameters.
Instead OrcaFlex allows you to specify parameters for the external function as part of the OrcaFlex data. These
parameters are passed to the external function. The parameters are specified as a free form multiline text field. This
means that the external function has to do some work to decode and interpret the text before it can access the
parameters. However, this also means that there is a great deal of flexibility in the parameter passing mechanism.
Whenever an OrcaFlex object (e.g. a Winch, a 6D Buoy, a Vessel, the Environment etc.) uses an external function then a
page titled External Functions is available on that object's data form. The external function parameters are specified in
the text field contained in this page.
The external function parameters are passed to the external function in the lpObjectParameters member of the
TExternalFunctionInfo data structure. For more details please refer to the OrcaFlex programming interface
documentation.
The External Function Examples illustrate the procedure involved in passing parameters to external functions.
Data which can be controlled by External Functions
The following data items can be controlled by External Functions:
Vessel and 6D Buoy applied loads.
Wing orientation angles.
Winch tension and winch payout rate.
System Modelling Data and Results, General Data
w

194
Current reference speed and reference direction.
Bend stiffness for Line Types.
External Function Examples
A selection of example external functions are supplied on the OrcaFlex CD. Alternatively these example functions can be
downloaded from our website at www.orcina.com/Support.
7.4 GENERAL DATA
The General Data form gives data that applies to the whole model.
Comments
A free form multiline text field that can be used to store notes about the model. OrcaFlex does not use this text.
Units Data
This may be SI, US or User Defined (multiple choice). Units are defined for length, mass, force, time and temperature.
Selecting SI gives length in metres, mass in tonnes, force in kN, time in seconds and temperature in Celsius. Selecting US
gives length in feet, mass in kips, force in kips, time in seconds and temperature in Fahrenheit.
If neither of these systems meets your requirements then select User Defined. You may then select individually from
the length, mass, force, time and temperature units on offer and in addition you can specify the value of g (gravitational
acceleration).
If the units are changed, then OrcaFlex converts all the data in the model into the new units.
7.4.1 Statics
Statics Method
OrcaFlex includes two system statics methods: Whole System statics and Separate Buoy and Line statics. They are
functionally equivalent but you will likely find cases which converge with either one of the methods but not the other.
We recommend that you use the default method of Whole System statics because it is, in general, much faster and more
robust than Separate Buoy and Line statics.
Whole System statics solves the entire system in a single integrated iterative method. The program calculates the
system Jacobian matrix analytically. Conceptually this method is identical to the Full Statics method for Lines, except
that it operates on all objects in the model.
Separate Buoy and Line statics is a hybrid statics method comprising an outer and an inner loop. The inner statics
loop solves statics for all Lines in the model, and the outer statics loop solves statics for Buoys and Vessels. While this
method works reasonably well in many cases, it can perform poorly for cases containing large numbers of Buoys and/or
Vessels. This hybrid method uses a perturbation technique to calculate the system Jacobian matrix which is both slower
and less accurate than calculating it analytically.
Note: Whole system statics cannot yet be used with models that use externally calculated bend moments. This
limitation will be removed in a future release of OrcaFlex.
Buoy Degrees of Freedom Included in Static Analysis
Buoys can either be included or excluded from the static analysis. When a buoy is included OrcaFlex calculates the static
equilibrium position of the buoy; when it is excluded OrcaFlex simply places the buoy at the position specified by the
user.
Which buoys are included in the static analysis is determined by the data item "Buoy Degrees of Freedom Included in
Static Analysis" on the General Data form, together with individual settings on each buoy's data form, as described
below:
A value of None means that OrcaFlex does not find the true static equilibrium position of the buoys in the model,
but instead simply places the buoys at the initial starting position specified in the data.
w
195
A value of X, Y, Z includes all buoys in the static calculation, but excludes rotational degrees of freedom for 6D
Buoys.
A value of Individually Specified allows you to specify individually on each buoy data form, whether that buoy
should be included in the static equilibrium calculation. For 6D Buoys you can also choose whether the rotational
degrees of freedom are included or excluded.
This data item should normally be set to All, in which case the static analysis will attempt to find the static
equilibrium position of all the buoys in the model, as well as finding the static equilibrium position of the other
objects.
There are several cases where this data item should be set to None. The first is if you are not using Catenary Statics or
Full Statics for any lines in the model (see Static Analysis). In this case, the line is not in true static equilibrium and so
OrcaFlex cannot find the static equilibrium position of any buoy to which such lines are attached. If any such lines exist
then all the buoys must be excluded from the static analysis by setting this data item to None.
The second case where this item may need to be set to None is if the model is statically indeterminate, for example a free
floating buoy, or if the static analysis fails to converge. The static analysis is an iterative calculation and for some
complex systems this calculation may fail to converge, especially if the initial estimated position given in the data is far
from being an equilibrium position. If this happens you can exclude some or all buoys (or, for 6D buoys, just the
rotational degrees of freedom) from the static analysis; this simplifies the static analysis and should enable convergence.
Although the simulation then starts from a nonequilibrium position, it does allow the simulation to proceed and the
initial nonequilibrium errors will normally be dissipated during the buildup stage of the simulation, provided a
reasonable length buildup stage is specified. In fact the simulation can then often be used to find the true static
equilibrium position, by running a simulation with no waves; once it is found, the true static equilibrium positions of the
buoys can then be input as their starting positions for subsequent runs.
Finally, you may specifically want the simulation to start from a nonequilibrium position. One example of this is to use
the simulation to determine the damping properties of the system, by running a simulation with no waves and starting
from a nonequilibrium position.
Starting Velocity
Specifies the velocity of the whole model for the static analysis and for the start of the simulation. It is defined by giving
the speed (i.e. magnitude) and direction.
Normally the starting speed is zero. If a nonzero speed is specified (e.g. for modelling a towed system) then the static
analysis becomes a steady state analysis that finds the steady state equilibrium position in which the whole model is
moving with the specified velocity. The static position is therefore then referred to as a steady state position, and the
calculation of this position allows for any drag loads due to differences between the starting velocity and the current
velocity.
Note: The model will start the simulation from the calculated steady state; i.e. with the specified starting
velocity. So you should normally ensure that each vessel in the model has its prescribed motion for
stage 0 (the build up stage) set to match the specified starting velocity. Otherwise the simulation will
start with a sudden change in vessel velocity, which will cause a "kick" which may take some time to
settle down.
Statics Convergence Parameters
When buoys or vessels are included in the static analysis, their equilibrium positions are calculated using an iterative
algorithm that is controlled by the convergence parameters on the General data form. They do not normally need to be
altered. However if the static calculation fails to converge it is sometimes possible to improve the behaviour by
adjusting the convergence parameters.
Max Iterations
The calculation is abandoned if convergence has not been achieved after this number of steps. For some difficult cases
simply increasing this limit may be enough.
w

196
Tolerance
This controls the accuracy of the solution. See 3D Buoy statics accuracies, 6D Buoy statics accuracies and Vessel statics
accuracies.
Min Damping, Max Damping
For some cases it is necessary to control the convergence process by damping down (i.e. reducing) the step taken at
each stage. The program includes an automatic damping system that chooses a suitable damping factor for each
iteration, but the user can set the minimum damping and maximum damping factors that are used.
Normally the default values will suffice but for difficult cases the default values can be altered. For cases that appear to
make the convergence unstable (e.g. giving very bad line positions on the screen) try increasing the Min Damping
factor to a value greater than 1, say values in the range 1 to 10. You can also try increasing the Max Damping factor, say
to values in the range 10 to 100.
Note: Convergence will be slower with larger damping values so you should use the smallest values that
result in statics converging.
Mag. of Std. Error, Mag. of Std. Change
For some cases it may be necessary to reduce one or both of these values from their defaults. Doing so is likely to slow
down the convergence, but it may be necessary in order to achieve convergence!
7.4.2 Dynamics
Simulation Stages
The simulation proceeds in a Number of Stages each of a given Duration. See Figure: Time and Simulation Stages in
Dynamic Analysis.
Before the first stage is a BuildUp Period during which the sea conditions are slowly ramped up from zero in order to
avoid sudden transients when starting a simulation. Time during the build up stage is reported by the program as
negative, so that the first stage proper starts at time t=0.
When using regular waves, it is usual to define the whole simulation as a single stage and results are presented on a
cyclebycycle basis. In random waves there is no meaningful "wave cycle". By dividing the simulation time into stages
you are free to collect results for specific time periods of interest.
Logging
OrcaFlex stores the results of a simulation by sampling at regular intervals and storing the samples in a temporary log
file. When you save the simulation OrcaFlex writes the data to the simulation file, followed by a copy of the log file, so
that the sampled values can be read back in again at a later date.
You can control the time interval between log samples by setting the Target Sample Interval on the general data form.
The Actual Sample Interval will be the nearest whole multiple of the inner time step. You can obtain more information
about the logging by using the Properties command on the popup menu on the general data form. This reports the
number of log samples that will be taken and the size of the resulting simulation file.
Logging Precision
You can also control the Precision with which samples are logged.
Single precision uses 4 bytes to represent each value and gives about 7 significant figures, which is quite accurate
enough for almost all applications. Double precision uses 8 bytes per value, giving about 16 significant figures but uses
twice as much disk space.
Double precision logging is usually only needed in very particular cases. We therefore recommend that you use single
precision logging unless you see signs of precision problems in the results. The typical signs of precision problems are
that the curvature or bend moment time histories for a line look more like a step function than a smooth curve. If you
see such results then try using doubleprecision logging to see if precision is the cause.
The typical case where precision problems can occur is where the model contains a pipe or riser that has an extremely
high bend stiffness and which experiences large displacements during the simulation. The reason is that OrcaFlex logs
w
197
the positions of each node but in order to save space in the simulation file it does not log the curvature, bend moment
etc. Instead OrcaFlex recalculates results like curvature and bend moment from the node positions whenever you
request these results. When both the bend stiffness and the node displacements are very large then this calculation can
greatly amplify the small steps in node position (8th significant figure) that are present in a single precision log, giving a
bend moment graph that has steps rather than being smooth.
7.4.3 Integration & Time Steps
Integration Method
OrcaFlex implements two complementary integration schemes: Explicit and Implicit. Theoretical details are given in
Dynamic Analysis: Calculation Method.
Explicit Integration
The explicit scheme used by OrcaFlex is forward Euler. Like all explicit schemes this is conditionally stable. In practice
this means that in order to achieve stability the time step must be small compared to the shortest natural nodal period.
By default OrcaFlex will automatically set the time step.
Implicit Integration
For implicit integration OrcaFlex uses the Generalised integration scheme which is unconditionally stable for linear
systems. Constant and variable time step options are available. OrcaFlex provides two results variables (Implicit solver
iteration count and Implicit solver time step) which can be used to track the performance of the implicit integration
scheme.
Limitations of Implicit Integration
Some of OrcaFlex's features have not yet been adapted for the implicit scheme. Because of this implicit integration
cannot yet be used with models that use any of the following features:
Lines that use hysteretic bend stiffness.
Vessels with 3 calculated degrees of freedom. Note that vessels with 6 calculated degrees of freedom can be
modelled.
Vessels which use both primary motion of Calculated (6 DOF) and superimposed motion of Displacement RAOs
+ Harmonic Motion.
Tensioncontrolled detailed winches with nonzero inertia.
External functions.
Time domain VIV models.
Also, note that implicit integration does not (yet) include seabed damping, solid damping or line clash damping. For
cases where the level of such damping might matter you should check implicit integration results against those from
explicit integration to ensure the effect is not significant.
We plan to remove these limitations, where possible, in future releases of OrcaFlex.
Advantages and disadvantages of the two integration schemes
The explicit scheme is extremely robust and flexible. Its main drawback is that the stability requirements can result in
very short time steps and correspondingly long computation times. This tends to be most significant for stiff systems, or
for systems with fine segmentation. For such systems the implicit scheme can be faster, sometimes by orders of
magnitude.
It is essential to consider accuracy as well as computation time. For the explicit scheme, if the simulation is stable then,
in our experience, it is rare for the results to be inaccurate. We recommend that you conduct time step sensitivity
studies to confirm this.
Implicit schemes, on the other hand, can quite easily achieve stability and yet produce inaccurate results. For rapidly
varying physical phenomena (e.g. snatch loads, impact, sudden line on line clashing etc.) results accuracy is more likely
w

198
to be an issue. We recommend that time step sensitivity studies are carried out to ensure accuracy of results.
Comparisons with the explicit scheme are particularly useful for this purpose.
7.4.4 Explicit Integration
InnerTime Step, Outer Time Step
For efficiency of computation, OrcaFlex uses 2 integration time steps in the dynamic simulation: an inner time step and
a larger outer time step. Most calculations during the simulation are done every inner time step, but some parameters
(the more slowlyvarying values such as wave particle motion and most hydrodynamic and aerodynamic forces) are
only recalculated every outer time step. This reduces the calculations needed and so increases the speed of simulation.
The usual effect of setting one of the time steps too large is that the simulation becomes unstable, in the sense that very
large and rapidly increasing oscillations develop, usually very near the start of the simulation. OrcaFlex detects and
reports most such instabilities; the time steps can then be reduced and the simulation retried. However, it is generally
worth repeating important simulations with smaller step sizes to ensure that no significant loss of accuracy has
occurred.
Note: High values of Seabed stiffness may shorten the natural period of parts of the system lying on it. This in
turn leads to shorter inner time steps being required. Beware that the effects of seabed stiffness will not
be accounted for if touchdown does not occur until dynamics are run.
Recommendations for setting time steps
Both time steps must be short enough to give stable and accurate simulation. Experience indicates that the inner step
should not exceed 1/10th to 1/20th of the shortest natural nodal period of motion for any degree of freedom in the
model. The shortest natural nodal period is reported in the Full Results for statics.
The outer step can usually be set to 10 times the inner time step; this gives a good saving in computing time without
risking instability. In addition, the outer time step should generally not be more than 1/40th of the wave period (or
1/40th of the zero crossing period for a wave spectrum). If you are using a Wake Oscillator VIV model then we
recommend that the outer time step is no more than 1/200th of the minimum Wake Oscillator Strouhal Period.
Always use recommended time steps
OrcaFlex helps you set the simulation time steps using the above criteria. There are 2 modes of operation:
If Always use recommended time steps is checked (the default setting) then OrcaFlex will calculate recommended
time steps and use these values directly. This means that any values that you specify will be overwritten.
The main advantage of using this option comes during the design phase. If you make changes to the model's properties
which alter the shortest natural nodal period then OrcaFlex automatically modifies the time steps accordingly. This is
particularly useful when you make a change that allows the use of longer time steps. When not using this option it is all
too easy to forget to lengthen the time steps and suffer unnecessarily long simulation run times.
The other significant benefit of this mode of operation comes when preparing a large number of similar simulations
using batch script methods. Suppose that the different models involved have differing shortest natural nodal periods.
The Always use recommended time steps option allows you to use appropriate time steps for each individual model
without having to set them manually.
Alternatively, if Always use recommended time steps is not checked then OrcaFlex first of all calculates the
recommended time steps. If these are shorter than the values specified on the General Data form then OrcaFlex issues a
warning and gives you the option of using the recommended values. You are free to disregard the warnings if desired,
but if either time step (though especially the inner step size) is set too large there is danger of instability or inaccuracy
in the simulation.
The main situation where this mode of operation is to be preferred is when OrcaFlex recommended time steps are too
long and lead to an unstable simulation. Sometimes the only solution is to set the time steps manually and this option
gives you that flexibility.
w
199
Recommended time step settings
Inner time step (fraction of shortest natural period)
Our experience is that for most cases the inner time step can safely be set to 1/10th of the shortest natural nodal period.
However, for some models you may find you need to use a shorter time step to achieve a stable simulation. By changing
this data item you can control what fraction of the shortest natural nodal period OrcaFlex uses to calculate the
recommended inner time step. The default value is 10, which equates to a recommended inner time step of 1/10th of
the shortest natural nodal period. A value of 20 would give a recommended inner time step of 1/20th of the shortest
natural nodal period, and so on.
Outer time step (multiple of inner time step)
The recommended outer time step will be no greater than this value times the inner time step.
Outer time step (fraction of wave period or Tz)
The recommended outer time step will be no greater than T divided by this value, where T is either the wave period (for
regular waves) or Tz (for random waves).
Outer time step (fraction of Wake Oscillator Strouhal period)
This data item is only available if you are using a Wake Oscillator VIV model. The recommended outer time step will be
no greater than the minimum Wake Oscillator Strouhal Period divided by this value.
7.4.5 Implicit Integration
Implicit Integration Parameters
Use variable time step
For the implicit solver OrcaFlex offers both constant and variable time step algorithms.
The default is to use a constant time step and in general this is to be preferred. Variable time step schemes can introduce
high frequency noise into a system which in turn can lead to inaccurate results, for example noisy time histories, non
physical spikes in results etc. Note that this is a feature of all variable time step algorithms. For the majority of systems
no problems arise when using a variable time step. However, if you are using variable time steps then we do
recommend that you check the quality of your results.
The variable time step algorithm chooses the time step based on the number of iterations used for previous time steps.
If a large number of iterations were required for previous time steps then the time step is reduced. Conversely, if a small
number of iterations were required then the time step is increased. The results variables Implicit solver iteration count
and Implicit solver time step can be used to track the performance of the variable time step algorithm.
Time step / Maximum time step
If you are using a constant time step then this data item determines that time step. OrcaFlex has a default value of 0.1s.
However, different systems will require shorter time steps and indeed some systems can give perfectly accurate
answers with longer time steps. If you wish to optimise run times then you may need to experiment with different time
step values.
If you are using a variable time step then this data item limits the time step used by OrcaFlex and it will never exceed
this value.
Warning: Implicit solvers can produce inaccurate results, even for stable simulations, if the time step is chosen to
be too large. Because of this we strongly recommend that you carry out sensitivity studies on your time
step to ensure accuracy. A very useful additional technique is to compare results from the implicit
solver and the explicit solver.
Maximum number of iterations
The implicit integration scheme uses an iterative method to solve the dynamic equilibrium equations. The calculation is
abandoned if convergence has not been achieved after this number of iterations.
w

200
If you are using a variable time step then this results in the time step being reduced rather than the simulation being
aborted. Accordingly we recommend that a relatively small value is used, we recommend using the default value of 20.
This allows OrcaFlex to abandon the current iteration quite early and try again with a shorter time step.
Conversely if you are using a constant time step then the simulation is aborted if convergence cannot be achieved inside
this number of iterations. Because of this we recommend using a larger value than for variable time steps. The default
value of 100 is usually a good choice.
Tolerance
A nondimensional value which controls the accuracy of the solution. Increasing this value results in reduced
computation time since fewer iterations are needed to solve the dynamic equilibrium equations. However, doing so may
also result in inaccurate results.
We recommend that you use the default value. Should you choose to increase it then we strongly recommend that you
perform sensitivity studies to confirm the accuracy of your results.
High frequency dissipation
This parameter controls how much numerical high frequency dissipation is provided by the Generalised integration
scheme. The default value is 0.4 which has been chosen to give fast simulation run times without compromising
accuracy.
The high frequency dissipation must take a value between 0 and 1. Perhaps counterintuitively, larger values
correspond to lower levels of dissipation. A value of 1 gives no dissipation and a value of 0 gives asymptotic annihilation,
whereby high frequency response is annihilated after one time step.
Note: The high frequency dissipation is the parameter denoted in Chung and Hulbert's paper describing
the Generalised- integration scheme.
7.4.6 Numerical Damping
Line Target Damping
Line Target Damping specifies damping whose effect is usually only to damp down this high frequency noise. The data
specifies the % critical damping level that will be achieved for oscillations at the shortest natural period of each node.
These oscillation periods are typically very short and depend on the segment length and stiffness values of the line
section involved.
The % critical damping generated for longer oscillation periods is inversely proportional to the period, and for typical
response periods (usually much longer) the damping level is usually insignificant. To achieve a significant level of
damping at wave period usually requires that a very high Line Target Damping data value to be calculated and specified,
and this often also requires shorter time steps and so longer simulations. Because of this we recommend that you use
Rayleigh Damping to model the effects of structural damping.
The target damping can be specified independently for tension, bending and torsion. Within broad limits, this damping
has little influence on the results of a simulation unless the system is subject to very rapid variations in tension or
bending, for example when snatch loads occur. A value between 5% and 50% of target damping is usually assumed. For
details on the use of this data, see the theory documentation for tension, bending and torsion.
Note: This data is only available when using the explicit integration scheme. The implicit integration scheme
has built-in numerical damping which is controlled by the High frequency dissipation parameter.
7.4.7 Response Calculation
Simulation Period used for Response Calculations
These data items determine the period of the simulation to be used for the Spectral Response Analysis.
This period is specified by giving From and To simulation times. A value of '~' for the From time is interpreted as
simulation time 0. A value of '~' for the To time is taken to mean the simulation time at the end of the simulation. These
are the default values and in most cases are the values which you should use.
w
201
Note: These data items are only available when you have selected the Response Calculation wave type.
7.4.8 Properties Report
The General Data properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Simulation duration including build-up
The sum of the stage durations.
Target log sample interval, Actual log sample interval, Total number of log samples
Target log sample interval is the data item specified on the data form. Actual Sample Interval is the nearest whole
multiple of the inner time step. Total number of log samples equals Simulation duration including buildup / Actual log
sample interval
Log sample frequency
This equals 1 / Actual log sample interval.
Log samples per wave cycle
This is only available when the Wave Data specifies a single regular wave train. It equals Wave Period / Actual log
sample interval.
Estimated simulation file size
An estimate of the simulation file size. For certain models the estimate may be inaccurate. In particular the size of
simulation files for models using vortex tracking and which log vortices are difficult to estimate. This is because the
number of vortices is variable and depends on the simulation.
Log file location(s)
This reports the location of any log files used by an OrcaFlex simulation. Small log files are stored in memory to improve
performance and larger files are stored in your machine's temporary directory.
7.4.9 Drawing
Pen
The pen used to draw the global axes, the view axes, the scale bar and the compass in 3D Views.
North direction
If this direction is defined then a compass is drawn on the 3D View. The compass is only drawn for plan views.
The direction is an azimuth direction. So a value of 0 is the positive X direction, a value of 90 is the positive Y direction
etc.
7.4.10 Results
For details on how to select results variables see Selecting Variables.
The available variables are:
Time
The simulation time.
Implicit solver iteration count
The number of iterations used by the implicit integration scheme to solve the dynamic equilibrium equations.
Implicit solver time step
The time step used by the implicit integration scheme. This is most useful when you are using a variable time step.
System Modelling Data and Results, Environment
w

202
7.5 ENVIRONMENT
The environment defines the conditions to which the objects in the model are subjected; it consists of the sea, current,
waves and seabed.
Wave Direction
G
Still water
surface
Z
Y
X
Global Axes
Seabed Origin
Datum Current
Direction
Seabed Direction
of Slope
Surface
Z-level
Water
Depth

Figure: Environment
As shown above, the environment is defined relative to the global axes. So for example the seabed and the current and
wave directions are specified relative to the global axes.
7.5.1 Sea Data
Sea Surface Z
Specifies the global Z coordinate of the mean (or still) water level.
Kinematic Viscosity
This data is used to calculate Reynolds number. The viscosity can either be a constant or vary with temperature. In the
latter case the user can either input their own table of viscosity variation against temperature, or else use one of the
tables supplied in the OrcaFlex default data.
The tables supplied in the OrcaFlex default data are for 0% (freshwater) and 3.5% salinity, as given on page 337 of the
book Principles of Naval Architecture (PNA). For other salinity values that book recommends using interpolation
between the freshwater and 3.5% salinity tables.
Temperature
The temperature of the water can either be constant or vary with depth below the mean water level.
The temperature can affect the kinematic viscosity (if that is specified as varying with temperature), which in turn
affects the Reynolds number. This, in turn, can affect the drag and lift coefficients used for a line.
Reynolds number calculation
Reynolds number, Re, is a measure of the flow regime defined as
Re = VL/
where V and L are velocity and length parameters chosen to characterise the flow, and is the kinematic viscosity of the
fluid. Different values of Re result from different selections of characteristic velocity and length.
w
203
OrcaFlex calculates Reynolds number in order to calculate drag and lift coefficients for lines that are specified as varying
with Reynolds number. Accordingly the characteristic velocity is based on the relative flow velocity at a node, Vr = Vfluid
Vnode and the characteristic length is always related to the normal drag / lift diameter of the node, D.
OrcaFlex offers the following options for characteristic velocity and length:
Nominal Re, Renom, is defined by setting V = |Vr| and L = D. That is Renom = |Vr|D/.
Cross Flow Re, Recross, is defined by setting V = |Vn| and L = D where Vn is the component of Vr normal to the line. If
we define to be the angle between the relative flow direction and the normal to the line then can write Recross =
|Vr|Dcos()/ since |Vn| = |Vr|cos().
Flow Direction Re, Reflow, is defined by setting V = |Vr| and L = D/cos(), the length of the line cross section in the
relative flow direction. This gives Reflow = |Vr|D/cos().
These can all be related by the equation Recross/cos() = Renom = Reflowcos(), from which it follows that Recross Renom
Reflow.
Reynolds number is available as a line results variable.
Notes: Which method you select for calculating Reynolds number is in many ways arbitrary. The key factor is
that the method chosen matches the data source used for the variable drag and lift coefficient data. For
example, ESDU 80025 provides curves relating drag and lift coefficients to Reflow. Different data sources
may make different choices.
Older versions of OrcaFlex did not allow the user to specify the Reynolds number calculation method
and implicitly used Cross Flow Re.
7.5.2 Sea Density Data
Sea Density
The sea density can be constant at all positions in the sea or it can vary with depth and/or horizontal position.
By default the sea density is constant. This is the most common value to use, since in most models the effects of density
variation are not significant. For some systems, however, density variation is important because it causes buoyancy
variation.
Note: Density variation only affects the buoyancy of objects. OrcaFlex does not allow for density variation
when calculating hydrodynamic effects such as drag, added mass, etc. For these effects a nominal sea
density value is used, which is taken to be the density value at the sea density origin.
Vertical Density Variation
Vertical Density Variation specifies whether, and how, the water density varies with depth. The vertical density
variation can be set to Constant, Interpolated or Bulk Modulus.
Constant allows you to specify a single density value that applies at all depths.
Interpolated allows you to specify a density profile as a table giving the density at a series of depth levels. Linear
interpolation is used to obtain the density at intermediate levels, and at levels beyond the ends of the table the density
value at the end of the table is used.
Bulk Modulus specifies that the density varies with depth purely because of the compressibility of the water. You must
specify the water's Surface Density and Bulk Modulus. The water's bulk modulus specifies how a given mass of water
shrinks under pressure, using the same volume formula as for buoys and line types see Bulk Modulus. OrcaFlex then
derives the density variation with depth on the assumption that the water column has the given bulk modulus and is at
uniform temperature and salinity.
A dry land system can be modelled by using Constant density and setting the density to zero.
Horizontal Density Variation
Density variation with horizontal position can also be modelled. This is specified as a dimensionless multiplicative
factor. Where a variation of density with depth has been defined the factor will be applied at all depths.
w

204
To neglect density variation with horizontal position this data item should be set to '~'. Using a numeric value (e.g. 0.5)
allows you to apply a scaling factor to the vertical density profile.
To model density variation with horizontal position you must define a Horizontal Variation Factor variable data source.
The horizontal variation factor is assumed to be constant in the direction normal to the axis.
Sea Density Origin
As explained above, for all hydrodynamic calculations other than buoyancy OrcaFlex uses a single sea density value.
This is the sea density value at the sea density origin which is defined as follows:
If there is no horizontal density variation then the sea density origin is defined to be (0, 0, Sea Surface Z). Since there is
no variation of density with horizontal position the choice of X and Y coordinates here is arbitrary. Thus, the sea density
value used is the sea density at the still water level.
If there is horizontal density variation then the sea density origin is defined to be (X, Y, Sea Surface Z). Here X and Y are
the origin coordinates for the horizontal variation axis.
7.5.3 Seabed Data
Seabed Type
Three types of seabed shape are available:
A Flat seabed is a simple plane, which can be horizontal or sloping.
A Profile seabed is one where the shape is specified by a 2D profile in a particular direction; normal to that profile
direction the seabed is horizontal.
A 3D seabed allows you to specify a fully general 3D surface for the seabed.
Seabed Origin, Depth and Direction
The seabed origin is a point on the seabed and is the point to which the seabed data refer. It can be chosen by the user
and is specified by giving its coordinates with respect to global axes. For Profile and 3D seabeds the seabed origin Z
coordinate is not specified directly, but is determined by the Z values specified in the seabed geometry data. The seabed
origin Z coordinate and the specified Sea Surface Z together determine the water depth at the seabed origin, which is
displayed on the data form.
The direction is measured positive anticlockwise from the global X axis when viewed from above. How it is interpreted
depends on the type of seabed in use:
For a flat seabed the direction specified is the direction of maximum upwards slope. For example, 0 means sloping
upwards in the global X direction and 90 means sloping up in the in the global Y direction.
For a profile seabed the direction specified is the direction in which the 2D profile is defined.
For a 3D seabed the direction, together with the seabed origin, define a frame of reference with which the seabed
data points are relative to.
Warning: The depth at the seabed origin is used for all the wave theory calculations, so if the water is shallow
and the depth varies then the seabed origin should normally be chosen to be near the main wave-
sensitive parts of the model.
Normal Seabed Stiffness, Shear Seabed Stiffness, Seabed Damping
The seabed is modelled as a sprung and damped surface with a spring reaction force that is proportional to the depth of
penetration and the contact area, plus a damping force that is proportional to the rate of penetration. See Seabed
Theory.
The Normal Seabed Stiffness is the constant of proportionality of the spring force and equals the sprung reaction force
per unit area of contact per unit depth of penetration. A high value models a surface such as rock; a low value models a
soft surface such as mud.
The Shear Seabed Stiffness is used by the friction calculation. A value of '~' results in the Normal Seabed Stiffness
being used.
w
205
The Seabed Damping is the constant of proportionality of the damping force, and is a percentage of critical damping.
Seabed damping is always zero when using the implicit integration scheme.
Warning: A high seabed stiffness will shorten the natural periods of parts of the system lying on it, which may
require the use of a smaller simulation time step. Beware that the shorter natural periods will not be
reported in the statics results table if touchdown only occurs during the simulation.
Flat seabed data
Slope
The maximum slope, in degrees above the horizontal. The flat seabed is modelled as a plane, inclined at this angle,
passing through the seabed origin. The model is only applicable to small slopes. The program will accept slopes of up to
45 but the model becomes increasingly unrealistic as the slope increases because the bottom current remains
horizontal.
Profile seabed data
Profile
The profile table defines the seabed shape in the vertical plane through the seabed origin in the seabed direction. The
shape is specified by giving the seabed Z coordinate, relative to global axes, at a series of points specified by their
Distance From Seabed Origin, which is measured from the seabed origin in the seabed direction (negative values can be
given to indicate points in the opposite direction). The resulting depths at the points are reported in the table. The
seabed also has its own seabed origin and local axes, with respect to which the seabed shape is defined.
Seabed Z values in between profile points are obtained by smooth cubic spline interpolation, and beyond the ends of the
table the seabed is assumed to be horizontal. The seabed is assumed to be horizontal in the direction normal to the
seabed profile direction.
Interpolation Method
Determines how OrcaFlex interpolates between values in the specified profile.
Warning: Linear interpolation can cause difficulties for static and dynamic calculations. If you are having
problems with static convergence or unstable simulations then you should try one of the other
interpolation methods.
Note: You cannot model a true vertical cliff by entering 2 points with identical Distance from Seabed Origin
but different Z coordinate - the second point will be ignored. However you can specify a near-vertical
cliff. If you do this, note that to avoid interpolation overshoot you may need to specify several extra
points just either side of the cliff, or else use linear interpolation. See Choosing Interpolation Method.
Profile arclength
This allows you to calculate the arc length between 2 points along a profile seabed.
The calculation uses numerical integration. Very large seabed profile tables might result in the program becoming
unresponsive while the profile arc length is recalculated. If this is the case then the calculation can be disabled by
unchecking the Calculate Profile Arclength check box.
View Profile
The View Profile button provides a graph of the seabed profile. The specified profile points are shown, together with the
interpolated shape in between profile points. The seabed is horizontal beyond the ends of the graph.
You should check that the interpolated shape is satisfactory, in particular that the interpolation has not introduced
overshoot i.e. where the interpolated seabed is significantly higher or lower than desired. Overshoot can be solved by
adding more profile points in the area concerned and carefully adjusting their coordinates until suitable interpolation is
obtained.
w

206
3D seabed data
The 3D seabed is defined by specifying a set of x, y and Z coordinates of the seabed. The x and y coordinates are given
with respect to a horizontal frame of reference centred on the seabed origin and with the specified direction. The Z
coordinate is given with respect to the OrcaFlex global model origin. Note that the Z coordinates can, for convenience,
alternatively be specified as depths.
OrcaFlex will form a seabed surface which interpolates the specified data using either Linear or Cubic Polynomial
interpolation methods.
We would normally recommend using the cubic polynomial interpolation method. This provides a smooth interpolation
which makes both static and dynamic calculations more stable and robust.
The linear method has been provided for the special case of an analysis where your seabed data consists only of depth
and slope at each line anchor point. The linear interpolation method allows you to build a seabed which is effectively a
number of different flat sloping seabeds for each line.
Notes: If the data you wish to input are X and Y coordinates with respect to the OrcaFlex global axes, then you
should set the seabed origin and direction to zero.
The seabed generated by OrcaFlex only extends as far as the data specified. That is at any horizontal
position outside the specified data the sea is considered to be infinitely deep.
7.5.4 Wave Data
Number of Wave Trains
You can define a number of different wave trains and the overall sea conditions are the superposition of the wave trains.
In most cases a single wave train is sufficient, but multiple wave trains can be used for more complex cases, such as a
crossing sea (i.e. a superposition of locally generated waves in one direction and distant stormgenerated swell in a
different direction).
Each wave train can be given a name and a specified direction. And each wave train can be either a regular wave (with a
choice of wave theory) or a random wave (with a choice of spectrum), or else be specified by a time history file.
Simulation Time Origin
The simulation time origin allows you to control the period of time that the dynamic simulation covers. It defines the
global time that corresponds to simulation time t = 0, so changing the simulation time origin allows you to shift the
period of global time that is simulated. Altering the simulation time origin shifts the simulation time relative to all of the
wave trains; alternatively, you can also time shift an individual wave train by altering its wave time origin. See Dynamic
Analysis for details of the time frames used in OrcaFlex.
Data for a Wave Train
Each wave train is specified by the following data.
Wave Direction
For both regular and random waves, the wave Direction is the direction that the wave is progressing, measured
positive anticlockwise from the global Xaxis when viewed from above. So, for example, 0 degrees means a wave
travelling in the positive Xdirection, and 90 means a wave travelling in the positive Ydirection.
With multiple wave trains the direction of the first wave train is taken to be the primary direction and this is reflected in
both the way the sea is drawn and the Sea Axes.
Wave Type
Each wave train can be any of the following types:
Airy, Dean, Stokes' 5th or Cnoidal. These are various different wave theories for regular waves. See Data for
Regular Waves.
JONSWAP, ISSC (also known as Bretschneider or modified PiersonMoskowitz), Ochi-Hubble, Torsethaugen or
User Defined Spectrum. These are various different spectra for random waves.
w
207
Time History allows you to specify the wave in the form of a time history input file. See Data for Time History
Waves.
User Specified Components allows you to specify the wave train as the sum of a number of sinusoidal components.
This wave type gives you complete control over the wave train and would typically be used to compare OrcaFlex
results with results produced by a different program. See Data for User Specified Components.
Response Calculation is a special type of random wave with a truncated white noise spectrum which is used for
Spectral Response Analysis. A truncated white noise spectrum has energy spread evenly over a userspecified range
of frequencies. See Data for Response Calculation.
For regular waves we recommend the Dean wave this is a nonlinear wave theory using a Fourier approximation
method and it is suitable for all regular waves. The Airy wave theory is a simple linear wave theory that is only suitable
for small waves. The Cnoidal wave theory is only suitable for long waves in shallow water. The Stokes' 5th wave theory
is only suitable for short waves in deep water.
There are two Stokes' 5th order theories implemented in OrcaFlex which we have called Stokes' 5th (SH) and Stokes'
5th. The former is the standard method of Skjelbreia and Hendrickson whilst the latter theory is due to Fenton. Fenton's
work is the better choice primarily because it deals with currents more accurately.
If the specified wave is not suitable for the selected wave theory, OrcaFlex will give a warning or may report that the
wave calculation has failed. If this happens please check that the wave theory selected is suitable. For further details see
Ranges of Applicability.
Kinematic Stretching Method
Kinematic stretching is the process of extending linear Airy wave theory to provide predictions of fluid velocity and
acceleration (kinematics) at points above the mean water level. OrcaFlex offers a choice of three methods: Vertical
Stretching, Wheeler Stretching and Extrapolation Stretching. For details see Kinematic Stretching Theory.
Note: Random waves are modelled by combining a number of linear Airy waves, so kinematic stretching also
applies to random waves.
The Horizontal Velocity preview graph can be used to see the effect of the different kinematic stretching methods.
Wave Time Origin
Each wave train has its own Wave Time Origin, which is specified relative to the global time origin. The wave train's
data specify the wave train relative to its own time origin, so you can timeshift a given wave train, independently of the
other wave trains, by adjusting its wave time origin.
For a regular wave train the wave time origin is the time at which a wave crest passes the global origin. You can
therefore use the Wave Time Origin to arrange that a wave crest passes a particular point at a particular time during the
simulation.
For a random wave train, the phases of the wave components that make up the wave train are randomly distributed, but
they are fixed relative to the wave time origin. You can therefore arrange that the simulation covers a different piece of
the random wave train by changing the wave time origin. This can be useful for two purposes:
You may want to select a particularly significant event in the wave train, such as a large wave. OrcaFlex has special
facilities to make this easy see Wave Preview.
Secondly, you may want to do a series of runs with the same wave train data but different random phases for the
wave components. This can be done by specifying randomly chosen wave time origins for the different runs, since
randomly selecting different periods of the wave train is statistically equivalent to choosing different random
phases for the wave components.
7.5.5 Data for Regular Waves
A regular wave is a single wave component defined by wave Direction, Height and Period. Wave height is measured
from trough to crest.
w

208
Stream Function Order
For the Dean wave theory only, you can set the order of stream function to be used. The default value is 5 and for most
purposes it is not necessary to alter this. However, for nearly breaking waves the method sometimes has problems
converging. If this is the case then it might be worth experimenting with different values.
7.5.6 Data for Random Waves
Random waves are specified by giving the energy spectrum of the random sea. The Wave Type specifies the type of
spectrum and the spectral data then defines the actual spectrum within that type. See JONSWAP and ISSC Spectra, Ochi
Hubble Spectrum, Torsethaugen Spectrum or UserDefined Spectrum.
For JONSWAP and OchiHubble spectra you have a choice of using Auto or User settings for some of the spectra data.
You can use the View Spectrum button to view a graph of resulting energy spectrum.
Number of Components and Seed
Random wave trains are represented by a userdefined number of component waves, all in the specified wave direction,
whose amplitudes and periods are selected by the program to give a sea state having the specified spectrum and
spectral parameters.
The phases associated with each wave component are pseudorandom. OrcaFlex uses a random number generator and
the useddefined seed to assign phases. The sequence is repeatable, so the same seed will always give the same phases
and consequently the same train of waves.
If User specified seeds is checked then the user must specify a seed for each wave train. Otherwise the program
chooses a seed automatically.
For a given spectrum, sea state and simulation time origin, different wave conditions can be obtained by shifting the
wave time origin. For more information, see Setting up a Random Sea.
You can use the View Wave Components command (on the Waves page of the environment data form) to get a
spreadsheet that gives details of the wave components that OrcaFlex has used to represent a random or time history
wave train.
For a random wave train the spreadsheet also reports the following properties of the spectrum:
The first 3 moments of the spectrum, m0, m1 and m2.
Mean period T1 which equals m0/m1. Note that T1 is sometimes denoted by Tm.
Peak period and frequency Tp and fm. These are the period and frequency at which the spectrum has the greatest
spectral density.
7.5.7 Data for JONSWAP and ISSC Spectra
For the ISSC spectrum you specify Hs and Tz (or alternatively the linked parameters Tp or fm) and the program
calculates the other spectral parameters.
For the JONSWAP spectrum you have the following options for setting the spectral parameters:
Automatic: You specify Hs and Tz and the program calculates the other parameters.
Partially Specified: You specify Hs, Tz (or alternatively the linked parameters Tp or fm) and and the program
calculates the other parameters.
Fully Specified: You specify all the spectral parameters (, , 1, 2 and Tp or fm) and the program calculates and
reports Hs and Tz.
The various spectral parameters are documented below:
Hs, Tz, fm, Tp
Hs is the significant wave height. Tz is the zero crossing period. Tp and fm are the spectral peak period and peak
frequency, i.e. those with largest spectral energy.
w
209
For the ISSC spectrum Tz, Tp and fm are tied together, so setting any one of them sets the other two to match.
For the JONSWAP spectrum how these data are used depends on the selected parameter option:
For Automatic parameters you set Hs and Tz and the program calculates and reports Tp and fm.
For Partially Specified parameters Tz, Tp and fm are tied together, so setting any one of them sets the other two to
match. You must also set Hs.
For Fully Specified parameters Tp and fm are tied together, so setting one of them sets the other to match. The
program calculates and reports Hs and Tz.
Peak enhancement factor ()
For the ISSC spectrum is always 1.
For the JONSWAP spectrum is automatically calculated by the program using formulae given by Isherwood, 1987 if the
parameters are calculated using the Automatic option. Otherwise you can specify the value.
For Partially Specified parameters you must be careful about the order in which you set parameters. The relationship
between Tz, Tp and fm depends on . We treat Tz as the master data item which means that you must set before setting
Tp or fm.
Spectral width parameters (1, 2)
These only apply to the JONSWAP spectrum. If the parameters are calculated using the Fully Specified option you can
specify these values. Otherwise they are fixed at the standard values of 0.07 and 0.09 respectively.
Spectral energy parameter ()
For the ISSC spectrum is calculated by the program to give a sea state with the specified Hs and Tz.
For the JONSWAP spectrum if the parameters are calculated using the Fully Specified option you can specify and the
program reports the corresponding Hs. Otherwise is calculated by the program to give a sea state with the specified Hs
and Tz.
7.5.8 Data for Ochi-Hubble Spectrum
The OchiHubble formulation allows 2peaked spectra to be set up, enabling you to represent sea states that include
both a remotely generated swell and a local windgenerated waves.
Hs and Tz
Hs is the significant wave height and Tz is the zero crossing period. Their values depend on whether you specify Auto or
User.
Auto: In this case Hs is specified by the user and the program selects the most probable spectral parameters for that
value of Hs. The resulting Tz is then derived and displayed, but cannot be edited.
User: In this case the user specifies the spectral parameters explicitly. The resulting Hs and Tz values are displayed, but
neither can be edited.
Hs1, fm1, 1, Hs2, fm2 and 2
The OchiHubble spectrum is the sum of 2 component spectra, each of which is specified by a set of three parameters:
Hs1, fm1, 1 for the lower frequency component and Hs2, fm2, 2 for the higher frequency component.
Parameters Hs1 and Hs2 are the significant wave heights of the component spectra; the overall significant wave height Hs
= (Hs1
2
+ Hs2
2
). Parameters fm1 and fm2 are the modal frequencies of the two components. Finally, 1 and 2 are shape
parameters that control the extent to which the spectral energy is concentrated around the modal frequency larger
values give more concentrated component spectra.
You can specify these spectra parameters in two alternative ways:
If you select Automatic the program calculates the parameters of the most probable spectrum, based on the overall
significant wave height Hs that you have specified. The parameters used are as given in the OchiHubble paper, table 2b.
w

210
If you select Specified you must specify all 6 parameters. The program then derives and displays the corresponding
overall Hs and Tz values.
Notes: The modal frequency of the first component, fm1, must be less than that of the second, fm2. It is also
recommended that fm2 is greater than 0.096.
The significant wave height of the first component, Hs1, should normally be greater than that of the
second, Hs2, since most of the wave energy tends to be associated with the lower frequency component.
7.5.9 Data for Torsethaugen Spectrum
The Torsethaugen spectrum is a double peaked spectrum best suited to North Sea conditions. It enables you to
represent sea states that include both a remotely generated swell and a local windgenerated waves.
Full details of the formulation used are found in the Torsethaugen and Haver paper.
Hs, fm and Tp
The Torsethaugen spectrum is specified by Hs and Tp. The fm and Tp data items are linked by the relationship fm = 1/Tp. If
you enter one the other will be updated according to this equality.
7.5.10 Data for User Defined Spectrum
A user defined spectrum is specified by giving a table of values of S(f), where S(f) is the spectral energy as a function of
frequency f.
The values of f specified do not need to be equally spaced. For intermediate values of f (i.e. between those specified in
the table) OrcaFlex uses linear interpolation to obtain the spectral ordinate S(f). And for values of f outside the range
specified in the table OrcaFlex assumes that S(f) is zero. Your table should therefore include enough points to
adequately define the shape you want (important where S(f) is large or has high curvature) and should cover the full
range over which the spectrum has significant energy.
OrcaFlex reports on the data form Hs and Tz that correspond to the spectrum specified. These are calculated using the
standard formulae:
Hs = 4m0.
Tz = (m0/m2).
where m0 and m2 are the zeroth and second moments of the spectrum.
7.5.11 Data for Time History Waves
A time history wave train is defined by a separate text file that contains the wave elevation as a function of time. To use
this you need to do the following:
Create a suitable time history text file defining the wave elevation as a function of time. The time values in the file
must be equally spaced and in seconds. The elevation values must be the elevation at the global origin used in the
OrcaFlex model, measured positive upwards from the still water level specified in the OrcaFlex model, and using the
same units as those in the OrcaFlex model.
Set the Input File to refer to your time history file. See Data in Time History Files.
Set the Minimum Number of Components. This affects the number of Fourier components that will be used to
model the time history wave. It should be set high enough to give desired accuracy, but note that using a very large
number of components may significantly slow the simulation. See How Wave Time History Data is Used for details.
Set the Wave Time Origin to position the required section of wave time history within the simulation period. You
can use the View Profile button (on the Waves Preview page on the environment data form) to see the wave
elevation as a function of simulation time.
How Wave Time History Data is Used
Briefly, OrcaFlex uses a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to transform the data into a number of frequency components.
Each component is then used to define a single Airy wave and these Airy waves are then combined to give the wave
w
211
elevation and kinematics at all points. The View Wave Components and View Spectrum buttons on the data form
show (in tabular and power spectral density graph form respectively) the Airy wave components that OrcaFlex will use
to model the waves.
Note that the FFT requires the number of samples it uses from the time history file, N say, to be a power of 2, and it
produces N/2 components. Because of this, the time history file must contain a sequence of N samples that covers the
period of the simulation, where N is a power of 2 that is at least twice the specified minimum number of components.
Warning: If the time history file does not contain enough samples to achieve this, then zero-padding will be used
to extend the time history until it does. This is likely to introduce spurious high frequencies into the
waves, so we recommend that this is avoided by providing more actual samples.
Here are more details.
1. OrcaFlex first selects the elevation values that cover the simulation period
To do this OrcaFlex searches the time history file and selects the time samples that cover the simulation period. These
will be the time samples from time
(T0 BuildUpDuration) to (T0 + SimulationDuration)
where BuildUpDuration is the length of the buildup stage of the simulation, SimulationDuration is the length of the
remaining stages and T0 = SimulationTimeOrigin WaveTimeOrigin. These time origin settings allow you, if you want, to
shift the simulation relative to the time history.
2. OrcaFlex then includes more samples, if necessary
Let n be the number of samples selected in step 1. In order to achieve the specified minimum number of components, m
say, OrcaFlex needs at least 2m samples. So if n is less than 2m then OrcaFlex selects more samples from the file (taken
equally from earlier and later in the file, if possible) until it has 2m samples. If OrcaFlex runs out of samples in the file
while doing this then an error message is given; you must then either provide more samples in the time history file or
else reduce the minimum number of components requested.
However OrcaFlex also needs the number of samples to be a power of 2, since that is needed in order to use a fast
Fourier transform. So if 2m is not a power of 2 then OrcaFlex again selects more samples from the file (taken equally
from earlier and later in the file, if possible) until the number of selected samples is a power of 2. If OrcaFlex runs out of
samples in the file while doing this then it zeropads (i.e. it adds extra samples of value zero); you will be warned if this
happens.
3. OrcaFlex uses a fast Fourier transform to obtain Fourier components
The selected time history samples, N of them say, are converted into frequency domain form using a Fast
FourierTransform (FFT). This gives N/2 sinusoidal Fourier components. The View Wave Components button reports
their numerical values and the View Spectrum shows their spectrum.
4. OrcaFlex models the time history wave as the superposition of Airy waves
N/2 Airy waves are created, with periods, amplitudes and phases that match the Fourier components. The time history
wave is then modelled as the superposition of these Airy waves.
Warning: This last step effectively uses Airy wave theory to extrapolate from the global origin, where the surface
elevation has been defined, to derive surface elevation at other points and to derive fluid kinematics
from the surface elevation readings. This extrapolation introduces errors, which become worse the
further you go from the global origin. It is therefore recommended that the global origin (= the point
the time history file data applies to) is placed close to the main wave-sensitive parts of the model.
7.5.12 Data for User Specified Components
The User Specified Components wave type allows you to specify the wave train as the sum of a number of sinusoidal
components. For each component you specify:
Frequency or Period
You may specify either of these and the other is automatically updated using the relationship Period = 1 / Frequency.
w

212
Amplitude
The single amplitude of the component that is half the peak to trough height.
Phase lag
The phase lag relative to the wave train time origin.
7.5.13 Data for Response Calculation
Hs
The significant wave height of the truncated white noise spectrum used for the Spectral Response Analysis. A truncated
white noise spectrum has energy spread evenly over the a specified range of frequencies.
The total energy of the spectrum is determined by Hs using the standard formula m0 = (Hs/4)
2
where m0 is the zeroth
spectral moment, that is the total spectral energy. OrcaFlex also reports Tz = (m0/m2).
A more detailed discussion of the issues involved in choosing Hs is given in Load Cases Data for Spectral Analysis.
Target Frequency Range
These data items determine the frequency range of the truncated white noise spectrum used for the Spectral Response
Analysis.
The wave components that OrcaFlex uses to represent this spectrum are carefully chosen. They are selected to match
the frequencies produced by the Fast Fourier Transform(FFT) used to calculate the spectral response. This process is
described in more detail in the Spectral Response Analysis theory section.
It is possible for the range of FFT frequencies not to cover the Target Frequency Range. If this happens then as much of
the target range is used as is possible. You will be warned if the actual frequency range cannot achieve the Target
Frequency Range.
7.5.14 Waves Preview
When using a random wave or a time history wave, OrcaFlex provides two preview facilities to aid selection of the wave,
namely List Events and View Profile. These are provided on the Waves Preview page on the environment data form and
are documented below.
Notes: These commands work in terms of global time, rather than simulation time. This enables you to search
through a period of global time looking for an interesting wave event and then set the time origins so
that the simulation covers that event.
If you are using multiple wave trains then these commands report the combined sea state from all of
the wave trains.
See also Setting up a Random Sea.
Position
This is the point to which the List Events, View Profile and Horizontal Velocity commands apply. Since wave trains vary
in space as well as time you should normally set this point to be close to a system point of interest, such as a riser top
end position.
View Profile
This plots a time history of wave elevation at the specified Position over the specified interval of global time.
An example of the use of these commands is to use List Events to scan over a long period of global time (e.g. 10000
seconds or more), look for large waves and then use View Profile to look in more detail at short sections of interest.
Having decided which part of the wave train to use, the simulation time origin can then be set to just before the period
of interest, so that the simulation covers that period.
w
213
List Events
This command searches for individual waves within a random sea which satisfy specified criteria. All wave events in the
specified interval of global time and at the specified Position which match the specified criteria are reported.
The criteria are be specified in one of two ways, determined by the Wave Search Method:
If the Height or Steepness option is selected then program searches for rises or falls that exceed the specified
height H, or (providing there is only a single wave train) that the wave steepness exceeds the specified steepness S.
The steepness criterion S is not used if there is more than one wave train specified. This is because steepness is
measured in the wave direction and when multiple wave trains are present there is not necessarily a unique wave
direction.
If the Height or Period option is selected then the program searches for wave events matching (up to specified
tolerance levels) both the specified wave height H and the specified wave period T.
For each event, the height (total rise or fall) is given and an equivalent period is derived from the time interval between
the peak and trough. These are then used to calculate, for this water depth, an Airy wave of the same height and period,
and the length and steepness of this equivalent Airy wave are given.
If there is only one wave train then, for comparison purposes, a reference wave is reported at the top of the table. This
reports the Airy wave whose height and period match the Hs and Tz of that single wave train.
Finally, various wave elevation statistics are reported for the position and period of time specified. These include the
largest rise and fall, the highest crest and lowest trough, the number of up and down zerocrossings and the sample's
estimated Hs and Tz values. These statistics enable you to measure how "typical" this wave elevation sample is,
compared with the overall parent spectrum.
Horizontal Velocity
This plots how the water horizontal velocity (due to current and waves) varies with depth, at the specified (X,Y) Position
and specified global time.
7.5.15 Setting up a Random Sea
This section gives information on how to set up a random sea using OrcaFlex's modelling facilities. For a detailed
description of these, see Wave Data.
The most common requirement is to produce a realistic wave train which includes a "design wave" of specified height
Hmax and period Tmax. However alternative requirements are possible and it is sometimes useful to impose additional
conditions for convenience in results presentation, etc.
The height and period of the maximum design wave may be specified by the client, but on occasion we have to derive
the appropriate values ourselves, either from other wave statistics (for example a wave scatter table, giving significant
wave heights Hs and average periods Tz) or from a more general description of weather (such as wind speed). See Wave
Statistics for guidance.
Having decided what values of Hmax and Tmax are required, we select an appropriate wave train as follows, using the
facilities available in OrcaFlex.
Set the significant wave height (Hs) and average period (Tz) for the design storm, and the wave spectrum ISSC,
JONSWAP,OchiHubble and Torsethaugen options are available. See Setting the Sea State Data for details.
Set the number of wave components (typically 100). See Setting the Number of Components for details.
Search through the time history of wave height and looking for a particular wave rise (trough to crest) or fall (crest
to trough) which has the required total height and period. If no wave of the required characteristics can be found,
then adjust Hs and Tz slightly and repeat. See Finding a Suitable Design Wave Event for details.
When the required design wave has been located, you can set the simulation time origin and duration so that the
design wave occurs within the simulation time, with sufficient time before and after to avoid starting transients and
collect all important responses of the system to the design wave. A typical random sea simulation may represent 5
or 6 average wave periods (say 6070 seconds for a design storm in the North Sea) plus a build up period of 10
seconds. If the system is widely dispersed in the wave direction, then the simulation may have to be longer to allow
w

214
time for the principal wave group to pass through the whole system. Since short waves travel more slowly than long
ones, this affects simulations of mild sea states more than severe seas.
Setting the Sea State Data
The ISSC spectrum (also known as Bretschneider or modified PiersonMoskowitz) is appropriate for fullydeveloped
seas in the open ocean. The JONSWAP spectrum is a variant of the ISSC spectrum in which a "peak enhancement factor",
, is applied to give a greater concentration of energy in the midband of frequencies. The OchiHubbleand Torsethaugen
spectra enable you to represent sea states that include both a remotely generated swell and a local wind generated sea.
JONSWAP is commonly specified for the North Sea. Two parameters are sufficient to define an ISSC spectrum we use Hs
and Tz for convenience. For the JONSWAP spectrum, five parameters are required, Hs, Tz, , and two additional
parameters a and b (denoted 1 and 2 in OrcaFlex), which define the bandwidth over which the peak enhancement is
applied. If you choose JONSWAP then you can either specify or let the program calculate it (see formulae given by
Isherwood). The bandwidth parameters are set automatically to standard values). For the North Sea it is common to set
= 3.3. If you have to do a systematic series of analyses in a range of wave heights, there are advantages in keeping
constant. Note that a JONSWAP spectrum with = 1.0 is identical to the ISSC spectrum with the same Hs and Tz.
Choice of wave spectrum can cause unnecessary pain and suffering to the beginner. For present purposes, the important
point is to get the "design wave" we want embedded in a realistic random train of smaller waves. The spectrum is a
means to this end, and in practice it matters little what formulation is used. The one exception to this sweeping
statement may be 2peaked spectra (e.g. OchiHubble or Torsethaugen).
Setting the Number of Components
OrcaFlex generates a time history of wave height by dividing the spectrum into a number of component sine waves of
constant amplitude and (pseudorandom) phase. The phases associated with each wave component are pseudorandom.
OrcaFlex uses a random number generator and the seed to assign phases. The sequence is repeatable, so the same seed
will always give the same phases and consequently the same train of waves. The wave components are added assuming
linear superposition to create the wave train. Ship responses and wave kinematics are also generated for each wave
component and added assuming linear superposition. OrcaFlex currently allows you to specify the number of wave
components to use; more components give greater realism but a greater computing overhead.
The time history generated is just one of an infinite number of possible wave trains which correspond to the chosen
spectrum in fact there are an infinite number of wave trains which could be generated from 100 components, a further
infinite set from 101 components and so on.
Strictly speaking, we should use a full Fourier series representation of the wave system which would typically have
several thousand components (the number depends on the required duration of the simulation and the integration time
step). This is prohibitively expensive in computing time so we use a much reduced number of components, as noted
above. However, this does involve some loss of randomness in the time history generated. For a discussion of the
consequences of this approach, see Tucker et al (1984).
Finding a Suitable Design Wave
A frequent requirement is to find a section of random sea which includes a wave corresponding in height and period to a
specified design wave. OrcaFlex provides preview facilities for this purpose. If you are looking for a large wave in a
random sea, say Hmax = 1.9Hs, then use the List Events command (on the Waves Preview page of the environment data
form) to ask for a listing of waves with height > H=1.7Hs, say. It is worth looking over a reasonably long period of time at
first say t = 0s to 50,000s or even 100,000s. OrcaFlex will then search that time period and list wave rises and falls
which meet the criterion you have specified.
Suppose that the list shows a wave fall at t = 647s which is close to your requirement. Then you can use the View Profile
command to inspect this part of the wave train, by asking OrcaFlex to draw the sea surface elevation for the period from
t = 600s to t = 700s, say. You will then see the large wave with the smaller waves which precede and follow it.
Note that when you use the preview facility you have to specify both the time and the location (X,Y coordinates). A
random wave train varies in both time and space, so for waves going in the positive X direction (wave direction = 0),
the wave train at X = 0 differs from that at X = 300m.
w
215
You can use the preview facility to examine the wave at different critical points for your system. For example, you may
be analysing a system in which lines are connected between Ship A at X = 0 and Ship B at X = 300m. It is worth checking
that a wave train which gives a design wave at Ship A does not simultaneously include an even higher wave at Ship B. If
you want to investigate system response to a specified design wave at both Ship A and Ship B, then you will usually have
to do the analysis twice, once with the design wave at Ship A and once at Ship B.
If no wave of the required characteristics can be found, then adjust Hs and Tz slightly and repeat. As we noted above, the
important point is to get the design wave we want embedded in a realistic random train of smaller waves. This is often
conveniently done by small adjustments to Hs and Tz. We need make no apology for this. In the real world, even in a
stationary sea state, the instantaneous wave spectrum varies considerably and Hs and Tz with it. For further discussion
see Tucker et al (1984).
If you are using an ISSC spectrum, or a JONSWAP spectrum with constant , then you can make use of some useful
scaling rules at this point. In these 2 cases, provided the number of wave components and the seed are held constant,
then:
For constant Tz, wave elevation at any time and any location is directly proportional to Hs. For example, if you have
found a wave at time t which has the period you require but is 5% low in height, increasing Hs by 5% will give you
the wave you want, also at time t.
For constant Hs, the time between successive wave crests at the origin (X = 0, Y = 0) is proportional to Tz. For
example, if you have found a wave at the origin at time t which has the height you require but the period between
crests is 5% less than you want, increasing Tz by 5% will give you the wave you want, but at time 1.05t.
Note: This rule does not apply in general except at the origin of global coordinates.
These scaling rules can be helpful when conducting a study of system behaviour in a range of wave heights. We can
select a suitable wave train for one wave height and scale to each of the other wave heights. This gives a systematic
variation in wave excitation for which we may expect a systematic variation in response. If the wave trains were
independently derived, then there would be additional scatter.
Wave Statistics
The following is based on Tucker (1991).
Deriving Hmax from Hs
Hmax/Hs = K.[(loge N)/2]
where N is the number of waves in the period under consideration and K is an empirical constant. Since wave statistics
are usually based on measurements made every 3 hours, N is usually taken as the number of waves in 3 hours:
N = 10800/Tz.
For extreme storms, K may be taken as 0.9, but for moderate wave conditions as used for fatigue analysis, K = 1 is
usually assumed.
In extreme storm conditions, it is common to assume a "significant wave steepness" of 1/18, i.e.
S = (2Hs)/(gTz
2
) = 1/18
hence
Tz = [(2Hs)/(gSs)] = 3.39Hs
for
Ss = 1/18 (Hs in metres, Tz in seconds.)
Deriving Tmax from Tz
Generally, it can be assumed that
1.05Tz < Tmax < 1.4Tz.
A common assumption is
Tmax = 1.28Tz.
w

216
7.5.16 Current Data
Multiple Current Data Sets
Multiple sets of current data can be defined. However, only one set of current data is active at any one time. This
capability is intended to help when you are analysing a series of load cases with differing current data. You can define
the different current data sets in the base data file. Then, in the batch script which generates the load case simulations,
you simply set the active current to be one of the predefined current data sets.
Multiple sets of current data can be defined
This data item must be checked if you wish to define multiple sets of current data. If it is not checked then you define
just a single current data set.
Active current
Specifies which of the multiple current data sets is active in the model. This data item is only available if you have
enabled multiple current data sets.
To define the current data sets click on the Edit Current Data Sets button. This opens a separate data form where the
current data sets can be defined and named.
Data for a single Current Data Set
Ramp During Build-Up
If selected then the static position will be calculated without the effects of current. Then, during the buildup stage of
dynamics the current is ramped up to its full value. If not selected (the default) then the current is used in calculating the
static position and full current is applied throughout.
This facility to omit current effects from the static calculation and introduce them during the build up is useful where
the current may cause lines to come into contact. For example, consider a case where a flexible line is to the left of a stiff
pipe but current pushes the flexible up against the pipe. Since the OrcaFlex static analysis does not include the effects of
contact between lines, if current was included in the static analysis then it would find a static position where the flexible
line was to the right of the pipe. The simulation would then start with the flexible on the wrong side of the pipe.
This problem can be overcome by setting the current to ramp during build up and setting clash checking for the two
lines. The static position will exclude the effect of current and so will leave the flexible to the left of the pipe. The build
up stage will then introduce the current effects but will also include the effect of contact between the two lines.
Vertical Current Variation
Current Method
Can be Interpolated or Power Law. The Interpolated method uses a full 3D profile with variable speed and direction. The
Power Law method uses an exponential decay formula.
Data for Interpolated Method
Speed and Direction
The magnitude and direction of a reference current, generally taken as a surface current. The actual current at a given Z
level is then defined relative to this reference current by a current profile.
The direction specified is the direction the current is progressing for example, 0 and 90 mean currents flowing in the
X and Y directions, respectively.
The speed and direction can either be fixed, vary with simulation time or be given by an external function.
Profile
A current profile may be defined by specifying factors and rotations at various depths, relative to reference. At each
Depth in the table the current speed is the reference current speed multiplied by the Factor for that depth; the
Direction is the reference direction plus the rotation specified. Current speed and direction are interpolated linearly
w
217
between the specified levels. The current at the greatest depth specified is applied to any depth below this, for example
when a sloping seabed is specified. Similarly, the current at the least depth specified is applied to any depth above this.
Negative factors can be used which allow you to model reversing currents.
Note: OrcaFlex interpolates rotations over the shortest route. For example if consecutive rows in the table
specify rotations of 350 and 10 then the program interpolates passing through 355, 0 and 5.
If you prefer to enter current speeds and directions directly, rather than using a reference current and reference
relative profile, simply set the reference current speed to 1 and the reference direction to 0.
Data for Power Law Method
Speed at Surface and at Seabed
The current speed at the still water level and at the seabed level.
Note: Speed at Seabed cannot be greater than Speed at Surface.
Direction
When using the power law current method, the current direction is the same at all levels. The direction specified is the
direction the current is progressing, measured positive from the global Xaxis towards the global Yaxis. For example, 0
and 90 mean currents flowing in the X and Y directions, respectively.
Exponent
This determines how the current decays. With a smaller value, the decay is spread more evenly across the water depth.
With a higher value, the decay mostly occurs close to the seabed.
View Vertical Profile Graph, View Vertical Profile 3D View
The Vertical Profile Graph plots Z against current speed which can be useful to help visualise and check your vertical
current speed variation.
The Vertical Profile 3D View shows a 3D View with a number of arrows showing the current velocity vectors at a range
of depths. The vectors are nondimensionalised. This means that you cannot use them to tell absolute current speeds
but the speed of the current at a particular depth can be compared relative to the speed at other depths. This view is
most useful for visualising and checking your current profile rotation data.
Horizontal Current Variation
Current speed variation with horizontal position can also be modelled. This is specified as a dimensionless
multiplicative factor. Where a variation of current speed with depth has been defined the factor will be applied at all
depths.
To neglect current speed variation with horizontal position this data item should be set to '~'. Using a numeric value
(e.g. 0.5) allows you to apply a scaling factor to the vertical current speed profile.
To model current speed variation with horizontal position you must define a Horizontal Variation Factor variable data
source. The horizontal variation factor is assumed to be constant in the direction normal to the axis.
Negative factors can be used which allow you to model reversing currents.
7.5.17 Wind Data
The Wind page on the Environment data form contains data for modelling wind. The wind data is used to calculate wind
loads on:
Vessels see Vessel Theory: Drag Loads.
Lines see Line Theory: Hydrodynamic and Aerodynamic Loads.
6D Buoy Wings see 6D Buoys: Wing Type Data.
w

218
Include wind loads on Vessels, Lines and 6D Buoy Wings
Specifies whether wind loads are included for Vessels, Lines and 6D Buoy Wings.
When new models are created in OrcaFlex wind loads are included on Vessels, Lines and 6D Buoy Wings that is all 3
options are ticked.
These options are primarily intended to maintain compatibility with some older versions of OrcaFlex. Version 8.3 and
earlier did not include wind loads on Lines or 6D Buoy Wings. When files produced with such versions are loaded the
options for Lines and 6D Buoy Wings are not ticked.
Air Density
The air density is assumed to be constant and the same everywhere.
Air Kinematic Viscosity
This is used to calculate Reynolds number. This value is fixed and cannot be edited.
Wind Direction
The direction specified is the direction in which the wind is progressing see Direction and Headings. In all cases the
wind is unidirectional.
Wind Speed
Wind speed is assumed to be the same everywhere. The speed specified should be the value at an elevation of 10m (32.8
ft) above the mean sea surface, since that is the height used by the OCIMF vessel wind load model. If you have the wind
speed V(h) at some other height h (in metres), then the wind speed V(10) at 10m can be estimated using the formula:
V(10) = V(h) (10/h)^(1/7).
You can choose to specify wind speed in various ways, by setting the Wind Type to one of the following.
Constant
The wind speed is then constant in time.
Random
The wind speed varies randomly in time, using a choice of either the American Petroleum Institute spectrum (API) or
the Norwegian Petroleum Directorate spectrum (NPD).
In both cases:
The spectrum is determined by specifying the Mean Speed and the spectrum then determines the statistical
variation about that mean. The View Spectrum button shows a graph of the spectrum.
The wind speed is modelled by a sum of a number of components. The components are sinusoidal functions of time
whose amplitudes and frequencies are chosen by OrcaFlex to match the spectral shape. OrcaFlex uses a 'equal
energy' algorithm to choose the amplitudes and frequencies. This gives all the components the same energy, and
therefore the same amplitude, but their frequencies are chosen so that the components are more closely spaced
where the spectral energy density is high, and more widely spaced where the spectral energy is low.
You can specify the Number of Components to use. You should specify enough to give a reasonable representation
of the spectrum.
The phases of the components are chosen using a pseudorandom number generator that generates phases which
are uniformly distributed. The phases generated are repeatable i.e. if you rerun a case with the same data then the
same phases will be used but you can choose to use different random phases by altering the Seed used in the
random number generator. This can be any integer in the range 2
32
to +2
32
1.
The View Components button gives a report of the components that OrcaFlex has chosen.
The View Profile button shows the resulting wind speed time history, as a function of global time. If you want to
simulate a particular section of that time history then you can use the wind Time Origin to time shift that section
into the simulation period. See Time Origins for details.
w
219
Time History (Speed)
The wind speed variation with time is specified explicitly in a file. For details see Data in Time History Files. Linear
interpolation is used to obtain the wind speed at intermediate times.
Time History (Speed & Direction)
The wind speed and direction variation with time is specified explicitly in a file. For details see Data in Time History
Files. Linear interpolation is used to obtain the wind speed and direction at intermediate times.
Vertical Wind Variation
Wind speed variation with height above the mean water level (MWL) can also be modelled. This is specified as a
dimensionless multiplicative factor. This allows a vertical wind profile to be modelled.
To model vertical wind speed variation you must define a Vertical Variation Factor variable data source.
To neglect vertical wind speed variation this data item should be set to '~'. Negative factors can be used which allow you
to model reversing wind profiles.
View Profile
The View Speed Profile and View Direction Profile buttons display time history graphs showing the wind speed and
direction that will be used. The graphs cover the specified Duration, starting at the specified Start time. This Start time,
and the graphs' time axes, are both global times.
7.5.18 Drawing Data
This data allows you to control the drawing of the various components which make up the OrcaFlex Environment. For a
more general discussion of drawing in OrcaFlex see How Objects Are Drawn.
Sea Surface Pen
Determines how the sea surface, current direction arrow and wave direction arrows are drawn. The current direction
arrow is an arrow next to the view axes which points in the direction of the current. This arrow is only drawn if the
current speed is not zero and if the Draw Environment Axes preference is ticked. The wave direction arrows are
explained below.
Sea Surface Grid Density
The density of the grid is specified in terms of the length of the scale bar on the 3D view; a density of d means that there
are d lines per scale bar length, so higher density values give a finer grid (but takes longer to draw).
Shaded Drawing Sea Surface Translucency
Controls how translucent the sea surface appears in the Shaded Graphics mode. A value of 0% gives a solid surface and
all objects behind the surface will not be visible. A value of 100% specifies transparency and leads to a completely see
through surface.
Secondary Wave Direction Pen
When the Draw Environment Axes preference is ticked a wave direction arrow is drawn in the direction of the wave. If
there are multiple wave trains whose directions are not equal then a wave direction arrow is drawn in the direction of
each wave train. The first wave train uses the sea surface pen since it is regarded as the dominant one for drawing
purposes. All subsequent wave trains' direction arrows are drawn in the Secondary Wave Direction Pen.
Wind Direction Pen
Determines how the wind direction arrow is drawn. This is an arrow next to the view axes which points in the direction
of the wind. This arrow is only drawn if the wind speed is not zero and if the Draw Environment Axes preference is
ticked.
Seabed Pen
The seabed grid is drawn in this pen.
w

220
Seabed Grid Density
The density of the grid is specified in terms of the length of the scale bar on the 3D view. A density of d means that there
are d lines per scale bar length, so higher density values give a finer grid (but takes longer to draw).
Shaded Drawing Seabed Translucency
Controls how translucent the seabed appears in the Shaded Graphics mode. A value of 0% gives a solid surface and all
objects behind the surface will not be visible. A value of 100% specifies transparency and leads to a completely see
through surface.
Seabed Profile Pen
If you are using a profile seabed then an extra grid line is drawn along each data point used to specify the profile. This
can be used to emphasise the seabed profile data.
Parameters
This data item specifies the External Function Parameters, a free form multiline text field which is passed to any
external function used by the Environment.
7.5.20 Results
Summary and Full Results
Results tables are available for the Environment reporting Wave length, Wave number, Ursell number and theoretical
Breaking wave height.
Time History, Statistics and Linked Statistics
For Environment results you must specify the global X,Y,Z coordinates of the point for which you want results. Note that
the results given are for the sea conditions that apply during the simulation they therefore include the buildup of
wave motion that is done during the buildup stage.
The available variables are as follows.
Elevation
The global Zcoordinate of the sea surface at the specified global X,Y position.
Velocity, X, Y, Z-Velocity,
Acceleration, X, Y, Z-Acceleration
The magnitude and global X,Y and Z components of the water particle velocity (due to current and waves) and
acceleration (due to waves) at the specified global X,Y,Z position. If the specified Z position is above the water surface
then zero is reported. If the specified Z is below the seabed then the value applicable at the seabed is given.
Current Speed and Current Direction
The speed and direction of the current at the specified global X,Y,Z position.
Wind Speed and Wind Direction
The wind speed and direction. Note that this does not depend on the specified global X,Y,Z position.
Static Pressure
The pressure due to the static head of water at the specified global X,Y,Z position.
Density
The density of the water at the specified global X,Y,Z position.
w
221
7.5.21 Wave Scatter Conversion
Introduction
The wave scatter conversion tool converts a scatter table of sea states to a scatter table of regular (i.e. individual) waves.
The conversion method uses the formula of LonguetHiggins, 1983. This gives the joint probability density of individual
waves in a random sea. This probability density is determined by the first 3 spectral moments m0, m1 and m2. For more
details see Barltrop & Adams, 1991 section 6.6.3.
One of the most useful features of the tool is the ability to create batch script and fatigue analysis files corresponding to
the calculated regular wave scatter table.
As an alternative you can input directly the regular wave scatter table. This allows you to take advantage of the
automatic export of batch script and fatigue analysis files.
The wave scatter conversion tool is run by selecting the Wave Scatter Conversion command from the OrcaFlex
Calculation menu. It is essentially a selfcontained subprogram within OrcaFlex, with its own menus, data and output.
Any OrcaFlex process active in the main window is paused until the wave scatter form is closed and the wave scatter
conversion tool has no effect on existing OrcaFlex data.
File Menu commands
The commands on the file menu allow you to save, and then reload, the data relating to the wave scatter conversion.
New
Clears previously entered Wave Scatter data and resets data to default values.
Open
Open a Wave Scatter file (.sct).
Save
Save the data to the currently selected file name (shown in title bar of the window).
Save As
This is the same as Save, but allows you to specify the file name to save to.
Most Recent Files List
List of the most recently used files. Selecting an item on the list causes the file to be loaded. The size of the list can be
adjusted from the Preferences form.
Exit
Closes the wave scatter form.
Data
The wave scatter conversion tool requires the following data. This data can be saved to a file.
Regular Wave Scatter
If Calculated from irregular wave scatter is selected then the regular wave scatter table is derived from a random sea
state scatter table using the formula of LonguetHiggins, 1983.
If User specified is selected then the regular wave scatter table is input directly. This option is useful where the regular
wave scatter table is predetermined but you still want to take advantage of the automatic export of batch script and
fatigue analysis files.
w

222
Units
You can select the units of length to be used for the wave scatter data.
Sea State Table
These data specify the random sea state scatter table. If the Regular Wave Scatter option is User specified then these
data are not required.
Spectral Form
All the sea states are assumed to be of the same spectral form which can be either JONSWAP or ISSC.
Note: The Longuet-Higgins, 1983 method is valid only for narrow-banded spectra. Thus the Ochi-Hubble and
Torsethaugen spectra are not available for this type of conversion.
Spectral Parameters
If you select the JONSWAP spectral form you have 3 options for specifying the spectral parameters: Automatic,
Partially Specified or Fully Specified. This setting applies to all sea states.
Sea States
You must specify the spectrum for each sea state in your scatter table.
If you have selected the ISSC spectral form then you enter Hs and one of Tz, Tp or fm.
If you have selected the JONSWAP spectrum the required parameters depend on the selected parameter option:
For Automatic parameters you set Hs and Tz and the program calculates and reports Tp and fm.
For Partially Specified parameters Tz, Tp and fm are tied together, so setting any one of them sets the other two to
match. You must also set Hs.
For Fully Specified parameters Tp and fm are tied together, so setting one of them sets the other to match. The
program calculates and reports Hs and Tz. You must also set Gamma, Alpha, Sigma1 and Sigma2.
Number of Occurrences
For each sea state in your scatter table you must also specify the number of occurrences of that sea state. This data is
required to determine the relative likelihood of occurrence of each sea state.
Normally this data comes from a sea state scatter table where it is usually presented in parts per thousand.
Regular Waves (scatter table calculated from irregular wave scatter table)
These data specify how the regular wave scatter table is discretised into bins.
Wave Heights, Wave Periods
These are the regular wave heights and wave periods that you wish to analyse. OrcaFlex automatically constructs bins
around these values. The output from the wave scatter conversion tool includes a table listing these bins.
Total Duration
This is the total duration to be covered by the regular wave scatter table.
Occurrence threshold
Some of the bins in the regular wave scatter table can have very small occurrence values. In order to reduce the amount
of computation time required to analyse all the load cases it is customary to ignore such bins. Any bin which has an
occurrence value lower than this threshold will be ignored. If you do not wish to ignore any bins then you should set the
threshold to 0.
Regular Waves (user specified regular wave scatter table)
These data specify a complete regular wave scatter table.
w
223
Number of bins
The number of bins in the regular wave scatter table.
Wave Height, Wave Period, Number of Occurrences
These are specified for each bin in the regular wave scatter table.
Output
To perform the wave scatter conversion you simply click the Show Regular Wave Scatter Table button which is found
on the Regular Waves page. This command is also available from the Action menu. Note that this button is not available
if you have a user specified regular wave scatter table.
The output is presented in a spreadsheet window which, like all such windows in OrcaFlex, can be saved as an Excel file.
The spreadsheet is made up of the following sheets:
Sea State Table
This sheet contains the input data which specified the sea state scatter table.
Regular Wave Bins
The regular wave height and wave period bins are listed here.
Regular Wave Scatter Table
This sheet contains the main output from the wave scatter conversion a table listing the number of occurrences of
waves in each regular wave bin. Any bins which have occurrences below the occurrence threshold are omitted.
This sheet also displays the total number of bins and the total probability covered by the table. This latter value
provides an important check that your bins extend far enough along the wave height and period axes. If the value is
significantly less than 1 then your bins need to be extended.
Batch Script
Once you have obtained the regular wave scatter table you will usually want to generate a regular wave simulation file
for each regular wave bin. The Export Batch Script button can be used to write an OrcaFlex batch script file to
automate the generation of these simulation files. Alternatively the Create Script Table Spreadsheet button can be
used to create a script table spreadsheet which can be pasted into an OrcaFlex Excel spreadsheet.
To use these options you need to specify the following things.
Base Case File Name
The name of an OrcaFlex data file on which all the load cases are to be based. This data file should specify a regular
wave. The batch script file sets the wave height and period together with the simulation duration.
If you have already saved the wave scatter data then relative paths can be used when locating this file.
Simulation File Name Template
Each load case simulation file (corresponding to a single regular wave bin) is given a name in the batch script file. These
names are based on this template. Special format strings can be used to customise the simulation file names as follows:
%N will be replaced with the load case number. Each load case is assigned a unique number.
%H will be replaced with the wave height for that load case.
%T will be replaced with the wave period for that load case.
The default value of the template is "Case #%N, H=%H, T=%T" and this will lead to simulation files named, for example:
"Case #01, H=0.5, T=3.sim", "Case #02, H=0.5, T=5.sim" and so on for all load cases.
Note: You do not need to use all 3 format strings in your template. However, you must use enough of them to
make the simulation file names unique. OrcaFlex will display an error message if the simulation file
names are not unique.
System Modelling Data and Results, Solid Friction Coefficients Data
w

224
Batch script load case action
If Run and save simulation is selected then the batch script will be written using the Run command. This option
should be checked if you plan to generate all the load cases on a single machine.
If Save Data file is selected then the batch script will be written using the SaveData command. This option is
intended for use with Distributed OrcaFlex. When run, the script produces an OrcaFlex data file for each regular
wave load case and these load cases can then be submitted to Distributed OrcaFlex.
Simulation Duration
Specifies the duration of the Buildup Stage and Stage 1 for each load case simulation file in the batch script. Because
different load cases have different wave periods these data are specified as multiples of that wave period.
Override base case log interval and Target number of log samples per wave period
These data allow you to set the simulation log interval for each load case simulation file by specifying the number of log
samples in each wave period. This allows load cases with longer wave periods to use a coarser logging interval than for
those with shorter wave periods and hence reduce the sizes of the simulation files.
Fatigue
Having generated a regular wave simulation file for each regular wave bin you will commonly want to perform a fatigue
analysis. Clicking the Export Fatigue Analysis File button produces an OrcaFlex fatigue analysis file.
This file lists each load case together with the corresponding number of occurrences for that load case. The file
produced is not complete and other data, such as the SN curve data, will need to be input. However, it provides a good
starting point for performing the fatigue analysis.
7.6 SOLID FRICTION COEFFICIENTS DATA
This data is used to specify friction coefficients for contact between Elastic Solids and Lines, 3D Buoys and 6D Buoys.
Because each Elastic Solid can come into contact with any number of Lines and Buoys, and vice versa, the specification
of this data is necessarily more complex than that for the seabed friction coefficients.
The data comprises three tables as follows:
The Line Types table defines friction coefficients for contact between Lines and Elastic Solids.
The 6D Buoys table defines friction coefficients for contact between 6D Buoys and Elastic Solids.
The 3D Buoys table defines friction coefficients for contact between 3D Buoys and Elastic Solids.
Line Types table
The table contains a userdefined number of rows specifying friction coefficients and each row has the following data:
Line Type and Shape
The specified friction coefficients will be used for contact between the specified shape and any node which uses the
specified line type.
The Line Type can be specified as "all line types". Any node in the model, irrespective of the line type it is based on, will
use the specified friction coefficients when in contact with the specified shape. Similarly the Shape can be specified as
"all shapes".
Friction Coefficients
Normal and axial friction coefficients. If the axial coefficient is set to '~' then the normal friction coefficient is used for all
directions of motion.
For full details of the friction calculation see Friction Theory.
6D Buoys table and 3D Buoys table
These tables are entirely analogous to the Line Types table. Instead of Line Type you specify 3D Buoys or 6D Buoys and
there is only a single friction coefficient because Buoy friction in OrcaFlex is isotropic.
w
System Modelling Data and Results, Vessels
225
How the data are interpreted
For the most part it should be clear how the data are interpreted. The exception to this statement is when multiple rows
specify friction coefficients for the same elastic solid and contacting object. For example consider the table below:

Figure: Solid Friction Coefficients Line Types data table
If a node which uses "Line Type1" comes into contact with "Shape1" then OrcaFlex has two choices for friction
coefficient since this particular contact satisfies both rows of the table. OrcaFlex deals with this ambiguity by choosing
the more specific combination, that is the second row which specifies "Line Type1".
A row with named line type and named shape is the most specific combination and the friction coefficients from such an
entry will always be chosen over any other entries.
A row with "all line types" and "all shapes" is the least specific combination and other entries will always be chosen over
this.
The other possibilities are:
1. Rows with "all line types" and a named shape.
2. Rows with a named line type and "all shapes".
OrcaFlex regards such rows as equally specific. Accordingly the program does not allow you to have rows of both type 1
and 2 in the same table.
Similarly if there are multiple rows with identical Line Type and Shape entries then the program will issue a error
message. This is because OrcaFlex has no way of choosing one set of friction coefficients over another.
If no friction coefficients are specified for a particular combination of Line Type and Shape then no friction will be
modelled. For example, with the data specified in the figure above, any contact between nodes and any shape other than
"Shape1" will not include friction effects.
The data in the 6D Buoys table and the 3D Buoys table are interpreted in exactly the same way.
7.7 VESSELS
A Vessel is used to model a ship, floating platform, barge, or similar rigid body. A vessel's primary motion can be
prescribed (by prescribed motion. or by a Time History file) or calculated (using first order wave load Response
Amplitude Operators (RAOs) and/or second order Quadratic Transfer functions (QTFs)); its superimposed motion (i.e.
superimposed onto the primary motion) may be defined by a set of displacement RAOs and/or other harmonic motions,
or by a Time History file.
w

226
vertex 3
vertex 5
edge joining
3 to 5
pitch
z (heave)
y (sway)
x (surge)
V
yaw
roll

Figure: Vessel Model
Each vessel has a Vessel Type that determines its RAO and drawing data. To illustrate this, consider a model of a pipe
being towed by two identical tugs. This is modelled by creating a vessel type called 'Tug' and then creating two vessels,
each of type 'Tug'. The drawing data (defining the tug outline) are data of the Tug vessel type, since they apply to both
tugs. Similarly, the RAOs are data of the vessel type, since again they are the same for both tugs. On the other hand the
two tugs differ in their positions and prescribed motion, so these are properties of the individual vessel objects.
Note: The vessel also has extra drawing data - this is to allow you to set up vessel-specific drawing. For
example the lead tug may have a special tow-point fitting that you want to draw. When the vessel is
drawn, OrcaFlex first draws the vessel type wire frame and then draws the vessel wire frame. These two
wire frames can have different colours, so you can highlight application-specific drawing.
The vessel is defined relative to a righthanded system of local vessel axes Vxyz, where:
V is the vessel origin for this vessel type. This is chosen by the user when the vessel type is set up. However note
that if you specify that the vessel type has symmetry then the vessel origin must be placed on the plane of
symmetry or at the centre of circular symmetry; see Vessel Types: Conventions for details.
Vx, Vy and Vz must be the directions of surge, sway and heave, respectively, for this vessel type. Note that these
directions must therefore be the directions to which the RAOs apply.
Points on the vessel, for example where cables or risers are connected, are then defined relative to these vessel axes.
These points then move with those axes as the vessel moves and rotates relative to the global axes, and OrcaFlex
calculates these motions automatically.
The vessel is drawn, in 3D views of the model, as a "wire frame" of userspecified vertices and edges. This allows a
simple visual check that amplitudes, phases etc. are consistent with the applied wave. The vessel wire frame can also be
used to do a visual check for interference between lines and vessel structure. As with all points on the vessel, the
vertices are defined relative to the vessel axes Vxyz.
7.7.1 Vessel Data
Name
Used to refer to the Vessel.
w
227
Type
Specifies the Vessel Type. The Vessel Types button allows you to view and edit the Vessel Type Data.
Draught
Specifies which set of RAOs to use from the specified vessel type. See Draughts.
Length
Specifies the length of this vessel. The default value '~' means that this vessel is the same length as the vessel type. If you
specify a length that differs from the vessel type length, then OrcaFlex will scale all the vessel type's data to allow for the
scaling factor VesselLength / VesselTypeLength. This is useful if you have data for a 70m ship, for example, but want to
use a 50m ship that is otherwise very similar.
The scaling is done using Froude scaling (see Rawson and Tupper). Froude scaling scales all items of data by a factor
that depends on the units of that data. If R = ratio of vessel length to vessel type length, then the scaling factor applied is
as follows:
All lengths are scaled by R.
All masses (and added masses) are scaled by R
3
.
All times are scaled by R
0.5
.
Data items with other units are scaled by writing the units in terms of the fundamental units of mass, length and time,
and then applying the above factors. For example force data has units equivalent to Mass*Length/Time
2
, so force data is
scaled by (R
3
).(R) / ((R
0.5
)
2
) = R
3
. Dimensionless items such as translational RAOs (surge, sway, heave), QTFs and phase
angles are unchanged by the scaling process, but note that Froude scaling does apply to the periods (or frequencies)
specified for RAO and QTF data. Note also that rotational RAOs (roll, pitch, yaw) are often given in dimensional terms
(degrees per metre) and these also scale.
These scaling rules are the same as those used in deriving full scale ship performance from physical model tests, and are
correct if the vessel is a perfect scaled replica of the vessel type in all respects.
Warnings: If the vessel does not scale uniformly in all dimensions, then this type of scaling introduces errors and
should not normally be used. Instead, accurate data specific to this vessel should be obtained.
However, for ships in head and stern seas the RAO scaling errors may be acceptable, since the RAOs for
these wave directions depend mainly on vessel length. For other cases the RAO scaling is likely to be
poor, so OrcaFlex issues a warning if scaling is used and the wave direction is not close to a head or
stern sea.
Initial Position and Orientation
These specify the vessel's static position relative to the global axes. The Initial Position defines the position of the
vessel origin V. The Initial Orientation defines the orientation of the vessel axes Vxyz as three rotations, Heading,
Trim and Heel. The static orientation of Vxyz is that which results from starting with Vxyz aligned with the global axes
and applying the Heading rotation about Vz, then the Trim rotation about Vy and finally the Heel rotation about Vx.
If the vessel is not included in the static analysis then this Initial Position is taken to be the static position of the vessel. If
the vessel is included in the static analysis, then this Initial Position is used as an initial estimate of the vessel position
and the statics calculation will move the vessel from this position iteratively until an equilibrium position is found.
Note: The vessel Z coordinate can only be changed by editing on the vessel data form. Dragging in the Z
direction with the mouse is prevented.
Warning: If you have included any harmonic motion on the vessel (see Harmonic Motion) then the phases of the
harmonic motions will normally depend on the vessel Initial Position, so if you change the Initial
Position you may need to change the harmonic motion phases accordingly.
w

228
Calculation Data
The following settings (on the Calculation page on the vessel data form) control how the vessel's static position and
dynamic motion are determined.
Included in Static Analysis
You can control whether the OrcaFlex static analysis calculates the static equilibrium position of the vessel, or simply
places the vessel in the userspecified initial position.
OrcaFlex first places the vessel at the initial position and orientation specified by the user. If Included in Static
Analysis is set to None then OrcaFlex leaves the vessel in this userspecified position. This is not necessarily an
equilibrium position.
If Included in Static Analysis is set to 3 DOF then OrcaFlex starts from the userspecified position and adjusts the
vessel's X, Y and Heading until an equilibrium position is reached. Note that only these 3 free degrees of freedom of the
vessel (X, Y and Heading) are included in the calculation. The other three degrees of freedom (Z, Heel and Trim) are
assumed to be constrained and so are left at the values specified by the user. This means that the Z component of
resultant force may be nonzero in the equilibrium position. Likewise the resultant Heel and Trim moments may be non
zero in the equilibrium position.
If Included in Static Analysis is set to 6 DOF then OrcaFlex starts from the userspecified position and adjusts all six
degrees of freedom until an equilibrium position is reached. In this case, all of the X, Y, Z forces and Heel, Trim, Heading
moments will be zero at the equilibrium position.
Note: If multiple statics are being performed on the vessel then no equilibrium calculation is performed on
the vessel and its placement is determined by the multiple statics data. Other vessels in the model are
included in the static analysis as specified by their own data.
Dynamic Analysis
The motion of a vessel during the dynamic analysis can be specified in a variety of ways. OrcaFlex allows the vessel
motion to be made up of two parts, called the Primary motion and the Superimposed motion. Broadly, the Primary
motion is aimed at modelling the steady or low frequency motion of the vessel, whereas the Superimposed motion is
aimed at modelling the higher frequency motion, such as that generated by waves.
As an example, consider a ship being driven under power along a specified course. In the absence of waves it moves
steadily along its course and this would be modelled by the Primary motion. But when waves are present the primary
motion is augmented by wavegenerated motion that would often be modelled in OrcaFlex as Superimposed motion
specified by RAOs. OrcaFlex superimposes this latter motion on the primary motion to give the total combined motion of
the vessel.
You can specify the Primary and Superimposed motions in a number of ways, as follows. See examples below of how
these options can be used.
Primary Motion
The Primary motion determines what OrcaFlex refers to as the primary position of the vessel. It can be one of the
following options.
None. In this option there is no primary motion and the primary position of the vessel remains fixed at the position
determined by the static analysis.
Prescribed. This option allows you to drive the vessel around the sea surface, for example to model the vessel
moving station during the simulation. The vessel's speed and course is specified using the data on the Prescribed
Motion page on the vessel data form.
Calculated (3 DOF). In this option OrcaFlex calculates the vessel primary motion in only 3 degrees of freedom
(surge, sway, yaw) based on the included loads plus loads from any lines or other objects that are attached to the
vessel. There is no primary motion in the other 3 degrees of freedom (heave, roll, pitch). The added mass and
damping matrices of the vessel type must be specified, plus the data for all the included loads.
w
229
Calculated (6 DOF). In this option OrcaFlex calculates the vessel motion in all 6 degrees of freedom, based on the
included loads, plus loads from any lines or other objects that are attached to the vessel. The added mass, damping,
stiffness and equilibrium position of the vessel type must be specified, plus the data for all the included loads.
Time History. In this option the user specifies the primary motion in a time history file that defines, as a function of
time, the vessel Primary X, Primary Y, Primary Z, Primary Rotation 1, Primary Rotation 2 and Primary Rotation 3.
See the vessel's Time History data.
Superimposed Motion
The Superimposed motion is applied as an offset from the position given by the primary motion. It can be one of the
following options.
None. In this option there is no offset and the vessel position is equal to the primary position at all times.
RAOs + Harmonic. In this option the vessel's position oscillates harmonically about the primary position. The
harmonically varying offset comes from two sources. Firstly, if waves are present and you specify nonzero
displacement RAOs for the vessel type, then the offset will include the wavegenerated harmonic motions specified
by those RAOs. Secondly, the vessel's superimposed offset also includes any harmonic motions that you specify on
the Harmonic Motions page on the vessel data form.
Time History. In this option the user specifies the offset in a time history file that defines the vessel Surge, Sway,
Heave, Roll, Pitch and Yaw as a function of time. See the vessel's Time History data.
Typical Examples of Primary and Superimposed Motion
Here are some typical examples of how primary and superimposed motion can be combined to achieve various things.
Primary motion set to None and superimposed motion set to RAOs + Harmonic can be used to model a simple
steady (e.g. moored) vessel whose motion is due to the 1st order wave effects only.
Prescribed or Time History primary motion can be used to model a vessel being driven over a predetermined
course, and the superimposed motion set to RAOs + Harmonic to model the 1st order wave induced motion.
Calculated (3 DOF) primary motion can be used to model the low frequency slow drift of a vessel (due to 2nd order
wave loads, wind and current drag, etc.), with the superimposed motion set to RAOs + Harmonic to model the
superimposed 1st order wave induced motion.
Calculated (6 DOF) primary motion can be used to model the whole motion of a vessel, optionally including 1st and
2nd order wave loads, current and wind drag loads, applied loads, and always including loads from any attached
lines or other objects. In this case the superimposed motion would normally be None, since all motion has already
been accounted for in the primary motion, and the displacement RAO data would therefore not be used.
Time History primary motion (or Time History superimposed motion but not usually both) can be used to
completely specify the motion of a vessel.
Included Effects
You can choose which vessel loads are included and which are ignored by ticking the corresponding checkboxes. If a box
is checked then that load will be calculated and applied to the vessel, and its value will be available as a result. If a box is
not checked, then that load will not be calculated and it will be taken as zero.
Note: Loads that are included will only affect the vessel motion if the primary motion is set to one of the
Calculated options. Otherwise the vessel motion is specified, for example by prescribed motion or by
superimposed motion based on the displacement RAOs.
Prescribed Motion
The prescribed motion data only applies if the vessel's Primary Motion is set to Prescribed. It enables you to drive the
vessel around the sea surface along a predetermined path, by specifying how the vessel's primary position and heading
change during the simulation.
The vessel is driven by specifying, for each stage of the simulation, the velocity (speed and direction) of the primary
position and the rate of change of the heading.
w

230
Warning: The Prescribed Motion facility can cause discontinuities of velocity at stage boundaries and these may
cause transients in the system. OrcaFlex issues warnings at the start of the simulation if the data
specifies a discontinuous velocity.
Speed of Motion
For each simulation stage the speed of the motion can be specified as either a Constant Speed or a Speed Change.
If Constant Speed is selected then that speed applies throughout the stage.
If Speed Change is selected then the speed is incremented linearly by the specified amount during the stage. For
example, an increment of 1m/s during a stage of length 10 seconds causes an acceleration of 0.1m/s
2
to be applied
throughout the stage, so that if the vessel starts at rest then at the start of the next stage the vessel is travelling at 1m/s.
Note: Negative speeds can be specified.
Direction of Motion
For each simulation stage the direction of the motion can be specified as either relative to the Global X direction or
relative to the Vessel heading.
The direction value is interpreted as an azimuth. So, a value of 90 relative to the Global X direction would result in the
motion being in the global Y direction. Likewise, if the vessel's heading was 130 and the direction of motion was 50
relative to the Vessel heading then the motion would be an azimuth of 130 + 50 = 180 relative to global, that is in the
global X direction.
Note: The direction of motion is not restricted to be in the same direction as the vessel heading.
Rate of Turn
In addition to varying the velocity of the mean position, you can specify a Rate of Turn for each stage. This is the angle
change per second to be applied to the vessel's heading throughout the stage.
If the Direction of Motion is specified relative to the Vessel heading and the Rate of Turn is nonzero, then the vessel
velocity direction varies during the stage. In addition, if the direction is 0 relative to Vessel heading then the vessel
velocity, whilst varying, is always in the Vessel heading direction.
If the direction is specified relative to the Global X direction then the vessel velocity direction is not affected by the Rate
of Turn.
Harmonic Motion
The Harmonic Motion page (on the vessel data form) only applies if the vessel's superimposed motion is set to RAOs +
Harmonic. It allows you to specify a number of harmonic motions of the vessel.
The harmonic motions are in addition to any wavegenerated motion specified by the RAO data, so if you only want the
wavegenerated motion then you should set the number of harmonic motions to zero.
Each harmonic motion is a singleperiod sinusoidal motion of the vessel, specified by giving:
the Period of the harmonic motion; this applies to all 6 degrees of freedom,
the Amplitude and Phase of the motion for each of the 6 degrees of freedom of the vessel. If you are modelling slow
drift, then note that slow drift normally only applies to surge, sway and yaw, in which case the amplitudes for heave,
roll and pitch should be set to zero.
Note: The harmonic motion amplitudes (unlike the RAO responses of the vessel) are not specified relative to a
wave amplitude - they are specified directly in length units (for surge, sway and heave) or degrees (for
roll, pitch and yaw).
Similarly, the phases are not specified relative to the phase of a wave they are the phase lags from the global time
origin T=0 until the maximum harmonic motion occurs. More precisely, the phase that should be specified for the
harmonic motion is given by
360 ((Tmax / P) mod 1)
w
231
where P is the period of the harmonic motion and Tmax is the global time at which you want the maximum of the
motion to occur.
Warning: Harmonic motions can be used to model pre-calculated vessel slow drift. If you do this, then if you move
the vessel's Initial Position in the wave direction, or if you change the data for the waves (other than
changing the simulation time origin), then you will normally also then have to adjust the phases of the
slow drift. This is because such changes affect the global time at which a particular part of the wave
train will reach the vessel and hence will also affect the global time at which maximum slow drift
motion is achieved.
Time History
The Time History pages (on the vessel data form) only apply if the vessel's primary or superimposed motion, or both,
are set to Time History. It allows you to specify the motion by giving a time history file. To do this:
On the Calculation page set the primary motion or superimposed motion data item (or both) to Time History.
Create a tabdelimited text file containing the time history motion you want. See below for details.
On the appropriate Time History page, set the Input File to the name of the time history file and specify which
columns in the file contain the data. The Browse button allows you to specify the file by finding it, and the Import
Wizard button then provides a visual way of specifying which column is which. See Time History Files for details.
Set the time history's time origin and the simulation time origin (on the Waves page of the environment data form)
so that the simulation covers the period you want.
Choose which interpolation method you want OrcaFlex to use when it needs the vessel position and orientation for
times between those specified in the time history file.
Note: For most purposes we recommend using Cubic Spline interpolation, since it gives continuity of vessel
velocity and acceleration. Cubic Bessel interpolation typically gives step changes in acceleration at the
specified time samples, and Linear interpolation gives zero acceleration between the times specified
and then an infinite acceleration when the velocity changes at a specified time sample. Such
acceleration effects can manifest themselves as steps or spikes in the inertial forces on any objects
attached to the vessel.
Contents of Time History File
The time history file must contain a time column and columns for all 6 degrees of freedom of the vessel. For primary
time history motion these are Primary X, Primary Y, Primary Z, Primary Rotation 1, Primary Rotation 2 and Primary
Rotation 3, measured relative to the global axes.
For superimposed time history motion the degrees of freedom that must be specified are Surge, Sway, Heave, Roll, Pitch
and Yaw. They are measured relative to the primary position of the vessel, as specified by the vessel's primary motion.
For details of how rotations are applied, see order of application of rotations.
The time values in a vessel time history file need not be equally spaced. The units used for all the columns must be the
same as those used in the OrcaFlex model, so the time values must be in seconds and angles in degrees.
For further details of the file format see Time History Files.
Notes: If there is any wave-generated motion present in a vessel's time history motion then the OrcaFlex wave
data needs to match the wave that generated that motion. If you have suitable data for the wave
elevation then you can use that to specify the wave by time history. This can be done either in a
separate time history file for the wave or else in an extra column in the vessel's time history file.
The position and velocity specified by a time history file for the start of the simulation (i.e. for
SimulationTime = -BuildUpDuration) will not, in general, match the static state from which OrcaFlex
starts the simulation. To handle this OrcaFlex uses ramping during the build-up stage to smooth the
transition from the static state to the position and motion specified in the time history file.
w

232
Applied Loads
You can optionally include applied loads on a vessel.
You can apply to the vessel external Global Loads that do not rotate if the vessel rotates. These are specified by giving
the components of Applied Force and Applied Moment relative to global axes. These components can be constant,
vary with simulation time or be given by an external function. If the vessel rotates then the loads do not rotate with it.
In addition, you can specify external Local Loads that do rotate with the vessel. These are specified by giving the
components of Applied Force and Applied Moment relative to vessel axes. Again these components can be constant, vary
with simulation time or be given by an external function. If the vessel rotates then the loads do rotate with it. These are
suitable for modelling thrusters, for example.
In both cases the Point of Application of the load is specified by giving its x,y,z coordinates relative to vessel axes.
Note: Applied loads will only affect vessel static position if the corresponding degree of freedom is included in
the static analysis, and will only affect the motion if the Primary Motion is set to one of the calculated
options which includes the degree of freedom.
Multiple Statics
The offsets for multiple statics calculations are specified here. Offsets are from the vessel's initial position and are
specified by giving a range of azimuth and offset values. For example:

The Azimuths table determines which directions are to be analysed. The Offsets table specifies how far in the given
direction the vessel is to be placed. With the above data, the offsets analysed by the multiple statics calculation are as
illustrated by the dots in the diagram below:
w
233
0m 20m 40m 60m 80m 100m
180 deg
135 deg
90 deg
45 deg
0 deg
Vessel Initial
Position
X
Y

Figure: Example Offsets
A diagram showing the selected offsets is drawn on the Vessel Offsets data form, to help visualise which offsets will be
analysed.
Drawing
Vessels are drawn as wire frames defined in the data as a set of Vertices and Edges. The Vertices are defined by giving
their coordinates relative to the vessel axes Vxyz. The Edges are lines drawn between two vertices.
For shaded graphics views, by default, the vessel is drawn using a solid, filledin shape based on the vertices and edges.
As an alternative you can use the vertices and edges to define a frame like structure. If the edge diameter is '~' then that
edge will be used to build a filled in shape, otherwise that edge is drawn as a cylinder with the specified diameter. Note
that you can use a mixture of edge diameters (some defined, some set to '~') to combine both filled in and framework
shapes.
You can define wire frame drawing data in two places for the vessel and also for its vessel type. The vessel is drawn by
first drawing a wire frame based on the vertices, edges and pen specified for its vessel type (see the vessel types data
form). Then a further vesselspecific wire frame may be drawn, using any vertices, edges and pen that you specify on the
vessel's data form.
This allows you to specify a wire frame drawing of the basic vessel type, and then optionally add to it (possibly in a
different colour) a wire frame drawing of some equipment that is specific to that vessel. If the vessel length differs from
the vessel type length, then the vessel type wire frame is scaled accordingly. Note that either, or both, of these wire
frames can be empty (i.e. no edges) if desired.
The drawing data do not affect the mathematical model in any way they are purely for drawing 3D views. The vertices
and edges follow the motions of the vessel, and thus may be used to improve understanding of the motion of the model.
They can also be used to represent a spar or other equipment attached to the vessel, so that you can then look for
clashing with other parts of the system. For example during a simulation replay you can adjust the viewpoint to look
exactly along the edge of interest, and check visually if other parts of the model pass through it.
w

234
Shaded Drawing
By default, for shaded 3D Views, vessels are drawn using the wire frame data.
Alternatively they can be represented by an imported 3D model by specifying the Shaded Drawing Folder. The folder
must contain a .x file with the same filename as the folder. For example, if the folder is called "MyVessel" then the .x file
in that folder must be called "MyVessel.x". If you use a relative path then the path will be taken as relative to the folder
containing the OrcaFlex file (.dat or .sim).
The Browse button allows you to specify the Shaded Drawing Folder quickly and also provides quick access to the
Orcina sample drawings via the Navigate to Orcina sample drawings button.
The Use Culling option is normally selected since it can provide a useful performance benefit. However, in order to
work it requires that the triangles defined in the .x file have their outward facing directions defined correctly. In the
unusual situation where the outward facing directions are not defined correctly then the .x file will not display correctly.
If this happens then typically sections of the model will be missing when drawn by OrcaFlex. Disabling the Use Culling
option resolves this problem.
Draw Size is provided to allow you to scale the drawing. All directions are scaled equally to arrange that the longest
side in the drawing is drawn to the specified Draw Size. This longest side is calculated by first fitting the smallest
possible cuboid around the vertices of the shaded drawing (these are defined in the .x file). This cuboid is aligned with
the shaded drawing's local axes. Then the length of the longest side of this cuboid is found.
Specify a value of '~' to display the drawing using the absolute coordinates as specified in the .x file.
Note: If you use a value of '~' for Draw Size then OrcaFlex uses the coordinates in the .x file directly. If these
coordinates use a different length units system from your OrcaFlex model then you should specify the
units used in the .x file by including an auxiliary file called AdditionalInformation.txt. Examples of this
can be found in the sample shaded drawings provided by Orcina.
Shaded Drawing Origin is provided because the shaded drawing and the vessel may have different origins. The Shaded
Drawing Origin defines the origin of the shaded drawing with respect to the vessel's local axis system. Similarly Shaded
Drawing Orientation allows you to reorient the shaded drawing to match the vessel's axis system.
External Functions
Parameters
Properties Report
The Vessel properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Length
The length of the vessel.
Wave direction relative to vessel
The relative wave direction. If there is more than one wave train then the direction of the first wave train is used.
Statics force accuracy, Statics moment accuracy
These are only reported if the vessel is included in statics.
The static analysis searches for an equilibrium position for the vessel that is a position for which the resultant force
and moment on the vessel is zero. We refer to the resultant force and moment as the out of balance load. Because
computers have limited numerical precision the static analysis cannot always find a configuration where the out of
balance load is exactly zero. OrcaFlex accepts a position as a static equilibrium position if the largest out of balance load
component is less than the statics accuracy.
w
235
The Statics force accuracy equals Tolerance * vessel typical force and the Statics moment accuracy equals Tolerance *
vessel typical moment. The vessel typical force and moment are based on the forces and moments applied by connected
objects.
Reducing the Tolerance value will give a more accurate static equilibrium position, but will take more iterations.
OrcaFlex may not be able to achieve the Tolerance specified if it is too small, since the computer has limited numerical
precision.
Note: The statics accuracies change during the static analysis because the forces and moments applied by
connected objects vary with the position of the vessel. The statics accuracies reported in Reset state
may be quite different from those used for the final equilibrium position and should be treated as rough
approximations to the true statics accuracies.
7.7.2 Vessel Types
Each vessel has a vessel type that determines a lot of its data and which is defined on the vessel types form. You can
define a number of different vessel types and each type is given a name, which is then used on the vessel data form to
specify the type of that particular vessel.
Two different vessels can have the same type. To illustrate this, consider a model of a pipe being towed by two identical
tugs. This is modelled by creating a vessel type called 'Tug' and then creating two vessels, each of type 'Tug'. The RAOs,
for example, are data of the 'Tug' vessel type, since they apply to both tugs. On the other hand the two tugs differ in their
positions and any prescribed motion, so these are properties of the individual vessel objects.
You don't have to use all, or even any, of the vessel types you define. For example you can set up a data file that defines a
number of vessel types but has no vessels. Such a file can then act as a library of vessel types that can be imported into
other OrcaFlex data files.
Vessel Type Data
For each Vessel Type you can enter data for several different draughts, each draught having a userspecified Name. Each
vessel in the model must specify (on its vessel data form) which draught to use. It is not possible to use different
draughts at different times during the same simulation.
Some of the vessel type data apply to all draughts, but a lot of the data is draughtdependent and so separate data is
defined for each defined draught. See the following list of the main classes of vessel type data.
Geometry and drawing data. Applies to all draughts.
Conventions define the meaning of any RAO and wave drift QTF data. The conventions apply to all draughts.
RAO data. Separate RAOs are specified for each different draught. There is a Check RAOs facility that provides RAO
graphs that help detect errors.
Hydrodynamic and Wind Drag data. Separate values are specified for each different draught.
Wave Drift data. Separate values are specified for each different draught.
Inertia and Damping data. Separate values are specified for each different draught.
Default Vessel Type Data
When you create a new vessel type, it is given initial default data that corresponds to a tanker. You should replace this
with accurate data for the vessel you are modelling.
If your vessel is similar to the default data tanker then you might find the default data useful if you have no better data
available. However note that the default vessel tanker has a significant heave resonance in beam seas at 7s period.
The default data was obtained as follows.
The default structure data, displacement RAOs, wave load RAOs, wave drift QTFs, stiffness, added mass and
damping data all come from an NMIWave diffraction analysis of a 103m long tanker in 400m water depth. The
tanker used in this analysis had the following properties: Breadth 15.95m, Draught 6.66m, Transverse GM 1.84m,
Longitudinal GM = 114m, Block Coefficient 0.804. The diffraction analysis used 8% extra damping in roll about CG.
w

236
The default hydrodynamic and wind drag coefficients are based on graphs given in the standard OCIMF book. Note
that the OCIMF book gives different coefficients for different vessel types and draughts. The default vessel type data
are approximate averaged deepwater coefficients, and they have been rounded to only 1 or 2 significant figures.
The hydrodynamic and wind drag areas and area moments are set for the above 103m tanker. The wind drag areas
are based on an assumed average upperworks height of 12m for surge and 9m for sway.
OrcaFlex automatically Froude scales vessel type data to the vessel length you specify. So this default data might
sometimes still be useful if your vessel is a different length to the tanker described above, but is otherwise similar.
Structure
Vessel Type Length
The length to which the vessel type RAO and drawing data apply. This may be left unspecified ('~'). If a value is
specified, then it may be used to scale the vessel type data to the length of the vessel. See Vessel Length for details.
The remaining data on the Structure page (on the vessel type form) are only used if the vessel Primary Motion is set to
Calculated (3 DOF) or Calculated (6 DOF). Note that these data are draughtspecific.
Mass and Moments of Inertia
The vessel type's mass and its moments of inertia about axes through the CG in the vessel x, y and z directions. This
should include the structural and contents mass and inertia, but not the added mass.
Centre of gravity (CG)
The coordinates of the vessel type's centre of mass, relative to vessel axes.
Conventions
The conventions page (on the vessel types data form) contains settings that define the meaning of all the RAO and QTF
data. This enables you to enter RAO and QTF data directly from many other programs without having to convert the
values into OrcaFlex conventions. Instead you can tell OrcaFlex the conventions that apply to that data and OrcaFlex will
then automatically allow for those conventions when it uses the data.
Warning: In general, the conventions apply to all RAO and QTF data. You cannot mix data with differing
conventions in the same model (but see rotational RAOs below).
Although RAOs are simple enough in principle, a number of complications make them notoriously errorprone and
difficult to check in practice. The main issues are:
Different coordinate systems.
Different definitions of phase angle and rotational RAOs.
Use of vessel symmetry, e.g. to obtain motions in seas from the port side given data for seas from the starboard side.
OrcaFlex provides easy ways of handling these problem areas.
The use of differing coordinate systems and conventions by different suppliers of data is the main source of confusion. It
is vital that you know the conventions that apply to the RAO tables that you are using. Unfortunately, not all RAO tables
fully document the conventions used: see RAO data checklist for help finding out what conventions apply to your data
and see Checking RAOs to check that the conventions are set correctly.
Displacement RAO rotational amplitudes
Roll, pitch and yaw displacement RAOs may be specified relative to a wave of unit amplitude (e.g. degrees/metre), or to
a wave of unit steepness or unit maximum slope (e.g. degrees/degree). Wave steepness ( = Waveheight / Wavelength )
is a commonly used angular measure of a wave and maximum wave slope ( = .Waveheight / Wavelength ) is the true
maximum slope of the sea surface. Displacement RAOs specified relative to unit wave amplitude may be given in either
degrees or radians.
Rotational load RAOs must be given as moment per unit wave amplitude (e.g. kN.m/m), and rotational QTFs (i.e. the yaw
QTF) are nondimensional.
w
237
Therefore, the degrees/radians switch and the unit amplitude / steepness / maximum slope switch apply only to
displacement RAOs. This is the exception to the above rule that the conventions apply to all RAOs and QTFs.
Translational displacement RAOs are always nondimensional (e.g. metres/metre or feet/foot). Translational load RAOs
are always given as force per unit wave amplitude (e.g. kN/m).
Warning: If rotational displacement RAOs are given relative to wave slope or steepness, then OrcaFlex
(internally) converts them to be relative to wave amplitude using the deep water wavelength, not the
wavelength for the water depth specified in the model.
Waves are referred to by
The RAO and QTF data can be specified by period in seconds, or by frequency in radians/second or Hertz (cycles per
second).
Note: If you import RAO or QTF data from a text file, the setting specified here will be overridden by that
defined in the text file - see Importing RAO Data and Importing QTF Data for details.
RAO Phases
The RAO Phase convention is specified by 3 data items:
1. Phases are either leads or lags.
2. Phases are specified either in degrees or radians.
3. The phase defines the time at which the maximum positive value of the motion occurs. This is relative to the time at
which the wave crest, trough, zero up-crossing or zero down-crossing passes the phase origin.
Note: Wave Drift QTFs are not affected by this convention, since they are entered without any phase
information.
Directions
You must specify the directions that correspond to positive motion or load in the RAO and QTF data, and in the stiffness,
damping and added mass matrices. The most common convention is as given by the default OrcaFlex vessel type: a
righthanded system with Z upwards and clockwise rotations being positive.
Symmetry
You can specify symmetry of the vessel type. OrcaFlex will then use the userspecified RAO/QTF tables for wave
directions on one side of the symmetry plane to derive tables for the reflected directions on the other side of the plane.
The Symmetry can be set to:
None: The vessel type has no symmetry. The directions specified must cover all the wave directions used in the
simulation.
XZ plane (or YZ plane): This specifies that the XZ (or YZ) plane through the RAO origin is a plane of symmetry. For
each direction given OrcaFlex uses symmetry to derive tables for the reflected direction on the other side of the
plane.
XZ & YZ planes: This specifies that both the XZ and YZ planes through the RAO origin are planes of symmetry. For
each direction given OrcaFlex uses symmetry to derive tables for the reflected directions in the other 3 quadrants.
Circular: This specifies that the vessel has circular symmetry about the RAO origin. RAO/QTF tables can only be
given for one wave direction, and OrcaFlex uses symmetry to derive tables for all other directions.
Warning: If you specify some planes of symmetry then the RAO origin must be on all the planes of symmetry. Or if
you specify circular symmetry then the RAO origin must be at the centre of symmetry.
RAOs
OrcaFlex uses two different types of RAO (response amplitude operator): Displacement RAOs and Wave Load RAOs.
w

238
Displacement RAOs are specified on the RAOs page on the vessel type data form. They define the 1st order motion of the
vessel in response to waves of given period and amplitude. They are only used if the vessel superimposed motion is set
to RAOs+Harmonic. In the dynamic analysis the vessel moves harmonically, in all 6 degrees of freedom, about its
primary position. These harmonic motions are specified by giving the RAO amplitudes and phases, for all six degrees of
freedom, usually for a range of wave periods and directions. For further information see RAOs and Phases.
Wave load RAOs are specified on the Load RAOs page on the vessel type data form. They define the 1st order wave
force and moment on the vessel due to waves of given period and amplitude. They are only used if the 1st order wave
loads are included for the vessel and they only affect the motion if the vessel primary motion is set to one of the
calculated options.
The 2 types of RAOs are specified in very similar ways, using the following data.
RAO Origin
The RAO origin is the point on the vessel whose motion is defined by the RAOs. The RAO origin is specified by giving its
coordinates with respect to the OrcaFlex vessel axes (not the directions specified on the Conventions page). It is
commonly, but does not need to be, at the centre of gravity. Different draughts can use different RAO origins.
RAO Phase Origin
The RAO phase origin is the point on the vessel that the RAO phase values are relative to. It is specified by giving its x
and ycoordinates with respect to the OrcaFlex vessel axes (not the directions specified on the Conventions page). The
phase values given in the RAOs must be relative to the time that the wave crest or trough (depending on the RAO phase
conventions specified) passes the specified RAO phase origin.
Often the phase origin is the same as the RAO origin, i.e. the phases are relative to the time the crest or trough passes the
point whose motion the RAOs define. In this case the phase origin can be set to '~', meaning 'same as RAO origin'. But
note that some programs (one example being Moses) generate RAOs where the phase origin is not necessarily the same
as the RAO origin.
RAO Data
RAO data can be specified for a number of different wave directions relative to the vessel, using the OrcaFlex direction
convention. This relative wave direction is labelled on the page at the bottom of the RAO table. It is the direction in
which the wave is progressing, measured positive from the vessel xdirection towards the vessel ydirection.
To change the wave direction for one of the RAO tables, select that table and edit the Selected Direction. To insert a new
wave direction after an existing direction, select the existing direction's page and click the Insert Direction button.
Similarly, the Delete Direction button deletes the currently selected direction.
For each direction, the RAO table covers a range of wave periods or frequencies, as specified in the conventions data.
The periods/frequencies need not be entered in order they will be sorted before use.
In the case of a circular symmetric vessel, RAOs are specified for only one wave direction OrcaFlex will derive RAOs for
all other directions.
RAO Interpolation/Extrapolation
You must provide RAO tables that include or span the wave direction(s) involved in the simulation. If RAOs are required
for a wave direction for which an RAO table has not been supplied, then OrcaFlex will use linear interpolation to obtain
an RAO table for that direction.
For regular wave analysis, RAO data is only needed for the appropriate wave period, or for wave periods either side of
that period. For random sea simulations, RAO data should be specified for a wide enough range of wave periods to cover
the spectrum. The View Wave Components button (on the Waves page of the environment data form) reports the wave
frequencies that OrcaFlex will use to represent the spectrum.
Note: If the vessel length differs from the vessel type length then the RAO periods specified on the vessel type
form are Froude scaled, and it is these Froude scaled periods that must cover the actual wave period(s).
Linear interpolation is used if RAOs are required for a period that is between the periods given in the table. We strongly
recommend that your RAO tables provide data for periods that include or span all the wave periods that will be involved
w
239
in the simulation. However if RAOs are required for a period outside the range of periods given then OrcaFlex will use
linear extrapolation; a warning is given if this occurs.
You can avoid the need for extrapolation by providing RAOs for periods zero and Infinity. The RAOs for the zero period
limit must be all zero (since no object can respond to an infinite frequency wave). For the Infinity period limit the RAOs
of a freefloating vessel can be derived from the knowledge that the vessel must follow the surface in a sufficiently long
wave. See RAO Quality Checks for details.
Warning: Interpolation is likely to be poor if the interval involved is large. We therefore recommend that the RAO
directions defined cover all the wave directions that will be used and in steps of 30 or less.
Complex valued Interpolation and Extrapolation
Note that RAO interpolation and extrapolation is done using the complex value representation of the RAOs, in which the
RAO with amplitude A and phase lag P is represented by the complex number:
C(A,P) = A.(cos(P)+i.sin(P)).
For example, given RAOs (A1,P1) for direction D1 and (A2,P2) for direction D2, the interpolated RAO for the
intermediate direction D=(D1+D2)/2 is (A,P), where:
C(A,P) = ( C(A1,P1) + C(A2,P2) ) / 2
This gives better results than interpolating the amplitude and phase separately.
OrcaFlex first interpolates on direction, to obtain an RAO table appropriate to the wave direction. It then interpolates
(or extrapolates) that table to obtain the RAO for the appropriate wave period. Both of these stages are done using
complex valued interpolation or extrapolation.
Obtaining the data
All of the above data can generally be obtained from the results of a diffraction program. OrcaFlex can import these data
from the output files of some specific programs (AQWA and WAMIT) and from generic text files with OrcaFlexspecific
markers added. There are two different ways to do this import.
The easiest and most reliable way is to import all the hydrodynamic data for an appropriate vessel modelled in AQWA
or WAMIT, via the Import Hydrodynamic Data button on the Vessel Types data form. The Vessel Type conventions
will be set in accordance with those used by the diffraction program.
Alternatively, you may use the Import RAOs button to import only the RAO data. This may be useful if your data come
from a different source. Note, however, that RAO and phase origins are not imported and the Vessel Type conventions
are not set by this method.
Stiffness, Added Mass and Damping
Reference Origin
The origin to which the stiffness, added mass and damping matrices all refer, specified as coordinates with respect to
the OrcaFlex vessel axes.
Equilibrium Position
The Z above mean water level and the heel and trim (relative to global axes) of the reference origin when the vessel is in
hydrostatic equilibrium for this draught. Note that Z above mean water level (rather than Z relative to global axes) is
specified, so that the vessel type data is independent of mean water level or choice of position of global origin.
Added Mass, Damping and Hydrostatic Stiffness
All these matrices must be specified with respect to axes through the given Reference Origin in the conventions
directions, i.e. with respect to the directions specified on the conventions page of the vessel types form.
For details of the units, and the theory used, see Vessel Theory: Stiffness, Added Mass and Damping.
w

240
Hydrostatic Stiffness
The hydrostatic stiffness matrix is only specified for heave, roll and pitch directions. It is applied in Statics only if the
vessel's Static Analysis includes 6 DOF, and in dynamics only if the vessel's Primary Motion is set to "Calculated (6
DOF)".
Added Mass and Damping
The added mass and damping matrices are specified in all 6 degrees of freedom. They are always applied to the vessel,
but will only influence the motion of the vessel if the Primary Motion is set to one of the calculated modes.
Added Mass and Damping Method
If you choose Constant for the Added Mass and Damping method, then singlevalued added mass and damping matrices
will be used.
If you choose Frequency Dependent, then you may specify a number of added mass and damping matrices, each pair
corresponding to a particular given frequency or period. Whether you specify period or frequency values is determined
by the Waves are referred to by setting on the Vessel Type Conventions page.
If you use the Constant (i.e. frequency independent) method, then you should specify values that are appropriate to the
frequency of vessel motion you expect. To calculate slow drift motion of the vessel it is normally appropriate to enter
low frequency values. Otherwise values corresponding to the dominant wave frequency are perhaps more appropriate.
Clearly, if the vessel experiences a wide range of frequencies, the frequencydependent method is more appropriate and
would be expected to give better results.
If you use the Frequency Dependent method then you need to specify both the added mass and damping matrices, and
for a range of frequencies. Also. the added mass and damping data should be consistent in the sense that they obey the
KramersKronig relations see Consistent Added Mass and Damping for details.
Cutoff Time
When you use frequencydependent added mass and damping, OrcaFlex applies the frequencydependent data in the
time domain by calculating and applying the vessel's Impulse Response Functions (IRF). See Vessel Theory: Impulse
Response and Convolution for details.
Realistic IRFs decay to zero with increasing time lag. So to improve the calculation speed OrcaFlex truncates the Impulse
Response Function at the time lag specified by the Cutoff Time. The IRF is assumed to be zero for time lags greater than
the Cutoff Time.
Larger Cuttoff Time values might give more accurate results but require more calculation. In order to choose the Cutoff
Time, you may find it useful to use the Report Vessel Response window to view the graphs of the components of the IRF.
From the graphs you could decide the time lag at which the function has decayed sufficiently close to zero as to have
little or no effect on the calculation.
Note 1: The damping matrix given by a diffraction program models wave radiation damping. However there is
another, often more important, source of damping, namely wave drift damping. See Damping Effects on
Vessel Slow Drift. Wave drift damping can be modelled in OrcaFlex by adjusting the diagonal entries in
the damping matrix.
Note 2: In OrcaFlex 8.5a, and earlier releases, added mass, damping and stiffness matrices were specified with
respect to OrcaFlex vessel axes. Whereas in OrcaFlex 8.5b, and later releases, they are specified with
respect to the conventions directions. We have made this change since the data typically comes from
the same source as the RAOs (e.g. from a diffraction program) and the conventions directions specify
the directions that the RAOs are defined with respect to.
When you use OrcaFlex 8.5b (or later) to open a file written by one of those earlier releases then
OrcaFlex automatically changes the data to be with respect to the conventions directions. (The effect of
the change is that the (i,j) element of the matrix changes sign if the conventions directions are opposite
to the OrcaFlex vessel axes directions for degree of freedom i or degree of freedom j, but not both. There
is therefore no change unless some of the conventions directions are opposite to the OrcaFlex vessel
directions, in which case some of the off-diagonal terms change sign.)
w
241
Because OrcaFlex automatically handles the change for you, there is no need for you to take any action,
assuming that your data was previously specified correctly with respect to OrcaFlex vessel directions.
However we recommend that you check that your data is now correctly specified with respect to the
conventions directions. If the data has come from the same source as the RAOs, and the conventions
directions specify the directions used by that source, then the matrices in OrcaFlex should match those
from the source, with no changes.
Obtaining the data
All of the above data can generally be obtained from the results of a diffraction program. OrcaFlex can import these data
from the output files of some specific programs AQWA and WAMIT in particular. There are two different ways to do
this import.
The easiest and most reliable way is to import all the hydrodynamic data for an appropriate vessel modelled in one of
these packages, via the Import Hydrodynamic Data button on the Vessel Types data form. The Vessel Type
conventions will be set in accordance with those used by the diffraction program.
Alternatively, you may (with the frequencydependent method selected) use the Import Data button to import only the
added mass and damping data. In this case, the stiffness matrix will not be imported, nor the reference origin or
equilibrium position, and the conventions given on the conventions page will not be set. You may also, depending on the
way that you use this Vessel Type, need to obtain RAOs and /or QTFs for it. Note, however, that the conventions must be
set correctly and must be consistent across the different data.
On clicking the Import Data button, you will be prompted to select a file. Select a WAMIT output file (usually "*.out") or
an AQWA output file ("*.lis"), and OrcaFlex will read in the file, extract all the frequency, added mass and damping data,
and enter these values on the OrcaFlex data form for you. All existing frequencydependent added mass and damping
data for the selected draught will be overwritten. If the units used in the data file differ from those currently defined in
OrcaFlex, then the data will be scaled to the OrcaFlex units automatically.
Drag Loads
Hydrodynamic and wind drag loads on a vessel are square law loads due to the relative velocity of the fluid past the
vessel. They can be modelled using the data on the Hydrodynamic Drag and Wind Drag pages on the vessel type data
form. If the length of the vessel differs from that of the vessel type then the vessel type data will be scaled accordingly.
Drag loads are an important source of damping when modelling vessel slow drift. For a discussion of the various
damping sources see Damping Effects on Vessel Slow Drift.
The velocity used to calculate the drag loads is the relative velocity of the fluid past the vessel. This includes any current
or wind velocity and the vessel velocity due to any primary motion. The drag forces and moments due to translational
motion are modelled using the standard OCIMF method. The drag forces and moments due to any vessel rate of yaw are
modelled using yaw rate drag load factors. For details of how the loads are calculated, see Vessel Theory: Drag Loads.
Warning: The current and wind loads are based on theory for surface vessels and are not suitable for submerged
vessels.
Load Origin
The coordinates (relative to vessel axes) of the point on the vessel at which the hydrodynamic or wind drag loads are
calculated and at which they will be applied. This need not be at the vessel origin. It is normally best to place the load
origin at the centre of the vessel.
The velocity used in the hydrodynamic drag load calculation is the current velocity at the load origin, minus any velocity
of the load origin due to primary motion of the vessel. Note that if the load origin is above the water surface then the
current velocity used is that at the water surface.
The velocity used in the wind load calculation is the wind velocity (as specified on the Wind page on the environment
data form), minus any velocity of the wind load origin due to primary motion of the vessel. Note that the wind velocity
specified should be that at 10m above mean water level, since that is the height used by the OCIMF vessel wind load
model (see Wind Speed for more details).
w

242
Load Symmetry
Specifies what symmetry the vessel type has below (for hydrodynamic drag) or above (for wind drag) the water line,
about the load origin. For XZ and YZ symmetry, OrcaFlex will use the symmetry to derive load coefficients for extra
directions generated by reflection in the specified vessel axes planes. For circular symmetry, you must specify
coefficients for one direction only and OrcaFlex will use symmetry to derive coefficients for all other directions.
Note: The symmetry for hydrodynamic drag, wind drag and RAOs (see RAO Symmetry) need not be the same,
though of course the symmetry for hydrodynamic drag would normally be the same as that for RAOs.
Areas and Area Moment
The surge and sway areas and yaw area moment that will be used to calculate the current or wind loads. For details see
Vessel Theory: Drag Loads.
Coefficients
Load coefficients are specified for the vessel surge, sway and yaw directions. They depend on the direction of the
current or wind, relative to the vessel (direction 0 meaning from astern, 90 meaning from starboard, etc.).
OrcaFlex uses any symmetry specified to derive coefficients for other directions and then uses linear interpolation to
derive coefficients for intermediate directions.
Note: When the symmetry is XZ and YZ the yaw moments must be zero, so OrcaFlex forces zero yaw
coefficients in this case.
The View Coefficients button allows you to view the coefficients that will be used the blobs on the graph show the
coefficients you have specified plus any that OrcaFlex has derived using reflection, and the curve shows the interpolated
coefficients that will be used for intermediate directions. You should specify sufficient directions to define the shape of
the curve and to cover the range of directions that the vessel will experience.
Yaw Rate Drag Factors
The yaw rate drag factors only apply to the hydrodynamic load data. They determine the yaw drag moment, and any
surge and sway drag forces, that result if the vessel has a nonzero rate of yaw. With wind drag this effect is insignificant.
For a slender ship, and if the load origin has been placed at the centre of the vessel, then the surge and sway drag factors
can usually be taken to be zero, and then yaw drag factor can be estimated based on the vessel length and draught. See
Drag Loads due to Yaw Rate for details.
Wave Drift Loads
The Wave Drift page on the vessel type form contains the Quadratic Transfer Functions (QTFs) that OrcaFlex uses to
calculate a wave drift load (sometimes called the slow drift load).
Note: The wave drift load is only calculated for a vessel if the Wave Drift Load (2nd Order) option is
checked in the list of vessel Included Effects, and will only affect the vessel motion if the vessel primary
motion is set to one of the Calculated options. See Modelling Vessel Slow Drift for details.
See Wave Drift Load Theory for details of how OrcaFlex calculates the wave drift loads.
QTF Origin
The QTF origin is the point on the vessel to which the QTFs apply. The wave drift loads are calculated based on the wave
conditions at this point and they are applied at this point. The QTF origin is specified relative to the OrcaFlex vessel axes
(not the directions specified on the Conventions page) and different draughts can use different origins. There is no need
to specify the zcoordinate of the point since the loads are calculated and applied only for the surge, sway and yaw
degrees of freedom.
Wave Drift QTFs
QTFs are only entered for surge, sway and yaw, since OrcaFlex does not calculate wave drift loads (or vessel slow drift)
for heave, roll and pitch. This is because the heave, roll and pitch wave drift loads are normally not significant when
compared to the typically much larger buoyancy restoring forces in those degrees of freedom.
w
243
The QTF are specified in nondimensional form. For surge and sway the value specified is the wave drift force from a
wave of unit amplitude, divided by .g.L, where is the nominal sea density, g is the acceleration due to gravity and L is
the vessel length. For yaw the value specified is the wave drift moment from a wave of unit amplitude, divided by .g.L
2
.
For further details see Wave Drift Load Theory.
No phases are required because only the diagonal terms of the full QTF matrix are entered in OrcaFlex, and these
diagonal terms always have zero phase. OrcaFlex uses Newman's approximation to obtain the offdiagonal QTFs from
the diagonal QTFs specified. See Wave Drift Load Theory for details.
The way QTF data is entered in OrcaFlex has many similarities with RAO data. In particular:
For each draught, QTF tables are specified for each of a number of wave directions, specified using the Orcina
direction convention. To insert a new table use the Insert Direction button and to delete a table select that table's
page and then click the Delete Direction button. To change the direction associated with a table, select that table's
page and then edit the Selected Direction value.
Some of the RAO conventions apply to the QTFs.
If the vessel type has some symmetry (see the conventions page) then OrcaFlex automatically generates QTF tables
for all the reflected directions implied by that symmetry. You must provide QTF tables for enough directions for
OrcaFlex to have data (either userspecified or generated based on symmetry) for directions that cover the wave
directions the vessel will experience.
Each QTF table consists of data for a range of wave periods or frequencies (depending on the convention specified).
You should provide data for periods that (after allowing for Froude scaling if the vessel length differs from the
vessel type length) cover the wave periods the vessel will experience.
Warning: The settings on the conventions page apply to all draughts and they apply to both the vessel type's
RAOs and to its wave drift QTFs. If your RAO and QTF data use different conventions you will therefore
need to transform your QTFs into the conventions of the RAOs (or vice versa) before using them in
OrcaFlex.
Obtaining the data
Wave drift QTF data can be imported into OrcaFlex, via the Import QTFs button, from text files from a variety of
different sources:
AQWA or WAMIT output files
NMIWAVE output files
Generic text files.
Specific program output files
OrcaFlex can import QTFs directly from AQWA and WAMIT output files, as described under Importing Hydrodynamic
Data. Note, however, that in this case (using the Import QTFs button) the QTF origin is not imported and the Vessel
Type conventions are not set. You may also, depending on the way that you use this Vessel Type, need to obtain RAOs
and added mass and damping data for it. Note, however, that the conventions must be set correctly and must be
consistent across the different data.
All existing QTF data for the selected draught will be overwritten. If the units used in the data file differ from those
currently defined in OrcaFlex, then the RAOs will be scaled to the OrcaFlex units automatically. The QTFs will also be
adjusted automatically for the nondimensional scaling used by OrcaFlex.
NMIWAVE files
NMIWAVE text output files may also be imported, with the addition of a line containing the string NMIWAVE Wave
Drift at the start of the file. Here is an example:
*** NMIWAVE Wave Drift Data ***
Scaled Tanker: Lpp, B, T (m) =310.90 ,48
0.31090E+03, -0.10000E+01, 0.10250E+04
45.00
w

244
1
0.50000E+01, 0.30000E-01
0.10000E+02, 0.10000E-02
0.15000E+02, 0.00000E+00
-0.10000E+01, 0.00000E+00
2
0.50000E+01, 0.90000E-01
0.10000E+02, 0.50000E-02
etc.
Note that NMIWAVE uses the ITTC conventions, which are surge +ve forward, sway +ve to starboard, heave +ve down,
roll +ve starboard down, pitch +ve bow up, yaw +ve bow to starboard. These are not set automatically on importing
these data. If your RAOs also use these conventions then they can be set on the Conventions page. Otherwise you will
need to modify the data to allow for convention differences.
The wave heading convention used by NMIWAVE is that wave heading is measured +ve clockwise when viewed from
above, and zero wave heading means a stern wave. This is the same as OrcaFlex uses, except that OrcaFlex measures +ve
anticlockwise. OrcaFlex automatically handles this by changing the sign of the wave headings when an NMIWAVE file is
imported.
OrcaFlex also automatically handles the conversion of NMIWAVE's dimensional data to the nondimensional form
required. This conversion uses the vessel length given in the NMIWAVE data file to perform the scaling.
Generic text files
Standard format is similar to the text format used to import RAOs, except of course that no phases or heave, roll or pitch
data are required. Here is a simple example:
*** OrcaFlex QTF Start Data ***
Draught Transit
Direction 45
WP surge sway yaw
0.0 0.030 0.090 -0.006
5.0 0.030 0.090 -0.006
10.0 0.001 0.005 -0.002
15.0 0.000 0.001 -0.001
Infinity 0.000 0.000 0.000
*** OrcaFlex QTF End Data ***
The QTF format differs from that for RAOs in two ways: (i) the identifier line is OrcaFlex QTF Start Data instead of
OrcaFlex RAO Start Data, and (ii) the column headers are surge, sway and yaw instead of X, Y, RZ. Otherwise, the
format follows that for importing RAOs.
Drawing
Drawing Data
Each vessel of this type is drawn as a wire frame, based on vertices and representing the vessel type, plus a wire frame
representing vesselspecific features. See Drawing.
Edge diameter (used only for shaded drawing)
For shaded graphics views, by default, the vessel is drawn using a solid, filledin shape based on the vertices and edges.
As an alternative you can use the vertices and edges to define a frame like structure. If the edge diameter is '~' then that
edge will be used to build a filled in shape, otherwise that edge is drawn as a cylinder with the specified diameter. Note
that you can use a mixture of edge diameters (some defined, some set to '~') to combine both filled in and framework
shapes.
w
245

Figure: Wire frames with different edge diameter. A value of '~' is used for the wire frame on the left and
a value of 1m is used for the wire frame on the right.
Shaded Drawing
By default, for shaded 3D Views, vessels are drawn using the wire frame data.
Shaded Drawing Origin is provided because the shaded drawing and the vessel type may have different origins. The
Shaded Drawing Origin defines the origin of the shaded drawing with respect to the vessel type's local axis system.
w

246
Similarly Shaded Drawing Orientation allows you to reorient the shaded drawing to match the vessel type's axis
system.
Vessel length scaling
If the vessel length and the vessel type length are different then the shaded drawing is scaled accordingly. This scaling is
applied in addition to the scaling of the shaded drawing specified by the Draw Size.
Importing Hydrodynamic Data
The Import Hydrodynamic Data button on the vessel types form enables the import of data, in the form of results from
common ship response calculation packages, into OrcaFlex. Presently, OrcaFlex can import data which has been output
by AQWA and WAMIT.
When you click this button, you will be prompted for the name of an AQWA or WAMIT results file. In each case, OrcaFlex
will attempt to import as much data as possible from the file to the appropriate data items on the vessel types form, for
the presently selected draught. These data are: displacement RAOs, load RAOs, QTFs, added mass and damping, and
hydrostatic stiffness. The vessel type conventions will also be set to match those of the imported data. Mass & inertia
and hydrostatic equilibrium position are not always output by these packages, but will be imported by OrcaFlex if they
are available. The remaining vessel type data are not typically calculated by such programs, so will need to be obtained
from another source. Any previouslyentered OrcaFlex data for which there are not any corresponding data in the
imported file will not be changed.
If the import fails for any reason, OrcaFlex will report an error and reinstate the vessel type data to that which was
present before the import began. If the data in the file are ambiguous, OrcaFlex will prompt you for clarification. At the
end of the import process, OrcaFlex will warn you of anything noteworthy (for example if no QTFs were present in the
file, or if a damping matrix was nonsymmetric).
Importing data from AQWA
AQWA results are output in a text file named *.lis. The data are in dimensional form.
Units
OrcaFlex first attempts to determine the units in use in the file, from the values of g (acceleration due to gravity) and
(water density), and the knowledge that the unit of time is the second. If this is successful, then OrcaFlex will convert the
data (if necessary) from the units in use in the file to the units of the OrcaFlex model. If the units cannot be determined,
or if they are a mixture of SI and US, OrcaFlex will be unable to convert the data in this way: in this case, the raw data
will be imported from the file unchanged and a corresponding warning will be issued.
Reference origins
All of the AQWA data have their reference origin at the vessel centre of gravity. So OrcaFlex sets the RAO origins, QTF
origin, and added mass & damping origin to the value of the centre of gravity given on the vessel types Structure page.
You will need to ensure that this value is appropriate before importing the AQWA data. RAO phase origins, likewise, are
at the vessel centre of gravity, so are set appropriately by OrcaFlex.
Added mass and damping
AQWA outputs the whole 6x6 matrices for added mass and damping, but OrcaFlex uses only the upper right triangle of
each. You will receive a warning if any of these matrices, in the imported file, are significantly nonsymmetric, since
OrcaFlex is unable to handle this.
RAOs
Displacement RAOs are imported in a straightforward way. Load RAOs are imported including the FroudeKrylov
contribution.
QTFs
Wave drift QTFs are presented nondimensionally in OrcaFlex. The dimensional data in the imported file are therefore
scaled as part of the import process: see Wave drift QTFs for details of the scaling factors involved.
w
247
Stiffness and equilibrium position
The heave, roll and pitch components of the hydrostatic stiffness matrix are imported. Again, only the upper right
triangle is used, and a warning is issued if the AQWA data are nonsymmetric. The Zcomponent of the equilibrium
position is imported. Since AQWA does not give the heel and trim values at the equilibrium position, these values are set
to zero: if necessary, you should edit these values yourself.
Mass and inertia
Mass and moments of inertia are imported, the latter from the diagonal elements of the inertia matrix output by AQWA.
Importing data from WAMIT
WAMIT results are output in a text file named *.out. The data are almost all nondimensional, the main exceptions to this
being g, acceleration due to gravity, and L, WAMIT's length scale which is used to nondimensionalise the data. Please
note that OrcaFlex is unable to import WAMIT data representing multibody problems.
Units
The length unit in use in the file will be determined, if possible, from the value of g and the knowledge that the unit of
time is the second. If this is successful, then OrcaFlex will convert the data from nondimensional to the units of the
OrcaFlex model, using WAMIT's length scale (converted to the length unit of the OrcaFlex model) and the current
OrcaFlex values of g (acceleration due to gravity) and (nominal water density), using the scaling factors defined in the
WAMIT user manual. If the length unit cannot be determined then the raw data will be imported from the file
unchanged and a corresponding warning will be issued.
Reference origins
All of the WAMIT data have their reference origin at WAMIT's vessel origin. OrcaFlex determine the position of this
origin, with respect to OrcaFlex's vessel origin, from the difference in the centre of gravity as given in the two coordinate
systems, and sets the RAO origins, QTF origin, and added mass & damping origin to have this value. (If you choose the
OrcaFlex vessel origin to be the same as the WAMIT vessel origin, then the coordinates of the centre of gravity will
coincide and the reference origins will all be zero).
In WAMIT, the phase origin is at the global origin, so the OrcaFlex RAO phase origins are represented by the coordinates
of the WAMIT global origin relative to the OrcaFlex vessel origin. We determine this by (i) expressing the WAMIT global
origin relative to the WAMIT vessel origin (ie in "bodyfixed axes"), using the values of XBODY, YBODY, ZBODY and
PHIBODY in the WAMIT output file, and (ii) translating this value to be relative to the OrcaFlex vessel origin, using the
difference between the centres of gravity in the two systems.
You will therefore need to ensure that the centre of gravity is set appropriately in OrcaFlex before importing the WAMIT
data.
Note: In some cases, WAMIT does not output the horizontal position of the centre of gravity. If so, then
OrcaFlex will warn you of this, and you will need to set these reference origins yourself.
Added mass and damping
WAMIT outputs added mass and damping as a list of (i,j) components. OrcaFlex imports these values, but uses only the
upper right triangle of each matrix. You will receive a warning if any of these matrices, in the imported file, are
significantly nonsymmetric, since OrcaFlex is unable to handle this. Components for which an (i,j) value is not given are
assumed to be zero. The nondimensional WAMIT values for added mass (a) and damping (b) are scaled to dimensional
(A,B respectively) values according to the formulae
Aij = L
k
aij, Bij = L
k
bij, where k = 3 for i,j=1,2,3; k = 4 for i=1,2,3, j=4,5,6 or i=4,5,6, j=1,2,3; k = 5 for i,j=4,5,6. is the
frequency in rad/s.
RAOs
Displacement RAOs are imported in a straightforward way. They are redimensionalised by multiplying by the factor L
k
,
k = 0 for i = 1,2,3; k = 1 for i = 4,5,6. WAMIT may calculate load RAOs in one of two ways, and either or both methods
(labelled "Haskind" and "Diffraction") may be present in the file. If both are given, OrcaFlex will prompt you to choose
one method and will import the data for that method only. The redimensionalising factor for load RAOs is g L
k
, k = 2
w

248
for i=1,2,3; k = 3 for i=4,5,6. The RAO directions (also for QTFs) in OrcaFlex are relative to the vessel, and are
determined by subtracting the value of PHIBODY in the WAMIT input file (the vessel heading at rest) from each of the
values of wave heading, which are given in WAMIT with respect to global axes.
QTFs
Wave drift QTFs are presented nondimensionally in OrcaFlex see Wave drift QTFs for details of the scaling factors
involved. Note that the length used in this scaling is the OrcaFlex vessel type length, which may differ from the WAMIT
length scale. To import these data, therefore, OrcaFlex must redimensionalise them using the WAMIT length scale L and
then nondimensionalise them again with OrcaFlex's vessel type length.
WAMIT may calculate QTFs in a number of different ways: Momentum Conservation, Pressure Integration, and Control
Surface. OrcaFlex is presently unable to import data resulting from the Momentum Conservation calculation, so this
method is disregarded. As with load RAOs, if data from more than one of the remaining methods is present, then you
will be prompted to choose just one of them.
Notes: WAMIT outputs QTFs for pairs of wave headings. OrcaFlex allows only unidirectional QTFs, so imports
only the data for which the two headings coincide.
WAMIT outputs QTFs as amplitude and phase pairs. OrcaFlex requires that the phase is zero, so
converts values with phase = 180 by negating the amplitude. If any phase is not 0 or 180 (to within
2), OrcaFlex will report an error and the import will be stopped.
Stiffness and equilibrium position
The heave, roll and pitch components of the hydrostatic stiffness matrix are imported. The equilibrium position is not
specified by WAMIT, so you should edit this value yourself.
Mass and inertia
Mass and moments of inertia are not imported from WAMIT files. You should enter these data yourself.
Importing RAOs
RAOs may be imported using the Import RAOs button on the vessel types form. Data may be imported from:
AQWA or WAMIT output files
Generic text files.
OrcaMotion .rao files (displacement RAOs only).
On clicking the Import RAOs button, you will be prompted for a filename. Select the file you require and OrcaFlex will
read the file, extract the RAO data, and enter these values on the OrcaFlex data form for you.
Import RAOs from specific program output
OrcaFlex can import RAOs directly from AQWA and WAMIT output files, as described under Importing Hydrodynamic
Data. Note, however, that in this case RAO and phase origins are not imported and the Vessel Type conventions are not
set. You may also, depending on the way that you use this Vessel Type, need to obtain QTFs and added mass and
damping data for it. Note, however, that the conventions must be set correctly and must be consistent across the
different data.
All existing RAO data for the selected draught will be overwritten. If the units used in the data file differ from those
currently defined in OrcaFlex, then the RAOs will be scaled to the OrcaFlex units automatically.
Import RAOs from generic text files
You can use generic text files to import RAO data from, for example, a ship response calculation program or model test
results.
w
249
Note: When you import RAOs from a text file, any RAO data previously present in OrcaFlex for the draughts
given in the text file will be deleted. (Other data for these draughts, e.g. wind and hydrodynamic drag
data, will not be affected.) So for each draught you import, all the RAOs for that draught must be in a
single file. You can therefore either put all the RAOs in a single file, or else have separate files for
separate draughts.
RAO data in a text file can be imported providing that the data appears in tabular form and markers are first inserted
into the file to identify the data to OrcaFlex. This saves the laborious and error prone job of typing in a large table of RAO
data. The markers, described below, can be inserted using a text editor or word processor; if using a word processor,
note that the file must be saved as an ASCII text file and not as a word processor document.
A text RAO file must contain the RAO data in the following form. It is usually easy to create a suitable file by adding a few
lines to your original response data file. See the examples.
The RAO data must appear in the file in one or more tables, each table being for one draught and direction. To
enable OrcaFlex to find the tables, each table must be preceded by a line containing the string OrcaFlex RAO Start
Data and must be immediately followed by a line containing the string OrcaFlex RAO End Data. There must not be
any blank lines between these two marker lines. Any mixture of upper and lower case is accepted.
Note: OrcaFlex does not distinguish between text files containing displacement RAOs and those containing
wave load RAOs. You must take care to import them into the correct location.
Immediately following the line containing the OrcaFlex RAO Start Data string there must be two lines (in either
order) specifying the draught and direction that applies to that table. The line specifying the draught must be of the
form Draught DraughtName, where DraughtName is the name of the draught. If the name contains spaces, then
DraughtName must be enclosed in quotes. The line specifying the direction must be of the form Direction n, where
n is a number specifying the direction the wave is progressing, in degrees, measured positive from forward towards
the port side. So direction 0 means waves coming from astern and direction 90 means waves coming from the
starboard side.
Following these two lines, the first line of the table must be a set of headers defining the subsequent columns. This
headers line consists of a number of character strings, separated by spaces. The strings indicate the contents of the
columns; the following header strings are recognised by OrcaFlex; otherwise the corresponding column is ignored.
See Header Strings for Text RAO Tables
If you want OrcaFlex to ignore a column, for example because it contains irrelevant or superfluous data, then insert
a header string, (e.g. "N/A" or "~") that is not listed in the above table. In particular, if the table contains both wave
period and frequency you must indicate that one of these is to be ignored, since OrcaFlex will not accept two
columns specifying the same information.
The remaining lines in the table must contain numbers, one for each header in the headers line, separated by any
string of characters that cannot appear in a number (i.e. anything except 0..9,,+,. or E). Please note that it is the
order of the columns that matters, not their actual position across the page. Hence, although it is natural to align the
headers above the columns of numbers, this is not in fact necessary.
There is no provision for specifying the associated conventions (other than whether the RAOs are given by period
or frequency) in the text file: the conventions data must be set to correspond to the imported data. Since the
conventions apply to all RAO data for the vessel type, the period/frequency convention specified by the header (WP
or WFH or WFR) must be consistent throughout the file. Similarly, the input origin and phase origin to which the
RAOs apply is not read in, but must be set on the Vessel Type form.
Import RAOs from *.rao files
OrcaMotion is an Orcina DOS program (now obsolete) for transforming and reporting RAOs.In this case please note the
following:
Each OrcaMotion file contains data for one wave direction, but the direction is not defined in the file. Therefore, to
import from a *.rao file, you must select the draught and direction to which the *.rao file applies and then click the
Import button. The imported data will overwrite the RAO table for the currently selected draught and direction.
w

250
Because the data in *.rao files always use the Orcina standard conventions, the conventions data in OrcaFlex will be
set to these standard conventions.
Warning: These conventions apply to all RAO data for this vessel type, so any existing data that does not conform
to the standard Orcina conventions, will be invalidated by importing a *.rao file.
Header Strings for Text RAO Tables
When importing RAOs from a text file, the following strings can be used in the headers line.
Header string Column contains
WP Wave period in seconds
WFH Wave frequency in Hz (cycles per second)
WFR Wave frequency in radians/second
XA Surge amplitude
XP Surge phase
YA Sway amplitude
YP Sway phase
ZA Heave amplitude
ZP Heave phase
RXA Roll amplitude
RXP Roll phase
RYA Pitch amplitude
RYP Pitch phase
RZA Yaw amplitude
RZP Yaw phase
(In these header strings X, Y and Z represent the vessel axes, 'A' denotes amplitude, 'P' denotes phase and 'R' rotation
about the given axis.)
RAO Data Checklist
To derive vessel point motions, you need to obtain data giving both RAOs and phases for the vessel for the relevant
wave period. You also need to know what conventions apply to your data; these may be documented with the data, but
sometimes you may have to deduce what they are. You should have answers to all the following questions:
To what point on the vessel do the data apply?
This is the RAO origin and is often the vessel centre of gravity, but you need to be sure. If it is not specified check with
your data supplier.
To what point on the vessel are the phases relative?
This is the RAO phase origin and is usually but not always the same as the RAO origin.
Are the responses in dimensional or RAO form?
RAO form (i.e. for unit wave amplitude) is the most common; data giving dimensional form would have to also give the
associated wave amplitudes/heights. OrcaFlex will only accept RAO form.
In what form are the rotational roll, pitch and yaw RAOs?
Units such as degrees/metre or radians/metre (displacement RAOs), or kN.m/m (wave load RAOs), almost always mean
the rotational motions are relative to waves of unit amplitude.
Very rarely, rotational RAO amplitudes are given per unit wave height (i.e. double amplitude) check your data source.
In this case you will have to divide the RAOs by 2 manually, before entry to OrcaFlex.
w
251
Units such as degrees/degree, radians/radian, or no units (displacement RAOs), or kN.m/radian (wave load RAOs),
imply rotational RAOs relative to waves of unit steepness or maximum slope.
For long wave periods in deep water, the rotational displacement RAOs in the wave plane (e.g. pitch in head or stern
seas) should tend to 1 for RAOs relative to unit maximum slope, or to pi for RAOs relative to unit steepness.
Are the phases in degrees or radians?
Unless you only have a small amount of data, this should be obvious from the range of phase values.
What directions are positive for surge, sway, heave, roll, pitch and yaw?
Often they are surge positive forward, sway positive to port, heave positive up, but some authors use heave positive
downwards. Roll, pitch and yaw are usually positive when clockwise about the positive surge, sway and heave
directions.
Most data sources use righthanded axes, but not all. OrcaFlex allows complete generality in its data input, but you must
find out how your data are defined.
To what phase time origin are the phases relative?
OrcaFlex allows you to specify that the phases to be relative to the time the wave crest, trough, zero upcrossing or zero
downcrossing passes the phase origin. The passage of the crest past the RAO origin is the most common phase time
origin, but you need to check and tell OrcaFlex see note on phase leads/lags below.
Are the phases leads or lags?
Phase conventions are sometimes documented by giving the formula used to represent the harmonic motion.
Commonly used ones are:
A.cos(.t P) or A.cos(P .t) imply that phase P is a lag.
cos(.t + P') implies that phase P' is a lead.
Using sine rather than cosine in the above formulae has no effect on whether the phases are leads or lags.
Checking RAOs
The Check RAOs button on the vessel types form allows a visual check on the RAO data for either displacement RAOs or
wave load RAOs. For a given draught and wave direction, it displays graphs (one for each vessel degree of freedom)
showing how the RAO and phase vary with wave period.
There are 3 types of graph available:
Complex Values
Amplitude
Phase
Amplitude and Phase Graphs
These graphs provide a straightforward graphical representation of the RAO data as input on the Vessel Types data
form. The amplitude or phase is plotted on the Y axis of the graph. For the X axis you have the choice of plotting period,
frequency in rad/s or frequency in Hz.
Complex Value Graphs
The graphs initially show the RAOs for the currently selected draught and direction. You can switch to other draughts
and directions, either by using the navigation buttons at the bottom of the form to step through the data, else or by
selecting from the dropdown lists. You can change the scale of the graphs (double click on the graph and change the
ranges of the axes). This is useful if the curve does not initially fit on the graph.
w

252
0
0
R

Figure: Complex Value RAO Graph for Amplitude (R) and phase ()
The graphs depicts the RAO data specified by the user for the specified RAO origin. The graph has two parts:
A curve showing the RAO data specified by the user as a series of points joined in order of increasing period. The
curve starts from the 'short' wave response, which should have zero or very small amplitude, so the curve should
start from near the origin. Moving along the curve away from the origin corresponds to the wave period increasing
from zero. For surge, sway and heave, the other end of the curve is the 'long' wave RAO data specified for period
'Infinity'. For roll, pitch and yaw, the RAO data for period 'Infinity' cannot (for technical reasons) be included in the
curve, so instead the other end of the curve is the RAO data for the largest finite period specified.
A solid circle representing the expected long wave response limit for a freely floating vessel. See RAO Quality Checks
for details of the expected long wave RAOs.
Warning: The expected long wave response limits calculated by OrcaFlex only apply to free-floating vessels. Also,
the yaw response limit only applies to slender vessels (i.e. vessels that are long in the x-direction and
narrow in the y-direction).
The purpose of the graph is help you check your RAO data the curve should normally be reasonably smooth and tend
towards the expected limit shown by the solid circle. See How to Check RAO Data for details.
The graph represents RAOs as points in polar coordinates (R,), where:
R is the nondimensional amplitude. For surge, sway and heave R is the vessel motion amplitude divided by the
wave amplitude. And for roll, pitch and yaw, R is the rotational response normalised with respect to maximum wave
slope i.e. it is vessel rotation amplitude divided by the maximum wave slope.
is the phase lag, from the time the wave crest passes the userspecified phase origin until the maximum positive
motion occurs.
Note: Positive here means as in the OrcaFlex conventions (not necessarily the same as the vessel type RAO
conventions). So positive surge is forward, positive sway is to port, positive heave is up, positive roll is
starboard down, positive pitch is bow down and positive yaw is bow to port.
This polar coordinates way of representing RAOs is better than drawing separate graphs of amplitude and phase, since
it presents all the information on a single graph and also the resulting curves are smooth, whereas phase graphs
frequently show phase jumps.
How to Check RAOs
For each draught and wave direction, you should check that the curves on the Complex Value RAO graphs are
reasonably smooth and approach the circle, which is the expected longwave limit for a freefloating vessel. Note that:
The curve may not approach the expected long wave limit if the RAO data does not include values for any long
waves. Wave periods over 20 seconds for ships, or 30 seconds for semisubmersibles, are considered to be
sufficiently long for this purpose.
w
253
The curve might also not approach the circle if the vessel is not freefloating. For example the heave displacement
RAO amplitude of a tension leg platform will not approach the usual long wave limit of 1.
The circle on the yaw graph only applies to slender vessels (i.e. long in the xdirection and narrow in the y
direction).
Smooth graphs can only be expected if the data includes RAOs for reasonably closely spaced periods.
As examples, consider the following three example graphs:
w

254
1.5 1 0.5 0 -0.5 -1 -1.5
1.5
1
0.5
0
-0.5
-1
-1.5
1.5 1 0.5 0 -0.5 -1 -1.5
1.5
1
0.5
0
-0.5
-1
-1.5
w
255
1.5 1 0.5 0 -0.5 -1 -1.5
1.5
1
0.5
0
-0.5
-1
-1.5

The first graph shows a typical, wellbehaved set of displacement RAO data the curve is smooth and the longwave
limit agrees with the expected value marked by the circle.
For a freely floating vessel, the second graph is clearly in error, since the curve does not lead to the expected long wave
limit. The RAO data for long waves (represented by the end of the curve) has the correct amplitude, but its phase differs
by 180 from the expected longwave value (represented by the circle). There are two likely causes it may be that the
phase lead/lag convention data has been set wrongly (this would give a phase angle sign error) or else that the
convention data for the direction of positive motion has been set wrongly (this would give a phase error of 180).
The curve on the third graph approaches the expected long wave limit, but then suddenly goes to zero. This suggests
that the RAO data for period 'Infinity' has not been set correctly and is zero.
Common Problems
It is not unusual to be given RAO data for a vessel but not be given all the conventions that apply to the data. Below are
some common problems and their symptoms. But beware that several common problems have very similar symptoms,
so it is not possible to be sure what the problem is unless you are sure about most of the data's conventions and only
unsure about one. It is therefore important to get as much information as possible from the original RAO data supplier.
The quoted wave direction might be measured clockwise (viewed from above) from the xdirection, rather than
anticlockwise (which is the OrcaFlex convention). The effect would be a 180 shift in the sway, roll and yaw phases.
The quoted wave direction may be the direction the wave is coming from, rather than the direction it is progressing
towards (which is the OrcaFlex convention). The effect would be to negate all the phase values.
The phases may be leads instead of lags (OrcaFlex will accept either see RAO Phase Conventions). The effect of an
error here would be to negate all the phase values.
7.7.3 Modelling Vessel Slow Drift
When a vessel is exposed to waves it experiences wave loads that can be split into first order and second order terms.
The first order terms generate motion at wave frequency and this is modelled in OrcaFlex using RAOs to specify either
the displacement or the load. The second order terms are much smaller but they include loads with a much lower
frequency. These low frequency terms are called the wave drift loads and they can cause significant slow drift motions
of the vessel if their frequencies are close to a natural frequency of the vessel.
w

256
One common situation where the wave drift loads can matter is with a moored vessel. The vessel's natural frequencies
in surge, sway and yaw are typically quite low and so the low frequency wave drift loads can generate quite significant
slow drift excursions.
If you have already calculated the vessel slow drift motion then that motion can be applied in OrcaFlex using harmonic
motion or a time history file. But OrcaFlex can calculate and apply the slow drift motion for you. To do this you need to
do the following:
Specify QTF data on the wave drift page of the vessel type form (the wave drift loads are calculated based on this
data). Also, ensure that Wave Drift Load (2nd Order) is in the vessel's Included Effects. This tells OrcaFlex to apply
the mean wave drift load to the vessel during the static analysis, and then in the dynamic analysis to apply the time
varying wave drift load.
Optionally, specify appropriate data for the hydrodynamic and wind drag loads and any applied load, etc., and
include these loads in the vessel's Included Effects. OrcaFlex will automatically include loads from added mass and
damping and loads from any lines or other objects that are connected to the vessel.
On the Structure page on the vessel type form, specify the vessel centre of gravity, mass, moments of inertia data for
the appropriate draught. And on the Stiffness, Added Mass and Damping page, specify the added mass and damping
matrices and the reference origin to which they apply. The stiffness and hydrostatic equilibrium position data are
not required for 3DOF analyses, since they only apply in the heave, roll and pitch directions.
On the vessel form, include 3 degrees of freedom in the static analysis. The OrcaFlex static analysis will then
calculate the equilibrium position allowing for the mean wave drift load. And set the primary motion to Calculated
(3DOF). The OrcaFlex simulation will then calculate the vessel surge, sway and yaw motion that results.
Set the vessel's superimposed motion according to whether and how you want to model first order wave frequency
motion.
In the dynamic simulation OrcaFlex will then calculate all the loads on the vessel and the resulting slow surge, sway and
yaw motion.
Damping Effects on Vessel Slow Drift
Drag and damping loads have an important effect on vessel slow drift motions. The following discussion documents the
various damping effects and how they are modelled in OrcaFlex. See CMPT (1998) section 3.12.
Hydrodynamic drag and skin friction on the vessel hull. This is modelled in OrcaFlex using a combination of the
OCIMF approach plus a yaw drag moment proportional to (yaw rate)
2
. See the Hydrodynamic Drag data on the
vessel type data form. For details of the theory see Vessel Theory: Drag Loads. Note that OrcaFlex does not yet have
the dependency of yaw drag on sway velocity proposed by Wichers, 1979.
Wind drag on the vessel hull. This is the aerodynamic drag due to wind and any vessel velocity. It is modelled in
OrcaFlex based on the OCIMF approach. See the Wind Drag data on the vessel type data form. For details of the
theory see Vessel Theory: Drag Loads.
Hydrodynamic drag on the risers/moorings. This is modelled in OrcaFlex by the drag force part of the Morison
force on the lines that model the risers/moorings.
Wave radiation damping. This is not usually very significant at low frequencies, because the asymptotic limit of
the wave frequency damping is zero. It can be modelled in OrcaFlex using the damping matrix on the vessel type
form.
Wave drift damping. This arises because the wave drift loads vary with vessel velocity. It can be modelled in
OrcaFlex by including it in the damping matrix on the vessel type data form. See CMPT (1998) page 378 and
Faltinsen (1990) page 161.
Material damping in the risers/moorings. This is the structural damping in the material of the risers and
mooring lines. This can be modelled in OrcaFlex by the line target damping value. However Triantafyllou et al
(1994) concluded that its effect is negligible.
Seabed soil friction on the risers/moorings. This arises from the frictional force acting on the part of a
mooring/riser that is lifting off and touching down on the seabed. It is modelled in OrcaFlex by the friction between
w
257
the seabed and the line used to model the mooring/riser. However Triantafyllou et al (1994) concluded that its
effect is negligible.
7.7.4 Vessel Response Reports
The vessel response window can be opened using the Results Menu or using the Report Vessel Response button on the
vessel data form. It offers two pages: Displacement Response, and Impulse Response, Added Mass and Damping.
Displacement Response
The Displacement Response page gives access to two spreadsheet reports, one giving displacement RAOs and one giving
spectral values, of the vessel's response to waves, based on its vessel type's displacement RAOs. It can be accessed from
the Results menu or from the Vessel data form.
Directions and Output Points
You specify one or more vesselrelative wave directions, and one or more points on the vessel, for which the RAOs and
spectral response will be reported.
If you specify a direction of '~' then the direction of the wave relative to the vessel is used. If there is more than one
wave train then the direction of the first wave train is used.
The output points are specified by giving their coordinates relative to vessel axes.
Report RAOs
The RAO report gives a separate worksheet for each specified direction, containing the RAOs for each of the specified
output points, derived from the displacement RAOs of its vessel type.
The reported RAOs allow for the following effects:
They allow for the position of the output point relative to the RAO origin to which the vessel type RAOs apply.
They give the RAOs for the specified wave direction, relative to the vessel. If this is not one of the directions for
which RAOs are specified, then the RAOs are derived by interpolation on direction.
They allow for Froude scaling if there is a difference between the vessel type length and the vessel length. This
affects the periods at which the RAOs are reported.
RAOs are given for the position, velocity and acceleration of the output points, for all 6 degrees of freedom and for Z
Above Wave.
The RAO report covers the wave periods specified on the vessel type data form, plus (if appropriate) the regular wave
period specified on the environment data form.
Phase Origin
You can choose the Phase Origin to use for reporting phases, the options being:
RAO Phase Origin. The phases will then be reported relative to the time that the wave (crest or trough, as specified
in the vessel type RAO conventions) passes the RAO phase origin specified on the vessel type form.
Each Point. The phases will then be reported relative to the time the wave (crest or trough, as specified in the
vessel type RAO conventions) passes that particular output point.
The translational RAOs depend on the position of the output point. The rotational RAO amplitudes do not depend on the
position of the output point, since the roll, pitch and yaw of a vessel are the same everywhere on it. The rotational RAO
phases depend on the position of the output point only if you specify the Phase Origin to be Each Point.
Conventions
You can choose for the RAOs to be reported either using the same RAO conventions as specified for this vessel's type or
using Orcina standard conventions.
w

258
Z Above Wave
Z Above Wave reports the heave of the vessel relative to the water surface. This can be useful when evaluating whether
an object at some point on the vessel will contact the water surface and if so with what relative velocity.
Warning: Z Above Wave does not take account of wave surface disturbance due to the presence of the vessel.
Report Spectral Response
The spectral response report contains a separate worksheet for each specified direction and each random wave train
specified on the Environment data form. The worksheet contains tables of spectral values for position, velocity and
acceleration, for all 6 degrees of freedom and for Z Above Wave. Separate tables are given for each of the specified
output points.
Notes: The spectral response report is not available if no random wave trains are specified.
It is also not available if (for any of the specified directions and for any degree of freedom) the vessel
has a non-zero RAO amplitude for the zero wave period limit. This is because some of the spectral
integrals do not converge in such cases. Such RAO data is not realistic, since no vessel can respond to
infinitely high frequency waves.
The following spectral values are reported.
The significant amplitude.
The expected maximum amplitude in a randomly chosen period of the specified Duration. (Put another way, if a
various different randomly chosen samples of the specified Duration are taken, then the expected maximum
amplitude is the statistical mean of the distribution of the various different maximum amplitudes obtained.)
The average period of the response. This is the mean period between zero upcrossings.
Note: The significant and maximum values are reported as single amplitudes, i.e. the motion is +/- the value
reported.
Warning: The standard formulae used to calculate the spectral values (see below) are based on the assumptions
that the spectrum is narrow-banded and Gaussian, and that the extremes are Rayleigh distributed.
They are also based purely on small amplitude linear theory.
These spectral values are calculated as follows:
The spectrum of the wave train is combined with the vessel response specified by its RAOs, to obtain the response
spectrum for each degree of freedom. The zero'th moment, m0, and the second moment, m2, of the response spectrum
(expressed against frequency in Hertz) are then calculated. The spectral values are then given by:
Significant Amplitude = As = 2m0
Average Period = Tave = (m0/m2)
Max Amplitude = As exp(D*60*60/Tave)
where As is the significant amplitude, D is the specified Duration (in hours), Tave is the average period (in seconds) and
loge is the natural logarithm (= ln).
Notes: For Z Above Wave, no spectral values can be reported for acceleration and only the significant
amplitude can be reported for velocity. This is because the RAO of Z Above Wave does not decay to zero
as wave period goes to zero, so some of the integrals for the spectral moments do not converge. For
velocity of Z Above Wave you could perhaps estimate the expected maximum amplitude by assuming
that the ratio of maximum amplitude to significant amplitude is roughly the same for velocity as for
position.
All these reports are based on the vessel type displacement RAOs. Any wave load RAO data are
ignored.
w
259
Impulse Response, Added Mass and Damping
The Impulse Response, Added Mass and Damping page has only one button: Show Graphs. This button is enabled only if
the Vessel Type and Draught used by the vessel have Added Mass and Damping Method set to FrequencyDependent.
Clicking the button will open a form showing:
A graph of the Impulse Response Function (IRF) for the vessel.
Graphs of the original frequencydependent added mass or damping data.
The scale of the time lag axis for the IRF is determined by the cutoff time chosen. This graph may be useful in judging
what value should be selected for this cutoff time: a shorter cutoff time will allow for faster calculation, but too short
may mean significant IRF values are discarded and accuracy lost as a result.
The graph of Added Mass against frequency has superimposed on it a horizontal intercept representing the calculated
value of the "infinitefrequency" added mass. So long as the data are given to sufficiently high frequency, this is an
indicator of the consistency of the added mass and damping data.
Note that the values of added mass and damping shown may have been Froude scaled according to Vessel length.
7.7.5 Vessel Results
Results Tables
The results tables report the position of the vessel, plus the loads acting on it from various sources. The loads are
labelled according to their source, as follows. For all the loads, the moments are reported about the vessel origin.
Connections load is the total load from all attached lines, links, winches, shapes, etc. In mooring analysis this is
therefore the mooring load if only mooring lines are attached to the vessel.
Applied load is the sum of the local and global applied loads specified on the vessel data form.
Current and Wind loads are those that result from the vessel type's current and wind properties.
Wave drift load is that due to the Wave Drift QTFs.
Damping is governed by the vessel type damping matrix.
Hydrostatic stiffness is determined by the vessel type's stiffness properties.
Wave load RAOs the load due to the Wave Load RAOs.
Note: The vessel Calculation Data, in particular the combination of Included Effects and Primary Motion, will
determine which of these loads are calculated (except for Connections, which are always calculated
and applied).
In addition there is a detailed Connections table which reports information for individual lines, links, winches, shapes,
etc. which are connected to the vessel.
Dynamic Results
For vessels the results variables available in dynamics are as follows:
Motion Results
The vessel motion is split into two components called the primary and superimposed motions. To provide both
components of the motion, plus the total overall motion, OrcaFlex provides the following 3 sets of positions results.
Primary X, Primary Y, Primary Z, Primary Rotation 1, Primary Rotation 2 and Primary Rotation 3
The primary position of the vessel, as produced by any primary motion, relative to global axes. So Primary X, Primary Y
and Primary Z are the global X,Y,Z coordinates of the primary position of the vessel origin, and Primary Rotation 1,
Primary Rotation 2 and Primary Rotation 3 are the primary orientation of the vessel, again relative to global axes.
Primary Rotation 2 is in the range 90 to +90. Range jump suppression is applied to Primary Rotation 1 and Primary
Rotation 3 (so values outside the range 360 to +360 might be reported).
w

260
Surge, Sway, Heave, Roll, Pitch and Yaw
The offset of the vessel, due to any superimposed motion, relative to the primary position of the vessel. They are
therefore the wavegenerated part of the motion, so Surge, Sway and Heave are the offsets from the primary position to
the final position and are measured in the primary vessel axes directions. And Roll, Pitch and Yaw are the wave
generated rotations and are relative to the primary vessel axes directions.
Pitch is in the range 90 to +90. Range jump suppression is applied to the Roll and Yaw angles (so values outside the
range 360 to +360 might be reported).
X, Y, Z, Rotation 1, Rotation 2 and Rotation 3
The position and orientation of the vessel, relative to global axes, due to the combination of the primary and
superimposed motion.
X, Y and Z are the global coordinates of a user specified point P on the vessel. The point P is specified in vessel local
coordinates. If P=(0,0,0) then the global X, Y and Z coordinates of the vessel origin are reported.
Rotation 1, 2 and 3 define the final orientation relative to global axes. The 3 rotations (called Euler angles) are 3
successive rotations that take the global axes directions to the final axes directions. Rotation 2 is in the range 90 to
+90. Range jump suppression is applied to the Rotation 1 and Rotation 3 angles (so values outside the range 360 to
+360 might be reported).
Velocity, GX-Velocity, GY-Velocity, GZ-Velocity
The magnitude and components of the velocity of the vessel, relative to global axes, due to the combination of the
primary and superimposed motion. These results are reported at a user specified point P on the vessel. The point P is
specified in vessel local coordinates.
Acceleration, GX-Acceleration, GY-Acceleration, GZ-Acceleration
The magnitude and components of the acceleration of the vessel, relative to global axes, due to the combination of the
primary and superimposed motion. These results are reported at a user specified point P on the vessel. The point P is
specified in vessel local coordinates.
Sea Surface Z
The global Z coordinate of the sea surface directly above the instantaneous vessel primary position.
Force and Moment Results
For all the force and moment results, the moments are reported about the vessel origin.
Force, Lx-Force, Ly-Force and Lz-Force,
Moment, Lx-Moment, Ly-Moment and Lz-Moment
The magnitude and components (in vessel axes directions) of the total force and moment exerted on the vessel.
These results include loads from any objects connected to the vessel and all those loads in the list of Included Effects for
the vessel. They do not include weight and buoyancy loads.
Individual Force and Moment Results
In addition, results are available for the constituent loads which make up the total force and moment, which depend on
the vessel's Included Effects. All these results are reported in vessel axes directions, with moments taken about the
vessel origin. If these loads are not included then they will not be calculated and they will not appear in the list of
available results. The individual loads are:
Total Connection Force, Total Connection Lx-Force, Total Connection Ly-Force, Total Connection Lz-Force,
Total Connection Moment, Total Connection Lx-Moment, Total Connection Ly-Moment, Total Connection Lz-Moment
The sum of the loads from all attached lines, links, winches, shapes, etc. Available only if at least one such object is
attached to the vessel.
w
System Modelling Data and Results, Lines
261
Applied Force, Applied Lx-Force, Applied Ly-Force, Applied Lz-Force,
Applied Moment, Applied Lx-Moment, Applied, Ly-Moment, Applied Lz-Moment
The sum of all the local and global applied loads. Available only if Applied Loads is in the list of the vessel's included
effects.
Hydrodynamic Drag Force, Hydrodynamic Drag Lx-Force, Hydrodynamic Drag Ly-Force, Hydrodynamic Drag Lz-Moment
Wind Drag Force, Wind Drag Lx-Force, Wind Drag Ly-Force, Wind Drag Lz-Moment
Hydrodynamic and wind drag loads, in surge, sway and yaw directions only. These results are available only if
Hydrodynamic Drag or Wind Drag (respectively) are checked in included effects.
Wave Load RAO Force, Wave Load RAO Lx-Force, Wave Load RAO Ly-Force, Wave Load RAO Lz-Force
Wave Load RAO Moment, Wave Load RAO Lx-Moment, Wave Load RAO Ly-Moment, Wave Load RAO Lz-Moment
The force and moment on the vessel due to the wave load RAOs. Available if Wave Load (1st Order) is checked in
included effects.
Wave Drift Force, Wave Drift Lx-Force, Wave Drift Ly-Force, Wave Drift Lz-Moment
The wave drift force and moment exerted on the vessel. These results are available only if Wave Drift Load (2nd
order) is included.
Damping Force, Damping Lx-Force, Damping Ly-Force, Damping Lz-Force
Damping Moment, Damping Lx-Moment, Damping Ly-Moment, Damping Lz-Moment
The damping force and moment exerted on the vessel.
Multiple Static Results
For multiple statics calculations the results variables available are as follows. The loads reported are the total loads,
including those from current, wind, applied loads and attached lines and other objects.
Restoring Force
The magnitude of the horizontal component of the total force applied to the vessel. Note that this force is not necessarily
in the offset direction.
Vertical Force
The vertically downwards component of the total force applied to the vessel.
GZ-Moment
The total moment, about the vertical, applied to the vessel.
Worst Tension
The largest tension in any segment of any Line connected to the Vessel.
7.8 LINES
Lines are flexible linear elements used to model cables, hoses, chains or other similar items. Lines are represented in
OrcaFlex using a lumped mass model. That is, the line is modelled as a series of lumps of mass joined together by
massless springs, rather like beads on a necklace. The lumps of mass are called nodes and the springs joining them are
called segments. Each segment represents a short piece of the line, whose properties (mass, buoyancy, drag etc.) have
been lumped, for modelling purposes, at the nodes at its ends. See the figure below, which shows an example line
spanning from a Vessel to a Buoy.
w

262
End positions and no-moment directions are defined
relative to the objects to which the ends are connected
and move with those objects.
x
y
z
V
x
y
z
B
End B
End A
Clump
section 1
(3 segments)
section 3
(9 segments)
section 2
(7 segments)

Figure: Line Model
The properties of a Line are specified by dividing it up into a number of consecutive sections that are chosen by the
user. For each section you must define its length, the Line Type of which it is made and the number of segments into
which it should be divided for modelling purposes. A Line Type is simply a set of properties (for example the diameter,
mass per unit length and bend stiffness) given a name so that they can be called by that name. The Line Types are
defined separately, on the Line Types data form. This allows the same set of line properties to be used for a number of
w
263
different sections of the line, or for different lines. There is also a Line Type Wizard tool that helps you set up Line Types
representing common structures like chains, ropes, etc.
In addition, a number of attachments may be specified, to represent items that are connected to the Line. For example,
attachments may be used to model clump weights, drag chains or buoyancy bags attached to the line. Two types of
attachment are available clumps (buoyancy or heavy) and drag chains.
Each attachment attached to the Line is specified by giving the Attachment Type and the arc length, measured from
End A, at which it should be attached. The attachment is then attached to the nearest node to that arc length. Attachment
Types are similar to Line Types they are simply named sets of attachment properties. The properties themselves are
then given separately, on the Attachment Types data form. This allows the same set of attachment properties to be used
for a number of different attachments.
The two ends of a Line are referred to as End A and End B and each end can be Free, Fixed, Anchored or else connected
to a Vessel or Buoy. The two ends of a line are treated in essentially the same way, but some aspects of the line are
dependent on which end is which. In particular the numbering of parts of a Line is always done starting at End A.
7.8.1 Line Data
For every line in the system there is a data form defining its structure and interconnection. It is on these data forms that
the system is built up by connecting lines between the objects that have been defined.
Name
Used to refer to the Line.
Include Torsion
Torsional effects can be included or ignored, for each line in the model. If torsion is included then the line type
torsional properties must be specified. See Torsional Stiffness.
To see the line orientation visually on the 3D views, select Draw Node Axes on the View menu. OrcaFlex then draws the
node axes Nxyz at each node, and these axes allow you to see how the line is behaving torsionally.
Notes: The node axes are drawn using the node pen, specified on the line data form.
If torsion is included for a line, you must specify the torsional orientation at each end of the line. This is
done by setting the Gamma angle of the end connections on the line data form. The Gamma angle
determines the torsional position of the line end - for details see Line End Orientation. To check visually
that you have the orientation you expect, select Draw Node Axes on the View menu.
If torsion is included for a line, the static analysis should also include the effects of torsion - otherwise
the simulation will start from a position that is not in torsional equilibrium and an unstable simulation
may result. We recommend that the Full Statics option is selected because this is the only statics option
in OrcaFlex that includes the effects of torsion.
Top End
This data item is used to give OrcaFlex information about the sense of the Line. Various calculations performed by the
program need to know which end of the line (End A or End B) is at the top, and which end is at the bottom. You specify
which end is at the top, and the program assumes that the other end is at the bottom.
Suppose you have a line with the top end connected to a vessel, and the bottom end anchored to the seabed. If you wish
to measure arc length from the vessel then you should connect End A to the vessel, make End B anchored and set Top
End to End A. On the other hand, if you wish to measure arc length from the seabed then you should connect End B to
the vessel, make End A anchored and set Top End to End B.
The setting of the Top and Bottom Ends is used by the program as follows:
The Lay Azimuth data defines a lay direction starting from the Bottom End and moving towards the Top End.
The Touchdown results point is determined by starting at the Top End and then moving towards the Bottom End
until the first node in contact with the seabed is found.
w

264
The Contents Pressure Reference Z level can be set to '~' (indeed this is the default value) which OrcaFlex interprets
as the Z level of the Top End in the reset state.
The Line Setup Wizard uses the bottom end when calculating anchor positions and also for the layback calculation.
If the Line is not in contact with the seabed then this data is somewhat arbitrary. You are free to make whatever choice
suits your model, but remember that the contents pressure will be referenced from the Top End. If the entire Line is in
contact with the seabed then again you are free to make whatever choice of Top and Bottom Ends suits your model.
Connections
The line end connection data specifies whether the line ends are connected to other objects, the position, angle and
stiffness of the connection, and whether the end is released during the simulation.
You can view and edit an individual line's connection data on the line's data form. Or you can view and edit the
connection data for all the lines together on the All Objects Data Form.
Connect to Object
The line spans from End A to End B and each end may be connected to another object in the model, such as a buoy or
vessel, or else Fixed, Anchored or left Free.
Object Relative Position
Defines the position of the centre of the node at the line end.
If the end is connected to another object this defines the coordinates of the connection point relative to that other
object's local axes.
If the end is Fixed this defines the coordinates of that point relative to global axes.
If the end is Anchored this defines the X and Y coordinates of the anchor relative to global axes, plus the Z
coordinate relative to the seabed level at that (X,Y) position.
If the end is Free then this defines the coordinates of the estimated equilibrium position of the line end, relative to
global axes.
Height above seabed
This data item is only available for Anchored connections and specifies the vertical height above the seabed of the pipe
underside. This value is coupled to the Object Relative z coordinate changing either one results in the other being
changed to match.
To understand how this data item should be used consider, for simplicity, a line end anchored to a flat horizontal
seabed. The Object Relative z coordinate specifies the position of the centreline. If it is set to 0 then the end node will
penetrate the seabed by a distance of D, where D is the contact diameter.
The net result of this is that the end node is 'buried' in the seabed and receives a large seabed reaction force. Because it
is anchored this force cannot displace the end node, but the adjacent node is free to move and it will try to take up a
position sitting on top of the seabed. This in turn will lead to unrealistic values of curvature, bend moment etc. at the
end.
If, however, you set Height above seabed to 0 then the end node centreline will have a z coordinate of D, relative to the
seabed. The node sits just in contact with the seabed and the above problems are removed.
If the seabed is not horizontal then the mathematics is slightly more complicated as it has to take into account the slope
of the seabed. However, the recommendation of setting Height above seabed to 0 remains valid.
End Orientation
When a line is connected to an object, it is connected into an end fitting that is rigidly attached to that object and you
specify the orientation of this connection by giving its Azimuth, Declination and Gamma angles.
These angles define the end fitting orientation relative to the object, so for objects that rotate (e.g. vessels and 6D buoys)
the fitting rotates with the object. For Fixed or Anchored ends the end orientation is defined relative to global axes. For
Free ends the end orientation is not used.
w
265
Azimuth, Declination and Gamma define the end fitting orientation by specifying the directions of the axes (Ex, Ey, Ez) of
its frame of reference, where E is the end fitting origin the point to which the line end is connected. See Line End
Orientation.
The direction of Ez is defined by specifying its Azimuth and Declination angles. Ez is the end fitting axial direction; when
the end segment is aligned with Ez then no bending moment is applied by the joint, so Ez is sometimes called the no
moment direction. Note that Ez must be specified using the End A to End B convention, i.e. Ez is into the line at End A,
but out of the line at End B.
Ex and Ey are perpendicular to Ez and they are defined by specifying the Gamma angle, which is a rotation about Ez. The
Ex and Ey directions are used for reporting results (e.g. the 2 components of shear force). And if the line has torsion
included and the joint twisting stiffness is nonzero, then Ex and Ey also define the line end orientation at which no
torsional moment is applied by the joint.
The connection at a line end is modelled as a ball-joint with this orientation being the preferred "nomoment"
orientation, i.e. the orientation of the line end that gives rise to no moment from any rotational stiffness of the
connection.
If all of the end connection stiffness values are zero, e.g. to model a ball joint that is completely free to rotate, then the
end orientation angles have no effect on the line behaviour. The angles then only serve to define the local x, y and z
directions that are used to define results (e.g. shear and bend moment components, stress components, etc.) that
depend on the local axes directions.
Bending and Twisting Stiffness
The connection at a line end is modelled as a joint with the specified rotational stiffness. The restoring moments applied
by the joint depend on the deflection angle, which is the difference between the end fitting orientation and the
orientation of the line. The end orientation is therefore the orientation of the line that corresponds to zero moment
being applied by the joint.
The connection stiffness is the slope of the curve of restoring moment against deflection angle.
The x bending and y bending values specify the connection bending behaviour for rotation about the end Ex and Ey
directions, respectively. For an isotropic ball joint the two values must be equal; this can conveniently be specified by
setting the ybending value to '~', meaning 'same as xvalue'. A nonisotropic ball joint can be modelled by giving
different x and y bending values; in this case the line must include torsion.
The x bending and y bending behaviour can either be linear or nonlinear, as follows:
For a simple linear behaviour, specify the bending stiffness to be the constant slope of the curve of restoring
moment against deflection angle.
For a nonlinear behaviour, use variable data to specify a table of restoring moment against deflection angle.
OrcaFlex uses linear interpolation for angles between those specified in the table, and linear extrapolation for
angles beyond those specified in the table. The restoring bend moment must be zero at zero angle.
The Twisting Stiffness value is only relevant if torsion is included for the line. It specifies the rotational stiffness about
the end Ez direction. For the twisting stiffness this variation is always modelled as linear so the twisting stiffness you
specify should be the slope of the linear anglemoment curve.
The bending and twisting stiffness can be set to zero (free to rotate with no resistance); nonzero (can rotate but with
resistance); Infinity (a rigid connection) or variable (nonlinear, for bending only). Note that Infinity can be abbreviated
to 'Inf'.
A flex joint can be modelled by setting the stiffness values to be nonzero (and less than infinity).
Warning: Avoid specifying large connection stiffness values (except the special value Infinity) since they require
very short simulation time steps.
Release at Start of Stage
If desired each line end can be disconnected at the start of a given stage of the simulation. If no release is wanted then
set this item to "~", meaning "not applicable".
w

266
Structure
Each line can be made up of up a number of sections with different properties, the sections being defined in sequence
from End A to End B.
Line Type
This determines the properties of the section.
Section Length
The unstretched length of the section. This is the unstressed length (i.e. zero wall tension) at atmospheric pressure
inside and out. Length changes due to external and internal pressure, and allowing for the Poisson ratio effect, are
calculated and allowed for by OrcaFlex.
Expansion Factor
The expansion factor allows you to model timevarying changes in unstretched length, for example due to thermal
expansion or contraction.
A value of '~' means that no expansion factor is applied this is equivalent to a value of 1. Other positive values can be
used, in which case the unstretched length remains constant throughout the simulation.
Alternatively the expansion factor can be a variable data source which specifies a table of expansion factor against
simulation time. It specifies a multiplicative factor which is applied to the unstretched length when calculating axial
strain which in turn is used to calculate effective tension (see Line Theory: Calculation Stages).
Note: Expansion factor is only used in the calculation of strain. It has no effect on mass, buoyancy, drag,
added mass etc.
Target Segment Length, Number of Segments
These data items determine the segmentation of the section.
If Target Segment Length is set to ~ then the number of segments in the section is set by Number of Segments.
Otherwise, the segmentation is chosen based on Target Segment Length. The Number of Segments is not editable and
reports the actual number of segments used which is given by the formula:
Number of Segments = Round(Section Length / Target Segment Length)
where Round is the function that rounds a floating point value to the nearest integer.
Note: It is usually preferable to determine segmentation by specifying Target Segment Length. This allows
you to alter section lengths without altering segment length.
Clash Check
Clash modelling is included when this data item is set to Yes. If it is set to No then the section will be ignored for
clashing purposes.
Note: Clash checking is quite time-consuming, so you should only set this item to Yes for those sections for
which you need clash modelling to be included. See Line Clashing.
Cumulative Length, Cumulative Segments
These columns report the cumulative length and cumulative number of segments counted from the first section. The
values are for reporting purposes only and cannot be edited.
Pre-bend
Prebend is only available when torsion is modelled. Prebend is provided for modelling lines which are not straight
when unstressed, e.g. spool pieces.
w
267
The prebend is defined for each section by specifying the prebent curvature (in radians per unit length) of the section.
The prebent curvature is the curvature of the pipe in its unstressed state. For lines which are straight when unstressed
then prebend should be specified to be zero which is the default setting.
Prebend can be specified in both the line local x and y directions. However, to simplify data preparation and
interpretation of results we recommend that you arrange the line's local axes such that the prebend is entirely in either
the local x or local y direction.
Note: When pre-bend is modelled curvature and bend radius results are reported relative to the pre-bent
curvature.
Warning: Pre-bend breaks the assumptions of the stress results and fatigue analysis.
Attachments
A number of attachments may be added to each line. Each attachment can either be of a specified Attachment Type or
else be a clone of a specified 6D buoy.
Attachment Type
Can be a Clump Type, a Drag Chain Type, a Flex Joint Type or an existing 6D Buoy.
If you specify a 6D buoy as the attachment type then the attachment is a clone of that 6D buoy and changing the
properties of the 6D buoy also changes the properties of the attachment. The 6D buoy from which the attachment is
cloned cannot be deleted, without first deleting all the attachments that are clones of it.
6D buoy attachments are useful when you want a number of identical 6D buoys attached to a line. To attach 20 identical
buoys to a line, for example, first create the first buoy separately from the line and then connect it to the line by setting
its connection data item on the buoy data form. This first buoy acts as the master from which all the other attachment
buoys are cloned. Then, on the line data form, specify 19 attachments and set their attachment type to be the first 6D
buoy.
Note: 6D Buoy attachments can only be used when the Line includes torsion.
Position
The x, y and z coordinates specify the position of the attachment relative to the line.
The z coordinate specifies the arclength at which the attachment is connected and this arclength may be measured
relative to either End A or End B as specified by the user.
For Clumps, Drag Chains and Flex Joints the x and y coordinates must be zero and the z coordinate is the arclength.
These attachments are connected at the centre of the node nearest to this arclength.
Note: If the attachment is a clump then it is also offset vertically from the node by the offset distance specified
in the clump type data. Beware that the sign convention for this offset varies depending on whether the
clump is net buoyant (positive offset is upwards) or heavy (positive offset is downwards).
For 6D Buoy attachments the z coordinate specifies the arc length at which the buoy should be connected to the line.
The buoy will be connected to the nearest node to that arc length. The buoy will be connected with an offset
(relative to that node's axes) that is given by (x, y, 0). See 6D Buoy Initial Position for more details.
Orientation
For 6D Buoy attachments only. Rotation 1, Rotation 2 and Rotation 3 determine the Initial Attitude of the attached buoy.
Name
For 6D Buoy and Drag Chain attachments only. This is the name of the attached object and is used to select results for
that object.
w

268
Contents
Contents Density
If any section of the line is of a line type that is hollow, i.e. has nonzero inner diameter, then its mass is increased by:
Density . Inner Cross Sectional Area . Section Length.
Mass Flow Rate
The rate of flow of mass through the line. If it is nonzero then it is used to calculate the centrifugal and Coriolis forces
due to flow of fluid in the line. Positive values mean flow from End A to End B; negative values mean flow from End B
towards End A. To convert between mass flow rate, volume flow rate and flow velocity use the following simple
formulae:
Volume flow rate = Mass flow rate /
Flow velocity = Mass flow rate / (d
2
/4)
where is the contents density and d is the internal diameter of the line.
Contents Pressure and Reference Z level
The contents pressure specifies the internal pressure in the line at a specified fixed reference Z level (specified
relative to global axes). The internal pressure at this Z level is assumed to remain constant throughout the simulation.
The internal pressure at other levels is calculated allowing for the static pressure head due to differences in Z level. See
Line Pressure Effects for details of contents pressure modelling.
The reference Z level can be set to '~' and this is taken to mean the Z level of the Top End of the line in the reset state.
All pressures in OrcaFlex are gauge pressures, not absolute pressures. That is, they are relative to atmospheric pressure
and so can be as low as minus 1 atmosphere (101.325 kPa).
Statics
The line static calculation is performed in 2 steps as described in Statics of Lines.
Included in Statics
This switch allows you to exclude certain lines from the statics calculation. This is mainly useful when building a model
and a particular line is not converging. In this situation you could exclude all other lines from statics (this is easiest from
the All Objects Data Form). This would allow you to experiment with different statics convergence parameters for the
problematic line without having to wait for all the other lines to converge each time you tried a new set of convergence
parameters.
Note: Results are not available for such lines and dynamics is disabled if you have any lines which are
excluded from statics.
Step 1 Statics Method
This can be either Catenary, Spline, Quick, Prescribed or User Specified.
The normal setting is Catenary, in which case the static analysis finds the equilibrium catenary position of the line,
allowing for weight, buoyancy, drag, but not allowing for bend stiffness or interaction with shapes. See Catenary Statics.
The Catenary solution has some limitations and some systems, such as those with slack or neutrally buoyant lines, can
be troublesome. For such lines you can instead specify Spline, in which case the line is instead set to a 3D spline curve
based on spline control points specified by the user. See Spline Data and Spline Statics.
The Quick method leaves the line in the rough catenary shape used in the Reset state. See Quick Statics.
For pullin analysis the Prescribed option has been provided. Here the user specifies the starting position of the line as
a sequence of straight line or curved sections on the seabed. See Prescribed Starting Shape.
The User Specified option allows you to specify the position for each node on the line. No calculation is performed, the
nodes are merely placed at the specified positions. See User Specified Starting Shape and User Specified Statics.
w
269
Step 2 Statics Method (Full Statics)
This can be either None or Full Statics.
If None is selected then the position obtained by the Step 1 Statics Method is used.
The Full Statics calculation finds a full equilibrium position for the model. Unlike the Step 1 Catenary method, bend
stiffness and interaction with shapes are included. Full statics needs a starting shape for the line, and it uses the Step 1
Statics Method to obtain this; it then finds the equilibrium position from there. You should therefore set the Step 1
Statics Method to give a reasonable starting shape. See Full Statics.
For more details of the Statics Calculation see Statics Analysis.
Warning: If you do not use Full Statics, then the starting position will not (in general) be an equilibrium position.
Note: It is only possible to include buoys in the static analysis (see Buoy Degrees of Freedom Included in
Static Analysis) if either the Catenary method or Full Statics is used for all lines in the model.
Include Friction
Friction can be included in the static analysis only if the Step 1 Statics Method is Catenary or if Full Statics is used for the
Step 2 Statics Method.
With seabed friction present there is not, in general, a unique static position for the line, since the position it adopts
depends on how it was originally laid and its history since then. In order to define a unique solution, we therefore need
to make some assumptions about how the line was originally laid and friction is then assumed to act towards this
position.
If the Step 1 Statics Method is Prescribed, then this 'originally laid' position is assumed to be the position defined by the
Prescribed track. Otherwise, the 'originally laid' position is defined by specifying the Lay Azimuth and As Laid Tension
values.
Lay Azimuth
This data is only used when seabed friction is included in the static analysis and the Step 1 Statics Method is not
Prescribed. It then defines the position in which the line is assumed to have been originally laid, and friction is then
assumed to act towards this position. When Statics Method is not Prescribed, it is assumed that:
1. The line was originally laid, with the specified As Laid Tension, starting with the Bottom End at its specified position
(or at the point on the seabed directly below, if the Bottom End is not on the seabed).
2. The line was then laid in the Lay Azimuth direction, leading away from the Bottom End position and with the
specified As Laid Tension.
3. The line was laid following the profile of the seabed.
4. The Top End was then moved slowly from that original position to its specified position.
To help set this data item, there is a button on the form marked Set. This button sets the Lay Azimuth value to be the
direction from the Bottom End towards the Top End, based on their current positions.
Notes: Whilst the program will accept any Lay Azimuth, we would expect the statics convergence routine to
have increasing difficulty in finding a solution as the angle between the Lay Azimuth direction and the
vertical plane through the line ends increases. For example, if we have a line top at X=0, Y=0, and
anchor at X=100, Y=0, we would expect trouble for a Lay Direction of 90.
The Line Setup Wizard also uses the Lay Azimuth direction.
As Laid Tension
If the Step 1 Statics Method is not Prescribed, then this data is used as described in the Lay Azimuth section above.
Otherwise, for Prescribed starting shape, then the statics friction target positions are laid out along the prescribed shape
with a strain determined by the axial stiffness and this As Laid Effective Tension value.
w

270
Catenary Convergence
If the Catenary statics method is chosen, then an iterative catenary calculation is used to determine the static position of
the line. This calculation is controlled by a number of convergence parameters which can normally be left at their
default values. However sometimes the calculation can fail to converge. If this happens, first check your data for errors
and check for the following common causes of convergence failure:
Does the solution have a slack segment? This can happen in lines that touch down on the seabed almost at right
angles or in lines that hang in a very narrow U shape. The catenary calculation cannot handle lines with slack
segments try increasing the number of segments in the relevant section of the line.
For lines that touch down on the seabed, is the Lay Azimuth value specified correctly? It is the azimuth direction
leading away from End B and it is easy to get it wrong by 180.
Is the line buoyant, either deliberately or by mistake. The catenary calculation has problems with floating lines you
may need to use the Spline statics method instead.
Does the line have a surfacepiercing buoyant clump attached? If the clump is short then the catenary calculation is
more difficult.
If the calculation still fails to converge, then it is sometimes possible to obtain convergence by changing one or more of
the convergence parameters, as outlined below.
Max Iterations
The maximum number of iterations that OrcaFlex will make before treating the calculation as having failed to converge.
Increasing this value can sometimes help.
Tolerance
The nondimensional accuracy to which the calculation is done, before the calculation is treated as having converged.
Increasing the tolerance increases the chances of convergence but reduces the accuracy.
Min Damping
The minimum damping factor to be used in the calculation. Convergence can sometimes be achieved by increasing this
parameter to a value greater than 1 try values in the range 1.1 to 2.0. The minimum damping should not be set to less
than 1.
These parameters control the maximum size of the change, in the estimated solution, this is allowed in a single step.
Reducing these values can sometimes help, but the calculation will then usually require more iterations.
The remaining parameters should not normally be changed. For further information contact Orcina.
Full Statics Convergence
The numerical method used to solve for the static position is an iterative process in which the program tries to converge
on the solution in a series of steps. This process is controlled by a number of convergence parameters, found on the Line
data form.
Convergence Control Method
Either Line Search or Mag. of Std. Error / Change. We recommend using the default value, Line Search, but if this fails
then the alternative Mag. of Std. Error / Change may succeed.
Max Iterations
The calculation is abandoned if convergence has not been achieved after this number of steps. For some difficult cases
simply increasing this limit may be enough.
Tolerance
This controls the accuracy of the solution. The program accepts the line position as a static equilibrium position if the
largest out of balance force component on any node is less than Tolerance * total weight in air.
w
271
When torsion is included the static equilibrium position must also satisfy the condition that the largest out of balance
moment component on any node is less than Tolerance * total weight in air * total line length.
precision.
Delta
This is a perturbation size, used to calculate the Jacobian matrix for the problem. Delta should always be less than the
tolerance specified.
Note: This parameter is only used when torsion is included.
Min Damping, Max Damping
For some cases it is necessary to control the convergence process by damping down (i.e. reducing) the step taken at
each stage. The program includes an automatic damping system that chooses a suitable damping factor for each
iteration, but the user can set the minimum damping and maximum damping factors that are used.
Normally the default values will suffice but for difficult cases the default values can be altered. For cases that appear to
make the convergence unstable (e.g. giving very bad line positions on the screen) try increasing the Min Damping
factor to a value greater than 1, say values in the range 1 to 10. You can also try increasing the Max Damping factor, say
to values in the range 10 to 100.
Note: Convergence will be slower with larger damping values so you should use the smallest values that
result in statics converging.
These parameters are only available when the Mag of Std. Error / Change convergence control method is selected.
For some cases it may be necessary to reduce one or both of these values from their defaults. Doing so is likely to slow
down the convergence, but it may be necessary in order to achieve convergence!
Spline Starting Shape
The following data is only used if the Spline statics method is specified.
Order
This sets the smoothness of the spline shape; generally order 3 is reasonable. If a higher order is chosen, a smoother
curve results. The order cannot exceed the number of spline points.
Control Points
The line shape is specified by a number of Control Points. The first and last control points are automatically placed at
the line ends A and B respectively and OrcaFlex generates a smooth curve between the first and last control points and
passing near to the intermediate control points. These intermediate control points may be adjusted to 'pull' the curve
into the desired shape.
The first and last control points correspond to line ends A and B respectively. The line is stretched to the specified As
Laid Tension and laid out following the spline curve starting at End A and working towards End B.
For a line with a Free end the line is laid out along the curve until End B is reached. If the length around the curve is not
equal to the stretched line length then the end will either fall short of the end Estimated Position or lie beyond it (along
the continuation of the curve along its 'final' direction).
For a line with a Fixed end, Anchor or attached to some object the curve is automatically expanded or contracted to
allow the end to lie at the specified end position. An error is reported if this process fails.
Prescribed Starting Shape
This data is only used if the Prescribed method is used for Step 1 statics. It can be found in the Prescribed Starting
Shape page on the line data form and can be edited in several ways:
w

272
By editing the Length and Turn values of a track section on the line data form. OrcaFlex then creates an arc of the
specified Length and Turn, and the X and Y coordinates of the end of this section, and all subsequent sections, are
automatically adjusted to match.
By editing the X and Y coordinates of the ends of a track section on the line data form. OrcaFlex then creates the
(unique) circular arc (or straight line) that is a smooth continuation of the previous section and passes through the
new (X,Y) point. The Length and Turn values for this section, and the X and Y coordinates for subsequent sections,
are then automatically adjusted to match.
By dragging the end points of the track sections on a 3D view using the mouse. The track and the track section end
points are drawn on the 3D views. Dragging a track section end point is equivalent to editing its X and Y values, as
described above.
The individual data items (see Figure: Plan View of Example Track) are as follows:
End A Azimuth
The initial direction of the track.
Track Sections
The number of sections used to define the track.
Section Length
The length of the circular arc (or straight line if Section Turn = 0).
Section Turn
The amount by which the track azimuth increases over this section. A positive value denotes a turn to the left, when
viewed from above, and a negative value denotes a turn to the right. A value of zero can be entered to specify a straight
track section.
Section Radius
The radius of curvature of the circular arc. The radius equals (180L)/(T), where L is the section length and T is the
absolute value of section turn, in degrees. For straight sections (i.e. if Section Turn = 0) the radius is reported as Infinity.
Notes: This is a reported value, not an editable data item, and is hence always shown in grey.
With a sloping seabed the actual track on the seabed will have a slightly different radius of curvature -
see Laying out the Line.
Section X and Y
The global X and Y coordinates of the end of this track section. You can either edit these X and Y coordinates explicitly,
on the line data form, or else by dragging the end point on a 3D view. If you edit X or Y then OrcaFlex fits a circular arc
(starting at the previous section's end point) through the new end point and the Section Length and Section Turn are
automatically updated to match this new arc.
Section Z
The global Z coordinate of the section end point on the seabed. This is a reported value, not an editable data item, and is
hence always shown in grey.
Section Arc Length
The total arc length to the end of the section. This is a reported value, not an editable data item, and is hence always
shown in grey.
Section Azimuth
The azimuth direction at the end of the section. This is a reported value, not an editable data item, and is hence always
shown in grey.
w
273
Track Pen
This controls how the track is drawn. You can switch between the options of drawing the track in the chosen pen and
not drawing it at all.
Laying out the Line
The track data defines a sequence of straight lines and circular arcs in the horizontal plane, which are then projected
vertically onto the seabed to define the track itself. The program then lays the line out along the track, allowing for any
As Laid Tension specified by the user on the line data form.
Because the line is modelled as a series of straight segments, when the line is laid out along a curved track it will
repeatedly 'cut corners' and so the length of line laid along a given curved track section will be slightly shorter than the
length of that section. The size of this discrepancy reduces as more segments are used.
If End A is above the seabed then the height above the seabed varies linearly between End A and the first track section
point, reaching the seabed at the end of the first track section. If the end of the last track section is reached before all the
line has been laid out, then the rest of the line is laid out in a straight line in the direction of the end of the track.
Sloping Seabeds
The track on the seabed is obtained by projecting the specified circular arcs or straight sections vertically down onto the
seabed. With a horizontal seabed this vertical projection has no effect on the shape of the track. But with a sloping
seabed the vertical projection does not preserve distances and this causes some effects that users should note:
The section lengths and arc lengths that appear in the prescribed starting shape data table are lengths in the
horizontal plane, i.e. before projection down onto the seabed. With a sloping seabed the true section and arc lengths
on the seabed will differ, the difference depending on the slope of the seabed. The actual arc lengths can be obtained
by running the static analysis and looking at the Full Results table for the line.
The section radius reported in the prescribed starting shape data table is that of the circular arc in the horizontal
plane, i.e. before projection down onto the seabed. When the circular arc is projected down onto a sloping seabed
the resulting track section is slightly elliptical rather than circular, so again the actual radius of curvature will differ.
The actual radii of curvature can be obtained by running the static analysis and looking at the Full Results table for
the line.
User Specified Starting Shape
Node Positions
The user specified static method places each node at the position specified in this table. See User Specified Statics and
Statics Data.
Drag
Drag Formulation
A number of authors have proposed formulae to model how the drag force on a line varies with the incidence angle.
OrcaFlex offers the choice of the Standard, Pode or Eames formulations. All of these use drag coefficients, which are
specified in OrcaFlex on the line type data form.
For details of the formulations see the Line Theory section.
Results
Log Results
This option is checked by default and this means that simulation results at all points on the Line are available. If this
option is unchecked then no simulation results are available for this Line.
OrcaFlex stores simulation results in an efficient way, only logging a minimal set of variables to the simulation file. Other
results variables which have not been logged are then derived when the results are requested. Usually this means that
simulation files are a reasonable size and we recommend that this value is checked.
w

274
Should you need to reduce the size of simulation files then this option can be unchecked for those lines for which you do
not need results.
Drawing
Nodes
You can define the colour, line style and thickness of the pens used for drawing the nodes and sections of the line. See
How Objects Are Drawn. You can also choose to draw nodes as circular discs with diameter equal to the contact
diameter.
Segments
There is a choice for which pen is used to draw the segments. You may either specify the pen explicitly on the Line Data
form, in which case it will be used for all segments of that line. This allows you to use different pens to distinguish
between different lines. Alternatively, you can choose to have the segments drawn using the appropriate Line Type Pen
defined on the Line Types form. This allows you to use different pens to distinguish sections of different line types.
Node axes
Node axis directions (x, y, z) can be given individual colours. This helps distinguish between x and y directions thus
making component results easier to interpret. The node axes directions are drawn optionally and can be controlled by
the Draw Node Axes preference or by pressing CTRL+ALT+Y.
Contact
You can define a contact pen which is used when drawing nodes and segments which are in contact with the seabed,
elastic solids and other lines. Should you wish you can choose to disable the contact drawing.
Prescribed Statics Method (Track)
For Lines with Prescribed Statics Method you can control how the track is drawn. You can switch between the options of
drawing the track in the chosen pen and not drawing it at all.
Spline Starting Shape
For the Spline Starting Shape you can switch between the options of drawing the unscaled spline in the chosen pen and
not drawing it at all.
VIV Drawing
The VIV Drawing page is visible when a time domain VIV model is used. For details see the VIV Drawing topic.
Properties Report
The Line properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Total length
The sum of all the section lengths.
Total weight in air
The force due to gravity of the entire line. The contents are included but the weight of any attachments is excluded.
Total displacement
The weight of water displaced by the entire line's volume. The displacement of any attachments is excluded. The
reported value uses the water density at the sea surface.
Total weight in water
Equals Total line weight in air Total line displacement.
w
275
Full Statics force accuracy, Full Statics moment accuracy
Full Statics force accuracy is only reported if the line uses the Full Statics method. Full Statics moment accuracy is only
reported if the line uses the Full Statics method and torsion is included.
The Full Statics method finds an equilibrium configuration that is a set of node positions for which the resultant force
and moment on each node is zero. We refer to the resultant force and moment as the out of balance load. Because
computers have limited numerical precision the static analysis cannot always find a configuration where the out of
balance load is exactly zero. OrcaFlex accepts a position as a static equilibrium position if the largest out of balance load
component is less than the statics accuracy.
The Full Statics force accuracy equals Tolerance * line typical force and the Full Statics moment accuracy equals
Tolerance * line typical moment. The line typical force is defined to be the total weight in air. The line typical moment is
defined to be total weight in air * total length.
precision.
7.8.2 Rayleigh Damping Coefficients
Classical Rayleigh damping
Rayleigh damping is used to model structural damping for Lines. It is only available when using the implicit integration
scheme.
Classical Rayleigh damping uses a system damping matrix C defined as:
C = M + K
where
is the mass proportional Rayleigh damping coefficient.
is the stiffness proportional Rayleigh damping coefficient.
M is the system structural mass matrix.
K is the system structural stiffness matrix.
With this formulation the damping ratio is the same for axial, bending and torsional response.
Classical Rayleigh damping results in different damping ratios for different response frequencies according to the
following equation:
= 0.5(/ + )
where
is the damping ratio (a value of 1 corresponds to critical damping).
is the response frequency in rad/s.
It can be seen from this that the mass proportional term gives damping ratio inversely proportional to response
frequency and the stiffness proportional term gives damping ratio linearly proportional to response frequency.
Separated Rayleigh damping
In addition to classical Rayleigh damping OrcaFlex offers a separated Rayleigh damping model where C is defined as:
C = M + aKa + bKb + tKt
where
a is the stiffness proportional Rayleigh damping coefficient for axial deformation.
b is the stiffness proportional Rayleigh damping coefficient for bending deformation.
t is the stiffness proportional Rayleigh damping coefficient for torsional deformation.
Ka is the system structural stiffness matrix corresponding to axial deformation.
w

276
Kb is the system structural stiffness matrix corresponding to bending deformation.
Kt is the system structural stiffness matrix corresponding to torsional deformation.
Note that K = Ka + Kb + Kt.
The separated model allows for different damping ratio in axial, bending and torsional response.
Data
Each Line Type has structural damping properties determined by a named Rayleigh Damping Coefficient data set.
Multiple Rayleigh Damping Coefficient data sets can be defined, each with the following data.
Rayleigh damping mode
OrcaFlex offers four distinct methods for specifying the Rayleigh damping coefficients:
Stiffness proportional.
Mass and stiffness proportional.
Coefficients (classical).
Coefficients (separated).
Stiffness proportional and Mass and stiffness proportional methods
These methods allow you to specify structural damping in terms of % critical damping ratio. In addition you need to
specify response periods at which the damping ratio will be achieved. For Stiffness proportional damping only one
response period can be specified.
If Response Period 1 is set to '~' then OrcaFlex will choose response periods automatically based on the wave period, or
peak period Tp for a random wave. This method is generally recommended and is particularly useful if you are running a
batch of cases with varying wave conditions.
OrcaFlex uses the classical Rayleigh damping model and reports the mass and stiffness proportional coefficients and .
Coefficients (classical) and Coefficients (separated) methods
For these methods you specify the damping coefficients directly.
Damping ratio graph
The damping ratio graph plots the damping ratio that will be achieved for a range of response frequencies. The graph's
xaxis can be either period of frequency.
Mass proportional damping
Mass proportional damping is unrealistic and so should not be used for any system with significant steady motion, e.g.
towing, lowering, vessel manoeuvring, wave drift motion etc. Mass proportional damping can be disabled by ensuring
that is set to zero.
7.8.3 Attachments
Attachment Types
The Attachment Types form defines the properties of a number of named attachment types. Attachments with these
properties can then be connected to lines. Attachment Types can be either Clump Types, Drag Chain Types or Flex Joint
Types.
The attachment types form must include all the attachment types referred to on all of the Lines data forms, but it can
also include other attachment types that are not currently in use in the model. This allows you to build up a library of
standard attachment types that can then be easily used when building Lines.
Clumps
A clump is a concentrated attachment that is connected to a node on a Line. It can be buoyant or heavy and is a small
body that experiences forces (weight, buoyancy, drag etc.) exactly as for a 3D Buoy. But instead of being free to move it
w
277
is constrained to move with the node and the forces acting on it are transferred to that node. A clump therefore adds to
the mass, buoyancy and hydrodynamic force of the node to which it is attached.
Clumps only have 3 degrees of freedom X,Y and Z which are determined by the position of the node to which they are
attached. Clumps can be aligned with the global axes directions or alternatively they can be aligned with the node to
which they are attached.
Each clump is assigned a height and an offset from the node which are used to determine the Z coordinate of the clump
for the purposes of evaluating buoyancy and hydrodynamic forces: no moment is applied to the node by the clump.
Where the clump pierces the water surface, buoyancy and hydrodynamic forces are applied in proportion to the
immersed length of the clump.
Each clump is of a named clump type, from which it inherits all its properties. The clump types are specified on the
Attachment Types form and have the following data.
Clump Type Name
Used to refer to the Clump Type.
Mass
Mass or weight in air.
Volume
Used to calculate buoyancy and added mass for each clump of this type on a line. Clumps may be either net buoyant or
heavy as desired.
Height
Used for drawing the clump and also to determine how much of the clump is below the water surface.
If the clump is aligned with global axes then it is centred at the Offset position above the node, and extends for half its
Height above and below this point.
If the clump is aligned with Line axes then it is centred at the node, and extends for half its Height either side of this
point in the node's axial direction.
Offset
A clump may be offset vertically from the line, for example to represent a line supported below the surface by floats. The
connection is not modelled fully: the clump is always treated as being at the specified offset vertically above (offset
positive) or below (offset negative) the node to which it is attached.
If the clump is aligned with Line axes then the clump offset is forced to be zero.
Align with
Determines whether the clump is aligned with Global Axes or Line Axes.
This setting determines the clump's local directions. If it is aligned with global axes then the clump's local directions are
the same as the global axis system. If it is aligned with Line axes then its local directions are the same as the node to
which it is connected.
Drag
Drag forces are calculated in clump local directions for each clump on a line.
drag force = PW . . Water Density . (velocity)
2
. Cd . Drag Area
where
Cd is Drag Coefficient as specified here,
Drag Area is specified here,
velocity is the velocity of the fluid relative to the clump in the appropriate direction.
w

278
Added Mass Coefficients
Added mass in clump local directions is given by
Added mass = PW . Ca . Water Density . Volume
where
Ca is the Added Mass Coefficient as specified here.
Pen
Defines the colour, line style and thickness of the pen used for drawing this clump type. See How Objects Are Drawn.
Clump Type Properties Report
The Clump Types properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Weight in air
The force due to gravity acting on the clump's mass.
Displacement
The weight of water displaced by the clump's volume. The reported value uses the water density at the sea surface.
Weight in water
Equals Weight in air Displacement.
Drag Chains
Drag chains are attachments to a line that model straight chains that hang down from the line. They apply weight,
buoyancy and drag forces to the node to which they are attached, but not any added mass effects. For details see Drag
Chain Theory.
Drag chains include two facilities that can be important in modelling towed systems. Firstly, the chain's drag coefficients
can vary with the incidence angle of the relative flow; this enables modelling the effect that as the relative flow increases
the chain hangs at a greater angle to the vertical and so fluid drag generates more lift, which is applied to the line.
Secondly, drag chains interact with the seabed (in a simple manner); if the node comes closer to the seabed than the
chain length, then the seabed provides a supporting reaction force and a friction force, both of which are applied to the
node.
Each drag chain is of a named drag chain type, from which it inherits all its properties. The drag chain types are
specified on the Attachment Types form and have the following data.
Name
Used to refer to the Drag Chain Type.
Length
Length of the drag chain.
Effective Diameter
Effective diameter of the drag chain. This is the diameter of the cylinder that has the same displaced mass per unit
length.
Mass
Mass per unit length. Mass is assumed to be uniformly distributed along the length of the drag chain.
Friction Coefficient
Coefficient of friction for contact with the seabed. This coefficient is used for all directions of friction. The value can be
set to '~', in which case the drag chain will instead use the axial friction coefficient of the node to which the drag chain is
attached.
w
279
Drawing
Defines the colour, line style and thickness of the pen used for drawing drag chains of this type. See How Objects Are
Drawn.
Drag Coefficients
The fluid drag forces on the chain are specified by giving a table of the normal and axial drag coefficients, as a function of
the incidence angle between the relative velocity vector and the drag chain. So = 0 means flow axially along the drag
chain and = 90 means flow normal to the drag chain.
Coefficients are specified for a range of incidence angles between 0 and 90 and linear interpolation is used to obtain
coefficients for intermediate angles. The Graph button shows the resulting coefficient variation. Symmetry is used to
obtain coefficients for angles outside the range 0 to 90.
Note: To be realistic, the normal drag force should increase monotonically as the incidence angle increases
from 0 to 90. This turns out to require that the gradient of the normal drag coefficient curve Cdn()
should be greater than -2.Cdn() / tan() for all . OrcaFlex warns if the drag coefficient data does not
satisfy this.
See Drag Chain Theory for further details.
Drag Chain Type Properties Report
The Drag Chain Types properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Length, Diameter
The data as specified on the data form.
Total Mass
The total mass of the drag chain given by Length Mass per unit Length.
Total weight in air
Equals Total Mass g.
Total displacement
The weight of the volume of fluid displaced by the drag chain. The volume is given by Length D
2
/4 where D is the
effective diameter as specified on the data form.
Total wet weight
Equals Total weight in air Total displacement.
Flex Joints
Flex joints are attachments to a line that add additional bending stiffness to a particular node (specified by the
attachment's zposition). This additional local stiffness acts in series with the stiffness of the underlying line type bend
stiffness. If, for example, you set the stiffness for the flex joint to zero, then you effectively make that node pinjointed.
Each flex joint has properties determined by a named Flex Joint Type. The Flex Joint Types are specified on the
Attachment Types form and have the following data:
Name
Used to refer to the Flex Joint Type.
Bend Stiffness
Specifies the bend stiffness of the Flex Joint Type. You can specify separate values for bending about the x and y
directions. A ybend stiffness value of '~' is interpreted as 'same as xbend stiffness'.
Similarly to line end connection stiffness the bend stiffness is specified in terms of moment per degree of deflection.
w

280
Drawing
Defines the colour, line style and thickness of the pen used for drawing flex joints of this type. See How Objects Are
Drawn.
7.8.4 Line Types
Data
The Line Types form defines the properties of a number of named line types, which can then be used to specify the
structure of the Lines used in the model.
The line types form must include all the line types referred to on all of the Lines forms, but it can also include other line
types that are not currently in use in the model. This allows you to build up a library of standard line types which can
then be easily used when building Lines.
There isn't room on the screen to show all the properties of all the line types, so OrcaFlex offers two view modes.
Individual mode shows one line type at a time, but shows you all its properties. All mode shows all the line types, but
different types of properties are shown in different tables.
There is also a Line Type Wizard that helps set up line type data to represent commonly used structures such as chains,
ropes etc.
Line Type Name
Used to refer to the Line Type.
Geometry & Mass Data
Outer and Inner Diameter
Used to define buoyancy, drag area and mass of contents per unit length respectively.
CG Offset
The x and y coordinates of the centre of gravity (CG) relative to the centreline. These data items are only used when
torsion is being modelled. Note that if the line has contents then the contents CG is assumed to be at the centreline and is
not affected by this CG Offset.
Bulk Modulus
Specifies the compressibility of the line type. If the line type is not significantly compressible, then the Bulk Modulus can
be set to Infinity, which means incompressible. See Buoyancy Variation.
Mass per Unit Length
The mass of the line or pipe structure, excluding contents, per unit length. Commonly quoted as "weight in air, empty".
Limits Data
Limit Compression
The program has two modes for handling slack segments, i.e. when the distance between two adjacent nodes becomes
less than the original unstretched segment length:
No: means that the segment is treated as a strut which can support unlimited compression. This is the preferred model
except where bend stiffness is insignificant.
Yes: means that the segment is treated as an elastic Euler strut the compression is limited to the segment Euler load.
This is a better model for cases where the bend stiffness is insignificant, such as for chains and soft ropes.
The segment Euler load is given by
2
.EI/L0
2
where EI is the bending stiffness of the pipe and L0 is the unstretched
length of the segment. In all cases, whenever a segment has been compressed to or beyond the segment Euler load, then
a warning of this is given on the results form and in the statistics table.
w
281
For items such as mooring chain, the bending stiffness is zero, and the segment Euler load is also zero. In this case "Limit
Compression" should be set to "Yes" this correctly models a chain or very flexible rope, which cannot support any
compression. The segment Euler load warning is then simply a warning that the line has gone slack.
For a line with nonzero bend stiffness the Euler load warning is effectively a warning that the segments at that point
are too long to accurately model the bending that is occurring. Effectively, bending is occurring at a scale that is less than
the segment length, so shorter segments are needed to model it accurately. Using shorter segments in that area will give
a larger segment Euler load, and to obtain an accurate solution you should, ideally, use sufficiently short segments that
the resulting segment Euler load is not reached. See Line Compression and Modelling Compression in Flexibles for
details.
Maximum Tension
The maximum permitted tension for this type of line. This value is only used to draw a limit curve on Tension Range
Graphs; it does not limit the tension achieved in the line. If no limit curve is wanted then you may input the tilde
character "~" (meaning not applicable) instead of a number.
Minimum Bend Radii (MBR)
You can specify the minimum permitted radii of curvature for bending about the x and ydirections. These values are
optional they are only used to draw "allowable" curves on range graphs and in the calculation of Normalised Curvature
results. They do not limit the bend radius of the line. If you do not want these curves then set the xradius to "~"
(meaning "not applicable") and the yvalue to "~" (meaning "same as xvalue").
Often the radii for the x and ydirections are equal and this can be specified by setting the yradius to "~" which means
"same as xradius".
The specified values are used to draw "allowable curvature" curves on the x and yCurvature range graphs, and also (if
the x and yminimum radii are equal) on the Curvature range graph. In addition, they are used (together with the
specified bend stiffness) to derive "allowable bend moment" curves which are drawn on the x and yBend Moment
range graphs, and also (if the x and yvalues are equal) on the Bend Moment range graph. The MBR is also used to
calculate normalised curvature.
Notes: MBR can be specified as a variable data item - defined as a table relating MBR to effective tension. A
typical example of this would be a steel core umbilical. A variable MBR is used solely in the calculation
of normalised curvature.
The "allowable" curve may not be visible on the range graph, since it may be outside the range covered
by the graph. To see the "allowable" curve in this case you will need to modify the graph to increase the
range of values covered.
Stiffness Data
Axial Stiffness
The axial stiffness is the slope of the curve relating wall tension to strain. The data specifies the behaviour in the
unpressured state, i.e. atmospheric pressure inside and out. Pressure effects, including the Poisson ratio effect, are then
allowed for by OrcaFlex.
You can either specify linear or nonlinear behaviour, as follows:
For a simple linear behaviour, specify the axial stiffness to be the constant slope of the line relating wall tension to
strain. This slope is the equivalent EA value for the line, where E is Young's modulus and A is the cross section area.
It equals the force required to double the length of any given piece of line, assuming perfectly linear elastic
behaviour. (In practice, of course, lines would yield before such a tension was reached.)
For a nonlinear behaviour, use variable data to specify a table of wall tension against axial strain. OrcaFlex uses
linear interpolation for strains between those specified in the table, and linear extrapolation for strains beyond
those specified in the table. The tension must be zero at zero strain.
w

282
Note: Axial strain is defined to equal (L - L0) / L0, where L and L0 are the stretched and unstretched length of
a given piece of pipe. Here 'unstretched' means the length when unpressured and unstressed. When a
pipe is pressured its tension at this 'unstretched' length is often not zero because of strains due to
pressure effects. For a homogeneous pipe this can be modelled by specifying the Poisson ratio. For a
non-homogeneous pipe (e.g. a flexible) the Poisson ratio may not be able to capture the pressure
effects.
Warning: Non-linear behaviour breaks the assumptions of the stress results and fatigue analysis.
See Calculating Tension Forces for details of the tension model used.
Warning: The axial stiffness specified here has a major effect on how long the dynamic simulation will take, since
very large axial stiffness values lead to very small natural periods for the nodes and this in turn
requires very small simulation time steps. See Inner and Outer Time Steps.
Fortunately, the value of axial stiffness used is often not very important, providing it is large enough that the axial
strains produced are small. The exception to this is where snatch loads occur, since the axial stiffness directly affects the
peak tension that results.
It is therefore normally quite acceptable to specify a much smaller axial stiffness value than applies to the real line, so
enabling much faster simulations. We recommend that artificially low axial stiffness values are specified, particularly for
early investigative simulations. The effect of this can easily be investigated later by rerunning a selection of important
simulations with the actual axial stiffness value.
Poisson Ratio
This specifies the Poisson ratio of the material that makes up the wall of the line type. It is used to model any length
changes due to the radial and circumferential stresses caused by contents pressure and external pressure.
A Poisson ratio of zero means no such length changes. For metals such as steel or titanium the Poisson ratio is about 0.3
and for polyethylene about 0.4. Most materials have Poisson ratio between 0.0 and 0.5.
Note: The Poisson ratio effect is calculated assuming that the line type is a pipe made from a homogeneous
material. It is not really applicable to complex structures such as flexibles, whose length changes due to
pressure are more complex. However for such cases an effective Poisson ratio could be specified as an
approximation.
Bend Stiffness
The bend stiffness is the slope of the bend momentcurvature curve. You can specify separate values for bending about
the x and ydirections, but often these are equal. This can be achieved by setting the ybend stiffness to '~' which means
'same as xbend stiffness'.
The bend stiffness specified may be zero, for example for chains. It can also be very large values, for example for steel
pipes, but this will often result in short natural periods in the model and hence require short simulation time steps. See
Inner and Outer Time Steps.
You can specify the bend stiffness to be linear, elastic non-linear, hysteretic non-linear or externally calculated, as
follows. See Calculating Bend Moments for further details of the bending model used.
Linear Bend Stiffness
For normal simple linear behaviour, specify the bend stiffness to be the constant slope of the bend momentcurvature
relationship. This slope is the equivalent EI value for the line, where E is Young's modulus and I is the moment of area of
the crosssection. The bend stiffness equals the bend moment required to bend the line to a curvature of 1 radian per
unit length.
Non-Linear Bend Stiffness
For nonlinear behaviour, use variable data to specify a table of bend moment magnitude against curvature magnitude.
OrcaFlex uses linear interpolation for curvatures between those specified in the table, and linear extrapolation for
w
283
curvatures beyond those specified in the table. The bend moment must be zero at zero curvature. For homogeneous
pipes the Plasticity Wizard may be useful to help set up the table.
With nonlinear bend stiffness you must also specify whether the hysteretic bending model should be used.
Nonhysteretic means that the nonlinear stiffness is elastic. No hysteresis effects are included and the bend
moment magnitude is simply the specified function of the current curvature magnitude.
Hysteretic means the bend moment includes hysteresis effects, so that the bend moment depends on the history of
curvature applied as well as on the current curvature. Also note that if the hysteretic model is used then the line
must include torsion effects.
Warning: You must check that the hysteretic model is suitable for the line type being modelled. It is not suitable
for modelling rate-dependent effects. It is intended for modelling hysteresis due to persisting effects
such as yield of material or slippage of one part of a composite line structure relative to another part.
If you use the hysteretic bending model then the simulation speed may be significantly slowed if there are a large
number of points specified in the table of bend moment against curvature. You might be able to speed up the simulation,
without significantly affecting accuracy, by removing superfluous points in areas where the curve is very close to linear.
Note: If you are using non-linear bend stiffness, then the mid-segment curvature results reported depend on
whether the bend stiffness is specified to be hysteretic or not. If the bend stiffness is not hysteretic then
the mid-segment curvature reported is the curvature that corresponds to the mid-segment bend
moment (which is the mean of the bend moments at either end of the segment). If the bend stiffness is
hysteretic then the mid-segment curvature cannot be derived in this way (because of possible
hysteresis effects) so the mid-segment curvature reported is the mean of the curvatures at the ends of
the segment. This difference may be significant if the bend stiffness is significantly non-linear over the
range of curvatures involved.
For further details see nonlinear bend stiffness theory.
Externally Calculated Bend Moment
This option allows the bend moment to be calculated by an external function. If this option is used then the line must
include torsion effects. The external function can be written by the user or other software writers. For details see the
OrcaFlex programming interface (OrcFxAPI) and the OrcFxAPI documentation.
Warning: Non-linear behaviour breaks the assumptions of the stress results and fatigue analysis in OrcaFlex. You
should therefore not use these facilities when there are significant non-linear effects.
Torsional Stiffness
The torsional stiffness is used only if torsion is included on the line data form.
The torsional stiffness specifies the relationship between twist and torsional moment (torque). You can specify linear or
nonlinear behaviour, as follows:
For a simple linear behaviour, specify the torsional stiffness to be the constant slope of the torsional momenttwist
per unit length relationship. This slope is the equivalent GJ value for the line, where G is the shear modulus and J is
the polar moment of inertia. It equals the torque which arises if the line is given a twist of 1 radian per unit length.
For a nonlinear behaviour, use variable data to specify a table of torque against twist per unit length. OrcaFlex uses
linear interpolation for curvatures between those specified in the table, and linear extrapolation for values outside
those specified in the table. The torque must be zero at zero twist.
See Calculating Torsion Moments for details on how this data is used.
Note: When defining non-linear torsional stiffness you should specify values for both positive and negative
twist per unit length. If the behaviour is mirrored for positive and negative twist then you must specify
the full relationship - OrcaFlex does not automatically reflect the data for you.
Warning: Non-linear behaviour breaks the assumptions of the stress results and fatigue analysis.
w

284
Drag, Lift & Added Mass Data
Drag Coefficients
The drag coefficients for the normal (x and y) directions and axial (z) direction are specified on the line type data form.
For the x and y directions the drag coefficients can be one of the following options:
A fixed constant value.
A value that varies with Reynolds number.
A value that varies with Height above Seabed.
A value that varies with both Reynolds number and Height above Seabed.
Often the coefficients for the x and ydirections are equal and this can be specified by setting the ycoefficient to "~",
which means "same as xcoefficient". OrcaFlex also offers a choice (on the line data form) of different formulations for
how the drag force components vary with the incidence angle.
For further details see the Line Theory section.
Lift Coefficient
The lift coefficient is used to specify a lift force which acts normal to the line and normal to the relative flow direction. It
can be one of the following options:
A fixed constant value.
A value that varies with Reynolds number.
A value that varies with Height above seabed.
A value that varies with both Reynolds number and Height above seabed.
For further details see the Line Theory section.
Drag / Lift Diameters
These are used when calculating drag area and lift area. A value of '~' results in the outer diameter being used.
Note: OrcaFlex calculates the normal drag / lift area to be Dn.L and the axial drag area to be .Da.L where Dn
is the normal drag / lift diameter, Da is the axial drag diameter and L is the element length. Note that
different programs handle these calculations in different ways. For example it is common for programs
to use a single drag / lift area for both normal and axial flow and in addition some programs do not
include the factor of in the axial drag area. Because of these differences you must be careful when
comparing or transferring data between different programs.
The added mass coefficients Ca for normal (x and ydirections) and axial (zdirection) flow. Often the coefficients for the
x and ydirections are equal and this can be specified by setting the ycoefficient to "~" which means "same as x
coefficient".
For each flow direction, the inertia coefficient, Cm, is automatically set to equal 1+Ca. See Added Mass for details.
Contact Data
Contact Diameter
Contact between lines and the seabed, elastic solids or other lines accounts for the diameter of the line. This value
specifies the diameter to be used. If a value of '~' is specified then the line outer diameter is used.
This value is also used in the calculation of Line Contact Clearance results and as the drawing diameter for shaded
graphics views.
Contact Stiffness and Damping
The stiffness and damping values used by the clashing algorithm. See Line Clashing.
w
285
Damping is always zero when using the implicit integration scheme.
Stress Data
Stress Outer and Inner Diameter
The stress diameters are the inside and outside diameters of the loadbearing cylinder. They are used in the wall tension
and stress results calculations, which are based on the assumption that the loads in the line are taken by a simple
homogeneous cylinder. For simple cases, the stress diameters can be set to '~', in which case they will be taken to be the
same as the pipe diameters. For more complex cases, for example where the pipe outside diameter allows for added
buoyancy modules that are not load bearing, the stress diameters can be set separately. See Line Results Forces.
Allowable Stress
The maximum allowable stress for this type of line. This value is only used to draw a limit curve on Stress Range
Graphs; it does not limit the stress achieved in the line. If no limit curve is wanted then you may input the tilde character
"~" (meaning not applicable) instead of a number.
Stress Loading Factors
These are used to specify what proportion of the loads (tension, bend moment, shear and torque) are to be used when
calculating wall tension and stress results. The effective tension, bend moment, shear force and torque are multiplied by
the appropriate stress loading factor when they are used to calculate the wall tension and stress results.
For many cases, e.g. when modelling a simple homogeneous pipe that carries all the loads, these load factors should be
set to 1, the default value.
In some cases, values less than 1 may be suitable. For example, consider a case where the line models a composite
structure that consists of a main carrier pipe and an external piggyback pipe. You might estimate that the main pipe
takes all of the tensile and torsional loads, but only carries 70% of the bending loads, the other 30% being taken by the
piggyback pipe. Then to obtain stress estimates for the main pipe you could set the Stress Outer and Inner Diameters to
'~' and set the bending and shear stress loading factors to 0.7.
Note: The Allowable Stress and Stress Loading Factors only affect the wall tension results, stress results and
fatigue analyses. These results are derived after the simulation has run, and because of this OrcaFlex
allows these data items to be modified after a simulation has been run.
Structural Damping Data
Rayleigh Damping Coefficients
A named Rayleigh Damping Coefficient data set. This data item can be set to "(no damping)", in which case no Rayleigh
damping will be applied for this Line Type.
This data is only available when using the implicit integration scheme.
Friction Data
Seabed Friction Coefficients
OrcaFlex applies Coulomb friction between the line and the seabed. The friction force applied never exceeds R where R
is the seabed reaction force and is the friction coefficient. See Seabed Friction Data for published friction data.
Lines lying on the seabed often move axially more readily than they move laterally. To enable this effect to be modelled,
you can specify different friction coefficients for motion normal (i.e. lateral) and axial to the line. For intermediate
directions of motion OrcaFlex interpolates between these two values to obtain the friction coefficient to use. If the
axial friction coefficient is set to '~' then the normal friction coefficient is used for for all directions of motion. This
provides a convenient way of using the same friction coefficient for all directions of motion.
See Friction Theory for further details of the friction model used.
Note: The friction coefficient for contact with elastic solids is specified on the Solid Friction Coefficients data
form.
w

286
Drawing Data
Pen
Defines the colour, line style and thickness of the pen used for drawing this line type. See How Objects Are Drawn. For
each line there is a choice, on the Line Data form, of whether to draw the sections of the line using these Line Types
pens, or whether to define a specific pen to use for all the sections of the line.
External Functions
Parameters
external function used by the Line Type.
Plasticity Wizard
OrcaFlex allows you to specify nonlinear bend stiffnesses for Line Types. The data is given as a table of bend moment
against curvature. If you are modelling a uniform, homogeneous pipe you can use the Plasticity Wizard to create this
table.
Once you have entered the appropriate data as described below, click the Calculate button and the curvature / bend
moment relationship is generated. In addition, the Bend Stiffness variable data source that is created is initialised to be
hysteretic.
The Plasticity Wizard is opened by clicking the "Plasticity Wizard" button on the Variable Data form.
Note: Before you can open the Plasticity Wizard you must have created and selected a Bend Stiffness variable
data source.
Plasticity Wizard Data
The Plasticity Wizard requires the following data:
Stress Diameters (Outer / Inner)
The inside and outside diameters of the loadbearing cylinder.
Mean Axial Strain
The Plasticity Wizard calculates bend moment curvature relationship by integrating the stress profile across the pipe
crosssection. This calculation requires a mean axial strain to be specified this data item serves that purpose.
Maximum Curvature for Derived Data Source
The Plasticity Wizard derives a nonlinear bend stiffness variable data source. This data source will be defined between
zero curvature and this maximum curvature.
Stress-Strain relationship
The relationship between stress and strain can be specified by either Ramberg-Osgood curve or Stress-Strain table.
Material E, Reference Stress, , n (Ramberg-Osgood curve only)
These data define the relationship between stress () and strain () in terms of a RambergOsgood curve as follows:
= elastic strain component + plastic strain component
where
elastic strain component = / E
plastic strain component = ( / Reference Stress)^n
Stress, Strain (Stress-Strain table only)
This table directly specifies the relationship between stress and strain. The table is interpolated linearly and for values
of strain outside the table linear extrapolation will be used.
w
287
Profile button
This plots a graph showing the stressstrain relationship that your data specifies. If you update the data while the graph
is showing then it is updated to show your amended data.
Properties Report
The Line Type properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Weight in air
The force due to gravity acting on the line type's mass.
Displacement
The weight of water displaced by the line type's volume. The reported value uses the water density at the sea surface.
Weight in water
Diam/Wt Ratio
Equals Outer Diameter / Weight in water.
Note: For Line Types that have a non-zero bore you must specify the contents density to be used in the
calculation of the above properties, since this will affect the properties that involve weight.
Used in, Contents Density
The names and contents densities of each line that uses that line type.
7.8.5 Line Results
This section describes the line results that are available for the static and dynamic analyses. These results are available
using the Results Selection form.
Results from the modal analysis and fatigue analysis are described elsewhere see the Modal Analysis and Fatigue
Analysis sections.
Selecting which Categories of Line Results are Shown
For Lines there are a large number of results variables available on the Results form. So OrcaFlex groups the results
variables into the following categories:
Positions.
Motions.
Angles.
Forces.
Moments.
Clashing.
Pipe Stress / Strain.
End Loads.
To ease results selection the Show boxes on the results form allow you to choose which of these categories of variables
are shown in the Variable list. To get the full list of available variables simply select all the categories. But normally
there are several categories of variable that you do not currently need, in which case deselecting them reduces the
displayed list of variables to a more manageable set.
w

288
Specifying the Position on the Line
For line results you need to specify the position on the line at which you want results. This is done by setting the entries
in a row in the Position table on the results form. You are then offered the Variables that are available for the point
specified by the currentlyselected row.
Each row in the table specifies one point on the line. There are multiple rows in the table, so you can set up rows
specifying a number of different points of interest and then easily switch between them by choosing which row you
select. In a row that you don't want to use you can set the Node or Arclength column to '~', meaning 'unspecified'.
Three rows in the table are dedicated to special arc lengths on the line:
The first and last rows in the Position table are dedicated to the line's end points A and B.
The next to last row in the table is dedicated to the Touchdown point. This is defined to be the first node on the
seabed (starting from the Top End). If the results variable selected is a segment variable (i.e. is only available at
midsegment points) then the value reported for the touchdown point is the midsegment valued in the segment
that precedes the Touchdown node. When there are no nodes on the seabed then the results variable is reported as
N/A (meaning 'not available') and the graph shows no value.
Arclength and Node Columns
The Arclength column specifies how far along the line the point is, measured from zero at End A. For information, if you
set the Arclength column then the adjacent Node cell is set to the number of the nearest node to that arclength.
The Node column can also be used as an alternative way of setting the arclength. You can set the Node column to the
number of a node on the line. The adjacent Arclength cell will then be set to the arclength to that node. The node number
must be in the range 1 (the node at End A) to N+1 (the node at End B), where N is the total number of segments in the
line.
Note: The actual arc length for which line results are reported may not be exactly the specified arclength.
OrcaFlex reports results for the 'nearest appropriate' result point. See Result Points below.
R and Theta Columns
For some variables (e.g. stress components) you must also specify the position of the point within the cross section
through the specified arclength. Whenever one of these variables is selected in the Variables list, two extra columns
become visible in the Position table. These extra columns specify the polar coordinates (R,Theta) of the point within
the cross section; see the diagram in the Pipe Stress Calculation section. The R column can only be set to either Inner or
Outer, meaning the radii corresponding to the Stress ID or Stress OD respectively. Results are not available for points
between these two radii.
Clearance Results
Clearance results can be reported either as clearances from this line to all other lines or from this line to a specified
other line. You choose which of the options is used from the dropdown list labelled "Clearances are reported as
clearances from".
Result Points
OrcaFlex uses a discretised model and so results are only available at nodes, midsegment points and line ends; we call
these points 'result points'. The available result points depend on which variable you request, they are documented in
the description of the variable.
When you ask for a variable at a specified arclength OrcaFlex gives the value for the 'nearest appropriate' result point.
The phrase 'nearest appropriate' here means that OrcaFlex considers the available result points that are in the same
section as the arclength you specified and then chooses the one that is nearest to the arclength you specified. If you
specify an arclength that is exactly at the boundary of two sections then OrcaFlex uses the section that starts at that
arclength.
OrcaFlex always labels results with the actual arclength to the result point to which they apply, so you can check to
ensure that you are getting results at the result point you want.
w
289
Positions
X, Y and Z
Available at nodes only. The global coordinates of the selected node.
Proportion Wet
Available at nodes only. The proportion of the part of the line that the node represents, that is submerged in the sea. The
value is in the range 0 to 1, a value of 0 meaning no submersion and 1 meaning is completely submerged. For details see
Line Interaction with the Sea Surface.
Surface Z
Available at nodes only. The global Z coordinate of the sea surface directly above the instantaneous position of the
selected node.
Depth
Available at nodes only. The depth of the node beneath the sea surface (= Surface Z Node Z).
Seabed Clearance
Available at nodes only. The clearance is the shortest distance between the node and any point on the seabed, allowing
for the contact diameter. The value reported is for the node that is nearest the specified arc length. A negative value
indicates that the node is in contact with the seabed.
This result is not available for 3D seabeds because it is difficult to calculate. Instead you should use Vertical Seabed
Clearance.
Vertical Seabed Clearance
Available at nodes only. The clearance is the vertical distance between the node and the seabed, allowing for the contact
diameter. The value reported is for the node that is nearest the specified arc length. A negative value indicates that the
node is in contact with the seabed.
Sea Surface Clearance
Available at nodes only. The vertical clearance from node centre to the instantaneous sea surface. Negative values mean
that the node is submerged.
Arc Length
Available at nodes only. The arc length from End A to the selected point. This is normally only useful for the touchdown
point, since for other points it is constant. For the touchdown point it gives the arc length from End A to the first node on
the seabed, or zero if there is no touchdown.
Expansion Factor
Available at midsegments only. The expansion factor of the selected segment.
Transverse VIV Offset
Available at nodes only. This is the node's offset from the nonVIV node position, in the transverse VIV direction.
Transverse A/D
Available only at nodes that use one of the time domain VIV models from the VIV Toolbox. The amplitude of the
oscillation in the transverse VIV direction divided by the node's VIV diameter.
Motions
Velocity, GX-Velocity, GY-Velocity, GZ-Velocity,
Available at nodes only. The magnitude and components (with respect to global axes) of the velocity and acceleration of
the node.
w

290
Warning: The velocity results are derived by numerically differentiating the logged positions of the node with
respect to time, using the central difference scheme. The acceleration results are derived by a further
such numerical differentiation. Because of this the accuracy of the results (especially the accelerations)
will depend on the log sample interval. If the log sample interval is large then the results will not show
higher frequency components of velocity and acceleration. If the log sample interval is small then the
results may be inaccurate due to loss of precision due to subtraction.
Acceleration (incl. g), x-Acceleration (incl. g), y-Acceleration (incl. g), z-Acceleration (incl. g)
Available at nodes only. The magnitude and components (with respect to node axes) of the vector a g where a is the
acceleration of the node and g is the acceleration due to gravity, a vector pointing vertically downwards.
These results can be used to compare against accelerometer readings.
Relative Velocity, Normal Relative Velocity, Axial Relative Velocity
Available at nodes only. Relative Velocity is the velocity of the fluid relative to the node, i.e. Vfluid Vnode. The results
reported are the magnitude of the relative velocity and its normal and axial components (relative to the line). For the
axial component, a positive value means that the fluid is moving (relative to the line) towards End B.
The fluid velocity used is the velocity of the principal fluid affecting the node. The principal fluid is defined as follows:
1. If proportion dry > 0.5 and the Include wind loads on Lines option is enabled in the Environment data then the
principal fluid is the air.
2. Otherwise the principal fluid is the sea.
Note: For a node that is above the water surface OrcaFlex reports a relative velocity based on the fluid
velocity at the surface.
Warning: The relative velocity results are derived using the node velocity results, so see the accuracy warning
given above.
Reynolds Number
Available at nodes only. The Reynolds number is a measure of the flow regime. OrcaFlex offers a number of different
options for the calculation of Reynolds number, specified on the Environment data form.
x-Drag Coefficient, y-Drag Coefficient, z-Drag Coefficient, Lift Coefficient
Available at nodes only. These are the drag and lift coefficients used in the calculation.
For constant coefficients then these results report the values given in the user's data, except for a node at the junction
between two sections with different coefficients, where an effective average value is used.
If the line's drag or lift coefficients vary with Reynolds number or Height above Seabed then these results report the
computed value that was used.
If the line uses a wake oscillator VIV model with inline drag amplification then the amplification factor is not included in
these results. Instead you can use the Inline Drag Amplification Factor results variable.
Angles
Azimuth, Declination and Gamma
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. These angles report the local orientation of the line relative to
global axes. The gamma angle is defined as for line ends (see Line End Orientation) and is only available if the line twist
orientation is defined.
Declination is in the range 0 to 180. Range jump suppression is applied to Azimuth and Gamma (so values outside the
range 360 to +360 might be reported).
w
291
Ez-Angle, Exy-Angle, Ezx-Angle, Ezy-Angle
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The direction angles of the midsegment point with respect to the
end axes of the nearest line end. See End Direction Results. These results are only available if the end orientation angles
are defined.
EzAngle is in the range 0 to 180. Range jump suppression is applied to ExyAngle, EzxAngle and EzyAngle (so values
outside the range 360 to +360 might be reported).
Twist
Available at midsegment points only. The twist per unit length experienced by the segment.
Fluid Incidence Angle
Available at nodes only. The angle between the relative velocity direction and the line axial direction. A value in the
range 0 to 90.
No-Moment Azimuth, No-Moment Declination
Available at line ends only. The azimuth and declination angles, relative to global axes, of the nomoment direction at the
end, allowing for any motion of the object to which the line is attached. These results are only available if the end
orientation angles are defined.
NoMoment Declination is in the range 0 to 180. Range jump suppression is applied to NoMoment Azimuth (so values
End Force Azimuth, End Force Declination
Available at line ends only. The azimuth and declination of the end force vector, relative to global axes.
End Force Declination is in the range 0 to 180. Range jump suppression is applied to End Force Azimuth (so values
End Force Ez-Angle, End Force Exy-Angle, End Force Ezx-Angle, End Force Ezy-Angle
Available at line ends only. The direction angles of the end force vector, with respect to the frame of reference of the line
end. See End Direction Results. These results are only available if the end orientation angles are defined.
End Force EzAngle is in the range 0 to 180. Range jump suppression is applied to the other 3 end force angles (so
values outside the range 360 to +360 might be reported).
VIV Stagnation Point, VIV Neg Separation Point, VIV Pos Separation Point
Available only at nodes that use one of the vortex tracking VIV models from the VIV Toolbox. The values reported are
the angular positions of the stagnation and separation points.
Forces
Effective Tension and Wall Tension
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The structural force along the line axis. Positive values denote
tension and negative values denote compression.
For details of the difference between the effective tension and the wall tension see the Line Pressure Effects section. In
particular see the warning in that section if the line type stress diameters differ from the outer and inner diameters.
Normalised Tension
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. Defined to be Effective Tension divided by Maximum Tension.
Shear Force, x-Shear Force, y-Shear Force, Shear Force component, In-plane Shear Force, Out-of-plane Shear Force
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The magnitude of structural force normal to the line axis, its
components in the local x and ydirections, its component in the user specified local direction theta and its components
in the inplane and outofplane directions.
w

292
The inplane direction is normal to both the line's axis (at the specified arc length) and the vertical direction. The outof
plane direction is normal to both the line's axis and the inplane direction.
If the line's axis is vertical then these directions are illdefined and therefore no values can be reported.
Vortex Force Magnitude,
Inline Vortex Force, Transverse Vortex Force,
GX-Vortex Force, GY-Vortex Force, GZ-Vortex Force
Available only at nodes that use one of the time domain VIV models from the VIV Toolbox. The magnitude of the lift and
drag force per unit length of line, and its components in the VIV directions and global axes directions. For details, see the
documentation of the relevant time domain VIV model.
Inline Drag Amplification Factor
Available only at nodes that use one of the wake oscillator VIV models from the VIV Toolbox. The instantaneous value of
the Inline Drag Amplification Factor.
Moments
Bend Moment, x-Bend Moment, y-Bend Moment, Bend Moment component, In-plane Bend Moment, Out-of-plane Bend
Moment
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The magnitude of bend moment, its components in the local x and y
directions, its component in the user specified local direction theta and its components in the inplane and outofplane
directions.
The inplane direction is normal to both the line's axis (at the specified arc length) and the vertical direction. The outof
plane direction is normal to both the line's axis and the inplane direction.
If the line's axis is vertical then these directions are illdefined and therefore no values can be reported.
Curvature, x-Curvature, y-Curvature, Curvature component, In-plane Curvature, Out-of-plane Curvature
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The magnitude of curvature, its components in the local x and y
directions, its component in the user specified local direction theta, the inplane and outof planecomponents and its
components in the inplane and outofplane directions, as defined above.
When prebend is modelled curvature results are reported relative to the prebent curvature.
Note: When using non-linear bend stiffness, the reported mid-segment curvature depends on whether the
bend stiffness is specified to be hysteretic or not. For details see the note in the Non-linear Bend
Stiffness section.
Warning: Curvature results are accurate only if the segment length is sufficiently short. The accuracy can be
estimated by performing a sensitivity study on segment length in the area of interest.
Normalised Curvature
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. Defined to be Curvature divided by Allowable Curvature.
If minimum bend radius (MBR) is specified as varying with effective tension then this variation is taken into account
when calculating Normalised Curvature.
Bend Radius, x-Bend Radius, y-Bend Radius, Bend Radius component, In-plane Bend Radius, Out-of-plane Bend Radius
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The magnitude of bend radius, its components in the local x and y
directions, its component in the user specified local direction theta and its components in the inplane and outofplane
directions, as defined above.
When prebend is modelled these results are reported relative to the prebent curvature.
Notes: Bend radius is defined to be 1 / curvature. If the curvature is 0 then a value of 'Infinity' is reported.
w
293
When using non-linear bend stiffness, the reported mid-segment curvature depends on whether the
bend stiffness is specified to be hysteretic or not. For details see the note in the Non-linear Bend
Stiffness section.
Warning: Bend radius results are accurate only if the segment length is sufficiently short. The accuracy can be
estimated by performing a sensitivity study on segment length in the area of interest.
Torque
Available at midsegment points and line ends only, and available only for lines with torsion included. The component of
structural moment along the line axis. Note that Torque includes any torque generated by tensiontorque interaction.
Clashing
Note: As well as the results variables documented below OrcaFlex also provides a Line Clashing Report.
Line Centreline Clearance, Line Contact Clearance
Available at midsegment points and line ends. The line clearance variables report shortest distances between lines.
These distances can be either the shortest distance between centrelines (Line Centreline Clearance) or the shortest
distance between outer edges (Line Contact Clearance). The results selection form lets you choose to report clearances
either:
from this line to all other lines or
from this line to a specified other line.
In the text below we refer to the other lines used in the clearance calculations as the clearance lines, be they all other
lines or a single specified other line.
Line Centreline Clearance reports the centreline clearance from this line to the clearance lines. More precisely, the
clearance reported for a segment is the shortest distance from the centreline of the segment to the centreline of any
segment on the clearance lines. Note that the clearance reported therefore does not allow for the radii of the lines
involved. When clearance is reported for a line end it reports the shortest distance from the centreline of the point at the
end node to the centreline of any segment on the clearance lines.
Line Contact Clearance is similar but it reports the clearance between line outer edges allowing for their contact
diameters.
Note: Line Contact Clearance can report negative values. This means that the segments in question are
penetrating each other. If clashing is being modelled for both segments then a clash force will result
from this penetration.
The line clearance variables are useful for checking for clashing between lines. They are available in both range graph
and time history form. The range graph, for a given period of the simulation, enables you to see where on the line
clashing may be a problem. You can then examine the time history of line clearance for that point on the line, to see
when closest approach occurs. You can then use the replay to examine which other line is coming closest.
It is sometimes worth choosing carefully which line to check for clearance. An example is checking for clashing between
a single mooring line and one or more of a number of closely spaced flowlines. Let us assume that you are reporting
clearances from all other lines. The clearance graphs for the flowlines will include clearance to the other flowlines,
between which clashing may not be a concern. The mooring line clearance is probably more useful, since it only includes
clearance to the flowlines.
Line clearance only checks against other lines, not against edges of vessels, buoys, etc. However you can check clearance
against part of a vessel, for example, by attaching a dummy singlesegment line to the vessel, spanning across the area of
interest. The line clearance graphs for that dummy line will then show how close other lines come to that area of the
vessel.
Notes: For mid-segment points the segment used is the one containing the selected arclength.
Line clearance results are only available if there are at least 2 lines in the model.
w

294
Warning: For complex models, building and updating clearance graphs can be slow. Having "live" clearance
graphs open while a simulation is running can significantly slow down the simulation.
Line Clash Force
Available at midsegment points only. The magnitude of the clash force between this segment and other lines. Please
note that this variable is only available if clash checking has been included for the lines concerned. See Line Clashing for
details.
Line Clash Force is given for the segment containing the selected arclength and results are available in the form of time
histories and range graphs. If multiple clashes occur simultaneously on the same segment then the value reported is the
magnitude of the vector sum of the clash forces involved.
Line Clash Impulse
Available at midsegment points only. The integral of Line Clash Force with respect to time.
Line Clash Energy
Available at midsegment points only. Clash energy is calculated by integrating the magnitude of clash force with respect
to depth of penetration.
Suppose that this segment is denoted by S1 and segment S2 is another segment which S1 is in contact with. The clash
energy for the spring/damper representing contact between these 2 segments is calculated by integrating the
magnitude of clash force with respect to depth of penetration. This then is the potential energy in the spring/damper.
If multiple clashes occur simultaneously on the same segment then the value reported is the sum of all individual clash
energies between this segment and other segments.
Solid Contact Force
Available at nodes only. The magnitude of the force per unit length due to contact with elastic solids.
Seabed Reaction Force
Available at nodes only. The component of seabed reaction force normal to the seabed. This result is reported as a force
per unit length of line. The forces due to both seabed stiffness and seabed damping are included.
Warning: The damping force depends upon node velocity. This is derived by numerically differentiating the
logged positions of the node with respect to time, using the central difference scheme. Because of this
the accuracy of the results will depend on the log sample interval. See Motions results for more details.
Pipe Stress / Strain
Stress and strain results are available at midsegment points and at line ends.
Note: The loads (tension, bend moment, shear and torque) which are used in stress calculations are scaled by
the stress loading factors before being used.
Warnings: The stress calculation built into OrcaFlex makes various assumptions - see below. In particular it is
assumed that the pipe is made of a straight, uniform, homogeneous, linear material, that the tension
and shear are uniformly distributed across the pipe wall, and that the bending stress varies linearly
across the pipe cross-section. It is therefore only valid for pipes such as steel or titanium risers, not for
composite flexible risers, ropes chains, etc. And it is not valid if the pipe is stressed beyond the
material's linear range (even if this is allowed for by using non-linear bend stiffness or axial stiffness
data).
If the line type stress diameters differ from the outer and inner diameters then see the warning in the
Line Pressure Effects section.
OrcaFlex does not, and indeed cannot, allow for the complex stress concentrations that can occur at
joints or at the top and bottom of a riser. The stress calculations included are only valid under the
assumptions given below; detailed stress analysis is still necessary.
w
295
The stress calculation makes the following assumptions:
At each point along the line all the loads are taken by a single simple cylinder of the specified Stress OD and Stress
ID and made of a homogeneous material.
The stresses included are those due to tension, bending, shear and hoop stress.
Internal pressure in the line generates wall tension in the line as it would do in a sealed cylinder.
Shear stress is assumed to be uniformly distributed across the cross section. Although this is not strictly the case,
the shear stress is normally negligible so this simplifying assumption is reasonable.
The hoop stress due to static internal and external pressure at the current Zlevel is included, and is calculated using
the standard Lam equation for thick walled cylinders. However the effect of dynamic variations in pressure, for
example from the passage of the wave, are not included.
For terminology see Pipe Stress Calculation.
Mean Axial Strain
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. This is the axial strain at the pipe centreline. Thus it excludes any
axial strain due to bending.
Max Bending Strain
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. This is the axial strain due to bending at the outer fibre on the
outside of the bend.
Max Axial Strain
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. This equals Mean Axial Strain + Max Bending Strain.
ZZ Strain
Available at midsegment points only. This is the strain in the pipe axial direction and includes the effects of tension and
bending. ZZ Strain varies across the crosssection and so its value is reported at a specified (R, Theta) position.
Internal and External Pressure
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The internal and external static pressures, Pi and Po. See Line
Pressure Effects for details.
Pressures in OrcaFlex are gauge pressures, not absolute pressures. That is, they are relative to atmospheric pressure
and so can be as low as minus 1 atmosphere (101.325 kPa).
Net External Pressure
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. Defined as Internal Pressure External Pressure.
Direct Tensile Stress
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. This is the axial stress due to wall tension (which includes the
effects of internal and external pressure). It is constant across the crosssection and equals Tw/A. A positive value
indicates tension; a negative value indicates compression.
Max Bending Stress
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. This is the maximum value that the Bending Stress takes anywhere
in the section. It is given by
Max Bending Stress = (C2.M.StressOD/2) / Ixy
and this maximum occurs at the extreme fibre on the outside of the bend.
Worst Hoop Stress
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The Hoop Stress is due to internal and external pressure. It varies
across the section and can be positive (tension) or negative (compression), and by the Worst Hoop Stress we mean the
hoop stress of greatest magnitude. It is obtained by finding the point in the crosssection where the unsigned magnitude
w

296
of the Hoop Stress is largest; this must be either at the inside or outside fibre of the stress area. The Hoop Stress at this
point is called the Worst Hoop Stress.
Max xy-Shear Stress
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The value (RZStress
2
+ CZStress
2
) is called the xyShear Stress.
This varies across the crosssection, and OrcaFlex reports the maximum value that occurs anywhere in the cross
section. This is the Max xyShear Stress and it is given by
Max xyShear Stress = (C4..StressOD/2) / Iz + C3.S / A
von Mises Stress, Max von Mises Stress
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. The von Mises stress is a stress measure that is often used as a yield
criterion. It is a combination of all the components of the stress matrix and in terms of principal stresses it is given by:
von Mises Stress = ( ( (s1s2)
2
+ (s2s3)
2
+ (s3s1)
2
)/2 )
where s1, s2 and s3 are the principal stresses, i.e. the eigenvalues of the 3 by 3 stress matrix.
The von Mises Stress varies across the crosssection, so its value is reported at a specified (R, Theta) position.
The Max von Mises Stress is an estimate of the maximum value of the von Mises Stress over the crosssection. The way
it is calculated depends on whether the line includes torsion or not, as follows.
If torsion is not included, then OrcaFlex assumes that the torque is zero. In this case the maximum value of the von
Mises stress must occur in the plane of bending. OrcaFlex also assumes that the maximum occurs at either the inner
or outer fibre. (This is a commonlyused assumption that is almost always valid, since if the internal pressure stress
contribution is dominant then the maximum will be at the inner fibre, whereas if bending stress is dominant then it
will occur at the outer fibre.) OrcaFlex therefore calculates the von Mises stress at 4 points (R = StressID/2 and
StressOD/2, in the plane of bending) and reports the largest value.
If torsion is included, then the maximum value of the von Mises stress can, in general, occur anywhere in the pipe
wall. So OrcaFlex calculates the von Mises stress at a grid of points across the pipe wall and reports the largest value
found. Currently, the grid consists 36 Thetavalues (i.e. every 10 around the pipe circumference) at each of 5 R
values across the pipe wall.
Warning: If torsion is included then the reported maximum von Mises stress is therefore approximate, since the
actual maximum may not occur at a grid point.
RR Stress, CC Stress, ZZ Stress, RC Stress, RZ Stress, CZ Stress
Available at midsegment points and line ends only. These are the individual stress components at a point in the cross
section. The point is specified by its polar coordinates (R, Theta) within the cross section. See Pipe Stress Calculation
and Pipe Stress Matrix for details.
End Loads
The line end load results are based on the end force and end moment vectors at the line end. There are 3 groups of end
load results:
Standard results like Effective Tension, Bend Moment, etc. are available at line ends as well as at midsegment
points. For example to obtain the end tension at End A you can ask for the Effective Tension (or Wall Tension) at
End A.
Magnitude and other components of the end force and end moment vectors.
Bend Restrictor Load, which is a special end load result useful for bend restrictor design.
Sign Convention
When considering the sign of end load components the question arises as to whether the load reported is that applied
by the line to its connection or vice versa. The OrcaFlex convention is that the load reported at any point is that applied
by the B side of that point to the A side. So at End A we report the end load applied by the line to its connection (e.g. a
w
297
vessel), but at End B we report the end load applied to the line by its connection. This is in keeping with the OrcaFlex
convention for specifying the nomoment direction.
Treatment of Links and Winches attached to the end node
Normally, the end force and end moment are the total load acting between the end node and the object to which it is
connected. This includes forces from any links or winches attached to the end node.
However if the line end is free, or has been released, then it is not connected to any object. In this case the end moment
is zero and the end force is taken to be the total force acting between the line end and any links or winches attached to
the end node. If there are no attached links or winches, or they have been released, then the end force is zero.
Standard Results
Effective Tension, Wall Tension,
Shear Force, x-Shear Force, y-Shear Force,
Bend Moment, x-Bend Moment, y-Bend Moment,
Curvature, x-Curvature, y-Curvature
These results variables are available at the line end nodes, as well as at midsegment points. Whether you are given end
values or midsegment values depends on the point at which you ask for the results. If you ask for these results at EndA
or EndB, or at an arc length that is closer to a line end than to the nearest midsegment arc length, then the values at the
line end will be given. Otherwise the values for the nearest midsegment point will be given.
For midsegment values see Line Results: Forces, Line Results: Moments and Line Results: Pipe Stresses.
At a line end they report the components of the end loads in the local node directions of the end node, as follows:
Effective tension is the component of the end force vector in the end node axial direction (= Nz direction).
Wall tension is derived from the effective tension at the line end, using the pressure effects formula.
Shear is the component of the end force vector normal to the end node axial direction.
xShear and yShear are the components of the end force vector in the end node Nx and Ny directions.
Torque is the component of the end moment vector in the end node axial direction.
Bend moment is the component of the end moment vector normal to the end node axial direction.
xBend Moment and yBend Moment are the components in the end node Nx and Ny directions.
Stress results are based on the end load components in the end node axes directions.
Differences between End Loads and End Segment Loads
The end values of these results differ from the corresponding values for the end segment for two reasons.
Firstly, they include the loads (weight, buoyancy, drag etc.) on the last half segment adjacent to the end.
Secondly, they are components in the local node directions (Nx,Ny,Nz) at the end node, whereas the end segment values
are components with respect to the segment directions (Sx,Sy,Sz). The end node is often not aligned with the end
segment because end connection stiffness turns it towards the end orientation direction. For example:
If the end connection stiffness is zero, or if the line end is free or has been released, then the end node directions are
aligned with the end segment directions. The end node values then differ from the end segment values only by the
loads on the end half segment.
If the end connection stiffness is Infinity (and the end is not free or released) then the end node directions stay
aligned with the line end axes Ex, Ey, Ez. The end node values are then usually in different directions to the end
segment values.
For intermediate values of end connection stiffness, the end node directions will be somewhere between the two.
They will tend to be nearer to the end fitting directions if the end connection stiffnesses are stronger than the line
bend stiffness and torsional stiffness, but nearer to the end segment directions if it is weaker.
w

298
End Load Magnitude and Components
End Force, End Moment,
End GX-Force, End GY-Force and End GZ-Force, End GX-Moment, End GY-Moment, End GZ-Moment,
End Lx-Force, End Ly-Force and End Lz-Force, End Lx-Moment, End Ly-Moment, End Lz-Moment,
End Ex-Force, End Ey-Force and End Ez-Force, End Ex-Moment, End Ey-Moment, End Ez-Moment
These results report the magnitude of the end force and end moment vectors, and their components in the following
directions:
The directions of the global axes GX, GY, GZ.
The directions of the local axes Lx, Ly, Lz of the object to which the line end is connected. For example if the line end
is connected to a vessel, the Lx, Ly, Lz are the directions of the vessel axes.
The directions of the line end axes Ex, Ey, Ez. See Line End Orientation.
Bend Restrictor Load
This is defined as Bend Restrictor Load = End Force*(1 cos(End Force EzAngle)). Another commonly used name for
this variable is "pseudocurvature".
7.8.6 Drag Chain Results
For Drag Chains the following results variables are available.
The azimuth and declination of the drag chain, relative to global axes.
Supported Length and Hanging Length
The supported length is the length deemed to be supported by the seabed. The hanging length is the length of the rest of
the drag chain. The supported length plus the hanging length equals the total length of the drag chain. See Drag Chain
Seabed Interaction for details on how these values are calculated.
Drag Force
The magnitude of the drag force acting on the drag chain. This includes both the axial and normal components of the
drag force.
Axial Drag Force, Normal Drag Force
The components of drag force axial and normal to the drag chain.
Horizontal Drag Force, Vertical Drag Force
The horizontal and vertical components of the drag force. For the vertical drag force a positive value indicates an
upwards force.
See Drag Chain Theory for details on how the drag force is calculated.
7.8.7 Modal Analysis
The modal analysis form enables you to calculate and view the undamped natural modes of a line in the model. To open
this form, see the Modal Analysis command on the Results menu. Note that the analysis is only available when the static
position of the model has been calculated.
For full details of the calculation see the Modal Analysis theory section.
Doing a Modal Analysis
To perform a modal analysis you need to specify the following:
Which line you want to analyse. Note that the analysis is not yet available for lines that have torsion included.
w
299
Which modes you want to calculate. You can ask for All modes or a specified range of modes. See Modal Analysis
Theory for details.
Whether you want to calculate the mode shapes or just the natural periods. If you exclude the mode shapes then the
analysis only calculates the natural periods of the line, not the shapes of the natural modes. If you include the mode
shapes then the analysis takes longer.
When you have made your selections click the Calculate button. The modal analysis will then calculate the undamped
natural periods and, if requested, the mode shapes. Each mode is normalised to have largest offset magnitude equal to 1,
i.e. the offsets vectors are scaled so that largest offset vector is a unit vector. The modes are numbered in order of
increasing frequency.
Mode Table
The Table page then displays a spreadsheet giving the results in numerical form. If you do not calculate the mode shape
then the table reports only the periods of the requested natural modes. If you calculate the mode shapes then the table
also gives the shape in the form of the displacements of each free node.
If mode shapes are calculated then the table includes the following information:
Offset Distribution displays a measure of how inline, transverse and axial the mode is. For details see Offset
Distribution below.
Mode Type classifies each mode according to the offset distribution. Transverse means that the transverse
component is more than 90% of the total, Mostly Transverse means that it is between 50% and 90%, and similarly
for Inline, Mostly Inline, Axial and Mostly Axial. Mixed means that none of the components are more than 50% of
the total.
Note: The Offset Distribution and Mode Type information is only available if there is relative flow normal to
the line. So, if the line is entirely above the water, or there is no current defined then this information
will not be available.
Mode View
If you requested the mode shapes then the View page displays a 3D view of the line showing one selected mode shape
superimposed on the static position of the line. The current direction is also shown on the view, and you can control the
view angle, zoom etc., as on any 3D view.
Note that you may need to zoom out in order to see the line, and you may need to adjust the view angle to suit the mode
that you are viewing. For example an out of plane mode is best viewed by looking along the plane of the line.
You can use the Mode dropdown list to control which mode is shown on the view. Note that when that dropdown list
has the focus (click it to give it the focus) then you can use the arrow keys to quickly increment or decrement the mode
shape number that is displayed.
The Drawing Exaggeration value allows you to control the amplitude of the mode. (A mode shape does not define the
overall amplitude of the oscillation it only defines how the amplitude varies along the line.)
The Offset Distribution and Mode Type for the selected node is also shown, provided that there is relative flow normal
to the line.
VIV Page
If you requested the mode shapes then the View page displays a table of information relating to VIV.
Each row of the table refers to a single mode and contains the following information:
The Mode Number.
The mode's Period and Frequency.
The mode's Offset Distribution and Mode Type.
Export to SHEAR7 Mds File determines whether or not the mode will be included in the exported SHEAR7 .Mds
file.
w

300
The table can be sorted in order of inline, transverse or axial offset distribution or in order of mode number.
Offset Distribution
For a given mode, let V be the mode offset vector at a given node, let Vi, Vt and Va be V's components in the local inline,
transverse and axial directions and let L be the length of line represented by that node. Then OrcaFlex calculates the
inline, transverse and axial components of the overall mode shape as follows:
Mode shape inline component = Mi = ((L.Vi
2
))
Mode shape transverse component = Mt = ((L.Vt
2
))
Mode shape axial component = Ma = ((L.Va
2
))
where the summations are over all nodes in the line.
OrcaFlex then reports these 3 mode shape components as percentages of their sum, i.e. the offset distribution values
reported by OrcaFlex are Mi/M, Mt/M and Ma/M where M = Mi + Mt + Ma. These values are only used to provide some
measure of how inline, transverse and axial the mode is.
The root sum of squares formulation used above is the multidimensional equivalent of the standard 3D formula |V| =
(Vi
2
+ Vt
2
+ Va
2
). The scaling by L is there so that the values are independent of the level of discretisation.
Export SHEAR7 Mds File
This button exports a SHEAR7 .Mds file.
7.8.8 Line Setup Wizard
Intended principally for mooring analyses, this wizard adjusts line configuration to achieve specified tension,
declination or layback. The wizard is available when the current simulation is in Reset state and is opened by clicking
the Calculation | Line Setup Wizard menu item.
w
301

Figure: The Line Setup Wizard
Calculation Mode
The Wizard has two modes of operation: Calculate Line Lengths or Calculate Anchor Positions.
The Calculate Line Lengths option operates by varying the length of the specified section of each included line until the
target top value is achieved. Because the section length is altered by the Calculate Line Lengths option we recommend
that you specify the segmentation using Target Segment Length rather than Number of Segments. Thus if the wizard
lengthens the line then the program will automatically add more segments to meet the Target Segment Length.
The Calculate Anchor Positions option operates by varying the position of the Bottom End of each included line until
the target value is achieved. The Bottom End position is constrained to be on a line in the Lay Azimuth direction so you
must set these data items before using the wizard.
Note: These calculations use a numerical method which is not 100% robust. We recommend that you set up
your model so that your top tension / top declination values are quite close to your exact target values
before using the wizard. If you do this the wizard is more likely to be able to find a solution.
Target Values
To use the wizard you must first specify the target tensions or declinations. The wizard presents a list of all Lines in the
model.
w

302
The Include this Line option determines which Lines are included in the calculation which allows you to exclude
certain Lines. For example, you may be modelling both moorings and flow lines in the same OrcaFlex file. Typically you
would only include the moorings in this calculation.
The Target Variable option allows you to switch between the following options:
End A Tension or End B Tension.
End A Declination or End B Declination.
Layback, defined to be the horizontal component of distance between the Top End of the line and the touchdown
point.
No Target, which means that the line will be included in the static calculation but that its data is not to be modified.
This is particularly useful if you are analysing buoyed systems where the upper and lower catenaries are modelled
with different Lines.
Finally you specify Tension, Declination or Layback values, as applicable, in the Target Value field.
Line section to be modified
Specifies which section on the line is to have its length modified when using the Calculate Line Lengths mode.
Convergence Parameters
The Wizard performs an iterative calculation and these parameters can be used to help convergence.
The calculation is abandoned if convergence has not been achieved after the number of steps specified by Max
Iterations. For some difficult cases simply increasing this limit may be enough.
The nondimensional Tolerance parameter determines when the calculation is deemed to have converged. The
calculation has converged once the following conditions are satisfied:
Calculated Value < Tolerance Typical Force for tension targets. Typical Force for a line is defined as to be the total
dry weight of the line.
Calculated Value < Tolerance for declination targets.
Calculated Value < Tolerance Target Value for a layback target.
The Min Damping and Max Damping parameters can sometimes be used to help difficult problems converge. Try
increasing the Min Damping factor, say values in the range 1.5 to 10. You can also try increasing the Max Damping factor,
say to values in the range 10 to 100.
7.8.9 Line Type Wizard
The Line Type Wizard is a tool that helps you set up a Line Type that represents one of the following commonly used
structures:
Chain.
Rope/Wire.
Line with Floats.
Homogeneous Pipe.
Hose.
Umbilical.
What the Wizard does is ask you for the basic data of the structure e.g. the bar diameter for a chain and then calculate
for you as much of the line type data as it reasonably can for representing that structure. The Wizard leaves you to set
other data e.g. friction coefficients where there is no formula on which to base the data.
Warning: The values generated by the Wizard are offered in good faith, but due to variations in properties
between products they cannot be guaranteed. Please use suppliers' data where this is available.
w
303
How The Line Type Wizard Works
The Wizard works on the currently selected line type on the line types form, so you should first create, name and select
the Line Type that you want to set up. You can then open the Wizard using the Wizard button on the Line Types form.
The first time you use the Wizard on a given line type you must be in reset state, since you will be setting data. You then
tell the Wizard the category of structure that you want to model (chain, rope etc.) and the data for that structure (e.g.
chain bar diameter). This information is called the Wizard data, and from it the Wizard derives line type data to
correspond to that Wizard data. If necessary you can then manually adjust the derived line type data.
Once you have used the Wizard to set up data for a given line type, then the Wizard remembers the Wizard data you
gave it. If you reopen the Wizard when in reset state then you can edit the Wizard data and the Wizard will calculate
corresponding new derived line type data. Any manual adjustments will need to be done again.
You can also reopen the Wizard when in other states (e.g. in static state or when a simulation is active) but only in
order to view the Wizard data. You cannot edit Wizard data or rederive line type data except in reset state.
Note: Remember that the current line type data might not correspond to the current Wizard data, since you
might have manually edited the line type data after it was derived by the Wizard.
Using the Line Type Wizard
The Wizard has three stages, with Next and Back buttons so that you can move between stages to set up the data you
want.
Stage 1 displays the name of the selected Line Type and asks you to specify the special category that you want. You can
then click Next to proceed to the second stage.
Stage 2 presents 3 frames of information. The top left frame asks you for the basic data of the special category you have
selected. The bottom left frame displays the resulting derived Line Type data you should check that the values are
reasonable.
The right hand frame displays other properties of the resulting Line Type, which are often useful as a check. In some
cases these depend on contents density, in which case you can specify the contents density to be used for the calculation
of properties. If there are any errors then a message will be displayed. When everything is correct you can click Next to
proceed to the last stage.
Stage 3 displays all of the Line Type data. Bold text is data that has been derived for you by the Wizard, based on the
special line type data you specified. Nonbold text is data that has not been set by the Wizard this data will be as you
last set it. You can adjust any of the data at this stage, overriding the values derived by the Wizard if you wish. You can
also still go back to previous stages of the Wizard if further modifications are required. When everything is correct you
can click the Finish button, in which case the new data will be written, overwriting the previous data for that line type.
Alternatively, you can Cancel to leave the line type unchanged, but then any newly entered special category data will
also be lost.
7.8.10 Chain
A chain can be modelled in OrcaFlex by using a Line Type with its various properties set to suitable values. This note
derives the values to use for anchor chain of nominal (i.e. bar) diameter D, as shown in the Figure: Chain Geometry.
The properties of an equivalent line type are given below.
Studless Studlink
OD 1.80 D 1.89D
ID 0 0
Mass/Length 19.9 D
2
21.9 D
2
te/m for D in m
Axial stiffness 0.854x10
8
D
2
1.01x10
8
D
2
kN for D in m
Bend stiffness 0 0
Limit Compression yes yes
Normal drag coefficient 1.0 1.0
w

304
Studless Studlink
Normal drag diameter 2.10D 2.26D
Axial drag coefficient 0.4 0.4
Axial drag diameter 0.60D/ 0.60D/
Normal added mass coefficient 1.0 1.0
Axial added mass coefficient 0.08 0.07
Stress diameters '~' '~'
Allowable stress '~' '~'
Friction coefficient typically 0.4 0.8 depending on the seabed
Reference
Puech A, 1984.
Geometry
3.35D
(3.6D)
6D
3.35D
(3.6D)
D = Nominal Diameter
A
EDGE
A
FACE

Figure: Chain Geometry
Data
Chains are widely used in a variety of offshore applications, most obviously in mooring. The Line Type Wizard helps
derive a line type to represent a chain based on the following input data.
Bar Diameter
The diameter of the metal bar that forms the links.
Link Type
Can be either studlink or studless.
The Line Type data that are derived, and the associated underlying expressions, are detailed in Modelling Mooring
Chains.
Mechanical Properties
Catalogue Data
When modelling mooring chains the Line Type Wizard aims to derive data for a line type whose characteristics are
equivalent to that of a chain.
w
305
Warning: The values generated by the Wizard are approximate only and are intended as first estimates for
preliminary use. They are offered in good faith, but due to variations in properties between products
they cannot be guaranteed. Please use suppliers' data where this is available.
In deriving these some of the available catalogue data will prove useful and we outline here the relevant aspects. The
Mooring Chain figure shows the geometry of a pair of chain links. The values are given in terms of the nominal bar
diameter of the chain (D), assumed to be in metres, and are given for both a studless chain and, where different, for a
studlink chain. The geometry given in the figure is based on catalogue data available from the chain manufacturer Scana
Ramnas (1990 & 1995), as is the following expression for mass per metre:
Mass per metre (M) = 19.9D
2
te/m (studless) or 21.9D
2
te/m (studlink).
The catalogue also gives the following value for the Young's Modulus of the chain that has been deduced from stress
strain relationships in which the crosssectional area of two bars is taken to be the load bearing area:
E = 5.44 x 10
7
kN/m
2
(studless) or 6.40 x 10
7
kN/m
2
(studlink).
Minimum Breaking Loads
For information, the properties window displays minimum breaking loads that depend on the nominal diameter and
chain grade. They are derived using the following relationship, which was obtained from the manufacturer's catalogue:
Min Breaking Load = c.D
2
.(44 80D) kN
Here the gradedependent constant, c, is catalogued as follows: Grade 2 1.37e4; Grade 3 1.96e4; ORQ 2.11e4; R4
2.74e4. Studless and Studlink chains with the same nominal diameters are stated to withstand the same break and
proofloads.
Derived Data
It will be useful to know the centreline length of bar needed to make a single link. We can obtain this by noting that, for a
long chain, there is one chain link every 4D length of chain. Hence, the number of links per metre of chain is N = 1/(4D),
and thus for a single link:
Mass per link = M / N = 79.6D
3
te (studless) or 87 6D
3
te (studlink).
Assuming that the chain is made from steel, and using s as density of steel (= 7.8 te/m
3
), this then leads to:
Volume per link = (M / N) / s = 10.2D
3
m
3
(studless) or 11.2D
3
m
3
(studlink).
But, by considering the geometry of a link, we also have
Volume = L . D
2
/4,
where L is centreline length of bar needed to make a single link (including the stud in the case of the studlink chain).
Hence:
L = Volume / (D
2
/4) = 13.0D m (studless) or 14.3D m (studlink).
Outer and Inner Diameter
The Line Type Wizard sets up Outer and Inner Diameter for a chain as follows:
The effective outer diameter of the equivalent line is obtained using a similar argument to that deployed in obtaining the
overall length of bar per link. Firstly, note that the volume per metre can be expressed as both:
Volume per metre = M / s
and also as
Volume per metre = OD
2
/ 4
where OD is the equivalent diameter for a line with constant volume along its length. Equating these expressions leads
to:
Outer Diameter = [4M / ( s)] = 1.80D m (studless) or 1.89D m (studlink).
Chains do not have any contents, so the Inner Diameter is set to zero.
w

306
Axial and Bending Stiffness
The Line Type Wizard sets up Axial and Bending Stiffness and Limit Compression for a chain as follows:
Axial Stiffness
As detailed in Mechanical Properties of Mooring Chains we have values for the Young's Modulus for both studlink and
studless chains from catalogue data. Taking A to be the combined crosssectional area of two bars, that is:
A = 2(D
2
/ 4) m
2

leads to:
EA = 0.85 x 10
8
D
2
kN (studless) or 1.00 x 10
8
D
2
kN (studlink).
Bending Stiffness
For both studlink and studless chains the bending stiffness is set to zero as the chains are assumed to bend when
subjected to very small moments.
Limit Compression
In conjunction with a zero value for bend stiffness, Limit Compression is set to 'yes'.
Axial Added Mass Coefficient
The Line Type Wizard sets up Axial Added Mass Coefficient for a chain as follows.
As for axial drag the parts attracting added mass in axial flow are the projecting lobes only see the figure. Each pair of
lobes are simply a link with the middle sector removed and can be viewed roughly as an ellipsoid split down the centre
with the following dimensions:
length 6D, width D and height 2.35D (studless) or 2.60D (studlink).
J N Newman, 1977, (page 147, Fig 4.8) gives added mass coefficients for spheroids. We approximate the ellipsoid as a
spheroid with mean width of 1.675D (studless) or 1.80D (studlink), which has an aspect ratio (width/length) of about
0.3 in both cases. Newman gives Ca = 0.1 for this case, in axial flow. Therefore, we have that:
Axial Added Mass = 0.1 [N . Vollobes].
However, the reference displaced volume in the expression for added mass includes whole links, not just the lobes as
considered above. A suitable scaling of the above coefficient is needed to reflect this. If we consider that for each link,
the lobes represent approximately 11.0D (studless) or 10.7D (studlink) effective length of a total bar length 13D
(studless) or 14.3D (studlink) we see that the lobe volume is about 84.6% (or 74.8%) of the link volume. Hence, in
reference to the total link volume:
Caa = 0.08 (studless) or 0.07 (studlink).
Axial Drag
The Line Type Wizard sets up the Axial Drag Coefficient for a chain as follows:
Generally, axial drag is very low for smooth pipes, being due to skin friction only. However, for a chain there is some
projected area present even in axial flow and we consider the drag force due to this effect. We ignore the effect of skin
friction in the derivation outlined below.
As in the calculation for normal flow we consider two adjacent links and calculate their projected area. The projected
area, normal to the flow, for axial flow consists of the four "lobes" only, since the central part is effectively shielded from
the flow see the figure. There is effectively no difference between studlink and studless links in this case. The
projection of each lobe is 1.30D, square at one end, rounded at the other. So the total projected area per metre (normal
to the flow) is given by the following expression:
Anormal = 4 (0.8D
2
+ D
2
/8) (1/(8D)) = 0.60D.
Hence, the drag force per metre length of chain as:
Drag force = v
2
Cda (0.60D).
w
307
Hoerner (1965), page 58, Fig 14c, gives Cda = 0.32 for a hemispherical rivet head projecting from a plane. The lobes
here are similar more elongated in the flow direction (implying a lower Cda) but on a less smooth body (implying a
higher Cda). Hence, we assume Cda = 0.40.
The drag force per metre length as calculated by OrcaFlex is given by:
Drag force = v
2
Cda ( Da)
where Da is the axial drag diameter. Equating the two equations for drag force leads to:
Da = 0.60D/.
Normal Drag
The Line Type Wizard sets up the Normal Drag Coefficient for a chain as follows:
We first calculate the drag force on a chain in normal flow, for which we require a value for its projected area (normal to
the flow). To calculate this we must consider the chain as a collection of pairs of adjacent links, one face on to the flow,
with projected area AFACE, and one edge on, with projected area AEDGE see Figure. The overall projected area per metre
will be a multiple of the sum of these two areas.
AFACE = L D 2D
2
= 11.0 D
2
m
2
(studless) or 12.3D
2
m
2
(studlink)
and
AEDGE = 5D D + 2(D
2
/4)/2 = 5.79 D
2
m
2
.
There are 1/(4D) links per metre and hence 1/(8D) such pairs of links per metre. Hence, the total projected area per
metre (normal to the flow) is given by the following expression:
ANORMAL = (AFACE + AEDGE) (1/(8D)) = 2.10D m (studless) or 2.26D m (studlink).
So, we are now able to calculate the drag force per metre length of chain as:
Drag force = v
2
Cdn ANORMAL
for a given drag coefficient Cdn, where is the density of seawater and v is the flow velocity. For irregular shaped bluff
bodies such as chain links, of either type, a suitable value for Cdn is 1.0.
The drag force per metre length as calculated by OrcaFlex is given by:
Drag force = v
2
Cdn Dn
where Dn is the normal drag diameter. Equating the two equations for drag force leads to:
Dn = ANORMAL = 2.10D m (studless) or 2.26D m (studlink).
Normal Added Mass Coefficient
The Line Type Wizard sets up the Normal Added Mass Coefficient for a chain as follows:
When a line is accelerated in water it requires an impulse in excess of that needed for the same acceleration in air. This
is due to the extra force required to displace the water in the vicinity of the submerged part of the line. An added mass
term is used to reflect this and it is found to be proportional to the volume of displaced fluid:
Added mass = Ca . . Vol
where
is density of water,
Vol is the displaced volume.
The parts of a line displacing the fluid are said to be attracting added mass. For asymmetrical bodies the parts attracting
added mass will differ in different directions. Hence, we consider the effect due to fluid flow exerting a force in, first, the
normal and then the axial directions.
For a circular cylinder in flow normal to its axis:
Can = 1.0.
w

308
The situation for a chain is more complicated as, for flow normal to a link, parts of the link are shielded from the flow
but there is also some entrapped water within each edgeon link. An accurate calculation is very problematic and is
unlikely to give a value for the normal added mass coefficient far distant from 1.0. Hence we assume:
Can = 1.0.
Stress Diameters and Allowable Stress
These are not relevant for chains which have no contents and so are set to '~', the default values. Any available stress or
wall tension results should be ignored.
7.8.11 Rope/Wire
D = Nominal rope diameter
Wire with Fibre core Wire with Wire core Fibre rope
D

Figure: Rope/Wire Geometry
Ropes and wires have many applications in the offshore industry including towing, mooring and winching. The Line
Type Wizard can be used to derive Line Type data to represent five different types: Nylon (8strand Multiplait);
Polyester (8strand Multiplait); Polyethylene (8strand Multiplait); 6x19 Wire Rope with Fibre Core; and 6x19 Wire
Rope with Wire Core.
Most of the calculations of the derived line properties are based on data from a catalogue published by Marlow Ropes
Ltd (1995). All quantities are expressed as a function of the rope's nominal diameter D. Note that this documentation
uses the SI units system, so D is in metres in this documentation, but the program automatically adjusts the formulae to
match the units specified by the user.
Data
The Line Type Wizard can be used to create line types representing a variety of ropes and wires. The input data
required consists of the following:
Rope/Wire Nominal Diameter
The overall diameter of the rope or wire. The majority of the derived line type data are functions of this diameter.
Warning: The line type outer diameter derived by the wizard is less than this nominal diameter, in order to give
the correct buoyancy. You need to allow for this when setting the line type drag and added mass
coefficients, since the coefficients correspond to the derived line type outer diameter, not the nominal
diameter.
Construction
Can be one of:
w
309
Nylon (8strand Multiplait).
Polyester (8strand Multiplait).
Polyethylene (8strand Multiplait).
6x19 Wire with Fibre Core (8strand Multiplait).
6x19 Wire with Wire Core (8strand Multiplait).
The construction affects both the mass per unit length of the line type and the strength of the line type.
Mass per unit length
The Line Type Wizard sets up Mass for a Rope/Wire as follows:
The quantity Mass per unit length is available from catalogue data for ropes. The nominal rope diameter and nominal
mass are available for a variety of rope constructions. A simple statistical analysis of the available data leads to the
following expressions:
Mass Per Metre = 0.6476 D
2
te/m (for Nylon ropes).
2
te/m (for Polyester ropes).
2
te/m (for Polypropylene ropes).
2
te/m (for Wire ropes with fibre core).
2
te/m (for Wire ropes with wire core).
Outer and Inner Diameters
The Line Type Wizard sets up outer and inner diameters for a Rope/Wire as follows.
The inner diameter is set to zero for all rope construction types. The line type outer diameter, OD, is set as follows:
OD = 0.85 D (for Nylon ropes).
OD = 0.86 D (for Polyester ropes).
OD = 0.80 D (for Polypropylene ropes).
OD = 0.82 D (for Wire ropes with fibre core).
OD = 0.80 D (for Wire ropes with wire core).
where D is the specified rope diameter.
These outer diameters are effective diameters that give the line type a displaced volume per unit length that equals the
estimated displaced volume per unit length of the rope/wire. The line type then has the appropriate buoyancy. Note that
this effective diameter is less than the specified rope diameter, because there are gaps between the fibres and so not all
of the specified nominal diameter contributes to buoyancy.
The above formulae for the line type OD were derived by equating the line type displaced volume per unit length,
OD
2
/4, to the displaced volume per metre, M/, where M is the rope/wire mass per unit length and is the average
density of the material.
The following average material densities (in te/m
3
) were assumed: Nylon 1.14; Polyester 1.38; Polypropylene 0.91;
Wire with fibre core 6.87; Wire with Wire core 7.85. The average material density for the Wire with fibre core was
estimated by assuming a ratio of 6:1 between the wire and fibre volume, with the fibre taken to have the same density
as (fresh) water.
The Line Type Wizard sets up Axial and Bending Stiffness and Limit Compression for a Rope/Wire as follows
Axial Stiffness
The expressions for axial stiffness are calculated in different ways for the two groups of fibre ropes and wire ropes.
w

310
For Fibre Ropes we use the catalogue data. Load/extension characteristics depend on previous load history, whether
the rope is wet or dry, and the rate of application of the load. To reflect the likely working environment of the rope we
use data associated with ropes that have been tested under the following conditions:
the rope has been preworked loaded to 50% of breaking load and then rested for 24 hours (this causes the rope
to bed down so that its elastic behaviour is more consistent and repeatable)
subjected to slowly varying loads (for loads varying at wave frequency, stiffness should be about twice the value
shown)
a wet rope presoaked in water (this is most significant for Nylon ropes which suffer a loss in performance when
wet)
we use figures for the average performance when the mean extension is 10% (by taking the tangent of the stress
strain curve at 10%).
Incorporating all of the factors indicated above we can produce values of axial stiffness for a range of rope diameters.
Once again using simple statistical techniques we obtain the following expression for axial stiffness of fibre ropes:
Axial Stiffness = 1.18 x 10
5
D
2
kN (for Nylon ropes).
6
D
2
kN (for Polyester ropes).
6
D
2
kN (for Polypropylene ropes).
Axial stiffness for Wire Ropes is calculated directly, rather than estimated from empirical relationships. We assume a
value for Young's Modulus, for the 6x19 strand group, of:
E = 1.03 x 10
8
kN/m
2
(for Wire ropes with fibre core).
E = 1.13 x 10
8
kN/m
2
(for Wire ropes with wire core).
and work on an assumed metallic area of:
A = 0.455 (D
2
/4) m
2
(for both wire ropes).
Both of these quantities have been obtained from the HER Group Marine Equipment & Wire Rope Handbook. Note that
for wire ropes with a wire core the additional axial stiffness is accounted for in the enhanced Young's modulus. This
leads to:
7
D
2
kN (for Wire ropes with fibre core).
7
D
2
kN (for Wire ropes with wire core).
Bending Stiffness
For all rope construction types the bending stiffness offered by the Wizard is zero. For systems where bend stiffness is a
significant factor you should override this value with the true value obtained from the rope supplier.
Limit Compression
In conjunction with a zero value for bend stiffness Limit Compression is set to yes.
The Line Type Wizard sets the stress diameters and allowable stress for a Rope/Wire to '~' since the OrcaFlex stress
analysis is not applicable to complex structures such as ropes or wires. Any available stress or wall tension results
should be ignored.
Minimum Breaking Loads
The properties window in the line type wizard displays approximate minimum breaking load (MBL) values for ropes
and wires. These may be useful for setting the Maximum Tension data item for the line type.
The MBL values displayed are calculated using the following functional formulae, where D is rope/wire nominal
diameter in metres:
Nylon ropes (dry) 163950.D
2
kN
w
311
Nylon ropes (wet) 139357.D
2
kN
Polyester ropes 170466.D
2
kN
Polypropylene ropes 105990.D
2
kN
Wire ropes with fibre core 584175.D
2
kN
Wire ropes with wire core 633358.D
2
kN
These formulae were derived from manufacturer's catalogue data, which consist of minimum (dry) strength against
nominal diameter for each of the five rope/wire constructions. The formulae were derived using least squares fitting,
and they were found to give a good fit to the manufacturer's data, except that they tend to underestimate MBL for small
diameter nonwire ropes.
Note: Nylon ropes lose some strength when wet; the formula given for wet nylon ropes is based on the
manufacturer's statement that they can lose up to 15% of their (dry) strength when wet.
7.8.12 Line with Floats
You can model floats or buoyancy modules attached to a line by using buoyant Clumps attached at the relevant points.
However when a number of floats are supporting a length of line it is often easier to model the buoyancy as if it were
smeared, i.e. spread out evenly, along that part of the line. This allows the length and segmentation of the buoyed
section to be varied easily without having to add and remove individual floats.
To use this 'smeared properties' approach you need to do the following.
Create a new line type.
Set the new line type's properties to be equivalent to those of the original pipe+floats. This is done by spreading
each float's buoyancy, drag, etc. uniformly over the length of pipe from Sf/2 before the float centre to Sf/2 after the
float centre, where Sf is the float pitch, i.e. the spacing between float centres (see diagram below). The result is a
uniform circular section line which will experience the same forces per unit length as the original line plus floats.
The line type wizard will automatically set up this 'equivalent' line type for you.
Set up a line section to model the length of line supported by the floats. The section's line type should be set to the
equivalent line type and its length should be N x Sf, where N is the number of floats and Sf is the float pitch. Note
that this length is a little more than the length between the start of the first float and the end of the last one, since
each float is effectively being smeared equally both ways from its centre; see the diagram below, which show the
situation when N=3.
We describe below how the Line Type Wizard derives the properties of the equivalent line type. Note that this approach
is also suitable for modelling a regularly weighted section of line.
Warning: The values generated by the Wizard are based on current best practice, but more specific project data
should be used where this is available.
w

312
Dp
Df
Sf Sf Sf
Floats

Figure: Geometry of Line and Floats
We first define the notation to represent the underlying line onto which the floats are to be attached, which we refer to
as the Base Line Type see Base Line Type Notation. We then specify the quantities required to represent the floats see
Float Notation.
The following properties are all deemed to be unaffected by the addition of floats to the base line and so are set to have
the same values as those of the base line.
Limit Compression
Maximum Tension
Minimum Bend Radius
Torsional Stiffness
Data
Adding floats to a line to produce extra buoyancy is a common requirement. The Line Type Wizard helps you to quickly
derive such a line type by specifying both the existing underlying base line type, onto which the floats will be added, and
various properties of the floats:
Base Line Type
The line type on which the floats are mounted.
Float Diameter
The outside diameter of each float. It must be greater than the outside diameter of the underlying base line type.
Float Length
The axial length of each float.
Float Pitch
The average distance between the centres of successive floats.
Float Material Density
The density of the material forming the floats, excluding additional items such as fixing material.
w
313
Float Hardware Mass
This accounts for the extra mass due to the addition of the floats above that due to the material density and covers such
items as the clamping/fixing mechanisms.
Float Normal Drag Coefficient
The drag coefficient associated with the float for flow normal to the line.
Float Axial Skin Drag Coefficient
The drag coefficient associated with the floats, due to the floats' skin friction, for flow along the axis of the line.
Float Axial Form Drag Coefficient
The drag coefficient associated with the float, due to the projected annulus area of the end of the float, for flow along the
axis of the line.
Float Normal Added Mass Coefficient
The added mass coefficient for flow normal to the line.
Float Axial Added Mass Coefficient
The added mass coefficient for flow along the axis of the line.
The Line Type data that are derived, and the associated underlying expressions, are detailed in Modelling Lines with
Floats.
Properties of Base Line Type
For modelling lines with floats the line without floats is referred to as the base line type and the following notation is
used. The line without floats is assumed to be of circular crosssection and have the following characteristics:
ODp outer diameter.
IDp inner diameter.
Mp mass per unit length.
Cdnp drag coefficient in normal flow.
Cdap drag coefficient in axial flow.
Canp Added mass coefficient in Normal flow (commonly taken as 1.0 for circular section).
Caap Added Mass coefficient in Axial flow (commonly taken as zero).
Properties of the Floats
For modelling lines with floats the following notation is used for the floats. The floats are assumed to be short cylinders
fitted coaxially on the line at constant spacing:
Lf length
Df diameter
f float density
Sf float pitch
mfh float hardware mass (e.g. fixing clamps, bolts, etc.)
Cdnf drag coefficient, normal flow
Cdaf1 drag coefficient, axial flow due to form
Cdaf2 drag coefficient, axial flow due to skin friction
Canf added mass coefficients in normal flow
Caaf added mass coefficient in axial flow
w

314
With the above information we can calculate the volume occupied by an individual float as:
Vf = /4 (Df
2
ODp
2
) Lf
which leads to the mass of the float being calculated as follows:
Mf = Vf.f + mfh.
Outer, Inner and Contact Diameter
The Line Type Wizard sets up diameters for a Line with Floats as follows:
Outer Diameter
The Outer Diameter (OD) of the equivalent line is calculated by equating two equivalent expressions for the volume per
unit length of the line:
Vol per unit length = /4.OD
2
(equivalent line)
Vol per unit length (V) = /4.ODp
2
+ Vf /Sf (line with floats)
This leads to:
Outer Diameter (OD) = (4 V /)
Inner Diameter
The Inner Diameter is unaffected by the addition of floats and so is set to be the same as that of the base line.
Contact Diameter
The Contact Diameter is set to equal the float diameter Df. This allows float clearance to be reported using the Line
Contact Clearance result.
The line type mass per unit length is calculated by allowing for the fact that there is one float for every Sf length of the
section and hence (1/Sf) floats per unit length, giving:
Mass per unit length = Mp + Mf / Sf
Axial Drag Coefficient
The Line Type Wizard sets up the Axial Drag Coefficient for a Line with Floats as follows.
To derive the drag coefficient when flow is axial to the line we adopt a similar approach to that used above for normal
flow.
When considering the equivalent line, with the additional buoyancy smeared along it's outer surface, the drag force per
unit length, when flow is axial to the line, is due solely to skin friction and can be expressed as:
Drag Forcea = v
2
Cda ( OD)
in which the reference area is the circumference of the equivalent line and where r is the density of seawater and v is the
flow velocity.
As in the case for flow normal to the line, we can also express the drag force per unit length experienced by the
equivalent line as the sum of the drag forces experienced by the floats and the drag forces experienced by the part of the
line not hidden by the floats. However, the drag forces experienced by the floats are slightly more complicated in axial
flow as there will be a drag force due to the exposed annulus on the end of each float and a drag force due to skin
friction.
Drag Forcea = Drag ForceaFLOATS + Drag ForceaEXP LINE
= v
2
[Cdaf1.Drag Area1aFLOATS + Cdaf2.Drag Area2aFLOATS + Cdap.Drag AreaaEXP LINE]
in which the reference drag area, due to the annulus, for the floats in axial flow is given by:
Drag Area1aFLOATS = /4 (Df
2
ODp
2
).1/ Sf
w
315
the reference drag area, due to the skin, for the floats in axial flow is given by:
Drag Area2aFLOATS = DfLf / Sf
and the reference drag area, due to the skin, for the exposed line in axial flow is given by:
Drag AreaaEXP LINE = ODp (1Lf/Sf).
Equating these two expressions leads to:
Cda = [Cdaf1.Drag Area1aFLOATS + Cdaf2.Drag Area2aFLOATS + Cdap.Drag AreaaEXP LINE]/(OD).
Normal Drag Coefficient
The Line Type Wizard sets up the Normal Drag Coefficient for a Line with Floats as follows:
The drag force per unit length of the equivalent line when flow is normal to the line's axis can be expressed as:
Drag Forcen = v
2
Cdn OD
in which the reference drag area per unit length, normal to the flow, is given by OD and where is the density of
seawater and v is the flow velocity.
We can also express the drag force per unit length experienced by the equivalent line as the sum of the drag forces
experienced by the floats and the drag forces experienced by the part of the line not hidden by the floats:
Drag Forcen = Drag ForcenFLOATS + Drag ForcenEXP LINE
= v
2
[Cdnf.Drag AreanFLOATS + Cdnp.Drag AreanEXP LINE]
in which the reference drag area for the floats in normal flow is given by:
Drag AreanFLOATS = Df Lf/Sf
and the reference drag area for the exposed line in normal flow is given by:
Drag AreanEXP LINE = ODp (1Lf/Sf).
Cdn = [Cdnf.Drag AreanFLOATS + Cdnp.Drag AreanEXP LINE] / OD.
The Line Type Wizard sets up Normal and Axial Added Mass Coefficients for a Line with Floats as follows:
Normal Added Mass Coefficient
Added mass coefficients are calculated in a similar way to the drag force coefficients. For flow normal to the axis of the
line the added mass per unit length is given by:
Added Massn = /4 OD
2
Can
in which the reference volume is the volume of the equivalent line and where is the density of seawater.
We can also express the added mass term of the equivalent line as the sum of the added masses due to the floats and due
to the underlying line:
Added Massn = (Canf AMVolFLOATS + Canp AMVolEXP LINE)
in which the reference volume per unit length for the floats (and the portion of line they cover) is given by:
AMVolFLOATS = /4 Df
2
Lf/Sf
and the reference volume per unit length for the exposed part of the line is given by:
AMVolEXP LINE = /4 ODp
2
(1Lf/Sf)
Can = (Canf AMVolFLOATS + Canp AMVolEXP LINE)/(/4 OD
2
).
w

316
Axial Added Mass Coefficient
The added mass coefficients follow in a similar way to above. The reference volumes for the equivalent line and for the
floats and exposed part of the underlying base line are taken to be the same in axial flow as in normal flow. Hence, we
can take the above expression for the added mass coefficient in normal flow and replace the coefficients for normal flow
with those for axial flow:
Caa = (Caaf AMVolFLOATS + Caap AMVolEXP LINE)/(/4 OD
2
).
The stress diameter and allowable stress are set to be the values used by the base line, since it is the base line which is
load bearing.
7.8.13 Homogeneous Pipe
N N
O
O

Figure: Homogeneous Pipe
Given certain of the geometrical and material properties of a homogeneous pipe many of the necessary Line Type data
items can be derived. We outline here the calculations used by the Line Type Wizard performed to derive line type data
based on:
the density of the material
E the Young's Modulus of the material
the Poisson Ratio of the material
OD the Outer Diameter of the pipe
ID the Inner Diameter of the pipe
Warning: The data derived by the Line Type Wizard are based on average material properties. Please use
suppliers' data where this is available.
The properties of the derived equivalent line type are given below.
Mass per unit length = (/4) (OD
2
ID
2
) where is the material density specified.
The line type outer and inner diameters are set to the pipe diameters specified by the user.
w
317
Axial Stiffness
The line type axial stiffness is given by:
Axial Stiffness = EA
where E is the Young's Modulus and A is the cross sectional area, hence:
Axial Stiffness = E.(/4) (OD
2
ID
2
).
Bending Stiffness
The line type bending stiffness is given by:
Bending Stiffness = E.I
where I is the second moment of area, about an axis in the plane of the crosssection through the centroid (e.g. NN'), and
leads to:
Bending Stiffness = E.(/64) (OD
4
ID
4
).
Limit Compression
As the bending stiffness is significant this is set to 'no'.
Torsional Stiffness
The line type torsional stiffness is set as follows. The torque experienced by a pipe of length l when twisted through an
angle is given by:
Torque = [(G.)/l] J
where J is the second moment of area about the axial axis OO' (often called the polar moment of inertia) and G is the
Shear Modulus (sometimes called the modulus of rigidity). For homogeneous pipes J = 2*I. The quantity G is related to
the Young's Modulus (E) and Poisson Ratio () of the material through the following relationship:
G = E / [2(1+)].
The Torsional Stiffness, representing the Torque resisting a twist of 1 radian, per unit length, is therefore given by:
Torsional Stiffness = G.J = [E/{2(1+)}] (/32) . (OD
4
ID
4
).
Stress Outer and Inner Diameters
The line type stress diameters are set to '~', since they are the same as the pipe diameters.
Stress Loading Factors
These are set to one, the default value, as a simple homogeneous pipe carries all the loads.
Data
The Line Type Wizard helps build a line type to represent a homogeneous pipe, based on the following data:
Material
The Wizard provides 3 standard materials for a homogeneous pipe: Steel; Titanium and High Density Polyethylene.
For these standard materials OrcaFlex automatically sets Material Density, Young's Modulus and Poisson Ratio.
There is also an option to enter User Defined as the Material. In this case you must set Material Density, Young's
Modulus and Poisson Ratio.
Material Density
This is the density of the material used in the construction of the pipe.
Outer Diameter, Wall Thickness
These data specify the geometry of the pipe crosssection.
w

318
Young's Modulus
The ratio of the tensile stress to the tensile strain.
Poisson Ratio
The amount of lateral strain experienced by a material subjected to tensile strain as a negative proportion of the tensile
strain.
The Line Type data that are derived, and the associated underlying expressions, are detailed in Modelling Homogeneous
Pipes.
7.8.14 Hoses and Umbilicals
The Line Type Wizard estimates typical properties for hoses and umbilicals based on project data.
There are three categories of hose available:
High pressure which covers high pressure flexible risers and flowlines of unbonded construction with inside
diameters in the range 2 to 15 inches (50 to 380mm).
Low pressure which covers low pressure floating hoses of bonded rubber construction with inside diameter from 2
to 20 inches (50 to 500 mm).
Fold-flat which covers low pressure, foldflat hoses with steel reinforcement; inside diameter around 6 inches (150
mm).
The umbilical properties assume construction with steel wire armour and thermoplastic hoses and outside diameter up
to 250mm.
The properties derived by the Wizard are obtained from empirically estimated relationships with the diameter of the
hose/cable. They have been estimated from a limited amount of data covering only the range of diameters indicated
above. For simplicity, only those relationships of the form:
Y = aX
b
,
where b is an integer, were considered.
In the details below the diameter is assumed to be in metres and the SI units system is applied throughout.
The amount of data available for low pressure hoses and foldflat hoses is very small.
There is quite a bit more data for high pressure hoses and umbilicals but it is found to have quite a large spread. To
demonstrate this spread, the ratio of the observed value to the fitted value, expressed as a percentage, is calculated and
the largest and smallest of these is given.
The OrcaFlex stress analysis is not applicable to complex structures such as hoses and umbilicals. Any available stress or
wall tension results should therefore be ignored.
Data for Umbilicals
The Line Type Wizard can help build a line type to represent umbilical. Umbilical cables have many applications
including the carrying of electrical communication wires and hydraulic connectors to submersibles. The Line Type data
quantities that the wizard derives have been estimated from a limited amount of project data. The single item of input
data is:
Umbilical Diameter
The outer diameter of the umbilical. Each derived line type property is a function of this diameter.
w
319
Data for Hoses
The Line Type Wizard helps you build a line type to represent a hose, based on the following data. A limited amount of
available project data has been collated and used to derive purely empirical relationships between the diameter of types
of hose and certain line type data quantities. The input data consists of:
Hose Inner Diameter
Each derived line type property is a function of the hose inner diameter.
Hose Type
The Hose Type can be one of high pressure, low pressure or fold-flat. These categories roughly cover the available
project data.
The Line Type Wizard sets up Outer and Inner Diameters for hoses and umbilicals as follows:
Hoses
The inner diameter (ID) is specified by the user and the outer diameter (OD) is a function of the inner diameter:
OD = 1.40 ID m (for High Pressure) [90% 150%],
OD = 1.28 ID m (for Low Pressure),
OD = 1.34 ID m (for Fold-Flat).
Umbilicals
The inner diameter (ID) is set to zero and the outer diameter (OD) is specified by the user.
Mass per unit length
The Line Type Wizard sets up mass for hoses and umbilicals as follows:
Hoses
For each type of hose the mass per metre has been estimated as a function of inner diameter giving:
Mass per metre = 0.7523 ID te/m (for High Pressure) [55% 145%],
Mass per metre = 0.3642 ID te/m (for Low Pressure),
Mass per metre = 0.1844 ID te/m (for Fold-Flat).
Umbilicals
For the umbilicals the mass per metre has been estimated as a function of outer diameter giving:
Mass per metre = 1.8 OD
2
te/m (for Umbilical) [35% 170%].
The Line Type Wizard sets up Axial and Bending Stiffness and Limit Compression for hoses and umbilicals as follows:
Axial Stiffness
For each type of hose the axial stiffness has been estimated as a function of inner diameter giving:
6
ID kN (for High Pressure) [40% 160%],
4
ID kN (for Low Pressure),
3
ID kN (for FoldFlat).
For the umbilicals the axial stiffness has been estimated as a function of outer diameter giving:
6
OD kN (for Umbilical) [15% 415%].
w

320
Bending Stiffness
For each type of hose the bending stiffness has been estimated as a function of inner diameter giving:
Bending Stiffness = 3 x 10
4
ID
4
kN.m
2
(for High Pressure) [45% 300%],
2
ID
3
kN.m
2
(for Low Pressure),
3
ID
3
kN.m
2
(for FoldFlat).
For the umbilicals the bending stiffness has been estimated as a function of outer diameter giving:
3
OD
3
kN.m
2
(for Umbilical) [55% 240%].
Limit Compression
As the bending stiffness is significant this is set to 'no'.
7.8.15 Line Ends
Lines in OrcaFlex run from End A to End B. Travelling from A to B, the orientation of any segment in the line is defined in
terms of Azimuth and Declination angles, relative to global axes. Azimuth is measured in the XY plane, Declination is
measured downwards from the Z axis. See NoMoment Direction.
No-moment Direction
Associated with each end is a stiffness, and a nomoment direction which is described in terms of azimuth and
declination. This too uses the End A to End B convention, so if we hang up a catenary of line, and then freeze the ends,
the nomoment directions are as shown below:
x
z
y
Declination
Angle
Azimuth
Angle
No moment direction
( Az = 0, Dec = 160 )
No moment direction
( Az = 0, Dec = 45 )
End A
End B

Figure: Directions
If the line end is attached to a body which can move (a Vessel or Buoy), then the nomoment direction is defined relative
to the body axes and therefore moves with the body. Otherwise, it is defined in global axes.
w
321
End Stiffness
The stiffness associated with the end can be used to represent an item such as a flexjoint, whose stiffness is in units of
moment per unit angle, e.g. kN.m/degree. More commonly, the line end is either free to rotate or fully restrained. In the
first case, the end stiffness is set to zero; in the second case, the end stiffness is set to Infinity. Note that it is never
necessary (or correct) to 'convert' the line stiffness into an end stiffness: the program includes the line stiffness for you
automatically.
Free-to-rotate or Fully-restrained Ends
In many practical cases, the line ends are neither completely free nor fully restrained. Nevertheless, we recommend that
you should usually choose one of these conditions. When should you use one rather than the other? The following notes
offer a brief guide:
1. Many systems modelled using OrcaFlex consist of relatively long flexible lines where bend stiffness plays only a
minor role in determining the overall forces on and movements of the system. In such systems, line ends may safely
be modelled as freetorotate.
2. An exception to this rule is systems which include one or more 6D buoys. The rotational motions of the buoy may
then be influenced by moment transfer from the ends of lines attached to it, particularly where buoy rotational
inertias are small. In such cases, the end connections to the buoy should be fully restrained.
3. A further exception is systems where the flexible lines are relatively short and stiff, e.g. a large diameter underbuoy
hose in shallow water. Bend stiffness, including end moments, may have a significant influence on overall system
behaviour in such cases, and the end connections should be fully restrained.
4. Where fully restrained ends are used, it is necessary to pay more attention to the modelling of the line close to the
end. In particular make allowance for the additional stiffness of a bend stiffener, if one is fitted and use shorter
segments near the line ends so as to represent the moments with sufficient accuracy.
5. Rollon/rolloff contact (e.g. stern rollers, pipelay stingers, midwater arches for riser systems). A pinned
connection at the average contact point is often sufficient. For a more exact representation, use one or more solids
to represent the supporting surface, but remember that there must be sufficient nodes at the line end to interact
with the solid.
End Force and End Force Ez-Angle
The figure below shows the end connection of a flexible line fitted with a bend stiffener. The line applies a load (tension)
T as shown. If the local loads (weight, drag, etc.) on the end part of the line, including the bend stiffener, are small by
comparison with T, then the reaction force F is equal and opposite to T, and the bend moment at the end fitting
is M = T.h.
OrcaFlex reports the End Force, F, and the End Force EzAngle, , as shown. The "No moment direction" is defined in the
input data. When the reaction force F acts in the no moment direction, then the reaction moment M is zero.
It is clear from this that
1. End Force and End Force EzAngle are the same whether the end condition is defined as freetorotate, fully
restrained, or some intermediate condition;
2. The bend moment at the end fitting, M, is a function of the lever arm, h, which depends not only on the end
condition but also on the bend stiffness distribution in the line/bend stiffener.
w

322
No moment direction
h
T
F
M

Figure: End connection of a flexible line fitted with a Bend Stiffener
Design Loads for End Fittings
For design of end fittings, including bend restrictors, the principal parameters provided by OrcaFlex are End Force and
End Force EzAngle. The moment at the end can then be determined by a local (static) analysis which can be developed
to incorporate as much detail as required.
This approach is usually sufficient, except where End Force is very small. This occurs when the line tension T comes
close to zero. The direction of the end force is then no longer dominated by the line tension, and other loads (shear, local
drag and inertia loads etc.) which are usually negligible become important. In these conditions, the reported End Force
EzAngle is misleading and a more appropriate estimate should be made from the system geometry. This can be done
using the EzAngle results variable. EzAngle for any segment gives the angle of that segment relative to the No Moment
Direction at the adjacent line end, including allowance for the motion of line end where the line is attached to a vessel or
buoy. EzAngle for a point near the end of the bend restrictor is a reasonable alternative where End Force EzAngle is
not suitable.
Results
When examining results at line ends note that if a stiff pipe goes into compression, line tension becomes negative but
End Force remains positive, and End Force EzAngle may approach 180.
Curvature is calculated in OrcaFlex by dividing the angle change at any node by the sum of the halfsegment lengths on
each side of the node: bend moment is curvature multiplied by bend stiffness. At the end, OrcaFlex takes the angle
change between the end segment of the line and the nomoment direction, and reports the corresponding curvature and
bend moment based on the half length of the end segment. Where bend stiffness at the line end is zero (pinned end or a
zero stiffness line), curvature and bend moment are reported as zero.
Design Data for Bend Restrictors
We classify bend restrictors into 3 types:
Bellmouths: curved surfaces which support the flexible and maintain acceptable curvature.
Bend Limiters: articulated devices which rotate freely to a specified curvature, then stop.
Bend Stiffeners: elastomeric devices which provide a tapered additional bend stiffness.
Different design information is required for each type:
w
323
Bellmouth
The principal design requirement is that bellmouth angle should be greater than the maximum value of End Force Ez
Angle. For cases where the bellmouth is not radially symmetrical, OrcaFlex reports components of End Force Angle in
the local XZ and YZ planes. End Force EzxAngle is the component in the local xz plane; End Force EzyAngle is the
component in the local yz plane.
Bend Limiter
There are two design requirements:
1. The limiter length must be not less than a*R where a is End Force EzAngle and R is the limiter locking radius.
2. The limiter must be capable of withstanding the maximum bend moment M given by M = R*F*(1cos(a)) where F, a
are simultaneous values of End Force and End Force EzAngle. OrcaFlex reports Bend Restrictor Load P = F*(1
cos(a)) as an aid to bend limiter design. P is sometimes called "pseudocurvature".
Bend Stiffener
The design process is more complex and the critical design load cases are not always selfevident. An XY graph of F
against a (End Force against End ForceEz Angle) provides a complete definition of the loading for one analysis case,
with each (F,a) pair defining a load case. The bend stiffener should be designed to prevent infringement of the permitted
curvature for any (F,a) pair. In practice, it is often sufficient to consider just the three (F,a) pairs corresponding to
maximum values of End Force F, End Force EzAngle a and Bend Restrictor Load P.
7.8.16 Modelling Compression in Flexibles
When a flexible line experiences compression, it responds by deflecting transversely: the magnitude of the deflection is
controlled by bend stiffness. Under static conditions, the behaviour of an initially straight section of line under pure
axial loading is described by classic Euler buckling theory. This defines the maximum compressive load the
"Euler load" which a particular length of line can withstand before transverse deflection occurs. The Euler load is a
function of the length of the straight section, the bend stiffness and the end conditions. For a simple stick of length L,
bend stiffness EI, with pin joints at each end, the Euler load is
2
EI/L
2
. The Euler load is derived from a stability analysis:
it tells us the value of axial load at which transverse deflection will occur but nothing about the postbuckling behaviour.
Under dynamic loading conditions, the transverse deflection is resisted by a combination of inertia and bending.
OrcaFlex is fully capable of modelling this behaviour provided the discretisation of the model is sufficient, i.e. provided
the segments are short enough to model the deflected shape properly. Another way of saying the same thing is that the
compressive load in any segment of the line should never exceed the Euler load for the segment.
Why are these two statements equivalent? Imagine the real line replaced by a series of rigid sticks connected by
rotational springs at the joints this is essentially how OrcaFlex models the line. Under compression, the line deflects:
the sticks remain straight and the joints rotate. Provided the wavelength of the deflection is longer than the length of the
individual sticks then the rigid stick model can approximate it: shorter sticks give a better approximation.
If the compressive load reaches the Euler load for an individual stick, then the real line which the stick represents will
start to deform at a shorter wavelength, and deflections within the stick length become significant. Clearly, this stick
model is no longer adequate. By replacing each long stick by several short ones, we can make the Euler load for each
stick greater than the applied compressive load. Each stick will then remain straight, but we now have more sticks with
which to model the deflected shape.
This gives us a convenient way of checking the adequacy of our model: provided the compressive load in each segment
always remains less than the Euler load for that segment, then we can have confidence that the behaviour of the line in
compression is adequately modelled. OrcaFlex makes this comparison automatically for all segments and reports any
infringements in the Statistics tables. The segment Euler load is also plotted in tension range graphs (as a negative value
compression is negative) so that infringements are clearly visible.
If the segment Euler load is infringed during a simulation, then we have to decide what to do about it. If infringement
occurs only during the buildup period, perhaps as a result of a starting transient, then we can safely ignore it. If it
occurs during the main part of the simulation, then we should examine the time histories of tension in the affected areas.
Where infringements are severe and repeated or of long duration the analysis should be repeated with shorter
System Modelling Data and Results, 6D Buoys
w

324
segments in the affected area. However it may be acceptable to disregard occasional minor infringements of short
duration on the following grounds:
Transverse deflection caused by compression takes some time to occur because of inertia.
The segment Euler load used in OrcaFlex as a basis for comparison is the lowest of the various alternatives, and
assumes pinned joints with no bend stiffness at each end of the segment. This is a conservative assumption.
Whether or not to disregard an infringement is a decision which can only be taken by the analyst in the context of
the task in hand.
Limit Compression Switch
For each line type, the data includes a Limit Compression switch.
The usual setting is "No". This means that each segment of this line type is treated as a strut capable of taking whatever
compressive loads arise in the course of the simulation.
For some special cases, such as chains and soft ropes with little bend stiffness, this is not the most useful model and
OrcaFlex offers an alternative. Lines of this sort cannot take compression at all, so the "Limit Compression" switch can
be set to "Yes". OrcaFlex then does not allow compressive loading greater than the segment Euler load (which is zero if
the bend stiffness is zero).
Note: In either case, if the segment Euler load is reached then a Warning is given on the result form and in
the statistics table.
7.9 6D BUOYS
6D Buoys are objects having all six degrees of freedom 3 translational (X,Y and Z) and 3 rotational (Rotation 1,2 and
3). The forces acting on a buoy are mass, buoyancy, added mass and damping and drag in the three principal buoy
directions. Corresponding moments are applied for the rotational degrees of freedom. Buoys can be surfacepiercing,
and have a notional height; this allows the hydrostatic and hydrodynamic forces to be proportioned depending on the
depth of immersion.
6D Buoys can have wings attached to them. A wing is a rectangular surface, attached to the buoy at a specified position
and orientation, which experiences lift and drag forces, and a moment, due to the relative flow of the sea past the wing.
Lines attached to a 6D Buoy can thus experience both moment effects and translations as the buoy rotates under the
influence of hydrodynamics and applied loads. Lines can be attached to an offset position on a buoy this allows the
direct study of line clashing, including the separation introduced by spaced attachment points.
Three types of 6D Buoy are available, the differences being the way in which the geometry of the buoy is defined.
Lumped Buoys
The first type, Lumped Buoys, are specified without reference to a specific geometry. This necessarily restricts the
accuracy with which interactions with the water surface are modelled. Where a lumped buoy pierces the surface it is
treated for buoyancy purposes as a simple vertical stick element with a length equal to the specified height of the buoy
(thus buoyancy changes linearly with vertical position without regard to orientation). This model does not provide the
rotational stiffness that would be experienced by most surface piercing buoys.
Interactions with the seabed and with shapes are also modelled in a fairly simple manner, and friction effects are not
included. Arbitrary hydrodynamic and physical properties are modelled by deriving equivalent terms which are applied
at the centre of mass.
Spar Buoys
The second type, called Spar Buoys, are intended for modelling axisymmetric buoys whose axis is normally vertical,
particularly where surface piercing effects are important (such as for a CALM buoy).
Spar Buoys are modelled as a series of coaxial cylinders mounted end to end along the local zaxis (see Spar Buoy and
Towed Fish Properties). This allows you to provide some information about the buoy geometry, by specifying the
number of cylinders and their lengths and diameters. A conical or spherical shape can be approximated as a series of
short cylinders of gradually increasing or diminishing diameter.
w
325
Spar Buoys model surfacepiercing effects in a much more sophisticated way than Lumped buoys. Effects such as heave
stiffness and righting moments in pitch and roll are determined by calculating the intersection of the water surface with
each of the cylinders making up the buoy, allowing for the instantaneous position and attitude of the buoy in the wave.
However note that OrcaFlex does not calculate radiation damping (a linear damping term resulting from the creation of
surface waves as the buoy oscillates) or impact loads (slamming).
Because they are modelled as a stack of concentric cylinders, Spar Buoys are often not suitable for fully submerged
objects with more complex geometry.
As with Lumped Buoys, the modelling of seabed interaction is simplistic and friction effects are not included.
Hydrodynamic loads on Spar Buoys are calculated using Morison's equation. Added mass and drag forces are applied
only to those parts of the buoy which are in the water at the time for which the force is calculated. For partly immersed
cylinders, added mass and drag are proportioned according to the fraction of the cylinder which is immersed. The use of
Morison's equation implies that the buoy diameter is small compared to the wavelength (usually the case for CALM
buoys and the like) but means that some load terms are not represented.
Towed Fish
The third type, called Towed Fish, are intended for modelling bodies, such as towed fish, whose principal axis is
normally horizontal. Towed Fish buoys are identical to Spar Buoys except that the stack of cylinders representing the
buoy is laid out along the xaxis of the buoy, rather than along the zaxis.
7.9.1 Wings
6D buoys can have a number of wings attached; these are useful for representing lift surfaces, diverters etc. Each wing
has its own data and results available.
A wing is a rectangular surface, attached to the buoy at a specified position and orientation, which experiences lift force,
drag force and drag moment, due to the relative flow of fluid past the wing. These drag loads depend on userspecified
coefficients that depend on the incidence angle of the relative fluid flow.
The fluid referred to here can be the sea, the air, or both, as follows.
Whenever the wing is completely below the instantaneous water surface, then the lift and drag loads are calculated
using the sea density, velocity and incidence angle.
Whenever the wing is completely above the water surface, and if you have selected to include wind loads on wings
(on the Wind page on the Environment data form), then instead air lift and drag loads are calculated and applied,
using the same formulae and coefficients, but using the air density, velocity and incidence angle.
When the wing is partially submerged, OrcaFlex calculates what proportion of the wing rectangle area is below the
instantaneous water surface, i.e. its 'proportion wet' PW. OrcaFlex then calculates the water lift and drag loads as if
the wing was fully submerged, but then scales them by PW before they are applied. In addition, if you have selected
to include wind loads on wings, then OrcaFlex also calculates the air lift and drag loads (as if the wing was not
submerged) and scales them by 1PW, i.e. the 'proportion dry', before they are applied. When this happens,
therefore, both water and air lift and drag loads are applied, each appropriately scaled. The wing lift, drag and
moment results then report the water loads whenever the wing is more than half submerged and the air loads
whenever it is less than half submerged.
Wings do not have any mass, added mass or buoyancy associated with them. Therefore any mass, added mass or
buoyancy due to wings should be added into the properties specified for the buoy itself.
The drag force on a wing is the force applied in the direction of relative flow. The lift force is the force at 90 to that
direction. The moment represents the moment (about the wing centre) that arises due to the fact that the centre of
pressure may not be at the wing centre. These loads are applied at the wing centre and are specified by giving lift, drag
and moment coefficients as a function of the incidence angle between the relative velocity vector (flow velocity
relative to wing) and the wing plane.
w

326
Wy
Wx
Span
Chord
Wz Principal
Wing Axis
Flow Velocity V
(relative to wing)
+ve lift
-ve lift
W
Leading
edge

Figure: Wing Model
Each wing has its own set of local wing axes, with origin W at the wing centre and axes Wx, Wy and Wz.
Wy is normal to the wing surface and points towards the positive side of the wing, i.e. the side towards which
positive lift forces act.
Wx and Wz are in the plane of the wing. The wing is therefore a rectangle in the Wxz plane, centred on W.
Wz is the principal axis of the wing. It is the axis about which the wing can easily be pitched, by adjusting the wing
gamma angle.
Wx is in the plane of the wing, normal to the axis Wz, so that (Wx,Wy,Wz) form a righthand triad.
We normally choose Wz and Wx so that Wx is towards the leading edge of the wing. With this arrangement,
increasing the wing gamma angle moves the leading edge in the direction of positive lift.
We refer to the wing's length in the Wz direction as its span and its width in the Wx direction as its chord.
If the wing is not completely submerged, then the forces and moments applied by OrcaFlex are scaled down according to
the proportion of the wing area that is below the surface. However, note that the true effects of breaking surface, for
instance planing and slamming, are much more complex than this and are not modelled.
7.9.2 Common Data
All types of 6D Buoy use a local coordinate system with the origin at the centre of gravity. The following data items are
common to all types.
Name
Used to refer to the 6D Buoy.
Type
Three types of buoy are available: Lumped Buoys, Spar Buoys and Towed Fish.
Connection
A 6D Buoy can either be Free, Fixed or connected to a Vessel or a Line (provided that line includes torsion).
w
327
If the buoy is Free then it is free to move in response to wave loads, attached lines etc. In this case the buoy's Initial
Position and Attitude are specified relative to global axes.
If the buoy is Fixed then it cannot move. Its Initial Position and Attitude are specified relative to global axes.
If the buoy is connected to a Vessel or a Line, then it is rigidly connected to that object and so moves and rotates
with it. All resulting forces and moments on the buoy are transmitted to the object. In this case the buoy's Initial
Position and Attitude are specified relative to the object to which it is connected.
Initial Position and Attitude
Specifies the initial position of the buoy origin (which must be the centre of gravity) and its initial orientation.
If the buoy is Free or Fixed then its initial position is specified by giving the X, Y and Z coordinates of the buoy origin B,
relative to the global axes. And its initial orientation is specified by giving 3 angles Rotation 1, Rotation 2, Rotation 3,
which are successive rotations that define the orientation of the buoy axes Bxyz, relative to global axes, as follows. First
align the buoy with global axes, so that Bxyz are in the same directions as GXYZ. Then apply Rotation 1 about Bx (=GX),
followed by Rotation 2 about the new By direction, and finally Rotation 3 about the new (and final) Bz direction.
If a Free buoy is not included in the static analysis then this initial position is taken to be the static position of the buoy.
If the buoy is included in the static analysis, then this initial position is used as an initial estimate of the buoy position
and the static analysis will move and rotate the buoy from this position until an equilibrium position is found. See
Degrees of Freedom Included in Static Analysis.
If the buoy is connected to a Line, then the Initial Position and Attitude specify where on the line it is connected, and
with what orientation, as follows:
The Initial Position zcoordinate specifies the arc length at which the buoy should be connected to the line. The buoy
will be connected to the nearest node to that arc length. This arclength may be measured relative to either End A or
End B as specified by the user.
The buoy will be connected to that node, but with an offset relative to that node's axes that is given by (x, y, 0).
The buoy orientation relative to the node axes is specified by the Initial Attitude angles.
Degrees of Freedom Included in Static Analysis
Determines which degrees of freedom are calculated by the static analysis. This data item only applies to Free buoys and
it can be set to one of:
None: the buoy position and orientation are not calculated by the static analysis they are simply set to the initial
position and orientation specified on the buoy data form.
X,Y,Z: the buoy position is calculated by the static analysis, but its orientation is simply set to the initial orientation
set on the buoy data form.
All: the buoy position and orientation are calculated by the static analysis.
Normally this data item should be set to All so that the static analysis calculates the true equilibrium position and
orientation of the buoy. However it is sometimes useful to fix the buoy position or orientation, for example if the static
analysis is unable to find the equilibrium position or orientation.
Mass
Mass Moments of Inertia
The solid moments of inertia of the buoy about the local x, y and z axes directions through its centre of mass.
Centre of Mass
The centre of mass of the buoy, relative to the buoy origin. The weight force, mass and moments of inertia are applied at
this point.
w

328
Bulk Modulus
Specifies the compressibility of the buoy. If the buoy is not significantly compressible, then the Bulk Modulus can be set
to Infinity, which means 'incompressible'. See Buoyancy Variation for details.
Seabed Friction Coefficient
OrcaFlex applies Coulomb friction between the buoy and the seabed. The friction force applied never exceeds R where
R is the seabed reaction force and is the friction coefficient.
form.
Total Contact Area
Used to determine contact forces when the buoy comes in to contact with the seabed and with elastic solids. If a value of
'~' is specified then OrcaFlex calculates a default value for total contact area based on the buoy geometry. See Contact
Forces for details.
Specifying a value of zero allows you to disable contact for the buoy.
7.9.3 Applied Loads
You can apply to the buoy external Global Loads that do not rotate if the buoy rotates. These are specified by giving the
components of Applied Force and Applied Moment relative to global axes. These components can be constant, vary with
simulation time or be given by an external function. If the buoy rotates then the loads do not rotate with it.
In addition, you can specify external Local Loads that do rotate with the buoy. These are specified by giving the
components of Applied Force and Applied Moment relative to buoy axes. Again these components can be constant, vary
with simulation time or be given by an external function. If the buoy rotates then the loads do rotate with it. These are
suitable for modelling thrusters, for example.
In both cases the Point of Application of the load is specified by giving its x,y,z coordinates relative to buoy axes.
7.9.4 Wing Data
6D buoys can have a number of wings attached, each having its own data and type.
Name
Used to refer to the wing.
Span
The length of the wing, in the local Wz direction.
Chord
The width of the wing, in the local Wx direction.
Centre of Wing
The position of the wing origin, relative to buoy axes. The wing is drawn is drawn as a simple rectangle centred on this
origin, the rectangle's dimensions being the specified Chord and Span.
Note that this origin is the point at which the relative velocity is calculated and at which the resulting wing lift and drag
forces are applied. It should therefore normally be at the centre of pressure, which may not be at the centre of area
(even though OrcaFlex draws the wing as being centred at this point).
Orientation
The orientation of the wing is specified by giving 3 angles azimuth, declination and gamma relative to the buoy axes.
The angles can be fixed, or can vary with simulation time, or can vary and be given by an external function.
The angles define the orientation of the local wing axes relative to the buoy axes as follows:
w
329
Start with the wing axes Wxyz aligned with the buoy axes Bxyz and then rotate Wxyz about Bz by the azimuth angle.
This leaves Wz aligned with Bz but Wx now points in the direction towards which the declination is to be made.
Now rotate by the declination angle about the new direction of Wy. This declines Wz down into its final direction,
i.e. Wz now points along the direction whose azimuth and declination angles are as specified.
Finally rotate by the gamma angle about this final Wz direction. This is a rotation about the principal wing axis, so it
allows you to adjust the pitch of the wing.
For each of these rotations, positive angles mean clockwise rotation and negative angles mean anticlockwise rotation,
when looked at along the axis of rotation.
When setting these orientation angles, it is easiest to first set the azimuth and declination values to give the desired Wz
direction. This is the direction of the axis about which the wing pitch is set. Then set gamma to give the correct pitch of
the wing. This process is best done with the Draw Local Axes option set on (see the View menu or the
Tools | Preferences menu) since the wing axes are then visible on the 3D view and you can check that the resulting
orientation is correct.
Wing Type
Determines the properties of the wing. You can define a number of wing types click the "Wing Types" button to access
the wing types data form.
7.9.5 Wing Type Data
6D buoys can have a number of wings attached, each having its own data and type.
Name
Used to refer to the wing type.
Wing Type Properties
The properties of each wing type are specified by giving a table of lift, drag and moment coefficients as a function of the
incidence angle of the flow relative to the wing.
A 'Graph' button is provided, which displays a graph of the 3 coefficients so that you can visually check your data.
Incidence Angle
The incidence angle is the angle, , that the relative flow vector makes to the wing surface. This equals 90 minus the
angle between Wy and the relative flow vector.
The incidence angle is always in the range 90 to +90, where positive values mean that the flow is towards the positive
side of the wing (i.e. hitting the negative side) and negative values mean that the flow is towards the negative side of the
wing (i.e. hitting the positive side).
The incidence angles in the table must be given in strictly increasing order and the table must cover the full range of
incidence angles, so the first and last angle in the table are set to 90 and +90 and cannot be changed. Linear
interpolation is used to obtain coefficients over the continuous range of angles.
Note: The wing lift, drag and moment are assumed to depend only on the incidence angle, not on the angle of
attack in the wing plane. OrcaFlex will therefore use the same lift, drag and moment coefficients for
flow (with the same incidence angle) onto the front, the side or the back of the wing, even though your
data may only apply over a limited range of in-plane attack angles. You can check that the angle of
attack in the wing plane stays within the range of your data by examining the Beta angle result
variable.
Lift, Drag and Moment Coefficients
These define the hydrodynamic and aerodynamic loads applied to the wing. Aerodynamic loads are only applied if the
Include wind loads on 6D Buoy Wings option is enabled in the Environment data.
The lift coefficient Cl() defines the lift force applied to the wing, as a function of incidence angle . The lift coefficients
can be positive or negative and the lift force is given by:
w

330
Lift Force = P .Cl()..A.V
2

where
P is the proportion wet or proportion dry as appropriate.
is the fluid density,
A is the area of wing that is inside the fluid and
V is the relative flow velocity at the wing centre.
The lift force is applied at the wing centre, along the line that is at 90 to the relative flow vector and in the plane of that
vector and Wy. For = 90 this line is illdefined and the lift coefficient must be zero. Positive lift coefficients mean lift
pushing the wing towards its positive side (the +ve Wy side).
The drag force is defined by the drag coefficient Cd() using the formula:
Drag Force = P .Cd()..A.V
2

The drag coefficient cannot be negative, so the drag force is always in the relative flow direction.
The moment coefficient Cm() defines a moment that is applied to the wing. This moment represents the fact that the
position of the centre of pressure may depend on the incidence angle .
The moment coefficients can be positive or negative and the moment is given by:
Moment = P .Cm()..A.V
2
.Chord
This moment is applied about the line that is in the wing plane and is at 90 to the relative flow vector. For = 90 this
line is illdefined and the moment coefficient must be zero. Positive moment coefficients mean that the moment is trying
to turn the wing to bring Wy to point along the relative flow direction. Negative moment coefficients mean the moment
tries to turn the wing the opposite way.
Pen
This controls which pen is used to draw a Wing which uses this Wing Type. If it is set to Use Buoy's pen then the 6D
Buoy pen will be used. If it is set to Use this pen then the specified pen is used.
Shaded Drawing
By default, for shaded 3D Views, wings are drawn as plates with the specified span and chord.
w
331
Shaded Drawing Origin is provided because the shaded drawing and the wing may have different origins. The Shaded
Drawing Origin defines the origin of the shaded drawing with respect to the wing's local axis system. Similarly Shaded
Drawing Orientation allows you to reorient the shaded drawing to match the wing's axis system.
7.9.6 Lumped Buoy Properties
pitch
roll
z (heave)
y (sway)
x (surge)
O
(O=centre of gravity)
yaw
Vertices

Figure: Lumped Buoy
A Lumped Buoy is specified relative to its own local frame of reference Bxyz. The Centre of Mass is specified relative to
Bxyz.
The forces and moments are calculated as follows ( is water density, g is acceleration due to gravity). Each degree of
freedom is calculated independently.
Geometry
Volume is the total volume of the buoy, with its centre at the Centre of Volume, defined relative to the local buoy axes
Bxyz.
Height is the buoy vertical dimension, assumed equally spaced about the centre of volume. Height is assumed to be
independent of buoy rotation.
The Height is used for two main purposes:
To calculate the contact area used to calculate forces of contact with shapes and the seabed.
To calculate the ProportionWet, which is used to scale the hydrostatic and hydrodynamic forces and to determine
the centre of wetted volume, which is the point at which they are applied.
Damping
Hydrodynamic damping forces and moments may be applied to the buoy. These are loads that are directly proportional
to the relative velocity, or angular velocity, of the sea past the buoy. For each of the local buoy axes directions, you
specify the magnitude of the Unit Force that is applied when the relative velocity is 1 length unit/second. OrcaFlex then
scales these magnitudes according to the actual relative velocity and applies the resulting force or moment. Similarly
you can specify a Unit Moment that is applied when the relative angular velocity is 1 radian/second.
w

332
Drag
Hydrodynamic drag forces and moments may be applied to the buoy. These are loads that are proportional to the
square of the relative velocity, or angular velocity, of the sea past the buoy.
The drag force properties are specified by giving, for each of the local buoy axes directions, the Drag Area that is subject
to drag loading in that direction and the corresponding Drag Coefficient.
Drag moment properties are specified in a similar way, except that instead of specifying a drag area you must specify a
Moment of Area.
Note: Drag Area Moment is the 3rd absolute moment of drag area about the axis. Separate Cd values are
given for force and moment calculations.
Fluid Inertia
Fluid inertia properties are those that are proportional to the acceleration of the sea and the buoy. These accelerations
have two main effects. Firstly, they result in forces and moments being applied to the buoy these are referred to as the
fluid acceleration loads. Secondly, the buoy experiences an increase in inertia this is known as the added mass.
Full details of the calculation are presented in the Lumped Buoy Added Mass, Damping and Drag topic.
The fluid inertia properties can be specified either by providing the Diagonal values or Full matrices.
Fluid Inertia specified by diagonal values
These properties are specified separately for translational and rotational motions and also separately for each local axis
direction.
The translational fluid inertia properties of the buoy are specified, for each of the local buoy axis directions, by giving a
reference Hydrodynamic Mass together with the two inertia coefficients, Ca and Cm. The translational Cm values can
be set to '~' to mean 1 + Ca.
The translational Hydrodynamic Mass values can be set to '~', meaning equal to the fully submerged displaced mass.(=
volume x water density). This is often a convenient reference mass to use.
Fluid Inertia specified by full matrices
The added mass and fluid inertia properties are specified as full 6x6 symmetric matrices. The added mass matrix is
simply added in to the buoy's virtual mass matrix. The fluid inertia matrix is multiplied by the instantaneous fluid
acceleration vector to produce the fluid acceleration loads.
The units of the added mass and fluid inertia matrices are as follows, where M, L and T indicate the units of mass, length
and time:
The upperleft 3x3 block of cells has units M.
The upperright and lowerleft 3x3 blocks have units M.L.
The lowerright 3x3 block of cells has units M.L
2
.
7.9.7 Lumped Buoy Drawing Data
Vertices and Edges
This defines a "wire frame" representation of the buoy. The wire frame representation of the buoy is used to draw the
buoy. It is also used to calculate the interaction of the buoy with shapes and the seabed. See Contact Forces for details.
The vertices are specified by giving their coordinates with respect to buoy axes Bxyz, and the edges are specified by
giving the vertex numbers of the vertices they connect.
Edge diameter (used only for shaded drawing)
For shaded graphics views, by default, the Lumped Buoy is drawn using a solid, filledin shape based on the vertices and
edges. As an alternative you can use the vertices and edges to define a frame like structure. If the edge diameter is '~'
then that edge will be used to build a filled in shape, otherwise that edge is drawn as a cylinder with the specified
diameter.
w
333

Figure: Wire frames with different edge diameter. A value of '~' is used for the wire frame on the left and
a value of 1m is used for the wire frame on the right.
7.9.8 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Properties
The figure below shows the geometry of a Spar Buoy. The buoy is specified relative to its own local frame of reference
Oxyz, where the origin O must be at the buoy centre of gravity.
A Spar Buoy is modelled as a series of coaxial cylinders mounted end to end along the local zaxis. The geometry of a
Towed Fish is identical except that the buoy axis is aligned with the xaxis of the buoy.
The cylinders are numbered from the top downwards. So in the tables on the buoy data form the cylinder at the base of
the stack (lowest x or z) appears at the bottom of the table.
If you are modelling a CALM or SPAR buoy then see also Modelling a SurfacePiercing Buoy.
w

334

Buoy Axis
Stack Base Position
Cylinder 1 Length
Cylinder 1 OD
pitch
z (heave)
y (sway)
x (surge)
O
(O=centre of gravity)
yaw
roll

Figure: Spar Buoy
Geometry
The shape of a Spar Buoy or Towed Fish is specified by the following data on the Geometry page on the buoy data
form.
w
335
Stack Base Centre Position
The centre of the base of the stack, relative to buoy axes. Note that the centre of gravity of the buoy must be at the origin
of the buoy axes, so this data specifies the position of the stack base centre relative to the centre of gravity.
Cylinders: Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter and Length
The diameters of the cylinder and its length measured along the axis.
These parameters define the buoy geometry from which buoyancy forces and moments are determined. When the buoy
pierces the water surface, OrcaFlex allows for the angle of intersection between the sea surface and the buoy axis when
calculating the immersed volume and centre of immersed volume, and includes the appropriate contributions to static
stability.
If the inner diameter is greater than zero then the cylinder is actually a hollow cylindrical pipe. The internal region of
the cylinder contains sea water if the buoy is submerged. In this case then the contained water contributes to the buoy's
inertia. These inertial effects are only included in directions normal to the buoy.
The remaining parameters determine the hydrodynamic loads acting on each cylinder. Loads are calculated for each
cylinder individually, then summed to obtain the total load on the buoy.
Hydrodynamic Loads
See the Added Mass and Damping and Drag pages on the buoy data form.
7.9.9 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Added Mass and Damping
There is a choice of how to model these first order effects, on the Added Mass and Damping page of the spar buoy data
form. They can either be specified by giving added mass and damping values for each cylinder, or else by giving RAOs
and matrices for the whole buoy.
Values for Each Cylinder
With this option, the added mass and damping effects are calculated separately for each cylinder using Morison's
Equation.
Added Mass
Translational added mass effects are calculated using the displaced mass as the reference mass for each cylinder.
Separate added mass coefficients are given for flow normal (x and y directions) and axial (z direction) to the cylinder.
Rotational added inertia is specified directly (so no reference inertia is involved). Separate values can be given for
rotation about the cylinder axis and normal to that axis.
See Spar Buoy Theory.
Damping Forces and Moments
Damping forces and moments are the hydrodynamic loads that are proportional to fluid velocity (angular velocity for
moments) relative to the cylinder. They are specified by giving the Unit Damping Force and Unit Damping Moment for
the normal and axial directions. These specify the force and moment that the cylinder will experience, in that direction,
when the relative fluid velocity (angular velocity for moments) in that direction is 1 unit. See Damping Forces and
Moments for details.
RAOs and Matrices for Buoy
In this option the linear hydrodynamic effects are specified by giving wave force and moment RAOs, and added mass
and damping matrices. Normally this data would come from a separate program, such as a diffraction program.
Note: This option is only appropriate for circularly-symmetric spar buoys whose axis undergoes only small
oscillations about vertical. It was developed primarily for CALM buoys with diameter in the range 5m
to 15m. It is therefore not available for towed fish.
Warning: The RAOs and added mass and damping matrices specified must apply to the mean position of the
buoy. They are not modified to account for any variations in buoy attitude or immersion, so this option
is only suitable for buoys that undergo small oscillations about their mean position.
w

336
RAO, Added Mass and Damping Origin
This specifies the coordinates, with respect to buoy axes, of the point on the buoy at which the RAOs and added mass
and damping matrices are applied. This means that:
The RAOs are applied to the wave conditions at this point to give the wave loads, which are then applied at this
point.
The damping matrix is multiplied by the current velocity relative to the buoy at this point to give the damping load,
which is applied at this point.
The added mass matrix is applied at this point.
Wave Force and Moment RAOs
The RAOs are specified in a table giving the amplitudes and phases of the surge force, heave force and pitch moment
RAOs, as a function of wave angular frequency. RAOs must be specified for both of the limiting cases, i.e. for long and
short waves, and for at least one other frequency.
The RAOs must be specified using the following Orcina conventions. The force and moment amplitudes must be the
forces and moments that are applied at the buoy origin when a unit amplitude wave is applied. The phases must be lags,
in degrees, from the time the wave crest passes the buoy origin until the maximum positive force or moment occurs.
Added Mass and Damping Matrices
In reality the added mass and damping matrices are frequencydependent, but in OrcaFlex you can only enter the
matrices for one frequency. You should give the values for the principal frequency of excitation expected.
The added mass and damping matrices are 6 x 6 symmetric matrices, so only the cells on and above the leading diagonal
are editable. The cells below the leading diagonal are noneditable and always equal the corresponding cell values above
the diagonal.
The units of the added mass and damping matrices are as follows, where M, L and T indicate the units of mass, length
and time:
Added mass matrix. The upperleft 3x3 block of cells has units M. The upperright and lowerleft 3x3 blocks have
units M.L. The lowerright 3x3 block of cells has units M.L
2
.
Damping matrix. The upperleft 3x3 block of cells has units F/(L/T). The upperright 3x3 block has units F/(rad/T).
The lowerleft 3x3 block of cells has units (F.L)/(L/T). The lowerright 3x3 block of cells has units (F.L)/(rad/T).
Because the buoy is assumed to be axisymmetric these matrices should both have the following axisymmetric form:
e
d b
d b
c
b a
b a
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0

OrcaFlex warns at simulation time if the matrices are not of this form.
7.9.10 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Drag
Munk Moment Coefficient
Slender bodies in nearaxial flow experience a destabilising moment called the Munk moment. This effect can be
modelled by specifying a nonzero Munk moment coefficient.
w
337
Drag Forces and Moments
Drag loads are the hydrodynamic loads that are proportional to the square of fluid velocity relative to the cylinder. For
details of the drag load formulae see Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Theory. For information when modelling a SPAR or
CALM buoy see Modelling a SurfacePiercing Buoy.
The drag forces are calculated on each cylinder using the "cross flow" assumption. That is, the relative velocity of the sea
past the cylinder is split into its normal and axial components and these components are used, together with the
specified drag areas and coefficients, to calculate the normal and axial components of the drag force.
The drag forces are specified by giving separate Drag Area and Drag Coefficient values for flow in the normal direction
(local x and y directions) and in the axial direction (local z direction). The Drag Area is a reference area that is multiplied
by the Drag Coefficient in the drag force formula. You can therefore use any positive Drag Area that suits your need, but
you then need to give a Drag Coefficient that corresponds to that specified reference area.
The Drag moments are specified and calculated in a similar way to the drag forces, except that the reference drag area is
replaced by a reference Area Moment. This and the Drag Coefficient are multiplied together in the drag moment
formula, so again you can use any positive Area Moment that suits your need, providing you then specify a Drag
Coefficient that corresponds to the specified Area Moment.
There are two alternative methods that you can adopt when specifying the drag data. The first method is to set the
OrcaFlex data to get best possible match with real measured results for the buoy (e.g. from model tests or full scale
measurements). This is the most accurate method, and we recommend it for CALM and discus buoys see Modelling a
SurfacePiercing Buoy for details. Because the Drag Area and Drag Coefficient data are simply multiplied together, you
can calibrate the model to the real results by fixing one of these two data items and then adjusting the other. For
example, you could set the axial Drag Coefficient to 1 and adjust the axial Drag Area until the heave response decay rate
in the OrcaFlex model best matches the model test results. Or, you could set the axial Drag Area to a fixed value (e.g. 1 or
some appropriate reference area) and then adjust the axial Drag Coefficient until the heave response decay rate in
OrcaFlex best matches the model test results.
The second method is to set the drag data using theoretical values or given in the literature. It is less accurate but can be
used if you cannot get any real buoy results against which to calibrate. To use this method, set the data as follows.
Set the Drag Areas to the projected surface area that is exposed to drag in that direction and then set the Drag Force
Coefficients based on values given in the literature (see Barltrop & Adams, 1991, Hoerner,1965 and DNV, 1991). Note
that the drag area specified should be the total projected area exposed to drag when the buoy is fully submerged, since
OrcaFlex allows for the proportion wet in the drag force formula. For a simple cylinder of diameter D and length L the
total projected drag area is D.L for the normal direction and (.D
2
)/4 for the axial direction, but if the buoy has
attachments that will experience drag then their areas must also be included.
Set the Drag Area Moments to the 3rd absolute moments of projected area exposed to drag in the direction concerned;
see Drag Area Moments for details. And then set the Drag Moment Coefficients based on values given in the literature.
7.9.11 Spar Buoy and Towed Fish Drawing
There are two alternative methods of drawing the Spar Buoy and Towed Fish cylinders:
1. Draw square cylinders. If this option is selected then each cylinder is drawn as a squarebased cuboid. OrcaFlex
automatically generates the vertices and edges. There are eight vertices per cylinder and the square base has a side
length equal to the diameter of the actual circular cylinder.
2. Draw circular cylinders. With this option selected the circular cylinders are drawn as such. You can specify pens for
the outside and inside of the cylinders. In addition you specify how many lines are drawn. Increasing this number
makes the buoy drawing more realistic but increases the time taken to draw the buoy.
Notes: The selected drawing method only affects the way the object is drawn. It does not affect calculations in
any way.
The vertices of the square-based cuboids are used for calculation of any contact with the seabed or
shapes. This applies even if you choose for presentation purposes to draw circular cylinders.
w

338
7.9.12 Shaded Drawing
By default, for shaded 3D Views, Spar Buoys and Towed Fish are drawn as solid objects using the specified cylinder
geometry. Lumped Buoys are drawn using the wire frame data.
Shaded Drawing Origin is provided because the shaded drawing and the buoy may have different origins. The Shaded
Drawing Origin defines the origin of the shaded drawing with respect to the buoy's local axis system. Similarly Shaded
Drawing Orientation allows you to reorient the shaded drawing to match the buoy's axis system.
7.9.13 Other uses
6D Buoys are frequently used for nonstandard purposes. For example they can be used to connect Lines together.
Sometimes they are used as frame of reference objects where the properties are provided by various other objects
(usually single segment Lines) connected to the 6D Buoy.
For such uses the 6D Buoy needs negligible structural and hydrodynamic properties. Because this is such a common
thing to do we have provided a facility on the 6D Buoy data form to set up appropriate properties. Clicking on the Give
Buoy negligible properties button has the following effects:
Buoy Type will be set as Lumped Buoy.
Mass will be set to a negligible value.
Height will not be modified since it cannot be set to zero. Because other properties are set to zero its value is not
significant.
All other Lumped Buoy properties are set to zero.
Any existing Wing, Applied Load and Drawing data is not modified.
Parameters
w
339
The 6D Buoy properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Weight in air
The force due to gravity acting on the buoy's mass.
Displacement
The weight of water displaced by the buoy's volume. The reported value uses the water density at the sea surface.
Weight in water
Volume
The volume of the buoy.
Centre of volume
Reported with respect to the buoy frame of reference.
x-mass radius of gyration, y-mass radius of gyration, z-mass radius of gyration
Equals (Mass Moment of Inertia / Mass).
Total contact area
Reports the Total contact area data. If a value of '~' is set on the data form then the value reported here is the default
value calculated by OrcaFlex.
Number of vertices
The number of vertices in the wire frame drawing. Contact for 6D Buoys is calculated at each of these vertices.
Contact area per vertex
Equals Total contact area / Number of vertices.
These are only reported if the buoy is included in statics.
The static analysis searches for an equilibrium position for the buoy that is a position for which the resultant force and
moment on the buoy is zero. We refer to the resultant force and moment as the out of balance load. Because computers
have limited numerical precision the static analysis cannot always find a configuration where the out of balance load is
exactly zero. OrcaFlex accepts a position as a static equilibrium position if the largest out of balance load component is
less than the statics accuracy.
The Statics force accuracy equals Tolerance * buoy typical force and the Statics moment accuracy equals Tolerance *
buoy typical moment. The buoy typical force and moment are based on the weight in air, the height of the buoy and the
forces and moments applied by connected objects.
precision.
Note: The statics accuracies change during the static analysis because the forces and moments applied by
connected objects vary with the position of the buoy. The statics accuracies reported in Reset state may
be quite different from those used for the final equilibrium position and should be treated as rough
7.9.16 Results
w

340
6D Buoy Results
For 6D Buoys the available variables are:
X, Y and Z
The position of a user specified point P on the buoy, relative to global axes. The point P is specified in buoy local
coordinates. If P=(0,0,0) then the global X, Y and Z coordinates of the buoy origin are reported.
Rotation 1, Rotation 2 and Rotation 3
Define the orientation of the buoy relative to global axes. They are 3 successive rotations that take the global axes
directions to the buoy axes directions. See Initial Position and Attitude for the definition of these angles.
Rotation 2 is in the range 90 to +90. Range jump suppression is applied to Rotation 1 and Rotation 3 (so values
Declination
The declination of the local z axis.
Velocity, GX-Velocity, GY-Velocity, GZ-Velocity
The magnitude and components of the velocity of the buoy, relative to global axes. These results are reported at a user
specified point P on the buoy. The point P is specified in buoy local coordinates.
The magnitude and components of the acceleration of the buoy, relative to global axes. These results are reported at a
user specified point P on the buoy. The point P is specified in buoy local coordinates.
Sea Surface Z
The global Z coordinate of the sea surface directly above the instantaneous position of the buoy origin.
Dry Length
The length of buoy above the water surface, measured along the buoy z axis, calculated as follows:
For a Lumped Buoy, this is calculated by assuming that the zextent of a Lumped Buoy is Height either side of its
centre of volume.
For a Spar Buoy it is the sum of the dry lengths of each of its cylinders, where the dry length of an individual
cylinder is calculated as:
(cylinder length) (submerged volume of cylinder) / (total volume of cylinder).
Force, Moment
Lx-Force, Ly-Force, Lz-Force, Lx-Moment, Ly-Moment, Lz-Moment,
Gx-Force, Gy-Force, Gz-Force, Gx-Moment, Gy-Moment, Gz-Moment
These results are not available for buoys that are connected to other objects you can instead use the Connection Force
and Connection Moment results.
These results are the total force and moment applied to the buoy. Force and Moment report the magnitudes of the
loads. The Lx, Ly and Lz results report the components of the force and moment in the local axes directions. The Gx, Gy
and Gz results report the components of the force and moment in the global axes directions.
Connection Force, Connection Moment
Connection x-Force, Connection y-Force, Connection z-Force
Connection x-Moment, Connection y-Moment, Connection z-Moment
These connection load results are only available for buoys that are connected to other objects. They report the total
force and moment applied to the buoy by the object to which it is connected.
Connection Force and Connection Moment report the magnitudes of the connection loads. The other results report
the components of the connection force and moment in the buoy axes directions.
w
341
These connection force and moment results include the inertial load on the buoy due to any acceleration of the object to
which it is attached. This means that these results can be used for sea fastening calculations, by using a 6D buoy to
model the object to be fastened and then attaching it to a vessel. The connection force and moment include the weight of
the buoy and the inertial loads due to the vessel acceleration. Note that if the vessel motion is specified by a time history
then the time history interpolation method used is important since it affects the calculation of vessel acceleration and
hence affects the inertial loads.
Wing Results
If the 6D buoy has wings attached then for each wing the following results are available.
Wing X, Wing Y, Wing Z
The position of the wing origin, relative to global axes.
Wing Azimuth, Declination and Gamma
The orientation angles of the wing, relative to the buoy.
Lift, Drag, Moment
The lift force, drag force and drag moment applied to the wing.
The lift force is applied at 90 to the relative flow direction. Positive values mean a force trying to push the wing towards
its positive side, negative values towards its negative side.
The drag force is applied in the relative flow direction and is always positive.
The drag moment is applied about the line that is in the wing plane and at 90 to the relative flow direction. Positive
values are moments trying to turn the wing to bring the wing yaxis Wy to point along the relative flow direction;
negative values are moments trying to turn the wing the opposite way.
Note: When the wing is less than half submerged, and you have included wind loads on wings, then the lift
force, drag force and moment reported are the air loads. Otherwise they are the water loads.
Incidence Angle
The angle, , that the relative flow vector makes with the plane of the wing, in the range 90 to +90. Positive values
mean that the flow is towards the positive side of the wing (i.e. hitting the negative side) and negative values mean that
the flow is towards the negative side of the wing (i.e. hitting the positive side).
The value reported is with respect to the principal fluid affecting the wing.
Beta Angle
The angle of the relative flow direction, measured in the wing plane. More specifically, it is the angle between wing Wx
axis and the projection of the relative flow vector onto the wing plane, measured positive towards Wz. Zero beta angle
means that this projection is in the Wx direction, 90 means it is along Wz and 90 means it is along the negative Wz
direction.
The value reported is with respect to the principal fluid affecting the wing.
Range jump suppression is applied to the Beta Angle (so values outside the range 360 to +360 might be reported).
7.9.17 Buoy Hydrodynamics
3D and Lumped 6D buoys are generalised objects for which no geometry is defined in the data other than a height: This
is used for proportioning hydrodynamic properties when the object is partially immersed, and for drawing a 3D buoy.
Since the geometry of the object is undefined, it is necessary to define properties such as inertias, drag areas, added
masses, etc. explicitly as data items. This can be a difficult task, especially where a 6D buoy is used to represent a
complex shape such as a midwater arch of the sort used to support a flexible riser system.
We cannot give a simple stepbystep procedure for this task since the geometry of different objects can be widely
different. As an example, the hydrodynamic properties in 6 degrees of freedom are derived for a rectangular box. This
w

342
gives a general indication of the way in which the problem should be approached. If a 3D buoy is used, the rotational
properties are not used.
7.9.18 Hydrodynamic Properties of a Rectangular Box
O
X Y
Z
x y
z
O is the centre of the box

Figure: Box Geometry
Drag areas
In X direction: Ax = y . z
In Y direction: Ay = x . z
In Z direction: Az = x . y
Drag Coefficients for Translational Motions
These are obtained from ESDU 71016, Figure 1 which gives data for drag of isolated rectangular blocks with one face
normal to the flow. The dimensions of the block are
a in the flow direction
b and c normal to the flow direction (c>b).
The figure plots drag coefficient, Cx against (a/b) for (c/b) from 1 to infinity (2D flow). Cx is in the range 0.9 to 2.75 for
blocks with square corners.
Note: ESDU 71016 uses Cd for the force in the flow direction; Cx for the force normal to the face. For present
purposes the two are identical.
Drag Properties for Rotational Motions
There is no standard data source. As an approximation, we assume that the drag force contribution from an elementary
area dA is given by
dF = ..V
2
.Cd.dA
where Cd is assumed to be the same for all points on the surface.
w
343
Note: This is not strictly correct. ESDU 71016 gives pressure distributions for sample blocks in uniform flow
which show that the pressure is greatest at the centre and least at the edges. However we do not allow
for this here.
dz
Z
O
z
X

Figure: Integration for rotational drag properties
Consider the box rotating about OX. The areas Ay and Az will attract drag forces which will result in moments about OX.
For the area Ay, consider an elementary strip as shown:
For an angular velocity about OX, the drag force on the strip is
dF = ..(z).|z|.Cd.x.dz
and the moment of this force about OX is
dM = ..(z).|z|.Cd.x.dz.z = (...||.Cd).x.z
3
.dz
Total moment is obtained by integration. Because of the V.|V| form of the drag force, simple integration from Z/2 to
+Z/2 gives M = 0. We therefore integrate from 0 to Z/2 and multiply the answer by 2. The result is
M = (...||.Cd).(x.z
4
/32)
OrcaFlex calculates the drag moment by
M = (.. .|| .Cdm).(AM)
so we set
Cdm = Cd, AM = x.z
4
/32.
This is the drag moment contribution about OX from the Ay area. There is a similar contribution from the Az area. Since
Cd is generally different for the 2 areas, it is convenient to calculate the sum of (Cd.AM) for both, set AM equal to this
value and set Cd equal to 1.
Added Mass
OrcaFlex requires the added mass and inertia contributions to the mass matrix, plus the hydrodynamic masses and
inertias to be used for computation of wave forces. For each degree of freedom (3 translations, 3 rotations), 3 data items
are required. These are Hydrodynamic Mass in tonnes (or Inertia in tonne.m
2
); and coefficients Ca and Cm. Added mass
is then defined as Hydrodynamic Mass . Ca; and wave force is defined as (Hydrodynamic mass . Cm) multiplied by the
water particle acceleration, aw.
On the usual assumptions intrinsic in the use of Morison's Equation (that the body is small by comparison with the
wavelength), the wave force is given by ( + AM) . aw, where is body displacement and AM is added mass. OrcaFlex
calculates the wave force as Cm . HM . aw where HM is the Hydrodynamic Mass given in the data.
w

344
For translational motions, set HM = for all degrees of freedom. Then Ca = AM/, Cm = 1 + Ca. For rotational motions,
set HI = I, the moment of inertia of the displaced mass. Then Ca = AI/I, Cm = 1 + Ca where AI is the added inertia (i.e.
the rotational analogue of added mass).
Translational Motion
DNV (1991), Table 6.2, gives added mass data for a square section prism accelerating along its axis. The square section
is of side a, prism length is b, and data are given for b/a = 1.0 and over. The reference volume is the volume of the body
which is the same definition we have adopted. We can therefore use the calculated Ca without further adjustment.
Consider the X direction: Area normal to flow = Ax.
For a square of the same area, a = (Ax).
Length in flow direction = x.
Hence b/a = x/(Ax).
Hence Ca can be obtained from DNV (1991) by interpolation, and then Cm = 1 + Ca.
If b/a < 1.0 this approach fails and we use the data given in DNV (1991) for rectangular flat plates. If y > z, aspect ratio of
the plate = y/z. Hence CA from DNV (1991) by interpolation. The reference volume in this case is that of a cylinder of
diameter z, length y. Hence:
Added mass = CA..(/4).y.z
2
= AMx, say
and then Ca = AMx/ and Cm = 1 + Ca.
Note: If y < z, then aspect ratio = z/y and reference volume = CA . . (/4) . z . y
2
.
Rotational Motion
DNV (1991) gives no data for hydrodynamic inertia of rotating bodies. The only data for 3D solids we know of is for
spheroids (Newman 1977). Fig 4.8 of Newman 1977 gives the added inertia for coefficient for spheroids of varying
aspect ratio referred to the moment of inertia of the displaced mass. We assume that the same coefficient applies to the
moment of inertia of the displaced mass of the rectangular block.
Rotation about X
I = (Y
2
+ Z
2
)/12
Added inertia:
Using data for spheroids from Newman 1977 :
Length in flow direction = 2a = x, so a = x/2.
Equivalent radius normal to flow, b, is given by b
2
= yz, so b = (y . z/).
Hence Ca from Newman 1977.
For b/a < 1.6
Ca can be read from the upper figure where the value is referred to the moment of inertia of the displaced mass. In this
case no further adjustment is required.
For b/a > 1.6
The coefficient CA is read from the lower graph in which the reference volume is the sphere of radius b. In this case:
Ca = CA . (2 . b
3
)/(a . (a
2
+b
2
))
In either case, Cm = 1 + Ca.
7.9.19 Modelling a Surface-Piercing Buoy
Surfacepiercing buoys, such as CALM buoys, SPAR buoys or meteorological discus buoys, can be modelled in OrcaFlex
using the Spar Buoy version of a 6D Buoy. Despite its name, the OrcaFlex Spar Buoy can be used to model any axi
symmetric body. See the example F01 CALM Buoy.
w
345
Spar Buoys have many data items available. This enables you to model a wide range of effects, but it also makes setting
up a Spar Buoy model more complicated. To help in this task we describe, in this section, the approach we adopt for
setting up an OrcaFlex model of a surfacepiercing buoy.
1. Create a simple model containing just a Spar Buoy
Start by modelling the freefloating behaviour of the buoy, without any lines attached. This allows us to get the basic
behaviour of the buoy correct, before complications such as moorings etc. are introduced. We therefore set up an
OrcaFlex model containing just a Spar Buoy and with no waves or current.
Set the buoy's Applied Load to zero. This data allows you to apply extra forces and moments to the buoy, in addition to
those from any lines that you attach to it. You can use this later to model the wind force on the upper part of the buoy.
To do this you will need to know the projected area (i.e. the area exposed to wind) of the pipe work etc. in the upper
part of the buoy.
Set the buoy's Munk Moment Coefficient to zero. This data item is only used for slender bodies in near axial fully
submerged flow only.
Set the number of wings to zero. Wings are normally only relevant for towed fish.
Finally, we start by setting all the buoy's drag and added mass data to zero. We will set up the actual values later.
2. Set up the geometry data
The Spar Buoy has its own local coordinate system. This must have its origin at the buoy centre of gravity (CG) and must
have the local zaxis pointing upwards along the axis of the buoy. You therefore need to know the position of the centre
of gravity. The buoy manufacturer should supply this information.
Set the Stack Base Position. This is the position of the centre of the bottom of the buoy, relative to the centre of gravity.
The Stack Base Position is therefore (0, 0, h) where h is the distance from the bottom of the buoy to the centre of
gravity.
Now set up a number of cylinders, and their lengths and diameters, in order to model the shape of the buoy. To do this
you need the dimensions of the various parts of the buoy. The buoy manufacturer should supply this information. Set
the cylinder lengths and diameters so that you get the correct length and volume for each section. You can represent
tapered sections by a series of short cylinders with diameters changing progressively from one to the next.
We recommend using a number of short cylinders, even where the buoy diameter is constant over a long length. Using
more cylinders gives more accurate results, though at the cost of reduced computation speed.
You can check your geometry data by zooming in on the buoy in a 3d view window. Turn on the local axes so that you
can check that the buoy origin (=centre of gravity) is in the correct place.
The Bulk Modulus data item is not relevant to a surfacepiercing buoy, so it can be left at the default value of Infinity.
3. Set up the mass and inertia data
Now set the Mass and Moments of Inertia of the buoy. The buoy manufacturer should supply this information.
The mass equals the weight of the buoy in air. The moments of inertia are those of the buoy (in air) about its centre of
gravity, as follows:
Iz = the moment of inertia about the buoy axis.
Ix and Iy = the moments of inertia about axes perpendicular to the buoy axis, through the centre of gravity. Usually it
is sufficient to assume that Ix = Iy.
If you cannot obtain data for the moments of inertia, then they can be approximately calculated from a knowledge of the
masses of the various parts of the buoy, and approximately how that mass is distributed.
4. Check that the buoy floats at the correct draught
Set the Initial Position and Initial Attitude of the buoy so that the buoy is in its expected equilibrium position. The initial
position is the position of the buoy local origin, and therefore of the CG, and you can calculate this point's expected
equilibrium position from the buoy draught, which should be available from the buoy manufacturer.
w

346
The Initial Attitude defines the initial orientation of the buoy. Set it to (0,0,0), which orients the buoy with its axis
vertical and the buoy local x,y axes aligned with the global X,Y axes.
Set the Degrees of freedom included in statics to None and then run the simulation and look at the time history of buoy
Z. If the data has been set up correctly then the buoy should have stayed basically in its initial position and attitude, with
perhaps just small oscillations about that position.
If the buoy Z has oscillated significantly then the model's equilibrium position does not match the expected equilibrium
position. This means that something is wrong in the data and this needs tracing and correcting before you proceed. You
can estimate the model's equilibrium position by looking at the mean Z position in the time history.
5. Check that the buoy is stable
Now check that the buoy is stable i.e. that if it is pitched over to one side and released then it rights itself. In the Initial
Attitude data, set the Rotation 2 value to say 10 and run the simulation. If the buoy falls over then there is something
wrong with the CG position or the volume distribution, and this must be corrected.
Note: The buoy on its own may not be intended to be stable, e.g. stability may only be achieved when the
moorings are attached. In this case you will need to model the moorings in order to check stability.
6. Set the Added Mass data
The x and y added mass coefficients can be set to 1.0, which is the standard value for a cylinder in flow normal to its axis.
Added mass in the z direction should be estimated for the buoy from the published literature (DNV rules, Barltrop &
Adams, 1991) and distributed between the immersed cylinders (remember that hydrodynamic loads are only applied to
the immersed parts of the model).
Ideally, this data should then be checked by comparing the heave and pitch natural periods of the model against values
obtained from model tests or full scale measurements, and adjustments made as necessary.
7. Set the drag and damping data
The best approach depends on whether the buoy is a SPAR whose length is great by comparison with its diameter, or a
surfacefollowing Discus shape such as an oceanographic buoy. CALM buoys are usually closer to the Discus
configuration, often with a damping skirt which is submerged at normal draft.
Spar Buoys
Set the Drag Areas for each cylinder to the areas, of the part of the buoy which that cylinder represents, that are exposed
to fluid drag in the direction concerned. Note that you should specify the areas that are exposed to drag when the buoy
is fully submerged. OrcaFlex automatically calculates the proportion of the cylinder that is submerged and scales all the
fluid loads on the cylinder using that 'proportion wet' as a factor. So if a cylinder is not submerged, or is partially
submerged, then the drag loads will be scaled accordingly for you.
For a simple cylinder, of diameter D and length L, the normal drag area is D.L since that is the area of a cylinder when
viewed normal to its axis. And the axial drag area is (.D
2
)/4 since that is the area of the cylinder when viewed along its
axis. However, where a cylinder is representing part of the buoy that is not in reality a simple cylinder (for example, we
may represent the pipework and turntable on the deck of a SPAR buoy as an equivalent cylinder) or where the cylinder
is shielded from drag by adjacent structure, then the drag areas should be set accordingly. For example, if the cylinder is
shielded below by another cylinder of diameter d (less than D) then the axial drag area should be reduced by (.d
2
)/4 to
model that shielding.
Set the Drag Force Coefficient based on values given in the literature. For short simple cylinders fully immersed there
are standard values given in the literature (see Barltrop & Adams, 1991, Hoerner,1965 and DNV, 1991). However, the
standard book values do not include energy absorption by wavemaking at the free surface. Strictly, this is a linear term
(forces directly proportional to velocity), but in OrcaFlex this must be done by adjusting the drag coefficients of one or
more cylinders.
The Unit Damping Force data can be set to zero. If you later find that the buoy shows persistent small amplitude
oscillations then you may wish to set a nonzero value to damp this out.
w
347
Set the Drag Area Moments, Drag Moment Coefficients and Unit Damping Moment data. For the normal direction these
data items can usually all be left as zero, providing you have subdivided the buoy into short enough cylinders (since
these terms involve a high power of L, the cylinder length). For the axial direction these data items model the yaw drag
and damping effects, so if this is important to you then set them to model the two main sources, namely skin friction on
the cylinder surface and form drag on any protuberances on the buoy.
Having set up this drag and damping data, it is well worth now running simulations of heave and pitch oscillations and
checking that their rate of decay is reasonable and consistent with any real data you have available.
Discus and CALM Buoys
These types of buoy require different treatment since they have little axial extension. Instead it is their radial extension
that most affects the buoy's pitch properties. As a result the axial discretisation of the buoy into cylinders does not
capture the important effects. For example the pitch damping is often mostly due to radiation damping, i.e. surface wave
generation; this is especially important for a CALM buoy with a skirt.
To deal with this OrcaFlex offers the rotational drag and damping data, but there is little information in the literature to
help in setting up this data. We therefore strongly recommend that you set the data up by calibration against real test
results from model or full scale tests. The easiest information to work with are time history graphs of the buoy heave
and pitch in still water, starting from a displaced position. This will give the heave and pitch natural periods and the
rates of decay and you can adjust the buoy's drag and damping data until you get a good match with this measured
behaviour.
Here is the approach we use:
For the normal direction, set the Drag Area, Drag Force Coefficient and Unit Damping Force as described for Spar
buoys above.
Then set the axial Unit Damping Force to zero and run a simulation that matches the conditions that existed in the
real heave time history results, i.e. with the same initial Z displacement.
Then adjust the axial Drag Area and Drag Force Coefficients until the OrcaFlex buoy's Z time history matches the
real time history. These two data items are simply multiplied together when they are used to calculate the drag
force, so you can give one of the two data items a fixed positive value (e.g. 1) and then adjust the other.
The match will probably be poor in the later parts of the time history, where the heave amplitude has decayed to
small values. This is because the square law drag term is insignificant at small amplitude and instead the damping
force takes over. Therefore we now adjust the axial Unit Damping Force to further improve the match where the
amplitude is small. You may find that this disturbs the match in the large amplitude part, in which case you might
need to readjust the drag data.
For the axial direction, set the Drag Area Moment, Drag Moment Coefficient and Unit Damping Moment as described
for Spar buoys above.
Then set the normal Drag Area Moment, Drag Moment Coefficient and Unit Damping Moment to best match the real
pitch time history, in a similar way to that used above to match the heave time history.
7.10 3D BUOYS
OrcaFlex 3D Buoys are simplified point elements with only 3 degrees of freedom: X, Y and Z. They do not rotate, but
remain aligned with the global axes. They therefore do not have rotational properties and moments on the buoy are
ignored. They should therefore be used only where these limitations are unimportant.
3D Buoys are able to float partsubmerged at the surface, and may also be used independently, with no lines attached.
Although they are much less sophisticated than 6D Buoys, 3D Buoys are easier to use and are convenient for modelling
buoys at line junctions etc.
w

348
B
y
z
x
height/2
height/2
Buoy Axes
always aligned
with Global Axes

Figure: 3D Buoy
7.10.1 Data
Name
Used to refer to the 3D Buoy.
Included in Static Analysis
Determines whether the equilibrium position of the buoy is calculated by the static analysis. See Buoy Degrees of
Freedom Included in Static Analysis.
Initial Position
Specifies the initial position for the buoy origin as coordinates relative to the global axes. If the buoy is not included in
the static analysis then this initial position is taken to be the static position of the buoy. If the buoy is included in the
static analysis, then this initial position is used as an initial estimate of the buoy position and the statics calculation will
move the buoy from this position iteratively until an equilibrium position is found. See Buoy Degrees of Freedom
Included in Static Analysis.
Mass
Volume
Used to calculate buoyancy and added mass.
Bulk Modulus
Specifies the compressibility of the buoy. If the buoy is not significantly compressible, then the Bulk Modulus can be set
to Infinity, which means "incompressible". See Buoyancy Variation.
Height
Used to model floating buoys correctly, where the buoyancy, drag etc. vary according to the depth of immersion. It also
determines the height used to draw the buoy. The Height is the vertical distance over which the fluidrelated forces
change from zero to full force as the buoy pierces the surface. It is taken to be symmetrical about the buoy's origin.
w
349
Seabed Friction Coefficient
OrcaFlex applies Coulomb friction between the buoy and the seabed. The friction force applied never exceeds R where
R is the seabed reaction force and is the friction coefficient.
form.
Contact Area
Used to determine contact forces when the buoy comes in to contact with the seabed and with elastic solids. If a value of
'~' is specified then OrcaFlex uses Volume / Height.
Specifying a value of zero allows you to disable contact for the buoy.
Drag
Drag forces are applied in each of the global axes directions GX, GY and GZ. For each direction you must specify a Drag
Coefficient and Drag Area.
Added Mass
You must specify the added mass coefficient Ca for each global axis direction. The added mass is set to be Ca multiplied
by the mass of water currently displaced. The inertia coefficient, Cm, is set automatically to equal 1+Ca.
The 3D Buoy properties report is available from the popupmenu on the data form. It reports the following:
Weight in air
The force due to gravity acting on the buoy's mass.
Displacement
The weight of water displaced by the buoy's volume. The reported value uses the water density at the sea surface.
Weight in water
These are only reported if the buoy is included in statics.
The static analysis searches for an equilibrium position for the buoy that is a position for which the resultant force on
the buoy is zero. We refer to the resultant force as the out of balance load. Because computers have limited numerical
precision the static analysis cannot always find a configuration where the out of balance load is exactly zero. OrcaFlex
accepts a position as a static equilibrium position if the largest out of balance load component is less than the statics
accuracy.
The Statics force accuracy equals Tolerance * buoy typical force. The buoy typical force is based on the weight in air, the
displacement and the forces applied by connected objects.
precision.
Note: The statics accuracies change during the static analysis because the forces applied by connected
objects vary with the position of the buoy. The statics accuracies reported in Reset state may be quite
different from those used for the final equilibrium position and should be treated as rough
7.10.3 Results
System Modelling Data and Results, Winches
w

350
For 3D Buoys the available variables are:
X,Y and Z
Positions of the buoy origin, relative to global axes.
Velocity, X Velocity, Y Velocity, Z Velocity
Acceleration, X Acceleration, Y Acceleration, Z Acceleration
The magnitude and components (with respect to global axes) of the velocity and acceleration of the buoy.
Surface Z
The global Z coordinate of the sea surface directly above the instantaneous position of the buoy origin.
Dry Length
Length of buoy above the water surface, measured along the buoy z axis. For this purpose, the zextent of a 3D buoy is
assumed to be Height/2 either side of its volume centre.
7.11 WINCHES
Winches provide a way of modelling constant tension or constant speed winches. They connect two (or more) points in
the model by a winch wire, fed from a winch inertia (typically representing a winch drum) that is then driven by a
winch drive (typically representing the winch hydraulics that drive the drum).
As well as connecting its two end points, the winch wire may, optionally, pass via intermediate points, in which case it
does so as if passing over a small frictionless pulley at that point. The wire tension either side of the intermediate point
is then applied to that point; if the point is offset on the object involved then this also gives rise to an applied moment.
Winch Drive Winch Inertia
Drive
Force
f
t t
t
Wire
Tension
t
Winch may pull via
intermediate objects
Winch wire

Figure: Winch Model
Two types of winch are available in OrcaFlex:
Simple Winches
Simple Winches model perfect constant tension or constant speed performance and are easiest to use. It is assumed that
the winch inertia is negligible and the winch drive is perfect, so that it always exactly achieves the requested constant
tension or constant speed. Because of these assumptions, no data needs to be given for the winch inertia or winch drive.
Detailed Winches
Detailed Winches include modelling of the performance of the winch drive system its deadband, stiffness, inertia,
damping and drag but therefore require more data and are harder to set up.
w
351
We recommend using Simple winches unless you know the characteristics of the winch drive system and believe that
its performance significantly differs from the constant tension or speed ideal. In particular, Simple winches are
appropriate:
At the early design stage, when the type of winch to be used has not yet been decided.
If the duty is such that the winch drive will give near to perfect constant tension or constant speed performance.
If the winch drive data are not available.
Winch Control
OrcaFlex winches allow quite complex offshore operations to be modelled. The winch drive can be operated in either of
two modes:
Length Control Mode
For modelling constant speed winches. The winch wire is paid out or hauled in at a velocity specified in the data.
Force Control Mode
For modelling tension controlled winches. Since such winches are usually hydraulic devices whose performance
deviates quite seriously from the target tension ideal, OrcaFlex Winches provides facilities for modelling winch
deadband, damping and drag forces (force decrements proportional to velocity and velocity
2
respectively) and winch
stiffness effects such as those caused by hydraulic accumulators.
The winch can be switched between these two modes at predetermined times during the simulation and the constant
velocity or target tension can also be varied.
7.11.1 Data
Name
Used to refer to the Winch.
Type
May be either Simple or Detailed. See Winches.
Connect to Object and Object Relative Position
The (massless) winch wire connects at least two objects, one at each end of the winch wire.
If more than 2 are specified then the winch wire passes from the first connection point to the last via the intermediate
points specified. When intermediate connections are specified, the winch wire slides freely through these intermediate
points as if passing via small frictionless pulleys mounted there. The winch wire tension on either side then pulls on the
intermediate points, so applying forces and moments (if the points are offset) to the objects concerned.
Each connection is defined by specifying the object connected and the objectrelative position of the connection point.
For connecting to a Line, the objectrelative z coordinate specifies the arc length to the connection point. The z
coordinate specifies the arclength along the Line and this arclength may be measured relative to either End A or End B
as specified by the user. The connection point is attached to the nearest node. The x,y coordinates are ignored.
For Fixed connections the objectrelative coordinates given are the global coordinates of the point.
For connecting to an Anchor, the objectrelative x,y coordinates given are the global X,Y coordinates of the anchor point,
and the zcoordinate is the distance of the anchor above (positive) or below (negative) the seabed at that X,Y position.
For connecting to other objects, the coordinates of the connection point are given relative to the object local frame of
reference.
The winch wire can be released at the start of a given stage of the simulation, by setting this number to the stage
number required. Once released the winch no longer applies any forces to the objects it connects. If no release is
required, then set this item to '~'.
w

352
7.11.2 Wire Properties
Wire Stiffness
Elastic stiffness of the winch wire.
Wire Damping
Material damping value for the winch wire.
Note: The mass of the winch wire is not modelled.
Winch Inertia (Detailed Winches only)
The inertia of the winch drive, which resists changes in the rate of pay out of haul in of the winch wire if the winch is in
Force Control mode. The Winch Inertia has no effect if the winch is in Length Control mode.
This is a linear, rather than rotational, inertia. To represent the rotational inertia of a winch drum, set the winch inertia
to
l / r
2

where
I = drum rotational inertia,
r = radius at which the wire is fed.
Notes: The winch inertia does not contribute to the mass of any objects to which the winch is attached and so
does not directly resist acceleration of any of the connection points. (Such accelerations are resisted
indirectly, of course, through the changes they cause to the winch wire path length and hence to the
winch wire tension.) To include the true translational inertia of the winch drive, drum and wire it is
necessary to suitably increase the masses of the objects to which it is attached.
Setting the winch inertia to a small value to model a low inertia winch can lead to very short natural
periods for the winch system. These then require very short time steps for the simulation, slowing the
simulation. To avoid this, the winch inertia can be set to zero, rather than to a small value; the winch
system inertia is then not modelled at all, but the short natural periods are then avoided. See Winch
Theory for full details of the algorithm used when the winch inertia is zero.
7.11.3 Control
Control Type
Can be either By Stage or Whole Simulation.
When By Stage is selected the winch is controlled on a stage by stage basis. For each stage of the simulation you choose
from the winch control modes. These modes allow you to control the winch payout rate, control the rate of change of
target tension or specify a constant target tension.
Note: The control mode remains fixed for the duration of each stage. Because there is a limit on the number
of stages in an OrcaFlex simulation this can be restrictive.
When Whole Simulation is selected the winch is either tension controlled or length controlled for the whole simulation.
For the tension controlled mode the target tension can be fixed, vary with simulation time or be given by an external
function. Likewise for the length controlled mode the payout rate of unstretched winch wire can be fixed, vary with
simulation time or be given by an external function.
7.11.4 Control by Stage
Winch Control for Statics
For the static analysis, the Mode of the winch drive can be set to one of Specified Length or Specified Tension.
w
353
Specified Length
The winch drive is locked with the unstretched length of winch wire out, L0, being set to the Value specified. The winch
wire tension t then depends on the stretched length L of the winch wire path.
Specified Tension
The winch drive operates in perfect constant tension mode, the tension t being the Value specified. The unstretched
length out L0 is then set to correspond to this tension.
Winch Control for Dynamics
During the simulation the winch is controlled on a stage by stage basis. For each stage the winch control mode can be
set to one of Specified Payout, Specified Payout Rate, Specified Tension, Specified Tension Change or Specified
Tension Rate of Change.
Specified Payout
The Value specifies the unstretched length of winch wire to be paid out (positive) or hauled in (negative) at a constant
rate during this stage. That is, the Value specifies the total change in unstretched length during the stage, so to keep a
constant length set the Value to zero.
Specified Payout Rate
The Value specifies the rate at which the winch wire is to be paid out (positive) or hauled in (negative) during this
stage.
Specified Tension
The Value specifies the target constant tension for this stage.
For Simple winches the winch drive is assumed to always achieve this nominal tension, so the Value is used as the
actual winch wire tension.
For Detailed winches this nominal tension is used as the target tension for the winch drive, which then applies drive
force to the winchinertia to try to achieve this target tension. The algorithm for the winch drive force is designed to
model the characteristics of realworld winches that are nominally "constant tension". See Winch Theory.
Note: Changes of nominal tension are applied instantly at the start of each stage, and this can therefore
apply a shock load which, if large enough, may affect the stability of the simulation.
Specified Tension Change
The Value specifies the change in target tension for this stage. That is, the Value specifies the total change in nominal
tension during the stage, so to keep at a constant nominal tension set the Value to zero.
The above comments for the Specified Tension control method also apply to this method.
Specified Tension Rate of Change
The Value specifies the rate of change in target tension for this stage. That is, the Value specifies the total change in
nominal tension during the stage, so to keep at a constant nominal tension set the Value to zero.
The above comments for the Specified Tension control method also apply to this method.
Note: The Specified Tension Change and Specified Tension Rate of Change modes allow you, for example, to
model a constant tension winch where the tension is determined by an earlier simulation stage. By
specifying a tension change of 0 following a payout stage you can lock the winch at the tension used at
the end of the payout operation.
7.11.5 Control by Whole Simulation
Statics Mode
The winch control data for statics is the same as the data specified in the By Stage control type.
w

354
Dynamics Mode
The winch is controlled either by Specified Tension or by Specified Payout Rate.
If Specified Tension is set then you must also specify the target tension. This value can be fixed, vary with simulation
time or be given by an external function.
If Specified Payout Rate is set then you must also specify the payout rate of unstretched winch wire. This value can be
fixed, vary with simulation time or be given by an external function.
7.11.6 Drive Unit
Note: The drive unit data applies to Detailed Winches only
Winch Drive
The winch drive controls the winch wire in one of two winch control modes Length Control mode ("Specified Length",
"Specified Payout" or "Specified Payout Rate") or Force Control mode ("Specified Tension", "Specified Tension Change"
or "Specified Tension Rate of Change").
Length Control mode is for modelling a constant speed winch. The winch tension then depends simply on the
unstretched length of winch wire out, and the wire properties (Stiffness and Damping).
Force Control mode is for modelling a (nominally) constant tension winch. Because such winches often deviate
quite seriously from the constant tension ideal, facilities are provided for modelling winch Deadband, Damping,
Drag and Stiffness.
Deadband
A deadband of +/ this value is applied to the winch drive force between hauling in and paying out the winch. See Winch
Theory for full details.
Stiffness
This can be used to model, for example, winch hydraulic accumulators. It is the rate at which the zerovelocity winch
force (the drive force applied when the winch is neither hauling in nor paying out) varies with the total unstretched
length of winch wire paid out. See Winch Theory.
Damping Terms A and B
These terms can be used to model damping in a winch's hydraulic drive system. The winch drive force is taken to vary
with haulin/payout velocity at rates A and B, respectively. See Winch Theory.
Drag Terms C and D
These terms can be used to model drag in a winch's hydraulic drive system. The winch drive force is taken to vary with
haulin/payout velocity
2
at rates C and D, respectively. See Winch Theory.
Parameters
7.11.8 Results
For winches the available variables are:
X, Y and Z
The global coordinates of the specified winch connection point.
Tension
The tension in the winch wire.
w
System Modelling Data and Results, Links
355
Length
The unstretched length of winch wire paid out.
Velocity
The rate of pay out of winch wire. Positive value means paying out, negative value means hauling in.
The azimuth and declination angles of the direction of the winch wire between the final 2 connection points, relative to
the global axes. This direction is measured from the last connection point towards the previous connection point.
Declination is in the range 0 to 180. Range jump suppression is applied to Azimuth (so values outside the range 360
to +360 might be reported).
Sea Surface Z
The global Z coordinate of the sea surface directly above the instantaneous position of the winch mount.
Connection Force, Connection GX-Force, Connection GY-Force, Connection GZ-Force
The magnitude and components relative to global axes of the connection force at the specified winch connection point.
We adopt the convention that the force reported is that applied by the winch to the object to which it is connected.
7.12 LINKS
Links are simple spring or spring/damper connections linking two points in the model, for example a node on a line to a
vessel, or a buoy to an anchor. They pull the two points together, or hold them apart, with a force that depends on their
relative positions and velocities.
Links have no mass or hydrodynamic loading and simply apply an equal and opposite force to the two points. They are
useful for modelling items such as wires where the mass and hydrodynamic effects are small and can be neglected; for
example buoy ties can sometimes be modelled using links.
Two types of Link are available:
Tethers
Simple elastic ties that can take tension but not compression. The unstretched length and stiffness of the tether
are specified. The tether remains slack and does not apply a force if the distance between the ends is less than
the unstretched length.
Spring/Dampers
Combined spring and independent damper units. The spring can take both compression and tension and can
have either a linear or a piecewiselinear lengthforce relationship. The damper velocityforce relationship can
also be either linear or piecewiselinear.
Spring-Damper:
Tether:

Figure: Types of Link
w

356
7.12.1 Data
Name
Used to refer to the Link.
Type
may be either:
Tether: a simple elastic tie having linear stiffness and no damping.
Spring/Damper: a combined spring and independent damper, each of which can be either linear or piecewise
linear.
Connect to Object and Object Relative Position
Specifies the objects to be linked.
For connecting to a Line, the objectrelative z coordinate specifies the arc length to the connection point. The z
coordinate specifies the arclength along the Line and this arclength may be measured relative to either End A or End B
as specified by the user. The connection point is attached to the nearest node. The x,y coordinates are ignored.
For Fixed connections the objectrelative coordinates given are the global coordinates of the point.
For connecting to an Anchor, the objectrelative x,y coordinates given are the global X,Y coordinates of the anchor point,
For connecting to other objects, the coordinates of the connection point are given relative to the object local frame of
reference.
The link can be released at the start of a given stage of the simulation, by setting this number to the stage number
required. Once released a link no longer applies any forces to the objects it connects. If no release is required, then set
this item to '~'.
Unstretched Length
Is the unstretched length of the Tether or Spring.
Linear
Both the spring and damper in a Spring/Damper can have either simple linear force characteristics or else a user
specified piecewiselinear force table.
Stiffness
For a tether the tension t depends on its strain and stiffness as follows:
t = k.(LL0)/L0
where
k is the specified Stiffness,
L is the current stretched length between the two ends,
L0 is the specified Unstretched Length.
Tethers remain slack and exert no force if L is less than L0.
For a linear spring in a Spring/Damper the tension (positive) or compression (negative) is given by:
t = k.(LL0)
where
k is the specified Stiffness,
L is the current stretched length between the two ends,
w
357
L0 is the specified Unstretched Length.
The linear spring does not go slack if L is less than L0, but instead goes into compression.
Warning: Please note that this is not the same formula as for tethers.
Damping
A linear damper in a Spring/Damper exerts an extra tension of
t = c.(rate of increase of L)
where
c is the specified Damping,
L is the current stretched length between the two ends.
Piecewise-Linear Force Tables
For a piecewiselinear spring (or damper) the force characteristic is specified as a table of tension against length (or
velocity). The table must be arranged in increasing order of length (velocity) and a negative tension indicates
compression. For a passive damper the tensions specified should therefore normally have the same sign as the
velocities, since otherwise the damper will apply negative damping. For lengths (velocities) between, or outside, those
specified in the table the program will use linear interpolation, or extrapolation, to calculate the tension.
7.12.2 Results
For links the following variables are available:
Tension
The total tension in the link.
Length
The current stretched length of the link.
Velocity
The rate of increase of the stretched length.
The azimuth and declination angles, relative to global axes, of the End A to End B direction of the link.
End A X, End A Y, End A Z, End B X, End B Y and End B Z
The global coordinates of the link.
System Modelling Data and Results, Shapes
w

358
7.13 SHAPES

Figure: Examples of Block, Cylinder and Curved plate shapes
Shapes are simple 3 dimensional geometric objects that can be used to model two distinct things:
1. Elastic solids to model physical obstacles,
2. Trapped water to model moonpools or other areas where fluid motion is suppressed.
You may choose between a number of different basic geometric shapes and several shapes can then be placed together
to defined more complex shapes. The basic shapes available are planes, blocks, cylinders and curved plates.
Elastic solids
An elastic solid represents a physical barrier to the motion of lines and buoys. It is made of a material of a specified
stiffness and resists penetration by applying a reaction force normal to the nearest surface of the elastic solid and
proportional to the depth and speed of penetration of the object into the elastic solid.
Note: Elastic solids do not resist penetration by Vessels, Links, Winches or other Shapes.
Each elastic solid has an associated stiffness, which determines the rate at which the force applied to an object increases
with the area of contact and depth of penetration into the elastic solid. The stiffness is the force per unit area of contact
per unit depth of penetration.
Contact with elastic solids can model friction. Friction coefficients are specified on the Solid Friction Coefficients data
form.
Where an object interacts with more than one elastic solid simultaneously, the force acting on it is the sum of the
individual forces from each elastic solid.
Note: A elastic solid with zero stiffness has no effect on the rest of the model. Such shapes can be useful for
drawing reference marks on the 3D views, without affecting the behaviour of the model.
w
359
Trapped water
Trapped water can be used to model hydrodynamic shielding i.e. areas such as moonpools, the inside of spars or
behind breakwaters, where wave and current effects are suppressed.
Inside a trapped water shape the fluid motion is calculated as if the fluid was moving with the shape. So if the trapped
water shape is fixed then no fluid motion occurs in the shape this could be used to model a breakwater. But if the shape
is connected to a moving vessel, for example, then the trapped water is assumed to move with the vessel this could be
used to model a moonpool.
Note: Objects ignore any trapped water shapes which are connected to that particular object. If this wasn't
done then if you connected a trapped water shape to a buoy and part of the buoy was in the trapped
water shape then a feedback would occur (the buoy motion determines the motion of the shape, which
in turn would affect the fluid forces on the buoy and hence its motion). Such feedback is undesirable so
the buoy ignores any trapped water shapes that are connected to it.
7.13.1 Data
Name
Used to refer to the shape.
Type
Either Elastic Solid or Trapped Water.
Shape
Can be one of Block, Cylinder, Curved Plate or Plane.
Connection
Can be Fixed, Anchored or connected to another object (Vessels, 3D Buoys or 6D Buoys).
Position
Each shape has position data. For blocks it is named Origin, for cylinders and curved plates it is named End Position
and for planes it is named Point on Plane.
This point is taken as the origin of the shape's local x,y,z axes.
For Fixed connections this is the global position of the point.
For Anchored connections the objectrelative x,y coordinates given are the global X,Y coordinates of the anchor point,
For connections to other objects, the coordinates of the connection point are given relative to the object local frame of
reference.
Pens and Number of Lines
Each surface of the solid is drawn as a wire frame using one the specified pens. To aid visualisation, the Outside pen is
used if the surface is being viewed from the outside of the solid, and the Inside pen is used if it is being viewed from the
inside.
The Number of Lines determines how many lines are used in the wire frames a larger value gives a more realistic
picture, but takes a little longer to draw.
Data for Elastic Solids
Normal Stiffness
This is the reaction force that the solid applies per unit depth of penetration per unit area of contact. Stiffness may be set
to zero, giving a solid that is drawn but which has no effect on the other objects in the system.
Shear Stiffness
The Shear Stiffness is used by the friction calculation. A value of '~' results in the Normal Stiffness being used.
w

360
Damping
The percentage of critical damping for the elastic solid. Damping is always zero when using the implicit integration
scheme.
See Shape Theory for technical details.
7.13.2 Blocks
Block Position B
x
y
z
y-size
x-size
z-size

A Block shape is a rectangular cuboid, defined by giving:
Size
This defines the block's dimensions in its local x, y and z directions. With respect to its local axes, the block occupies the
volume x=0 to Size(x), y=0 to Size(y), z=0 to Size(z).
Orientation
This is defined by giving three rotation angles, Rotation 1, 2 and 3, that define its orientation relative to the object to
which the block is attached, or else relative to global axes if it is not attached to another object. For example, if the block
is attached to an object with local axes Lxyz, then the 3 rotations define the orientation of the block axes Bxyz as follows.
First align the block with the local axes of the object to which it is attached, so that Bxyz are in the same directions as
Lxyz. Then apply Rotation 1 about Bx (=Lx), followed by Rotation 2 about the new By direction, and finally Rotation 2
about the new (and final) Bz direction.
w
361
7.13.3 Cylinders
r
r = Inner Radius
R = Outer Radius
R
End 1 Position
End 2 Position

A cylinder shape is a thick walled hollow pipe defined by giving:
Inner and Outer Radii.
Length.
Azimuth and Declination of the axis.
The azimuth and declination define the direction of the axis relative to the local axes of the object to which the end is
connected. For objects that rotate, such as vessels and 6D buoys, the axis direction therefore rotates with the object. For
Fixed or Anchored ends it is defined relative to global axes.
Cylinders are drawn using circles to represent the end faces and a number of rectangular facets to represent around the
curved surfaces. The number of facets used is the Number of Lines specified; 2 gives a very simple wire frame profile of
the cylinder, whilst a very large number gives a pseudoopaque cylinder at the expense of drawing speed.
If the Inner Radius is zero then a solid disc is formed. If the Outer Radius is very large (>1.0e15) then it is treated as
infinite.
If the cylinder is an elastic solid then reaction forces are applied:
Radially inwards if an object comes into contact with the inner curved surface.
Radially outwards if an object comes into contact with the outer curved surface.
Normally outwards if an object comes into contact with one of the end faces.
w

362
7.13.4 Curved Plates

Figure: Some example curved plate shapes
Curved plate shapes are particularly suited to modelling bellmouths although they are not restricted to this application.
The curved plate shape is similar to the cylinder. It differs in that the radius of the shape can vary smoothly between the
ends. Curved plates can be either filled in or hollow.
Shape is hollow
If ticked then the shape is hollow and has both inner and outer surfaces. The middle picture above is not hollow
whereas the other two are.
Orientation
This is defined by giving three rotation angles, Azimuth, Declination and Gamma, that define its orientation relative to
the object to which the curved plate is attached, or else relative to global axes if it is not attached to another object. For
example, if the curved plate is attached to an object with local axes Lxyz, then the 3 rotations define the orientation of
the curved plate axes Pxyz as follows. First align the block with the local axes of the object to which it is attached, so that
Pxyz are in the same directions as Lxyz. Then apply Azimuth about Pz (=Lz), followed by Declination about the new Py
direction, and finally Gamma about the new (and final) Pz direction.
Included Angle of Revolution
The curved plate is a solid of revolution. A value of 360 gives a complete revolution as shown in the first 2 pictures
above. Other values can be used to model partial or cutaway curved plates for example the rightmost picture above
has an included angle of 90.
Thickness
If the shape is hollow then this data item specifies the wall thickness. This thickness specifies the thickness normal to
the shape's axis or centreline.
Note: You may need to specify an artificially large value for thickness in order to avoid objects passing
through the shape's wall during the static calculation.
Profile
A table specifying the variation of radius with distance along the shape's axis or centreline. The radius is the normal
distance from the axis to the surface. Cubic spline interpolation is used to generate a smooth profile. If the shape is
hollow then the profile defines the radius to the inner surface. If the shape is not hollow then the profile defines the
radius to the outer surface.
w
363
7.13.5 Planes
Direction of
Maximum Slope
Slope
Point on Plane

A plane shape is an infinite plane surface one side of the plane is outside and the other is inside. The position of the
plane is defined by specifying a Point on Plane through which it passes.
The angle of the plane is specified by giving its (maximum) Slope Angle and Slope Direction, relative to the object to
which it is connected, as follows.
For a fixed or anchored shape, the Slope Angle is specified by giving the angle of elevation of the line of maximum
slope, relative to the global XY plane (i.e. relative to the horizontal). A Slope Angle of 90 is therefore a vertical
plane. The Slope Direction is specified as the direction of the line of maximum upwards slope, relative to global axes.
For example a plane having a Slope Angle of 30 and a Slope Direction of 90 slopes upwards in the positive Y
direction at 30 to the horizontal.
For a shape connected to another object, the Slope Angle and Slope Direction are relative to the object's local xy
plane. For example with a Slope Angle of 30 and a Slope Direction of 90, the plane slopes upwards in the positive y
direction at 30 to the object's local xy plane.
A plane with zero slope angle is therefore parallel to the xy plane of the object to which it is connected, or parallel to the
global XY plane (i.e. horizontal) in the case of a Fixed or Anchored plane.
The 'inside' of a plane is on the negative z side (i.e. below for a Fixed or Anchored plane) if the Slope Angle is in the
range 90 to +90, and on the positive z side (i.e. above for a Fixed or Anchored plane) otherwise.
Planes are drawn as a rectangular grid, with the specified Number of Lines, using a spacing determined by the view
size. Planes extend to infinity in all directions, but only a part of the infinite plane local to the view centre is shown on
the 3D view.
7.13.6 Drawing
Wire frame drawing
Representation of shapes in the wire frame drawing mode can be confusing. OrcaFlex does not provide hiddenline
removal so shape objects are displayed by simple wireframe drawings. You may exercise control over the display by
selecting the number of lines drawn for each object, and the sequence in which they are drawn. For pen details, see How
Objects Are Drawn.
Where it is necessary to keep the display simple you should set Number of Lines to 2 for blocks and cylinders. If the
number of lines is set large for blocks or cylinders they appear as solid objects, although they may take a long time to
draw.
For planes you can control how they are drawn with the Grid Density data item. This is specified in terms of the length
of the scale bar on the 3D view. A density of d means that there are d lines per scale bar length, so higher density values
give a finer grid (but takes longer to draw).
Please note also that the Number of Lines only affects the drawing, and not the calculations (which are correctly
performed with curved geometry). Planes and Blocks are drawn first, and then Cylinders, but otherwise the solids in the
model are drawn in the sequence that they were created. You can sometimes take advantage of this, by defining
w

364
background shapes before foreground ones, to obtain a pseudohidden line effect. You are encouraged to experiment,
but simplicity is best.
Hint: Although the program provides depth clues to the eye by drawing rear faces in a different colour, the
eye can sometimes be fooled by the picture - try rotating the view back and forth a few times.
Shaded Drawing
By default, for shaded 3D Views, shapes are drawn as solid objects using the specified geometry.
Shaded Drawing Origin is provided because the shaded drawing and the shape may have different origins. The Shaded
Drawing Origin defines the origin of the shaded drawing with respect to the shape's local axis system. Similarly Shaded
Drawing Orientation allows you to reorient the shaded drawing to match the shape's axis system.
Shaded Drawing Plane Translucency (only available for planes)
Controls how translucent the plane appears in the Shaded Graphics mode. A value of 0% gives a solid surface and all
objects behind the surface will not be visible. A value of 100% specifies transparency and leads to a completely see
through surface.
Note: This data item is not used if an imported 3D model is used to draw the shape.
7.13.7 Results
Contact Force, Contact X-Force, Contact Y-Force and Contact Z-Force
The magnitude and components (in global axes directions) of the total force applied by an elastic solid to other objects
in the model. These variables are only available for elastic solids.
X, Y, Z
The global coordinates of the shape origin.
Velocity, GX-Velocity, GY-Velocity, GZ-Velocity,
The magnitude and components (with respect to global axes) of the velocity and acceleration of the shape origin.
w
System Modelling Data and Results, All Objects Data Form
365
7.14 ALL OBJECTS DATA FORM
The All Objects Data Form allows you to view or edit data for all the objects in the model on a single form. This is
particularly useful for simulataneous viewing or editing of properties of multiple objects. The form can be opened using
the model browser.
There are two modes of operation: Connections or Other data.
Connections
The Connections mode allows you to edit connection specific data for all Lines, Links and Winches in the model. You
can choose to filter which object types appear in the list each object type (Lines, Links or Winches) can be included or
excluded from the list. The connections can be sorted either in object name order or in connection number order.
Positions and Connections pages
The Positions and Connections pages allow you to view or edit all the connection data. This is the same data as on the
individual data forms and includes the following data items:
The positions (as Cartesian coordinates) relative to the frame of reference of the object to which the connection is
attached.
For Links and Winches connected to a line, the reference line end (either End A or End B) for the z coordinate.
Height above seabed for anchored line ends.
Connection orientation and stiffnesses for line ends.
Release stage for line ends.
Polar Coordinates page
The Polar Coordinates page provides a way of viewing or setting the positions of the connections using polar
coordinates, relative to a choice of frames of reference. This facility is useful for cases, for example mooring arrays,
where a series of connections need to be laid out around a circle.
The polar coordinates (R, , Z) are those of the connection position relative to the selected polar coordinates frame of
reference (see below). The Cartesian coordinates of the connection, relative to the same reference frame, are (Rcos(),
Rsin(), Z).
On the other hand, the Object Relative Position data are the Cartesian coordinates of the connection relative to the frame
of reference of the object to which it is connected.
OrcaFlex keeps the two sets of coordinates synchronised, so if you change one then the other is automatically updated to
match. If you change any other data then the Cartesian Object Relative Position coordinates are taken to be the master
data and so left unchanged, and the polar coordinates are updated to match.
You have a quite a lot of flexibility to choose what reference frame you want for the polar coordinates. The reference
frame has its origin at your chosen Reference Origin and has its axes are parallel to those of your chosen Reference
Axes.
For the reference origin you can choose between:
The global origin.
The point on the seabed that is directly below the global origin. This is only available if a connection point is
anchored.
The origin of the frame of reference of any connected object.
The position of the other end of the object available for Lines and Links only..
And for the reference axes directions you can choose between:
The global axes directions.
The axes directions of the frame of reference of any connected object.
System Modelling Data and Results, All Objects Data Form
w

366
Example of Using Polar Coordinates
The choices of reference frame for the polar coordinates may seem complex at first sight, but they allow various useful
coordinate transformations to be done easily and accurately. Here is an example.
Consider mooring a spar with an array of 4 lines, each of which has End A connected to the spar and End B anchored.
Suppose you want to place the A ends of the lines so that they are evenly spaced circumferentially around the spar, all at
radius 5m from the spar axis and all 3m below the spar origin. To do this easily, first sort into Connection order so that
all the End A connections are grouped together. Then, for the first line, set the reference frame origin and axes to be the
spar origin and spar axes and set its polar coordinates to be R=5, and Z=3. You can now use copy/paste or fill down to
set all the other A ends to the same reference origin, axes and R and Z coordinates. Finally you can set the coordinates
for the A ends to 0, 90, 180 and 270.
Similarly, suppose you want the End B connections to be anchored to the seabed, with the anchors again evenly spaced
circumferentially, and with each line spanning 200m horizontally. The easiest reference frame for this is with the
reference origin being End A and the reference axes being the spar axes. The coordinates should again be set to 0, 90,
180 and 270 and the R coordinates set to 200m. But this time, to set the vertical positions of the B ends, it is easier
(especially if the seabed is sloping) to go to the Connections page and set Connect To Object to be Anchored and then
go to the Positions page and set the Object Relative Position z coordinate to zero.
Other data
The Other data mode presents tables of data for Vessels, Lines, 6D Buoys, 3D Buoys, Links, Winches and Shapes. The
tables are laid out with each row containing related data for a single object. The notable exception is the Line sections
page in which each row contains data for a single section of a Line.
This tabulation allows data for multiple objects to be set in an efficient and coordinated way. The copy/paste or fill
down keyboard shortcuts are particularly useful here. Another useful technique is to build a table of data in Excel with
identical layout of columns and rows. This allows you to make use of Excel's formulae and data handling facilities to
prepare data, and then to paste it into OrcaFlex in a single operation.
w
Fatigue Analysis, All Objects Data Form
367
8 FATIGUE ANALYSIS
The OrcaFlex fatigue analysis carries out fatigue analysis based on regular or irregular wave simulations. It extracts line
load results from a series of prerun simulation files, calculates the resulting pipe stresses and then calculates the
fatigue damage.
Note: For an example of an OrcaFlex fatigue analysis see J04 Fatigue Analysis.
Warning: The fatigue analysis uses the stress results which assume a pipe made of a straight, uniform,
homogeneous, linear material.
Three types of fatigue analysis can be performed:
Deterministic regular wave fatigue analysis.
Deterministic irregular wave fatigue analysis using the rainflow cycle counting method.
Stochastic irregular wave fatigue analysis using spectral methods.
The fatigue analysis tool is run by selecting the Fatigue Analysis command from the OrcaFlex Results menu. It is
essentially a selfcontained subprogram within OrcaFlex, with its own menus, data and results. Any OrcaFlex process
active in the main window is paused until the Fatigue Analysis data form is closed. The Fatigue Analysis has no effect on
existing OrcaFlex data.
The steps involved in doing a fatigue analysis are:
1. Use the normal OrcaFlex facilities to set up and run simulations that model the various load cases that the line will
experience.
2. Open the fatigue analysis tool and set up the fatigue analysis data. This fatigue analysis data is held separately from
the other OrcaFlex data and can be saved in a separate Fatigue Analysis File with the file extension .ftg.
3. Check the data for errors.
4. Calculate the stresses and damage.
Note: The Calculate stage of a fatigue analysis can take a long time , especially a rainflow analysis with a lot
of load cases. To help with this there is an Estimate Calculation Time facility and fatigue analyses can
be run in batch mode.
Load Cases
Before the Fatigue Analysis can be performed you must first prepare a set of OrcaFlex simulation files that model the
same system but under the various load conditions that the system will experience in its lifetime.
The approach is to divide the range of sea states that the system will experience into a number of wave classes
typically this is done with a wave scatter table.
For both regular and rainflow analysis you typically represent each wave class with a distinct OrcaFlex simulation file.
For regular analysis the simulation should use a regular wave representative of the wave class and for rainflow analysis
the simulation should use an irregular wave representative of the wave class.
For spectral analysis multiple wave classes with similar Hs values may be represented by a single response calculation
simulation. The reason this is possible is that the spectral response analysis provides information about how the system
responds to a range of wave frequencies. Typically you will have a range of simulations which cover the range of Hs
values in your wave scatter table.
Each load case is assigned an exposure level. For regular load cases this is the total number of occurrences of waves
within the class and for rainflow and spectral load cases this is the total time exposed to waves within the class.
Fatigue Analysis, Commands
w

368
8.1 COMMANDS
File Menu
New
Clears previously entered Fatigue Analysis data, and, where relevant, resets data to default values.
Open
Open a Fatigue Analysis file (.ftg).
Save
Save the data to the currently selected file name (shown in title bar of the window).
Save As
This is the same as Save, but allows you to specify the file name to save to.
Most Recent Files List
List of the most recently used files. Selecting an item on the list causes the file to be loaded. The size of the list can be
adjusted from the Preferences form.
Analysis Menu
Estimate Calculation Time
Gives an estimate of how long it will take to do the fatigue analysis and present the results. This is useful for long
analyses, e.g. rainflow analyses involving a lot of cases or long simulations.
Check
The Check command performs a preliminary check of the fatigue analysis data. For example it checks that all the
specified load case simulation files exist and that the named line and the specified arc length intervals exist in each load
case.
The Check command is generally much quicker that the fatigue analysis itself, so we recommend that the Check
command is used before the Fatigue Analysis is run, since the check can often detect data errors that would otherwise
only be found part way through what may be quite a long fatigue analysis. It is particularly important to use the Check
command when a new fatigue analysis has been first set up or when significant changes have been made to the data.
Calculate
The Calculate command starts the Fatigue Analysis. The fatigue analysis can take a long time if there are many load
cases, or if there are many log samples in the load case simulations, or finally if there are a lot of segments in the arc
length intervals specified. A progress window is displayed and you can cancel the analysis if desired.
When the calculation is complete the results are displayed in a spreadsheet window.
8.2 DATA
Title
Used to label all output of the fatigue analysis.
Analysis Type
Three types of fatigue analysis are available:
w
Fatigue Analysis, Common Load Cases Data
369
Regular analysis must be based on a series of regular wave simulations that represent the various load cases that
will occur. For each of these load cases a singleoccurrence damage value is calculated based on the last wave cycle
in the simulation. This damage value is then scaled up by the specified number of cycles expected to occur during
the structure's life, and this gives the total load case damage value. Finally these total load case damage values are
then summed for each load case to give the overall total damage.
Rainflow analysis is normally based on a series of random wave simulations. It uses a cycle counting technique to
break down each random wave case into a series of half cycles, and then sums the damage from each half cycle
according to the PalmgrenMiner law. For details see the book by Maddox and the paper by Rychlik. This gives the
damage value for that load case, which is then scaled to the specified total exposure time. Finally these total load
case damage values are then summed for each load case to give the overall total damage.
Spectral analysis calculates damage in the frequency domain using statistical methods. The method requires a
power spectral density function (PSD) for a particular stress variable. The PSD is obtained by from a response
calculation simulation. This calculates RAOs for the stress variables of interest and these are then combined with
the load case wave spectrum to give PSDs for stress. These PSDs are then used to calculate damage using either
Dirlik's formula or the Rayleigh distribution. The damage is scaled to the specified total exposure time for the load
case. Finally these total load case damage values are then summed for each load case to give the overall total
damage.
Units
The units to be used for the fatigue analysis, for both the fatigue analysis data and for its results. The units are specified
in the same way as elsewhere in OrcaFlex.
Note that the units specified for the fatigue analysis need not match the units that were used in the various load case
simulation files. If they do not match, then the stress results from that simulation file will automatically be converted to
the units specified for the fatigue analysis. This is useful, since it allows the fatigue analysis to be done using m and MN
as the length and force units (giving stresses in MN/m
2
= MPa), for example, even if the simulation load cases use m and
kN (which corresponds to stresses in kN/m
2
= kPa). Similarly, in US units, the fatigue analysis can use inches (giving
stresses in ksi) even if the simulation files use feet as the length unit.
If you change units, then all existing fatigue analysis data is automatically changed to match the new units. This is useful
if you want to enter data in some other set of units, since you can simply change to the units of the new data, then enter
the new data, and then change back to the original units again.
Stress Range Distribution (spectral analysis only)
The spectral fatigue calculation assumes that stress ranges follow a statistical distribution which is specified by this data
item. The distribution can be either Dirlik's formula or the Rayleigh distribution. The Rayleigh distribution is
appropriate if the variation of stress is a narrow banded random Gaussian process. Dirlik's formula is applicable even if
the variation of stress is not a narrow banded process. For this reason we recommend using Dirlik's formula.
Output detailed load case tables
If this option is deselected then the detailed load case worksheets are omitted from the fatigue results. This can
significantly reduce the time required to generate the results.
8.3 COMMON LOAD CASES DATA
The Load Cases data page specifies the load cases which are to be analysed.
Add Load Case(s), Remove Load Case(s)
The Add Load Case(s) button is used to add load cases to the Fatigue Analysis. You select which OrcaFlex simulation
files represent the load cases and extra rows are added to the load case table. The Remove Load Case(s) button
removes the currentlyselected load case(s) from the load case table.
Simulation File Name
The name of the simulation file which represents the load case. The file name can either be typed in or else set by using
the Add Load Case button. If you type it in you can either specify the full path or a relative path.
Fatigue Analysis, Load Cases Data for Regular Analysis
w

370
Line Name
The name, in this load case simulation file, of the line to be analysed.
Note: Normally the line name will be the same in all of the load cases (though this is not necessary). However
the named lines in the various load cases must, of course, all represent the same physical line. And they
must also have the same segmentation in the areas being analysed.
8.4 LOAD CASES DATA FOR REGULAR ANALYSIS
Number of Cycles
The number of wave cycles, of this particular set of load conditions, that the line will experience.
8.5 LOAD CASES DATA FOR RAINFLOW ANALYSIS
Simulation Period
The period of the prerun simulation file that defines the load case.
Exposure Time
The total time the system is exposed to this load case.
8.6 LOAD CASES DATA FOR SPECTRAL ANALYSIS
Exposure Time
The total time the system is exposed to this load case.
Spectral Form, Spectral Parameters
For spectral analysis the simulation file specifies a response calculation simulation file from which stress RAOs are
derived. The spectral fatigue calculation then proceeds by combining these RAOs with a wave spectrum to produce
stress power spectral density (PSD) functions.
Spectral Form can be one of JONSWAP, ISSC, OchiHubble or Torsethaugen. This specifies the general form of the wave
spectrum.
The parameters for the chosen spectral form are specified as follows:
If JONSWAP is selected then Spectral Parameters can be either Automatic, Partially Specified or Fully
Specified. This determines exactly how the spectral parameters for each load case are specified. For example, if
Automatic is selected then you specify Hs and Tz and the other JONSWAP parameters are calculated automatically
and reported. For details see Data for JONSWAP and ISSC Spectra.
If ISSC is selected then you must specify Hs and Tz for each load case. You can also specify fm or Tp but since Tz, Tp
and fm are tied together then setting any one of them changes the other two to match. For details see Data for
JONSWAP and ISSC Spectra.
If Ochi-Hubble is selected then Spectral Parameters can be either Automatic, or Specified. Again, this
determines exactly how the spectral parameters for each load case are specified. If you select Automatic the
program calculates the parameters of the most probable spectrum, based on the overall significant wave height Hs
that you have specified. If you select Specified you must specify all 6 parameters and OrcaFlex then derives and
displays the corresponding overall Hs and Tz values. For details see Data for OchiHubble Spectrum.
If Torsethaugen is selected then you must specify Hs and Tp for each load case. You can also specify fm but since Tp
and fm are tied together then setting either one changes the other to match. For details see Data for Torsethaugen
Spectrum.
Setting up load cases for Spectral Analysis
When performing a spectral fatigue analysis you will typically have a wave scatter table describing the relative
probability of storm occurrence. This determines a number of wave classes, e.g. storms defined by Hs,Tz pairs.
w
Fatigue Analysis, Load Cases Data for Spectral Analysis
371
The load cases data should be setup to match load cases with wave classes. For example, suppose that you were working
with the following (truncated) wave scatter table:
4-5 9 3
3-4 6 18 6
Hs 2-3 22 132 117
1-2 3 57 201 249
0-1 15 48 69 45
4-5 5-6 6-7 7-8
Tz
The values in the table represent joint probabilities in parts per thousand, so that a value of 201 represents a probability
of 0.201.
This wave scatter table gives 16 wave classes and so the fatigue analysis data in OrcaFlex would be setup with 16
corresponding load cases with appropriate Hs and Tz values.
Simulation files for spectral fatigue analysis load cases
The simulation files used to represent a load case for spectral fatigue analysis should model all aspects of the system and
environment other than the wave spectrum. So you must specify vessel offset, current profile and direction, wave
direction and so on which are appropriate for the load case being analysed.
The wave type for the load case simulation file must be response calculation. This effectively calculates system
responses (i.e. RAOs) for a range of wave frequencies. The spectral fatigue analysis then combines these RAOs with the
load case wave spectra (i.e. the Hs,Tz pairs) to produce fatigue damage estimates for the load case.
Choice of Hs for response calculation simulation files
The Spectral Response Analysis method which is used to calculate system responses (RAOs) includes nonlinear effects
such as hydrodynamic drag. In order for these nonlinear effects to be well modelled the choice of Hs for the response
calculation simulation files is important. Essentially the RAOs can be considered as being dependent on wave height.
How significant this dependence is will vary from case to case. Certain systems are dominated by linear physical effects
and the RAOs may not in fact be dependent on wave height. To determine how significant this effect is we would
recommend sensitivity studies.
In the example above we might choose to run a response calculation simulation for each row of the wave scatter table
(assuming that the system had significant nonlinearities). This would give 5 simulation files for Hs ranges 01, 12, 23,
34 and 45. There are 4 wave classes corresponding to the 01 Hs range. The load case corresponding to each of these
wave classes would then be represented by the same simulation file. The other Hs ranges are dealt with similarly and so
the load cases table would look as below:
Fatigue Analysis, Stress Components Data
w

372

Figure: Example load cases table
If the nonlinearities in the system are not so significant then you may be able to obtain accurate results with fewer
simulation files. This may be desirable to reduce the amount of time taken to run the simulations. For example the Hs1,
Hs2 and Hs3 simulations could be combined into a single Hs2 simulation etc. Again, the accuracy of such a simplification
should be tested with sensitivity studies.
Response calculation simulation duration
The other decision to make is over the length of the response calculation simulations. You need to simulate for long
enough to get accurate results. As for the issue of Hs discussed above we would recommend using sensitivity studies to
determine how long is required.
8.7 STRESS COMPONENTS DATA
Stress components to be analysed
Specifies which stress components are included in the fatigue analysis results. The fatigue calculation is quicker if fewer
stress components are analysed so this feature can help you to reduce calculation times. The worst damage is usually
due to ZZ stress so you may choose only to analyse this component to speed up the calculation.
OrcaFlex calculates damage for each of the selected principal stress components RR stress, CC stress and ZZ stress and
then the worst of these damage values is reported. If you choose to exclude one of these principal components then the
damage calculation will not take into account damage due to that stress component.
Note: Please exercise caution when excluding stress components from the fatigue analysis. You must be sure
that any excluded stress components do not dominate damage in the system being analysed.
w
Fatigue Analysis, Analysis Data
373
8.8 ANALYSIS DATA
The Analysis Data page contains the following data items, which specify the parts of the line to be analysed.
Critical Damage
Is a warning level. If the total damage at any fatigue point exceeds the Critical Damage then that damage figure will be
highlighted in the results.
Number of Thetas
The number of theta values (N) around the pipe circumference, at which fatigue analysis will be performed. There will
be N fatigue points uniformly distributed at 360/N intervals around the pipe outer circumference, and the same
number similarly distributed around the inner circumference. A larger number of thetas gives a more comprehensive
analysis, but takes a little longer.
Arc Length Intervals
You define the parts of the line that are to be analysed by specifying a number of nonoverlapping Arc Length Intervals
in the form of From and To arc length values. OrcaFlex will analyse crosssections at each line end and midsegment
whose arc length S is in the range From <= S < To. Note that OrcaFlex therefore won't include a line end or midsegment
whose arc length S exactly equals To; to include it specify an arc length a little beyond.
For simple cases you can use just one arc length interval covering the whole line. However it is often clear which part, or
parts, of the line are liable to fatigue problems, and it is then useful to be selective and only analyse those parts of the
line. This both speeds up the analysis and also reduces the quantity of results that you need to examine.
Warning: The included arc lengths must be the same in each load case, so the line to be analysed should have the
same number and distribution of segments in each of the load case simulations.
Stress Concentration Factor (S.C.F.)
When the maximum stress range is used with the SN curve to calculate damage, that maximum stress range is first
scaled by the Stress Concentration Factor. If no stress concentration is required then the S.C.F. should be set to 1.
This factor enables you to allow for special situations, where the assumption that the line is a simple pipe made of a
homogeneous material does not hold. For example, at weld joints the stress tends to be more concentrated than for the
rest of the pipe and so fatigue failure is more likely in such areas. The default value is 1.
Notes: The stresses reported in the results have not been scaled by the S.C.F. This factor is only applied when
the maximum stress range S is used with the S-N curve to calculate damage.
To use different stress concentration factors for different parts of the line, you will need to specify
separate arc length intervals for those parts.
S-N Curve
Specifies which SN curve is used for damage calculations in this arc length interval.
8.9 S-N CURVES
An SN curve defines the number of cycles to failure, N(S), when a material is repeatedly cycled through a given stress
range S. OrcaFlex uses the SN curve to calculate the damage in a fatigue analysis.
If needed you can define a number of different SN curves and use them at different arc lengths along a line. This enables
you to handle cases where different parts of the line are made up of different materials.
With each SN curve you must also specify an associated stress fatigue limit, FL, which is the stress range below which
no damage occurs. This is sometimes referred to as the endurance limit.
The SN curve itself can be specified either by parameters or by a table.
When the curve is defined by parameters the user specifies two parameters, A and b, and the curve is then given by
either of the following equivalent formulae:
Fatigue Analysis, Integration Parameters
w

374
N = 10^A / S^b
Log10(N) = A b Log10(S)
When the curve is specified by a table the user gives a table of corresponding values of S and N. For other values of S we
use log linear interpolation or extrapolation to find the value of N.
For details of how the SN curve is used to calculate the damage see How Damage is Calculated.
The Graph button displays the selected SN curve on a loglog graph.
S-N Curve Units
The SN curve parameters entered must be consistent with the fatigue analysis units. SN curve parameters are typically
quoted with respect to stresses in MPa, but you might be doing the fatigue analysis using some other stress units. You
can handle this problem as follows. First change the fatigue analysis units and set the units system to be 'User', the
length units to be 'mm' and the force units to be 'N'. This corresponds to stresses in MPa, so you can then enter the SN
parameters in terms of MPa. Finally, restore the units to those that you want for the fatigue analysis. The parameters
will automatically be converted to allow for the change in units.
Changing units
The way the SN curve parameters A and b alter when you change units is not intuitively obvious. If you need to know
the formulae, then recall that the SN curve for deriving N (the number of cycles to failure) is given by:
Log10(N) = A b.Log10(S) (1)
If we now change units then the stress value S changes to S' = c.S, where c is how many new stress units equal one old
stress unit. Let A' and b' be the new SN curve parameters, using the new units. Then equation (1) becomes:
Log10(N) = A' b'.Log10(S')
which leads to:
Log10(N) = A' b'.Log10(c.S) = [A' b'.Log10(c)] b'.Log10(S) (2)
Comparing equations (1) and (2) we see that b'=b and A'=[A+b.Log10(c)].
8.10 INTEGRATION PARAMETERS
Integration parameters are only available when the spectral fatigue analysis option is selected. Normally you should not
need to modify the parameters from their default values. However, if the spectral fatigue calculation has problems with
convergence then it may prove productive to try different values for these parameters.
We recommend that you contact Orcina for further details should you encounter problems with spectral fatigue
convergence.
8.11 RESULTS
The Fatigue Analysis results are presented in a spreadsheet that has one Damage Tables worksheet, plus one Load
Case worksheet for each load case. There is also a worksheet echoing the SN curve data.
Load Case Worksheets
The Load Case worksheets contain the derived stress results for each fatigue point that has been analysed, together
with general information such as the environmental data that applied to that load case.
There is one table of stress results for each arc length covered by the specified arc length intervals. Each such table
contains a row of results for each fatigue point in that arc length crosssection. These results are the stress ranges (for
each of the stress components), the maximum stress range and the resulting load case damage values.
The maximum von Mises stress is also reported (if selected), but note that this value has no effect on the damage
calculation. The load case reports also include details of where on the line the worst damage occurred.
These detailed worksheets can be omitted by deselecting the Output detailed load case tables option. This can
significantly reduce the time required to generate the results.
w
Fatigue Analysis, Fatigue Points
375
Damage Table Worksheet
The Damage Tables worksheet starts with an Excessive Damage table, which lists any fatigue points at which the overall
total damage has exceeded the specified critical damage value (which is displayed in the table title). Details of where on
the line the worst total damage occurred are also reported.
There then follows a table summarising the Other Stresses table, which reports the maximum and minimum direct
stress (i.e. any of the diagonal terms in the stress matrix) and the maximum and minimum shear stress (i.e. the off
diagonal terms) at any of the fatigue points. The largest offdiagonal stress values should be checked to ensure that they
are small compared to the direct (i.e. diagonal) stresses see the note in How Damage is Calculated. This table also
reports the maximum von Mises stress.
Finally, the Damage Tables worksheet provides damage tables for each arc length crosssection analysed. These report,
for each fatigue point in the crosssection, the total exposure damage value from each load case and the overall total
damage.
In all of the damage tables, overall total damage values that exceed the specified critical damage value are highlighted in
red.
Printing and Exporting
To save the results you will need to export the spreadsheet as an Excel worksheet. If you want to print the results then
for best results you should first export them and then use Excel to do the printing.
Note: There is no facility to print the fatigue analysis data, but the data is echoed in the fatigue results
spreadsheet.
8.12 FATIGUE POINTS
Fatigue is analysed at a number of line end and midsegment crosssections along the line, as specified by defining Arc
Length Intervals in the Analysis Data.
Each included arc length defines a crosssection through the pipe. Each such section is then discretised, in polar
coordinates (R, Theta), using a userspecified Number of Theta angles, and using two rvalues one at the line's stress ID
and one at the line's stress OD. Theta is measured from the line's local xaxis towards its yaxis, as indicated in the figure
below, which shows the fatigue points that will be analysed when the number of theta angles is set to 8, giving fatigue
points at theta = 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270 and 315 degrees.
x (Theta=0)
y
Stress ID
Stress OD
Theta
R
Fatigue
Points
C

Figure: Fatigue Points at an arc length cross-section
Fatigue Analysis, How Damage is Calculated
w

376
This therefore defines a total of
(Number of included arc lengths) x (Number of Theta Angles) x 2
fatigue points at which the damage will be analysed.
8.13 HOW DAMAGE IS CALCULATED
For each fatigue point OrcaFlex calculates damage values that are reported in the fatigue results. Here is a summary of
how the calculation is done:
For each of the 3 principal stress directions (axial, radial and circumferential), OrcaFlex calculates the time history
of the stress component that occurred in that principal direction, at that fatigue point, in that load case. See
Principal Stress Calculation below for details.
Note: Stress components can be excluded from the calculation. If any of the principal stress components have
been excluded then they are not reported in the results and are not included in the damage calculation.
OrcaFlex then calculates the damage values that correspond to each of these 3 principal stress component time
histories. See Component Damage Calculation below for details.
OrcaFlex then chooses the largest of those 3 principal damage values and this is taken to be the damage value at that
fatigue point due to one occurrence of that load case. The load case worksheets in the fatigue results report these
load case damage values for each fatigue point. The load case damage values are reported as damage per hour.
Note: This worst damage is usually due to the ZZ stress.
OrcaFlex then scales the above load case damage values to allow for the exposure associated with that load case.
The above step gives the total exposure damage value from that load case at this fatigue point. These totalexposure
load case damage values appear in the Damage Tables worksheet in the fatigue results.
Finally, OrcaFlex then sums these totalexposure load case damage values to obtain the give the final total damage
value at that fatigue point. These total damage values are again reported in the Damage Tables worksheet in the
fatigue results.
Principal Stress Calculation
At each fatigue point, and for each load case, OrcaFlex calculates the stress matrix
RRStress RCStress RZStress
RCStress CCStress CZStress
RZStress CZStress ZZStress
from the various loads that acted on the pipe during the load case simulation. See Pipe Stress Calculation.
Here the 3 diagonal entries RRStress, CCStress and ZZStress are the principal radial, circumferential (or hoop) and axial
(or longitudinal) stresses, respectively, and the 3 offdiagonal terms are the shear stresses.
Note: Strictly speaking, the principal stresses are the eigenvalues of this matrix. But in practice the principal
axes of stress are almost always very close to the natural axes of the pipe, in which case the diagonal
terms are very good estimates of the principal stresses. The fatigue analysis assumes that this holds
and therefore treats the diagonal terms as being the principal stresses. The validity of this assumption
can be confirmed by checking that the peak values of any of the shear stresses are small compared to
the peak values of the diagonal terms. All these peak values are reported in the fatigue analysis results.
Component Damage Calculation
The SN curve defines the number of cycles to failure, N(S), for a given stress range S, and also defines a fatigue limit, FL,
below which no damage occurs. OrcaFlex uses these to calculate a damage value given by:
D(S) = 1/N(S) if S > FL
D(S) = 0 if S <= FL
w
Fatigue Analysis, How Damage is Calculated
377
This damage value can be thought of as the proportion of the fatigue life that is used up by 1 cycle of stress range S.
If the SN curve is defined by parameters then for S > FL we have:
Log10(N) = A b Log10(S)
so D(S) can be expressed in the following form:
D(S) = 10^(A b Log10(S)) = 10
A
x S
b
.
OrcaFlex uses this damage definition to calculate the component damage value that is associated with a given principal
stress component in a given load case. This calculation depends on whether a Regular or Rainflow fatigue analysis is
done, as follows.
Regular analysis
The minimum and maximum values that the stress component took over the last simulated wave cycle are used to give a
stress range S. The associated singleoccurrence load case damage value is then given by D(S) where is the stress
concentration factor specified in the fatigue analysis data.
Rainflow analysis
The stress component time history is analysed using the rainflow cycle counting method. This gives a number of stress
ranges for half cycles, say Si where i runs from 1 to the number of stress ranges. The associated singleoccurrence load
case damage value is then given by D(Si) where the summation is over all the half cycles and is the stress
concentration factor. Note that the factor of one halfis present because the rainflow algorithm counts half cycles rather
than fullcycles.
Spectral analysis
For spectral analysis damage is calculated in the frequency domain using statistical methods. The calculation requires a
power spectral density function (PSD) for each analysed stress component. The PSD is obtained from a response
calculation simulation. This calculates RAOs for the stress component which is then combined with the load case wave
spectrum to give the PSD for this stress component. These PSD are then used to calculate damage using either Dirlik's
formula or the Rayleigh distribution.
For detailed references on how spectral fatigue analysis calculates damage from stress PSDs please refer to:
Barltrop and Adams (1991) which has an excellent section on spectral fatigue analysis.
Dirlik (1985) is the original reference for Dirlik's stress range distribution formula.
w
VIV Toolbox, How Damage is Calculated
379
9 VIV TOOLBOX
The OrcaFlex VIV Toolbox provides analysis of vortex induced vibration (VIV) of lines. It offers a choice of various
alternative ways of modelling VIV, including both frequency and time domain approaches, and is the product of
extensive and ongoing research in cooperation with academics in the UK and USA.
The VIV Toolbox is included as standard in OrcaFlex.
Different VIV Models
The VIV Toolbox provides facilities for using the following different VIV models:
VIVA Interface. The VIV Toolbox provides a fully integrated link to VIVA. OrcaFlex automatically prepares the VIVA
data from the OrcaFlex data, calls VIVA and presents the results. To use this you will need a copy of VIVA, release
2.0.3 or later.
SHEAR7 Export. The VIV Toolbox provides facilities for exporting SHEAR7 structural data files and SHEAR7 .mds
files based on an OrcaFlex model. SHEAR7 can then be run using these files as input.
Two wake oscillator models, the Milan model and the Iwan and Blevins model.
Two vortex tracking models.
Of all these models, VIVA and SHEAR7 are the two main programs in current use in the industry. They are both
independent nonOrcina programs written and distributed by other companies, so to use them you need to purchase
and install them on your machine. They are both frequency domain models, so they only analyse steady state conditions.
The other models are included in the VIV Toolbox within OrcaFlex, so no further software is needed. They are all time
domain models, so they can analyse nonsteadystate conditions. They do not yet have a track record in the industry.
For details, see documentation of the individual models in the sections that follow.
Using VIV Models
Except for the SHEAR7 Export facility, you choose which VIV model to use (if any) on the VIV page on the line data form.
There are separate choices for the static and dynamic analyses see the 'Statics VIV' and 'Dynamics VIV' data items. You
do not have to use the same model for the two analyses. The timedomain models are only applicable to the dynamic
analysis.
When you choose a VIV model, data for VIV appears on the VIV page. Some data applies to the whole line and some is
specific to a given section of line. The data depends on your choice of model, but all the models use the following
sectionspecific data.
A separate user guide for the time domain VIV models is available (Time Domain VIV Models.pdf).
VIV Diameter
The VIV diameter specifies the diameter used by all the VIV models, i.e. for VIVA if it is used, and for the time domain VIV
models if they are used.
Separate values can be specified for each section. The value specified is used for all nodes in that section. For a node at
the intersection of two sections the VIV diameter of the following section is used.
The VIV Diameter can be set to '~', which is taken to mean 'same as the section outer diameter'.
Testing, Verification and Warranties
VIVA and SHEAR7 are interfaces to third party analysis packages. Orcina's warranty is limited to providing the data
required by each package in the required format to allow the package to commence its analysis. We cannot accept any
responsibility for the results of the analysis, or for any failure by the third party package to complete the analysis, save
insofar as the failure to complete results from incorrect preparation of the input data.
The other models are software implementations by Orcina of published theory. We have tested our implementations
and give guidance to users on the assumptions implicit in using these methods for analysis of practical risers, but give
no warranties that such use is valid.
VIV Toolbox, Frequency Domain Models
w

380
Any commercial use of these VIV models is at the user's own risk and on the understanding that users are aware of the
assumptions involved and have taken steps to satisfy themselves that they are justified.
For further details contact Orcina.
9.1 FREQUENCY DOMAIN MODELS
9.1.1 VIVA
VIVA is an independent frequency domain program developed by Prof. M Triantafyllou at MIT and distributed by David
Tein Consulting Engineers (DTCEL).
Orcina is a participating member of a Joint Industry Project run by DTCEL and Prof. Triantafyllou of MIT. The project
began midyear 2000. Phase 1 was completed midyear 2001 and a second phase is in progress.
As part of the project, a software link has been written between OrcaFlex and a new version of VIVA, called VIVARRAY.
The software link allows a riser model to be built in OrcaFlex taking advantage of the existing interactive user interface.
OrcaFlex then calls VIVARRAY which carries out a frequency domain calculation of VIV response based on an energy
balance. Results are reported in spreadsheet form for each single excited mode of vibration. A combined multimode
response is also reported. Results include amplitudes of vibration and mean effective drag coefficients. The drag
coefficients can be automatically used by OrcaFlex in further static and dynamic analysis.
The VIVARRAY calculation can be repeated at intervals through an OrcaFlex analysis to update the drag coefficients.
OrcaFlex runs as usual in the time domain, but makes a call periodically to VIVARRAY which repeats the VIV calculation
for the instantaneous riser configuration. The drag coefficient distribution is then read back into OrcaFlex which
continues with the analysis.
OrcaFlex VIVA Interface
The OrcaFlex interface to VIVA requires VIVA to be installed on your machine and available in the form of a dynamic link
library (DLL) called v3ddll.dll. This DLL file, and the VIVA database files that it uses, must be located in the same
directory as the OrcaFlex.exe program file.
The current version of OrcaFlex is compatible, and has been tested with, the VIVA DLL version 2.0.6. Later versions of
the DLL can be used OrcaFlex checks for interface compatibility before calling the DLL, and reports an error if the DLL
found is not compatible.
To use VIVA for VIV analysis of a line, set the line's Statics VIV or Dynamics VIV data item (or both) to VIVA. Then set up
the VIVA data that appears.
VIVA will then be called when you do the OrcaFlex static or dynamic analysis, and the drag coefficients predicted by
VIVA (for the specified Target Mode) will be used instead of the userspecified drag coefficients from the line type form.
These VIVA drag coefficients, and other results calculated by VIVA, are available in OrcaFlex see VIVA Results.
VIVA in Static Analysis
When Statics VIV is set to VIVA, OrcaFlex calculates the static position of the line using the drag coefficients calculated
by VIVA. This is an iterative calculation since VIVA's analysis in turn depends on the position of the line. The iterative
static analysis is done as follows:
1. First OrcaFlex sets the line's drag coefficients to those specified on the OrcaFlex line type form.
2. OrcaFlex then calculates the static position of the line using those drag coefficients.
3. OrcaFlex then calls VIVA to analyse VIV for that position and the line drag coefficients are updated to those
calculated by VIVA for the specified Target Mode.
4. OrcaFlex then recalculates the static position of the line for those new drag coefficients.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are then repeated until the static position has converged.
The iteration is deemed to have converged when none of the nodes has changed position (compared with the previous
iteration) by more than Convergence Tolerance * NodeLength, where NodeLength is the length of line represented by
that node.
w
381
VIVA in Dynamic Analysis
When Dynamics VIV is set to VIVA, OrcaFlex calls VIVA at regular intervals, as specified by the Dynamics Time Interval.
After each call the drag coefficients of the line are updated to those calculated by VIVA for the specified Target Mode.
Note that VIVA is a frequency domain program and so can only handle steady state conditions. It is therefore unrealistic
to use VIVA in dynamic analysis unless the conditions change only slowly compared to the Strouhal period. See also Use
Relative Fluid Velocity and Include Wave in Fluid Velocity.
Limitations
When using the OrcaFlex interface to VIVA please note the following limitations:
The VIVA analysis involves a modal analysis of the line. Currently this modal analysis is done by VIVA but this has
limitations see VIVA modal analysis limitations.
There are difficulties in passing to VIVA details of attachments to the line (e.g. clumps, buoys, links, winches), so
attachment are ignored by the VIVA analysis.
The VIVA DLL is not currently capable of handling multiple simultaneous use, so you should not use the VIVA
interface from more than one copy of OrcaFlex at a time running on a single machine.
VIVA Data
The VIVA data is the data that VIVA needs and which OrcaFlex cannot deduce automatically from the ordinary OrcaFlex
data. It is described below and appears on the VIV page on the line data form when you select VIVA for Statics VIV or
Dynamics VIV.
When using VIVA please note the following:
You should set up the line with End A at the top and End B at the bottom.
All the sections in the line must have the same segment length. This is a requirement of VIVA.
If the line touches down on the seabed then OrcaFlex passes only the suspended part of the line to VIVA for analysis.
The rest of the line is not passed to VIVA. By 'suspended part' here is meant the part between End A and the first
node in contact with the seabed. Note that if there are multiple touchdowns then the VIVA analysis is only applied to
the part of the line up to the first touchdown point.
When there is seabed contact OrcaFlex tells VIVA to treat the touchdown point as pinned. This is as in the
touchdown example in the VIVA documentation.
You need to use enough segments in the suspended part of the line. There is a lower limit in VIVA of 100 segments,
and if the line has fewer than this then VIVA reports an error and no VIV calculation is done. If the line has 100 or
more segments then VIVA checks whether there are enough segments to reasonably model VIV; and if not then
VIVA gives a warning but the calculation continues. For details see the VIVA documentation.
When modelling Vetco type risers (i.e. with auxiliary pipes attached), you need to set the OrcaFlex line end
orientation to match the orientation of the auxiliary pipes. For details see Modelling Vetco Risers.
OrcaFlex passes VIVA the fluid density and viscosity at each node. For fully submerged nodes OrcaFlex passes the
sea density and kinematic viscosity at that point. For a node out of the water OrcaFlex passes the air density
specified in the OrcaFlex data and a hardcoded viscosity value of 1.5e5 m
2
/s (Source: Batchelor, page 594, air at
20C). For a partially submerged node OrcaFlex interpolates between the two, based on the node's Proportion Wet.
Whole Line Properties
Target Mode
VIVA predicts which modes of oscillation might be excited and it gives separate VIV results for each possible excited
mode. In addition it gives VIV results for 'multimode' response, i.e. response that is a mixture of the possible modes.
You must specify which set of VIVA Cd results to use, based on the type of response you expect, by setting the Target
Mode data item. The Target Mode can be set to a mode number, meaning use the single mode results for that mode
number. Or it can be set to '~', meaning use the multimode results.
w

382
If you set the Target Mode to a mode number that VIVA does not predict will be excited then OrcaFlex will report a
warning and use the line type Cd values.
Dynamics Time Interval
This data item only applies when Dynamics VIV is set to VIVA. It specifies how often VIVA will be called during the
OrcaFlex simulation.
VIVA will be called after every T seconds of simulation, where T is the specified dynamics time interval. After each call to
VIVA, the drag coefficients used by the line will be updated to those calculated by VIVA for the specified Target Mode.
Convergence Tolerance
This data item only applies when Statics VIV is set to VIVA. It specifies the tolerance used in the statics iteration. For
details see VIVA in Static Analysis.
Transverse Damping Ratio
The structural damping ratio that VIVA should use. It is a single value that applies to the whole line. For details see the
VIVA documentation, where it is referred to as ZETA.
VIVA Z Axis Direction
This data item specifies the direction of the VIVA global Zaxis.
VIVA uses its own global, righthanded frame of reference, in which the Xaxis is vertically upwards (i.e. in the OrcaFlex
global Zaxis direction) and the Y and Z axes are horizontal.
VIVA recommends that the VIVA Zaxis is chosen to be in the downstream flow direction, if that is welldefined. For
constant uniform flow there is a unique flow direction, so it is welldefined. If the flow direction varies along the line
then there is no unique flow direction. In this case it is probably best to set the VIVA Zaxis to be in the average flow
direction.
A value of '~' is interpreted to mean the current direction at the sea surface.
Use Relative Fluid Velocity, Include Wave in Fluid Velocity
VIVA needs to know the flow velocity at each point along the line. You can choose to either use the relative velocity,
including the velocity of the line, or else use only the fluid velocity, ignoring any velocity of the line. You can also choose
whether to include any wave contribution to the fluid velocity.
Ideally the relative velocity should be used and the wave should be included, since in reality it is the total relative
velocity that generates vortices. However VIVA is a frequency domain program and so can only handle steady state
conditions, whereas OrcaFlex can handle timevarying conditions. VIVA effectively assumes that the flow velocity it is
given is constant for long enough for VIV to settle. It therefore cannot correctly analyse cases where the flow velocity
includes timevarying components whose periods are comparable with or shorter than the Strouhal period. (The same
applies to SHEAR7, since it too uses a frequency domain analysis.)
We therefore provide these two switches, to allow you to control whether line motion and wave effects are included in
the flow velocity given to VIVA. If the line motion or wave include significant velocity components that are not 'slow'
compared to the expected VIV period, then you might want exclude the line motion or wave. This is still not ideal, since
their effects are then ignored. The alternative is to use a timedomain model, such as a wake oscillator model or the
vortex tracking models.
Section-Specific Properties
For each section of the line, you must specify the VIVA section type and its properties. The OrcaFlex line type and length
of the sections are displayed for information, but they are not editable (to edit them see the Structure page on the
OrcaFlex line data form).
VIV Diameter
See VIV Diameter.
w
383
Section Type
The VIVA section type can be one of:
Smooth: No further VIVA section data is needed.
Strake: You must also specify the height to diameter ratio for the strakes.
Fairing: You must also specify the chord length and thickness of the fairing.
Vetco: No further VIVA section data is needed, but the line orientation must match the orientation of the Vetco riser.
See Modelling Vetco Risers below.
For details of this VIVA data see the VIVA documentation.
Modelling Vetco Risers
Vetco risers have auxiliary pipes attached and VIVA needs to know the direction of the flow, relative to the orientation of
the auxiliary pipes. The diagram below shows a section through the line, looking towards End B. VIVA needs to know the
angle Alpha.
OrcaFlex calculates this angle automatically by assuming that the auxiliary pipes are oriented, relative to the OrcaFlex
local x and ydirection, as shown in the diagram. You must therefore set up the line end orientation data so that the
line's local x and ydirections are oriented as shown. In other words you should set up the line end orientation data so
that the line local xaxis points through the larger of the two gaps between auxiliary pipes.
Alpha
Flow
Direction
x
y

VIVA Results
The VIVA results are presented in OrcaFlex as extra worksheets in the Full Results tables. The worksheets give the
results from the latest VIVA call.
There is a separate worksheet for each excited mode, plus an extra worksheet for the multimode response. The drag
coefficients currently in use are those corresponding to the specified Target Mode.
The VIVA results are described briefly below. For details see the VIVA documentation.
Note: Amplitudes in VIVA results are single amplitudes, i.e. measured from the mean position to the peak.
Single Mode Results
The worksheet for a given single excited mode gives a table of 'Single Mode' results as a function of arc length along the
line. These are results predicted by VIVA if singlemode VIV response occurs in that mode. They include:
w

384
Max Amplitude
The amplitude of predicted VIV motion at that point.
Max Bend Moment, Max Stress
The dynamic bend moment and stress amplitudes due to VIV. Note that they do not include the bend moment and stress
due to the mean position of the line.
Drag Coefficient
The predicted drag coefficient, allowing for VIV.
Multi-Mode Results
The 'MultiMode' worksheet gives two tables. The second table is the multimode equivalent of the single mode results
table; it gives the same information, but this time for the case where multimode VIV response occurs.
The first table summarises the bending modes. It has the following columns:
Mode
This column shows which modes have been analysed. Those that VIVA calculates as possibly being excited are marked
with an asterisk.
Natural Mode Frequency With and Without VIV
These columns give the natural frequencies of the mode, as calculated by VIVA. Those 'Without VIV' are calculated using
VIVA's own default added mass coefficients (not those specified in the OrcaFlex line type data). Whereas in those 'With
VIV' the VIVA default added mass coefficients have been modified to allow for VIV.
Warning: VIVA's modal analysis calculates bending modes only and does not allow for the mean curvature. This
omission is equivalent to VIVA calculating the out-of-plane modes, since there is no mean curvature
component in the out-of-plane direction. The natural frequencies in the VIVA results therefore
correspond to the out-of-plane bending modes predicted by the OrcaFlex modal analysis. These are
correct modes to use for in-plane flow (since VIV will then be in the out of plane direction), but they are
not the right modes to use for out-of-plane flow, since the VIV will then be in-plane. The difference
between the in-plane and out-of-plane bending modes depends on the magnitude of the curvature and
the wave length of the mode.
Max Amplitude
The largest offset of any node in this mode.
9.1.2 SHEAR7
SHEAR7 is an independent program, developed by Prof. K Vandiver at MIT and distributed by Atlantia Offshore Limited.
The link to SHEAR7 is a little different from the other VIV models in theVIV Toolbox. The other models are integrated
directly with OrcaFlex whereas the SHEAR7 link is in the form of facilities to export SHEAR7 data files (.dat) and
SHEAR7 mode shape files (.mds).
Note: SHEAR7 must be licensed separately to OrcaFlex. Please contact Atlantia Offshore Limited for details.
When exporting a SHEAR7 data file the program assumes that you will also be using a mode shape file produced by
OrcaFlex. The procedure for linking SHEAR7 to your OrcaFlex model is as follows:
1. Build your OrcaFlex model as normal. SHEAR7 analyses VIV for one or more of your OrcaFlex Lines.
2. Input the appropriate values on the SHEAR7 data form.
3. Calculate the static position of the model.
4. Export a SHEAR7 data file.
5. Export a SHEAR7 Mds file.
6. These files can now be used as inputs to SHEAR7.
w
385
SHEAR7 data file
To export a SHEAR7 data files you must first provide extra data that SHEAR7 requires but which is not needed by
OrcaFlex. This is done from the SHEAR7 data form which can be opened from the Model Browser. Note that your model
must include at least one Line for the SHEAR7 data form to be available.
When you have input all the necessary data on the SHEAR7 data form you create the SHEAR7 data file by clicking on the
Export Shear7 Data File button. The model must be in Statics Complete state when you export the SHEAR7 data file
but please note that data on the SHEAR7 data form is editable while in this state.
Exporting from Batch Script
The SHEAR7 data file can be exported from an OrcaFlex batch script using the SHEAR7DataFile command.
SHEAR7 data
The majority of the information in a SHEAR7 data file can be derived from the data for an OrcaFlex Line. However, there
are a number of other values which SHEAR7 needs and these are documented below. Mostly these values are given the
same name as used by SHEAR7. For full details on how they are used please refer to the SHEAR7 documentation.
Line
Specifies the OrcaFlex Line to be described in the SHEAR7 data file.
Output summary Locations
These data specify the locations at which a summary of the response is given in the SHEAR7 .out file. A value of '~' can
be used for the Arc Length Range Start to mean 'End A'. Likewise, a value of '~' for Arc Length Range End means 'End
B'.
Reduced Velocity Bandwidths
The single and multimode reduced velocity double bandwidth.
Structural Damping Ratio
Corresponds to the SHEAR7 data item of the same name.
Mode Behaviour Cut Off
Corresponds to the SHEAR7 data item called "Cutoff level".
Number of Lift Coefficient Tables
This is the number of tables you want SHEAR7 to read from the common.cl file.
Current Profile
The probability of occurrence (a number between 0 and 1) of the flow profile and the flow profile ID.
Young's Modulus
Young's modulus for the strength member. SHEAR7 uses this for computing stress and damage rate.
S-N Curve
Specifies the SN curve to be used by SHEAR7 for its fatigue calculations. A fatigue limit can be specified this is called
the "cutoff stress range" in the SHEAR7 documentation and is sometimes also called the endurance limit.
Stress Concentration Factors
Specify a global stress concentration factor for the line and optionally a number of local stress concentration factors.
Section Data
The following data is specified on a section by section basis. That is different values can be specified for each OrcaFlex
line section. The SHEAR7 terminology for this is sectional zones. In the SHEAR7 data file that OrcaFlex produces there
is a onetoone correspondence between OrcaFlex line sections and SHEAR7 sectional zones.
w

386
VIV Diameter
Specifies the diameter of the line. If the default value of '~' is specified then the buoyancy diameter is used.
Strouhal Type, Strouhal Number
The Strouhal type and number defines the relationship of flow velocity and cylinder diameter to the local vortex
shedding frequency. Strouhal Type can be Rough Cylinder or User Specified. Rough Cylinder corresponds to the
SHEAR7 Strouhal code 200. If User Specified is chosen then you must also specify a Strouhal Number.
Lift Coefficient Table, Lift Coefficient Factor
Lift Coefficient Table specifies which table is used from the common.cl file.
Lift Coefficient Factor corresponds to the SHEAR7 data item called Lift Coefficient Reduction Factor.
Reduced Velocity Damping Coefficients
Damping Coefficients for still water, low and high reduced velocity are specified.
SHEAR7 Mds file
The SHEAR7 Mds file export facility is provided on the Modal Analysis form. To use it:
You will need to create a SHEAR7 data file. The simplest way to do this is to use the in built facility to export
SHEAR7 data files.
Warning: The OrcaFlex and Shear7 models must both have zero arc length (called End A in OrcaFlex) at the same
end of the line. The Shear7 manual says 'It is common, but not required, that x/L=0.0 correspond with
the minimum tension end of the cylinder'. In OrcaFlex End A is commonly placed at the top of the line,
and we would recommend doing this when interfacing with SHEAR7.
Calculate the static position of the model.
On the Results menu select the Modal Analysis.
Do the modal analysis for the line you want to analyse. You must include calculation of the mode shapes and include
all modes that might to be needed by SHEAR7.
Select the VIV page. For each mode, the VIV page reports the extent to which the mode is transverse (i.e. in the VIV
direction), inline (i.e. in the normal drag direction), axial, or some mixture. This helps you decide which modes to
export to SHEAR7. See Mode Selection Table below for details.
The final column of the table shows which modes are currently selected to be exported to the .Mds file. Whenever
you calculate the modes OrcaFlex ticks just the Transverse and Mostly Transverse modes, but you can then
change the selection as required.
Use the Export SHEAR7 Mds File button. A SHEAR7 .Mds file is generated for those modes that are currently ticked
for export. You are asked where to save the file. See Values Exported for details.
Warning: OrcaFlex does not calculate the mode slope; in its place OrcaFlex outputs zero. See Values Exported for
details.
Exporting from Batch Script
The SHEAR7 Mds file can be exported from an OrcaFlex batch script using the SHEAR7MdsFile command.
Mode Selection Table
VIV excitation occurs in the transverse direction. In SHEAR7 mode shapes are 1D since it assumes that all the modes in
the .Mds file are purely in that transverse direction. The OrcaFlex modal analysis is fully 3D, so in principle you should
therefore only export modes that are purely transverse.
In practice the natural modes do not always neatly divide into the transverse, inline and axial directions, so you will
sometimes have to export the modes that are nearest to being transverse. OrcaFlex therefore provides the mode
selection table to help you decide which modes should be exported to SHEAR7.
w
387
The table includes the following columns:
Offset Distribution displays a measure of how inline, transverse and axial the mode is. For details see Offset
Distribution.
Mode Type classifies each mode according to the offset distribution. Transverse means that the transverse
component is more than 90% of the total, Mostly Transverse means that it is between 50% and 90%, and similarly
for Inline, Mostly Inline, Axial and Mostly Axial. Mixed means that none of the components are more than 50% of
the total.
Export to SHEAR7 Mds File determines which modes will be exported to SHEAR7. When you calculate (or
recalculate) the modes OrcaFlex ticks just the Transverse and Mostly Transverse modes, but you can then change
the selection as required. See Discussion and Examples.
Values Exported
The first line in the .Mds file contains the number of selected modes and the number of nodes in the line. Then follows a
section giving the angular frequencies of the selected modes, in radians per second. Finally there follows a section for
each selected mode, giving the Mode Offset, Mode Slope and Mode Curvature.
Warning: OrcaFlex does not calculate the mode slope; in its place OrcaFlex outputs zero. The mode slope is only
used in SHEAR7 to correct the predicted RMS acceleration for a vertical riser, in the special case where
one is trying to model the gravitational contamination from tilt that a transversely mounted
accelerometer would measure. See the SHEAR7 documentation for details. The RMS acceleration is
listed in the SHEAR7 .plt plotting files.
Exported Mode Offset and Mode Curvature
The OrcaFlex modal analysis gives vector values, but SHEAR7 requires scalar values. These are calculated as follows.
Let:
V = the mode shape vector calculated by OrcaFlex at a given node,
Vi, Vt and Va = V's inline, transverse and axial component vectors, respectively,
VL = lateral component vector of V, given by VL = Vi + Vt (vector sum),
C1 = curvature vector at the node, for the mean position,
C2 = curvature vector at the node, when the mode shape offsets V are applied,
dC = C2 C1 = modal curvature vector.
Then the values exported by OrcaFlex to the Mds file are as follows:
Mode Offset = Sign(Vt).S.|VL|
Mode Curvature = Sign(transverse component of dC).S.|dC|
Here S is a normalising factor that is chosen to make the largest value in the mode offset column have magnitude 1, as
recommended by SHEAR7.
The reasoning behind the above formulae is as follows:
SHEAR7 assumes that the exported mode offset is in the transverse direction. This assumption applies to the
powerin zone, since in this zone SHEAR7 assumes that the mode offset is in the direction of VIV excitation.
However SHEAR7's powerout calculation will still be valid providing the mode offset is lateral (i.e. no axial
component), since fluid drag and damping occur in any lateral direction.
OrcaFlex should therefore ideally export the transverse component of mode offset for the powerin zone and the
lateral offset for the powerout zone. However OrcaFlex does not know the powerin and powerout zones, since
they are calculated inside SHEAR7, so it therefore outputs the lateral offset (suitably signed and normalised)
throughout. This correctly removes the axial component, and if there is no inline component then no error is
introduced.
w

388
For a mode that has some inline components there will be an error introduced in the powerin calculation, since
SHEAR7 will assume that the lateral offset is in fact transverse. This error is equivalent to rotating the VIV excitation
to be in the lateral mode offset direction, so it should be conservative.
The mode curvature column is used in SHEAR7 to calculate the dynamic bending stresses that are induced when the
mode is excited. Such stresses occur due to both transverse and inline oscillations, so it is appropriate to export the
whole of the dynamic curvature (dC), rather than just its transverse component.
Finally, the exported values are signed and scaled as required by SHEAR7.
Discussion and Examples
The OrcaFlex modal analysis is fully 3D, so for a general line configuration a mode can be a mixture of axial (i.e. tensile)
and lateral (i.e. bending) motion. However for many configurations the modes broadly fall into one of three categories
tensile modes, inplane bending modes and outofplane bending modes. Here inplane and outofplane refers to the
vertical plane of the catenary in which the line is hanging.
Vertical Riser
For an exactly straight vertical riser there is no unique such vertical plane. In this case the bending modes appear as a
series of twins, i.e. pairs of modes with identical (or near identical) amplitude and frequency, but in orthogonal
directions.
Warning: In such cases it is important that only one of the pair is exported to SHEAR7 - the one that is nearest to
being in the transverse direction.
In practice, however, the current will make the riser bow out slightly in the current direction. This defines a vertical
plane for the static position, and the transverse direction is normal to this plane. The natural modes typically divide
neatly into modes that are virtually 100% transverse (the outofplane lateral modes), inline (the inplane lateral
modes) or axial (the tensile modes). It is therefore clear cut as to which modes to export to SHEAR7, i.e. the transverse
modes, and OrcaFlex selects these for you.
U-shape Catenary, In-plane Current
For this case the transverse direction is the outofplane direction, so the transverse modes are the outofplane modes.
These typically have virtually 100% of their power in the transverse direction, whereas the remaining modes have very
little power in the transverse direction, so again it is clear cut as to which modes to export to SHEAR7.
U-shape Catenary, Out-of-plane Current
For this case the transverse direction is inplane and normal to the line axis. It therefore varies along the line and so the
transverse modes are some, but not all, of the inplane modes.
The lowest inplane mode is typically the inplane fundamental 'swinging' mode. In the parts of the line that are nearly
vertical this mode is transverse, but near the bottom of the U the motion is near axial. This mode is therefore often
displayed as Mostly Transverse. OrcaFlex removes the axial components of the modes when exporting to SHEAR7 (see
Values Exported) so it is reasonable to export this mode.
Most of the remaining inplane modes are bending modes in which the nodes oscillate laterally, with the wavelength
decreasing as the frequency increases. These are predominantly in the transverse direction and so are suitable for
export to SHEAR7.
However there are also some tensile inplane modes present, in which the nodes oscillate in the axial direction, causing
alternating tension and compression in the line. These tend to be in amongst the higher frequency modes, due to the
typically high axial stiffness of a line.
U-shape Catenary, Oblique Current
If the current is at 10, say, to the plane of the catenary, then the transverse direction is at 80 to the plane. None of the
modes will be purely in this direction, but the outofplane modes are nearest to this direction, so they are the best ones
to choose.
SHEAR7 will assume that each exported mode is purely transverse, so an approximation is involved. This approximation
gets worse as the angle of the current to the plane increases up to 45. The approximation is worst for the low modes.
w
VIV Toolbox, Time Domain Models
389
For the higher modes the outofplane modes and the inplane lateral modes tend to have quite similar frequencies and
shapes, so the approximation is less of a problem.
9.2 TIME DOMAIN MODELS
There are four time domain models, two being wake oscillator models and two being vortex tracking models.
With all the time domain models, the vortex force applied in the static analysis is the standard Morison drag force. Then,
during the buildup stage of the simulation, the ramping function is used to smoothly change to the vortex force given by
the VIV model.
Note: This ramping is only applied for the components of vortex force which are calculated by the VIV model.
For example, the wake oscillator models only provide transverse vortex force. So, for the wake
oscillators, the ramping is done for the transverse component of force, but the inline component of
force is calculated using the standard Morison drag formulation.
The data described below are common to all the time domain models.
Outer Time Step
For all the time domain models, it is important that the outer time step (on the General Data form) is set to a value that
is small compared with the Strouhal Period. Assuming a Strouhal number of 0.2, then the Strouhal period is given by
5D/V where D is the line diameter and V is the relative flow velocity. The outer time step needs to be set to a fraction of
this Strouhal period, the fraction to use depending on which model is being used, as follows.
Wake oscillator models
The wake oscillator calculations are done every outer time step and experience so far suggests that the integration of
the wake oscillator loses accuracy if this time step is greater than about 1/200th of the Strouhal period. At the start of
the simulation OrcaFlex checks and warns if the outer time step exceeds this limit at any node on lines that use a wake
oscillator. Note that this check is against the Strouhal period for the flow velocity that applies in the static analysis, so it
does not take into account changes in Strouhal period during the simulation.
Vortex Tracking (1) Model
The outer time step determines how often the fluid forces on the line are updated. The model performs its calculations
using a variable time step. The calculations done in this variable time step are typically much more timeconsuming than
the other calculations in the simulation, so the outer time step does not usually have much effect on the simulation
speed. We therefore recommend that the outer time step is set to a very small value, preferably a lot less than the
variable time step, so that the line has a chance to quickly react to changes in fluid force.
The outer time step sets the time step used by the vortex tracking model, and also determines how often the fluid forces
on the line are updated. It should be small enough to discretise the VIV, but if it is too small then a lot of vortices must be
tracked and this significantly slows the model. Based on our experience so far, we recommend that the outer time step is
set to approximately 1/100th or 1/200th of the Strouhal period.
Note: The automated recommended time step feature in OrcaFlex implements the above recommendation for
the Wake oscillator models but does not implement the recommendations for the Vortex Tracking
models.
Data for the Whole Line
Filter Period
OrcaFlex uses a digital filter, with this filter cutoff period, to separate the mean motion of the node from the VIV motion.
For example, this filtering is needed with the wake oscillator models in order to allow nonVIV motion of the node to
contribute to VIV, without letting the VIV motion feed back into the velocity input into the wake oscillator model.
Here is more detail. The node velocity vector is filtered and the resulting 'nonVIV' velocity is subtracted from the fluid
velocity to obtain a 'nonVIV' relative velocity vector. Then:
w

390
For the wake oscillator models, the normal component of this 'nonVIV' relative velocity vector is used as the
velocity input to the wake oscillator model.
For all the time domain models, the inline and transverse directions are based on the 'nonVIV' relative velocity
vector.
The node position vector is also filtered and the resulting 'nonVIV node position' is used when calculating the
Transverse VIV Offset.
For the Milan wake oscillator only, the 'nonVIV node position' is used as the mean position for the Milan oscillator.
The filter tries to filter out motion whose period is below the filter period. So a filter period of zero gives an allpass
filter, which isn't desirable since it allows VIV motion to feed back into the wake oscillator models and into the
definitions of the inline and transverse directions. At the other extreme, a filter period of Infinity gives a nopass filter,
which prevents any line motion affecting the inline and transverse directions, or contributing to VIV in the wake
oscillator models.
In practice, the filter period should be set to be significantly above, preferably by a factor of 10 or more, the period of
any expected VIV. However it should also be significantly below, again preferably by a factor of 10 or more, the period of
any line motion (e.g. due to towing or vessel motion) that you want to contribute to VIV.
For simple cases where VIV is excited only by fluid flow, not by line motion, the filter period can be set to a large value
that is at least 10 times the period of any expected VIV. For cases where line motion contributes to VIV it might be
harder to achieve the above recommended factors of 10, in which case it will be necessary to compromise by setting the
filter period to a value about half way between the two periods.
The reason a significant factor is recommended here is that the filter does not achieve a very sharp cutoff. Its response
is shown in the following graphs, which illustrate how it attenuates and lags frequencies that are near to the filter
period.
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
0 1 2 3 4 5
Period / FilterPeriod
F
i
l
t
e
r

R
A
O

A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0 1 2 3 4 5
Period / FilterPeriod
F
i
l
t
e
r

R
A
O

P
h
a
s
e

L
a
g

(
d
e
g
)

Warning: With the Milan wake oscillator, if you set the filter period to Infinity or a very high value, then the node
mean position used by the wake oscillator will remain at the node's starting position found by the
static analysis. In that case it is important that the line uses Full statics, since otherwise that starting
position might not be a sensible mean position for the Milan wake oscillator model to use.
Data for Each Section
The following data can be set for each section of the line. A node at the junction between two sections uses the value for
the higher numbered section.
VIV Enabled
You can control which sections of the line the VIV model is applied to. All the time domain models analyse what goes on
at a single specified point on the line, so OrcaFlex creates one instance of the model for each node in each of the enabled
sections.
w
391
You can use this switch to disable VIV modelling where you think VIV excitation is not significant. For example:
You might disable VIV modelling if the normal component of flow velocity is not significant, or the incidence angle is
near to being tangential
You might disable VIV modelling if there are VIV suppression devices (e.g. strakes, fairings) and you believe they
will be effective.
The vortex tracking model requires a lot of computing, so you could improve the speed of simulation by disabling
VIV modelling where you believe VIV will not be significant.
VIV Diameter
See VIV Diameter.
Inline Drag Amplification Factor
Only available for the wake oscillator models. The inline component of drag is multiplied by this value. The data can be
specified as a variable data item which varies with Transverse A/D, that is the amplitude of transverse oscillation
divided by the VIV diameter.
This is not available for the vortex tracking models since they include the effect of inline drag amplification.
Vortex Force Factors
These factors allow you to scale the inline and transverse components of the vortex force. Set them both to 1 to use the
vortex force predicted by the VIV model, without adjustment. Here are some examples where other values might be
appropriate.
VIV oscillation is known to increase the inline drag force. For example see Barltrop and Adams page 354 and Figure
7.7. For the vortex tracking model this effect comes naturally from the model. But the wake oscillator models only
model the transverse force, and the inline drag force comes from the standard drag formula using the specified drag
coefficients. So in the wake oscillator models you could allow for this drag enhancement effect by setting the inline
force factor to greater than 1. The enhancement factor to use depends on the amplitude of the transverse oscillation,
so some trials will be needed to decide the appropriate value.
If VIV suppression devices (e.g. strakes, fairings, shrouds) are fitted to a section of the line then you could allow for
their VIVreduction effect by setting the transverse force factor to a value less than 1. The device is also likely to
affect the inline drag force, so you might also want to allow for this by adjusting the inline force factor. See Barltrop
and Adams page 372.
Note: With the Milan wake oscillator model the transverse force generated by the model is not the whole of
the transverse force, since the Milan model requires the transverse component of standard drag force
to be added to give the total transverse force. The transverse vortex force factor is only applied to the
force generated by the model, not to the transverse component of the standard drag force.
Sea Surface and Sea Bed
The time domain VIV models (wake oscillator and vortex tracking) make no allowance for surfacepiercing or seabed
contact effects. OrcaFlex therefore handles these effects as follows:
If a node comes completely out of the water, or comes into contact with the seabed, then the time domain wake
model is reset. For the wake oscillator models this means that the wake degree of freedom is reset to zero; for the
vortex tracking model all existing vortices are removed. If the node later comes back into the water, or breaks
contact with the seabed, then the model starts again from that reset state.
If the node is partially submerged (i.e. the length of line represented by the node is surfacepiercing) then the time
domain wake model continues to run but the forces it applies to the node are scaled by the node's Proportion Wet.
VIV Directions
For the time domain VIV models, OrcaFlex calculates the following directions:
The Axial direction is the local tangential direction, given by the node's local zdirection.
w

392
The Transverse direction is normal to the axial direction and normal to the 'nonVIV' relative velocity vector.
The Inline direction is normal to the Axial and Transverse directions. It is therefore normal to the line axis and in
the plane defined by that axis and the relative flow direction. It is the direction of the normal component of the drag
force (assuming Cdx=Cdy).
These directions are used for three purposes:
The velocity input to the wake oscillator models is the inline component of the 'nonVIV' relative velocity.
The transverse displacement input into the Milan wake oscillator model is the transverse component of the node
position relative to its 'nonVIV' node position.
The inline and transverse components of the vortex force are available as results.
9.2.1 Wake Oscillator Models
The VIV Toolbox provides two wake oscillator models, the Milan model and the Iwan and Blevins model. These are two
of many different wake oscillator models that have been proposed by many different authors over the last twenty years.
We selected these two models after reviewing the literature and testing a number of different models.
We found that there are errors in some of the published models and that many of the wake oscillator models contain
disguised references to frequency domain concepts. This makes them difficult to implement in a true time domain
analysis, unless additional assumptions are made.
What is a Wake Oscillator Model?
A typical wake oscillator model is a heuristic model that uses a single degree of freedom, Q say, to represent the wake
behind a rigid cylinder. It models the oscillation of the wake by Q being a function of time that obeys a differential
equation that we will call the wake equation of motion.
The oscillation of the wake generates a lift force, i.e. a force that is normal to the cylinder axis and normal to the flow
direction. The model gives the lift force magnitude as a function of Q, and this force is applied to the cylinder and so
affects the motion of the cylinder. In return, the wake equation of motion involves terms that depend on the motion of
the cylinder. This couples the wake equation of motion to the cylinder equation of motion, so together the two form a
coupled nonlinear system.
Wake Equation of Motion
The wake equation of motion is typically a nearly linear, second order, ordinary differential equation. It is not usually
derived from physical laws, but is chosen to be one whose qualitative characteristics are known to be similar to VIV. For
example there are differential equations that are know to have solutions that are oscillatory, self generating and self
limiting.
The wake equation of motion involves parameters whose values are calibrated to match empirical results. This sort of
modelling ethos is commonly known as an inverse method. This is where one attempts to reproduce empirical data
without recourse to the fundamental physics of the system. Rather, one simply writes down a system of equations that
have the right sort of characteristics and then adjusts parameters in the equations to tune them to best match the
empirical data.
Almost universally, wake oscillator models only give the lift force and say nothing about the effect of VIV on the drag
force. The main aim behind the wake oscillator paradigm is to model the oscillating lift force.
Using a Wake Oscillator Model
Wake oscillator models are timedomain models and so can only be used in the dynamic analysis. To use a wake
oscillator model set the Dynamics VIV to that model.
When the simulation is run OrcaFlex creates and attaches a wake oscillator, of the chosen model, to each node in the
line. Each such oscillator then obeys the equations of the chosen model. There is no linkage between the wake
oscillators except through the structure. It is therefore effectively being assumed that the interaction between VIV at
different levels occurs predominantly through the structure, not through the fluid.
w
393
Lift Direction
The wake oscillator models are single degree of freedom models, i.e. they only model the transverse direction. Note that
this direction can change during the simulation, either because the line orientation changes or because of wave motion
changing the fluid velocity direction. When this happens the wake oscillator model is effectively being rotated and there
is an implicit assumption that this rotation does not significantly affect the wake.
Node Steady Motion Included
The wake oscillator models require the flow velocity as input. In OrcaFlex this input flow velocity is taken to be the fluid
velocity minus the filtered node velocity. This allows nonVIV motion, e.g. in a towed case, to contribute to VIV,
providing its period is significantly longer than the filter period. The filtering is necessary to prevent the VIV motion
itself feeding back into the input to the wake oscillator.
Current and Wave Motion Are Both Included
The input velocity to the wake oscillator models include the fluid velocity due to both current and any waves specified.
The models can therefore in principle be used to model the effect of waves on VIV. However please note that the models
were developed and calibrated for steady state conditions, so unsteady flow is outside their intended area of
application.
Inline drag amplification
The effect of inline drag amplification can be modelled by means of a table relating amplification factor to transverse
A/D.
Data Common to Wake Oscillator Models
Model Parameters
Both the Milan and the Iwan and Blevins models have various parameters that determine their properties. You can
choose to either use the Default set of values for these parameters or else choose to use your own Specified values.
Except for the Initial Value (see below), the Default values are the parameters given in the original published papers, i.e.
in the Milan and Iwan and Blevins papers. If the Specified option is chosen then you have complete control over the
model parameters.
Warning: The Specified option has been provided principally to allow users the option of calibrating the model
against other experimental results. If you are not doing this then we strongly recommend that you use
the Default parameters.
The following two model parameters are common to both wake oscillator models.
Strouhal Number. Note that the Strouhal number interacts with the other model parameters, and the other default
published values are intended to be used with the default Strouhal number 0.2. Adjusting the Strouhal number is
therefore not recommended unless you are calibrating the model parameters against known results.
Initial Value is the magnitude of the initial value given to the wake degree of freedom used by the models. The
wake oscillation can take a long time to buildup if it is started from zero, so giving it a small nonzero initial value
helps to start up the wake oscillation at the start of the simulation. The sign of the initial value is chosen randomly
for each node in the line. This avoids the situation where the nodes on a line all start by moving in the same
direction.
How well do wake oscillators model VIV?
Any wake oscillator model is very heavily tied to the data set used to calibrate it. One must ensure that the relevant fluid
dynamical and structural dimensionless parameters (for example, the Reynolds number) of the experimental setup
used to generate the data are sufficiently similar to that of the situation that one wants to model. Otherwise, one is
relying on luck to provide the right answer. For example, if one wants to model the VIV of telephone wires in air, then
one should use a data set obtained from a wire vibrating in a wind tunnel. The experimental data is usually obtained
from a system with a constant fluid inflow speed, so one cannot expect the model to be applicable for currents that vary
over the same time scale as that due to VIV. If the current variation is sufficiently slow then the model should be valid.
w

394
In general, the authors of wake oscillators make no attempt to model the startup of VIV. This is due to the nature of the
devised mathematical model. The modelling method used exploits the fact that the solution phase space of the system
contains limit cycles that correspond to stationary VIV. The parameters are set so that the limit cycles have the right
radius and that the system state tracks around them with the right frequency. To find the nonstationary dynamical
behaviour of the system far away from such critical regions in the phase space is extremely difficult without simply
integrating the equations of motion.
Milan Wake Oscillator Model
The Milan model is an implementation of the model developed by a group in Italy and documented in the paper by
Falco, Fossati and Resta. It is a wake oscillator model; see the wake oscillator models topic for information that applies
to all such models.
Data
See:
Data that is common to the wake oscillator models.
Data that is common to the time domain VIV models.
Results
The Vortex Force is available as a line force results variable. This reports the total lift and drag force. Note that this is the
sum of the force generated by the wake oscillator model, which is in the transverse direction but doesn't include the
drag force in that direction, plus the standard Morison drag force in the inline, transverse and axial directions.
Transverse VIV Offset is also available as a line position results variable.
Milan Model Implementation in OrcaFlex
In implementing the Milan model in OrcaFlex we came across the following issues.
Lift Force
In the Milan model the standard Morison drag force in the transverse direction must be added to the force generated by
the wake oscillator. OrcaFlex therefore calculates the drag forces as usual and then adds in the force generated by the
Milan wake oscillator. The line motion therefore depends significantly on the drag coefficient specified for the
transverse direction.
Notes: The Milan model was calibrated by assuming a transverse drag coefficient of 1.2 and a transverse
added mass coefficient of 1.0, so other values of these coefficients take the model outside its domain of
calibration.
The transverse force factor is only applied to the force generated by the Milan model, not to the
transverse component of the standard drag force.
Node Mean Position
The Milan model needs the node's offset in the lift direction, relative to its mean position, i.e. relative to the position
about which VIV is occurring. For this mean position OrcaFlex uses the filtered position of the node. This enables
OrcaFlex to handle cases such as towed lines, where the VIV excitation is due to motion of the line rather (or as well as)
fluid flow. It is important that the filter period is suitably set.
Our experience of the Milan Model
If a line end node doesn't move at all (e.g. a because it is fixed) then the wake oscillation does not develop and so the
Vortex Force decays to zero. The Milan model is therefore not suitable for predicting the vortex force on fixed line
end nodes.
We have run the Milan model for the case of a simple springmounted cylinder, and compared the results with the
empirically based response curve published by Skop and Balasubramanian. For details contact Orcina.
w
395
We have also run the Milan model for flexible riser cases and compared it against experimental results. The results
so far suggest that the Milan model is reasonable for cases where the flow velocity is uniform along the riser, but the
model is less satisfactory when the flow velocity varies a lot along the riser.
Iwan and Blevins Wake Oscillator Model
This wake oscillator model is as published by Iwan and Blevins. In their paper the model is developed from theoretical
considerations of momentum, and the hidden wake degree of freedom is such that its rate of change is a measure of the
fluid momentum in the transverse direction.
The resulting model makes the wake degree of freedom obey a Van der Pol equation. This is a type of equation that has
been used in other wake oscillator models, and it is known to have VIVtype characteristics such as frequency lockin.
The authors calibrated the model against experimental results for fixed and forced cylinders, and then compared the
model's predictions against experimental results for springmounted cylinders.
In addition note that the force generated by the Iwan and Blevins model (unlike the Milan wake oscillator model)
includes the standard Morison drag force in the transverse direction. When this model is used OrcaFlex therefore
suppresses the transverse component of the usual drag force, so the drag coefficient specified for the transverse
direction is not used.
Data
See:
Data that is common to the wake oscillator models
Data that is common to the time domain VIV models.
Results
The Vortex Force is available as a line force results variable. This reports the total lift and drag force. Note that this is the
sum of the force generated by the wake oscillator model, which is in the transverse direction but doesn't include the
drag force in that direction, plus the standard Morison drag force in the inline, transverse and axial directions.
9.2.2 Vortex Tracking Models
Overview
Two vortex tracking models are available in OrcaFlex, which we refer to by number: Vortex Tracking (1) and Vortex
Tracking (2). Both are based on the underlying physical equations of boundary layer theory and the NavierStokes
equation. As a result they introduce physical realism that is absent from the wake oscillator models.
Vorticity is a measure of a fluid's rotation and it is often advantageous to analyse fluid dynamics in terms of vorticity.
The reason for this is that the vorticity is often confined to narrow sheetlike regions and the important fluid forces on a
body in the flow are intimately related to the vorticity. One can focus on the sheetlike regions and this is far more
efficient from a computational point of view. Vortex methods are prevalent throughout computational fluid dynamics.
The vortex tracking models are much more computationally demanding than the wake oscillator models. In fact they are
a type of computational fluid dynamic model, but they are much less computationally demanding than 'full'
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD). Work to date shows considerable promise, and we hope they will offer a practical
analysis technique which gives much of the realism of full CFD without the associated extremely long run times.
The vortex tracking models model the full fluid flow field. In OrcaFlex the vortex tracking models are used to give the
force acting on the line, but they can also give other results, such as the fluid velocity and pressure at any point. For
example we have experimentally used them to calculate the pressure variations on the line surface due to VIV. If other
results such as these interest you then please contact Orcina for further details.
The vortex tracking models are based on the relative velocity of the flow past the line. They can therefore be used both
for cases where the excitation is due to current or waves, and also where the excitation is due to the line moving, for
example towed cases.
w

396
The models involve calculating and tracking many vortices for each node of the line. This can make the simulation file
very large, but this can be controlled by limiting the Maximum Number of Vortices Logged.
Warning: Both the vortex tracking models are still being developed. They have undergone testing but have had
limited use so far. This is particularly true for the Vortex Tracking (2) model, which is a recently
developed variant of the Vortex Tracking (1) model.
See the Vortex Tracking Example and also Data and Results.
Features Common to both Vortex Tracking Models
This section describes the basic vortex tracking model on which both models are based.
Vortex Tracking Plane
The basic vortex tracking model is a 2D fluid model associated with a particular node on the line. It models the 2D 'slice'
through the fluid normal to the line axis, which we call the vortex tracking plane. In this 2D slice the node is a disc.
To apply this 2D model to the 3D situation present in OrcaFlex, we attach a separate vortex tracking plane to each node
on the line where VIV modelling is enabled. Each node therefore models its own fluid interaction, by generating and
shedding vortices and then tracking them in its associated vortex tracking plane.
The drawing below shows a typical vortex plane, i.e. it is a crosssection through the line, normal to the line axis. The
line itself is represented by the grey disc and the fluid flow is coming from the left. See the vortex tracking example to
see the vortex plane in action.
flow

Figure: Vortex Tracking Plane
The model has two main elements:
A boundary layer theory is used to analyse the fluid very near to the disc surface, where viscosity plays a dominant
role. At each time step, the boundary layer theory gives the positions of the two separation points, and a new vortex
is created at each of these two points, to model the vorticity being generated there.
The vortex tracking itself handles the rest of the fluid, where viscosity is much less important. The created vortices
are tracked downstream by solving the inviscid Navier Stokes equations (which are approximately valid outside the
boundary layer). This models the wake development, i.e. how the vorticity flows after leaving the boundary layer.
Boundary Layer
When the flow meets the disc it has to flow around the disc circumference and a boundary layer is formed. Boundary
layer theory is used to model this region, where viscosity plays a crucial role. Sarpkaya and Shoaff originally used the
Polhausen boundary layer method, but since then this method has been superseded by simpler and more accurate
methods. OrcaFlex uses Thwaites' method (see Young 1989) for both models.
Some of the fluid flows around one side of the disc and some around the other, and the point where the flow splits is
called the stagnation point. As the fluid flows around the disc it initially remains in contact with the disc, but it typically
w
397
then reaches a point on each side where the flow separates. These are called the separation points, and at these points
vorticity is shed from the disc.
The boundary layer theory gives the position of each separation point and the strength of vorticity shed there in one
time step. A new vortex of this strength is then created at the separation point. The new vortex is placed at the
separation point but at a distance .R from the disc surface. In the model 2 is the Creation Clearance specified by the
user. In model 1, or if the Creation Clearance is set to '~', is calculated to be the value that results in the tangential
velocity contribution of the new vortex just cancelling out the existing tangential velocity at the separation point.
In the drawing above (and in the OrcaFlex 3D view) the stagnation point is shown as a small triangle and the separation
points as small blobs, part way around the disc circumference. The vorticity shed from the two sides of the disc is
distinguished by being drawn in separate colours, to denote the difference in the direction of rotation clockwise for
vorticity shed from the upper side and anticlockwise from the lower side, as seen in the drawing.
Vortex Tracking
After being shed from the boundary layer, the vorticity then flows downstream. In reality, the vorticity is shed
continuously and it is shed along the neighbouring parts of the line at the same time, so as it flows away it forms sheets
of vorticity, one on each side. In the above drawing these vortex sheets are shown as red and green lines, since the
drawing shows the intersection of the sheets with the vortex plane. The colour denotes the sign of the vorticity.
For computation purposes the model has to discretise the vorticity being shed, so in the vortex tracking model the
vorticity is represented by discrete vortex points. The vortex sheet is therefore represented by a sequence of vortex
points, each one of which represents the vorticity of a short length of vortex sheet.
In the 3D view the individual vortex points are drawn as circles with their centres joined to represent the vortex sheet
line, with the colour indicating the sign of vorticity. A vortex sheet therefore appears as a linked sequence of circles
flowing away from the line.
Sarpkaya and Shoaff originally used singular vortex points, but in both vortex tracking models OrcaFlex uses smeared
vortex points.
Strouhal Number
The vortex tracking models do not have any Strouhal number built in. Instead the Strouhal period emerges directly from
the physics of the vortex dynamics and boundary layer.
The Vortex Tracking (1) model is our implementation and development of the vortex tracking model originally
developed by Sarpkaya and Shoaff. It shares many common features with the Vortex Tracking (2) model see Features
Common to both Vortex Tracking Models. It differs in the following ways:
It uses a variable time step given by:
t = 0.2 . R / V
where R is the radius of the line and V is the fluid velocity relative to the node. Assuming a Strouhal number of 0.2, this
value is 1/50th of the (instantaneous) Strouhal period.
Vortices shed from the same side of the disc are grouped to represent the vortex sheets coming off that side. The
model tries to detect a suitable point in the cycle at which to break the attached sheet away from the disc and start a
new attached sheet. See Sheet Detachment and Coalescing below.
At each time step each sheet is rediscretised in a way that keeps the vortices at equally spaced arc lengths along the
sheet.
At each time step the model searches for vortices from detached sheets that have moved in between the two
attached sheet. Such a vortex is 'entrained' into the attached sheet of opposite sign to its vorticity. See Wake Line
and Entrainment below.
Sheet Detachment and Coalescing
At any given time there are typically two vortex sheets being fed from the disc one from each side. These are called the
attached sheets.
w

398
As the flow progresses, an attached sheet can become detached and a new attached sheet then starts forming on that
side. Typically this happens first on one side of the disc, then on the other, etc., and this alternating behaviour is typically
synchronised with the oscillatory nature of the lift force.
In reality the vortex sheets form, become detached and flow downstream ad infinitum, but their effect becomes much
less as they move further away from the disc. OrcaFlex, of course, has to limit the number of vortices being modelled. In
model 1 this is done as follows:
The two attached sheets and the one most recently detached sheet are modelled in detail, i.e. as linked sequences of
discrete vortex points.
Older detached sheets (providing they are not still close to the disc) are simplified by 'coalescing' them to single
vortex points. In other words whenever a sheet becomes detached the previous detached sheet is usually replaced
by a single vortex point whose strength is the total vorticity in the sheet and whose position is the centroid of the
vorticity in that sheet. The sheet is then referred to as a coalesced sheet.
When a coalesced sheet gets beyond a certain distance from the disc, its effect is assumed to have decayed to the
point where it is no longer significant and so it can be removed from the model. OrcaFlex does this by transferring
its vorticity to the nearest coalesced sheet of the opposite sign. Doing the removal in this way has the advantage that
the total vorticity present is preserved, and so vorticity is only being moved a small distance, rather than being
destroyed.
To summarise, the wake is modelled using:
Detailed modelling of two attached vortex sheets and (usually) one detached vortex sheet, plus single vortex
modelling of a number of coalesced sheets. The two attached (one green, one red) and the most recent detached
sheet (red) can be seen as vortex lines in the drawing below.
Single vortex point modelling of the earlier detached sheets, now coalesced. These are shown in the drawing as
circles, which is also how they appear in the OrcaFlex 3D view.
flow

Wake Line and Entrainment
In practice the tail end of the detached sheet trails into the spiral part of the preceding attached sheet. This can lead to
very contorted situations and to modelling problems if vortex points come very close to each other. Model 1 handles this
as follows.
The model calculates the tangent line between the two attached sheets. This line, called the wake line, is the dashed line
in the drawing above.
The region between this wake line, the two attached sheets and the disc itself is called the wake region. Vortex points in
the detached sheet that trail into the wake region can then be absorbed into the attached sheet of the opposite sign. We
refer to this process as entrainment.
w
399
The Vortex Tracking (2) model is a simplified variant of the Vortex Tracking (1) model.
Warning: Model 2 has been developed more recently than model 1. It has undergone testing but has had limited
use so far.
Model 2 shares many features of model 1 see Features Common to both Vortex Tracking Models. It differs in the
following ways:
It uses a constant time step, equal to the simulation outer time step. (Model 1 uses a variable time step.)
It does not use sheet detachment to separate the vortices coming from one side of the disc into separate sheets.
It does not use entrainment, nor rediscretisation to keep the vortices at equally spaced arc lengths along the sheet.
It uses a coalescing algorithm to control the number of vortices.
Coalescing
To keep down the number of vortices being tracked, model 2 tries, at each time step, to coalesce pairs of vortices that
have come very close to each other. This is done as follows:
At each time step the model finds, for each vortex, the nearest neighbouring vortex. If two vortices are each other's
nearest neighbours then they are called 'mutually nearest neighbours', and such a pair are considered for possible
coalescing into one.
Such a pair of mutually nearest neighbours are coalesced if their separation is less than Sc, where Sc is a coalescing
separation that depends on the distance D from the two vortices to the disc surface. Sc is given by:
Sc = .R if D<=2R
Sc = .R.(D/2R)
2
if D>2R
where R is the disc radius and is the coalescing threshold specified by the user. The threshold used depends on
whether the two vortices are of the same or opposite signs.
These formulae for Sc mean that the user's data sets, in disc radius units, the coalescing separation for vortices that
are within 2 disc radii of the disc surface, and for vortices further away the coalescing separation increases
according to the square of the distance from the disc surface. The aim of this is to restrict coalescing near to the disc
but encourage it once the vortices have convected significantly away from the disc.
If the two vortices are coalesced then they are replaced by one vortex whose strength is the sum of their signed
strengths and which is placed at their centroid of absolute vorticity.
Data and Results
Data
The following data needs setting for the vortex tracking models. See also the data that is common to all the time domain
VIV models.
Maximum Number of Vortices Logged (per side of the line)
This controls the maximum number of vortices that will be displayed and logged, for each side of the line. Note that this
setting only affects the display of vortices and does not affect the calculation itself in any way. Its purpose is only to
allow you to control the size of the log file (and hence the simulation file) and to control the speed of drawing the 3D
view. You can set the maximum number of vortices to one of:
0 is the default value, meaning 'log and draw no vortices'. The log file and simulation file are then as small as
possible and the replay as fast as possible. However the drawback of doing this is that you will not see any vortices
on the 3D view.
'~', meaning 'log and draw all vortices'. The vortex tracking example uses this setting so that the vortices can be
observed. There are typically up to several hundred vortices generated per node, and each vortex needs to log its
position and strength so that it can be drawn on the 3D view. So if all vortices are logged then the log file and
w

400
simulation file can therefore be quite large. Also the replay might be slower because many vortices must be drawn
for each frame of the replay.
An intermediate value, 30 say, allows you to see the youngest 30 vortices per side of the line. Note that if you do this
then as new vortices are generated at the separation points you will see the oldest vortices (typically now
downstream) disappear from view. They have not been destroyed and will still be in the calculation, but their
position and strength is no longer available to the 3D view.
Model Parameters
If the Default option is chosen then appropriate default values for the model parameters are used. Alternatively the
Specified option can be selected which gives you complete control over the model parameters.
Warning: The Specified option has been provided principally to allow users the option of calibrating the model
against other experimental results. If you are not doing this then we strongly recommend that you use
the Default parameters.
Vortex Smear Factor
This setting controls the degree to which vortices are smeared. The original Sarpkaya and Shoaff model used point
vortices, i.e. the vorticity was concentrated at a single point. This is what arises in the formal mathematical solution of
the inviscid Navier Stokes equations (i.e. those ignoring fluid viscosity) but it means that each vortex is a singularity,
since the vorticity density at the point itself is actually infinity. In reality viscosity in the fluid spreads the vorticity to
some extent, and we have found that the model is more stable if the vortices are smeared to reflect this.
The smear factor is nondimensional. Very small values make each vortex more concentrated into a single point,
whereas larger values spread the vorticity in the vortex over a region surrounding the point. The default value is 0.1 and
in our experience this gives reasonable performance. The smear factor should not be set too high, since that would be
unrealistic. OrcaFlex warns if the value is more than 0.2.
Creation Clearance
This is a nondimensional value that is only used by model 2. At each time step the model creates two new vortices, one
at each of the two separation points. This data controls how close to the disc surface these newlycreated vortices are
placed. They are placed at the separation angle determined by the boundary layer model and at a distance .R from the
disc surface, where is the specified creation clearance and R is the disc radius (= half the line outer diameter).
The Creation Clearance can also be set to '~', in which case the new vortices are placed using the same algorithm as in
model 1. This sets the factor to the value that results in the tangential velocity contribution of the new vortex at the
separation point just cancelling out the previous tangential velocity at that point.
Coalesce Same, Coalesce Opposite
These are nondimensional thresholds that are only used for coalescing in model 2. They control how close to each other
two vortices have to be before they are allowed to be coalesced into one combined vortex. For details, see Coalescing.
There are separate threshold values depending on whether the two vortices have equal or opposite signs of vorticity. So
if one of the two vortices is clockwise and the other is anticlockwise then the opposite sign threshold will be used,
whereas if they are both clockwise or both anticlockwise then the same sign threshold will be used.
Reducing the thresholds makes the model coalesce vortices less often, so the model will have to keep track of more
vortices and the simulation will therefore be slower. Conversely, increasing the thresholds makes the model coalesce
more readily, so fewer vortices need to be tracked and the simulation is faster, but less accurate.
Our experience so far is that the default values of 0.04 for both thresholds gives a reasonable balance between
performance and accuracy. If the mass ratio (= mass of line / mass of water displaced) is low then the fluid forces are
more significant, and in these cases lower coalescing thresholds may be needed so that the fluid behaviour is more
accurately modelled.
Vortex Decay Constant, Vortex Decay Threshold 1, Vortex Decay Threshold 2
These data items set the rate of vortex strength decay in both vortex tracking models. The decay model is described
below. It is as in Sarpkaya and Shoaff's report (page 79) and the default values for this data are as given in that report.
w
401
We therefore recommend that the default values be used unless you wish to experiment with other values, for example
to calibrate the model.
Vortices are created at the separation points, with an initial vortex strength determined by the tangential velocity at the
separation point. The strength of each vortex then decays at a rate that depends on how far the vortex is away from the
centre of the disc, in the relative flow direction.
Let R be the disc radius (= half the line outer diameter) and D be the distance, measured in the relative flow direction
from the centre of the line to the vortex. In model 1, at each variable time step the vortex strength is scaled by a factor
that depends on D as follows:
If D <= DecayThreshold1*R then = (1DecayConstant)
If D >= DecayThreshold2*R then = 1
If DecayThreshold1*R < D < DecayThreshold2*R then varies linearly with D, from (1DecayConstant) to 1.
The effect of this is that while the vortex is less than DecayThreshold1 radii downstream then the vortex loses
DecayConstant of its strength (e.g. DecayConstant=0.01 means 1% decay) per variable time step. While the vortex is
between DecayThreshold1 and DecayThreshold2 radii downstream its rate of decay falls linearly (as a function of D) to
zero. And when the vortex is more than DecayThreshold2 radii downstream then there is no decay.
Clearly DecayConstant must be in the range 0 to 1, and DecayThreshold1 must be less than DecayThreshold2. Note that
DecayThreshold1 and DecayThreshold2 can be set to Infinity. If either of them is Infinity then = 1DecayConstant
always, so the vortices always lose DecayConstant of their strength per variable time step.
The same decay model is used in model 2, except that the factor is adjusted to allow for the fact that model 2 uses the
outer time step instead of the variable time step used in model 1. The adjustment results in the same rate of decay per
unit time.
Drag Coefficients
The vortex tracking model includes the drag effects in both the transverse and inline directions, but not in the axial
direction. When the vortex tracking model is used, OrcaFlex therefore suppresses the components of the usual Morison
drag force in the transverse and inline directions, but includes the component in the axial direction. The drag
coefficients for the normal directions are therefore not used, but the axial drag coefficient is used.
Results
The Vortex Force is available as line force results variables. This reports the total lift and drag force. Note that this is the
sum of the force generated by the vortex tracking model, which is in the inline and transverse directions and already
includes the drag force in those directions, plus the standard Morison drag force in the axial direction.
The stagnation and separation points are available as line angle results variables.
9.2.3 VIV Drawing
With the timedomain VIV models you can control how various aspects of VIV are drawn on the 3D view, by setting data
on the VIV Drawing page on the line data form.
Arc Length Intervals
You can control which nodes have VIV detail drawn, by specifying one or more Arc Length Intervals. An arc length
interval specifies a contiguous length of line From one specified arc length To another. The VIV details are drawn for all
nodes whose arc lengths fall in any one of the specified intervals. For convenience '~' in the From column means End A
of the line, and '~' in the To column means End B.
For example, to view the detail for one node only, specify 1 arc length interval and set both its From and To values equal
to the arc length of that node. Whereas to view the detail for the whole line specify 1 arc length interval and set both its
From and To values equal to '~'.
What is Drawn
The following VIV details are drawn for all nodes whose arc lengths fall in any one of the specified arc length intervals.
w

402
For all the time domain VIV models, the vortex force is drawn as a line radiating from the disc centre in the direction of
the vortex force. The line length is scaled so that a vortex force equal to the standard Morison drag force with Cd=1 in a
relative velocity of 1m/s, is represented by a line 1 disc radius long (i.e. just reaching the edge of the disc).
For the vortex tracking models only, and only if the maximum number of vortices logged is set greater than zero, then
the following extra details are drawn.
The node is drawn as a disc (even if you have not specified nodes drawn as discs) and the stagnation and separation
points are drawn on the edge of the disc.
The positive and negative vortices are drawn as circles whose areas are proportional to the vortex strengths. The
constant of proportionality can be controlled by setting Area per Unit Strength.
The centrelines of the positive and negative vortex sheets, and the wake line are drawn.
Note: The vortices and sheet centre-lines drawn are limited by the specified maximum number of vortices
logged.
For all these items you can control the pen used for drawing. With the vortex tracking models, for example, this allows
you to suppress (by setting the pen style to null) or downplay (by choosing a suitable colour) individual aspects of the
detail.

Orcaflex Tutorial

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Orcaflex Tutorial

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

w

You might also like